PUB.

182
SAILING DIRECTIONS
(ENROUTE)
★

NORTH AND WEST COASTS OF

NORWAY
★

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Springfield, Virginia

© COPYRIGHT 2022 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

2022

FIFTEENTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800
Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
II

Preface NGA Maritime—Contact Information

Pub. 182, Sailing Directions (Enroute) North and West
0.0
E-mail MarHelp@nga.mil
Coasts of Norway, Fifteenth Edition, 2022, is issued for use in
conjunction with Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Maritime Quality
Guide) Arctic Ocean. Companion volumes are Pubs. 181 and Feedback System https://marhelp.nga.mil
183. (MQFS)
Digital Nautical Charts 21 and 22 provide electronic chart
0.0

coverage for the area covered by this publication. Maritime Safety Office
This publication has been corrected to 23 April 2022, includ-
0.0
National Geospatial-Intelligence
ing Notice to Mariners No. 17 of 2022. Subsequent updates Agency
Mailing address
have corrected this publication to 28 January 2023 including Mail Stop N64-SFH
Notice to Mariners No. 4 of 2023. 7500 Geoint Drive
Springfield VA 22150-7500
Explanatory Remarks
New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the
0.0

Sailing Directions are published by the National Geospatial-

0.0
date of publication shown above. Important information to
Intelligence Agency (NGA) under the authority of Department amend material in the publication is available is updated as
of Defense Directive 5105.60, dated 29 July 2009, and pursu- needed and available as a downloadable corrected publication
ant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10, Chapter from the NGA Maritime Domain web site.
22, Section 451 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing Directions,
covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the world, provide
information that cannot be shown graphically on nautical NGA Maritime Safety Office Web Site
charts and is not readily available elsewhere.
https://msi.nga.mil
Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and
0.0

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence 0.0Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same
Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a
called “Sectors.” course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of
Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees
0.0
origin along a track having the identical meridional angle as
from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General the designated course. Vessels following the directives must
bearings are expressed by the initial letters of the points of the allow for every influence tending to cause deviation from such
compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb track, and navigate so that the designated course is
endings have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are continuously being made good.
intended, degrees are used. 0.0Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward
Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this
0.0
which currents set.
publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital 0.0Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1
Nautical Chart (DNC). minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed
Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,
0.0
in meters, or tenths of miles.
additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk, 0.0Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally
as follows: those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in paren-
theses following another name are alternate names that may
appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted
NGA Maritime—Contact Information
only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,
Maritime Operations Desk such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to
specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the
Toll free 1-800-362-6289 interest of typographical simplicity.
0.0Wherever possible, names used on NGA charts and in NGA
Commercial 571-557-5455 publications are in the form approved by the United States
Board on Geographic Names (BGN). Generally, local official
DSN 547-5455 spellings are used for those features entirely within a single
sovereignty, names of countries and those features which are
E-mail navsafety@nga.mil
common to two or more countries or which lie beyond a single
Maritime Safety Office sovereignty may carry Board-approved conventional spellings
(i.e., names in common English language usage). When alter-
DNC web site https://dnc.nga.mil nate names would be of value to the user, they may be shown
for information purposes within parentheses. Important indi-
Maritime Domain vidual name changes are made to all revised charts as the op-
https://msi.nga.mil
web site portunity permits.
0.0Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily re-

Pub. 182
 III

flect recognition of the political status of an area by the United
States Government.
0.0BGN approved names may be found at https://
geonames.nga.mil/geonames/GNSHome/welcome.html.
conditions, such as the user’s geolocation and service provider.
Mariners are advised to consult their communications equip-
ment and service provider manuals for guidance.
Time.—Time is normally expressed as local time unless
0.0

0.0Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference specifically designated as Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters. Time Zone.—The Time Zone description(s), as well as in-
0.0

0.0Internet Links.—This publication provides Internet links to
web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, includ-
ing but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hy-
drographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.
NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the
accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of these
web sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and
omissions in the contents of these web sites.
0.0International Ship and Port Facility Security (ISPS)
formation concerning the use of Daylight Savings Time, are in-
cluded. The World Time Zone Chart is available on the Inter-
net at the web site given below.
Standard Time Zone of the World Chart
https://www.cia.gov/maps/world-regional
U.S. Maritime Advisory System.—The U.S. Maritime
0.0

Code.—The ISPS Code is a comprehensive set of measures to
enhance the security of ships and port facilities developed in
response to the perceived threats to ships and port facilities in
the wake of the 9/11 attacks in the United States. Information
on the ISPS Code can be found at the International Maritime
Organization web site:
International Maritime Organization Home Page
http://www.imo.org
0.0Lights and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not
described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light
Lists should be consulted for complete information.
0.0National Ocean Claims.—Information on national ocean
claims and maritime boundary disputes, which have been com-
piled from the best available sources, is provided solely in the
interest of the navigational safety of shipping and in no way
constitutes legal recognition by the United States. These non-
recognized claims and requirements may include, but are not
limited to:
1. A requirement by a state for advance permission or
Advisory System is a streamlined inter-agency approach to
identifying and promulgating maritime security threats. The
system replaces Special Warnings to Mariners (State
Department), MARAD Advisories (Maritime Administration),
and Marine Safety Information Bulletins (U.S. Coast Guard)
and consists of the following items:
1. U.S. Maritime Alert—Provides basic information
(location, incident, type, date/time) on reported maritime
security threats to U.S. maritime industry interests. U.S.
Maritime alerts do not contain policy or recommendations
for specific courses of information.
2. U.S. Maritime Advisory—Provides more detailed
information, when appropriate, through a “whole-of-gov-
ernment” response to an identified maritime threat.
Maritime Administration (MARAD)—U.S.
Maritime Advisory System
https://www.marad.dot.gov/environment-and-safety/
office-of-security/msci
Winds.—Wind directions are the true directions from which
0.0

notification for innocent passage of warships in the territorial winds blow.

sea.
2. Straight baseline, internal waters, or historic waters Reference List
claims.
3. The establishment of a security zone, where a state The principal sources examined in the preparation of this
0.0

claims to control activity beyond its territorial sea for securi- publication were:
ty reasons unrelated to that state’s police powers in its terri- British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.
0.0

tory, including its territorial sea. Norwegian Sailing Directions.

0.0

0.0Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids and ra- Various port handbooks.
0.0

dio weather services are not described in detail. Publication Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and
0.0

No. 117 Radio Navigational Aids and NOAA Publication, Se- various shipping companies.
lected Worldwide Marine Weather Broadcasts, should be con- Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and docu-
0.0

sulted. ments.
0.0Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other docu-
0.0

charts and are expressed in meters. ments in possession of the Agency.

0.0Telephone and Facsimile Numbers.—Within this publica- Internet web sites, as follows:
0.0

tion, the international telephone and facsimile numbers provid- 0.0 1. Arctic Pictures of Hornsund, Spitsbergen
ed as contact information contain the minimum digits 0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)
necessary to dial. Please note that these contact numbers do not 0.0 http://www.bergheims.com/hornsund
include additional digits or special characters, such as (0) or 0.0 2. Bergen City and Port Guide
(+), which may be required when dialing. The necessity of 0.0 http://www.bergenport.com
such digits and characters depend upon numerous factors and 0.0 3. Le Club de Voyageurs

Pub. 182
IV

0.0 (Paul Kerrien: paul.kerrien@laposte.net) 0.0 http://www.geo.uni.torun.pl

0.0 http://expresscotier.free.fr 0.0 10. Karmsund Havnevesen Informerer (Eirik Hustvedt)
0.0 4. The Coast Route, Norge 0.0 http://www.karmsund-havn.no
0.0 http://www.rv17.no 0.0 11. Nordic Shipping Agency Homepage
0.0 5. Eurofishsales Europewide Fishing Port Index 0.0 http://www.ndic.no
0.0 http://www.eurofishsales.com 0.0 12. Port Focus Homepage (Ports/Harbors/Marinas
0.0 6. Haugesund City and Port Guide 0.0 Worldwide)
0.0 http://www.haugesund.com 0.0 http://www.portfocus.com
0.0 7. Haugesund Home Page 0.0 13. The Svalbard Pages
0.0 http://www.haugesund.net 0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)
0.0 8. Haugesund (Norway) Regional Home Page 0.0 http:/www.svalbard.com
0.0 http://www.haugalandet.net 0.0 14. Uniwersytet Mikolaja Kopernika
0.0 9. Instytut Geografii UMK 0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)
0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl) 0.0 http://www.uni.torun.pl

Date of Change: 28 January 2023

Notice to Mariners: 4/2023
Sector Paragraphs
Sector 1 Paragraphs 1.16, 1.29, 1.35, 1.47, and 1.49
Sector 2 Paragraphs 2.5, 2.35, and 2.39
Sector 3 Paragraphs 3.10, 3.37, 3.45, 3.51, and 3.57
Sector 4 Paragraphs 4.24, 4.25, and 4.31
Sector 5 Paragraphs 5.2, 5.7, 5.16, 5.24, 5.31, 5.33, 5.41, 5.48, 5.54, and 5.57
Sector 6 Paragraphs 6.13, 6.17, 6.37, 6.44, 6.55, 6.69, 6.70, 6.71, 6.72, 6.74, 6.75, 6.77, and 6.79
Sector 7 Paragraphs 7.42, 7.45, 7.51, 7.52, and 7.68
Sector 8 Paragraphs 8.32, 8.34, 8.40, 8.43, 8.55, and 8.62
Sector 9 Paragraphs 9.26 and 9.35
Sector 10 Paragraph 10.4
Sector 11 Paragraphs 11.16 and 11.19

Date of Change: 30 July 2022

Notice to Mariners: 31/2022
Sector Paragraphs
Sector 1 Paragraphs 1.16, 1.29, 1.37, 1.47, and 1.49
Sector 2 Paragraph 2.5
Sector 3 Paragraphs 3.10, 3.37, 3.45, and 3.48
Sector 4 Paragraphs 4.15, 4.24, and 4.31
Sector 5 Paragraphs 5.7, 5.16, and 5.21
Sector 7 Paragraph 7.16
Sector 8 Paragraph 8.62
Sector 9 Paragraph 9.19

Pub. 182
 V

0.0 SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 182

Pub. 182
 Conversion Tables
Feet to Meters
Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74
10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79
20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84
30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89
40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93
50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98
60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03
70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08
80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13
90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

Fathoms to Meters
Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46
10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75
20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03
30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32
40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61
50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90
60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19
70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47
80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76
90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

Meters to Feet
Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53
10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34
20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14
30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95
40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76
50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57
60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38
70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19
80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99
90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

Meters to Fathoms
Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92
10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39
20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86
30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33
40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79
50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26
60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73
70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20
80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67
90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13

VI Pub. 182
 Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units
°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)
cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)
cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars
dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz
FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)
gt gross tons nrt net registered tons
kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions
N north S south
NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest
NE northeast SW southwest
ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest
E east W west
ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest
SE southeast NW northwest
SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types
LASH Lighter Aboard Ship Ro-Ro Roll-on Roll-off
LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier
LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier
OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil VLOC Very Large Ore Carrier
Lo-Lo Lift-on Lift-off FSO Floating Storage and Offloading
Vessels (System)
NGL Natural Gas Liquids

Time
ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time
ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level
MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs
HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps
LW low water MHWS mean high water springs
MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps
MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs
HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide
HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide
LWS low water springs
LWN low water neaps

Communications
D/F direction finder MF medium frequency
R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency
GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency
LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation
LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SBM Single Buoy Mooring
NAVSAT Navigation Satellite SPM Single Point Mooring
ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System TSS Traffic Separation Scheme
CBM Conventional Buoy Mooring System VTC Vessel Traffic Center
MBM Multi-Buoy Mooring SysteM VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

Pub. 182 VII

VIII

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

AIS Automatic Identification System MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
Code
COLREGS Collision Regulations No./Nos. Number/Numbers
IALA International Association of Lighthouse PA Position approximate
Authorities PD Position doubtful
IHO International Hydrographic Organization Pub. Publication
IMO International Maritime Organization SOLAS International Convention for
Safety of Life at Sea
IMDG Intermational Maritime Dangerous Goods (Code)
LOA length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
UKC Under keel clearance ISPS International Ship and Port facility
Security

Pub. 182
 Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Sector 1
Sector 1—Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2
Sector 2—Norway—Feistein to Geitungane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Sector 3
Sector 3—Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Sector 4
Sector 4—Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Sector 5
Sector 5—Norway—Fedje to Alesund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Sector 6
Sector 6—Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Sector 7
Sector 7—Norway—Trondheim to Bodo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Sector 8
Sector 8—Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Sector
Sector 9—Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Sector 10
Sector 10—Jan Mayen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Sector 11
Sector 11—Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Index—Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Pub. IX
 1.
Sector 1—Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev

1.0 Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
Pub. 182

1

SECTOR 1
NORWAY—LINDESNES TO JAERENS REV
Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway be
1.0
tween Lindesnes, the S point on the Norwegian coast and Jaer-
ens Rev, a point approximately 4.6 miles S of Feistein Light.
General Remarks
1.1 General.—The SW coast of Norway between
Lindesnes, the S mainland point of the country, and Jaerens
Rev trends in a general NW direction for about 68 miles. Sev-
eral large fjords, and numerous small ones branching in all di-
rections, indent the coast. Close-lying islands, islets, and rocks
front part of this coastal stretch, particularly the section be-
tween Lindesnes and Steinodden, the vicinity of Listafjorden,
and near Egersund. This part of the coast, although high in
places, is predominately lower than the coast to the N.
1.1It includes the two lowland regions of Lista and Jaeren,
which are unlike any other part of the Norwegian coast. Steep,
high mountains back the coastal hills and plains. The fjords of-
fer numerous well-protected anchorages and harbors.
Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds on the W and S
coasts of Norway reflect the average pressure distribution and
its seasonal changes. With the shift from high pressure in win-
ter to low pressure in summer, the winds on the W coast
change from S in winter to N in summer. However, the prevail-
ing winds only blow from a N or S direction not more than 40
per cent of the time. The usual situation is one of variable
winds induced by passing cyclones.
1.1Because of land and sea breezes, and topographical effects,
the wind in the fjords and along the coast is usually different
from that in the open sea. Also, because of the mountainous na-
ture of the coast, any wind blowing from a direction between S
and WSW is deflected and becomes S wind, and any wind
blowing between NW and N is deflected and becomes a N
wind.
1.1The speed of the wind increases outward from the coast to a
distance of 150 miles at times.
1.1Along the coast, when the winds are fresh or strong, most of-
ten there is turbulence; when the coast is swept by violent
winds and they penetrate the fjords, they become turbulent.
1.1There are frequent, strong downward currents, usually from
the E or SE, close to the coast, in the vicinity of 60° N.
1.1 A steep gradient may extend as much as 150 miles seaward
from the coast. When a steep gradient develops along the W
coast, strong S winds are produced; when deep depressions are
on a NE track, moving between the British Isles and Iceland,
gale winds frequently occur. Northwest gales occur occasion
ally on the W coast when the pressure falls over Scandinavia.
1.1In winter, gales and storms are common on both the S and W
coasts. In spring, there are more gales and storms on the W and
SW coasts then on the S coast. As summer approaches, the
gales decrease in frequency. The strength of the winds decreas-
es in summer, although gales are not unknown, particularly on
the W coast.
1.1Off the coast and in the fjords between Lindesnes and Jaer-
3
ens Rev, tidal currents are minimal. Small currents are found in
the narrow channels of the fjords, such as in Skudenesfjorden,
but little is known about these currents.
1.1The highest frequency of sea and swell is from the W quad-
rant. Observations along the exposed coast during winter,
showed that 65 per cent of the sea waves were less than 1.5m in
height and 9 per cent of the waves observed were greater than
3.6m in height. However, 20 per cent of the recorded observa
tions on swell were recorded to exceed 3.6m in height and at
times, the heights reach greater than 7.6m.
1.1During summer, the weakening of the “Icelandic Low” and
the decrease in wind velocities causes a decrease in swell, and,
most often, a decrease in sea on the S and W coasts of Norway.
Only about 6 per cent of the total observations taken along the
exposed portions showed a swell wave height in excess of
3.6m; 68 per cent showed a swell wave height of less than 1.8m
in height. Observations with regard to sea showed that 83 per-
cent of the total waves observed were less than 1.5m in height
and that 4 per cent were greater than 3.6m in height.
1.1Sea breezes are frequent along the entire coast in summer.
Wind speeds increase slightly in autumn and gales become
more frequent, especially along the exposed coast.
1.1Fog is the main cause of poor visibility. It is most frequent
over the sea in summer and most frequent in the upper fjords
and over land in winter. Occasionally, sea fog occurs in winter
when air lying over a warm water surface is blown over colder
water. However, the most frequent fog in winter is radiation
fog. Radiation fog is a nighttime occurrence. It is produced
when the land gives up its heat and becomes cooler. The cooler
land cools the air immediately above it. This causes a tempera
ture inversion to form, the temperature increasing with height
and fog forms. Usually radiation fog occurs at the heads of
deep fjords when there is severe frost inland and cold winds
blow into the open fjords.
1.1Another form of fog, which particularly affects the upper
reaches of fjords, is “frost smoke.” This occurs during spells of
severe frost. It may be expected if the wind is light and from an
offshore direction and if skies are clear or nearly so over land.
1.1In spring, fog decreases generally, as radiation fog becomes
less likely because of the gradual warming of the land. It in-
creases only at Skudenes, where sea fog of the warm season in-
creases in frequency. Poor visibility is least common in
summer over the land area of this region. However, sea fog is
not uncommon during the early part of the summer along and
over the coast.
1.1In general, autumn is the season when fog is least common
on the coast. Over land its frequency increases towards the ap-
proach of winter.
1.1The climate of SW Norway is mild in comparison to regions
of equal distance from the Equator. The maritime influence,
which is responsible for the warm winters, is responsible for
the warm summers as well. The steady run of the warm water
of the North Atlantic Drift, by way of the passage between the
Shetland Islands, the Faeroe Islands, and the English Channel,
Pub. 182
4 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
into the North Sea and the Norwegian Sea, results in the water
of these seas in January being at least 20°C warmer than in oth-
er areas of the same latitude.
1.1During all seasons, migratory low pressure centers, accom
panied by repeated intrusions of maritime polar air produce
overcast skies, and warm temperatures.
1.1Ice.—Ice in this area offers no hindrance to navigation and is
present only in the upper reaches of the fjords along the coast.
Floating ice is met in early spring, when small masses may
drift out of Oslofjorden and Kattegat, and occasionally from
some of the larger fjords to the W and N of Lindesnes.
1.1Tides—Currents.—The tidal current just offshore N from
Jaeren to the vicinity of Korsfjorden flood to the N, and begin
about 5 to 6 hours after HW at Bergen and ebb to the S, and be-
gin about 30 minutes to 1 hour before HW at Bergen. From the
vicinity of Korsfjorden to approximately 60°51'N, the flood
begins about 6 hours after HW at Bergen, and sets to the E; the
ebb begins about the time of HW at Bergen and sets to the W.
1.1Surface currents in the fjords are predominantly tidal. They
set inward on the flood and seaward on the ebb, except during
May and June. During these months, increased runoff from
melting snow and ice cause the surface currents to flow almost
continually seaward. The depths of the surface currents aver
age 3.6 to 5.5m, though they may vary from 0.91 to 18.3m at
times. Current speeds are strongest at the surface, decreasing
with depth. An intermediate current sets into the fjords usually
between 9.4 and 18.3m. Generally, the water below 73m either
has a very weak seaward set or is stagnant, and is renewed only
by a major meteorological disturbance.
1.1Wind may alter the tidal currents in the fjords. Onshore
winds may cause a rise in the water level with a corresponding
increase in the velocity and duration of incoming currents.
When the winds cease, currents flow in the opposite direction
until equilibrium is established. Outflowing currents along the
sides of the fjords may occur when strong winds blow onshore
for a prolonged period. Offshore winds may have an opposite
effect on the water level and currents.
1.1The term “tidal current” means the resultant of all water
movements; namely, ocean currents, tidal currents, wind-driv-
en currents, and outflow of water from rivers, fjords, and em-
bankments.
1.1The tidal current of this section is subject to great variations.
West of Lindesnes, where the constant ocean current is weaker,
the wind has more effect, and the current is less regular than on
the SE coast between Kristiansand and Oslofjorden.
1.1A tidal current setting W and N is, however, prevalent espe-
cially in summer. However, with continuous N and W winds
the current may set S and E for perhaps a week continuously.
Near the coast the direction of the current may be toward the
land. The current setting N off Jaeren may attain a velocity of
about 2 knots.
1.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island.
1.1The VTS is designed to promote safe and efficient naviga-
tion and to protect the marine environment. The VTS will mon-
itor traffic, exchange information, and interact with vessels and
government agencies. It will also coordinate, on a daily basis,
Pub. 182
tug boat preparations in northern Norway. The VTS also moni-
tors the seaward approaches to Melkoya, Hammerfest, Bell-
sund, and Van Mijenfjord on Svalbard.
NOR VTS cooperates in close coordination with the Norwe-
1.1
gian Coastal Administration’s Department for Emergency Re-
sponse; the Norwegian Armed Forces; the Joint Rescue
Coordination Center, North Norway and South Norway; and
coastal radio stations. All vessels entering and proceeding in
the NOR VTS area of operation are strongly urged to follow
the recommendations, guidance, and advice provided by NOR
VTS.
NOR VTS—Contact Information
Call sign NOR VTS
VHF VHF channel 16
Telephone 47-78-989-898
Facsimile 47-78-989-899
E-mail nor.vts@kystverket.no
1.1All tankers, all vessels exceeding 5,000 gt and all ocean-go-
ing tugs in transit outside Norwegian territorial waters (12
miles off the baseline) are requested to report the following in-
formation to NOR VTS upon entering the Norwegian Econom-
ic Zone (NEZ):
1. Vessel name.
2. IMO Number.
3. Primary telephone number.
4. Primary facsimile number.
5. E-mail address.
6. Primary INMARSAT-C number.
7. Cargo type, including UN reference number(s) (IM-
DG Code).
8. Amount of cargo (metric tons).
9. Amount of bunker oil (metric tons).
10. Bunker oil (UN reference number).
11. Number of crew.
12. Number of passengers.
13. Departure port.
14. Departure time in UTC (6 digits—ddhhhh).
15. Arrival port.
16. ETA in UTC (6 digits—ddhhhh).
1.1The VTS will forward information of relevance for safe tran-
sit through the VTS coverage area. Vessels which are damaged
or receive damage that can affect safe navigation must immedi-
ately report this information to the VTS.
1.1Communication with the VTS can take place via any Norwe-
gian coast radio station by requesting a VHF connection to
NOR VTS.
1.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
(TSS) in Norwegian waters, including those off Egersund, Far-
sund, and Lillesand, see Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas.
1.1Caution.—Off the coast of Norway, various types of ships
and small craft used in the development of oil and gas fields
may be encountered.
1.1An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme lies in the ap-
proach to Risavika SW of Feistein and may best be seen on the
 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field Complex
1.1
chart.
Norwegian authorities recommend that tankers of 40,000
1.1
dwt and over, when navigating off the coast of Norway, should
keep to seaward of a line joining the following positions:
a. 57°46.2'N, 7°00.0'E, 13 miles from Lindesnes Light.
b. 57°54.3'N, 6°21.5'E.
c. 58°16.1'N, 5°35.7'E.
d. 58°30.8'N, 5°12.2'E.
e. 58°32.9'N, 4°57.1'E.
f. 59°10.7'N, 4°27.5'E.
g. 60°49.2'N, 4°08.1'E.
By keeping seaward of this line, tankers will maintain a dis-
1.1
tance of 12 to 20 miles from the shore.
Pilotage Districts.—The entire coast of Norway is divided
1.1
into three Pilotage Districts; pilotage is controlled from the
three VTS Centers, as follows:
1. Horten—Covers the S coast from the Swedish border
leading W to Egersund (58°27'N,. 6°00'E.).
2. Kvitsoy—Covers the W coast from Egersund leading
N to the parallel of 65°08'N. At Kvitsoy, pilots can be ar-
ranged to board at the following positions:
a. Feistein (58°51.0'N., 5°30.3'E.).
b. Skudenesfjorden West (59°02.0'N., 5°10.0'E.)—Via
helicopter and only by prior arrangement for vessels over
30,000 tons carrying hazardous or polluting cargo.
c. Skudenesfjorden (59°06.5'N., 5°27.0'E.).
d. Karmsundet (59°13.1'N., 5°21.0'E.).
3. Lodingen—Covers the W and N coasts of Norway be-
tween the parallel of 65°08'N and the Russian border.
5
The VTS Centers can be contacted 24 hours on VHF chan-
1.1
nels 18 and 19.
Off-lying Dangers
1.2 Along the W coast of Norway, there are several sec-
tions within which unusually rough seas often prevail. Extreme
sea conditions and breaking surf have been observed, often in
connection with the currents, in the vicinity of these areas
These sections, known as Dangerous Wave Areas, are de-
scribed below, as follows:
1. Viking Bank (60°35'N., 2°30'E.).
2. Outer part of Sognesjoen—The area between Hol-
mengra (60°50.6”N., 4°39.0'E.) and Kvereknapp, 8.5 miles
NNE, contains many shallow areas. When the ebb current
from Sognefjorden passes over the area and meets wind and
waves from the opposite direction, choppy seas form. Tum-
bling breakers have also been observed.
3. Buefjorden (61°15'N., 4°42'E.)—Along the route
from Gasvaerosen (61°12.0'N., 4°42.5'E.) through Bue-
fjorden to Geita Light (61°16.2'N., 4°48.8'E.), rough seas oc-
cur when the winds are from the W or NW. If there is also an
ebb current at the same time, a choppy ground swell occurs
and tumbling breakers have been observed.
4. Stattlandett (62°12'N., 5°00'E.)—An exposed and
dangerous area where winds from SW to N raise heavy seas.
The ebb current, running at a rate of 2 to 4 knots, shortens
the swell and causes heavy tumbling seas. The waters around
Haugsholmen (62°11'N., 5°23'E.) and Stalrevet (62°13'N.,
Pub. 182
6 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev

1.1 Reused with permission from Norwegian Petroleum (https://www.norskpetroleum.no)

1.1 Norwegian Offshore Oil and Gas Field

5°11'E.) are known as particularly rough areas. many, and SW to England and may best be seen on the chart.
Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field (56°33'N., 3°13'E.) is situated about Eldfisk and West Edofisk fields are located within 11 miles
1.2

150 miles SW of Lindesnes Light. A complex of production
platforms, gas and oil pipelines, and tanker-loading systems is
located in the field. The single point mooring (SPM) tanker-
loading systems are generally removed when the field-to-shore
of the Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field. They consist of several pro-
duction platforms, some of which are equipped with aeronauti-
cal radiobeacons and racons.
Hod Field, Valhall Field, and Gyda Field lie 23 miles SSE,
1.2

pipelines are operating normally, but installations remain on the 17 miles SSE, and 21 miles N, respectively, of Ekofisk Oil and
sea bed. Pipelines extend N to the Statpipe System, SE to Ger- Gas Field.

Pub. 182
 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 7

Varg Field, with a well head platform standing in position

1.2

58°05'N, 1°54'E, was shut down in 2016. Decommissioning is

expected to be completed by the end of 2021.
Glitne Oil Field, with a well head situated in position
1.2

58°41.6'N, 1°40.4'E, was shut down in 2013.

A wreck is located in position 58°41.2'N, 1°40.1'E.
1.2

Ula Gas Field (57°06'N., 2°51'E.) is situated about 36 miles

1.2

NNW of Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field and consists of three plat-
forms connected by bridges.
Statpipe Platform No. 1 (58°11'N., 2°28'E.) is situated
1.2

about 103 miles SW of Feistein and equipped with a racon.

Submarine gas pipelines extend N and S to other fields and NE
to the coast.
Sleipner Gas Field (58°21'N., 1°54'E.) lies 23 miles NW of
1.2

the platform.
For oil and gas fields N of the above, see Sectors 2 through 6.
1.2

For oil and gas fields NW of the above, see Pub. 192, Sailing
1.2

Directions (Enroute) North Sea.

Tambar Oil Field (56°58'N., 2°57'E.) lies 8.5 miles SSE of
1.2

Ula Field, where a lighted platform is located above the Gyda

and Ula gas line.
For more information on North Sea petroleum operations
1.2

visit the Norwegian Petroleum web site.

Norwegian Petroleum
https://www.norskpetroleum.no

Lindesnes to Steinodden
1.3 The coast line from Lindesnes to Steinodden mea-
sures about 18 miles and runs in a NW direction. Steinodden is
on the W extremity of the peninsula of Lista. The coast varies
in height, is mostly rocky, and contains trees and several small
beaches.
1.3Gronsfjorden, between the peninsula of Spangereid and the
mainland W, has steep and rugged shores. A group of rocky is- 1.3 Lindesnes Light
lands separates the entrance of the fjord from the entrance of
Rosfjorden. The shores of the latter are steep, rising to about Varnes.
152m. Between the entrance to Rosfjorden and Farsund for
about 6 miles WNW, there are many islands. The coast is in- 1.4 Lindesnes (57°59'N., 7°03'E.) is the S point on the
dented and rocky, but not steep. Norwegian peninsula. An important landfall, it extends SW
1.3The port of Farsund is at the entrance of Lyngdalsfjordenen. from the mainland and is on the S extremity of the rocky and
This fjord and its branch, Oftefjorden, penetrate deeply inland. forested peninsula of the Spangereid peninsula. It is about 40m
Their steep, and generally forested, shores rise to a height of high and lies on red, rugged, and uneven land. A light is shown
about 183m. from a tower.
1.3The peninsula of Lista lies W of Farsund. In the SW part, it Neskletten and Lamekletten, two small banks within 1.5
1.4

is low-lying, but in the NE part it rises to heights of about
244m. There are several patches of marshland and extensive ar-
eas of farmland in the SW part.
1.3Aspect.—The rounded summit of Homsknipen, 477m high,
miles S and 2 miles WSW, respectively, of Lindesnes, have
least known depths of 25m. In heavy weather, the sea breaks on
Neskletten.
Bispen, a small round above-water rock marked by an iron
1.4

is located about 11 miles ENE of Steinodden. A conspicuous
radio tower stands on Kalaskniben, a hill situated 1.5 miles
NNE of Homsknipen.
1.3Caution.—Mackerel fishing, by means of drift nets, purse
seines, and trailing lines, flourishes along the S coast of Nor-
beacon, is located about 1.3 miles W of Lindesnes and is the
southernmost of all the dangers W of Lindesnes. In rough
weather, the sea breaks constantly on the shoals N and E of
Bispen.
The coast between Lindesnes and Einarsneset, about 10
1.4

way from May to September. The approximate area of greatest miles WNW, is indented. From the offing, the land appears to
activity is W of Lillesand to Lista. form a large bay studded with islands and islets.
1.3A restricted area, in which navigation is controlled by regu- Skarvoy, about 6 miles NW of Lindesnes, and Faeroy, about
1.4

lation, lies up to 1 mile from the coast between Einarsneset and 0.7 mile E of the S extremity of Einarsneset, can be easily iden-

Pub. 182
8 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
tified. The former has a hill resembling a sugarloaf in its SW
part.
1.5 Gronsfjorden (58°02'N., 7°02'E.) is about 5 miles
long and up to 1 mile wide. It trends in a general NE direction
along the NW side of the Spangereid peninsula. Easy of access,
it is entered about 2 miles NNW of Lindesnes at the SE end of
Raevoy. Gronsfjorden is connected at its inner end with
Lenefjorden by Jasundet.
1.5Several islets and numerous rocks and shoals extend about 1
mile W and 2 miles S of Raevoy. Sveinene, two small low
rocks which are almost always marked by breakers, are located
about 0.7 mile ENE of Bispen. There are general depths of 146
to 183m, with few islets or dangers.
1.5Jasundet (58°04'N., 7°09'E.), which connects Gronsfjorden
with Lenefjorden, is very narrow and has a least fairway depth
of 3m; a bridge, with a vertical clearance of 14.9m, spans the
narrows. Two 1.8m rocks are located in the passage, one on ei-
ther side of the channel. Currents in Jasundet attain velocities
of 3 or 4 knots.
1.5Lenefjorden has great depths throughout most of its 5.25
miles length, but can only be reached by vessels that can pass
through Jasundet.
1.6 Stusvik (58°00'N., 7°02'E.), on the E side of Grons-
fjorden, has a harbor for small vessels. The depth between the
jetties is 6.9m; farther in, depths from 3.7 to 6.9m are found.
The seas in the harbor may become quite rough during S and
SW winds.
1.6Hovdebukta (58°04'N., 7°06'E.), on the NW side of the
fjord, is a good harbor with depths up to 30m, sand, near its
head.
1.6Flatstadbukta (58°05'N., 7°07'E.), on the N shore of the
fjord, has anchorage, in 16.9m, mud. Care must be taken to
avoid a 2.7m rock that lies in the E side of the bay.
1.6Asevagen, about 0.4 mile E of Flatstadbukta, is a good har-
bor with anchorage, in 24 to 26m, mud. The best anchorage is
near the W part of the bay. The entrance to Asevagen is re-
stricted by an overhead cable with a clearance of about 15.2m.
1.6During good weather, no difficulty should be experienced in
entering Gronsfjorden. Strong W winds, a heavy sea, and the
backwash from the mainland sometimes combine to make
steering difficult.
1.6Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Raevoysund
(58°02'N., 7°00'E.), the narrow passage between the N end of
Raevoy and the mainland, and in Hundalshamn. A light is
shown on the NW side of the passage. Vessels with local
knowledge can anchor in the W part of Raevoysund, N of the
NW extremity of Raevoy, in 29 to 40m, clay. Raevoysund is
spanned at its W end by a fixed bridge with a vertical clearance
of 20m. A light is shown from the middle of the bridge. Small
vessels can anchor, in 20 to 29m, in Hundalshamn.
1.6Numerous above and below-water dangers, some of them
marked by iron perches or beacons, lie in the several approach-
es to Raevoysund.
1.6See Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pub. 180 - Arctic
Ocean for examples of Norwegian fixed marks, including iron
perches.
1.7 Langholm (58°02'N., 6°58'E.), Sutnoy, Kjerringoy,
Pub. 182
and Haoy are located within 0.75 mile NW of Kjepsoy
(58°01'N., 7°00'E.). They are nearly joined together by their
fringing shoals. A group of rocks, partly above water, lie about
183m SW of Langholm. A detached 11m patch, about 183m
farther SW, is the outermost shoal in this vicinity.
1.7 Detached islets, rocks, and shoals extend up to about 0.5
mile from the W side of Marquee and Kjepsoy.
1.7 Rosfjorden, which is easily recognized from seaward, lies
about 2 miles NW of Gronsfjorden.
1.7 From Hausvigodden (58°03'N., 6°59'E.), the E entrance
point, the fjord trends NNE for about 5 miles and has few dan-
gers. A light is shown from the point. There are some good an-
chorages on both sides of the fjord. This deep fjord has a
maximum width of 1 mile; its narrowest part, with a width of
about 0.1 mile, is located about midway through the fjord.
General depths in the approaches and inside the fjord are 55 to
146m.
1.7 The approach to Rosfjorden lies between Herreholmen
(58°02'N., 6°58'E.), a moderately-high islet of reddish color lo-
cated about 0.2 mile NW of Sutnoy, and Ulleroy, an 86m high
island nearly 1 mile WNW. A light is shown from a wooden
hut on the NW extremity of Herreholmen.
1.7 Midtfjordenskjaer, about 0.4 mile WNW of the W extremity
of Herreholmen, is marked by a black beacon with a white
band. A 7.6m shoal patch lies about 183m N of Midtfjordensk-
jaer.
1.7 Ytre Rosfjordenskjaerene and Indre Rosfjordenskjaerene,
two groups of rocks, partly above water, are on the W side of
the Rosfjorden approach between Midtfjordenskjaer and the
mainland to the N.
1.7 Store Kubbesteinen and Lille Kubbesteinen, two above-wa-
ter rocks, are located on the W side of the approach about 0.5
mile and 0.2 mile, respectively, SSW of the SE extremity of
Ulleroy.
1.7 Bradsteinen, with less than 1.8m, lies between the two rocks
and somewhat to the W. Other rocks lie between Bradsteinen
and Ulleroy.
1.7 Bjorneskjaer, about 0.1 mile NNW of Langholm, is above
water; other above and below-water rocks lie within 137m N of
it.
1.7 Bjorneskjaerflu, awash, lies about 183m SSW of Bjornesk-
jaer.
1.8 Grotholm (58°02'N., 6°58'E.) is the larger of two is-
lets that lie about 0.25 mile NE of Herreholmen. Several rocks,
with depths of 1.8 to 4.6m, lie within 183m W, NW, and E of
Grotholm; two small islets and some rocks lie between the lat-
ter and the mainland.
1.8Skonevigflu, with a depth of 4.6m, is located on the E side of
Rosfjorden approach about 0.2 mile S of Hausvigodden.
1.8Teroy (58°03'N., 6°56'E.) is located about 0.1 mile N of Ul-
leroy, from which it is separated by Ulleroysund. A light is
shown from the SW extremity of Teroy.
1.8Andreholm lies close off the W entrance point of Ros-
fjorden, about 0.4 mile WNW of Hausvigodden. Bukkene,
about 0.1 mile NE of Andreholm and the outermost danger on
this side of the fjord entrance, is awash; it is marked by an iron
post.
1.8Other rocks, above and below-water, lie close W and NW of
Bukkene. A rock, with a depth of 5.9m, lies about 137m NW of
 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
Hausvigodden.
1.9 Eitlandskjaera (58°03'N., 6°59'E.), partly above wa-
ter, lies on the E side of the fjord about 0.6 mile NE of Hausvi-
godden. Boroflu, 0.2 mile farther NE is a reef with depths of
2m or less over it.
1.9Boro, the largest island in Rosfjorden, is on the E side of the
fjord about 1 mile within the entrance. Shoal water extends
about 183m from the W shore of Rosfjorden abreast Boro.
1.9Shoal water also fringes the head of the fjord for a distance
of about 183m offshore and several other short sections of the
W shore, particularly in the narrows of the fjord.
1.9An overhead cable, with a clearance of 14m, spans the nar-
row passage between the mainland and the E extremity of
Boro.
1.9A light is shown from Syrhoved, about 2 miles NNE of
Boro, on the W side of the fjord.
1.9Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Borobukta, located
on the NE side of Boro, in 25m, clay. An 8.7m shoal is located
about 91m off the N end of Boro.
1.9Anchorage can also be taken on the W side of the fjord, at
Agnefest, in depths of 25 to 35m.
Directions.—Vessels approaching Rosfjorden should pass to
NW of Herreholmen and Skonevigflu and SE of Store Kub-
besteinen, Midtfjordenskjaer, and Ytre Rosfjordenskjaerene. One
white sector of Hausvigodden Light leads clear of all dangers.
1.9Pass Hausvigodden at a safe distance, taking care to avoid
the 5.9m rock about 137m NW of it. After passing that point,
another white sector of the same light indicates the fairway as
far N as Boro. Vessels are then guided by the white sector of
the light shown from Syrhoved, and N of Syrhoved by the
white sector astern.
1.10 Spindsfjorden (58°05'N., 6°56'E.), the next fjord W
of Rosfjorden, trends NNE for about 3 miles from the SE end
of Skarvoy. Its approach lies between the mainland, on the E,
and Ulleroy, Teroy, and Skarvoy, on the W. Two small bays ex-
tend E from its S part. Numerous dangers border the narrow
channel and local knowledge is required.
Ystesteinen (58°01'N., 6°53'E.), a cluster of above and be-
1.10
low-water rocks, lies about 2 miles SW of Ulleroy. This isolat-
ed group is outside all other dangers in the area and will be
easily recognized. Ostre Steinsflu, a 16.5m patch, lies about
0.2 mile ESE of the largest rock.
Midfjordenskjaer (58°02'N., 6°54'E.) is located about 1
1.10
mile NE of Ystesteinen. A detached 7m rock lies about 0.1
mile NE of Midfjordenskjaer. Store Korken and Lille Korken,
above-water rocks, and a detached 1.8m depth, lie between
Midfjordenskjaer and the SE extremity of Vikelen, about 0.7
mile NE.
Breiflu, with depths of 3.7 to 7.8m, lies about 0.5 mile S of
1.10
Vikelen. Several 6.4 to 8.7m depths lie between them.
Roholme (58°02'N., 6°52'E.), about 1 mile W of Vikelen,
1.10
reddish-colored, and easily identified, is the largest of a group
of four islets. A 5m depth lies about 0.2 mile N of Roholme.
Nordre Roholmflu a 14.6m depth about 0.2 mile NNW of Ro-
holme.
Odegardsgrunn, with a depth of 16.5m, and Kletten, with a
1.10
depth of 26m, are located about 1 mile S and 1.25 miles SW,
respectively, of Roholme.
9
Ostre Roholmflu, about 0.4 mile SE of Roholme, has a depth
1.10
of 4.5m; a 10.1m depth lies between them.
Vestre Bradsteinen (58°02'N., 6°52'E.), marked by an iron
1.10
perch and almost always marked by breakers, is located about
0.4 mile S of Roholme. Vestre Roholmflu, about 0.5 mile SSW
of Roholme, has a depth of 10m.
1.11 Ulleroysund (58°03'N., 6°55'E.), between Ulleroy
and Teroy, is a good roadstead where vessels can anchor, in 29
to 35m, sand and clay. The best anchorage is located about 0.1
mile SW of the light on the SW side of Teroy.
Directions.—Of the two principal approaches to this sound,
the E is the better and the only one described.
Approaching from the S, steer for the white sector of the
1.11
light on the E extremity of Ulleroy, which leads W of Bispen
and the islets and dangers extending SW from Marquee and
then E of Store Kubbesteinen.
After passing Store Kubbesteinen, steer to pass between
1.11
Lille Kubbesteinen and Midfjordenskjaer, then through Ulle-
roysund, taking care to avoid a 7.8m depth, marked by a black
and red spar buoy, which lies about 0.1 mile NE of Teroy light,
and keeping close to Ulleroy when abreast Teroy to avoid the
foul ground extending about 91m S from the latter islet.
The green sector of the light shown from the SW extremity
1.11
of Teroy, bearing between 306 and 319°, leads through the E
part of Ulleroysund to within about 0.3 mile of the light.
Skarvoyhamn is on the S side of Skarvoy, the next island N
1.11
of Teroy. Anchorage can be taken in the outer part of the har-
bor, in 29 to 40m. Skarvoyflu, a 4m depth, lies about 0.2 mile
N of the W extremity of Teroy. A 1m depth, marked by an iron
perch, lies about 0.15 mile S of Skarvoyflu.
Sandholmane are two islets that lie on a reef on the W side of
1.11
Skarvoyhamn and close within the harbor entrance. The reef
fringes and extends about 137m from the shore.
1.12 The approach to the port of Farsund lies between Lan-
goy and a number of islets and reefs that extend NE toward that
island from Einarsneset (58°03'N., 6°47'E.).
Langoy (58°04'N., 6°52'E.) is the largest island in the ap-
1.12
proach and lies on the NE side of the principal fairway. A light
is shown from a position about 0.2 mile NW of the S extremity
of Langoy. A light is shown from the W side of Langoy in a po-
sition about 1 mile NNW of Bremerodden, the S extremity of
Langoy.
Pilot boarding station for Farsund lies 2 miles S of Sondre
1.12
Katland Light (Sore Katland), (58°03'N., 6°51'E.) when ap-
proaching from S. A racon is situated at the light. A small inlet
lies in the approach to Farsund, about 1 mile E of the SE ex-
tremity of Einarsneset.
A light is shown from the S side of Store Haoy, an islet
1.12
which lies about 0.1 mile NW of the NW extremity of Langoy.
Several islets and some rocks and reefs lie between Store Ei-
1.12
geroy, on the W side of the approach to Farsund and Store
Haoy.
A light is shown from the SE extremity of Sandoy, which is
1.12
located near the mainland about 0.6 mile WNW of Sondre Kat-
land.
1.13 Faeroyflua, a 3.2m depth, marked on its S side by a
lighted buoy, lies about 1 mile SSW of Sondre Katland. Villa-
Pub. 182
10 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
flua, with a depth of 11.9m, and Austre Mellomflua, with a
depth of 5.5m, are located about 0.2 mile NE and 0.25 mile N,
respectively, of Faeroyflua.
Gunnarskjaer, awash, and Skarveskjaer, with a depth of
1.13
4.6m, lie on the SE edge of the shoal that extends up to 0.3
mile S and SE from Faeroy. Kalveflu, with a depth of 1.8m and
marked by a buoy, is on the W edge of the shoal. Breakers usu-
ally mark these dangers.
Revoyflu, marked on its N side by a buoy, is located about 1
1.13
mile SW of Sondre Katland. Revoyskjaer, marked by an iron
beacon, lies near the S end of Revoyskjaergrunn about 1 mile
SW of Sondre Katland.
Revoy (58°03'N., 6°48'E.), about 0.3 mile S of the SE ex-
1.13
tremity of Einarsneset, lies on foul ground together with a few
other smaller islets. A beacon stands on Revoy. A 7.3m rock is
located about 0.3 mile WSW of the S extremity of Revoy; a
12m depth lies about 183m farther WSW. Kraka is the south-
easternmost islet in the group.
Sjuhausflua, marked by an iron perch, is located about 0.2
1.13
mile W of Revoy; a reef extends about 0.1 mile N from it.
Foul ground, on which the islet of Klubben lies, extends
1.13
nearly 0.3 mile E from the SW end of Einarsneset.
Oddeflua, about 0.1 mile NE of Revoy, has a depth of 2.7m
1.13
and is marked by a buoy.
1.14 The principal approach channel to Farsund leads be-
tween Faeroyflua and the Roholmane group; then between
Sondre Katland and Lindholmbaen; then W of Svartskjaer and
Brattholme; E of Bukkegrunnane, Futeskjaer, and Risholme;
and then between Lille Haoy and Store Haoy and toward the
respective parts of the harbor.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels and
1.14
is advisable for all vessels. Pilots should be requested through
the pilot stations at Hidra or Oksoy. Pilots board vessels about
1 mile S of Faeroy.
Several dangers lie near this channel, but a least depth of
1.14
33m is charted in the fairway as far as the outer anchorage of
the port.
A 14m depth is charted about 0.4 mile SSE of Sondre Kat-
1.14
land; a depth of 10.1m lies about 0.5 mile ENE from the same
islet.
Lindholmbaen, a 4.6m depth, lies on the E side of the fair-
way about 0.2 mile WNW of the N end of Lindholmen
(58°03'N., 6°52'E.), a 26m high islet, and is marked by a spar
buoy. A 14m depth lies about 0.5 mile W of the same extremi-
ty.
1.15 Bukkegrunnane (58°04'N., 6°51'E.), marked on its E
side by a spar buoy, is the E edge of an area of reefs and islets
which extends from a position about 0.4 mile NE of Sondre
Katland to a position 0.5 mile NNW of that islet. A detached
4.8m depth lies about 0.2 mile NE of Sondre Katland.
Lyngholme is located about 0.7 mile NNE of Sondre Katland
1.15
and about 0.2 mile SE of the S end of Uroy. A rocky patch,
with a least depth of 3.2m, extends about 0.2 mile S from Lyn-
gholme, and a detached 5m depth lies 0.2 mile SE of it. A 7m
depth lies midway between Lyngholme and Uroy.
Futeskjaera, above water, lies about 0.1 mile E of Lyn-
1.15
gholme.
A 3.2m depth lies between Risholme and Uroy.
1.15
Pub. 182
Sondre Haoyflua, lying between the NW end of Langoy and
1.15
Store Haoy, has a depth of 4m and is marked on the SW side by
a buoy.
Vestre Haoyflua, on the SW side of the fairway 0.1 mile SW
1.15
of Store Haoy, has a depth of 4.7m over it and is marked by a
buoy. Nordre Haoyflua, a 5.3m depth marked by a light, lies on
the NE side of the channel about 0.1 mile WNW of Store Haoy.
Lille Haoy and Lamholme lie on the SW side of the channel,
1.15
about 0.1 mile WSW and 0.3 mile W of Store Haoy.
Engoy and Faroy front the town of Farsund, which is situated
1.15
about 1 mile NW of Store Haoy. Engoy is the S islet of the two.
Skyskjer, about 0.4 mile SE of Engoy, is one of a group of
above and below-water rocks and is marked by an iron beacon.
Fisholmflua, on the NW side of Fisholmen about 0.2 mile
1.15
SE of Engoy, is marked by an iron perch.
1.16 Farsund (58°06'N., 6°49'E.) (World Port Index No.
23520), the inner harbor, lies between Engoy and Faroy on the
E, and the mainland on the W. The outer harbor lies between
Fisholmen and Sundsodden, a mainland projection about 0.3
mile SSW of Engoy. A causeway extends from the NW end of
Faroy to the NE end of the peninsula, on which the town of
Farsund stands on the side of a steep hill. Athreespan Bridge,
with a maximum clearance of 22m, connects Faroy with the E
entrance point of Lyngdalsfjordenen.
Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds in winter blow
1.16
from S and SE; in summer nearly half of the time the prevail-
ing winds blow from N or NW. These sea winds are largely re-
sponsible for the very mild temperatures in winter and the
overall lack of extreme temperatures. Precipitation is high. The
harbor is ice free.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise is about 0.3m. No local
1.16
currents are reported in the Farsund approach. Winds have
some effect on tides.
Depths—Limitations.—A depth of 33m is available
1.16
through the approach, but Nordre Haoyflua, a 5.3m depth, lies
close to the channel in the narrows between Store Haoy and
Lille Haoy. General depths in the outer harbor are 14.6 to 29m;
in the inner harbor off the town the depths are 4.5 to 8.8m. Ves-
sels up to 15,000 dwt, with a maximum draft of 9.5m, can be
accommodated. For more information see the accompanying
table titled Farsund—Berth Information.
Farsund—Berth Information
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Inner Harbor Terminal
General cargo
No. 1 130m 7.5-10.0m
and dry bulk.
Deep Water
General cargo
No. 10 130m 15.0m
and dry bulk.
Industrial Terminal
Project/heavy
No. 2 100m 7.5-8.5m
cargo.
 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
Farsund—Berth Information
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Multipurpose Terminal
Chemicals, dry
Multipurpose 130m 14.5m bulk, breakbulk,
and ro-ro.
Aspect.—A light is shown from the SW side of Faroy in
1.16
range with a light shown from the SE side of Engoy. Lights are
shown from the S side of Faroy and a post in the water close E
of the N extremity of Engoy.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and requires 24 hours no-
1.16
tice. Pilotage should be ordered through SafeSeaNet or alterna-
tively the Horten Pilot Booking Center. The pilot boards in
position 58°01.5'N, 6°50.0'E.
Pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16.
1.16
Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor in the inner harbor;
1.16
the usual anchorage is N of Gulsteinen between the town and
Gasholme. Mooring rings and dolphins are located along the
shore. Larger vessels can anchor anywhere between Gulsteinen
and Skjolnes, the S entrance point of Lundevagen about 0.25
mile SE of Sundsodden.
1.17 Lundevagen, the inlet immediately S of Farsund, ex-
tends W a little over 1 mile from its entrance between Sund-
sodden and Skjolnes and narrows to a width of about 137m in a
position about 1 mile from the entrance.
Kraka, an above-water rock, lies about 0.1 mile W of the nar-
1.17
rows. A 3m depth, marked by a buoy, lies about 73m SE of
Kraka. When passing through the narrows, vessels should keep
close to the S shore.
A submarine cable is laid across the entrance to Lundevagen.
1.17
A concrete wharf, 135m long, with a depth alongside of
1.17
14.5m, lies on the S shore of the inlet near the entrance. Anoth-
er concrete wharf, 106m long, with depths alongside of 5 to
9m, lies on the S shore close to the head of the inlet.
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take sheltered anchorage in
1.17
the inner part of Lundevagen, in 16.5 to 18.3m, good holding
ground. The head of the inlet shoals to a distance of about 0.1
mile offshore.
1.18 Saltrak (58°03'N., 6°49'E.) is an island close SW of
Sandoy. Palsflua, on the end of a spit extending about 0.2 mile
SW from Saltrak, is awash, always breaks, and is marked by an
iron perch. Sauflua is located on the edge of foul ground that
extends about 0.1 mile E from the SE extremity of Einarsneset.
It has a depth of less than 1.8m and is marked by an iron perch.
Flama (58°04'N., 6°50'E.), a roadstead, lies between Faeroy,
on the S, Sandoy and the mainland on the W, and Lille Eigeroy
on the N. Reefs and islets extend N from Sondre Katland on
the E. The roadstead is roomy and easy of access.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken here, in about 33m,
1.18
clay, with good holding ground.
Caution.—Katlandflua, with a depth of less than 1.8m and
1.18
lying within 0.1 mile W of Sondre Katland, is marked by an
iron perch and a buoy.
Foeroysundflua, a detached 8m depth, lies close to the Lille
1.18
Eigeroy range line about 0.2 mile WNW of Sondre Katland.
11
Two unmarked rocks, with depths of 7.6 and 9m, lie on the
1.18
W side of the roadstead within about 206m of the E side of
Sondoy. The deeper rock never breaks.
Engelskjerflua, on the E side of the roadstead about 0.3 mile
1.18
NNW of Sondre Katland, is marked by a buoy.
Raudsteinflua, at the N end of the dangers extending N from
1.18
Sondre Katland, has a depth of less than 1.8m and is marked by
an iron perch.
A detached 6.9m depth lies in the NE part of the roadstead
1.18
about 0.3 mile ESE of the S extremity of Lille Eigeroy.
Directions to Ostre Faeroysundet.—From the vicinity of
1.18
position 58°02.5'N, 6°50'E, the approach route to Farsund track
leads to Flama roadstead by passing Sondre Katland Light
(58°03.4'N, 6°50.5'E.) via Ostre Faeroysund, the passage be-
tween Sondre Katland and Faeroy, which can be used in all
weather conditions.
This channel is approached between Faeroyflua and the Ro-
1.18
holme group until the range lights shown from Lille Eikeroy
are in line. When on the range line, care must be taken to avoid
Foeroysundflua.
1.19 Kveldsund (58°04'N., 6°54'E.) separates the NE end of
Langoy from the W extremity of Ytre Bugdoy. This narrow, rock
obstructed channel is near the E end of Indre Spindsfjorden, 0.25
to 0.5 mile in width, lying between Langoy and the mainland, N.
It trends E from Store Haoy for about 2 miles. Several anchorag-
es are located in small coves that lead off from the inlet.
Vikholme lies close off the N shore of the inlet about 0.5
1.19
mile NW of the NE extremity of Langoy. Shoal water extends
about 137m S from Vikholme.
An overhead cable, with a clearance of 30m, spans the inlet,
1.19
about 0.3 mile E of Vikholme. A submarine cable crosses the
inlet about 0.3 mile W of Vikholme.
Midfjordenskjeret, a detached above-water rock, is located
1.19
in the W approach to the inlet in a position about 0.2 mile NW
of the N extremity of Store Haoy. A 16m depth lies about 0.2
mile ESE of Midfjordenskjeret.
Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of
1.19
14m, between the N side of Vikholme and the mainland; in a
depth of 22m, in a creek on the N side of Langoy, about 0.4
mile S of Vikholme; and, in a depth of 15m, in a cove about 1
mile E of Vikholme.
Anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge may be
1.19
taken, in depths of 8m to 14m, sand, off Birkenes, 0.6 mile
ENE of Store Haoy.
1.20 Lyngdalsfjorden extends about 4 miles NE from Far-
sund and then divides into two arms, each about 4 miles long.
The E arm continues under the name of Lyngdalsfjorden; the
NW arm is known as Oftefjorden. About 1 mile from the head
of the latter fjord, Drangsfjorden branches NE for about 2
miles.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 22m at the center,
1.20
spans the entrance of Lyngdalsfjorden. About 1 mile within the
entrance, an overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 22m,
crosses the fjord.
Oen (58°06'N., 6°47'E.), an island in the SW part of Lyngda-
1.20
lsfjorden, is separated from the mainland on its S, W, and N
sides by channels which are, in places, both narrow and shal-
low. Helvigfjorden, W of Oen, has a depth of 3.2m in its ap-
Pub. 182
12 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
proach, which leads S and W of the island.
With the exception of a shoal extending across the entrance
1.20
of the E arm of Lyngdalsfjorden and a few scattered dangers,
the fjords are deep throughout.
A 5m shoal lies on the E side of Lyngdalsfjorden entrance
1.20
about 137m W of the NW extremity of Spindsodden. Subma-
rine cables are laid from Farsund to Oen and E of Kilsholme to
the mainland. A submarine cable is laid across Lyngdals-
fjorden, about 1 mile E of Farsund.
From the S entrance point to the inner part of Lyngdals-
1.20
fjorden, a submarine cable is laid NW across Oftefjorden to a
position about 0.5 mile NE of Herred, at the head of a bight in-
denting the W side of Oftefjorden.
Another cable is laid from the S entrance point along Lyn-
1.20
gdalsfjorden to a position about 0.5 mile W of Lyngdal, located
at the head of the fjord.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Bjorsviken, on the
1.20
E side of Oen, in 11.9m, pebbles and shells.
Several anchorages are located in the E arm of Lyngdals-
1.20
fjorden; a 5.5m channel leads across the shoal fronting this
arm.
Anchorage can be taken off Herred, in 14.6 to 22m. Several
1.20
dangers lie in the NE part of the bight that Herred lies at the
head of. An anchorage is also located near the head of Of-
tefjorden, in a depth of about 27m.
1.21 The coast between Einarsneset and Steinodden, about
8.5 miles NW, is indented by several shallow bights. The first
1.5 miles of the coast is fringed by reefs and islets to a distance
of about 1.5 miles offshore.
Along the 7 miles stretch of the Lista peninsula, from
1.21
Steinodden to Rauna, the bottom slopes steeply. This leads to
sea waves being both reflected and deflected. In addition, the
current conditions in the area are variable with eddy forma-
tions, and the sea can be very rough. Heavy breakers have been
observed.
Hummerdus is an islet close W of the S extremity of Einars-
1.21
neset. Between the islet and Havik, about 1.5 miles WNW,
there is a considerable extent of reddish-colored sand, which
has sometimes been mistaken for Mandalssand, a strip of yel-
low sand about 12 miles E of Lindesnes, to which it certainly
bears some slight resemblance. Such a mistake is possible in
thick weather.
Havik (58°04'N., 6°44'E.) appears as a dark brown hill rising
1.21
from a small point 2 miles WNW of Einarsneset.
Svaneflu (58°03'N., 6°45'E.), a 2.1m depth located about 1.5
1.21
miles SW of Einarsneset and marked by a spar buoy, is the out-
ermost of the many dangers in the vicinity. Between Svaneflu
and Rauna the known dangers lie within 1 mile of shore.
Rauna (58°04'N., 6°40'E.), an island, is located about 3
1.21
miles W of Einarsneset. Shoal water extends up to 0.3 mile S
from Rauna.
Ostre Rauneflua, a 2.5m depth, lies near the coastal bank
1.21
about 0.25 mile SE of Rauna. A 1.5m depth lies about 0.3 mile
ENE of Ostre Rauneflua. Vestre Rauneflua is a 3.5m patch
about 0.7 mile W of Rauna.
1.22 Brekneholme (58°06'N., 6°35'E.) is an inconspicuous
flat islet, consisting entirely of pebbles and located a little over
3.25 miles NW of Rauna.
Pub. 182
Listahamn, lying between the SE end of Brekneholme and
1.22
the mainland, is protected by a mole extending from the islet
and one extending WNW from the mainland.
Small vessels may anchor in Listahamn, in depths from 4 to
1.22
6m, with their sterns secured to mooring rings because of limit-
ed swinging room. During SW storms, there is a considerable
current in the outer harbor.
Several above and below-water rocks lie within about 152m
1.22
of the S shore of Brekneholme.
A projecting quay on the E side of Listahamn has depths of
1.22
up to 4m alongside.
Lista Light (58°07'N., 6°34'E.), exhibited from a stone tow-
1.22
er, 34m in height, is on a level plain which projects about 2
miles from the foot of the high land between Farsund and Lis-
tafjorden and terminates in a low sandy shore bordered by
ranges of sand hills.
1.22 By Bjoertvedt (Own work) [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creativecommons.org/
licenses/by-sa/3.0)], via Wikimedia Commons
Lista Light
1.22
Steinodden to Svaholmane
1.23 Steinodden (58°07'N., 6°33'E.) is the W extremity of
the peninsula of Lista. Numerous above and below-water rocks
lie within 0.4 mile of Steinodden.
Verevagen is a small shallow cove about 0.5 mile ENE of
1.23
Steinodden. Perches and beacons mark its two entrance chan-
nels. A flagstaff stands at the head of the cove.
Stavestoflua, a 1.8m depth, lies 0.2 mile offshore about 1
1.23
mile NE of Steinodden.
Varnesholme lies close NW of Varnes (58°11'N., 6°38'E.),
1.23
the S entrance of Listafjorden. Rocks border the SW and NW
sides of this small islet.
1.24 Listafjorden (58°11'N., 6°37'E.) branches to form
Fedafjorden, Stolsfjorden, and Flekkefjorden. Fedafjorden runs
NE between steep forested shores, often rising to a height of
about 305m. Flekkefjorden runs N from Stolsfjorden and has
steep shores up to the port of Flekkefjorden at its head.
Brekneholmen Light (58°05'N., 6°36'E.) is exhibited from
1.24
a white lantern on piles on Brekneholmen, a flat islet consist-
ing entirely of pebbles, which is not easily distinguishable.
Listahamn, between Brekneholmen and the mainland, has a
1.24
 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
narrow entrance formed by two breakwaters.
Andabeloy and Hidra, large and hilly islands, lie N and NW
1.24
of Listafjorden.
Farther NW, the coast is craggy and treeless, rising steeply to
1.24
a height of about 183m, and is indented only by a few small in-
lets. The fjords are deep and mostly clear of dangers.
The fjord gap between Hidra and Varneset is only about 1
1.24
mile wide, and with an outgoing current, the sea will become
rough. Large depths of about 300m, and a thereby steep shore,
means that reflection will cause a rough sea. Refraction can al-
so occur for certain directions.
Dangers on the NW side of Listafjorden include Myskesk-
1.24
jaerne and Hunden. Myskeskjaerne, two groups of low rocks,
lie within 0.2 mile of the SE side of Andabeloy.
One group is located about 0.7 mile NE of Hogsaedeskroa,
1.24
the S extremity of Andabeloy; the other group, which is
marked by a beacon 2m high, lies about 0.25 mile farther NE.
Hunden, one of a group of above and below-water rocks, lies
1.24
about 183m offshore, about 0.2 mile SSW of Tarmevikodden
(58°13'N., 6°41'E.), the E extremity of Andabeloy.
Eidsfjorden, branching E for about 1 mile from the SE side
1.24
of Listafjorden, has steep-to shores and ample depths.
1.25 Ytre Pollen (58°11'N., 6°42'E.), at the head of the in-
let, affords good anchorage to small vessels, but during W
gales the sea breaks across the entrance. Buoys mark the ap-
proach to the anchorage. Hausen, a rock on the S side of the en-
trance, is marked by an iron perch. Small vessels can also take
sheltered anchorage, in about 7m, off Vikane, about 0.6 mile E
of Varnes.
Fedafjorden, a continuation of Listerfjorden, extends NE for
1.25
about 6 miles from its entrance between Ostre Stolen
(58°13'N., 6°43'E.) and a point about 0.5 mile SE. The fjord is
deep to within about 0.3 mile of its head, where a shoal fronts
the mouth of the river Kvina.
The NW shore of Fedafjorden is more irregular than the SE
1.25
shore. Anchorages in the fjord are all located on this side.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 50m, crosses Fed-
1.25
afjorden in position 58°15.5'N, 6°50.6'E between Agholmen
(58˝15'N., 6°52'E.) and Teistdalsstranda.
Sageflua, with a least depth of 5m, lies within 0.2 mile off-
1.25
shore in a position about 3 miles NE of Ostre Stolen. Binesflua,
with a 9m depth, is located about 0.6 mile NE of Sageflua.
A small bay lies off the settlement of Feda, close NE of
1.25
Binesflua. Vessels can anchor in the middle of the bay, in 40m,
hard sand. A stone beacon and two dolphins stand at the head
of the bay.
Agnholmen (58°16'N., 6°50'E.) lies on the N shore close NE
1.25
of Feda.
Leirvik, located on the NW side of Fedafjorden, is a timber-
1.25
handling place, with a concrete pier about 92m long and a
depth of 5.6m.
Oye, the site of a smelting works, lies across a small bay NE
1.25
of Leirvik. A concrete quay, 137m long, is located at Oye; a ro-
ro berth on its N side has a depth of 8m while its S side has a
depth of 12m alongside. Two buoys mark the edge of shoal wa-
ter SE of the quay. A quay, 40m long, with a depth alongside of
3 to 7m, lies close NW of Oye.
Tides—Currents.—During floods, the outgoing flow in the
1.25
narrowest part of the fjord, near Agnholmen, can attain a ve-
13
locity of up to 2 knots. The velocity is usually 0.5 knot.
1.26 Strandsfjorden (58°13'N., 6°39'E.), branching N be-
tween Hidra and Andabeloy, is entered between Klubben and
Hogsaedeskroa. The fjord is deep and relatively free from dan-
gers. It trends N for about 2 miles to Kokodden (58°14'N.,
6°39'E.), a prominent mainland point, where it joins Hidrasun-
det, and then NE toward Risholmsundet, the channel along the
N side of Andabeloy.
Katterauva is an islet lying close offshore on the E side of
1.26
Strandsfjorden, about 0.3 mile NW of Hogsaedeskroa. Rocks,
with depths of less than 1.8m, lie near its SW end.
Abelnes is a village on the NE shore of a small cove about
1.26
0.3 mile N of Kokodden. Good anchorage can be taken off
Abelnes, in 14.6 or 16.5m, sand and clay.
Risholmsundet (58°14'N., 6°40'E.), connecting Strands-
1.26
fjorden and Stolsfjorden, is a narrow channel between the N
end of Andabeloy and Risholmen, a small islet about 0.5 mile
E of Kokodden.
Engelsholmen lies in the W approach to Risholmsundet. The
1.26
islet is located close off the NW side of Andabeloy, about 0.3
mile SE of Kokodden. Two buoys, moored close W and N of
the islet, mark the edges of the reef which fringes it.
Risholmen is the southernmost of a chain of islets, rocks,
1.26
and shoals that almost completely obstructs the passage be-
tween the mainland and Andabeloy. Foul ground extends about
137m W from Risholmen. A lighted iron perch, about 91m off
the E side of the islet, marks the SE edge of a foul area.
Risholmbaen, close off the S side of Risholmen, is marked by a
light and an iron perch.
Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken in most places
1.26
on the bank between the N end of Andabeloy and the main-
land. The bottom is mostly stiff mud and sand. The best an-
chorage is between Engelsholmen and Risholmen, in a depth
of 20m.
1.27 Stolsfjorden (58°14'N., 6°41'E.) is entered between
Tarmevikodden and Ostre Stolen and extends N about 3 miles
to the narrows of Straumsundet. The fairway through the fjord
is deep and clear.
Terneholmen (58°14'N., 6°41'E.), with a smaller islet and
1.27
some foul ground near it, lies close off the NE side of Andabe-
loy. A stone breakwater extends S from Terneholmen to the
coast of Andabeloy.
Aleskjera, a group of above and below-water rocks, lies 0.2
1.27
mile N of Terneholmen and is marked by iron perches.
Straumsundet is the middle of three narrow channels that
1.27
lead N among the several islets in the passage separating Stols-
fjorden and Flekkefjorden. These islets, from S to N, are
Kjeoy, Litle Torsoya, and Store Torsoya. The least charted
depth in the fairway of Straumsundet is 13.5m.
Stamdalsflua, with a 1.8m depth marked on its W side by a
1.27
buoy, lies about 183m offshore and about 0.2 mile S of Kjeoy.
Anchorage.—Small vessels with local knowledge can an-
1.27
chor in a cove on the S side of Kjeoy, in depths of 10 to 17m,
sand.
There is anchorage for vessels of moderate size between the
1.27
SE end of Kjeoy and Stamdalsflua, in a depth of 33m, clay.
1.28 Flekkefjorden extends N about 1.5 miles between
Pub. 182
14 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
Straumsundet and Gronsundet. An islet group extends up to
about 0.2 mile from the W shore. Fairway depths through the
fjord are ample.
Anchorage.—Anchorage is indicated in the NW part of
1.28
Flekkefjorden, in about 25m. Care must be taken to avoid a
4.8m depth on the E side of the anchorage close SW of the en-
trance to Gronsundet.
Gronsundet is the narrow channel joining Flekkefjorden
1.28
and Tjorsvagbukta. A buoy marks the E and W sides of the
fairway through the channel. The least charted depth through
the fairway of the channel is 8.7m over a width of 60m. Range
lights, shown from the NW shore of Tjorsvagbukta, lead be-
tween the buoys through Gronsundet.
Tjorsvagbukta, extending about 0.5 mile N from Gronsun-
1.28
det and up to 0.5 mile in width, forms the harbor for the town
of Flekkefjorden.
1.29 Flekkefjorden (58°18'N., 6°40'E.) (World Port Index
No. 23510) is located in the N part of Tjorsvagbukta. Its harbor
is ice-free at all times. The harbor comprises all of Tjorsvag-
bukta and the narrow channel connecting that small bay and
Grisefjorden. A drawbridge, spanning the channel, joins the
two parts of the town. Vessels with a draft up to 3.7m can use
the channel.
The harbor is free from dangers, except for the 5.2m shoal
1.29
immediately within the entrance close N of Gronsundet. On ei-
ther side of the harbor, the country is rocky and broken up by
small lakes. Sparsely-wooded hills rise on the NW to over
274m and on the SE to over 122m.
Depths—Limitations.—The least charted depth of 8.7m is
1.29
found in Gronsundet. Vessels with a maximum draft of 5.3m can
be handled in the port. For more information see the table titled
Flekkefjord—Berth Information.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be
1.29
ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the
Horten Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot
boards by prior arrangement at the entrance to Listafjorden in
position 58°10.9'N, 6°32.9'E.
The pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16 and
1.29
by telephone (47-33-034954).
Contact
1.29 Information.—See the table titled
Flekkefjorden—Contact Information.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken almost anywhere in
1.29
Tjorsvagbukta, in up to 34m, stiff mud, good holding ground.
Flekkefjorden—Contact Information
Port Authority
VHF VHF channels 12, 13, 14, and 16
Flekkefjord—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth
LOA
Europris Flekkefjord
Europris 105m — —
Pub. 182
Flekkefjorden—Contact Information
Telephone 47-38-322265
Facsimile 47-38-328009
Harbormaster
Telephone 47-38-322265
1.30 Rasvagen (58°14'N., 6°34'E.), a deep, narrow inlet
indenting the S side of Hidra for about 2 miles in a NNW
direction, has several coves and anchorages and provides good
shelter. A barrier of islets and rocks, among which are five
narrow passages, stretches across the entrance between
Nesodden, the E entrance point, and a point about 1 mile NW.
A submarine pipeline is laid in the N part of the inlet. The in-
1.30
let is crossed by an overhead cable with a vertical clearance of
21m.
Flekkefjorden can be approached from Listafjorden either by
1.30
way of Stolsfjorden or through Strandsfjorden and Risholm-
sundet and then through the N part of Stolsfjorden. Vessels
from W can also approach through Hidrasundet and then
through Risholmsundet.
Hobmannen, a group of rocks, is located about 91m offshore
1.30
about 0.9 mile ESE of Nesodden. Saueholmane is a small
group of islets and rocks lying close offshore about 0.3 mile
ESE of Nesodden.
Sakseskjeret, marked by a beacon, lies about 0.6 mile SE of
1.30
Nesodden. The beacon should be given a berth of at least 152m
to avoid the dangers extending NE from it.
Baan is a small low rock about 0.1 mile SW of Sakseskjeret.
1.30
A rock lies awash close E.
Sjonga, the outermost of a group of rocks about 183m N of
1.30
Baan, and Skarveskjerflua, the westernmost of a group of rocks
about 0.3 mile farther NW, are each marked by an iron perch.
1.31 Rasvagholmane (58°13'N., 6°35'E.) is a group of
small islets and rocks on the E side of the inlet, close WSW of
the village of Rasvag. An iron perch marks the NW rock by
Rasvagholmane.
The entrances into Rasvagen are narrow but not very
1.31
difficult. Under ordinary circumstances, a pilot will board the
vessel in time to take it into the inlet. If a pilot is unable to
board, the vessel should stand into Listafjorden or Hidrasundet,
both of which are easy of access.
The E entrance, between the coast of Hidra and Sakseskjeret,
1.31
is the one generally used. It is relatively clear of dangers and is
deep. The other entrances require local knowledge. After pass-
ing Sakseskjeret, keep E of Naudholme, Lille Hummeroy, and
Kregleholme and W of Rasvagholmane.
Remarks
Depth Beam Size
— — — Fast ferries and breakbulk.
 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 15

Flekkefjord—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Depth Beam Size
General Cargo Terminal
General Cargo 86m — — 7.5m — — Breakbulk.

Kirkehamn

Anchorage for Rasvag, in the cove fronting the village, is

1.31 There is also anchorage near the NE end of Dragoya, in
1.32

prohibited because of submarine cables. Anchorage may be depths of 16.4 to 20m.

taken about 0.4 mile NW of Nesodden, off the SW side of
Kreglingholmen, in depths of 20 to 30m.
A 9.2m patch lies about 91m S of Kreglingholmen.
1.31
Caution.—Vessels must not proceed at more than 5 knots in
1.31
the upper part of Rasvagen when N of Vage.
Hidrasundet separates Hidra from the mainland N and can be
used by vessels approaching Flekkefjorden from the W. The
fairway is free from known dangers and is deep, but is only
about 0.1 mile wide at its narrowest part.
From its entrance between Kvalsberget, the N extremity of
1.32

Breidlia (Breilien) (58°13'N., 6°34'E.) lies in a small cove

1.31 Hidrsundet trends ESE for about 3 miles to Kokodden, where it
on the W side of Rasvagen and affords good anchorage, in joins Strandsfjorden.
16m, sand. Vessels anchor in the middle of the cove and moor Svertingane (58°15'N., 6°30'E.), a group of above and be-
1.32

with stern lines to mooring rings.
Vage is a small harbor in a bight on the W side of Rasvagen,
1.31
about 0.6 mile N of Breidlia. Small vessels can find sheltered
anchorage here, in 26m, sand. A stern line should be taken to
low-water rocks lying within about 0.3 mile NW of Prestoya,
are the outermost dangers on the S side of the approach. A
1.5m shoal lies at the W end of the group.
Kadoyflua, a detached 12m shoal, lies about 0.2 mile N of
1.32

the shore at the head of the bight. the N end of Kadoya, the island NE of Prestoya.
Stovika (58°15'N., 6°31'E.), on the N side of the W ap-
1.32

1.32 Kirkehamn (58°14'N., 6°32'E.), on the W side of Hi-
dra, is a good harbor. Heavy seas from the W send in a heavy
swell. The harbor is ice free.
Vessels anchor in the bight NW of the church, in depths of
1.32
proach to Hidrasundet, is entered a little over 0.75 miles NNE
of the N point of Kadoya. It affords good anchorage for small
vessels, in depths up to 20m, sand.
Smaller vessels can anchor, in 4m, at the head of the cove. W
1.32

20 to 30m, mud. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in the E winds send in a considerable swell. Stovika anchorage is ap-
bight, off the village, in a depth of 20m, sand. proached between an island group on the SW side of the cove

Pub. 182
16 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
and a rock, awash, located about 137m SW of the E entrance
point. Vessels must pass close E of the rock awash to avoid the
shore bank extending from the E side of the cove.
1.33 Berefjorden (58°16'N., 6°28'E.) is entered E of Hol-
men, an islet 0.5 mile NW of Halsodden, the E entrance point.
Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in a
cove NW of Holmen, in depths up to 24m, mud, approaching
by the wider channel N of the islet.
Shoal water extends about 18m from the E side of this islet.
1.33
A power line, 21m high, is reported N of Holmen. Small craft
can anchor between Furuholmen (58°16'N., 6°28'E.) and the
head of Berefjorden, in depths up to 6m, mud; the wider chan-
nel S of Furuholmen has a depth of 3.7m.
A hill, 244m high, stands about 0.7 mile NE of Halsodden.
1.33
Another hill, 218m high, lies about 2 miles NW of Halsodden.
Siragrunnen (58°15'N., 6°20'E.) lies off the outlet to Ana
1.33
Sira (58°17'N., 6°26'E.); the depth varies from 10 to 100m.
The current conditions in the area are very variable. A little
1.33
further out from land, the coast current runs NE. At the Re-
kefjord entrance to Ana Sira, the outgoing current has been re-
ported as high as 3 knots.
1.34 Egdeholmen (58°17'N., 6°23'E.) lies close off the E
entrance point of Ana Sira. During strong outgoing tidal cur-
rents and with onshore gales, the sea breaks on either side of
the entrance.
Siragrunnen should be avoided in poor weather. Together
1.34
with winds from SE, through S to NW, the variable current
conditions will cause a rough sea. Even outside the current, the
bottom conditions will mean that refraction centers are formed
on the shoal with waves from W to NW.
The largest of three quays in Ana Sira is located at the head
1.34
of the inlet 2 miles ENE of Egdeholmen. It is 50m long, with a
depth of 3m alongside, and is approached through a shallow
channel marked by buoys.
Between Ana Sira and Buvarodden, about 2 miles NW, and
1.34
up to a distance of about 2 miles W from that point, there are
numerous small islets, rocks, and shoals. The channels among
these islets, rocks, shoals and the coast, although deep, should
only be used by vessels having local knowledge.
1.35 Jossingfjorden (58°19'N., 6°20'E.), about 0.5 mile E
of Buvarodden, lies between Austre Kvalen and Vestre Kvalen,
about 183m W. From its narrow, well-defined entrance lying
between steep, dark hills, Jossingfjorden extends NE for about
1 mile. The fjord is deep and, within the entrance, is from 0.2
to 0.3 mile wide.
Overhead cables, with vertical clearance of 6.5m, cross the
1.35
entrance to Jossingfjorden E of Austre Kvalen Light.
Depths—Limitations.—An ore pier at the head of the fjord
1.35
Rekefjord—Berthing Information
Berth Length Depth
Rekefjord Stone Terminal
Dirty products, aggregates, multipurpose. Maxi-
East 143m 7.1m
mum vessel draft of 5.6m.
Southeast 15m — Aggregates.
Pub. 182
has a depth of 15m alongside. Vessels of up to 16,000 dwt can
load from the silo with the help of a conveyor belt. Water may
be obtained from the pier. Another pier at Holmen, on the E
shore of the fjord, is about 20m long, with depths of 7.7 to
8.5m alongside; it is used for general cargo.
Vintersto, a 2.7m rock marked by an iron perch from which a
1.35
light is shown, lies in a small cove on the E side of the fjord
about 0.3 mile NNE of Austre Kvalen. Except for this rock,
Jossingfjorden is clear of dangers.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
1.35
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Horten
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot boards in
position 58°17.9'N, 6°13.9'E.
The pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16 and
1.35
by telephone (47-33-034954).
Contact Information.—The port can be contacted by tele-
1.35
phone (47-51-470600).
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage be-
1.35
tween Vintersto and the shore of the cove, in 16.5 to 24m, sand.
Mooring rings are available.
Anchorages are also located in two coves on either side of a
1.35
small peninsula that projects from the E shore of the fjord near
Holmen, about 0.7 mile within the entrance.
Mooring rings are available in the SW cove. Depths in these
1.35
anchorages are 20 to 24m. Larger vessels can anchor about 0.4
mile from the head of the fjord, in 40 to 55m, fine sand and
mud.
Caution.—The approach to Jossingfjorden should only be
1.35
made from the W. Passage should be made N of Indrebaen,
Langholme, and Dynga.
Two submarine cables lie in the vicinity of the anchorage
1.35
near Holmen. An outfall pipeline runs from the vicinity of Hol-
men, seaward along the E side of the fjord. Discharge is
achieved through a pipe floating at a depth of 15m.
1.36 The coast between the Jossingfjorden entrance and
Rekefjord trends WNW for about 2 miles and is very irregular.
It is entirely covered with green grass in summer.
In autumn and winter, when the grass is withered and before
1.36
the ground is covered with snow, it has a yellowish appearance.
The mountains flanking this coastal stretch are naked and dark,
presenting a striking contrast.
A chain of four islets and a group of rocks extends for about
1.36
1 mile across a coastal indentation comprising the harbor of
Sogndalsstranda, in the SE part, and two small arms, Hellevik-
en and Logevik, in the NW part. Vambelsund, the narrow but
best entrance into this bay, is between the mainland and the SE
end of Langholme, the southernmost islet of the chain.
During spring and autumn after heavy rains, a strong current
1.36
runs out through Vambelsund. The entire bay is exposed to sea
and swell.
Remarks
 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
Rekefjord—Berthing Information
Berth Length Depth
Southwest 60m — Aggregates.
West 19m 8.5m Aggregates and limestone.
Sogndalsstranda (58°19'N., 6°18'E.) is a village located on
1.36
the E side of the bay. A small harbor formed by a jetty lies S of
the village. Along the jetty there is a concrete quay, 25m long,
with depths of 1.7 to 5.5m. Overhead cables with vertical
clearance of 8.5m are located in the vicinity of the village.
1.37 Rekefjord (58°20'N., 6°16'E.), extending about 1
mile N, is entered between Lille Presteskjer and a point about
0.2 mile SE. Reefs fringe the shores of the fjord in places. A
light is shown from a 78m high pillar close W of the entrance
channel.
Depths—Limitations.—About 0.2 mile within the entrance,
1.37
the fjord narrows to its minimum width of about 64m. The
least depth in the narrows is 17.8m. General depths elsewhere
in the fjord are 14.6 to 27m. Vessels with depths up to 5.6m can
be handled in the port. For more information see the table titled
Rekefjord—Berth Information.
Local knowledge is required. A 22m depth is located in the
1.37
fairway about 0.2 mile SE of Lille Presteskjer. Within the
narrows, there are several dangerous rocks that are marked by
iron perches.
Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor almost anywhere in
1.37
Rekefjord. The outer roadstead, just within the entrance, has
depths of 29 to 37m, but is exposed to onshore gales.
Moderate size vessels can find sheltered anchorage about 0.5
1.37
mile inside the entrance, in a depth of about 24m, clay. Stern
lines can be passed to mooring rings on shore.
A submarine cable crosses the S end of this anchorage and
1.37
an overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 40m, crosses the
N end.
The town of Rekefjord lies on the E side of the fjord near its
1.37
head. Overhead cables, with vertical clearances of 10m, are lo-
cated in the vicinity of Rekefjord.
1.38 Nordfjord (58°20'N., 6°15'E.), a narrow but sheltered
fjord close W of Rekefjord, is entered on either side of Nord-
fjordenholmane, which lies in the fjord entrance.
The channels on either side are narrow. The E channel has a
1.38
depth of 6.9m; the W channel has depths of 5 to 6.9m.
During onshore gales, the sea breaks across both channel en-
1.38
trances. Nordfjord trends NNW for about 1 mile, but dries
about 0.3 mile from its head.
Overhead cables, with a vertical clearance of 10m, exist at
1.38
Nordfjord.
Nordfjordenflu, with depths less than 1.8m and marked by
1.38
an iron perch, lies close off the NE end of Nordfjordenhol-
mane.
1.39 The coast between the Nordfjorden entrance and
Stapnes, a mainland projection about 7 miles NW, is lofty and
steep. Along this coastal stretch all known dangers are near the
land. There is no shelter and the few anchorages should only be
resorted to in fine weather and with local knowledge.
17
Remarks
Hadyret (58°20'N., 6°10'E.), a conspicuous 103m hill, is lo-
1.39
cated on the coast about 3 miles NW of Lille Prestskjaer.
Hadyret, resembling a perpendicular wall of rock with a
1.39
sharp and slightly projecting peak at the outer extremity, is
marked by a white patch.
Vatlandsfluene, three detached depths, has depths of 16m,
1.39
13.7m, and 24m, lying up to 0.3 mile offshore and between 0.3
and 0.6 miles SE of Hadyret.
Vagene (58°20'N., 6°13'E.) is a small bay that indents the
1.39
coast for about 0.3 mile N from the chain of islets and rocks
fronting it. In the E part of the bay there is a depth of 21.9m
over a sandy bottom, where small vessels with local knowledge
can take anchorage. A draft of 3.9m can be taken through the
channel between the second and third islets from W.
However, the anchorage is seldom used because onshore
1.39
gales send in considerable swell. Under such conditions, there
are breakers in the channels between the islets.
1.40 Nalauviken (58°23'N., 6°04'E.) is a bight on the E
side of Stapnes. It is entered between the S extremity of
Stapnes and a point about 0.6 mile E.
Haskjaer, an above-water rock with a reef projecting about
1.40
183m N from it, is located close off the E entrance point of Na-
lauviken. Storflu, an 11m depth, lies about 0.2 mile SW of Ha-
skjaer. Lyreflu, with a least depth of 5.7m, lies close N of
Storflu. Foul ground, on the W side of the bay, extends about
0.1 mile SE and 0.3 mile ENE of the S end of Stapnes.
Tenholme, on the E side of the bay about 0.3 mile NNW of
1.40
Haskjaer, is joined to the mainland close E by a drying shoal.
Tenholmflu, with a depth of less than 1.8m, and Kveidflu, a
1.40
1.8m rock on the E side of the bay about 0.1 mile farther N, are
each marked by an iron perch. Small vessels can anchor, in
5.9m, off Odden, at the head of Nalauviken. The approach to
the anchorage is narrow and difficult and should not be at-
tempted without a pilot. During onshore gales, a swell rolls in
over the shoals N of Tenholme.
At the head of Nalauviken, there is a good harbor, in depths
1.40
of 5 to 7m, sand, protected by moles. Mooring buoys and rings
are available. There is a quay, 40m long, with a depth of 5m
alongside, in the harbor.
Havsund, between the N side of Dragoya, and Prestoya, an
1.40
island about 0.2 mile N, is the principal passage leading toward
Kirkehamn. The fairway through Havsund is deep and free
from dangers. Vessels should approach Kirkehamn from W in
mid-channel.
Svaholmane to Ognabukti
1.41 About one half the coastal stretch between Svahol-
mane and Ognabukti comprises the approaches to, and the port
area of, Egersund.
Egeroy (Eigeroy) (58°27'N., 5°58'E.) is relatively low and
1.41
indented; seen from the sea it blends with the background.
Pub. 182
18 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
Lundeviken and Soragapet, the S approach leading into the
port area, are well defined.
From W, the lowland region of Jaeren will be visible to the N
1.41
in clear weather. Eigeroy will resemble a high promontory; the
coast SE will appear very high and precipitous. Nordregapet,
the W approach to Egersund, will also be clearly visible.
Between Egersund and Ognabukti, the coast is steep and
1.41
rocky, but seldom rises above a height of 30m. There are a few
patches of farmland but very few trees; the whole landscape is
wild and inhospitable. A large number of islets front the sever-
al bays and coves that indent the coast between Nordregapet
and Ognabukti.
Svaholmane (58°23'N., 6°03'E.) is a group of low islets and
1.41
rocks lying on the E side of the S approach to Egersund within
0.5 mile W of Stapnes.
Kletten, Tysnesflu, and Stiksflu, with depths of 8.2m, 16m,
1.41
and 8.2m, respectively, lie about 0.5 mile and 0.2 mile WSW
and 0.3 mile NW, respectively, of a lighted structure on Svahol-
mane.
1.42 Soragapet (Sondregapet) (58°26'N., 6°00'E.), the S
and principal approach to the port of Egersund, is the sound be-
tween the mainland and the E side of Eigeroy. Its channel is
suitable for deep-draft vessels.
Entrance is made between Svaholmane and the shoals and
1.42
other dangers that lie up to 1 mile S of Skarvoy, an islet near
the SE end of Eigeroy, about 2 miles NNW of Svaholmane.
The most constricted part of Soragapet is between Fugleod-
1.42
den, a projection on the E side of Eigeroy about 1 mile N of
Skarvoy, and Synnavikodden(Sonnevi kodden), a small main-
land point about 150m NE. A concrete silo, about 61m high,
stands on the point.
Vardbergodden, the E entrance point of the outer harbor of
1.42
Egersund, is located on the E side of Soragapet, about 0.5 mile
N of Synnavikodden.
Svanesfluene, with depths of 10m and 12m, lies on the E
1.42
side of Soragapet, about 0.2 and 0.5 mile offshore and about
0.7 mile NW of the light structure on Svaholmane. Isakbaen,
with a least depth of 4m and marked on its SW side by a buoy,
is located about 0.3 mile offshore and 1.5 miles NNW of the
same light structure.
1.43 Stabsaet (58°24'N., 5°59'E.), a small islet, 10m high,
on the W side of Soragapet, is located about 0.7 mile S of Skar-
voy. Jensbaen, a 3m depth, lies about 0.2 mile SSE of Stabsaet.
Jensbohausen, a 20m depth, lies about 183m farther S.
Maerra, a rock, awash, about 0.2 mile NE of Stabsaet, is al-
1.43
ways marked by breakers. Shoal water extends about 137m S
and E from the rock. Krabbeflu, a 23m depth, is located about
0.3 mile WNW of Stabsaet.
Depths of 14.5m and 11.6m lie about 0.3 mile and 0.4 mile
1.43
NNE, respectively, from Stabsaet.
Store Svetlingen, 17m high, and Lille Svetlingen, two islets,
1.43
are located about 0.7 mile and 0.8 mile SW of Skarvoy. A bea-
con stands on the NE side of Store Svetlingen. Shoal water ex-
tends about 183m S and W from Store Svetlingen. Glana, a
rock, awash, lies about 137m E of the smaller islet.
Bronnesfluene, situated about 0.3 mile NW of Store Svetlin-
1.43
gen, is marked at its E end by an iron perch and has a least
depth of 7m over its W part.
Pub. 182
A constant current, which is often very strong, sets S through
1.43
Soragapet.
Navigation is rarely restricted by ice, although sometimes
1.43
the portion of Soragapet above Fugleodden freezes over in
winter.
Anchorage.—Skjevollsvika, indenting the mainland about
1.43
0.7 mile NE of Skarvoy, provides sheltered anchorage to small
vessels, in 12.8 to 22m. The approach to Skjevollsvika is made
SE of Tingelset, a 33m high islet on the E side of Soragapet.
Moderate size vessels can anchor about 206m E of Tingelset,
in 40m, sand.
Rekevika, a bight on the W side of Soragapet, about 0.5 mile
1.43
N of Skarvoy, provides anchorage to small vessels with local
knowledge, in 15 to 20m, good holding ground, sand.
Vessels entering must pass close to the N shore to avoid the
1.43
shoals and rocks extending from the W shore. A 3m shoal lies
in the middle of the entrance.
Gillestadvika is a small bight on the W side of Soragapet
1.43
about 1 mile N of Skarvoy. Small vessels can anchor in the S
part of the bight, in 15 to 20m, sand. Mooring rings are avail-
able. Skreddaren, awash and marked by an iron perch, lies
about 0.1 mile NNW of Jektevikodden, the S entrance point. A
concrete quay, located at Jektevikodden, is 60m long with
depths of 8 to 9m alongside.
Hovlandsvika, a bay on the W side of Soragapet, which is
1.43
entered between Fugleodden and a point about 0.3 mile NNW,
is the best of these anchorages. It is the quarantine anchorage
for the port of Egersund. Vessels can anchor here, in 10.1 to
14.6m, good holding ground.
Rageskjaerflu, with depths of less than 1.8m and marked by
1.43
an iron perch, lies on the shore bank in a position about 0.3
mile NW of Fugleodden. A detached 7.2m depth is located in
the N part of the bay.
1.44 Egersund (58°27'N., 6°00'E.) (World Port Index No.
23490) consists of an inner harbor and an outer harbor that lie
between the mainland and the E side of Eigeroy. The outer har-
bor is separated from the inner harbor of Egersund by Lindoy,
an islet which is joined to a peninsula that extends S from the
mainland and forms the NE side of the outer harbor. This outer
harbor, comprising the N part of Soragapet, is protected from
the open sea by Eigeroy. The approach channel is dredged to
13m.
A reach, trending NE from Soragapet, forms the sheltered in-
1.44
ner harbor, which is available only to small vessels and is used
primarily by the local fishing fleet. Entrance is made close S of
Lindoy.
Port of Egersund Home Page
http://www.egersund.havn.no
Ice.—The harbor is ice free during normal winters.
1.44
Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is insignificant.
1.44
Depths—Limitations.—The main entrance channel has a
1.44
width between 110m and 230m and a depth of 12.5m. General
depths in the outer harbor and anchorage area are 6 to 12m.
The inner harbor, adjacent to the town, has depths of 5 to 6m.
Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 19

Egersund—Berth Information. 13m.

Caution.—Several submarine cables lie in the approach to
1.44

Egersund—Berth Information the port within Soragapet. A submarine pipeline, best seen on
the chart, is laid across the S part of Egersund outer harbor.
Berth Name Length Depth
General and Bulk Cargo 1.45 Lundeviken (58°26'N., 5°55'E.) divides Eigeroy into
two parts, which are connected by a narrow neck of low land. It
Dampskipskaien 75m 9.0m is conspicuous from the offing, as the land is lofty on both
Kaupanesplant 220m 9.0m sides and the inner part is bounded by a low sandy shore. When
approaching Eigeroy with an onshore wind and the weather is
Kongsteinkaien 207m 3.5-7.0m
too heavy for pilots to go out, a vessel may safely stand in be-
Ro-Ro tween Kjesholme, 19m high, the largest islet in the approach
Kaupanes 170m 9.0m about 1.5 miles W of Skarvoy, and Fliset, a detached reef on
the W side of the approach, about 1 mile WNW of Kjesholme.
Bertelsen og Garpestad 59m 5.3m There are several rocks and shoals that lie near Kjesholme
1.45

Ro-Ro and Cruise Ship and Fliset, but the sea always breaks on them in heavy weather.
Inside Lundeviken, the dangers are near the shore and are usu-
Nordsjoterminalen 160m 7.7-8.6m ally marked by breakers.
Ro-ro ramp 20m wide Abreast Hodnhammeren, on the W side of the bay about 2
1.45

miles NNW of Kjesholme, the depth is 20 to 26m, stony

Fueling Berths ground. North from here, the bottom shoals regularly and is
Statoil 50m 8.3m sandy. Temporary anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 11m,
about 0.1 mile NE of Hodnhammeren. This anchorage is some-
Shell 115m 8.4m
what exposed to sea and swell.
Esso 127m 5.6m Sprangbukt (58°27'N., 5°56'E.), at the NE end of Lundevik-
1.45

en, is entered between Oksnesodden, a S projecting point that

Harbor facilities are located on both sides of the inner harbor
1.44
and close N and S of Lindoy. Steamship Quay, in the outer har-
bor close SW of the entrance of the inner harbor, is the largest
divides the head of the bay into two coves, and Ellevikholme,
about 0.1 mile E.
Small vessels can anchor in 10.1m. Southwest winds send in
1.45

and most used of the berthing facilities; it is 288m long, with a some swell. There are no dangers within the rocks at the en-
depth of 8m alongside. There is a ro-ro berth for vessels up to trance. When entering, pass W of Ellevikholme, give it a fair
1,500 dwt, with drafts up to 5.2m. berth, and avoid a 2.7m shoal extending about 183m S from
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 24m, spans Nysund,
1.44
Oksnesodden.
the narrow dredged channel, with a depth of 5.5m, connecting
the N end of the outer harbor with the E end of Nordregapet. 1.46 Nordregapet (58°27'N., 5°52'E.), the W and second-
Aspect.—Barren hills, with rock outcrops, rise to heights of
1.44
ary approach to the port of Egersund, is entered between
more than 122m both N and S of the town; those to the NW are Ruskodden, the NW extremity of Eigeroy, and Gulholme,
over 244m high. about 0.2 mile NW. Pilots for Nordregapet boards 1.5 miles
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
1.44
WSW of Ruskodden Light (58°26'N., 5°53.4'E.).
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Horten Eigeroy Light (58°27'N., 5°52'E.) is located near the S end
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. of Midbrodoy.
The pilot boards, as follows:
1.44
Gulholme is the southernmost of a group of rocks and islets
1. North approach—58°26'58.2''N, 5°50'54.6''E. that extend about 0.5 mile S from the mainland and NNE of
2. South approach—58°22'57.6''N, 5°59'54.0''E. Midbrodoy. A beacon stands on the NE end of Gulholme.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Egersund—
1.44
Beacons, buoys, perches, and several lights mark the inner
1.46

Contact Information. channel reaches. The least depth through the fairway of Nor-
dregapet is 5.5m and is found in the dredged channel across the
bar close N of Grundsundholmen.
Egersund—Contact Information
Seilsteinen, the outermost of a group of above-water rocks, is
1.46

VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 located about 0.3 mile SW of Ruskodden. This lofty, perpendic-
Telephone 47-51-463280 ular rock resembles a sail. A whitewashed patch on it is visible
for about 2 miles. A beacon stands on the W side of the rock.
Facsimile 47-51-463281 Several shoals, best seen on the chart, lie off of Seilsteinen.
E-mail post@egersund.havn.no Tryet, an above-water rock marked by an iron perch, lies in
1.46

the fairway about 0.25 mile WSW of Ruskodden. Shoal water

extends about 91m NNE from the rock; several below-water
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 6 to 12m, in the
1.44

rocks lie between it and Eigeroy.

outer harbor W of Lindoy. The holding ground of sand and Svartholme is a small islet on the N side of the fairway about
1.46

clay is very good. Vessels in quarantine anchor between Fug-

137m NW of Gulholme. A 5.5m depth lies between the two is-
lodden and Svanavagodden, 0.35 mile SE, in depths of 8 to lets; shoal water extends about 91m SE and NE from the latter.

Pub. 182
20 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
Eigeroy Light
1.46
Sundsgapholme, the NW and largest of the islets on the N
1.46
side of Nordregapet’s main entrance, lies with its W extremity
about 0.5 mile NW of Gulholme. Horsholme is the E islet. A
bar extends between the N side of Horsholme and the main-
land. This bar limits vessels that can enter through the N chan-
nel, which leads E between the mainland and the N sides of
Sundsgapholme and Horsholme, to drafts of less than 4m.
Lusaskjaer, marked by an iron perch, is located within the
1.46
sound on the W side of the fairway, in a position about 91m E
of Horsholme.
The best entrance into Nordregapet is made between Tryet
1.46
and Gulholme. The channel between Tryet and Gulholme can-
not be made out until the vessel is close to Tryet.
After passing SE of Gulholme, course can be set for the an-
1.46
chorage area E of Horsholme or for the buoys marking the
dredged channel N of Grundsundholmen.
Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken, in a depth of
1.46
12m, between Horsholme and Grundsundholmen. Anchorage
can be taken, in a depth of 12m, in the N channel NE of Sunds-
gapholme, but vessels with drafts exceeding 4m must approach
this latter anchorage from the W.
1.47 Dyroy (58°28'N., 5°52'E.) lies close offshore. Rocks
and shoals encumber the narrow passage between the mainland
and this small islet.
Svartskjaer is the outermost of several above and below-wa-
1.47
ter rocks lying on the S side of the N approach to Nordregapet
and up to 0.25 mile SW of Sundsgapholme.
Karpusskjaer, with a depth of less than 1.8m, is on the N side
1.47
of the approach close W of an islet that lies about 183m S of
the SW extremity of Dyroy. Raudskjaer, with a depth of less
than 1.8m and marked by an iron perch, lies about 183m W of
Pub. 182
the S extremity of Dyroy.
Dyroyflu, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an
1.47
iron perch, lies about 137m SSE of Karpusskjaer.
A shallow inlet indents the mainland N of Dyroy for about
1.47
0.5 mile, then extends about 0.7 mile E. Its much encumbered
approach lies between Karpusskjaer and numerous dangers N
of it, on the E, and Skjerpingerne, a chain of islets and rocks
that extends about 0.6 mile SSW from the mainland, on the W.
Oyafluene, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an
1.47
iron perch, lie nearly midway between Karpusskjaer and Skjer-
pingerne. The town of Hellvik stands on the N shore of the in-
let. The main terminal quay near Hellvik can accommodate
vessels up to 30m in length with a maximum draft of 6.1m.
Vessel up to 90m in length, 5.3m draft, and 14m beam can be
accommodated. The quay handles aggregates and sand. Two
lighted ranges and other navigational aids mark the entrance
channel, which has been dredged to 6m. Entrance should not
be attempted without local knowledge.
1.48 Skraedderen (58°28'N., 5°51'E.), a 5.5m depth, lies
at the S end of Skjerpingerne. Lillegrunn, a detached 16m
depth, lies about 0.7 mile offshore and about 0.7 mile W of Sk-
raedderen. Mastefluene has several 12 to 18m depths that lie
close to the SW end of Skjerpingerne.
Laedersholme (58°29'N., 5°50'E.) lies close off a small pen-
1.48
insula projecting S from the coast, on the E side of the S ap-
proach to Vatnemoholmene. Storflu, a 7m depth about 0.5 mile
SSW of Laedersholme, is the outermost of numerous dangers
extending S from the islet.
Vatnemoflu, a 4m shoal, lies closest to the approach range
1.48
line in a position about 0.1 mile NNE of Storflu. Hellarne is
two rocky heads about 183m apart, of which the NW is awash
and the SE is marked by an iron perch, located about 0.2 mile
NE of Storflu.
1.49 Vatnemoholmene (58°29'N., 5°49'E.), a small har-
bor, is formed between the E side of a small coastal projection
and some close lying islets.
There are two entrances; the S entrance has a depth of 10.1m
1.49
while the W entrance has a depth of 5.9m. Northwest and SW
winds send in a considerable swell. Mooring rings are available
and must be used. Entrance into Vatnemoholmene should not
be attempted without local knowledge. The S, or preferred,
channel is marked by two pairs of range lights.
Hellesundfluene, with a depth of 4.8m, is located about 0.6
1.49
mile W of Vatnemoholmene.
Ognabukti (58°31'N., 5°45'E.), an open bay, recedes NE for
1.49
about 1 mile and has general depths of from 11 to 22m.
Sirevag (58°30'N., 5°48'E.) is a small fishing harbor on the
1.49
E side of Ognabukti. It affords anchorage with mooring rings,
in depths from 6 to 8m, within a short mole which projects
from the N shore.
Depths—Limitations.—Quays on the N shore have a total
1.49
length of 300m, with depths from 3 to 5m alongside. There is a
new jetty on the S side of the harbor. The harbor can accommo-
date vessels with a maximum draft of 7.8m. For more informa-
tion see the table titled Sirevag—Berth Information.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be
1.49
ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the
Horten Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 21

The pilot boards in position 58°26.9'N, 5°50.9'E.

1.49 is intersected by a network of stone walls.
The pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16 and
1.49 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current off Jaerens Rev is ir-
1.50

by telephone (47-33-034954). regular and much affected by the wind, which may be N for
Contact Information.—See the table titled Sirevag—Con-
1.49 long periods in early summer. In fine, calm weather the tidal
tact Information. current usually sets N with the rising tide and S with the falling
tide. The currents attain velocities of 1 knot to 2 knots and al-
Sirevag—Contact Information ways set strongest to the N.
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
1.51 The coast between Ognabukti and Obrestad, about
Telephone 47-51-793000 8.25 miles NNW, is relatively steep-to.
Regulations.—Traffic is controlled by Kvitsoy Vessel Traf-
Facsimile 47-51-532684
fic Service (Kvitsoy VTS) from Kvitsoya (59°04'N., 5°25'E.).
E-mail sirevag-havn@ha.kommune.no For further information, see paragraph 2.6.
Horr Farm (58°33'N., 5°40'E.) is a conspicuous landmark.
1.51

Vagsgabgrunn, with a depth of 3.5m, lies close W of the Si-

1.49
revag entrance. The inlet can be entered either S or N of this
shoal, but local knowledge is required.
After entering Lundeviken, the vessel may either hove to
1.49
when the water becomes smoother, to await a pilot, or stand
farther in, keeping about 0.2 mile from the W shore.
Ognabukti to Jaerens Rev
Its buildings stand higher than any structures in the vicinity and
appear from a distance to be built on a point. A church, located
about 2 miles N of Horr Farm and 1 mile inland, is white and
has a low tower and spire. Obrestad Light is exhibited from a
granite house and is 16m high. Obrestadbrekra (58°40'N.,
5°33'E.), from which a light is shown, is the highest point on
the Jaeren coast.
Jaerens Rev (58°45'N., 5°30'E.), a low point, is the W ex-
1.51

tremity of Jaeren. The coast at the point is a strip of land from

1.50 From Ognabukti, the coast trends quite regularly
NNW for nearly 15 miles to Jaerens Rev, the westernmost ex-
tension of the mainland in the S approach to Stavanger. A few
small coastal indentations provide limited shelter to small
craft, but there are no harbors.
Between Jaerens Rev and Lyratangen, a mainland projection
1.50
0.2 to 0.6 mile wide.
1.52 Honsviki, between Jaerens Rev and Lyratangen, 4.5
miles NNE, is open W and clear of dangers. General depths in
the bay are 9.1 to 18.3m.
Skotamedgrunn (58°48'N., 5°26'E.) is located between 3
1.52

located abreast Feistein 4.5 miles NNE, the coast recedes about
0.7 mile E, forming Honsviki.
At Ognabukti, the mountainous coast begins to drop toward
1.50
the sea; immediately to the N is the low land of Jaeren. This
part of the coast is so low that when approaching it from the
offing, the houses appear to rise straight from the sea. About 4
miles and 3.5 miles NW of Jaerens Rev. The dangerous area
extends approximately 2 miles around the shoals in a SW-NW
direction. The depths vary from about 40m in its W part to
about 16m in its E part. Waves from SW to NW create rough
sea in the area.
During N weather, a refraction center will emerge on the
1.52

or 5 miles inland, a range of hills rises from the plain but pres-
ents no conspicuous landmarks,
The beach between Ognabukti and Lyratangen, and about 2
1.50
miles farther N to Vigdelneset, is composed of white sand and
shallow areas and, combined with a W current of 1 to 1.5
knots, the conditions will become even worse. Breaking surfs
have been observed in the area.
Tangerhaug, a 28m high hillock, lies close SE of Lyratangen
1.52

is backed by sand dunes. and is marked by a wooden beacon.

Jaeren is one of the most unusual tracts of land in Norway.
1.50 A radio mast, 152m high, stands 2.25 miles NE of Jaerens
1.52

Its surface is undulating and occasionally rises into low hill- Rev. Obstruction lights are shown from the mast.
ocks. Bogs dotted with peat stacks are varied by heather-cov- A reef extends 0.2 mile SW from Jaerens Rev. A lighted
1.52

ered tracts and luxuriant meadows and farm lands. Here and buoy marks the W side of the reef extending W from Jaerens
there at rare intervals are small groups of trees; the whole plain Rev.

Sirevag—Berth Information
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Sirevag Terminal
Fisheries 145m 3.4-6.2m Fishing and breakbulk.
Breakbulk and reefer. Maxi-
Freezer Storage 85m 7.0-14.0m
mum draft of 7.8m.

Pub. 182
 2.
Sector 2—Norway—Feistein to Geitungane

Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
Pub. 182

2.0

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION

23

SECTOR 2
NORWAY—FEISTEIN TO GEITUNGANE
Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway be-
2.0
tween Feistein and Geitungane. Described in sequence are the
approaches to Stavanger, the port of Stavanger, and the fjords
lying S, E, and N of the port area, those branching from Skude-
nesfjorden, those in the vicinity of Stavanger, and then, those in
the outer areas of Skudenesfjorden.
General Remarks
2.1 Winds—Weather.—The changes in pressure result-
ing from the change in seasons on the W and S coasts of Nor-
way affect the prevailing winds in this sector. The shift in
pressure over S Norway from high pressure in winter to low
pressure in summer, results in the wind shifting from S in win-
ter to N in summer. The prevalence of winds from any one di-
rection is not in evidence more than 40 per cent of the time.
The usual situation is one of winds induced by a passing cy-
clone with shifting directions and velocities. Within the fjords
and along the very indented coastline, the wind is usually
widely different from that in the open sea, owing to land and
sea breezes and topographical effects.
Because of the mountainous nature of the coast any wind
blowing from a direction between S and WSW, is deflected to
blow as a S wind on the coast, and any wind blowing between
NW and N is deflected to blow as a N wind. The winds in W
Norway therefore have a tendency to blow across the mouth of
the fjords. The speed of the wind also increases outward from
the coast to a distance of as much as 150 miles.
2.1There is a lot of turbulence along the Norwegian coast when
winds are fresh or strong, due to the broken country. Gales oc-
cur frequently over this area when deep depressions are mov-
ing N between the British Isles and Iceland, under which
condition a very steep gradient is apt to develop all along the W
seaboard of Norway, producing strong S winds. This very steep
gradient at times extends 100 to 150 miles out to sea from the
coast.
2.1Under these conditions the coast is swept by violent winds
which penetrate into the more sheltered fjords with great turbu-
lence, though with reduced velocity. Spells of NW gales occur
on the W coast when a suitable gradient is established by pres-
sure falling over Scandinavia. Such gales are apt to persist but
the gradient on some occasions falls off suddenly to the E of
the Shetland Islands.
2.1In winter, gales and storms are common on both the S and W
coasts of Norway. In spring they are more common on the W
and SW coasts than the S coast. These gales decrease in fre-
quency as the season progresses. The strength of the winds de-
creases markedly in summer though gales are by no means
unknown, particularly on the W coast of Norway. North gales
as well as W are reported on the W coast. Sea breezes are fre-
quent along the entire coast in the summer season. Wind
speeds increase slightly in autumn, especially along exposed
coasts, and gales become more frequent.
2.1On the W coast, thunderstorms occur on two or three days a
25
month near the heads of deep fjords in summer, but only about
once a month near the open sea. They occur occasionally in
winter during gales between SW and NW. In winter, heavy SW
and W gales are often accompanied by thunder and lightning.
2.1Fog is the primary cause of poor visibility. It varies widely
with the location of stations; that is, whether they are dominat-
ed by land or by sea. Over the sea, fog is most frequent in sum-
mer. The upper fjords and land stations show distinct winter
maximum. Sea fog occurs occasionally in winter when cold air
moves over the warm waters, or when the air is warmer than
the water. The most frequent fogs in winter are the radiation
type land fogs. They may be expected at the heads of deep
fjords when there is severe frost inland and cold wind blows
down on the open fjords. One form of fog, which affects partic-
ularly the upper reaches of the fjords, is “frost smoke.” This oc-
curs during a spell of severe frost, and may be expected by an
approaching ship if the wind is light and from an offshore di-
rection and skies are clear or nearly so over the land. It is
caused by the water being warmer than the overlying air.
2.1In spring, fog decreases generally as radiation land fog be-
come less likely under gradual warming of the land. It increase
only at Skudenes. Poor visibility is least common in summer
over the land area of this region
2.1Sea fogs are not uncommon along and over the coasts, par-
ticularly in the early months of the season. In autumn fog in-
creases at those stations exposed to continental influences in
which radiation fog develops.
2.1In general, autumn is the season when fog is least common
on the coast, though inland the frequency is increasing toward
the winter maximum.
2.2 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the North Sea are al-
ways semi-diurnal, with very little diurnal inequality between
the two HWs or the two LWs of each tidal day.
2.2The tide progresses into the North Sea from the Atlantic
Ocean, between the Shetland Islands and Norway. Within the
North Sea, HW progresses counterclockwise about a nodal
point off the S coast of Norway, moving S in the North Sea and
W along the S coast of Norway between Kristiansand and the
6th meridian.
2.2Along the W coast of Norway the progression is N to about
60°N; N of this the progression is E.
2.2Along the west coast of Norway, tide ranges gradually in-
crease toward the N.
2.2Tidal current off this section of coast is subject to great vari-
ations. A tidal current setting W and N is, however, prevalent,
especially in summer, but with continuous N and W wind it
may set S and E for a week continuously. Near the coast the di-
rection of the current may be toward the land.
2.2Generally, along the W coast of Norway, the influence of
winds on the tide levels is small. This is probably due to the
scattering effect of offshore islands and the relatively deep wa-
ter close inshore. North from Jaeren to the vicinity of Kors-
fjorden, the current just offshore floods to the N, beginning
Pub. 182
26 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
about 5 to 6 hours after HW at Bergen and ebbs to the S, begin-
ning about 30 minutes to 1 hour before HW at Bergen. From
the vicinity of Korsfjorden to approximately 60°10'N, the flood
begins about 6 hours after HW at Bergen and set to the E; the
ebb begins about the time of HW at Bergen and set to the W.
2.2Surface currents in the fjords are predominantly tidal, setting
inward on the flood and seaward on the ebb, except during
May and June. During these months increased runoff from
melting snow and ice causes the surface currents to flow almost
continually seaward. The depth of the surface current averages
3.5 to 5.5m. Though they may vary from 0.9 to 18m.
2.2Current speeds are strongest at the surface, decreasing with
depth. An intermediate current sets into the fjord usually be-
tween 9.4m and 18.3m. Generally, the water below 40 fathoms
either has a very weak seaward set or is stagnant, and is re-
newed only by major meteorological disturbance.
2.2Wind may alter the tidal currents in the fjords. Onshore
winds may cause a rise in the level with a corresponding in-
crease in the velocity and duration of incoming currents. When
the wind ceases, current flows in the opposite direction until
equilibrium is established. Outflowing currents along the sides
of the fjord may occur when strong winds blow onshore for
prolonged periods. Offshore winds may have an opposite effect
on the water level and currents.
2.2Off the coast and in the fjords between Lindesnes and Jaer-
ens Rev the tidal currents are inappreciable. Small currents
may be found in the narrow channel of the fjords, as in Skude-
nesfjorden but little is know about them.
2.2Aspect.—Skudenesfjorden is the principal approach to
Stavanger and is entered S of Geitungane. Within the entrance,
and near Stavanger, are hundreds of islands and islets forming
numerous sounds, channels, and inlets. The mainland S, E, and
N of the island area is penetrated by a complex system of navi-
gable fjords and smaller inlets.
2.2Most of the water area between Feistein and Geitungane is
encumbered with low, rocky islands and islets and numerous
dangers, through which there are several channels leading N
toward the inner approaches to Stavanger. Skudenesfjorden is
entered between Geitungane and Kvitsoy. The best approach to
Stavanger is through Skudenesfjorden, then SE through the
length of Kvitsoyfjorden and Byfjorden.
2.2From Vigdelneset about 3 miles NE of Feistein, the Stavan-
ger peninsula extends N for about 10 miles to Tungeneset. The
important port of Stavanger is situated on the E side of the pen-
insula. Several bays indent the W side of the Stavanger penin-
sula, and Hafrsfjorden, with a narrow, shallow entrance,
occupies the middle part. A submarine pipeline is laid across
the fjord, SE of the bridge; a few lakes are in the N part, as
shown on the chart. Most of the land is low and cultivated.
There are several small stretches of sandy beach, especially on
the W side. East of Gandsfjorden, the country is high moor-
land, descending abruptly to the rocky shores of Hogsfjorden.
Many low rocky islands, the largest of which is Hundvag, lie
off Stavanger.
2.2Sheltered anchorages are found in the bays and inlets of the
Stavanger peninsula, among some of the islands between the
peninsula, and in coves on the S side of Karmoya, in the vicin-
ity of Skudenshavn.
Off the Skudenesfjorden entrance, the tidal current usually
sets N. Near the land, on both sides of the entrance, the current
Pub. 182
usually sets E with a rising tide and W with an ebbtide. The in-
ward set begins about 5 hours 15 minutes after HW at Bergen;
the outward set begins about 1 hour before HW at Bergen.
2.2Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
2.2Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS).—IMO-adopted traffic
separation schemes, best seen on the chart, are located, as fol-
lows:
1. About 12 miles SW of Feistein Light.
2. In the approaches to Stavanger NNW, W, and SW of
Kvitsoy.
3. In the S end of Karmsundet between Karmoy and
Vestre Boka
2.2Caution.—Crawford Oil Field (59°07'N., 1°30'E.) is situ-
ated about 115 miles W of Geitungane and consists of a pro-
duction platform and a tanker mooring buoy. Balder Oil Field
lies 27 miles ENE of Crawford Oil Field.
2.2For oil and gas fields N of the above, see Sector 3. For oil
and gas fields S of the above, see Sector 1.
Approaches to Stravanger
2.3 Hasteinfjorden (59°00'N., 5°30'E.) is the best ap-
proach to Stavanger from the S. It is entered between the
Hastein group, in the E, and the S islets of the Kvitsoya group,
towards the NNW. This passage leads NE for about 7 miles to
the hilly and comparatively steep islet of Alstein, in the vicinity
of Bragen, off Tungenes, and joins the S part of Kvit-
syafjorden, where it joins with the N part of Byfjorden.
Photo: Roar Johansen
2.3
2.3 Tungenes Light
Bragen, an above-water rock about 0.5 mile NNW of Tun-
2.3
genes, is marked by a light equipped with a racon.
Tungenes (59°02'N., 5°35'E.) is the N end of the Stavanger
2.3
peninsula. Shoals fringe the NW and N sides of the point and
are within the 10m curve, which lies offshore in this vicinity.
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 27

By Konrad Lawson (DSCF9411.JPG)[CC BY 2.0 (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0)], via Wikimedia Commons

2.3

2.3 Feistein Light

2.3Vestra Imsen (59°01'N., 5°22'E.), the SW islet of the Kvit-
soya group, contains a light, which marks the entrance to Has-
steinfjorden.
2.3Hastein (58°57'N., 5°26'E.), 45m high, is the largest of a
group of islets and rocks NW of the island of Rott. Lille Revin-
gen and Storee Revingen lie S of Hastein.
Stavanger Port District. Located on the North Sea side of the
Stavanger peninsula, Risavika is a public port mainly operated
by private companies. It functions as an oil-related base area
with services that supply the oil fields of the North Sea.
Port of Risavika

2.4 Feistein (58°50'N., 5°30'E.), an islet, lies approxi- https://www.stavangerhavn.no/en/maritime/terminals/

mately 12 miles S of Hasteinfjorden. In the S approach to
Stavanger, it lies about 4 miles N of Jaerens Rev Beacon. Nu-
merous detached shoals and rocks, best seen on the chart, lie
near Feistein.
Feistein Light is exhibited from a red metal tower, 25m high,
2.4
with two white bands, situated on the E side of Feistein. A
racon is located at the light.
Hengsoy (58°53'N., 5°26'E.) lies about 4 miles NW of
2.4
Feistein. A beacon stands on the island.
Solaviki (58°53'N., 5°34'E.) is a small bay indenting the W
2.4
side of the Stavanger peninsula. Depths in the middle of the
bay are 9.1 to 18.7m. Kolnesholmene is a group of islets, best
seen on the chart, lying in the entrance of Solaviki.
An airport runway points W into Solaviki Bay. Mariners are
2.4
advised of low-flying aircraft in this vicinity.
2.5 Risavika (58°56'N., 5°35'E.) (World Port Index No.
23487) and the surrounding sea entrances are included in
risavika
Risavika is a major oil terminal as well, and can accommo-
date large tankers. The harbor is entered between Laksholm-
baen (58°55.7'N., 5°34.3'E.) and Tangen, about 0.2 mile NE. A
breakwater joins Tangen, and runs SE to Melingsholmen. The
small harbor formed is called Tananger. On the N side of the
inlet, numerous quays and facilities are located at a fitting-out
and supply base for oil operations in the North Sea.
2.5Tides—Currents.—The HW interval at Tananger is 9 hours
36 minutes. The mean range of tide is 0.4m; the spring range of
tide is 0.5m.
2.5Depths—Limitations.—Risavika can accommodate ves-
sels up to 134,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 265m, a
maximum draft of 15.8m, and a maximum beam of 44m.
Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled Ri-
savika—Berth Information.

Risavika—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
North Harbor
Containers and general car-
No. 1 C 65m 11.0m — — — — go. Continuous berthing
length of 180m.
No. 1 A/B 115m 7.0m — — — — General cargo.

Pub. 182
28 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane

Risavika—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
General cargo. Consists of
No. 2 A/B 120m 11.0m — — — — two berths (A and B) with a
total length of 120m.
General cargo. Continuous
berthing length of 128m.
No. 3 A/B/C — 11.0m — — — —
Consists of three berths with
a length: 128m.
General cargo and break-
No. 4 A 35m 6.0m — — — —
bulk.
Containers. Continuous
berthing length of 165m.
No. 6 A/B — 5.4-7.0m — — — —
Consists of two berths in a
jetty with a length of 165m.
Shell AS Refinery
Bunkers. Displacement of
No. 15 115m 16.5m 265m 15.8m 44.0m 134,000 dwt
140,000t.
SkanGas LNG Terminal
Gas Refin- LNG and bunkers. Gas ca-
40m — 140m — — —
ery pacity of 12,000m3.
NorSea Tananger Marine Terminal
Chemicals, crude products,
No. 5A 75m 8.0m 135m 7.5m — 25,000 dwt and multipurpose. Displace-
ment of 38,000t.
East Harbor
Cement, scrap metal, break-
No. 19 100m 6.0m — — — —
bulk, and bulk cargo.
Ro-pax, containers, break-
No. 20 100m 11.0m — — — —
bulk and bulk cargo.
Ro-pax, others, containers,
No. 21/22 180m 11.0m — — — —
and breakbulk.
Ro-pax, offshore vessels,
No. 23/24 170m 11.0m — — — — project/heavy cargo, bulk
cargo, and breakbulk.
South Harbor
Ro-pax, containers, bulk
cargo, and breakbulk. Con-
tinuous berthing length of
No. 35/36 — 14.3m — — — —
287m. Consists of two
berths in a jetty with a
length of 287m.
Ro-pax, bulk cargo, contain-
ers, and breakbulk. Continu-
No. 37 — 14.3m — — — —
ous berthing length of
200m.

Pub. 182
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
Risavika—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth
LOA Draft
No. 38 158m 14.3m — —
Norcem Cement
No. 39 40m — — — —
2.5Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 50 gt.
The pilot station can be contacted by VHF radio and by tele-
phone. Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but may
be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an ad-
ditional cost.
2.5Regulations.—Tankers over 40,000 dwt, when navigating
within territorial waters near Risavika, are to exhibit three red
vertical lights at night, or display a large black cylinder by day,
to indicate that other vessels must not impede their safe naviga-
tion.
2.5Contact Information.—See the table titled Risavika—
Contact Information.
Risavika—Contact Information
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Telephone 47-51-715900
Facsimile 47-51-715900
E-mail post@risavika.no
2.5Anchorage.—Risavika provides a good anchorage over a
sand and clay bottom. Strong NW winds send in a considerable
swell. While anchoring, vessels must take care not to interfere
with the vessels mooring at the oil refinery in the SW part of
the bay. Anchorage can be taken in Tananger, in 6.9 to 9.1m,
sand and clay. There are mooring buoys and mooring rings.
Vessels awaiting berth/daylight navigation will be given in-
structions by the pilot on VHF. Any vessels above 40,000 dwt
and with a draft exceeding 10m normally berth and unberth on-
ly during daylight hours.
2.5Caution.—Two submarine cables are laid across the en-
trance to Risavika. When the entrance of Risavika is obstructed
by the hawsers of ships maneuvering off the oil facility, red
flashing lights will be shown either on Melingsholme or on the
facility. Lights indicate which side of the channel is obstructed.
2.6 Skudenesfjorden (59°05'N., 5°15'E.), a deep clear
opening, forms the principal outer and easiest approach to Stavan-
ger. The entrance to the fjord lies between Geitungane; two close
lying islets off the S end of Karmoya, and the NW side of Kvitsoy;
about 6 miles SE of Geitungane. Skudenesfjorden can be easily
entered by day or night. Geitungane Light is on the S islet.
2.6When nearing the land, the fjord entrance will be very con-
spicuous. Cone-shaped mountains on Vestre Bokn and the light
structure on Kvitsoya are prominent. A radio tower, marked by
29
Remarks
Beam Size
Ro-pax, containers, and
breakbulk. Berthing length
— —
of 198m (including dol-
phins).
Cement, bulk cargo, and
—
breakbulk.
obstruction lights, stands on Vestre Bokn.
2.6Tides—Currents.—There appear to be no perceptible tidal
currents setting N or S across the entrance of Skudenesfjorden,
but inside the fjord, weak tidal currents set inward and outward
near the land. Off the fjord entrance, the tidal current usually sets
N, but the wind has much to do with its velocity. Near the land
on both sides of the entrance, this current usually sets inward
during a rising tide and outward during a falling tide. Near the S
end of Karmoya, a strong current sets E and into Karmsundet
during rising W winds.
2.6Pilotage.—Karmoy pilot station provides pilotage for ves-
sels exceeding 30,000 gross tons and classified to carry hazard-
ous or polluting cargo. Pilotage should be ordered using
SafeSeaNet, or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center
(this may incur additional charges). The pilot will board,
weather permitting, and only with prior permission of the pilot
station, in Skudenesfjorden Vest (Boarding Position No. 1) in
position 59°02.0'N, 5°10.0'E. Otherwise, the pilot will board in
one of the following positions:
1. Skudenesfjorden (Boarding Position No. 2)—position
59°06'30.0''N, 5°27'00.0''E.
2. Karmsundet (Boarding Position No. 3)—position
59°13'06.0''N, 5°21'00.0''E.
3. Feistein (Boarding Position Feisten No. 1)—position
58°51'00.0''N, 5°30'17.4''E.
2.6Regulations.—Vessels engaged in fishing within the area
covered by Kvitsoy VTS are required to maintain a continuous
listening watch and also to answer calls.
2.6Under conditions where two or more vessels are meeting or
passing one another within a distance of 0.5 mile in the VTS
area, they are required to contact one another on VHF. Each
must assure the other of the intent to a safe procedural action
and agree to yield.
2.6Vessel Traffic Service.—Traffic is controlled by Kvitsoy
(Kvitsoya) Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) for the area bound by
the following positions:
a. 58°45'00.0''N, 5°29'36.0''E. (Jaerens Rev)
b. 58°45'00.0''N, 5°21'36.0''E.
c. 58°58'54.0''N, 5°14'54.0''E.
d. 59°05'36.0''N, 5°05'24.0''E.
e. 59°14'18.0''N, 4°43'42.0''E.
f. 59°17'18.0''N, 4°42'48.0''E.
g. 59°19'36.0''N, 4°43'48.0''E.
h. 59°34'30.0''N, 4°53'36.0''E.
i. 59°34'30.0''N, 5°11'05.4''E. (Bomlahuk)
j. 59°32'57.0''N, 5°14'23.4''E. (Haskru Light)
Pub. 182
30 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane

By Birgit Juel Martinsen [CC BY 2.0 (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0)], via Wikimedia Commons

Kvitsoy VTS Center

The VTS area is divided into two sectors, as follows:

2.6 2. When passing between VHF channel sectors.
1. The area N of 59°12.0'W and W of 5°21.5'E and the 3. Before moving with the VTS area (leaving the wharf,
area N of 59°20.0'W and W of 5°58.8'E—uses VHF channel berth, or mooring facility).
19. 4. When being towed.
2. The remainder of the area—uses VHF channel 18. 5. When at anchor.
Participation in the VTS is mandatory for the following:
2.6 6. When involved in an accident.
1. Vessels of 24m in length and above, including towing 7. Immediately if the vessel is in difficulty and likely to
and pushing vessels. result in a change of voyage plan.
2. Vessels towing an object that is longer or wider than 8. When passing position 58°58'33.0''N, 5°43'37.8''E
24m. (Stavanger) (Inbound/Outbound).
3. Vessels engaged in towing operations where the total All vessels must maintain a continuous listening watch on
2.6

length is greater than 35m. the appropriate VHF channel for the area. All communication
4. Vessels of all length carrying dangerous and/or pollut- with the VTS shall be in a Scandinavian language or, if not us-
ing liquid cargo in bulk. ing a pilot, in English.
All vessels must request a sailing clearance at least 1 hour
2.6 In certain cases, permission will have to be renewed from the
2.6

prior to entering the VTS area or leaving a quay or anchorage. VTS Center when passing through specific areas. For further
The following information should be given: information contact Kvitsoy VTS.
1. Vessel name and call sign.
2. Sailing Plan and destination. Kvitsoy—Contact Information
3. ETA at the outer limit of the VTS area and the ETA at
the port, mooring, or anchorage—for vessels located outside Pilot Station
the operational area of the VTS. VHF VHF channel 13
4. ETD from the VTS area—for vessels inside the area.
5. Any other information requested by the VTS, such as 47-51-735397
Telephone
vessel type, nationality, and port of registration. 47-51-735398
Vessels should send position reports to the Kvitsoy VTS, as
2.6

Facsimile 47-51-735391
follows:
1. When passing the limits of the VTS area when head- E-mail pilot.kvitsoy@kystverket.no
ing into the VTS area.

Pub. 182
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 31

Kvitsoy—Contact Information from some of the islands and islets; buoys and perches mark
the intricate channels leading to some of the anchorages.
VTS Center 2.7A number of sheltered anchorages are indicated among the
Call sign Kvitsoy VTS islands and islets, but entry should not be attempted without lo-
cal knowledge. Some of the islands are connected by cause-
VHF channel 19—When N of 59°12.0'N ways.
and W of 5°21.5'E and when N of 2.7Settlement on the islands is concentrated at Ytstabohamn
VHF 59°20.0'N and E of 5°58.0'E. and Leiasundet. Ytstabohamn is located on the S side of Kvit-
VHF channel 18—the remainder of the soya and Leiasundet is located on the W side of Kviting. Kvit-
VTS area. soya Light, 27m high, standing on the SW side of Kvitsoya, is
conspicuous.
47-71-736032 (south sector)
2.7Kvitsoya radio station is located on Krakoy, about 0.5 mile E
Telephone 47-51-736033 (north sector) of Kvitsoya; the radio masts are conspicuous and stand up to
125m high. There are numerous radio masts on this island. A
47-95-116032
group of four masts stands at the N end.
Facsimile 47-71-736031 2.7Caution.—Due to a strong electromagnetic field around the
E-mail vts.kvitsoy@kystverket.no masts, navigation, and communication equipment in the vicini-
ty may be disturbed. Vessels passing close to Kvitsoya Broad-
casting Station (59°04'N., 5°24'E.) may experience electronic
2.6Vessels of less than 100m loa do not need to obtain permis- interference due to the station electromagnetic fields.
sion from the VTS when only using the fairway E of a line
joining Toftoy Light and Dusaviga Light. 2.8 Jarsteinen (59°09'N., 5°11'E.) is a small island about
2.6All vessels using the main fairway to/from Sauda should ob- 0.5 mile off the SW end of Karmoya. Svelgjeskjaer, an above-
tain permission from the VTS on VHF channel 19 when pass-
water rock, is located about 0.2 mile S of Jarsteinen. Floating
ing a line between Vardnes Light and Jelsahunden Light. wind turbines are located about 5 miles W of Jarsteinen.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Kvitsoy—Con-
Geitungane (59°08'N., 5°15'E.) are two islets that lie close S
2.6

2.8

tact Information.
2.6 Kvitsoya Light
2.7 Kvitsoya (59°04'N., 5°25'E.), the largest of a group of
islands and islets, marks the E entrance of the approach to
Stavenger via Skudenesfjorden. The land of Kvitsoya is low
and relatively inconspicuous from offshore. Lights are shown
of Karmoya. A light is shown from a tower, 11m high, standing
on the S islet. A racon is located at the light tower.
2.8Kryssgrunn, a 9.1m depth, lies about 0.5 mile ESE of the S
islet. An overhead cable, with a clearance of 20m, spans the
channel between the N islet and Karmoya.
Skudeneshavn (59°09'N., 5°16'E.) (World Port Index No.
23485) located on the S side of Karmoya island, is fronted on
its S side by Vikeholmen, Bakareholmen, Steiningsholmen,
and several smaller islets and rocks. Three small moles also en-
close the harbor. Skudeneshavn is a sheltered harbor used by
ferry and coastal vessels up to 5,000 dwt.
2.8Nesagapet, the E and principal entrance of Skudeneshavn, is
between Vikeholmen and the S coast of Karmoya. A light is
shown from the head of a small mole on the N side of Nesaga-
pet. This entrance has a least charted depth in the fairway of
6.2m.
2.8Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
Skudeneshavn—Berthing Information.
2.8Caution.— Submarine cables are laid across the S and NW
parts of the harbor and a submarine pipeline is laid on the NE
side. Care must be taken to pass S of a 5.3m depth which lies in
the narrowest part of the sound. There are several rocks in the
harbor, some of which are marked by iron posts. Navigation is
not affected by ice.

Skudeneshavn—Berthing Information
Maximum
Berth Length Remarks
Vessel Draft
No. 1 80m 5.5m —
No. 2 80m 5.5m —
No. 3 80m 5.5m —

Pub. 182
32 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
Skudeneshavn—Berthing Information
Berth Length
Refrigeration Plant Berth 100m
Cuxhaven Berth 100m
Ols Berth 60m
2.9 Austbaen (59°08'N., 5°17'E.), the outermost danger
in the approach to Skudeneshavn, lies about 1 mile ESE of
Geitungane. Sondreflu is a 4.6m depth about 183m W of Aust-
baen.
The S coast of Vestre Bokn, towards the NE, on the N shore
of the Skudenesfjorden, E of Karmoya, is formed by Drivsund
(59°10'N., 5°25'E.), an islet and shoal-encumbered bay; the S
ends of the two parts of Vestre Bokn form the W and E shores
of this bay. Vestre Bokn is in two parts; its SW and smaller part
is separated from the main portion by Sundalandsstraumen, a
very narrow sound extending NW from the head of Drivsund.
Drivsund has several anchorages for small vessels, but local
knowledge is required.
2.9Arsgrunn (59°08'N., 5°26'E.), with a least depth of 3.2m
and marked on its SW end by a buoy, is located about 1 mile
SSW of the SE extremity of Vestre Bokn.
2.9Kraka (59°09'N., 5°25'E.) is an above-water rock and
Skolleflu, 0.5 mile ENE, is a 3m shoal marked by a buoy.
2.9Fjoloy and Mosteroy (59°05'N., 5°38'E.), with some islets
between and near them, form the NE side of Kvitsoyfjorden.
The islets and dangers on the NE side of Kvitsoyfjorden, be-
tween Alstein and Sveinane, together with those near Tungene-
set, form the SW side of the fjord.
2.9Mosteroy, the SE part of which is called Aske, is nearly
joined at its NW end to Klosteroy and is separated from Fjoloy
by Klosterhamn, a sheltered harbor for small vessels with local
knowledge.
2.9Isgrunn, a 6.9m depth, lies about 0.5 mile off the SW side of
Mosteroy, in a position about 1 mile SSE of Ejoloy. Langeflu, a
12.8m depth, lies about 0.25 mile NE of Isgrunn.
2.10 Dysjalandsvag (59°05'N., 5°40'E.), between the SE
end of Mosteroy and Aske, affords secure anchorage, in 12.8 to
18.3m. Local knowledge is required.
Gryda Light (59°03'N., 5°37'E.) stands on a rock, lies
2.10
awash on the NE side of the junction of Kvitsoyfjorden and
Byfjorden. It is located about 0.5 mile off the NW side of the
island of Bru and nearly 1.25 miles NE of Tungeneset. A
12.8m patch is located about 0.1 mile NW of Gryda.
Nordgrunn is a 6.9m depth lying about 1 mile NW of Gryda.
2.10
Kolsboane, about 0.5 mile NNW of Gryda, is two rocks; the
SW rock is awash and marked by an iron beacon. while the NE
rock, with a depth of 1.5m, is marked by an iron perch.
Byfjorden is the inner part of the approach to Stavanger. It is
2.10
entered from Kvitsoyfjorden between Gryda and Bragen. The
island of Bru, on the NE side of the fjord, is comparatively
steep. The W slope of the high land descends almost perpen-
dicularly to the fjord. Brufjell, on the SW side of Bru, rises to a
Pub. 182
Maximum
Remarks
Vessel Draft
5.5m —
5.2m Ro-ro.
4.3m Ro-ro.
height of 86m close inland.
Brukjeoy (59°02'N., 5°40'E.) lies on the NE side of By-
2.10
fjorden at its junction with Amoyfjorden. The islet lies about
0.5 mile SE of Bru; close W of it is the smaller Persholmen,
from which a light is shown. Shoals, fringing the E end of
Brukjeoy, extend about 0.1 mile offshore and are marked by a
buoy.
Flataskjaer is an above-water rock about 183m W of Per-
2.10
sholmen. An iron perch, about 183m NW of Flataskjaer, marks
the outer end of a reef extending from the rock. Sore Raune-
grunn, a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch, lies about 0.2
mile N of Flataskjaer.
Randabergviga (59°02'N., 5°37'E.) is a small bight about 1
2.10
mile SE of Tungeneset. Good anchorage can be taken here, in
12.8m, sand and mud.
2.11 Dusavik (59°00'N., 5°40'E.), located on the W side of
Amoyfjorden, provides a protected anchorage, in 22m, gravel
bottom. A large installation, with deep-water facilities for ser-
vicing oil rigs, is located in Dusavik.
Byfjorden extends in a SE direction, where it meets Amoy-
2.11
fjorden. A chain of small islets and dangers, which are scat-
tered across the E end of Amoyfjorden, separates this basin
from the NW end of Horgefjorden. General depths through the
middle of Amoyfjorden are 64m to 101m.
A 10.1m depth and an 8.2m depth are located about 0.5 mile
2.11
NW and nearly 1 mile NNW, respectively, of the NE extremity
of Hundvag. Dangers elsewhere are those extending across the
E end of the fjord or lying within 0.2 mile offshore.
A light is shown from Klovningen, the largest of a group of
2.11
four small islets in the E end of Amoyfjorden. A beacon stands
on the largest islet. Buoys and perches mark a few of the dan-
gers lying between Klovningen and the S side of Amoy.
Vessels proceeding through Amoyfjorden to Horgefjorden
2.11
should pass N of Storholmen, in a depth of 24m, staying in
mid-channel, with the S extremity of Hille Kjeoy (59°02'N.,
5°48'E.) bearing 075°.
The approach to Stavanger or to Sandnes, at the head of
Gandsfjorden, can be made from Horgefjorden through Lin-
doysund, the passage between Vassoy and Lindoy, or from
Hogsfjorden through the passage between Kalvoy and Uskjo.
Revingen (59°00'N., 5°49'E.), which is marked by a lighted
2.11
beacon, lies in the N part of Lindoysund, about 0.2 mile N of
Lindoy. Shoal water extends about 91m N and S from this
rock. Revingsgrunn is an 11.9m depth in the SW part of Horge-
fjorden, about 0.5 mile NNE of Revingen.
Tunsoy (58°59'N., 5°49'E.) is close SE of Lindoy; between
2.11
them is Lindoygrunn, which is marked by an iron perch.
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 33

Stavanger (58°59'N., 5°45'E.)
World Port Index No. 23480
2.12 Stavanger was founded around the beginning of the
ninth century, and is one of Norway’s oldest cities. The port is
are usually from the SE. Northwest gales make loading and un-
loading difficult at most of the main quays. Prevailing winds in
the summer are SW and W; in winter they are E and NE. The
climate is mild, and there is frequent precipitation throughout
the year. Stavanger is an ice-free port.
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents are slight. During NW
2.12

noted for shipbuilding, fishing, and as a main support base for gales, the water may rise to the decks on some piers. Normal
the oil and gas industry in the North Sea area close to southern tidal range is 0.6m.
Norway. Depths—Limitations.—General depths in the fairway be-
2.12

tween the entrance of Stavanger at Ulsneset and the entrance of

Port of Stavanger Home Vagen are 23m to 50m.Numerous depths and rocks less than
charted exist in the approaches to Stavanger.
http://www.stavanger-havn.no Vessels with drafts of up to 20m can be handled at this port.
2.12

Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled

2.12 Winds—Weather.—Gales are fairly frequent in winter and Stavanger—Berth Information.

Stavanger—BerthiInformation
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Size
Mekjarvik
Fast ferries and ro-pax. Berthing
Makjavik Ferry 68m 10.0m — — — length of 100m (including dol-
phins).
Scrap metal, containers, and break-
Mekjarvik 250m 15.0m 284.9m — —
bulk.
Monier Ardal
Monier 73m — 115.5m — — Cement and sand.
NCC Roads
Aggregates, others, gravel, crushed
NCC 40m — 90.6m — —
stone, and breakbulk.
Randaberg Industries Terminal
Randaberg E 230m 6.5-12.0m 147m — — Cement, containers, and breakbulk.
Randaberg W 80m — 97m — — Cement.
NorSea Dusavika
Offshore vessels, project/heavy
NorSea 235m 6.0-11.0m 160.6m — 50,000 dwt
cargo, and breakbulk.
Norstone Dirdal
ND 40m — 104.8m — — Aggregates.
Norgrain
East 130m 8.0m 113.7m — — Vegetable oils and grain.
Main 165m 15.5m 225m — — Vegetable oils and grain.
West 63m 6.5m — — — Vegetable oils and grain.
Rosenberg WorleyParsons
Breakbulk. Berthing length of
Rosenberg 90m — — — —
260m (including. dolphins).
Stravanger International Cruise Terminal
021V 75m — 89.4m 10.0m — Ro-ro/lo-lo and breakbulk.
018V Upper 149m 14.0m 58m 8.2m — Cruise.

Pub. 182
34 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane

Stavanger—BerthiInformation
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Size
018V Lower 53m 14.0m 58m 8.2m — Cruise.
016V 309m 8.5m 58m 7.5m — Cruise, ro-pax, and breakbulk.
013V 163m 8.2m 57.4m 7.5m — Cruise and breakbulk.
O05V 149m 6.8m 68.3m — — Cruise vessels and breakbulk.
O04V 78m 6.6m 69.6m — — Cruise vessels.
O03V 55m 6.5m 68.3m — — Cruise vessels..
O02V 60m 6.5m 68.3m — — Cruise vessels.
O01V 135m 7.2m 67.3m — — Cruise vessels.
Kjerringholmen
No. 80 66m 5-8.8m 57.4m — — Fast ferries and ro-ro/lo-lo.
Jorenholmen Terminal
Jorenholmen 144m 9.3m 37.9m — — Fast ferries and ro-ro/lo-lo.
Fiskapiren Passenger Terminal
Fiskapiren 130m 4.6-16.8m 42m — — Fast ferries and ro-ro/lo-lo.
Forsand Sandkompani
FS 80m — 113.7m — — Handling grout.
Bekhuskaien Terminal
Ro-ro/lo-lo, offshore vessels, and
200 Ro-Ro 107m — 98.8m — —
breakbulk. Waiting berth.
210 109m 8.0-8.3m 109.1m — — Breakbulk.
Stavanger Recycling
Recycling 50m — 189.8m — — Scrap metal.
Felleskjopeet Rogalad Agder
FRA Vegetable oils, seeds, animal feeds,
50m — 175.5m — — fertilizer, others, and project/heavy
cargo.
Siriskjaer
Fast ferries and breakbulk. Waiting
Siriskjael 95m — — — —
berth.
Skogsto
Skogsto N 193m 4.8-7.0m 87.3m — — —
Skogsto S 112m 4.1-5.0m 87.3m — — —
Bunker Terminal Stravanger
Texaco 30m 9.0m 100m 7.2m 7,112 dwt Petroleum products and bunkers.
Skretting Terminal
Vegetable oils, fishin vesselsg,
salmon and trout food, and liquid
T Skretting 35m 6.0m 225m — — cargo. The berth has numerous
mooring points along shoreside
and mooring buoys.

Pub. 182
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 35

Stavanger from W
2.12

Aspect.—The principal part of the city faces a bay on the N

2.12 Vessels greater than 30,000 gt carrying hazardous or pollut-
2.12

side of a small promontory which extends E from the main ing cargo will use the boarding position at Skudenesfjorden
peninsula. The port area now has a total quayage length of ap- Vest.
proximately 5,000m and is divided into many separate termi- Pilot boats are white and have orange superstructures.
2.12

nals, spread across a large area, from the industry port of For detailed information on pilotage regulations, see Pub.
2.12

Mekjavik to the fish and animal feed silos at Felleskjopet. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
The principal deep-water quays line the shores of Vagen
2.12 Signals.—Storm signals are shown from a mast on the NE
2.12

(58°58.3'N., 5°44.0'E.), an indentation on the N side, near the side of Vagen.

city. Numerous small shoals and rocky patches are scattered Contact Information.—See the table titled Stavanger—
among the islands and islets which form the NE side of the har- Contact Information.
bor.
The basin just E of Stavanger is bounded by Steinsoya, Or-
2.12
Stavanger—Contact Information
moy, and Vassoy to the N; Lindoy, Hellesoy, and Kalvoy to the
NE; and Uskjo to the S. A chain of islets and dangers extends Port Authority
SW for about 1 mile through the middle of this area. 47-51-501200
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for Stavanger and is
2.12
Telephone
47-51-501201 (after hours)
available 24 hours. Pilots should be requested at least 24 hours
in advance. Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but Facsimile 47-78-501222
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an E-mail info@stavanger.havn.no
additional cost. The Kvitsoy pilots are to be advised of the ves-
sel’s arrival, giving the following information: Port Control
1. Vessel name. VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
2. Call sign.
3. Gross registered tons. Telephone 47-51-501201
4. Draft. Facsimile 47-51-511221
5. Cargo.
6. Port of destination. E-mail havneoppsyn@stavanger.havn.no
Pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16 and meet
2.12
Harbormaster
inbound vessels outside Feistein, as follows:
1. Approximately 21 miles S of Stavanger, in position Telephone 47-51-501212
58°50'N, 5°26'E.
2. In Skudenesfjorden, at Skedenesfjorden Vest, in posi- Anchorages—Stavanger affords fairly good anchorage
2.12

tion 59°02'N, 5°10'E. throughout, but the best is in the E part S of Solyst and Gras-
3. At Skedenesfjorden, approximately 18 miles NW of holmen, where the depths are 18.3 to 27.4m.
Stavanger, in position 59°06'N, 5°26'E. Deep-draft vessels also anchor NE of Grasholmen, ap-
2.12

Pub. 182
36 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane

2.12 Stavanger Petroleum Museum

proaching through Amoyfjorden and Horgefjorden. Depths—Limitations.—Two concrete quays operated by

2.13

Amoyfjorden provides anchorage for large vessels and oil

2.12
rigs. The water depth varies from 30m to 130m. Smaller ves-
sels may anchor off Ulsnes Point, which has a maximum depth
of 40m.
Vessels in quarantine or without berth assignment should an-
2.12
chor near the entrance at Ulsnes Point, taking care to avoid the
StatOil are located in Lurahammaren (58°52.7'N., 5°44.8'E.).
The N most quay is the largest, Further S past Luravika is the
Somanset Public Industrial Quay (58°52.2'N., 5°44.8'E.), Con-
tinuing S along the W shore of the harbor is Rappaneset
(58°51.63'N., 5°44.88'E.), where there are three quays.
The public quays (58° 51.3'N 5°44.6'E) are situated on the W
2.13

submarine cables and water pipelines.
Gandsfjorden is a construction site for large offshore struc-
2.12
tures (depth of 245m) and a lay-up area for oil rigs (depth of
180m).
Stavanger Port Control is to be contacted prior to anchoring.
2.12
Port Control uses VHF channels 13 and 16 and may also be
side of Vagen. This long berthing area consists of a pier, at the
N end, and two concrete quays further S. Vessels up to 198m in
length and 11m draft can be accommodated. For more berthing
information see the table titled Sandnes—Berthing Informa-
tion.
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
2.13

reached by telephone (51-73-53-97). may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
Caution.—Numerous changes to depths, lights, and aids to
2.12 additional cost.
navigation have been reported (2008) in Stavanger and its ap- Contact Information.—See the table titled Sandnes—Con-
2.13

proaches. Vessels should contact local authorities for further tact Information.
information. Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor off Sandnes, in 13.7
2.13

to 18.3m. Small vessels can also anchor near the head of the
2.13 Sandnes (58°51'N., 5°45'E.) (World Port Index No. fjord, in a depth of about 6.1m.
23470) extends around the head of and along the W shore of
Gandsfjorden. Behind the town, on the SE, the land rises in Sandnes—Contact Information
hummocky hills, 101 to 198m high. East of Gandsfjorden and
immediately NE of the town, the hills rise more steeply to a VHF VHF channels 14 and 16
height of about 189m. The country W of Sandnes is compara- 47-51-608990
tively low, about 46m high in some places, and is mainly fertile Telephone
agricultural land. 47-47-853012 (duty officer)
Facsimile 47-51-608991
Port of Sandnes E-mail post@sandneshavn.no
https://www.sandneshavn.no

Sandnes—Berthing Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
LOA Draft
Oneco Technology AS Terminal
Offshore vessels and project/heavy cargo. Berthing
Oneco Technologies AS — — — —
length of 155m (including dolphins).

Pub. 182
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
Sandnes—Berthing Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Vessel
LOA Draft
Sandnes Harbor Terminal
North 315m 8.0m — —
Equinor Terminal
Lura 77m 11.5m 198m 11.0m
The Fjords
2.14 Gandsfjorden (58°55'N., 5°46'E.), a deep fjord,
trends S for about 7 miles from Store Maroy. There is a 5-knot
speed limit in the inner part of the fjord.
Gandsflu, a 5m depth marked by a light, lies about 0.4 mile
2.14
SW of Store Maroy. Depths of 7.3 and 8.7m lie within about
0.1 mile NNE of Gandsflu.
A quay, with a depth of 7.6m alongside, is located in the vi-
2.14
cinity of Fiskaneset (58°54'N., 5°45'E.), on the W shore of
Gandsfjorden. Another quay, with a depth of 11m alongside,
lies about 1 mile further S.
Buoys mark some of the shore banks in the inner part of
2.14
Gandsfjorden. Two lights, in range 186.5° and shown from the
E shore opposite Sandnes, lead into the fjord.
2.15 Riskafjorden (58°56'N., 5°49'E.), which is about 0.2
mile wide in its narrowest part, is formed between the main-
land SE of Stavanger and the S and E sides of the island of
Uskjo. It branches off from the NE end of Gandsfjorden and, at
its N end, leads into the junction of Horgefjorden and Hog-
fjorden.
Riskafjorden is deep and, except for Riskaholmene, two
2.15
small islets in mid-channel SW of the S extremity of Uskjom,
is free from dangers in the fairway.
In Riskafjorden, there is good anchorage, sand and shell, for
2.15
small vessels at the head of a small inlet at Hammersak on the
SE side of the fjord. There are mooring buoys and several
quays, with depths up to 4m, located in the inlet. There is a
speed limit of 8 knots the inlet.
Li (58°55'N., 5°48'E.) is located on the S shore of
2.15
Riskafjorden, about 0.4 mile SSW of Riskaholmene. A con-
crete quay, with a depth of 4m alongside, is located at Li.
2.16 Horgefjorden (59°01'N., 5°50'E.) surrounds the islet
Horge. The fjord is bounded on the SW and W by the many is-
lands and islets lying off Stavanger, on the NW by the islets
and dangers at the E end of Amoyfjorden and the SE side of
Amoy, on the N by Hille Kjeoy and the island of Hidle, and on
the E by Heng and Idse and the chain of islets and rocks be-
tween these two islands. General depths throughout Horge-
fjorden are ample, but there are some shoal patches. Vessels
without local knowledge should not attempt passage between
the islets and reefs lying between Heng and Idse.
Hogsfjorden (58°56'N., 6°00'E.) trends SE for about 12
miles, is from 0.5 mile to 1.5 miles wide, and is deep and clear
of dangers in the fairway. Several small sounds lead off from
Hogsfjorden. Lysefjorden is entered about midway along the
37
Remarks
Ro-ro freight, containers, breakbulk, and reefer.
Aviation fuel, chemicals, dirty products, and bunkers.
NE shore.
Frafjorden, a continuation of Hogsfjorden, trends E for about
2.16
3 miles, is about 0.5 mile wide, and is also deep and clear. The
shores of both fjords are mostly steep-to.
A wooden quay at the head of Frafjorden has a depth of
2.16
about 4.5m alongside and can accommodate vessels with drafts
to 5.5m.
2.17 Idsefjorden (59°01'N., 5°58'E.) is the basin formed
between the mainland, on the N and E; the islands of Idsal and
Idse, on the S; and Heng and the islets and rocks extending S,
on the W. Botnefjorden, a narrow inlet, extends SE for about 2
miles from the E end of Idsefjorden.
Most of Idsefjorden is deep and clear, but there are shoals
2.17
and rocks near shore and among the scattered islets at the W
and E ends. A few detached shoals lie near the fairway. Inside
Botnefjorden, the depths shoal from about 81m in the entrance
to 16.5m near the head of the fjord.
Jorpeland (59°01'N., 6°02'E.), a settlement in a small cove
2.17
on the NE shore of Idsefjorden, is one of the larger places in
the area. It has numerous buildings and workshops and a quay
with 4 to 6m alongside. There is a steel works, with a quay
having a depth of about 5m alongside. A telegraph station is lo-
cated here.
Hillefjorden (59°04'N., 5°49'E.) is a comparatively broad
sheet of open water between Aske, Rennesoy, and Brimse, on
the N, and Amoy and Hidle, on the S. Depths through the fair-
ways of Hidlefjorden range from about 29 to 180m.
Anchorage can be taken, in 13m, good holding ground, clay
2.17
and mud. Mooring rings and buoys are available. In the NE
part of the cove, there is a quay, with depths of 3.1 to 4.8m
alongside and a length of 84m. A grain elevator has a quay,
36m long, with a depth of 9m alongside.
A secure harbor for small vessels lies on the E side of Hi-
2.17
dlefjorden off the village of Tau (59°04'N., 5°55'E.)
2.18 Mastrafjorden (59°06'N., 5°39'E.) is a good channel
for vessels bound to any of the fjords E or S of Stavanger. From
its NW entrance, it trends SE between the SW side of Renne-
soy and the NE sides of Klosteroy, Mosteroy, and Aske for
about 6 miles to its junction with Hidlefjorden. The least width
between the land on either side is about 0.4 mile; however,
shoals on either side reduce the navigable channel width to less
than this in places. A least depth of 18.3m is available through
the fairway, but there are lesser depths and dangers nearby.
Anchorage.—Medium-size vessels can take good anchorage
2.18
in Finnesandbukt, the bay formed between Klosteroy and the N
side of Mosteroya. The anchorage is in a depth of 20m, coarse
Pub. 182
38 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
sand. Care is necessary to avoid Bakhodnagrunn, a 9m shoal
lying in the entrance to this bay.
Vikevag (59°06'N., 5°42'E.), on the N shore of Mas-
2.18
trafjorden, is the main port on Rennesoy. The largest quay, on
the NW side of the inlet, has depths to 5m alongside. A quay at
Dale, about 1 mile SE of Vikevag, has depths from 5 to 6m.
Caution.—Numerous submarine cables extend from Renne-
2.18
soy to the surrounding islands.
Saebosundet (59°10'N., 5°56'E.) is the narrow sound sepa-
rating the NE side of Fogn from Teistholme, Lindoy, Buoy,
Byre, Bokn, and other islands, islets, and rocks to the NE. It
leads from the N end of Fognafjorden into Finnoyfjorden. Al-
though very narrow in places, the channel fairway has ample
charted depths. Detached 4.1m to 9.1m depths lie near the fair-
way. Some of the detached dangers and those extending from
the islets on the NE side of the passage are marked by buoys or
perches. Other navigable channels lead among these islets.
The Fjords Branching from Skudenesfjorden
2.19 Boknafjorden (59°12'N., 5°38'E.), a continuation of
Skudenesfjorden, trends NE for about 10 miles to the S en-
trance of Nedstrandsfjorden. It is about 4 to 6 miles wide be-
tween the islands and islets on either side. Depths through the
fairway are great, but there are some detached dangers, particu-
larly in the NE part and along the SE side.
Boknasundet (59°14'N., 5°27'E.) lies between Vestre Bokn
and Austre Bokn and leads NW for about 3 miles between
Boknafjorden and the S end of Boknaflaeet. Passage through
the sound may be difficult for vessels over 107m in length and
with a draft of over 7.6m.
Boknasundet
2.19
Two submarine cables cross the sound in the vicinity of Bok-
2.19
nasund Light.
Knarrholme (59°13'N., 5°28'E.) is the farthest SW of a
2.19
group of above-water rocks on the SW side of the fairway.
Knarrholmgrunn, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked on
its NE side by a buoy, lies about 91m E of Knarrholme.
Strandvikflu, lying near the E shore of the sound about 0.2
2.19
mile NE of Knarrholmgrunn, has a depth of less than 1.8m and
is marked by an iron perch.
Ta (59°14'N., 5°27'E.), a reef marked at its S end by a bea-
2.19
con, is on the W side of the fairway. It lies within about 0.1
mile offshore and about 2 miles NNW of Knarrholme. A 6.4m
depth is located about 183m E of the beacon.
Pub. 182
2.20 Bleikje (59°15'N., 5°27'E.), a small islet, lies in mid-
channel about 0.5 mile N of Ta. A 1.8m depth is located about
137m SE of the islet.
Brattholme lies 183m off the W side of Boknsundet and
2.20
about 0.5 mile W of Bleikje. A smaller islet is located about
183m NW of Brattholme; Brattholmbaen, with a depth of
about 1.5m and marked by an iron perch, lies about 0.1 mile
SE of Brattholme.
Tides—Currents.—In Boknasundet, the tidal current de-
2.20
pends mainly on the wind and may run in one direction contin-
uously for a considerable time. It is very strong in the
narrowest part of the sound. During long periods of calm
weather at sea, the tidal current runs regularly, changes direc-
tion at half tide, and is strongest at HW. Farther N in Boknaf-
laeet, the tidal current usually runs in the same direction as in
Boknsundet. It often changes direction under Boknahovud, the
NW extremity of Vestre Bokn, and is strongest round Bleikje
and between Vesteroy and Hovringoy.
In Austdjupet, the tidal current usually sets in a direction op-
2.20
posite to that in Karmsund, but depends greatly on the wind.
Still farther N in Fordesfjorden, there is usually an incoming
2.20
tidal current in bad weather and an outgoing current in fine
weather, but these currents are very weak.
Depths—Limitations.—A quay at Alvestadkroken, on the
2.20
W shore of Boknasundet, has depths up to 5m alongside. Fuel
oil and fresh water are available. A quay at Foresvik, about 1
mile NW of Alvestadkroken, has depths from 5 to 7m along-
side. Fuel oil and fresh water are available.
Anchorage.—Anchorages for small vessels with local
2.20
knowledge are available on both sides of Boknasundet.
2.21 Boknaflaeet (59°16'N., 5°26'E.) is the basin between
Ognoy, Austeroy, and Vesteroy on the E, and Hovringoy and
the numerous islets on the W. Boknaflaeet is a continuation N
of Boknasundet and leads into Fordesfjorden.
Depths through the fairway are ample, but there are nearby
2.21
shoals and rocks on either side.
Anchorage.—On the NE side of Boknaflaeet, anchorage can
2.21
be taken between the W side of Austeroy (59°17'N., 5°27'E.)
and the SE end of Vesteroy, or between the N side of Austeroy
and Kvernholmane, about 0.2 mile N of the NW extremity of
Austeroy. A rock lies awash close off the W side of Austeroy in
the channel between these two anchorages.
The fairway through Austdjupet (59°16'N., 5°24'E.) is clear
2.21
and deep except for Austdjupholmane, two islets which lie in
mid-channel about 2 miles from the S entrance. Other dangers
are near the islets on either side of the channel.
Guleskjaer, a detached rock, is on the W side of the fairway,
2.21
about 0.3 mile W of the W islet of Austdjupholmane.
Tallaksholmane, consisting of two islets and rocks, is the
2.21
outermost group in the SE part of Austdjupet.
2.22 Karsto Gas Terminal (59°16'N., 5°30'E.) (World
Port Index No. 23451) is located a little over 0.75 mile NW of
Arviksundet (59°16'N., 5°33'E.), which lies close N of the N
extremity of Arvikholmen. Gas from the North Sea fields is
piped to the terminal, where it is processed and stored while
awaiting export.
A submarine pipeline connects Karsto Gas Terminal with
2.22
Austre Bokn, 2 miles S. Vessels are prohibited to anchor within
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
2.21 Karsto Gas Terminal from W
0.2 mile of the pipeline. Karsto Control can be contacted on
VHF channel 11.
Depths—Limitations.—There are four berths with lengths
2.22
between 160m and 275m and depths alongside between 10 and
14m. Gas and petroleum products are handled at these berths.
A safety zone extends 300m from shore in the terminal area,
2.22
as shown on the chart.
Pilotage.—A sea pilot should be embarked from Kvitsoya
2.22
pilot station; they will also act as a harbor pilot.
Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be or-
2.22
dered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an addition-
al cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Regulations.—Vessels over 50 grt and carrying dangerous
2.22
cargo wishing to use Karsto Gas Terminal must obtain prior
permission from the harbor terminal before entering the regu-
lated area of Skudenesfjorden and Boknafjorden E of the line
between the light on Geitungen (59°08'N., 5°15'E.) and the
light on Vestre Imsen, 8 miles SSE. Such vessels must not ex-
ceed a speed of 10 knots in the regulated area.
Permission to enter must be applied for at least 1 hour before
2.22
arrival in the regulated area or before leaving the quays, an-
chorages, or other mooring installations in those waters.
The vessel’s ETA should be sent, via the agent, at least 72
2.22
hours prior to arrival. The ETA must be confirmed 48 hours, 24
hours, and 12 hours prior to arrival.
39
Markus Johansson, Bitmap/Statoil
Anchorage.—Vessels waiting to berth at the terminal are to
2.22
anchor in the designated anchorage in Falkeidfaet, between
Rovetaerne Light and Billingen Light, and in Hervikfjorden.
Directions.—The main approach to Karsto Gas Terminal is
2.22
between Austre Vagholmflua (59°13'N., 5°31'E.), a 3m shoal
with a light, and Rovetaerne Light, standing on an outermost
rock lying a little over 1 mile ENE.
2.23 Nedstrandsfjorden (59°15'N., 5°44'E.) is formed by
the mainland on the NW, N, and NE, and by a group of islands
and islets, which are known collectively as Sjernaroyane and
the island of Ombo, on the S. Nedstrandsfjorden has an en-
trance that lies between the S end of Toftoy and Lundaroy,
about 4 miles ESE. From its entrance, it trends NE and E for
about 11 miles to the entrance of Jelsafjorden.
Great depths prevail through the fairway of Nedstrands-
fjorden. Shoals and islets lie clear of the fairway.
Lindoy (59°17'N., 5°42'E.), NE of which is Slattholme, is
2.23
the largest of a group of islets and rocks lying within 1 mile E
of the N end of Toftoy. Lindoygrunn, the southernmost danger
of the group, is located about 0.2 mile S of Lindoy and is
marked on its S side by an iron perch.
Heimraflu, the NW danger, is a 1.8m depth marked by a
2.23
buoy about 0.2 mile N of Lindoy.
A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an iron
2.23
Pub. 182
40 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
perch, is located about 183m NE of the SE end of Slattholme.
A 5.9m depth and an 8.2m depth lie within about 0.2 mile E
and SE of this rock.
Lamholme (59°20'N., 5°45'E.) is a small islet in the ap-
2.23
proaches to Muslandsvag. Gullholme lies about 0.1 mile S of
Lamholme. Haskjaer, with other islets and rocks NW, lies
about 0.2 mile SSW of Gullholme.
Hunderavag (59°20'N., 5°49'E.), which indents the main-
2.23
land for about 1 mile N, is entered between Tveiteneset, about
1 mile ESE of Lamholme, and Baustaneset, about 1 mile ENE.
Hestflu, marked by an iron perch, extends about 0.1 mile from
the E shore of the bay to a position about 0.4 mile NW of Baus-
taneset.
Anchorage.—Large vessels can take anchorage in Hunder-
2.23
avag, in 27 to 59m, but the anchorage is exposed to S winds.
The best anchorage for small vessels is off Tveit, located on the
NW side of Hunderavag.
2.24 Nedstrandsvag (59°20'N., 5°52'E.) is entered be-
tween Lille Faeroy, about 1 mile ENE of Baustaneset, and Ton-
ganes, a mainland projection about 0.2 mile farther ENE. A
5.9m depth lies in the middle of the entrance. Within Ned-
strandsvag, there are numerous dangers, including above and
below-water rocks, some of which are marked by iron perches.
A quay has a least depth of 5m along its outer side.
Foldoy (59°20'N., 5°58'E.) lies in the NE portion of Ned-
2.24
strandsfjorden. Sondre Breidvik, on the S side, and a smaller
bight, on the N side, almost divide Foldoy in two.
Both parts of the island are fairly high; the E part rises to an
2.24
elevation of about 35m. Tjuvholme and other islets and rocks
lie within 0.25 mile SW of the S extremity of Foldoy; within
0.25 mile farther SW there is a detached reef, on the NW end
of which a rock lies above water.
Skindryggen, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by
2.24
an iron perch, lies close off the N side of Foldoy in a position
about 0.2 mile NW of the island’s NE extremity.
Smaskjaer (59°17'N., 5°57'E.), marked by an iron perch,
2.24
lies about 0.1 mile N of the W entrance point of Jorstadvag,
which is on the NW side of Ombo, about 1 mile NE of the NW
extremity of the island.
2.25 Talgjefjorden (59°08'N., 5°49'E.) is the basin formed
between Rennesoy and Talgje, on the S, and Finnoy and the is-
lets and dangers lying up to 3 miles W of Finnoy, on the N.
Fairway depths are sufficient for large vessels. A few detached
dangers lie near the fairway, but most shoals, rocks, and islets
are in the N part W of Finnoy. A light is shown from the close
N point of Finnoy.
Galtaholmen (59°09'N., 5°37'E.) is located close off the N
2.25
extremity of Rennesoy. Galten, a rock marked by a beacon, lies
about 0.1 mile N of Galtaholme.
Ertensoy, comparatively steep-to, lies about 2 miles ENE of
2.25
Galtaholme; between these islets is the principal entrance of
Talgjefjorden. Midflu, a detached 7.8m patch, lies about 0.3
mile SW of Ertensoy.
Tjelmen is a detached 3.2m depth lying on the N side of the
2.25
fjord approach, about 1 mile NW of Ertensoy.
Flustein (59°08'N., 5°39'E.), on which a beacon stands, lies
2.25
at the N end of a shoal that extends N from the N shore of Ren-
nesoy.
Pub. 182
2.26 Finnoyfjorden (59°10'N., 5°54'E.), which is formed
between Finnoy on the W, and the islands of Fogn, Bokn, and
Halsne (59°11'N., 5°57'E.) on the E, trends NE and N from
Talgjefjorden for about 5 miles to the W approach to Garsund-
fjorden. It has a minimum width of about 1 mile, great depths
through the middle part, and few dangers.
Kjerringi, lying awash about 0.5 mile NNW of the NE ex-
2.26
tremity of Finnoy, is marked by a beacon. Kjerringer, about
183m N of Kjerringi, is awash and marked by an iron perch.
Anchorage.—Several good anchorages, suitable for small
2.26
vessels with local knowledge, are located along both sides of
Finnoyfjorden.
2.27 Garsundfjorden (Garssundfjorden) (Gardssund-
fjorden) (59°13'N., 6°00'E.), located N of Halsne and Randoy
(Randoyna) (Randoya) (59°12'N., 6°02'E.) and S of the island
of Ombo, trends NE for about 8 miles to the entrance of Josen-
fjorden. The minimum width of Garsundfjorden is about 0.7
mile. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway; however a
marine farm with associated ground tackle lies just off the Om-
bo mid-coast shoreline.
Quays, with depths of 4 to 9m alongside, are at Vestersjo,
2.27
about 3 miles ENE of Eidsvag, and at Skar about 2 miles far-
ther ENE.
Anchorage.—On the N side of Garsundfjorden, anchorage
2.27
for small vessels is available, in 10.1 to 11.9m, in Eidsvag,
which indents the S side of Ombo about 0.5 mile E of the SE
extremity of Ombo.
On the S side of the fjord, anchorage can be taken in Batviki,
2.27
on the NW side of Halsne.
Breidvik (59°13'N., 6°03'E.), on the N shore of Randoy, pro-
2.27
vides good holding ground, in 16.5m. Oyehamn, in a narrow
inlet about 1 mile W of the NE extremity of Randoy, provides
good anchorage to small vessels, in 10.1 to 11.9m; mooring
rings are available.
2.28 Fognafjorden (59°07'N., 5°56'E.) lies between Ros-
soya and the island of Fogn, on the NW, and the mainland, on
the SE. It leads NE for about 3 miles from Hidlefjorden and
Brimsefjorden and joins the S end of Saebosund and the outer
end of Ytre Ardalsfjorden. Fognafjorden is 0.75 mile to 1.25
miles wide and throughout its middle part is deep and clear.
Charted depths exceed 183m and all known dangers lie within
0.15 mile offshore.
Mosnesholmane, a group of three close-lying islets, are on
the SE side of Fisterfjorden (59°09'N., 6°00'E.) within 0.4 mile
NW of Helgoy. Kue is a small islet lies about 0.2 mile off the
SE shore, nearly 0.75 mile NE of the larger islet of the group.
A below-water rock is located close off the NE side of Kue.
Anchorage.—On the NW side of the fjord, vessels can an-
2.28
chor in Sandangervag, about 1 mile farther NE; and in
Kvaloysund. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of
21.9m crosses the entrance of Sandangervag.
On the SE side of Fisterfjorden, small vessel anchorage can
2.28
be found in Fistervag, which is entered about 2 miles NE of
Kue; and in Vassvik, about 2 miles further NE.
2.29 Ardalsfjorden (59°08'N., 6°00'E.), with its W end
starting between Fognafjorden and Fisterfjorden, has numerous
islets and dangers. Helgoy is separated from the mainland N by
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
2.28 The Lysefjorden Bridge
the narrow Helgoysund. A 10.1m shoal is located about 0.2
mile W of the W extremity of Helgoy. Kvaerholmane, within
91m of which there are some above and below-water rocks,
lies about 0.4 mile off the S shore of Ardalsfjorden and 1.25
miles E of Hoylandsneset.
Anchorage.—Good anchorage is available off Fiska, on the
2.29
S side of Ytre Ardalsfjorden about 1 mile SE of Hoylandsne-
set. A concrete quay at Fiska has depths up to 6m.
The Outer Fjords
2.30 Solbergfjorden (Gapafjorden) (59°15'N., 5°55'E.) is
the channel between the W side of Ombo and a group of is-
lands and islets of which the largest are Kyrkjoy and Bjergoy. It
leads N from the W approach to Garsundfjorden to Ned-
strandsfjorden and Jelsafjorden.
Solbergfjorden has a minimum width of about 1 mile and is
2.30
deep and free from dangers in the fairway, except in the N part,
where there are some rocks awash.
Caution.—Marine farms have been established on the N
2.30
side of Solbergfjorden in position 69°02.12'N, 17°38.85'E.
Ground tackle extends up to 0.7 mile into the fairway from
these farms.
Gapaskjaergrunnane, which is awash in places, lies in the N
2.30
part of Solbergfjorden about in mid-channel. An iron beacon
marks the northernmost rock while an iron perch marks the
southernmost rock.
Kvellandsholme is located on the W side of the fjord, about
2.30
0.2 mile off the SE extremity of Bjergoy. A submarine cable
41
Mercy from Wikimedia Commons
2.28
crosses the fjord close N of Kvellandsholme. A submarine ca-
ble lies between Bjergoy and Hidleholme, an island about 0.6
mile SE of Bjergoy.
Tennholme (59°17'N., 5°52'E.), on the W side of the N end
2.30
of Solbergfjorden, lies on foul ground extending about 0.3 mile
from the NE side of Bjergoy. The N and NE edges of the foul
ground are each marked by an iron perch.
Ombofjorden (59°17'N., 6°07'E.) is the passage between
Ombo and Josneset. To the E, it leads N from Garsundfjorden
to Jelsafjorden. The minimum width of the passage is about 1
mile. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway.
On the E side of Ombofjorden, the coastal bank on the W
2.30
side of the approach to Knutsvik, a cove about 2 miles NNW of
the SW extremity of Josneset, is marked by an iron perch.
Skarvagrunn, a 3.7m depth, lies close offshore about 0.4 mile
NNW of Knutsvik.
Lysefjorden (58°54'N., 6°05'E.) is entered between Oanes
and a point about 0.4 mile SE. From the entrance, Lysefjorden
extends in a general NE direction for about 20 miles to its
head. The fjord is deep and free from dangers in the fairway.
Noted for its wild and beautiful scenery, it trends between cliffs
rising almost perpendicularly on either side to heights of from
610 to 914m.
In the entrance, the channel leads between shoals extending
2.30
from either side and has a width of about 0.2 mile and a mini-
mum charted depth of 10.1m. A buoy marks the edge of the
shoal water off Oanes.
Caution.—The Lysefjorden Bridge, with a vertical clear-
2.30
ance of 50m, spans Lysefjorden, about 2 miles from the en-
Pub. 182
42 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
trance.
2.31 Store Bergsholme (58°56'N., 6°07'E.), with Lille
Bergsholme close off its NW side, lies in Lysefjorden, about 2
miles from the entrance. Navigable channels pass E of the larg-
er islet and W of the smaller islet. A depth of 11.9m is avail-
able through the E channel; greater depths can be found in the
western channel, but a 15.1m bank, which lies within 183m
NW of Lille Bergsholme, should be avoided. An overhead ca-
ble, with a clearance of 27m, spans the channel between Store
Bergsholme and the coast to the NE.
A concrete quay, with depths alongside of up to 4m, is locat-
2.31
ed at Oanes. A quay at Eidane, about 4 miles NE of Oanes, has
depths up to 5m alongside. A quay at Bratteli, on the NW shore
of the fjord 4.5 miles further NE, has depths from 6 to 9m
alongside.
Kvassnos Light is shown from the S shore of the fjord in a
2.31
position about 3 miles NE of Store Bergsholme.
A submarine cable is laid from a position 1.75 miles ENE of
2.31
Kvassnos Light across the fjord to Sangesand; another cable is
laid from the same position for about 7 miles E, close to the S
shore.
A light is shown from the N shore of Lysefjorden in a posi-
2.31
tion about 9 miles NE of Store Bergsholme. Kallasteinsgrunn,
lying awash close off the N shore about 10 miles NE of Store
Bergsholme, is marked by an iron perch.
2.32 Fordesfjorden (59°20'N., 5°23'E.) trends N for about
8 miles from its junction with Austdjupet and Boknaflaeet at
the N end of Hovringoy. It penetrates the mainland of the
Haugesund peninsula; Fosenoy forms the S part of its W side.
The minimum width through most of the fjord is about 0.3
mile, but islets reduce the navigable channel in places to a
width of about 0.2 mile. Charted depths in the fairway are am-
ple.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Fosnavag, an inlet
2.32
on the W side of the fjord, about 1 mile NW of Hovringoy.
Hellevik, on the W side of the fjord about 1 mile N of Fosna-
holme, provides a good anchorage for small vessels.
Leirvagholme, Skarveskjaer, Flogholmane, and several
2.32
above and below-water rocks are in the S part of Fordesfjorden
within 0.5 mile N of the N extremity of Hovringoy.
Fosnaholmen (59°18'N., 5°23'E.) is on the W side of the
2.32
fairway about 1 mile NNW of Hovringoy. Fosnaflu, a rock
with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an iron perch,
lies about 0.2 mile N of Fosnaholme. Other rocks lie between
Fosnaflu and the islet.
Hoyeholmane is on the E side of the fairway about 3 miles N
2.32
of Fosnaholmen. Leirvagflu, a 3m depth, lies about 183m off-
shore and 0.15 mile SSE of the southernmost islet. Fjordenflu
is a rock marked by an iron perch lying in mid-channel, about 3
miles N of Hoyeholmane.
Many islands, islets and other hazards lie between Fjordenf-
2.32
lu and the head of Fordesfjorden.
Royksundviki, on the W side of the fjord about 0.5 mile N of
2.32
Hellevik, provides good anchorage for small vessels.
2.33 Falkeidflaeet (59°14'N., 5°31'E.), a basin, lies on the
NW side of Boknafjorden and is formed by Austre Bokn and
Ognoy on the W, the mainland of the Haugesund peninsula on
Pub. 182
the N, and a chain of off-lying islets on the SE.
Some islands and numerous islets, rocks, and shoals occupy
2.33
the N part of the basin. General depths through the fairway of
Falkeidflaeet are 46 to 92m. A few detached shoal patches lie
near the fairway.
The entrance to Falkeidflaeet is between Nordre Vaga-
2.33
holme (59°13'N., 5°31'E.) and Flata Rova, a rock at the SW
end of the islet chain fronting Falkeidflaeet.
Austreflu, a 3m depth, lies on the SW side of the Falkeidf-
2.33
laeet entrance, in a position about 0.2 mile ESE of the N end of
Nordre Vagaholme.
Nautoyflu, a 6.4m depth, is located about 0.2 mile off the W
2.33
side of Nautoy in a position about 1 mile NE of Nordre Vaga-
holme. Nautoygrunn, with a depth of 11m, lies about 0.25 mile
WNW of this shoal.
Gasaholme (59°15'N., 5°32'E.) and Arvikholmen, together
2.33
with some smaller islets and rocks, lie on foul ground in the
NE part of Falkeidflaeet. Holmeflu lies close off the NE end of
Arvikholmen.
Arviksund is the passage between Holmeflu and Haugsneset,
2.33
a mainland point about 0.3 mile N. It leads into Falkeidflaeet
from Hervikfjorden.
Austreflu lies at the edge of foul ground extending about 0.1
2.33
mile S from Haugsneset. A detached 10.1m depth lies about
183m N of Holmeflu. An 11m depth lies about the same dis-
tance SW of Austreflu.
Krake, with a depth of 5.9m, and Ytre Krake, above water,
2.33
are located about 0.5 mile and 1 mile, respectively, WNW of
Holmeflu. There is an 11m depth about 183m SE of Krake;
rocks with depths of 4.6m and 6.4m lie within 0.4 mile of the N
shore.
Deep-draft vessels should not use Arviksund because of the
2.33
above-mentioned dangers.
Caution.—The mainland shore on the N side of Falkeid-
2.33
flaeet is fringed by reefs; depths in the vicinity are very irregu-
lar, and undiscovered shoals may exist.
2.34 Sandsfjorden (59°21'N., 6°00'E.) trends in a general
NE direction for about 11 miles from its entrance to its junction
with Hylsfjorden. Skorpene, about 3 miles within the entrance,
divides Sandsfjorden into three channels. The fjord then be-
comes narrow and winding until it opens again near Naevoy,
about 5 miles farther NE. Depths through the fairway of Sands-
fjorden are ample.
The Sandsfjord Bridge (59°24.53'N., 6°07.42'E.), with a
2.34
vertical clearance of 65m, spans the narrows immediately N of
the overhead cable.
Tides—Currents.—In Sandsfjorden and in Saudefjorden,
2.34
farther N, the tidal current (resultant of constant and tidal cur-
rents) usually runs outward. At the head of Saudefjorden, the
current is strong and runs through the fjords to the narrow
channel at Ytre Asaroy (59°25'N., 6°08'E.), where it may at-
tain a velocity of 3 to 4 knots; then it passes N of Ottoy toward
the W shore, with a branch setting S into Ottoysand, SE of Ot-
toy, out through the three channels at Skorpene, with about
equal strength in all the channels.
Kvitholm (59°23'N., 6°03'E.) is on the W side of the main
2.34
fairway about 3 miles NE of the entrance to Sandsfjorden. The
channel width abreast the islet is about 0.2 mile. Two 7.5m
depths are located about 0.2 mile and 0.5 mile SW of
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 43

2.33 By Martin NH [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0)], from Wikimedia Commons

2.33 Sand from NE (Sandsfjorden and Vindafjorden in background)

Kvitholm. Skorneset (59°21'N., 6°58'E) on the W side of the fjord

2.35

Skorpene lies about 0.3 mile N and 0.5 mile NW of

2.34
Kvitholm. The easternmost of the three channels formed by
these two islets is the main fairway. Midtholme lies about 0.2
mile NE of Kvitholm and an islet lies about 160m NE of the E
Skorpene island; both dangers lie close W of the main fairway.
A 4.5m depth is located about 0.2 mile NW of the western
2.34
Skorpene island. A rock, marked by an iron perch, lies close S
about 0.3 mile N of the entrance to Sandsfjorden, is a secure
anchorage for small vessels except during E winds. It has a
quay, with 2 to 5m alongside. Tveitavik, about 2 miles farther
NNE, is exposed to the S. Small vessels can anchor on either
side of a promontory at the head of the bay. There is a quay,
with depths of 2 to 5m alongside.
Vatlandsvag, about 2 miles further NNE, has a quay, with
2.35

of the 4.5m depth. depths of 3 to 12m alongside.

A 7m depth, marked by a buoy, lies about 91m N of Ottoy
2.34
(59°24'N., 6°06'E.). A reef extends about 183m S from the
shore N of Ottoy toward the fairway.
A light is shown from Foreholmen, which lies on the N side
2.34
of the fairway about 0.5 mile E of the N extremity of Ottoy.
An above-water rock is located about 183m NW of Forehol-
2.34
men.
Jelsafjorden (59°19'N., 6°02'E.) trends E from Nedstrands-
fjorden to Ersfjorden and is deep and clear throughout. Jelsa-
hunden, marked by an iron perch, lies about 91m off the W
entrance to Jelsavag (59°20'N., 6°02'E.), on the N side of Jel-
safjorden. Jelsa, is on the NE side of a bight close W of Jelsav-
ag.
Depths—Limitations.—The port of Jelsa handles general
2.35

cargo and aggregates. The maximum draft that can be accom-

2.35 Sand (59°29'N., 6°15'E.), where there is a quay with modated is 11.1m. For more information see table titled Jel-
depths of 9 to 10m alongside, lies on the N side of the shallow sa—Berth Information.
mouth of a river flowing into the E side of the fjord. There are
regular ferry services from here to Ropeid and Stavanger. Jelsa—Berth Information
Omsmallneset, from which a light is shown, is a salient point
2.35

on the E side of the fjord about 0.7 mile NE of Foreholmen. Maximum

Between Omsmallneset and Blaskjaer, about 0.1 mile W, Berth Length Vessel Remarks
Sandsfjorden is at its narrowest and takes an abrupt turn N. Draft
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage in the N part
2.35
Aggregates and break-
of the cove off Sand, to avoid a submarine cable in the S part, Lower 50m —
bulk.
in 25m, clay.
Leirvika, on the E side of Nevoy, located 4 miles SW of Middle
2.35 60m — Aggregates.
Loading
Sand and 1.5 mile NE of Omsmallneset, has a secure anchor-
age for small vessels except during E winds. It has a quay, with Upper Aggregates and break-
160m 11.1m
2 to 5m alongside. Loading bulk.

Pub. 182
44 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
2.35 Sauda Smelting Dock
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage within
2.35
Jelsavag.
2.36 Okstrafjorden (59°20'N., 6°06'E.) trends N from its
entrance for about 2 miles to the entrance of Lindevik, where it
becomes very narrow. It then continues NNE for 1 mile to its
head. North of Lindevik, the narrow channel is shallow, re-
stricted by rocks, and icebound in winter. In the lower narrows
off Holenes, about 1 mile from the fjord entrance, tidal currents
may often set strongly.
Charted depths in the fairway as far as Lindevik entrance are
2.36
40 to 82m. Some of the dangers in the fjord are marked by iron
perches. The lower narrows, for a distance of about 0.5 mile, is
about 91m wide.
An overhead cable, with a clearance of 15m, crosses the nar-
2.36
row inner part of Okstrafjorden.
The Josenfjorden (59°15'N., 6°10'E.) entrance is between
the SW extremity of Josneset and a point about 1 mile SE. The
fjord trends NE and E for about 14 miles and is deep and free
from dangers throughout. Within about 2 miles of its head, it is
narrow. The land on either side of the fjord is very high; on the
S side it is very steep.
Anchorage.—The anchorages in Josenfjorden are suitable
2.36
only for vessels with local knowledge.
2.37 The entrance to Ersfjorden (59°19'N., 6°08'E.) lies
between Lyngneset, a projection at the NW end of Josneset,
and Landsnes, about 0.5 mile N. Ersfjorden trends E for about
5 miles to Kileneset, has a minimum width of about 0.3 mile,
and is deep and free from dangers in the fairway. The NW side
of Landsnes is foul for about 183m offshore.
Tyssefjorden (59°21'N., 6°14'E.) is a narrow branch trend-
ing NNW from the E end of Ersfjorden for about 3 miles. The
fairway is deep and clear, but is usually icebound in winter. A
bridge with a vertical clearance of 23m spans the inlet en-
trance. The numerous anchorages in Tyssefjorden are only suit-
able for small vessels with local knowledge.
Hylsfjorden (59°31'N., 6°16'E.), from its junction with
Pub. 182
Sandsfjorden and Saudefjorden, trends ENE for about 10.75
miles to its head. It is deep and free from dangers in the fair-
way. Anchorages for small vessels with local knowledge are
available in several places within the fjord.
2.38 Saudefjorden (Saudafjorden) (59°33'N., 6°17'E.) trends
NNE for about 8 miles from its junction with Sandsfjorden and
Hylsfjorden. The fjord is deep and free from dangers in the fair-
way.
In winter, Saudefjorden is icebound from its head S to So-
2.38
land, which is on the W side about 4 miles NNE of the en-
trance.
A light is shown from Asneset, on the W side of the fjord,
2.38
about 1 mile N of the entrance. A quay located in a cove S of
Asneset has depths of 6m alongside.
A light is shown from Ramsnes (59°38'N., 6°20'E.), a point on
2.38
the E shore, about 7 miles NNE of the entrance.
A light is shown from Saunes, on the N side of the fjord,
2.38
about 1 mile N of Ramsnes.
Shoal water extends up to 0.2 mile offshore in places along
2.38
the N shore of the fjord NE of Saunes. A buoy marks a sand
and gravel bank at the mouth of a river.
Ekkjegrunn, with a depth of about 1.8m and marked by a
2.38
lighted beacon, lies 0.2 mile WNW of Hesthamaren, a point on
the E side of the head of Saudefjorden, about 1 mile E of
Saunes. Several buoys also mark this shoal.
Saudasjoen is on the NW side of the head of the fjord. It has
2.38
a concrete pier, 87m long, with a depth of over 9.1m alongside.
Two other piers, one 37m long and the other 46m long, have
2.38
depths from 3 to+ 5.9m alongside.
2.39 Sauda (59°39'N., 6°21'E.) lies at the mouths of two riv-
ers at the head of Saude Fjord.
Depths—Limitations.—The main activity is smelting. The
2.39
port handles magnesia, breakbulk, and ro-ro. There is an import
quay and an export quay E of it. Vessel up to 120,046 dwt, 200m
in length, and 32.2m beam can be handled at the port. For more
berthing information see table titled Sauda—Berth Informa-
 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 45

tion. From Krossfjorden, Sandeidfjorden trends NNW for about 5

2.40

Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but

2.39 miles, and Yrkefjorden trends SW for about 7 miles.
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an Vatsfjorden extends NNW for about 3 miles from about the
2.40

additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6. middle of the N side of Yrkefjorden.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Sauda—Contact
2.39 There are few good harbors in Vindafjorden and its connect-
2.40

Information. ing fjords to the N, due to the generally steep-to shoreline.

Ice.—Vindafjorden is usually free from ice. Ice sometimes
2.40

Sauda—Contact Information forms in Sandeidfjorden, but seldom lasts very long.

Vatsfjorden and the head of Yrkefjorden may be icebound
2.40

VHF VHF channels 6, 9, and 16 for several months continuously.

Telephone 47-52-782585 A light is shown from Skjervheim (59°28'N., 5°45'E.) in a
2.40

position on the E shore of Vatsfjorden about 2 miles NNW of

Facsimile 47-52-781588
the entrance.
Flatskjaerbaen, at the S end of a reef on the E side of the
2.40

Anchorage.—At the head of the fjord, vessels can anchor

2.39
Vatsfjorden entrance, is marked by an iron beacon. Forholme is
off Saudasjoen, in 11 to 20m, and off Sauda, in 40 to 50m, clay. a small islet at the N end of the reef.
Caution.—Vessels going alongside the quays at Sauda must
2.39
A quay, with depths of 3 to 6m alongside, is located at
2.40

exercise caution because of the strong currents from the rivers.
Careful attention should be paid to wind direction.
2.39
Vikedal on the E shore of Sandeidfjorden.
A submarine cable is laid in Sandeidfjorden between Ilsvag
2.40

and Sandeid at the head of the fjord.

2.40 Vindafjorden (59°20'N., 5°56'E.) trends NNW from An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 18m, crosses
2.40

its entrance for about 6 miles to Krossfjorden, a basin formed Yrkefjorden about 0.2 mile from its head.
by the junction of four separate fjord arms. The E arm, under
the name of Vindafjorden, leads ENE for about 9 miles.

Sauda—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Sauda Smelteverk Terminal
Export 110m 8.0m 144.5m — 20.7m 120,046 dwt Magnesia, ro-ro, and breakbulk.
Import 129m 7.0m 200m — 32.2m 63,657 dwt Magnesia.

Pub. 182
 3.
Sector 3—Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden

Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
Pub. 182

3.0

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION

47

SECTOR 3
NORWAY—SKUDENESFJORDEN TO KORSFJORDEN
Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast between Skude-
3.0
nesfjorden and Korsfjorden, and then the inner route and adja-
cent inlets between these two major fjords. The arrangement is
N, starting from Getungane, two islets directly S of Karmoya
on the N shore of Skudensfjorden, and Store Marstein, an islet
on the S side of Korsfjorden.
General Remarks
3.1 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds on the W
and S coasts of Norway reflect the average pressure distribu-
tion and its seasonal changes. With the shift from high pressure
over S Norway in winter to low pressure in summer, the winds
on the W coast change from S in winter to N in summer. The
prevalence of winds from any one direction is not in evidence
more than 40 per cent of the time. The more usual situation is
one of winds induced by a passing cyclone with shifting direc-
tions and velocities.
3.1Within the fjords and along the very indented coast line the
wind is usually widely different from that in the open sea, ow-
ing to land and sea breezes and topographical effects.
3.1Because of the mountainous nature of the coast any wind
blowing from a direction between S and WSW is deflected to
blow as a S wind on the coast, and any wind blowing between
NW and N is deflected to blow as a N wind. The winds in W
Norway therefore have a tendency to blow across the mouth of
the fjords. The speed of the wind also increases outward from
the coast to a distance of as much as 150 miles.
3.1There is a lot of turbulence along the Norwegian coast when
winds are fresh or strong, due to the broken country. Gales oc-
cur very frequently over this area when deep depressions are
moving NE between the British Isles and Iceland, under which
condition a very steep gradient is apt to develop all along the W
seaboard of Norway, producing strong S winds. This very steep
gradient at times extends 100 to 150 miles out to sea from the
coast.
3.1Under these conditions the coast is swept by violent winds
which penetrate into the more sheltered fjords with great turbu-
lence though with reduced velocity. Spells of NW gales occur
on the W coast when a suitable gradient is established by pres-
sure falling over Scandinavia. Such gales are apt to persist but
the gradient on some occasions falls off suddenly to the E of
the Shetlands.
3.1Weather conditions in this coastal sector are changeable. The
prevailing winds are E from October to March and W from
April to September. In winter the heaviest gale occur with SW
winds and are usually accompanied by rain or snow. Northwest
winds are, as a rule, dry both in summer and winter.
3.1The most rainy months are generally October and November.
Snow appears near the coast in December and in places re-
mains until March.
3.1Fog occurs off the coast in summer for an average period of
five days each month.
3.1Ice.—Ice in this area offers no hindrance to navigation and is
49
present only in the upper reaches of the fjords along the coast.
Floating ice is met in spring, when small masses, which are
soon dispersed, may drift out of Oslofjorden and Kattegat, and
occasionally from some of the larger fjords to the W and N of
Lindesnes.
3.1Tides—Currents.—North of Skudenesfjorden entrance the
current sets N with a decreasing velocity. An average velocity
of about 2 knots is maintained about 5 miles offshore as far N
as Breidsundet.
3.1The velocity decreases both toward the coast and seaward,
and about 15 miles offshore is not more than about 0.2 knots.
3.1The decrease seaward may be caused by a S current E of the
Shetland Islands. These two currents form large weak eddies,
rotating counterclockwise and centered 30 to 40 miles off-
shore.
3.1Tidal currents between Skudenesfjorden entrance and Kors-
fjorden entrance the tidal currents about 5 miles offshore usual-
ly sets N. With long periods of SW and W gales, the set is N
and fairly strong, especially during the rising tide (beginning
about 5 hours 45 minutes after HW at Bergen).
3.1Closer inshore, the tidal current component is more appre-
ciable, resulting in a N set during the rising tide and a S set
during the falling tide (beginning about 30 minutes before the
HW at Bergen).
3.1The tidal current usually sets outward from the entrances of
the large fjords.
3.1In Stokksund and Nyleid the tidal currents set N with the ris-
ing tide and S with the falling tide. Before the onset of unset-
tled weather, however, there may be a set in one direction,
either N or S, for a considerable period of time.
3.1In Alfjorden the tidal currents may be very strong, but there
may also be tidal currents setting in opposite directions in the
outer and inner parts of the fjord. The tidal currents near the
land usually differ in direction from that in the middle of the
fjord.
3.1In Langenuen there is nearly always a N setting tidal current,
although occasionally in fine weather it sets S. Current veloci-
ties of 4 to 5 knots during strong S winds have been reported
off Skor Light. Dangerous eddies near the shores of Langenuen
have also been reported. There is usually an ebb tidal current in
Hardangerfjorden, however, there may be an incoming current
during W gales at sea, but only in the outer part. The outgoing
tidal currents may be very strong in Bondesundet W of Varald-
soy, off Ljones in Hissfjorden, and off Krosnes at the entrance
of Sorfjorden.
3.1Off Simadal, at the head of Eidfjorden, there is usually a
weak outgoing current, which is somewhat increased during
and after periods of heavy rains and after the snow melts, but
this current may cease with long continued SW winds.
3.1In Lokksundet, the channel connecting Hardangerfjorden
with Bjornefjorden the spring velocity of the current is no-
where more than 0.3 knot. With onshore winds at sea, there is a
continuous N tidal current in Lokkfsundet.
3.1Tides in the North Sea are always semidiurnal, with very lit-
Pub. 182
50 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
tle diurnal inequality between the two HW or the two LW of
each tidal day.
3.1The tides progress into the North Sea from the Atlantic
Ocean, between the Shetland Islands and Norway. Within the
North Sea, HW progresses counterclockwise about a nodal
point off the S coast of Norway, moving S in the North Sea and
W along the S coast of Norway between Kristiansand and the
6th meridian. Along the W coast of Norway the progression is
N to about 60° N.; N of this the progression is E.
3.1Along the W coast of Norway, tide ranges gradually increase
toward the N, from 0.2m at Mandal to 0.91m at Bergen.
3.1Generally, along the W coast of Norway, the influence of
wind on the tide level is small. This is probably due to the scat-
tering effect of offshore island and the relatively deep water
close inshore.
3.1Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
3.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
3.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
3.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
(TSS) in Norwegian waters, including off Ryvingen, see Pub.
180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
3.1Caution.—A permanently-active firing practice area lies in
the SW and W approaches to Korsfjorden. For further informa-
tion, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
Ocean.
3.1In winter, falling snow is the greatest danger. The land is of-
ten completely obscured in snow. In Indreleia, when a snow-
storm threatens, careful bearing of the nearest anchorage
should be taken to enable the vessel to seek shelter. Because of
the tidal current, it is dangerous to heave-to.
Skudensfjorden to Korsfjorden
3.2 The coast between Geitungane, two islets directly S of
Karmoya on the N shore of Skudensfjorden, to about 60 miles
N to Store Marstein, an islet W of Stora Kalsoy on the S side of
the entrance to Korsfjorden, consists of several large islands,
fringed with islets and rocks. The large islands include Kar-
moy, Bomlo, and Selbjornen. There are numerous detached
dangers along the irregular outer coast.
Bomlafjorden and Selbjornsfjorden are two deep inlets
which are entered from seaward and lead into the inner net-
work of fjords.
3.2Hardangerfjorden is a continuation of Bomlafjorden and ex-
tends, under various names, about 70 miles in a NE direction
from its entrance. Indreleia (Inner Lead), comprising all of the
inner channels leading N toward Bergen, is entered from
Skudenesfjorden through Karmsundet, the passage on the E
side of Karmoy.
3.2Caution.—Marine farms exist within the area of the inner
fjord of Bomlafjorden near Toflekalven. They may not all be
shown individually and their positions change frequently. Ma-
rine farms may be marked by lighted or unlit buoys or beacons.
Pub. 182
Mariners are advised to avoid these structures and associated
moorings.
3.2North of Skudenesfjorden, the characteristic features of the
Norwegian coast begin gradually to appear; the islands in-
crease in size and number, and the mountains attain a greater
elevation, but there are as yet no traces of the bold, striking out-
lines and savage grandeur which distinguish the coastal scen-
ery N of Trondheim.
3.2The entrances of Skudenesfjorden and Bomlafjorden are
conspicuous from offshore. Although, when sailing toward
Bomlafjorden, the elevation of the land along the coast de-
creases in height, when entering Bomlafjorden in clear weath-
er, the Hardanger Mountains are easily visible.
3.2An imaginary line drawn through the outermost islands, is-
lets, and dangers fronting the mainland between the Bom-
lafjorden entrance and the Korsfjorden entrance runs
irregularly, but approximately N for about 35 miles.
3.2Selbjornsfjorden is entered about 12 miles S of Korsfjorden.
These last two fjords are considered the most important N
fjords of this section. They are the principal S approaches to
Bergen.
The Outer Coast—Off-lying Islets and Dangers
3.3 Beryl Oil Field (59°33'N., 1°32'E.) is situated about
103 miles WNW of Utsira. There is a production platform with
an adjacent flare structure linked to it by a bridge. SPM tanker
loading platforms stand close NE and SE of the platform.
Ness Oil Field and Bruce Gas Field, lie 4 miles W and 9
3.3
miles N, respectively, of Beryl Oil Field.
Heimdal Gas Field (59°35'N., 2°15'E.) lies 20 miles E of
3.3
Beryl Oil Field; gas pipelines, which may best be seen on the
chart, extend S and SSW from it.
Frigg Gas Field (59°53'N., 2°04'E.) was shut down and the
3.3
facilities disposed of in 2004. Redevelopment was under con-
sideration in 2016.
Ringhorne Field (59°16'N., 2°27'E.), marked by a lighted
3.3
platform, is connected by a submarine pipeline to a storage
vessel moored about 5 miles SSW. The field is expected to pro-
duce into 2025.
For oil and gas fields N of the above, see Sector 4. For oil
3.3
and gas fields S of the above, see Sector 2 and Pub. 141, Sail-
ing Directions (Enroute) Scotland.
For more information on North Sea petroleum operations
3.3
visit the Norwegian Petroleum web site.
Norwegian Petroleum
https://www.norskpetroleum.no
3.4 Utsira (59°18'N., 4°53'E.), 71m high, lies about 9
miles off the W coast of Karmoy and, because of its isolated
position, is conspicuous. Utsira is inhabited; during the spring
herring fishing season numerous fishing vessels visit the is-
land. A light is shown from a prominent light tower, 13m high,
standing on the W part of the island.
3.4Lights are shown from both sides of a sound that indents the
SE side of Utsira close NW of Beiningen, a small islet. A light
is shown from a rock close E of Beiningen.
3.4Lausingen is the southernmost islet in the Utsira group and is
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
located about 2 miles SSW of the S extremity of Utsira. This
islet is low and foul on all sides. Vestreflu, a 5m depth, and
Lausingbaen, a 2m depth, lie about 0.1 mile SW and 0.2 mile
N, respectively, of Lausingen. Skallen, a 14m depth, lies about
0.6 mile SE of Lausingen.
3.4Spannholmane (59°17'N., 4°51'E.), a group of islets, is lo-
cated about 0.5 mile N of Lausingen. Holmegrunka is an 11m
depth, about 0.2 mile N of Spannholmane.
3.4Vindballen, an above-water rock, and Vindballflu, with a
depth of less than 1.8m, lie within 0.3 mile SW of Beiningen.
Lille Seiskjaer, partly above-water, lies about 0.3 mile SSE of
Beiningen. Skarholmflu, a 4m shoal, is located 0.25 mile off
the E extremity of Utsira. All other charted dangers near Utsira
lie within 0.2 mile offshore.
3.4The two harbors in Utsira are Tuavag and Nordvikvag, on its
S side and N side, respectively. They are available only to small
vessels with local knowledge.
3.4Tuavag provides anchorage, in a depth of 17m. A mole, near
the head of the cove, forms a boat harbor which has depths of
1.8 to 7.6m. In the entrance to the boat harbor, there are depths
of 4.9 to 5.8m. A quay has depths of 4 to 5m alongside.
3.4Nordvikvag is free from dangers in the fairway and affords
anchorage, with good holding ground, in depths of 6 to 17m.
Two quays have depths of up to 5m.
3.4Ferkingstadoyane (59°14'N., 5°04'E.), a group of compara-
tively high islets, lies nearly 3 miles W of Ferkingstadneset,
which is on the W coast of Karmoy, about 5 miles N of
Jarsteinen. The islets are unoccupied, but are frequented during
the fishing season by lobster fishermen. There is no harbor in
the group. Fringing rocks and shoals, some of which are awash,
lie within 0.25 mile of some of the islets.
3.4Urter (59°22'N., 5°02'E.) lies with its S end about 4 miles
NE of Utsira. It includes the small islet of Urter and a number
of islets and above and below-water rocks spread over an area
about 2 miles long, N and S.
3.4The Urter group is uninhabited, but is visited by fishermen
during the fishing season. On Urter, there is a building for their
use. There are no harbors in the group.
3.4All the remaining islets and dangers along the coast between
Geitungane and Korsfjorden entrance lie within 6 miles W of
the larger islands forming this coast.
Skudensfjorden to Bomlafjorden
3.5 The coast between Skudenesfjorden and Bom-
lafjorden, the next N large fjord which leads in from seaward,
is formed by the W coasts of Karmoy. It is part of the Hauge-
sund peninsula. This peninsula is indented by smaller fjords,
bays, and inlets, and is separated from Karmoy by Karmsun-
det, which forms the S reach of Indreleia.
3.5The irregular coast of Karmoy is fringed by close-lying islets
and dangers, which extend as far as 2.5 miles offshore. About
10 miles N and NW of Karmoy, in the seaward approaches to
Haugesund and Bomlafjorden, there are groups of islets and
numerous dangerous rocks.
3.5Hills in the SE part of Karmoy are 61 to 79m high and are
rugged. The beaches up to Veavagen, a distance N of about 10
miles, are composed mainly of white sand and rocks.
3.5Sandvehamn (59°11'N., 5°11'E.) is a small harbor sheltered
by two sets of breakwaters. Anchorage is available for small
51
vessels at Sandvehamn only during good weather. Local
knowledge is required before attempting to anchor in this area.
3.5Ferkingstadvag (59°14'N., 5°11'E.) is a good fishing harbor
entered N of a short mole. It has a dredged depth of 4m and has
quays with mooring rings. Fuel oil and fresh water can be sup-
plied. Foul ground, with some above-water rocks, extends up
to 0.2 mile offshore NW from the S entrance point of Ferking-
stadvag.
3.6 Akrehamn (59°16'N., 5°11'E.), a harbor for small
vessels and fishing boats, is on the W shore of Karmoy, mid-
way S of Veavagen.
The approach to Akrehamn lies between the coast at the
3.6
Ferkingstadvag entrance and Maroy, which lies close offshore
about 3 miles N. The approach is encumbered with numerous
dangers extending up to 1.5 miles offshore.
The islets forming the harbor are joined by causeways and
moles, leaving an opening from the S which is entered close E
of a short mole extending SE from Mortholme. There are sev-
eral approaches leading in among the outer dangers, but local
knowledge is required. Buoys and perches mark the channels.
The inner harbor has been dredged to a depth of 4m.
Svortingen and Ryvingen, the outermost islets in the near ap-
3.6
proach to Akrehamn, are located about 1 mile WNW and 1.5
miles NNW, respectively, of Akrehamn. Both islets are dark
colored and are easily seen against the beach’s white sand.
Svortingflu, a 9m depth, lies about 0.5 mile WNW of Svortin-
gen.
3.7 Veavagen (59°18'N., 5°13'E.), a narrow inlet, runs SE
for about 2.25 miles from its entrance between Kvartnesholme,
about 2 miles NE of Maroy, and Veavagneset, on Karmoy
about 0.2 mile farther NE. A light is shown from Veavagneset.
Several islets and rocks, some marked by buoys and iron perch-
es, lie on a foul ground area W of the entrance to Veavagen.
The approaches to Veavagen within 1.5 miles SW, W, and
3.7
NW of Kvartnesholme are obstructed by numerous islets and
reefs, among which there are several channels. Only the N
channel, leading in between the NE side of Kvitingane and
Meldrane, is recommended.
Salvoy, Dyrholme, and Kavholme lie in the foul area SW, W,
3.7
and NW, respectively, of Kvartnesholme. A beacon stands on
the NW extremity of Dyrholme.
Beacons marks some of the dangers in the area between Sal-
3.7
voy and Maroy; perches marks some of those near the ap-
proach channels.
A beacon stands on Svartholme, about 0.5 mile N of the N
3.7
end of Kavholme. Between the beacon and the islet there is a
group of above-water rocks named Kvitingane. A 4m depth,
marked by an iron perch, and a 5m depth, marked by a buoy, lie
about 0.2 mile WNW and 0.3 mile NNW, respectively, of
Svartholme.
Lamholme (59°20'N., 5°12'E.) is located in a foul bight
3.7
about 1 mile NNE of Svartholme. Rocks lie up to 0.2 mile SW
of the islet. Meldrane, an above-water rock, is the outermost
danger in this direction. Stroka, with a depth of 15m, lies about
0.3 mile NW of Lamholme on the N side of the entrance to
Veavagen.
Breakwaters extend from each shore in a position about 1
3.7
mile SE of its entrance to Veavagen. The space between heads
Pub. 182
52 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
is about 60m. A light is shown on each side.
3.7Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Veavagen, in a
charted depth of 23.8m, with a mud and sand bottom, about 1
mile SSE of the entrance. There are several other anchorages
on both sides of the inlet.
3.7Caution.—A submarine pipeline crosses the head of Veav-
agen N of Brekke (59°17'N., 5°16'E.). It then extends NW for
about 2 miles, close to the NE shore of the inlet.
3.7Gas pipelines extend seaward from a terminal located close
to the N end of the entrance to Veavagen.
3.8 Feoy (59°23'N., 5°10'E.), an inhabited group of is-
lands and islets, lies within 2.5 miles of the W side of the N
part of Karmoy. Foynfjorden lies between Feoy and Karmoy.
Most of the islets and islands are close to one another. Some
3.8
of the narrow channels that separate the islands are navigable
by small vessels. Within and on the outer edge of the group,
there are numerous smaller islets, rocks, and other dangers.
Perches, beacons, and buoys mark some of the dangers near the
channels.
Foynfjorden (59°25'N., 5°11'E.) has a depth of more than
3.8
14m in its fairway; some of the dangers on both sides are
marked by perches and buoys. It provides a navigable channel
leading N to the seaward approaches to Haugesund.
3.9 The approach to Haugesund leads in among the con-
centration of islets and rocks lying within 2 miles NW and N of
Osnesgavlen (59°25'N., 5°14'E.), the N extremity of Karmoy.
Haraldstotta, a conspicuous red granite obelisk, stands on the
mainland about 1 mile NNE of Osnesgavlen.
Mark Voigt [CC BY 3.0 (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by/3.0)
3.9
Haraldstotta
3.9The port of Haugesund is entered by either one of two chan-
nels which are formed at the N end of Karmsund by a chain of
islets extending SSE from Sorhaugoy (59°25'N., 5°14'E.).
3.9Vestre Karmsund, the SW and principal channel, lies be-
tween these islets and the N end of Karmoy at Osnesgavlen. It
is approached directly through the outer buoyed channel.
3.9Vibrandsoysund, the NE channel, leads in between the
Pub. 182
above-mentioned islet chain and Killingoy and Hasseloy.
3.9Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots can be obtained
from Kvitsoy.
From the vicinity of the N entrance to Haugesund, the main-
land coast trends in a general N direction for about 6 miles to
Ryvarden, the S entrance point of Bomlafjorden.
3.9Four islet and rock-encumbered bays and a few small coves
indent the coastline. Numerous islets, shoals, and foul patches
front this coastal stretch, most of them lying in the seaward ap-
proach to Bomlafjorden, where they form the N side of Sletto.
3.9Sletto is an open stretch of sea NW of Haugesund. The
depths in the area are variable, from shoals with depths of 2m
to places as deep as approximately 250m.
3.9The area is relatively narrow, and the great variations in
depth cause extremely turbulent and choppy seas when waves
come in from the SW to NW. The conditions become even
worse when the tidal current runs against the waves.
3.9Smorsundnes (59°30'N., 5°14'E.), marked by a beacon, is
located on the mainland about 4 miles N of the N entrance to
Haugesund.
3.9Smorsundholme lies close NE of this point and is separated
from Trettoy, NE of it, by a narrow channel named Smorsund.
Viksefjorden is joined to the SE end of Smorsund by the nar-
row Straumen, which has depths of 0.9m in places.
3.9Molstrevag is entered between Langeneset (59°31'N.,
5°14'E.) and a point about 0.3 mile farther N. The inner part of
Molstrevag is sheltered, but the entrance channels are very nar-
row. Some of the rocks in the bay are marked by iron perches.
Among several quays at Molstrevag, the largest has depths of 5
to 7m alongside.
3.9Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Molstrevag, in
16.5m, sand bottom. The approach channels to this anchorage
are narrow. Smaller vessels anchor farther in.
Haugesund (59°25'N., 5°16'E.)
World Port Index No. 23440
3.10 Haugesund (Karmsund) was originally a fishing port;
it consists of six municipalities, with Karmsund being the larg-
est. Shipping and industry have gradually increased its impor-
tance. It has an expanding ship building and ship repairing
capability for conventional vessels, supply vessels, and off-
shore structures.
Haugesund’s harbor facilities extend from the mainland to
3.10
the adjacent islets of Risoy, Hasseloy, and Killingoy, and con-
tinuing across Karmsundet to Karmoy.
Port of Haugesund Home Page
http://www.karmsund-havn.no
Winds—Weather.—The weather at Haugesund is change-
3.10
able, which is characteristic of the W coast of Norway. Cargo
operations are not interfered with. The port is well sheltered
from all winds and is ice free. Winter storms are frequent and
may be from any quarter.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal current turns regularly 3 hours
3.10
before and 3 hours after HW, so that at about HW the current is
setting with its greatest velocity to the S; at LW the current is
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 53

3.10 Haugesund

setting with its greatest velocity to the N. With strong, continu- mal use of the port.
ous N winds, the tidal current may set continuously S and, sim- Depths—Limitations.—The port of Karmsund in Hauge-
3.10

ilarly, with strong, continuous S winds, it may set continuously
N.
The tidal currents attain their maximum velocity through Vi-
3.10
brandsoysund, off Osnesgavlen in Vestre Karmsund, and in
Salhusstraummen. In the latter channel, the current may attain
a velocity of 3 knots, but in Vibrandsoysund it is seldom stron-
sund consists of many public and private quays. Vessels up to
200,000 dwt, 362m in length, and 15m draft can be handled in
the port. The port itself is divided into several sub-port regions.
Berthing details for the most significant berths are shown in the
table titled Port of Karmsund Area—Berth Information.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 13.5m, connects Has-
3.10

ger than 2 knots. Strong winds, as mentioned above, also great-
ly influence the velocity.
In Smedasund and other parts of the harbor, the velocity is
3.10
usually about 1 knot. Nowhere do tidal currents affect the nor-
seloy with the mainland. Another bridge, with a vertical clear-
ance of 22.5m, joins Risoy with the mainland. Lights are
shown from the center of the bridges to indicate the fairway.

Port of Karmsund Area—Berth Information

Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Karmsund Container Terminal
KCT1 270m 10.0m 213.4m — — 40,000 dwt Ro-ro/lo-lo and containers.
Langevag
Breakbulk. Berth handles equipment
Langevag 117m 5.5-11.7m 60.5m — — —
and spare parts for vehicles.
Espervik
Amrock Under construction. Aggregates, bulk
100m 10.0m — — — 25,000 dwt
Granite cargo, and breakbulk.
Garpeskjaerskaien
Ferry 11m 10.5m 68.3m — — — Cruise vessels.
East
260m 7.1m 220m — — — Cruise.
Cruise

Pub. 182
54 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden

Port of Karmsund Area—Berth Information

Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
West
420m 9.5m 362m — — — Cruise.
Cruise
Haavik
Alumina
270m 11.0m 199.9m — — 147,000 dwt Aluminum, and breakbulk.
Bulk
Killingoy Subsea and Offshore Base (Haugesund)
Offshore vessels, project/heavy car-
No. 1 160m 10.0m 81.5m — — — go, offshore industrial maintenance
and repair service, and breakbulk.
Offshore vessels, project/heavy car-
No. 2 110m 15.2m 81.5m — — — go, offshore industrial maintenance
and repair service, and breakbulk.
Kopervik
Kopervik 291m 5.2-14.5m 119.3m — — — Breakbulk and others.
Westcon
Two floating docks of 7,600t and
Floating
100m — 80-150m — — — 1,300t capacity, one of 100t, and two
Docks
40t cranes.
Vessels up to 3,000t and a quay with
depths alongside up to 11m for off-
Slipway — — — — — —
shore structures. with a width of
44m.
Aibel
273m 8.2m — — — 150,000 dwt Crane capacity of 75t.
Drydock
Rubbestad
neset — — 118m 6.9m 21.4m 1,400 dwt —
Slipway
Forsevik
Forsevik 43m 5.5-9.7m 90.6m — — — Fishing vessels and breakbulk.
Norbar Minerals
NM 78m — 119.9m — — — Fertilizer, bulk cargo, and breakbulk.
Karsmund Maritime AS
Aggregates, cement, sand, offshore
Concrete 75m 9.3-11.9m 93.4m — — — vessels, project/heavy cargo, and
breakbulk.
Gismarvik Harbor
Aggregates, cement, bulk cargo, and
Gismarvik 80m 16.5m 138.8m — — —
breakbulk.
Norcem Karmony
Aggregates, cement, bulk cargo, and
Cement 23m — 109.1m — — —
breakbulk.
Norscrap Karmoy
Scrap metal, demolition, recycling,
Norscrap 50m — 88.6m — — —
and breakbulk.

Pub. 182
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 55

Port of Karmsund Area—Berth Information

Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Karsmund Havn
Export Containers, offshore vessels, bulk,
75m 10.0m 82.4m — — —
(KFXP) project/heavy cargo, and breakbulk.
Freezer Containers, offshore vessels, bulk,
98m 8.0m 81.8m — — —
(KFRY) project/heavy cargo, and breakbulk.
Karsmund Bulk
Karmsund Berthing length of 111m (including
Bulk 50m 8.3m 170m — — 8,000 dwt dolphins). Aggregates, animal feeds,
Terminal fertilizer, grain, salt, and breakbulk.
Husoy
Transshipment, bulk cargo, and
HUSO 120m 9.4m 137.9m — — —
breakbulk.
Koralfisk
Kony N 52m 8.0m 58.6m — — — Fishing.
Kony S 51m 8.0m 58.6m — — — Fishing.
Biomar
Biomar Fishing vessels. Berth handles fish
46m 10.0m 123.6m — — —
(AKBI) feed.
East Fishing vessels. Berth handles fish
48m 7.0m 89.9m — — —
(BIOO) feed.
West Fishing vessels. Berth handles fish
47m 7.0m 87.9m — — —
(BIOV) feed.
Stena Recycling
Scrap metal and breakbulk. Berth al-
Stena 50m — 98.8m — — —
so handles electrical waste material.
Arsvagen
Ro-Ro 14m — — — — — Fast ferries and ro-ro/lo-lo.
Rubbestadneset
No. 1 65m — 67m — — — Breakbulk.
No. 2 36m — 48.1m — — — Project/heavy cargo.
No. 3 45m — 56.4m — — — Project/heavy cargo.
Herring Oil Factory
Fishing vessels, grain, fish meal, fish
AKNY N 60m 8.0m 119.1m — — —
oil, and clean products.
Fishing, grain, fish meal, fish oil, and
AKNY W 91m 8.0m 119.1m — — —
clean products.
Statpipe Gas
Clean products, condensate, LPG,
Jetty No.1 80m 13.5m 220m 12.5m — — and bunkers.Berthing length of 170m
(including dolphins).
Clean products, condensate, crude,
Jetty No.2 76m 14m 275m 13.0m — — LPG, and bunkers. Berthing length of
331m (including dolphins).

Pub. 182
56 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden

Port of Karmsund Area—Berth Information

Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Jetty No.3 61m 10m 160m 9.0m — — Clean products, LPG, and bunkers.
Shell
Shell 75m — 198m — — 20,000 dwt Dirty products (DDP).
Lemminkainen
Dirty products (DDP), and break-
Asphalt 65m 5.5m 106m — — —
bulk. Two storage tanks for bitumen.
Equinor
Oil
70m — 168m — 21.0m 20,320 dwt Dirty products (DDP).
Equinor
Skudeneshavn Ferry
Ro-Ro 13m — 90m 5.5m — 5,000 dwt Fast ferries and ro-ro/lo-lo.

There is a lay-up area for rigs and vessels up to 250,000 dwt,

3.10

in depths of 23 to 40m. It is reported that vessels are generally

restricted to a length of 320m and a sailing draft of 10m.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
3.10

dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-

soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Karmsund—
3.10

Contact Information.

Karmsund—Contact Information
Port Authority
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Telephone 47-52-703750
Facsimile 47-52-703769
E-mail havneovakte@karmsund-havn.no
Harbormaster
Telephone 47-52-703752 Photo: Roar Johansen
3.11

3.11 Ryvarden Light

Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 18.3 to 37m, good
3.10
width of about 0.5.
holding ground, about 0.1 mile off the SW side of Risoy. In this Raudholmene (59°33'N., 5°09'E.) is a group of islets and
3.11

anchorage caution is necessary because farther SW the depths
increase suddenly.
Caution.—Submarine cables and pipelines lie in the vicinity
3.10
E of Haugesund and close N of Karmoy. Mariners are advised
not to anchor or trawl in this vicinity.
rocks on the S side of Gunnarskjersholet, about 2 miles SW of
Bomlahuk. Numerous islets, rocks and shoals, best seen on the
chart, lie in the vicinity of Raudholmene. Gunnarskjersholet
lies about 1 mile NW of Raudholmene.
Directions.—There is no difficulty in approaching Bom-
3.11

A precautionary area, best seen on the chart, was established

3.10
(2019) on the SW side of Risoy islet.
3.11 Bomlafjorden (59°34'N., 5°14'E.) is entered between
Ryvarden (59°32'N., 5°14'E.) and Bomlahuk, the S extremity
of Bomlo. Bomlafjorden is described along with Indreleia.
Ryvarden Light stands on the N entrance point of Molstrevag.
3.11
lafjorden from seaward by way of Gunnarskjaersholet. Steer
for the light structure on Raudholmene on a bearing of about
099° and, when about 0.5 mile from the light, alter course to
pass about midway between Raudholmene and Gunnarskjaer.
When clear of Raudholmene, alter course E into the fairway of
Bomlafjorden.
Caution.—Vessels passing close to Sveio Broadcasting
3.11

Gunnarskjersholet
3.11 (Gunnarskjaershalet) (59°33'N., Station (59°37'N., 5°19'E.) may experience electronic interfer-
5°08'E.) is the name given to the approach leading in from the ence due to the station’s electromagnetic fields.
W to Bomlafjorden. Its fairway is deep and free and has a

Pub. 182
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
Bomlafjorden to Selbjornsfjorden
3.12 The coast between the seaward entrances of Bom-
lafjorden and Selbjornsfjorden is irregular. It is formed by the
islands of Bomlo, Goddo, and Gissoy, and the many islets,
rocks, and shoals in their vicinity.
Bomlafjorden lies between the mainland, on the SE, and the
islands of Bomlo, Mosteroy, and Stord, on the NW. From its
entrance, the fjord runs NE for about 15 miles to Tittelsnes,
where it joins with the inner fjords of Alfjorden, Bjodafjorden,
and Klosterfjorden.
Bomlafjorden is a broad, deep channel. Its fairway is free
from dangers and is easily navigated. The current at its en-
trance is usually outgoing, but is incoming in bad weather,
even during NE gales.
When passing W of Bomlo, it is advisable to keep well clear
3.12
of the outer dangers for, although most of them are either visi-
ble above-water or are indicated by breakers, they extend some
distance seaward; during light winds the flood current fre-
quently sets strongly toward the shore.
Most of Bomlo is moderately high and, as the off-lying islets
3.12
are much lower, they are not easily distinguished until within a
distance of about 10 miles.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for most vessels.
3.12
Siggja (59°45'N., 5°18'E.), a peak in the N part of Bomlo
3.12
about 20 miles N of the N end of Karmoy, is visible in clear
weather for a distance of about 30 miles. It resembles a pyra-
mid with a rounded top and a broad base. Siggja is normally
seen before any other part of Bomlo is visible.
There are numerous anchorages on this coast, some of which
3.12
would possibly afford shelter to vessels of moderate draft, al-
though the available sources of information generally limit
them to small vessels.
3.13 Bomlo (59°40'N., 5°12'E.) is an irregularly-shaped is-
land which is divided into two parts by the Kuleseidkanal,
which is described in paragraph 3.16. The W coast of Bomlo is
somewhat protected by a number of scattered islet groups,
through or E of which there is an inshore channel for small ves-
sels with local knowledge.
Dyrneset (59°37'N., 5°10'E.), a point, is located about 3
3.13
miles NNW from the point of Bomlahuk. Four inlets between
Dyrneset and Bomlahuk indent the island’s coast; Kalavag, Ei-
desvik, and Roaldsfjorden, the three southernmost inlets, pro-
vide anchorages for small vessels with local knowledge, in 7.3
to 12.8m. Iron perches mark some of the dangers on the ap-
proach to the anchorage areas.
Dyrnesflu, a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch, lies 183m
3.13
offshore in a position about 0.3 mile S of Dyrneset.
Espevaer (59°35'N., 5°09'E.) is the largest islet in the Espe-
3.13
vaer group lying within 2 miles NW of Bomlahuk.
Numerous above and below-water rocks lie within and on
3.13
the edge of the group. Fishing vessels frequent these islets, es-
pecially during spring. Only small vessels with local knowl-
edge can enter the group.
3.14 Nordoyane (59°36'N., 5°07'E.) is a group of small is-
lets and rocks that lie within about 2 miles NW of the NW ex-
tremity of Espevaer; these waters are very foul. Navigation
through them should be attempted only by small vessels with
57
local knowledge.
Sonoyosen (59°35'N., 5°07'E.) is the channel between the
3.14
Espevaer group and Nordoyane. It should not be used during
stormy weather or without local knowledge. Iron perches mark
some of the dangers near the fairway.
Vikafjorden (59°38'N., 5°11'E.), on the W coast of Bomlo,
3.14
can be used for anchorage by small vessels, but local knowl-
edge is necessary. Iron perches mark foul ground on the sides
of the fjord.
Gissoysund (59°38'N., 5°10'E.), immediately N of
Vikafjorden, is a passage between the coast of Bomlo and Nor-
dre Gissoy and Sore Gissoy, the two parts of an off-lying is-
land.
Holsoyane (59°39'N., 5°07'E.) is a group of islets and rocks
3.14
which lies within 2.3 miles W and WNW of the N extremity of
Nordre Gissoy.
3.15 Grutlefjorden (59°40'N., 5°10'E.) indents the W
coast of Bomlo. Shoal water extends about 0.2 mile from the
head of the inlet. Several of the dangers fringing the shores of
the inlet are marked by iron perches. A quay at the head of the
inlet has depths of 5 to 7m alongside.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 20.1m, on the NW
3.15
side of Grutlefjorden about 0.3 mile within the entrance.
Stokvik, on the Bomlo coast about 1 mile N of Grut-
3.15
lefjorden, provides anchorage for small vessels in about 5.5m.
Lyklingfjorden (59°42'N., 5°11'E.), which indents the Bomlo
3.15
coast, can accommodate small vessels with local knowledge.
Lyklingfjorden is very foul; iron perches mark some of the
dangers.
Store Hiskjo (59°44'N., 5°09'E.), Lille Hiskjo, and numer-
3.15
ous other close-lying islets, fringing dangers, and detached
rocks lie in a group close off the coast of Bomlo and NW of the
entrance to Kuleseidkanal.
The channels between Bomlo and these islands and between
3.15
Store Hiskjo and Lille Hiskjo are encumbered with dangers,
some of which are marked by iron perches. Dangers extend
about 0.5 mile offshore from the seaward sides of the islets.
Hiskosen is the water area between the SE sides of Store Hi-
skjo and Lille Hiskjo and the coast of Bomlo.
Anchorage.—Anchorages for small vessels with local knowl-
3.15
edge are available in several places in the channels separating
Store Hiskjo and Lille Hiskjo and among the adjacent islets.
3.16 The W approach to Kuleseidkanal leads through His-
kosen, then NE through Adnanesosen, the water area between
the SE side of Lille Hiskjo and the Bomlo coast, then SE
through Troytarosen (59°44'N., 5°13'E.), an embankment.
Dyroy (59°45'N., 5°11'E.), with Dyroykalven close S, forms
3.16
the N side of Adnanesosen. A 2.7m depth extending a short
distance S of Dyroykalven is marked by an iron perch.
Hanaskjaer (59°44'N., 5°10'E.), marked by a beacon, is on
3.16
the NW side of the fairway about 0.3 mile SSE of the S extrem-
ity of Lille Hiskjo. Tausastein, awash and marked by an iron
beacon, lies on the W side of the fairway at the N end of a
shoal in a position about 0.2 mile NNE of Hanaskjaer.
Selvagflu, marked by an iron perch, is on the edge of foul
3.16
ground extending from Bomlo, on the E side of the fairway
about 1 mile E of Tausastein.
Vordnesholmen (59°45'N., 5°13'E.) lies close off the N side
3.16
Pub. 182
58 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
of Vordnes on the S side of the channel to Kuleseidkanal.
A 7m depth is located about 0.1 mile WNW of Vordneshol-
3.16
men. Foul ground, marked by an iron perch, fringes the E side
of Vordnes.
Flatholmen is located about 183m NE of Vordnesholmen.
3.16
Entrance into Troytarosen is made between these two islets.
Kuleseidvag (59°44'N., 5°14'E.) lies SE of Troytarosen and
3.16
is connected to that basin by a narrow channel between Bomlo,
on the NE, and the small islet Straumsholmen, on the SW. A
light marks each end of the channel.
Kuleseidkanal leads NNE from Kuleseidvag to Finnasvik, at
3.16
the NW end of Boroyfjorden. The canal is about 8.8m wide in
its narrowest part and 4m deep. A bridge, with a vertical clear-
ance of 13m, spans the canal near its SW end. Vessels with a
length of 38m and a draft of 3.6m can use the canal. There is a
speed limit of 5 knots in the canal. Lights mark each end of
Kuleseidkanal.
The coast from Storaneset (59°45'N., 5°08'E.), a projection
on the seaward side of Bomlo, to Slatteroy, on the S side of the
Selbjornsfjorden entrance about 9 miles N, is formed by the
seaward sides of Bomlo, Rogoy, Goddo, Gissoy, and numerous
other islets that are near and between these islands and larger
islets. Fringing dangers lie up to 1.25 miles off some of the
larger islets. A maze of intricate channels leads among the is-
lets into sheltered anchorages for small vessels, but local
knowledge is necessary for their navigation.
Beacons and perches mark some of the dangers near the fair-
3.16
ways and there are several lights.
3.17 Melingsvag (59°47'N., 5°07'E.) (World Port Index
No. 23300) is a safe harbor. There are several quays, with
depths alongside of 3 to 9m. Fuel oil and fresh water are avail-
able.
Two lights, in range 058°, are shown from the SE side of the
3.17
bay and lead through the fairway of the narrow entrance. An-
other light is shown from the SW extremity of Litlenesholmen.
A beacon stands on Kattholme, on the NW side of the entrance
channel. Svelteflu, on the opposite side of the channel, is
marked by an iron perch.
Strong onshore winds, especially from S, raise heavy seas in
3.17
the entrance and close to it.
3.18 Mosterhamn (59°42'N., 5°24'E.) (World Port Index
No. 23310) is located at the SE end of Mosteroy on the N side
of Bomlafjorden. It is noted for its church, the oldest in Scandi-
navia, which was built in the 10th century by Olaf Trygvesson.
There is a concrete quay, 47m long, with depths alongside from
6.2 to 7.4m. Another quay, which is 19.8m long, has depths
from 3.4 to 5.9m alongside.
The outer harbor has anchorage depths of 14.6 to 18.3m,
3.18
sand and clay, and is provided with mooring rings. South gales
send in considerable swell. The best anchorage position is to-
ward the E side of the harbor. Should the wind blow from S, it
is better to shift farther inside and anchor, in 11m, abreast the
N end of Fyrholme, the islet close NE of Kaninholme, where
the vessel will be less exposed to the swell. The inner harbor
has a depth of 7.3m, but can only be entered by vessels of very
shallow draft.
When entering or leaving Mosterhamn, keep well over to-
3.18
ward Kaninholme, as a reef, which is marked by iron perches,
Pub. 182
extends for some distance from the S shore of the harbor.
Eldoyane (59°45'N., 5°30'E.), a man-made peninsula, ex-
3.18
tends about 1 mile S from the SE side of Stord. A large ship-
yard, equipped with cranes of up to 300 tons capacity, and a
drydock, which is 325m long and 52m wide, and can accom-
modate vessels up to 250,000 dwt, is located at Eldoyane.
3.19 Leirvik (59°47'N., 5°31'E.) (World Port Index No.
23340) is a roomy harbor on the SE shore of Stord. It is shel-
tered from the E by several islets, but is open to the SE.
Depths—Limitations.—The main wharf is 240m long, with
3.19
depths of 6 to 12m alongside. There is 600m of private quay-
age, with depths of 5 to 12m alongside. There are facilities for
ro-ro vessels and coastal tankers. Vessels up to 160m in length
can be handled in the port.
3.19 By Wolfmann [CC BY 4.0 (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by/4.0)
Leirvik
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.19
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Leirvik—Con-
3.19
tact Information.
Leirvik—Contact Information
VHF VHF channel 16
Telephone 47-53-496766
Facsimile 47-53-496768
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 40m, sand and
3.19
clay, in the W part of Leirvik. Caution should be taken to avoid
a submarine cable along the N shore.
The entrance to Fordespollen (59°39'N., 5°25'E.) lies on the
3.19
SE side of Bomlafjorden. The fjord extends S from its entrance
for about 3 miles and has several side leads. This branch of
Bomlafjorden does not freeze over in winter.
Narrow and encumbered channels lead from the SW portion
3.19
of Fordespollen into Rodspollen.
Depths through the fairway of Fordespollen are ample, but
3.19
there are nearby dangers, particularly in the SE part of the ba-
sin, some of which are marked by iron perches.
As there are rocks and shoals in the vicinity of the anchorag-
3.19
es, local knowledge is essential.
3.20 The entrance to Boroyfjorden (59°40'N., 5°17'E.)
lies on the NW side of Bomlafjorden. From the entrance, the
fjord trends N for about 4 miles and has a maximum width, be-
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
tween islands and islets on either side, of about 2 miles. Finn-
asvik, the head of which is about 5 miles N of the Boroyfjorden
entrance, is the largest of a number of bays and inlets which
lead off from the main fjord. Kuleseidkanal, previously de-
scribed in paragraph 3.16, is entered from the NW end of Finn-
asvik. Fairway depths through Boroyfjorden are ample.
Secure anchorages are located in some of the side bays and
3.20
inlets. In winter, the N half of Boroyfjorden is sometimes ice-
bound. Only small craft with local knowledge can anchor in
Boroyfjorden.
Langestraumen (59°41'N., 5°15'E.), the narrow channel be-
3.20
tween Bomlo and Straumoy, which leads S into Tjongspollen,
has a least fairway depth of 3m and is only navigable at slack
water.
Stokksund (59°45'N., 5°23'E.), one of the channels of Indre-
3.20
leia, is formed between the island of Bomlo, on the W, and the
island of Stord, on the E. It leads NNW for about 8 miles to a
position E of Store Klakksoy (59°50'N., 5°16'E.), where it
branches. One branch continues NNW for about 7 miles under
the name of Nyleid and gives access to the S side of Selbjorns-
fjorden. The other trends N under the name of Engesundsleid
(59°52'N., 5°17'E.) and becomes very narrow and shallow in
some of its reaches.
The Stokksund-Nyleid route is safe in clear weather, but
3.20
should not be attempted in thick weather without reliable local
knowledge. Large vessels should always use the main route
through Langenuen, on the E side of Stord. Langenuen, al-
though about 3 miles longer than the Stokksund-Nyleid route,
is wider, deeper, and free from dangers in the fairway.
3.21 Sagvag (59°46'N., 5°23'E.) (World Port Index No.
23330) is located at the head of a small islet-encumbered inlet.
The inner channel becomes very narrow but is well marked by
lights, buoys, and iron perches. A quay on the S side of Sagvag
entrance has a depth of 12m. A shoal, with a depth of 5m, lies
near the SW end of the quay. Small vessels with local knowl-
edge can anchor in the inlet.
Langenuen trends N and NW for about 14 miles from its S
entrance (59°48'N., 5°34'E.) to its junction with the E end of
Selbjornsfjorden. The S part of the passage is formed between
Stord, on the W, and the islands of Huglo and Tysnesoy, on the
E. Langenuen continues N for an additional 10.5 miles be-
tween Selbjornsfjorden and Korsfjorden and leads between the
islands of Huftaroy and Reksteren and then across the W end
of Bjornafjorden.
The S part of Langenuen narrows to a width of 0.5 mile in
3.21
places; the least width of the N part is about 1 mile. Great
depths prevail in the channel and there are no dangers in the
fairway.
Heavy squalls occasionally sweep down from the high land
3.21
of Stord. In Langenuen, there is nearly always a tidal current
setting N, although occasionally in fine weather it sets S.
Dangerous eddies near the shores of Langenuen have also
3.21
been reported.
Caution.—A permanently-active firing practice area lies in
3.21
the SW and W approaches to Selbjornsfjorden. For more infor-
mation, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arc-
tic Ocean.
59
Selbjornsfjorden to Korsfjorden
3.22 This is the coastal sector between Furen and Store
Marstein, an islet on the S side of Korsfjorden entrance about
10 miles N. It includes numerous islets and rocks fronting the
islands of Stolmen, Huftaroy, and Hundvaga and is indented by
Skoltafjorden, Mokstrafjorden, and Horgefjorden.
Several good anchorages for both large and small vessels are
3.22
found in this area. From offshore, the openings of Selbjorns-
fjorden and Korsfjorden can be distinguished.
Veten (60°01'N., 5°15'E.), a hill in the S part of Huftaroy,
3.22
should be easily identified. Maksteinen is located about 2 miles
N of Fugloy and, because of its isolated position, cannot be
mistaken. The lights shown from the islets of Slatteroy and
Store Marstein are also good landmarks.
The outermost dangers between Furen and Store Marstein all
3.22
lie within 1 mile of the nearest islet. Even with a moderate
breeze, the sea breaks over them.
Marsteinsbaen (60°08'N., 4°59'E.) lies, awash, about 1 mile
3.22
WSW of Store Marstein and is unmarked. This is a serious
hazard and vessels should navigate with caution when in the
area of this shoal. Hillagrunn, about 2 miles WSW of Store
Marstein, has a least depth of 21m and only breaks in very
heavy weather.
3.23 Skoltafjorden (60°02'N., 5°00'E.) is entered from
seaward between Skoltane and Englamarskaget and leads E to
Stolmasund, Mokstrafjorden, and the N approaches to Bek-
kjorviksund. Ample depths can be found through the fairway,
but there are a few islet groups and some detached dangers ly-
ing in mid-channel. Kalsoy, about 2 miles ENE of Skoltane, is
the largest islet on the N side of the channel.
Kalsoy is about 30m high. Brorne, a group of above and be-
3.23
low-water rocks, lies within 0.2 mile SW of the SW extremity
of Kalsoy. The S and E sides of the islet are fringed by foul
ground extending 0.15 mile offshore in places, and on the E
side, Vardholme, Hestholme, and nearby rocks lie up to 0.3
mile offshore.
Larsaskjaer, a detached above-water rock marked by an iron
3.23
perch, is located about 0.4 mile E of the SE extremity of
Kalsoy. Vessels with local knowledge can use the narrow chan-
nel on the NW side of Kalsoy.
3.24 Fjordaflu (60°01'N., 5°07'E.), a 5m depth marked by
a buoy, lies in the fairway of the N approach to Stolmasund. On
the E side of the N approach to Stolmasund, Vadholmane, a
group of several small islets and some rocks, lies up to 0.5 mile
off the N side of Selbjornen. Iron perches, beacons, and buoys
mark some of these rocks and other dangers closer inshore.
Stutaflu, a 4.5m depth marked by a buoy, is in the fairway of
3.24
the Stolmasund approach in a position about midway between
the NE extremity of Stolmen and the SW islet of Vadholmane.
Mokstrafjorden entrance is between the N end of Mokster
(60°04'N., 5°06'E.) and the S extremity of Horgo, about 1 mile
NE. The channel leads in a general SE direction toward the N
end of Bekkjorviksund and is connected SW with Skol-
tafjorden and Stolmasund and NE with Hundvakosen. Ample
depths prevail in the fairway.
Hysteinen, a 14m depth, lies in the Mokstrafjorden entrance,
3.24
about 2 miles WNW of the N extremity of Mokster.
Pub. 182
60 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
Nordstallen and Midstallen, with depths of 21m and 19m, lie
3.24
about 0.5 mile ESE and 0.75 mile SE, respectively, of Hystein-
en. These depths may break during onshore gales.
Kvitingsflu, a rocky area with a depth of 6m, lies about 0.1
3.24
mile S of Midstallen.
Helgeskjaer and other rocks, some above water, lie within
3.24
0.3 mile NW of Mokster. Blaasterstallen, a 4.5m depth, lies
about 183m N of Mokster.
Stovholme (60°03'N., 5°06'E.) is located close offshore on
3.24
the E side of the approach to Naustvag, a cove on the SE side
of Mokster. Close E of the islet there is a 5.5m depth.
A mole extends N from Stovholme to Mokster; another
3.24
mole, its outer end marked by a light, extends about 69m SW
from Stovholme.
3.25 Mokstra Groningen (60°03'N., 5°07'E.) is an islet
about 0.5 mile NE of the NE end of Kalsoy. Shoal water,
marked by an iron perch, extends NW from Mokstra Gronin-
gen to a position about 0.2 mile ESE of the S point of Mokster.
Krabbhausane, a group of above and below-water rocks, lies
3.25
within 0.3 mile E and ESE of Mokstra Groningen. Two below-
water rocks at the SW end of the group are each marked by an
iron perch. A detached 12m depth lies about 0.3 mile S of the
southernmost rock of the Krabbhausane group.
Terneskjaer is located on the NE side of the fjord about 0.2
3.25
mile SSE of Horgetrynet, the S point of Horgo. A 4.5m depth
lies about 0.2 mile E of the same point.
A number of islets also encumber the sound between the SE
3.25
side of Hundvaga and the W coast of Huftaroy, to the E. A nav-
igable channel leads N among these latter islets from Mok-
strafjorden to Hundvakosen.
Hundvakosen (60°07'N., 5°12'E.), a basin, lies between the
3.25
E side of Hundvaga and the N end of Huftaroy. There are a
number of islets at the N and S ends of Hundvakosen; the NW
part is obstructed by above and below-water rocks, some of
which are marked by iron perches.
Charted depths through the fairway and in the approach
3.25
channels are irregular but ample.
Krosshavnsund (60°09'N., 5°12'E.), the channel between
3.25
Staloy and Krossoy to the W leads N from Hundvakosen to
Korsfjorden. Overhead cables, with a minimum vertical clear-
ance of 35m cross, the channel.
3.26 Horgefjorden (60°06'N., 5°05'E.), a basin, is formed
between the islet Horgo, on the S, and Stora Kalsoy, on the N,
and trends E to the W side of Hundvaga. It is connected to
Mokstrafjorden by a channel leading S between Hundvaga and
Horgo and to Korsfjorden by the channels leading N between
Hundvaga and Stora Kalsoy.
Sveinane, the S danger on the N side of the Horgefjorden en-
3.26
trance, lies awash on the S side of Stora Kalsoy. Sverslingen is
a small islet on the S side of the entrance about 1 mile SE of
Sveinane. Within 91m S of Sverslingen there are numerous
rocks, some of which are awash.
On the N side of Horgefjorden, Bergsholme lies at the end of
3.26
a chain of islets which extends about 1 mile E from the SE end
of Stora Kalsoy. Kalsoyvik is formed between the N side of
these islets and the S side of Stora Kalsoy.
Reefs extend about 0.2 mile N and NE from Bergsholme.
3.26
Smaskjaerflu lies about 0.2 mile NE of Bergsholme. An 11m
Pub. 182
depth lies about 0.2 mile ESE of Bergsholme.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Kalsoyvik, near its
3.26
head, in 45 to 50m, clay. A detached shoal, with depths of 3 to
3.9m, lies 183m off the S shore of Kalsoyvik nearly 0.5 mile W
of Smaskjaerflu. Barnehaughflu, marked by an iron perch, lies
close off the N shore NW of this detached shoal. Close SSE of
Barnehaughflu, there is a 4m depth.
The best anchorage for small vessels is in the SW part of the
3.26
bay. Such vessels can also anchor off Hille, in a cove NW of
Barnehaughflu; an iron perch marks foul ground on the W side
of the cove.
Between Stora Kalsoy and Navoy, the NW part of Hundva-
3.26
ga, are Hidleroy, Nautoy, Spissoy, Kvaloy, some other smaller
islets, and numerous rocks. A reef extending about 91m SW
from Nautoy is marked by an iron perch.
Bakkasund is the narrow channel between Nautoy and the E
3.26
side of Stora Kalsoy. Kubbholme and Aerholme lie within 0.3
mile SE of Hidleroy, and about 0.1 mile E of the latter there is a
9m depth. Foul ground fringing the S end of Spissoy is marked
by a buoy moored in a position about 0.2 mile NE of Aer-
holme. Svartaskjaer, about 0.3 mile E of Aerholme, is awash in
places. Arholme is located about 0.2 mile N of Svartaskjaer
and is foul on its S side. An 8m depth lies about 0.1 mile S of
Arholme. Mjanesflu, lying 183m offshore about 0.2 mile E of
Svartaskjaer, has a depth of less than 1.8m and is marked by an
iron perch.
Austreflu, a 3m depth, marked by a buoy, lies about 0.5 mile
3.26
N of the N entrance to Bakkasund. Some of the other dangers
between Stora Kalsoy and Navoy are marked by buoys or iron
perches.
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 25.9m, spans
3.26
the N entrance of Bakkasund between Kvaloy and the NW ex-
tremity of Spissoy. Another overhead cable, with a vertical
clearance of 19.8m, extends from the SW extremity of Nautoy
to Hidleroy.
Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
3.27 Indreleia comprises the fjords and sounds forming the
protected inland navigation route between Skudenesfjorden
and Korsfjorden. Karmsundet is the first, or southernmost,
reach of Indreleia. Vessels proceeding N from Stavanger to
Bergen can enter Karmsundet from the N side of Skudenes-
fjorden. Between Haugesund, at the N end of Karmsund, and
the entrance of Bomlafjorden, about 8 miles N, the route leads
along the outer coast and is only partly protected by the inshore
islet groups.
North of Bomlafjorden, Indreleia offers alternate routes, of
3.27
which the E, through Langenuen, should be taken by large ves-
sels. The W route leads through Stokksund and Nyleid. Both
routes join N of the island of Stord.
North of Stord, the principal route passes between Huftaroy
3.27
and Reksteren, through the W part of Bjornefjorden, and then
E of Lille Laugaroy (60°09'N., 5°15'E.) into Korsfjorden.
The secondary route leads N through Bekkjorviksund, Mok-
3.27
strafjorden, and Hundvakosen, then through the channel be-
tween Krossoy and Staloy, and E of Store Skorpo into
Korsfjorden.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in Indreleia.
3.27
Most of the inner fjords and sounds which are adjacent to
3.27
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 61

this section of Indreleia penetrate inland in a general NE direc- Smorstakk, an islet easily identified by its sugarloaf shape, is
3.28

tion through the Hardangerfjorden region and have the group
name of Hardangerfjordenane. This grand inlet is, perhaps, the
most beautiful of all the Norwegian fjords. Its various branches
extend through districts abounding in game and presenting a
great diversity of magnificent scenery.
The main branch is a continuation of Bomlafjorden and ex-
3.27
tends, under various names, about 50 miles NE from its en-
trance. It then branches, with one branch, Sorfjorden,
extending about 20 miles S, and the other, Eidfjorden, extend-
ing 15 miles E. There are also numerous smaller branches, in
most of which anchorages can be found. Hardangerfjordenane
is for the most part free from dangers; their shores are nearly
everywhere steep-to.
Caution.—In winter, falling snow is the greatest danger, as
3.27
the SW of the islets extending S from Fosenoy.
3.29 Kopervik (59°17'N., 5°19'E.) (World Port Index No.
23450) is located on the W side of Karmsundet. The harbor is
situated on both sides of an inlet. Vessels wishing to anchor
should do so N of Byggnesskjera, which marked by an iron
perch; the bottom holding ground is a mixture of clay and rock.
The Stromsund Bridge spans the inlet about 0.3 mile within
the entrance. Vessels with a draft up to 5.8m can pass the
bridge. The vertical clearance under the middle of the bridge is
reported to be 3.3m.

the land is so often completely obscured for hours on end, even

when quite close. In Indreleia, when a snowstorm threatens,
careful bearings of the nearest anchorage should be taken to
enable the vessel to seek shelter. Because of the tidal currents,
it is dangerous to heave-to.

The Inner Fjords

3.28 Karmsundet (59°09'N., 5°21'E.) is about 17 miles long
from its S entrance in Skudenesfjorden, between Skudenes, the SE
extremity of Karmoy, and the SW point of Vestre Bokn, about 3
miles ENE. It lies in a generally N direction between Karmoy, on
the W, and Vestre Bokn, Fosenoy, and the mainland of the Hauge-
sund peninsula, N of Fosenoy, on the E.
Karmsundet may be considered the beginning of Indreleia.
3.28

The port of Haugesund (see paragraph 3.10) is on the E side of 3.29 Kopervik
the N end of Karmsundet, and Kopervik (see paragraph 3.29) is
on the W side, about 8 miles above the S entrance of the sound. Stangalandsvagen and Skipparvik are small inlets close S
3.29

It is easily navigated and is used often. Vessels of 40,000 dwt and N of the harbor. Skipparvik is spanned by a cable with a
with a draft of 9.7m can navigate the sound. Its S part is deep vertical clearance of 15.8m.
and its fairway is free from dangers. Special care should be tak- There are two berths for general cargo with depths alongside
3.29

en, however, near the W end and N end of Fosenoy and in other between 1.6 and 8.7m.
narrow portions of the sound. Kaleflu, awash and marked by an iron perch, lies close off a
3.29

Gronestadvag (59°12'N., 5°23'E.) lies on the E side of

3.28
Karmsundet. A beacon stands on the N entrance point of the
bay. An 8m depth lies about 183m offshore, 0.15 mile NW of
the beacon; a 4m depth lies about 183m W of the beacon.
point S of the entrance to Stangalandsvagen. Mandalsflu, a
3.9m depth marked by a buoy, is located about 0.1 mile N of
Kaleflu.
A light is shown from Koparnaglen, a rock close offshore N
3.29

Kjelsflu, which is marked by an iron perch, is on the N side
close within the entrance of Gronestadvag.
Foul ground fringes the S entrance point up to 183m off-
3.28
shore; a 5m depth lies nearly in the middle of the bay.
of the approach to Kopervik. An iron perch marks a group of
rocks, with depths of 1.8m and less, which lie between Kopar-
naglen and the shore W.
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.29

Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in

3.28 may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
Gronestadvag. additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Trosnavag (59°13'N., 5°23'E.) is another small bight on the
3.28 Contact Information.—See the table titled Kopervik—
3.29

E side of Karmsundet. Trosnavagneset, its SW entrance point, Contact Information.

is located about 1 mile N of the beacon at the entrance of
Gronestadvag. Skruholme is located about 0.1 mile NNE of Kopervik—Contact Information
Trosnavagneset. A number of rocks, one of which is awash and
marked by an iron perch, lie between them. Small vessels with Port Authority
local knowledge can anchor in Trosnavag. VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16
Ternholme, about 2 miles NNW of Trosnavagneset, is at the
47-52-850243
3.28

S end of a chain of islets and rocks extending about 2 miles Telephone

from the S point of Fosenoy. Ternholmflu, with a depth of 4m 47-52-851055
and marked by a buoy, lies at the end of foul ground extending Facsimile 47-52-852513
about 0.2 mile SSW from Ternholme.

Pub. 182
62 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
Kopervik—Contact Information
Harbormaster
47-52-852613
Telephone
47-52-815619
Anchorage.—Vessels awaiting pilots should anchor, in
3.29
about 37m, with the light on Koparnaglen bearing about 290°.
Anchorage can also be taken close E of the harbor entrance,
3.29
in 14.6 to 20.1m.
3.30 From Kopervik, Karmsundet trends N for about 3 miles,
then continues NNW for about 3 miles to the narrows of the sound
at Salhusstraummen. The E shore of this section is quite regular,
and there are few islets, but the W side is indented by three sepa-
rate areas in which there are numerous islets, rocks, and detached
dangers, some of which are marked by perches or buoys. Man-
dalsflua, a 2.5m patch marked by an iron perch, lies on the S side
of the approach to Kopervik, 0.4 mile SSE of Koparnaglen.
A small 15m depth lies on the W side of the fairway about 1
3.30
mile NNE of Koparnaglen.
Several above and below-water rocks, marked by two iron
3.30
perches, lie along the W shore of Karmsundet, about 1 mile
NNW of the bridge. A 2.9m depth, marked by an iron perch, is
located close off the E shore opposite the rocks.
Salhusstraummen (59°22'N., 5°18'E.) is the narrowest part
3.30
of Karmsundet. There is a bridge which has a vertical clear-
ance of 45m and a horizontal clearance of 90m. Green lights
are shown from the bridge to indicate the fairway. An overhead
cable, with a vertical clearance of 47m, spans the channel
about 183m S of the bridge.
A fish oil factory and an oil tank farm on the N shore of the
3.30
bay have quays, with depths alongside of 6m. Quays, with
depths alongside of 3 to 4m, are located at Utvik, in the SW
corner of the bay.
3.31 Boviki (59°22'N., 5°18'E.), on the W side of the fair-
way, affords good anchorage, in depths up to 31m. In the outer
part of the bay, the bottom is mostly sand and shingle. From
abreast the tile works and inward, it is mud. Boflu, lying in the
N part of Boviki, has a depth of 2m and is marked by an iron
perch. Kyrkjeflu, on the S side of Boviki about 0.2 mile off-
shore, has a depth of 2.7m and is marked by an iron perch.
Three overhead cables, with vertical clearances of 54m, span
3.31
Karmsundet close S of Kulorten. Mariners are cautioned that,
within a distance of about 1 mile, the overhead cable gives a ra-
dar echo similar to that of a ship on a collision course.
Kulorten, marked by a tower beacon, lies 91m offshore about
3.31
0.5 mile N of Koltrepynten. Storetang, a rock with less than
1.8m, lies about 0.1 mile S of Kulorten and is marked by a
buoy.
Koltrepynten (59°19'N., 5°20'E.), on the W shore of Karm-
3.31
sundet, is the site of an aluminum works. There is a concrete
quay, 270m long, with a depth alongside of 11.6m. It is report-
ed that vessels of up to 100,000 dwt have been accommodated
alongside. It has a large conspicuous warehouse, cranes, and a
plant for discharging alumina.
3.32 The fjords and channels which continue in a NE di-
Pub. 182
rection from Bomlafjorden are called Hardangerfjorden. Occa-
sionally, there are heavy squalls, and visibility is reduced.
There are few other dangers, however, and the fjords are, for
the most part, easy to navigate.
Generally, the shores are steep and rise to heights of about
3.32
914m, but there are many bays and small fjords where flat, fer-
tile land is largely used for cherry and apple orchards.
The lower slopes are generally covered with pine forests,
3.32
above which there is a belt of summer pasture land. The sum-
mits are, however, of bare rock, except where Folgefonni, a
glacier about 1,654m high, covers 108 square miles of the
mountain region between the main fjord and Sorfjorden.
Regular ship communication is maintained between places
3.32
in Hardangerfjorden and other places on the Norwegian coast.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for most vessels.
3.32
Anchorage.—When selecting an anchorage, avoid anchor-
3.32
ing too near shore in places exposed to avalanches.
3.33 Laukhamarsund (59°52'N., 5°36'E.) is the navigable
channel between Huglo and Skorpo leading NW from Husnes-
fjorden into the SE part of Skjeljaviksund. Skolten, a rock with
a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an iron perch, lies on
the N side of the fairway about 0.3 mile ENE of Kvarvaneset,
the NW extremity of Huglo. Skolten is the only known danger
in Laukhamarsund.
A cable, with a vertical clearance of 50m, spans a narrow
3.33
portion of the sound about 0.5 mile E of Kvarvaneset.
Skorpesund (59°55'N., 5°38'E.) separates the island of
3.33
Skorpo from the SW side of the irregular peninsula extending
from the SE side of Tysnesoy. The sound is narrow and should
not be used without local knowledge. Near its middle part, a
reef extends from each of the shores almost halfway across the
sound; an iron perch marks each of these reefs.
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 25m, crosses
3.33
Skorpesund about 1 mile within its SE entrance.
Seloysund, Midtoysund, and Anuglosund are the three chan-
3.33
nels, from W to E, leading N from Husnesfjorden to Onarhe-
imsfjorden (59°57'N., 5°41'E.) among Seloy, Midtoy, and
Anuglo. Several small islets and many above and below-water
rocks lie in Seloysund and Anuglosund.
Midtoysund is free from dangers, except near the middle of
3.33
its W side, where reefs extend about 0.1 mile offshore. At its N
end, Midtoysund becomes quite narrow and has a least charted
depth of 29m in the fairway.
An overhead cable crosses each of these sounds. There are
3.33
vertical clearances of 17m, 30m, and 25m, respectively, under
these cables. A submarine cable is laid across Midtoysund and
another across Anuglosund.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Rysslandsvik
3.33
(59°52'N., 5°44'E.), on the SE side of Husnesfjorden about 4
miles SSW of Heroy, in 14.6 to 29m, sand.
3.34 Husnes (59°52'N., 5°46'E.) (World Port Index No.
23355) is located on the E side of Ondarheimsvag, about 3
miles SSW of Heroy. A concrete quay at Husnes is 240m long,
with depths alongside between 10.5m at the S end to 16.5m at
the N end. There is a hauling-off buoy moored off the quay.
The quay is well fendered and equipped with two cranes.
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.34
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Husnes—Con-
3.34
tact Information.
Husnes—Contact Information
VHF VHF channel 9
47-53-475070
Telephone
47-53-475000 (after office hours)
Facsimile 47-53-475015
E-mail firmapost@husneshavn.no
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off Husnes in Ondar-
3.34
heimsvag, in 12.8 to 16.5m, sand. This location is exposed to N
winds.
3.35 Heroysund (59°55'N., 5°47'E.), between Heroy and
the mainland to the E, affords anchorage for small vessels, but
it is exposed to strong squalls; small quays and mooring rings
are available. Vessels entering from S should pass between He-
roy and the foul ground S of it.
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 20m, spans
3.35
the N part of Heroysund.
Kvinnheradsfjorden trends NE from Husnesfjorden for about
3.35
14 miles and joins Hissfjorden in the vicinity of the islet of
Sild.
Tangeflu (59°56'N., 5°44'E.), marked by an iron beacon, lies
3.35
on the SW side of the junction of Kvinnheradsfjorden and Hus-
nesfjorden, in a position about 0.2 mile ENE of the NE extrem-
ity of Anuglo. Rocks, with depths of 4.9m and less, lie up to
0.2 mile off the N side of this islet.
Fjaereflu, on which a beacon stands, is located near the mid-
3.35
dle of Onarheimsfjorden, in a position about 2 miles NNW of
Tangeflu. A 5m depth lies close SE of the rock.
Onarheim (59°57'N., 5°38'E.), located on the SW shore of
3.35
Onarheimsfjorden, has a 35m long quay, with depths of 3 to
6m alongside. Several quays, with depths of 4m alongside, are
located at Vattedal, about 1 mile NNE of Onarheim.
Anchorage.—The best anchorage in Onarheimsfjorden is lo-
3.35
cated on the NE side of the fjord in Teroysund, the channel E of
Teroy. Anchorage can be taken, in 9.1 to 18.3m, sand and clay.
3.36 Lokksundet (60°03'N., 5°43'E.) is a narrow sound
separating the island of Tysnesoy from the mainland to the E
and joins Onarheimsfjorden with Bjornefjorden. It is about 5
miles in length. The least depth of 12.8m is found in the nar-
rowest part of the sound, where the width is 183m.
Moderate-size vessels visiting Hardangerfjorden and the oth-
3.36
er fjords of this region use Lokksundet when bound N to Ber-
gen. The main channel of Indreleia is joined in Langenuen N of
the island of Reksteren.
During calm weather, the current in Lokksundet always
3.36
flows N, with a velocity of up to 2 knots during S winds. The
current may flow S during N winds and has been reported to
reach a velocity of 3 knots. There are eddies in the bays on ei-
ther side of the channel.
Sandoy is on the W side of Lokksundet S entrance. A rock
3.36
lies, awash, about 0.2 mile NE of its N end. Hamarhaugflu
63
Light (60°00'N., 5°44'E.) is shown from a white lantern on
piles on the SW side of a reef fringing the E entrance point of
Lokksundet. A 7.8m depth lies about 0.4 mile N of Sandsoy.
An 1.5m depth, marked by a perch, lies on the W side of the
3.36
channel, about 1 mile NNW of Sandsoy; a 3m depth lies about
160m SSE of the perch.
At Nymark, on the W side of the sound about 1 mile NNW
3.36
of Hamarhaugflu, there is a quay with 5m alongside.
3.37 Storsundet (59°57'N., 5°53'E.), on the SE side of
Kvinnheradsfjorden, is entered from the S between Skorpega-
vlen (59°56'N., 5°48'E.) and Heroy. This navigable channel has
depths greater than 37m throughout the fairway. It is formed
between the mainland and the S and E sides of Skorpo, Snilst-
veitoy, and Kalven, close-lying islets which extend in a contin-
uous chain from Skorpegavlen to Kalvtangen, 6 miles NE.
Storsundet trends ENE for about 6 miles, then continuing in a
general N direction for 2.25 miles into Kvinnheradsfjorden.
The sound is notorious for squalls.
Flatholmen (59°56'N., 5°51'E.), on the S side of Storsundet,
3.37
is joined to Neset, a prominent point about 2 miles E of Skor-
pegavlen. Reclamation work in progress (2021) in the vicinity
of Flatholmen.
Skjeret, which is marked by a beacon, lies on the N side of
3.37
the fairway in a position about 0.2 mile S of Oyeneset, the SE
point of Snilstveitoy. A 4.5m depth is located between the rock
and the point.
Holmeflu (59°57'N., 5°58'E.), with a depth of less than 1.8m
3.37
and marked by an iron perch, is on the S side of the fairway and
extends about 0.1 mile W from Ytreholme, a small islet lying
close off a salient point about 1 mile SE of Oyeneset. Two
rocks lie, awash, close NE of Holmeflu; a 6.1m depth is located
close SW. Elsewhere in Storsundet, the known dangers are
close inshore.
Uskedal (59°56'N., 5°52'E.), on the SE side of Storsundet
3.37
close E of Flatholmen, has quays with depths alongside of 4 to
6m. Fresh water is available. A quay, with 5m alongside, is lo-
cated at Dimmelsvik, about 1 mile ESE of Skjeret.
Rosendal (59°59'N., 6°00'E.), located on the E shore of
3.37
Storsundet, has a quay, with depths up to 6m alongside. Fuel
oil is available. Another quay, with depths of up to 6m along-
side, is located at Seimsfoss about 1 mile S of Rosendal.
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.37
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Rosendal—
3.37
Contact Information.
Rosendal—Contact Information
VHF VHF channel 16
Telephone 47-46-932012
E-mail post@rosendalhamn.no
Web site http://www.rosendalhamn.no
Anchorage.—Small vessel anchorages are found in several
3.37
coves along the S shore of Storsundet.
3.38 Husavagen (60°00'N., 5°48'E.) indents the NW shore
Pub. 182
64 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden

of Kvinnheradsfjorden for nearly 2 miles in a NNE direction.

The bay narrows gradually. Kyrkjevag, narrow and rock en-
cumbered, trends NE from the head of Husavagen for about 1
mile. Depths within Husavagen are ample and all known dan-
gers are inside the 9.1m curve, which lies within 183m off-
shore.
Ulke, on the NW shore of Husavagen close to the head of the
3.38

bay, has a quay, 21m long, with depths of up to 6.3m alongside.

Anchorage.—Husavagen affords anchorage to vessels of
3.38

considerable size, in about 40m, soft clay, S of Husa, which is

at the head of the bay. About 1 mile S of Husa, anchorage can
be taken, in about 35m, sand and clay. Husavagen is exposed to
S winds. A submerged cable crosses the bay from Travik in a
due E direction towards the opposite shoreline N of Gronevika.

3.39 Latrevikklubben (60°04'N., 5°59'E.) is the S extrem-

ity of Varaldsoy. Four coves, Latrevik, Ferjevag, Knarrevik, 3.40 By Anbjorn Hoivik (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5)
and Akrehamn, are on the SE side of Varaldsoy between Latre- Gjermundshamn
3.40

vikklubben and a point about 3 miles NE. Akreholme and two

above-water rocks W of it, lie close off the entrance of
Akrehamn. Three channels lead in among the islet and rocks.
The middle channel is the deepest and leads between
3.39
Austrepollen within 0.5 mile of its head. The two arms are usu-
ally icebound during hard winters.
Bondhusbre, a branch of the large glacier Folgefonn, is on
3.41

Akreholme and the rocks to the W. The E channel, which has a the S side of Maurangerfjorden. Steep cliffs are on both sides
depth of 5.5m, leads N of Akreholme; a rock on the S side of of the fjord.
the fairway is marked by an iron perch. Mountain squalls can be violent towards the head of the
3.41

Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage in

3.39
Akrehamn, in depths of 7 to 10m, mud.
3.40 Oynafjorden (60°06'N., 5°55'E.), which is formed
between Varaldsoy and the mainland to the W, trends N for
about 5 miles and then turns NE into Bondesundet. In Bonde-
sundet, Kraka and other nearby rocks lie within 0.15 mile of
fjord, especially during E winds. Because of possible land-
slides, vessels should avoid approaching the shores of Mau-
rangerfjorden too closely. Several submarine cables are laid
across the fjord and its two arms. A cable, with a vertical clear-
ance of 65m, spans the fjord about 4 miles within the entrance,
close W of Sundal.
Sundal, on the S shore about 4 miles within the entrance, has
3.41

the NW shore; an iron perch marks the outer edge of these dan-
gers. Other dangers in the sound and some small islets lie close
offshore and are generally located within or near the few coves
that indent both shores. An overhead cable, with a vertical
clearance of 50m, crosses Bondesund 2.25 miles NE of Bunde-
a small wharf, with alongside depths of 3 to 4m. Fuel oil and
fresh water are available. Eikanes, on the N shore of the fjord
about 1 mile WNW of Sundal, has a small masonry quay, with
alongside depths of 3.9 to 5m.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off the wharf of Sun-
3.41

sund Light. dal, in about 35m. Good anchorage can be taken near the head
Caution.—Because of the strong currents in Bondesundet,
3.40
of Nordpollen.
its use is not recommended. Submarine cables are laid SE from
Mundheim, at the head of Oynafjorden, to the E shore, and 3.42 Hissfjorden (60°12'N., 6°03'E.) extends N and NE
SSE for 2.5 miles and then E to Varaldsoy. for about 10 miles from the N portion of Kvinnheradsfjorden to
Gjermundshamn (60°04'N., 5°55'E.), located on the SW
3.40
its junction with Ytre Samlofjorden in the vicinity of Jondal.
side of the entrance to Oynafjorden, has a quay with a least The shores of Hissfjorden are mostly steep-to, except along the
depth of 7m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are available. NW side. In places along this shore small islets and rocks lie
A local ferry runs a triangular route between Gjermund-
3.40
up to 0.25 mile offshore. Some of the outermost dangers are
shamn, Varaldsoy and Arsne. marked by iron perches. An overhead cable, with a vertical
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage in Gjer-
3.40
clearance of 65m, spans Hissfjorden about 2 miles SW of Jon-
mundshamn, in 15 to 20m, sand and mud. dal.
Vagen, located on the SW side of Varaldsoy, about 1 mile N
3.40
A quay at Fosse (60°16'N., 6°02'E.), on the NW shore of
3.42

of its S extremity, has quays with depths of 4 to 12m alongside.
Two quays, with depths up to 5m alongside, are located at
3.40
Hissfjorden, has alongside depths of 3 to 5m.
Kysnes (60°12'N., 6°07'E.), located on the SE side of Hiss-
3.42

Mundheim. fjorden, has a quay, with depths of up to 5m alongside.

Torsnes, about 3 miles NE of Kysnes, has a quay with depths
3.41 Maurangerfjorden (60°06'N., 6°10'E.) trends NE of 5 to 6m.
from the NE part of Kvinnheradsfjorden for about 5 miles and A quay at Jondal (60°16'N., 6°15'E.) is 65m long, with
3.42

then branches. One branch, named Nordpollen, trends NNE for depths of 4 to 10m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are
about 2 miles; the other, named Austrepollen, trends ENE for available.
about 2 miles. Great depths prevail throughout the fjord, except Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.42

that numerous above and below-water rocks extend across may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an

Pub. 182
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 65

additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6. shore and a 7.5m shoal 0.5 mile S of the head.
Contact Information.—The port can be contacted by VHF
3.42

(VHF channel 16) or by telephone (47-53-669510).
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off the village of Jon-
3.42
dal.
3.43 Ytre Samlafjorden (60°21'N., 6°18'E.) extends NE
for about 6 miles from Hissfjorden to its junction with Indre
Samlafjorden off of Samlaneset, a salient point on the S shore.
3.45 Fyksesundet (60°25'N., 6°15'E.) trends NNW for
about 5 miles from the NW side of Ytre Samlafjorden. The
sound varies in width from about 91m to 0.3 mile between
steep mountains on either side. It is the narrowest and most
gloomy branch of Hardangerfjorden. Squalls occur in the
sound, especially during E winds.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 26.5m, spans Fykse-
3.45

General depths through the main fjord are great, and the fair-
3.43
way is clear. There are some dangers and islets which lie close
offshore and within the several bays indenting the shores on
both sides.
Herand (60°20'N., 6°23'E.) is at the head of a bay which is
3.43
entered about 2 miles S of Samlaneset. Herandsholme is the
largest of several islets lying close off the SW entrance point of
this bay. A quay with up to 4m alongside is located at Herand.
sundet about 1 mile from the entrance to the sound. Several
overhead cables, of which the least vertical clearance is 27m,
and several submarine cables cross the inlet throughout its
length. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 17m,
crosses a small bight of the sound at its N end. Steinsto, on the
E shore, close NW of the entrance to the sound, has a quay
with 8 to 10m alongside.
A mooring buoy is located a little over 2.5 miles within the
3.45

Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken near the head of the

3.43 entrance. A rock close off the SW entrance to the sound is
bay E of Herandsholme. Care must be taken to avoid a group of marked by an iron perch. Rysholme lies in mid-channel, about
rocks, marked by an iron perch, in the SE part of the anchor- 0.5 mile within the entrance.
age. Indre Samlafjorden extends in a NE direction from Samlane-
3.45

Norheimsund is an inlet extending in a NW direction from

3.43 set for about 8 miles to its junction with Utnefjorden.
the NW side of Ytre Samlafjorden. Fairway depths in the outer Ytre Alvik (60°25'N., 6°23'E.)also known as (Alvik), locat-
3.45

part of Norheimsund are 18.3 to 48m. The narrow inner part
has a least charted depth of 11m in the deeper SW channel.
There is a 6-knot speed limit in Norheimsund.
Vikoy is located on the S shore of Norheimsund about 2
3.43
miles SE of the head of the inlet. Several rocks, including an
above-water rock, lie up to 0.25 mile offshore in the vicinity of
ed on the N shore of Indre Samlafjorden.
Depths—Limitations.— Vessel up to 40,000 dwt, 200m in
length, and 10m draft can be accommodated. Berthing details
are shown in the accompanying table titled Ytre Alvik—Berth
Information.
Two 7.5 ton cranes are located on the quay. Two mooring
3.45

Vikoy. A 9m depth lies about 0.3 mile E of the above-water buoys are located about 91m off the quay at Indre Alvik.
rock. A buoy marks the N edge of a shoal area extending N
from the S shore. A quay at a tank installation near Vikoy has a Ytre Alvik—Berth Information
depth of 6m alongside.
Vallandsgrunn, marked by a buoy, lies on the N side of the
3.43
Maximum
fairway N of Vikoy. A depth of 7m is charted close E of the Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
buoy. Between Vallandsgrunn and the shore NW, there are a LOA
number of rocks, some of which lie above water. A light is Alvik Port
shown from near the outer edge of these rocks.
East 100m 10.0m 200m Breakbulk.
An islet, with foul ground extending about 183m SE, lies in
3.43

the middle of the inner part of Norheimsundand forms two West 80m 10.0m 200m Breakbulk.
channels which lead NW to the head of the inlet. The SW
channel is the better one. A buoy is moored on the S edge of Indre Alvik, also located on the N shore of Indre Sam-
3.45

the foul ground.
Norheimsund (60°22'N., 6°09'E.), is located at the head of
3.43
the sound. Several quays, with depths alongside of 3 to 6m, are
lafjorden about 2 miles further NE of Ytre Alvik, is the site of a
ferro-silicon works.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered
3.45

located at Norheimsund. through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
3.44 Tjuvaholmen (60°22'N., 6°16'E.) is located between
Kvamsoy and the mainland to the NW. A rock close S of Tju-
Indre Alvil—Contact Information
vaholmen is marked by an iron perch. Another iron perch
marks a group of rocks close off the mainland, NW of Tjuva- VHF VHF channels 9 and 16
holmen. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 28m, Telephone 47-56-550800
spans the channels between the mainland and Tjuvaholmen
and between that islet and Kvamsoy. Facsimile 47-56-550950
Oystesevagen (60°23'N., 6°12'E.) trends N for about 1.25
3.44

miles from its entrance. Several quays, with alongside depths
of up to 7m, are located at Oystese, a village at the head of the
inlet.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken close off the head of
3.44
the inlet. Take caution to avoid the submarine cable along the E
3.46 Utnefjorden (60°26'N., 6°38'E.) trends about 4 miles
in a SE direction from Indre Samlafjorden to its junction with
Eidfjorden and Sorfjorden. The fjord is deep and clear in the
fairway.
Utne (60°26'N., 6°37'E.), on the SW shore, has a quay, with
3.46

Pub. 182
66 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
3.45 Benjamin Endre Larsen (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by/3.0)
Indre Alvik
depths from 4 to 7m alongside. Tingnesflu, marked by an iron
perch, lies close offshore about 0.2 mile NW of the quay at
Utne. Numerous submarine cables are laid in Utnefjorden.
Granvinfjorden (60°28'N., 6°37'E.) trends in a general NE
direction for about 5 miles and in places is reduced to a width
of about 0.2 mile. Depths of about 134 to 200m prevail in the
fairway up to the anchorage near the head of the fjord.
Granvinfjorden is reported to be ice-free.
3.46
Kvanndal lies on the NW side of Granvinfjorden, about 1
3.46
mile within its entrance. There are quays, 100m long, with
depths of 4 to 11m alongside located at Kvanndal. About 1
mile farther up the fjord, on the W side, there is a quay, with up
to 5m, alongside at Folkedal.
Eide, a village at the head of Granvinfjorden, has a quay,
3.46
100m long, with a depth of 12m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh
water are available.
3.47 Eidfjorden (60°25'N., 6°43'E.) extends ENE from its
junction with Utnefjorden for about 11 miles to the village of
Eidfjorden. Eidfjorden is very deep and free from dangers in
the fairways.
Eidfjorden is spanned by overhead cables, with a vertical
3.47
clearance of 60m, and a bridge, with a vertical clearance of
55m, between Gangstod (60°28.5'N., 6°50.4'E.), about 0.7 mile
NW.
Djonno (60°28'N., 6°45'E.), on the N side of Eidfjorden
3.47
about 3 miles NE of the entrance, has a quay, with depths of 6
to 10m alongside. Another quay at Vallavik, 2.5 miles ENE of
Djonno, has depths of 5 to 6m alongside.
3.48 Eidfjord (60°28'N., 7°04'E.) is a scattered village on
the S side of the head of Eidfjorden. A quay at Eidfjorden is
30m long, with depths of 3 to 5m alongside. Good anchorage
with clay bottom can be taken by vessels of moderate size 0.3
mile W of the quay, avoiding submarine cables NW of the vil-
Pub. 182
lage; mooring rings are available.
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.48
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Eidfjord—
3.48
Contact Information.
Eidfjord—Contact Information
VHF VHF channel 12
Telephone 47-53-673400
Facsimile 47-53-673401
Ringoy (60°27'N., 6°47'E.), on the SE shore about 3 miles
3.48
ENE of the entrance to Eidfjorden, has a quay with depths of
up to 5m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are available. Ves-
sels approaching the quay must avoid a reef extending a short
distance from the nearby Ringoynes and which is marked by an
iron perch. Brimnes, on the S shore about 4 miles further NE,
has a quay with depths of up to 5m alongside.
3.49 Simadalsfjorden (60°30'N., 7°05'E.) extends about 2
miles ENE from Eidfjorden. Vessels are warned against an-
choring in this fjord due to rock falls from the steep mountain
sides and to submarine cables. The fjord often freezes during
the winter.
Osafjorden (60°30'N., 6°55'E.) extends 6.75 miles NE from
Eidfjorden to Osa and is deep and free from dangers. Squalls
occur in the fjord and are worse during SE winds. During hard
winters, the inner part of Osafjorden is icebound. Small vessels
can anchor off Osa, in 40m, clay. A mooring buoy is located off
Osa. Several submarine cables cross the fjord.
Ulvikfjorden, a smaller inlet, trends N and NE for about 3
3.49
miles from the W side of Osafjorden. During hard winters the
entire fjord is icebound. Ulvik, on the NW shore about 1 mile
from the head of Ulvikfjorden, has an angled quay, with depths
off its longest side of 6 to 7m.
Pilotage.—Pilotage for Ulvik should be ordered using Safe-
3.49
SeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking
Center at an additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see
paragraph 2.6.
Hetlenes, on the W shore about 0.5 mile within the entrance
3.49
of the inlet, has a quay, with depths of 5 to 8m alongside. A
rock, marked by an iron perch, lies close off the E shore about
0.2 mile SE of Ulvik.
Caution.—A seaplane landing area is situated in Ulvik-
3.49
fjorden.
3.50 Sorfjorden (60°24'N., 6°42'E.) extends SSW from
the junction of Utnefjorden and Eidfjorden for about 20 miles
to the town and port of Odda, at its head. This fjord is one of
the most beautiful branches of Hardangerfjorden. Sorfjorden is
narrow and straight. Near its entrance there are extensive farm
lands along both sides, but S of Hovland bare rock walls rise
almost perpendicularly from the water’s edge.
The width of Sorfjorden varies between about 0.2 mile and 2
3.50
miles. The narrowest part is within 1.25 miles of the head of
the fjord. Throughout the length of the fjord the depths are am-
ple and in places they exceed 366m. There are few dangers and
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 67

all of these lie within 0.3 mile offshore.

Winds—Weather.—Squalls occur in Sorfjorden and are of-
3.50

ten very strong. During hard winters, ice forms in the fjord, but
a channel is usually kept open.

3.51 Kinsarvikbukta (60°23'N., 6°43'E.) is a clear bay lo-

cated on the E side of Sorfjorden. Large vessels can anchor
here; the best berth, in 12.8 to 31m, lies in a position SW of the
quay, which is near the village church at the head of the bay. A
rock, marked by an iron perch, lies awash close offshore W of
the church. Two quays at Kinsarvik, at the head of the bay,
have depths of 5 to 6m alongside.
Ullensvang (60°19'N., 6°39'E.), in a bight on the E shore of
3.51

the fjord, has quays with depths of up to 5m alongside.

Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off Ullensvang, in
3.51
Odda
25.6m, but vessels must be prepared for sudden violent squalls.
A quay at Lofthus, close N of Ullensvang, has 5m alongside.
3.51 the head of the fjord, which is formed by a small peninsula ter-
Fuel oil and fresh water are available. Quays at Lutro and Ins- minating S in Eitrheimsnes and the shore, to the E.
tanes, on the E shore of the fjord about 2 and 3 miles, respec- Except for the head of the fjord where the town of Odda is
3.52

tively, NNE of Lofthus, have alongside depths of up to 5m.
Grimo (60°23'N., 6°39'E.) and Aga, on the W shore of the
3.51
fjord about 2 miles and 7 miles, respectively, SSW of the en-
trance to Sorfjorden, each have a quay, with depths alongside
located, the harbor is surrounded by mountains. The E and W
shores rise steeply from the water’s edge to heights of 1,067m
and 1,189m. There are no beaches as such.
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.52

of up to 7m. Na, on the W shore about 3 miles SSW of Aga,
has two quays, with depths of up to 5m alongside.
Espe (60°12'N., 6°36'E.), located on the E shore, has quays
3.51
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Signals.—VHF channel 16 is guarded from 0900 to 1600
3.52

with depths of 6 to 10m alongside. and has a range as far as the entrance to Sorfjorden.
Tyssedal (60°07'N., 6°34'E.), located on the E shore, has
3.51 Contact Information.—See the table titled Indre Alvil—
3.52

about 335m of quayage. One 45-ton crane and one 2.5-ton Contact Information.
crane are available. Depths alongside the larger of the quays
range from 12 to 14m. The largest of the several quays at a zinc Indre Alvil—Contact Information
works at Eitrem, on the W shore, 1 mile SW of Tyssedal is 73m
long with depths from 9 to 11m alongside. VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Telephone 47-53-648400
3.52 Odda (60°05'N., 6°33'E.) (World Port Index No.
Facsimile 47-53-641292
23240) is located at the S end of Sorfjorden. Facilities of the
port are adjacent to the town at the head of the fjord and at Ei-
trem, about 1 mile NNW. Odda is known for its extensive elec- Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in the W part of the basin
3.52

tro-chemical and electro-metallurgical industries.
Wind—Weather.—During the summer months there is usu-
3.52
ally considerable haze and rain, much of the haze being attrib-
utable to the smog given off by the plants in the town. There is
some smoke control. Because the harbor is protected from the
N of the town, in 29.3m, clay, well sheltered from all winds.
The holding ground is good to the W portion of the basin. Cau-
tion must be taken to avoid submarine cables and outfall pipe-
lines.
Caution.—Navigation through the fjords leading to Odda
3.52

winds, such control is inadequate.
Tides—Currents.—The spring tidal rise is 0.6m. A slight
3.52
tidal current sets outward through Sorfjorden.
Depths—Limitations.—The E and W shores of the harbor
3.52
are steep-to. The 18.3m curve lies about 0.3 mile N of the head
of the fjord and in the NW part of the harbor rounds Eitrhe-
imnes to a position about the same distance S of that point.
Shoal water extends about 183m S from Eitrheimsnes.
presents no difficulties, but, because of the many fierce squalls,
caution is always necessary.
3.53 Bjornafjorden (60°06'N., 5°25'E.) trends E for about
13 miles from Langenuen. It is bound on the S by the N sides
of the islands of Reksteren and Tysnesoy and on the N and E
by the mainland.
The fairway leading through the length of Bjornafjorden is
3.53

General depths in the middle part of the harbor are 35 to

3.52
clear and deep. On the S side of the fjord, a number of islets
50m. Depths in the anchorage area range from 29m to about and rocks lie within 2 miles off the N side of Tysnesoy and
44m. about 1 mile off the NE end of Reksteren.
There are quays, with reported depths of 4 to 14m alongside.
3.52
On the NW side is lands, islets and rocks lie up to 2 miles off
3.53

There are facilities for container and bulk vessels. Underwater
rocks, with a least depth of 1.5m, were reported (2018) to lie
close N of Berth 1 and Berth 2.
Aspect.—The harbor of Odda is formed by the S part of
3.52
the mainland. Elsewhere, the shores of Bjornafjorden are rela-
tively steep-to. In the side fjords there are some islets and dan-
gers.
Store Vernoy (60°05'N., 5°26'E.) is separated from the NE
3.53

Sorfjorden. It is entered through the narrows, about 1 mile N of side of Reksteren by a narrow channel which dries. It is the

Pub. 182
68 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
largest of a group of islets lying within 1.5 miles E of the NE
point of Reksteren. Numerous small islets and above and be-
low-water rocks are in this group.
Veaneset (60°03'N., 5°29'E.) is the NW extremity of Tysne-
3.53
soy. From Veaneset, the N side of Tysnesoy trends very irregu-
larly ENE for about 7 miles to Krossnes, on the W side of the
Lokksundet entrance. It is indented by several bays and coves.
Off the N coast of Tysnesoy there are some larger islets, in-
3.53
cluding Store Godoy and Lille Godoy, and many close-lying
small islets and above and below-water rocks.
Godoysund, a channel which is navigable by small vessels
3.53
with local knowledge, separates Store Godoy and Lille Godoy.
Iron perches mark some of the dangers in both approaches to
Godoysund. A overhead cable and several submarine cables
cross the channel.
Tysnesvik (60°03'N., 5°32'E.) is entered about 1.25 miles E
3.53
of Veaneset. Above and below-water rocks are on both sides of
the entrance and within the inlet. Some of the dangers in the
entrance to Tysnesvik are marked by two iron perches and a
buoy.
Vage, on the W shore of Tysnesvik, has a quay, with depths
3.53
of 4 to 13m alongside. Two other quays have depths of up to
7m alongside.
Gripnesvag (60°04'N., 5°40'E.) is a small inlet about 1 mile
3.53
WSW of Krossnes. The entrance channel is narrow and has a
least depth of 4.5m.
3.54 Soreidsvik (60°03'N., 5°28'E.) is entered between
Veaneset and Raftodden, a projection on Reksteren about 1
mile WSW. From the entrance, Soreidsvik trends S for about 4
miles, and, except at its head, is deep and free from dangers in
the fairway.
Many small bays and coves indent the shores of the inlet;
3.54
small quays are located at several of these places.
A quay at Bruntveit (60°02'N., 5°26'E.), on the W shore of
3.54
the inlet, has a least alongside depth of 5m.
Uggdalseidet, close to the SE head of the inlet, has quays
3.54
with depths of up to 5m alongside. Fuel oil is available.
Indroy (60°09'N., 5°25'E.), on the N side of Bjornafjorden,
3.54
lies in a bight of the mainland, with its S extremity about 2
miles ENE of Rotingtangen. Ytroy lies close W of Indroy.
Hauglandssund, between Indroy and the mainland E of it, is
3.54
entered between Skjerholme and Bjornahaug, the S extremity
of the mainland, about 0.5 mile E. A light is shown from a rock
close SW of Bleikja, an islet in mid-channel, about 0.5 mile
NW of Bjornahaug.
Hauglandssund is narrow in places but free from dangers in
3.54
the fairway. A depth of 6m is available through the sound. Ves-
sels must not exceed a speed of 8 knots in Hauglandssund
when N of Bleikja.
A quay, 46m long, with depths of 4 to 8m alongside, is locat-
3.54
ed at Halgjem, on the mainland about 0.5 mile N of Bleikja.
Stegleholme (60°09'N., 5°41'E.) is the farthest S of several
3.54
islets fronting Strandvik to a distance of 0.5 mile off the NE
shore of Bjornafjorden. Knapholme and Storholme are other
islets in the group. Foul ground extends about 0.1 mile SE from
Storholme. Overhead cables, with vertical clearances of 20m
and 15m, connect Stegleholme to Storholme and Storholme to
the mainland.
Pub. 182
3.55 Strandvik (60°10'N., 5°41'E.), which has several
quays with depths of up to 8m alongside, is on the mainland
NW of Knapholme. A reef extending about 183m SW from
Knapholme is marked by an iron perch.
Saevareidfjorden is entered between Storholme and a main-
3.55
land point about 1 mile E. This side fjord trends N and NE
from Bjornafjorden for about 3 miles to Saevareid at its head.
Depths through the fairway are ample, and most of the shore is
steep-to. A depth of 4.3m is charted about 0.2 mile off the E
shore in a position nearly 1 mile NE of Storholme.
Very heavy squalls are experienced in Saevareidfjorden, es-
3.55
pecially off Mulsodden, a projection on the NW shore about 1
mile NNE of Storholme.
Saevareid (60°11'N., 5°45'E.) has several small quays. The
3.55
largest is 43m long, with depths of 7.8 to 19.3m alongside. A
salmon farm installation is moored at the W end of the quay.
3.56 Lygrepollen (60°04'N., 5°46'E.), located at the E end
of Bjornefjorden, is available only to small vessels with local
knowledge. The entrance channel is very narrow and is fringed
by islets and above and below-water rocks, some of which are
marked by aids. The least depth in the fairway is 5.5m.
About 1 mile within the entrance, the basin becomes deeper
3.56
and broader and then leads off into three separate branches.
Overhead cables, with a least vertical clearance of 20m, span
3.56
the entrance. Several submarine cables are laid across the en-
trance and in the N branches.
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage in various
3.56
coves inside the bay.
3.57 Fusafjorden (60°10'N., 5°32'E.) is a deep inlet which
extends in a NNE direction from the N side of Bjornefjorden.
About 7 miles within the entrance, Eikelandsfjorden branch-
3.57
es E for 3.5 miles, and Adlandsfjorden branches NE for the
same distance. The fairway is free from dangers. Except for
Sandholmane, the islets and dangers in the fjord are close off-
shore. The cargo quay is 60m in length, with a depth of 7.4m
alongside, and handles container and breakbulk.
Sandholmane, a group of small islets and nearby rocks, lies
3.57
on the W side of the fairway about 3 miles within the
Fusafjorden entrance. A rock, with a depth of 2.5m and marked
by a buoy, is located about 0.2 mile NNE of the northernmost
islet of Sandholmane.
Raudholmane (60°10'N., 5°28'E.), a group of above and be-
3.57
low-water rocks, lies up to 0.3 mile offshore about 1 mile
WSW of Sandholmane. Two iron perches mark two detached
rocky patches, with depths of less than 1.8m, lying about 183m
SW and SSW of Raudholmane.
Another iron perch marks a rock lying, awash, near Ferstad-
3.57
vag, about 0.2 mile SW of Raudholmane. Depths of 2.4m are
charted up to 183m offshore in the vicinity of Mobergvik,
about 0.5 mile N of Raudholmane.
Os (60°11'N., 5°28'E.) is located on the SW shore of
3.57
Fusafjorden. An angled quay at Os has a depth of 4m along-
side.
Hattevik lies at the head of a small inlet on the W side of
3.57
Fusafjorden, about 3 miles NE of Os. It has a quay, with 4 to
6m alongside. Anchoring in the cove is not recommended be-
cause of submarine cables. Ferry service is maintained be-
tween Hattevik and Fusa, across the fjord about 3 miles E.
 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
Fusa, where there is a quay with 4 to 7m alongside, is locat-
3.57
ed in a cove. An iron perch marks a shoal close off the W en-
trance point of the cove.
Eilelandsfjorden extends in a ENE direction for about 4
miles from Altaneset, the N entrance point.
Gjerdevikflu, awash, marked by an iron perch and with
3.57
depths of 3 to 4m extending close NE, lies about 1 mile ESE of
Altaneset. This shoal and other known dangers along the S
shore of the fjord all lie within 0.2 mile offshore.
On the N shore a small islet, about 1 mile NE of Altaneset,
3.57
lies about the same distance offshore and is connected by a
shoal to the shore. Bergsvik, on the S shore of the fjord about 2
miles E of Altaneset, has a quay with depths of 5m alongside.
Eikelandsosen, at the head of the fjord, has a projecting quay
with depths of up to 4m along its N side.
Small vessels can anchor SSE of the quay, avoiding subma-
3.57
rine cables. West winds send in a considerable sea.
3.58 Adlandsfjorden (60°15'N., 5°38'E.) is formed be-
tween the SE side of Bogoy and a mainland peninsula which
terminates in Altaneset. Adlandsfjorden’s entrance is between
Altaneset and Holsundskjaer, about 1 mile W. Holsundskjaer,
consisting of above and below-water rocks, extends about 0.2
mile SSW from the S end of Bogoy. The southernmost danger
is marked by an iron perch; close N of the perch there is a bea-
con.
Adlandsholme lies in the middle of the fjord about 2 miles
3.58
NNE of Altaneset. Two other small islets lie between Adland-
sholme and Bogoy. Samnoyholme lies about 0.2 mile SW of
Adlandsholme, with rocks marked by perches between the is-
lets. A light is shown from the E extremity of Adlandsholme.
Samnoy, a village on Bogoy about 0.5 mile SW of Adland-
3.58
sholme, has a small quay with depths of 2 to 7m alongside. A
narrow 5.5m channel leads to the quay. Three rocks, each
marked by an iron perch, lie in the approach to Samnoy.
3.59 Holmefjorden (60°17'N., 5°40'E.) lies at the head of
Adlandsfjorden. Iron perches mark some of the dangers in the
approach. Two quays have least depths of about 5 and 6m
alongside. Fresh water is available.
The entrance to Samnangerfjorden lies between Holsundsk-
jaer and the mainland to the W. About 7 miles above the en-
trance, Samnangerfjorden divides; one branch continuing N for
about 2 miles to Trengeried, at its head while the other trends
in a general NE direction for about 4 miles to Arland, at the
head of a basin.
A shoal, marked by an iron perch, lies close NW of Holsund-
3.59
skjaer. Hovdeflu, a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch, lies
close off Hovdanes the W extremity of Bogoy, which point is
69
located about 1 mile NNW of Holsundskjaer.
Two rocks lie awash close off the opposite shore of the fjord
3.59
in a position about 0.5 mile SSW of Hovdeflu.
A light is shown from Hovdanes.
3.59
Bogavik (60°16'N., 5°35'E.) is located on the W shore of
3.59
Samnangerfjorden, about 1 mile N of Hovdanes. A quay locat-
ed in a cove at Bogavik has a least depth of 6m alongside.
A light is shown from the W shore of Samnangerfjorden,
3.59
about 2 miles NE of Bogavik.
Boroy, on the E side of Samnangerfjorden close off the NW
3.59
side of Bogoy, is separated from that island by Boroysund. A
depth of 7.3m can be taken through this very narrow channel,
but in it there is a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch.
A depth of 3.7m is available through Kluresund, the narrow
3.59
channel separating Boroy from the mainland to the N. Iron
perches mark dangers on either side of the fairway through
Kluresund. Both channels lead into Tveitevag. This inlet is
about 2 miles long and very narrow in places.
Solbjorg (60°18'N., 5°37'E.), located on the W shore of the
3.59
fjord about 1 mile W of the N extremity of Boroy, has a quay,
with depths of 4 to 5m alongside.
Rolsflu, a rock awash and marked by an iron perch, is on the
3.59
W side of the fjord about 2 miles NNW of the N end of Boroy.
It lies near the end of a reef extending about 0.2 mile N of a
point extending N from the shore.
A light is shown from Utskot, on the E side of Samnanger-
3.59
fjorden, about 2 miles N of Boroy.
Skjeljavag (60°22'N., 5°40'E.) is located on the NE shore of
3.59
the NW branch of Samnangerfjorden, about 2 miles N of
Utskot. A quay located on the W side of the head of this branch
has depths of 5 to 7m alongside. A 10-ton crane is available.
3.60 Gaupholmen (60°22'N., 5°42'E.) lies 183m off the S
shore of the E branch of Samnangerfjorden, about 3 miles NE
of Utskot. Furoyi is located close off the S shore about 1 mile E
of Gaupholmen.
A quay, close to Gaupholmen, has depths of up to 7m along-
3.60
side. Fuel oil and fresh water are available.
A light is shown from the W side of the fjord, about 0.5 mile
3.60
W of Gaupholmen.
Tysse, about 0.5 mile E of Furoyi, has a quay, with depths of
3.60
3 to 5m alongside. A doctor is available. There is bus and rail
transportation to Bergen.
Anchorage.—Moderate-sized vessels can anchor in the area
3.60
between Furoyi and Tysse.
A rock, marked by an iron perch, lies awash close off the W
3.60
side of Haukaneset, a prominent point on the N shore nearly 1
mile N of Furoyi.
Pub. 182
 4.
Sector 4—Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen

Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
Pub. 182

4.0

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION

71

SECTOR 4
NORWAY—KORSFJORDEN TO FEDJEOSEN
4.0Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway from
Korsfjorden to the island of Fedje, which is in the vicinity of
Fensfjorden and Fedjefjorden. The description is of the outer
islands and islets starting from Korsfjorden and working N; the
approaches to, and the port of Bergen; and the inner fjords NE
of Bergen.
General Remarks
4.1 Winds—Weather.—Winds, in general, blow from S
and SE in winter and from the N and NE in summer, but there
are local variations. Fog occurs during summer.
4.1Weather conditions are changeable, varying between the out-
er islands and the region near Bergen and the head of the main
fjord system of the sector. The climate at Bergen is mild, hu-
mid, and rainy. Bergen harbor freezes only in very severe win-
ters. At the head of the fjord system there is slightly less rain,
and the temperatures are lower in winter.
4.1The climate along the SW coast of Norway is milder than
that of other regions so remote from the Equator. The steady
run of warm water of the North Atlantic Drift by way of the
passage between the Shetland Islands and the Faeroe Islands
and the English Channel into the North Sea and the Norwegian
Sea results in the water of these seas being, in January, at least
20° warmer than in others at the same latitude. This condition
is naturally reflected in the meteorology of the region. Migra-
tory low pressure centers frequent this area in all seasons, ac-
companied by repeated intrusions of maritime polar air which
produce overcast to broken cloud decks, unsettled weather and
warm temperatures.
4.1This maritime influence which is responsible for the warm
winters is present during the summer months as well, exerting
moderating influence on the temperatures, particularly on the
coast.
4.1Large variations in temperature occur throughout this region
in winter as it is located on the borderline between the cold of
the continent and the mild climate of the Atlantic. Sharp tem-
perature contrasts are observed at a short distance inland, ac-
cording to the direction of motion of the air. With W, SW, and
NW winds from the ocean, temperatures are comparatively
high. The E, SE, and NE winds, particularly the latter, usher in
continental air with the lowest temperatures observed here.
4.1Generally, along the W coast of Norway, the influence of
winds on the tide levels is small. This is probably due to the
scattering effect of offshore islands and the relatively deep wa-
ter close inshore.
4.1Ice.—Ice in this area offers no hindrance to navigation and is
present only in the upper reaches of the fjords along the coast.
Floating ice is met in spring, when small masses, which are
soon dispersed, may drift out of Oslofjorden and Kattegat, and
occasionally from some of the larger fjords to the W and N or
Lindesnes.
4.1Over the entire area the highest frequency of waves is from
the W quadrant. Along the exposed coast of Norway 65 per
73
cent of the seas during winter are less than 5 feet in height.
4.1It is significant to note that 9 per cent were observed to be
greater than 3.6m high. During the summer, decreased wind
velocities associated with the weakening of the Icelandic
“Low” results in lower sea heights. Observations along the ex-
posed portions of the coast show 83 per cent of the waves to be
less than 1.5m and 4 per cent greater than 3.6m in height.
4.1Swell conditions along the Norwegian coast are generally
rough. During the winter, 20 per cent of the swell recorded, for
exposed portions of the coast, exceeds 3.6m in height. This
swell is generated over the North Atlantic. During the summer,
conditions are moderated, with only about 6 per cent of the
swells in excess of 3.6m. With 68 per cent of the swells ob-
served to be less than 1.8m in height.
4.1Fog.—Bergen experiences both sea and land fog, the maxi-
mum (16 per cent) occurring in July, where a exposed coastal
station like Llsta and Skudenes have lower frequency, with the
maximum occurring in early summer.
4.1Tides—Currents.—Tides in the North Sea are always
semidiurnal, with very little diurnal inequality between the two
HWs or the two LWs of each tidal day.
4.1The tide progresses into the North Sea from the Atlantic
Ocean, between the Shetland Islands and Norway. Within the
North Sea, HW progresses counterclockwise about a nodal
point off the S coast of Norway, moving S in the North Sea and
W along the S coast of Norway between Kristiansand and the
6th meridian. Along the W coast of Norway the progression is
N to about 60°N; N of this, the progression is E.
4.1Along the W coast of Norway, tide ranges gradually increase
toward the N, from 0.2m at Mandal to about 0.9m at Bergen.
4.1Currents, in general set at right angles to the coast. In the S
half of the sector the set is seaward during the falling tide and
toward the land during the rising tide.
4.1In the N half of the sector, the set is NW with the greatest ve-
locity during the falling tide. These currents are not strong,
however, except in the narrow passage and are affected by the
winds.
4.1Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
4.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
4.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayne Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
4.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
(TSS) in Norwegian waters, including off Sotra, see Pub. 140,
Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
4.1Caution.—The N current off the S part of the W coast of
Norway tends to set toward this coast. A considerable set to-
ward the coast may be experienced between the entrance of
Bomlafjorden and Breisunddybet while the tide is rising at
Pub. 182
74 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
Bergen. This set occurs especially during SW, W, and NW
gales.
4.2 The coast between Store Marstein, an islet on the S
side of the entrance to Korsfjorden, and the island of Fedje,
about 38 miles NNW, is irregular. It consists of numerous inlets
and small fjords, and is scattered with many small islands and
peninsulas.
4.2The general direction of the fjords is NW; the principal ex-
ceptions are Osterfjorden and its continuation, which trends to
the NE, and Sorfjorden and Veafjorden, on the E side of Oste-
roy, which trend to the N. The fjords are deep and vary in
width.
4.2Off-lying islands fronting this coastal sector and the peninsu-
las are lower than 305m in height and are generally rocky with
stunted trees. The coast of the mainland, the island of Osteroy,
and the Bergen peninsula rise to an elevation of about 610m
and have extensive patches of wooded, fertile land in the low-
lands.
4.2Passages among the off-lying islands are intricate, narrow.
and deep.
4.2There are several anchorages for small vessels and some for
large vessels in this sector. Coastal vessels call at the many
small landings in the fjords.
4.2The Oseberg Oil Field, the Brage Oil Field, and the Vesle-
frikk Oil Field are situated in an area centered about 50 miles
W of Hellisoy. Numerous submarine pipelines and installations
exist in this area. A pipeline extends E to the coast from the Os-
eberg Field at the S end of the area.
copyright Oyvind Hagen - Statoil (https://data.norge.no/nlod/en/2.0)
4.2
Troll A Platform
4.2
4.2Troll Gas Field (60°44'N., 3°33'E.) and Huldra Gas Field
(60°51'N., 2°40'E.) lie about 16 miles E and 9 miles NNW of
the Veslefrikk Field. Production ceased at Huldra in 2014 and
the platform wasremoved in 2019.
4.2As of 1996 the Troll A platform was the tallest and heaviest
structure ever moved to another position, relative to the surface
of the Earth.
4.2Caution.—Troll A Platform Radar Surveillance Service and
the VHF Base Station, located on the Troll A Platform, is con-
trolled by Statoil Trafikkontroll at Sandsli (Statoil VTS). The
surveillance service is an advisory service for the coordination
Pub. 182
of vessel movements by means of gathering, verification, and
dissemination of information as to avert hazards and accidents
between vessels and the platforms, and between other vessels.
4.2Vessels with intent to navigate across the Entry Zone are re-
quested to inform Statoil Trafikkontroll when passing the limit
of the Approach Zone stating their intentions. Vessels in the
Approach Zone heading for the Entry Zone will be contacted in
due course. If necessary, Statoil Trafikkontroll will request a
vessel to increase its passing distance. If this is not possible or
the vessel fails to respond, the “Troll A” standby vessel will in-
tercept the unknown vessel and the platform notified. The sur-
veillance service will communicate in Norwegian or English.
Three zones have been established around the platform, as fol-
lows:
1. Troll A Safety Zone—The Safety Zone is 500m from
the outer points of the platform. In certain hazard and acci-
dent situations the Safety Zone can be extended.
2. Troll A Entry Zone—The Entry Zone comprises the
area within a 3-mile radius centered on the platform
(60°38.7'N, 3°43.6'E.).
3. Troll A Approach Zone—The Approach Zone com-
prises the area within a 15-mile radius centered on the plat-
form.
4.2Vessels passing with a closest point of approach (CPA) of 3
miles or less from the installations must inform Statoil Traffic
Control when 1 hour before the time of closest possible ap-
proach (TCPA).
4.2Statoil Traffic Control may be contacted 24 hours on VHF
channel 16 or 68.
4.2For oil and gas fields located SSW of the above, see Sector 3.
For oil and gas fields NW of the above, see Sector 5.
Outer Islands and Islets
4.3 Store Marstein (60°08'N., 5°01'E.) lies about 1 mile
W of the NE end of Store Kalsoy on the S side of Korsfjorden
entrance. A light tower, 17m high and prominent, stands on the
summit next to a dwelling.
Marsteinboen lies about 1 mile WSW of Store Marstein
4.3
Light and is usually awash and marked by breakers.
Hillagrunnane, a shoal with a least depth of 21m, lies 1.5
4.3
miles WSW of Store Marstein Light; the sea only breaks in
very heavy weather.
4.3 By Frokor [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0)
4.3 Store Marstein Light
4.4 Tekslo (60°09'N., 5°01'E.) is on the N side of the
 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
Korsfjorden entrance, about 1 mile N of Store Marstein. Foul
ground extends about 0.2 mile WNW from Tekslo. Teksleflu-
ene, with a least depth of 13m and Hysteinen, a 27m depth, lie
about 0.3 mile and nearly 1 mile, respectively, W of Tekslo.
4.4Under good conditions, the Korsfjorden entrance should be
identified at a great distance as an opening in the land, the
mountains in the background being high and distinctive.
4.4The current flow in Korsfjorden is usually outgoing. The
current may be incoming during rising W winds. The outgoing
flow in the entrance to Korsfjorden may be very strong during
floods.
4.4Pilotage.—The pilot vessel may cruise in the entrance to
Korsfjorden, about 1 mile N of Store Marstein, but is usually
stationed between the S side of Viksoy (60°10'N., 5°03'E.) and
Flesa.
4.5 Lyroddane (60°10'N., 4°59'E.), consisting of a group
of islets and above and below-water rocks about 1 mile in di-
ameter, are centered about 1 mile NW of Tekslo. Nordre Odd-
ane, on the NW side of the group, is 21m high.
Fugloyhamn lies between Store Fugloy (60°10'N., 5°01'E.)
and Store Vardoy, about 0.3 mile N. Vessels up to moderate
size can take good anchorage, in depths up to 20m, sand, in Fu-
gloyhamn. There may be a considerable swell during N or W
winds. Entrance can be made from SE, passing E of Tekslo and
Seiskjaer, W of foul ground fringing the W side of Naroy for a
distance of about 91m, then E of a 2.7m depth marked by a
buoy, and W of a rock, marked by an iron perch.
4.6 Store Sotra (60°20'N., 5°05'E.), extending about 18
miles N from Korsfjorden, is the largest of the islands in the
chain fronting the approaches to Bergen. This chain extends N
from Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen, a distance of about 35 miles,
and includes a number of other smaller islands and hundreds of
close-lying islets and rocks.
From offshore, Store Sotra appears to be a part of the main-
4.6
land, and, in contrast to the coastal aspect farther N, no off-ly-
ing islets can be distinguished. Fordesveten, the highest peak in
the S part of Store Sotra, has a steep fall on its N side. The N
end of Store Sotra is considerably lower.
A radio mast, painted red and white in bands and with a
4.6
height of about 165m, stands on the N part of Store Sotra. A
white flashing obstruction light is shown from the top.
On nearing the land, Store Lonoy will be easily identified
4.6
from its height and isolated position. The high land in the S
part of Algroy has a jagged outline and from the N has a saw-
tooth appearance; other hills in the vicinity are round.
Turoy, about 2 miles W of the N end of Store Sotra, is higher
4.6
than the N part of the larger island. A beacon stands on the
81m summit of Turoy in the N part of that island. Toftevik, on
the W side of Toftoy between Turoy and Naroy, about 2 miles
N, is easily made out.
Pollen is the name given to the continuation of Austefjorden
4.6
N of its junction with Toftoyosen.
Between Tekslo and the coast of Store Sotra, about 3 miles
4.6
N, there are a number of islets and rocks which are nearly
joined together by foul ground. There are several anchorages
for small vessels among the islets; some of the channels lead-
ing to them are marked by perches.
Goltaosen (60°13'N., 5°01'E.) provides good anchorage with
4.6
75
mooring rings, in depths up to 17m, sand. There is a submarine
pipeline crossing the channel close to its S entrance.
Ternneset (60°14'N., 4°59'E.) is a projection on Store Sotra
4.6
close NE of Lutatangen. From Ternneset, the W coast of Store
Sotra trends in a general N direction for about 5 miles to Roks-
neset, then irregularly ESE for 2.75 miles, and then in a general
N direction for about 10 miles to Vindneskarven (60°27'N.,
5°00'E.), the N extremity of the island.
This side of the island is much indented by inlets and coves
4.6
and is fronted by several islands; numerous islets and patches
of foul ground extending up to 3.5 miles offshore.
Stallen (60°17'N., 4°57'E.) is a point on Store Sotra about
4.6
midway between Grimsoy and Rocksneset. South and SW of
Stallen, the outermost dangers lie from 0.5 mile to 1.2 miles off
Store Sotra. Malmen, marked by a beacon, is the largest of a
group of islets and rocks lying up to 1.25 miles W of Knappen,
a point 1 mile S of Stallen. Teigen, a 7m depth, lies about 1
mile W of Stallen.
4.7 Goltasteinen (60°13'N., 4°58'E.), a small islet, but
lofty and easily identified by an iron perch on its summit, lies
about 1 mile WSW of Lutatangen, the NW extremity of Golta,
an island which lies in a bight on the SW side of Store Sotra.
Telavag (60°15'N., 4°59'E.), a narrow inlet about 1 mile N of
Ternneset, trends NNE for about 2 miles from its entrance.
Grimsoy is a 55m islet on the NW side of the entrance.
4.7Nordre Stuholme and Sore Stuholme are two smaller islets
close off the NE side of Grimsoy.
4.7Valoyane lie on the W side of Telavag approach. A beacon
stands on the E end of the largest islet of the group.
4.7Within Telavag, Stekkholme lies in mid-channel, about 1
mile from the entrance. A 3m shoal lies about 183m N of Stek-
kholme. Other known dangers near the fairway are marked by
iron perches. Several overhead obstructions, with a least verti-
cal clearance of 13m, span Telavag. Some quays in Telavag
have alongside depths of up to 6m.
4.7Anchorage.—Vessels of moderate draft can anchor in sever-
al places within Telavag. Care must be taken to avoid the 3m
shoal N of Stekkholme and the submarine cables that cross the
inlet. Anchorage can be taken between Nordre Stuholme and
Sore Stuholme, E and N of Stekkholme, in sand and clay.
4.7Small vessels can anchor, in up to 22m, in the W end of Ryn-
jelsosen, the channel between the N side of Grimsoy and Store
Sotra.
4.8 Hissoyna (60°18'N., 4°56'E.) lies with its SE point
about 0.2 mile W of Rocksneset. Between Stallen and Roksne-
set the outermost shoals and rocks lie within 1 mile W of Store
Sotra.
Rabbarosen (60°18'N., 4°57'E.) a small bay which is en-
tered about 0.2 mile S of Roksneset, is available for small craft
with local knowledge. The approach from W is deep, but there
are dangers near the fairway. The best approach is from SW,
passing between Mokalasset and Augnarholme. Myrbaerholme
is on the S side of the bay entrance. Augnarholme is a smaller
islet close W of Myrbaerholme.
4.8Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage in the
S part of Rabbarosen E of Myrbaerholme, but care must be tak-
en to avoid foul ground extending about 91m from the E shore.
Mokalasset (60°18'N., 4°56'E.) lies above water, about 0.3
Pub. 182
76 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
mile W of Augnarholme. Sore Mokalassflu and Nordre Moka-
lassflu, with depths of 9.5m and 5m, lie about 0.3 mile SSW
and 0.25 mile WNW, respectively, of Modalasset. Grytebaen, a
rock, awash, is located about 0.2 mile NW of Mokalasset.
4.8Salen, an above-water rock, is on the N side of the fairway
about 0.2 mile N of Augnarholme. A reef extends about 91m
SW from Salen; there are depths of less than 9.1m within 183m
E of the rock.
4.8Between Hissoyna and Haveroyna (60°24'N., 4°56'E.),
about 5 miles N, are Lokoyna, Langoyna, Algroyna, and many
islets and rocky areas. Overhead cables, with vertical clearance
of at least 10m, span the fairways between Hissoyna, Naroyna,
Syltoyna, Lokoyna, Langoyna, and Algroyna. An overhead ca-
ble, with a vertical clearance of 24m, and a bridge, with a verti-
cal clearance of 15m, span the channel between Langoyna and
Store Sotra, about 0.4 mile S of the N extremity of Langoyna.
On the E side of the islands above are narrow channels leading
into an inner basin, which is formed in a bight on the W side of
Store Sotra.
4.8This basin forms the approach to Fjellspollen (60°18'N.,
5°03'E.). From its narrow and shallow entrance, Fjellspollen
trends N for about 2 miles and S for 1.25 miles through the
middle part of Store Sotra. Only small vessels should attempt
to use the channels leading to these inner basins. Some of the
dangers near the fairways are marked by perches.
4.9 Kalsoyane (60°19'N., 4°56'E.), several close-lying is-
lets from 13 to 20m high, lie within 0.5 mile NNW of Hissoy.
4.9Kalsoyflu, with a least depth of 3m, lies about 0.2 mile W of
the farthest SW islet.
4.9Store Lonoy, a conspicuous island, is located about 1 mile
NW of Hissoy. Several islets lie close off the W and SW sides
of Store Lonoy; within 0.75 mile S and NW and 0.5 mile W of
the island there are other small islets and foul areas.
Nordre Tjornoy (60°22'N., 4°55'E.), marked by a light, lies
about 0.3 mile off the NW side of Algroyna.
A beacon with a cross topmark stands on Ljosoy, about 2
miles N of Norde Tjornoy.
4.9Breidflu, a 9.1m depth, is located about 1 mile WNW of the
beacon on Sore Tjornoy. Other detached shoals, with depths of
less than 1.8m to 11.9m, lie within 0.6 mile NNE of Breidflu.
4.9Polleflu, an 11m depth, and Landrobaen, a 5.9m depth, lie
about 1 mile WSW and 1.5 miles W, respectively, of the bea-
con on Ljosoy. Numerous other dangers are located between
the described dangers and the islands fronting the coast of
Store Sotra.
4.9Kartveit (60°23'N., 5°00'E.), a village, lies on the E shore of
an inlet extending from Eideosen into the W side of Store
Sotra. There are two quays, with alongside depths of 4 to 7m,
located at Kartveit. Fuel oil is available.
Approximately 5.4 miles NNE of Norde Tjornoy, the small
islet of Ertenskjaer lies about 0.6 mile W of Sandoyni
(60°27'N., 4°53'E.) and is the W danger of the group of islands
and islets in this area. The islets of Odden (60°26'N., 4°56'E.)
and the shoal Oddefluene lie about 0.6 mile S of Ertenskjaer
and Ertensskjerflu.
4.10 Turoyna (60°27'N., 4°55'E.) has a beacon on its 81m
summit, about 0.25 mile from the N end of the island. Lille Tu-
royna is close off the SW side of Turoyna. Other smaller islets
Pub. 182
and many rocks, both above and below-water, lie nearby; a
chain of islets and dangers extends nearly 1 mile SE from near
Giljeneset, the S extremity of Turoy.
Magoyna, Kvaloyna, and Sandoyni are the principal islets of
4.10
a group that includes many smaller islets and rocks and lies be-
tween 0.7 mile and 1.7 miles W of Turoy.
Vestre Odden, an above-water rock, is near the SW edge of
4.10
this area. Shoal water extends about 0.2 mile SSW from Vestre
Odden.
Svartskjaeri, a small area of above and below-water rocks, is
4.10
centered about 0.5 mile S of Magoyna.
Svartskjersosen is the basin that lies S and SSW of Turoy.
4.10
The entrance from seaward is S of Svartskjerosen. Hattholme
lies on the SE side of the Svartskjerosen entrance, about 1 mile
SSE of Maioy.
Hattholmbaen, a 3.2m depth, and Svartskjergrunnane, with a
4.10
least depth of 12.8m, lie about 0.2 mile NW and 0.5 mile W, re-
spectively, of the N end of Hattholme.
Vindoysen, the basin E of Turoy, is bound on the N by Store
Skarvoy, some nearby smaller islets, and the S end of Toftoy;
on the E by the island of Misje, and on the S by Store Vindoy,
Lille Vindoy, and Vearoy.
A light is shown from a position close off the NW extremity
4.10
of Lille Vindoy.
Solsviksund is the narrow channel between the N end of
4.10
Store Sotra and Misje. Svelgen is the channel between Misje
and the SE side of Toftoy. Both channels lead into
Hjeltefjorden. Charted depths in these narrow channels are 16
to 21m.
A light is shown from the SW extremity of Misje, close W of
4.10
the entrance of Solsviksund. A light is shown from a hut on the
N extremity of Misje in Svelgen channel. The E end of the
channel is also marked by lights. Iron perches mark some of
the dangers near the channel fairways.
Solsviksund may be approached from S, but the principal ap-
4.10
proach is from W through Svartskjerosen and Hjelmeholsen
(60°25'N., 4°56'E.), passing well S of Lille Hjelmen, the islet
at the SE extremity of the islet chain extending from Turoy, and
then E of Geitaroy and Bollholme, two islets which are near
Store Sotra.
Care must be taken to avoid a 5m depth lying near the fair-
4.10
way in a position about 137m E of the N end of Bollholme.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 18m, spans Sols-
4.10
viksund close within its S entrance. Fixed red lights mark the
centerline.
A quay, located on the W side of Solsviksund, has an along-
4.10
side depth of 6m.
A submarine cable runs from Utfall, located on the coast of
4.10
Store Sotra W of Bollholme, NW past Lille Vindoy, and then
W to Turoy. A submarine cable exists in the N portion of Svel-
gen, passing around the N extremity of Misje.
At Utfall, there is a quay, with depths of up to 9m alongside.
4.10
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Solsviksund and Svel-
4.10
gen set N into Hjeltefjorden during the rising tide (beginning
about 6 hours 10 minutes after HW at Bergen) and seaward
from Hjeltefjorden during the falling tides (beginning about
HW at Bergen). The currents set strongly at times.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Tjuvvika, a cove
4.10
on the N side of Svelgen, N of the N extremity of Misje, in
18m, sand. Caution must be used to avoid the submarine cable
 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
off the N side of Misje.
Several narrow channels are formed by Store Skarvoy and
4.10
the islets near it which lie between Turoy and Toftoy. They lead
NW from Vindoyosen into the SE side of Tofteviki and are
spanned by cables, with vertical clearances of 18m to 32m.
Shoals, marked by iron perches, lie in the channel between Tu-
roy and the islets close E, and in Skarvoysund (60°27'N.,
4°56'E.) fairway, the channel between Store Skarvoy and Tof-
toy.
4.11 The bay of Toftevika is bound on the S by Sandoy,
Knappane, Turoyna, and Store Skarvoy and on the N by
Kvannholmen, Froa, Nuroyi, and Rongoyni (60°30'N.,
4°55'E.). Depths in Toftevika are irregular and, except for a few
detached patches, exceed 36m. Navreskjaer, a detached reef
which is above-water near its S end, lies in the middle of
Tofteviki.
Bjornoy lies near the NW side of Toftoyni, about 2 miles N
4.11
of Store Skarvoy. Kjempa, a rock marked by an iron perch, is
on the outer edge of foul ground extending nearly 0.25 mile
SW from Bjornoy. A light is shown from an iron perch located
off the NE extremity of Bjornoy, between Bjornoy and Toftoy.
Rongsund is the channel between Toftoyni and Bjornoyni
(60°29'N., 4°56'E.), on the E, and Rongoy and islets extending
S from that island, on the W. It joins Tofteviki with
Hjeltefjorden.
Rongsund is narrow; the S approach is intricate. Depths in
4.11
the fairway are about 18.7 to 48m, but there are nearby dan-
gers. Cables exist in the inlet S of Rongsund and N of Bjorno.
Anchorage is not permitted in this area.
4.12 Toftevag (60°29'N., 4°56'E.) indents the W side of
Toftoy extending S from Bjornoy. Two quays, with alongside
depths of 3 to 7m, are located at Toft close to the head of
Toftevag.
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Rongsund have the
4.12
same characteristics as those in Solsviksund and Svelgen.
Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor in Torsteinsvik, on
4.12
the SE side of Rongsund, NE of Bjornoy. The anchorage has
depths of 12.8 to 22m and is free from dangers; mooring rings
are available. Quays, with depths of up to 4m, are located in the
cove.
Kjeldosen, between the N side of Nuroy and two islets
4.12
named Borsholme and Sjurdholme, affords protected anchor-
age to small vessels, in 9.1m, in its W part.
The best approach is E of Svelslingen, which lies above wa-
4.12
ter near the SE edge of a shoal that extends 0.25 mile E from a
position near the E side of Nuroy.
Ulvsundet, which is entered about 1 mile ENE of Skarvoy
4.12
(60°30'N., 4°50'E.), is the narrow sound between the islands of
Ono and Rongoy, on the S, and Ulvoy and Blomoy, on the N.
It leads ENE into Hjeltefjorden and is approached from sea-
4.12
ward between Skarvoy and Nessaengen, about 0.2 mile N, and
the islets and rocks just E of these two outer islets.
The channel fairway is very narrow, and although some of
4.12
the dangers are marked by lights or iron perches, its use is lim-
ited to small vessels. Power-driven vessels must not exceed a
speed of 7 knots in Ulvsundet.
The E part of Ulvsundet is spanned by a bridge, with a verti-
4.12
cal clearance of 20m, and a cable, with a vertical clearance of
77
32m.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Ulvsundet close W
4.12
of an islet at its E end. The depths here are 11 to 16.5m; moor-
ing rings are available.
4.13 Rorsund, between the NW side of Ulvoyni (60°31'N.,
4°53'E.) and the SW part of Blomoyni, leads into Blomvag N
of Ulvoyni. Small vessels can anchor here in 22 to 26m. Iron
perches and lights mark some of the dangers in the approach.
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans
4.13
Rorsund about 1 mile SSE of Blomvag. Several quays, with
alongside depths of 2 to 17m, lie in Blomvag. Fuel oil and
fresh water are available.
Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken in the narrow
4.13
sound between the W side of Blomoy and the islets Nautoy and
Husholme, in about 14.6m, sand. A quay located in the sound
has alongside depths of 3 to 10m.
Osunder (60°33'N., 4°51'E.), the narrow sound leading NE
4.13
into Hjeltefjorden between Blomoy and One, is free from dan-
gers, but is only navigable by small vessels because of its nar-
row width.
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Osundet set N into
4.13
Hjeltefjorden during the rising tide (beginning about 6 hours
10 minutes after HW at Bergen) and seaward from
Hjeltefjorden during the falling tide (beginning about HW at
Bergen). The currents set strongly at times.
Kollsoy lies on the SE side of Osundet entrance. Two smaller
4.13
islets lie in Osundet approach about 0.1 mile W and 0.2 mile S,
respectively, of the W extremity of Kollsoy. Flatskjaer, above
water, and Saskjaeri, partly above water, lie within 0.2 mile
SW and 0.3 mile SSW, respectively, of the S of the two above
islets.
Forskjaer lies above water on the NW side of Osundet ap-
4.13
proach in a position about 0.2 mile SW of the N islet.
Husmannsflu, a 12m depth, lies in the fairway between Flat-
4.13
skjaer and Forskjaer.
Kvalosen (60°34'N., 4°50'E.) is the S and broadest part of
4.13
the sound between One and Skogsoyni, to the W.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 40m, about 1 mile
4.13
N of Forskjaer. Small vessels can anchor farther N in depths
decreasing from 18.3 to 9.1m S of an above-water rock in the
vicinity of Breidvik, close inside the N entrance to the sound.
A mole and a bridge cross the passage between One and Sk-
4.13
ogsoy close S of Breidvik. The mole and bridge prevent further
progress N to all but small craft.
Breidvik has quays, with alongside depths of 4 to 5m. Fuel
4.13
oil is available.
4.14 Storodden (60°33'N., 4°48'E.) is the largest of several
islets and rocks lying within 0.25 mile of the SW side of Skog-
soy. Tenen, a detached above-water rock, is located about 0.2
mile S of the W extremity of Storodden.
Herdlevaer is an island close NW of Skogsoy. Rossoy and
4.14
some smaller islets and rocks lie on foul ground extending
about 0.3 mile S and SW from Herdlevaer.
Nordre Seiskallane, a detached 7.5m depth, lies about 0.3
4.14
mile SW of the W extremity of Rossoy. Sore Seiskallane, with
a least depth of 1.5m, and Borsklakken, a 14m depth, are locat-
ed about 1 mile SSW and 0.7 mile W, respectively, of the same
point.
Pub. 182
78 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
Straumsundi (60°35'N., 4°51'E.) are the channels between
4.14
One and Alvoyna, to the N, which lead from seaward into
Hjeltefjorden and Indreleia. Islets, rocks, and bridges some-
what obstruct the passage.
Entrance from the W can be made N of Geitingen. Straum-
4.14
soy, with the islet of Galten close SW of it, lies in the E end of
the passage and divides it into two narrow channels, named
Nordre Straumsund and Sore Straumsund.
Flatskjaer, marked by an iron perch, is on the N side of the
4.14
fairway, about 0.2 mile N of the N extremity of Herdlevaer.
Senholme lies on the S side of the fairway within 0.25 mile NE
of the same extremity. Foul ground, marked by an iron perch,
extends about 0.2 mile SE from Rotevaagoy, which lies on the
N side of the fairway about 0.3 mile NE of Senholme.
A 4m rocky patch lies on the N side of the fairway, about
4.14
183m SSW of the SW extremity of Rotevaagoy. There are oth-
er dangers near the fairway of Nordre and Sore Straumsund,
some of which are marked by iron perches.
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Straumsundi set N in-
4.14
to Hjeltefjorden during the rising tide (beginning about 6 hours
10 minutes after HW at Bergen) and seaward from
Hjeltefjorden during the falling tide (beginning about HW at
Bergen). The currents set strongly at times.
4.15 Alvoyna (60°38'N., 4°50'E.) trends about 3 miles N
between its S extremity, the NW entrance point of Nordre
Straumsund, and Aadneset (60°36'N., 4°48'E.), the N extremi-
ty of the island.
The W coast of Alvoyna is about 2 miles long and is fronted
4.15
by numerous islets and above-water rocks, all of which lie
within 1.3 miles of the larger island. The channel among the is-
lands and islets can be used only by small vessels.
Hjartoyni (60°38'N., 4°50'E.) is reported as the largest is-
4.15
land off the W coast of Alvoy. Alvheimsund, a very narrow
channel, especially in its S part, is marked by Iron perches and
lights.
A quay, with depths of 3 to 6m, is located at the village of
4.15
Alvheim on the NE shore of the sound.
Small vessels can take good anchorage, in depths up to 18m,
4.15
off Alvheim.
Caution.—Numerous caution areas and a precautionary area
4.15
are located E of Hjartoyni.
Langoysund (60°37'N., 4°48'E.), between Alvoyna and
4.15
Langoyna, provides good anchorage for small vessels, in 13 to
20m; mooring rings are used. The S entrance is the broader one
and more clear of dangers than the N entrance. Care must be
taken to avoid a 3m shoal near the middle of the sound.
The channel that passes the W side of the island of Forhjel-
4.15
mo (60°40'N., 4°48'E.) and the S side of Store Lyngoy, and
leads into Hjeltefjorden, is entered from W between Mykle-
baen, on the S, and the dangers extending S from Store Lyngoy.
From Myklebaen, a 2.5m depth, the channel leads SE of Lam-
holmflu, a 3.5m depth.
Care must be taken to avoid both Lamholmflu and Siefluene,
4.15
where the channel turns NE and leads between Tikje and the
SE islet of Skreiskjaerene. Care must be taken to avoid the foul
ground extending from both of these islets.
After passing these dangers, vessels may enter Hjeltefjorden,
4.15
passing or rounding Robbeganstangen (60°41'N., 4°48'E.),
the N extremity of Forhjelmo, at a prudent distance.
Pub. 182
Nordoy (60°43'N., 4°44'E.) lies on the S side of Fedjeosen,
4.15
the principal approach from seaward leading into the channels
of Indreleia, which continue S to Bergen.
Approach to Bergen from South
4.16 Lysefjorden (60°12'N., 5°19'E.) is a continuation of
Korsfjorden from its junction with Langenuen and Fanafjord.
The fjord is entered between Korsen, the SW point of Krossnes
and Fluaneset, the W point of Skorpo, 2.25 miles SE.
The outer 2 miles of the fjord is deep and clear, except for is-
4.16
lets and rocks which lie within 0.6 mile offshore on both sides.
Lysoya is the largest number of islets at the head of the fjord. A
conspicuous tower stands on Lysoya.
Caution.—Submarine cables lie E of Lysoya and close W of
4.16
the mainland. Mariners are advised not to anchor or trawl in
the vicinity.
Good anchorage for small vessels is available in several
4.16
places along the shores of Lysefjorden, but local knowledge is
required for entering these anchorages. Two anchorages are
available at the head of the fjord and are best seen on the chart.
Fanafjorden is entered between Korsen and Leroy-Buaroy,
4.16
1.5 miles NW. The fjord trends NE for about 5 miles to the
town of Fana, at its head. With the exception of some islets and
dangers lying close to the shores and those at the head of the
fjord, it is clear and deep.
Iron perches and a buoy mark a narrow channel between Le-
4.16
roy and Bjelkaroy. Perches also mark some of the dangers
along the shores of Fanafjorden.
Small vessels can anchor in most of the bights on the SE side
4.16
of Fanafjorden and also near the head of the fjord. There are
quays with depths of 4 to 5m at the head of the fjord near
Stendaholmen.
4.17 Leroyosen (60°14'N., 5°10'E.) is entered from the S
between Bornestangen and the islet of Leroy-Buaroy, about 10
miles NNE. Leroyosen is the principal channel used by large
vessels approaching Bergen from the S. Both sides of the chan-
nel are comparatively steep-to.
A light is shown on Bornestangen and Tangaflu. A light is al-
4.17
so shown from an islet close off the SW side of Leroy.
On the W side of the channel, good anchorage with mooring
4.17
rings can be obtained by small vessels close W of Svinstangen.
Klokkarvik (60°13'N., 5°10'E.) lies about 1 mile NNW of
4.17
Svinestangen and offers anchorage to small vessels, in 7.3m. A
small quay is located in the port.
On the E side of Leroyosen there are several anchorages
4.17
which are suitable for vessels with local knowledge.
Temporary anchorage can be taken, in 14.6 to 16.4m, off the
4.17
W end of Leroy-Buaroy. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited
in the area of Leroyosen that is best seen on the chart.
Raunefjorden (60°16'N., 5°10'E.) lies just N of Leroy and
4.17
Bjelkaroy. The fairway through Raunefjorden leads W of a
group of islands and islets and has ample depths for large ves-
sels. Rauneskjaerene Light is shown on the SW end of a reef
which lies in the middle of Raunefjorden.
A beacon lies about 0.1 mile E of the light. A light is shown
4.17
on the NW side of Flatoy, which lies 0.5 mile E of the above
light. Large vessels can anchor in the vicinity of Flatoy. Care
must be taken to avoid a shoal E of the islet.
 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 79

4.18 Vatlestraumen (60°19'N., 5°12'E.) trends N and

NNW on the E side of Bjoroy for about 4 miles and is the pre-
ferred passage from the N end of Raunefjorden to the channel
N of Bjoroy which continues farther N into Byfjorden.
The fairway through Vatlestraumen is deep and free from
4.18

dangers. A light marks a rock on the E side of the fairway near

its S entrance point. A light is shown on a small point about 2
miles N of the above light. A number of other navigational aids
can best be seen on the chart.
Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in the bight
4.18

off Flesland, in depths of 7.3 to 26m. Larger vessels can anchor

in depths up to 46m in a bay N of Tangen, avoiding a 4m patch
close off this small point. A quay, with depths of from 4 to 6m
alongside, is located in this bay.
Grimstadfjorden (60°19'N., 5°14'E.) lies on the E side of
4.18

Vatlestraumen. The fjord extends 1.5 miles E and then divides

into two arms; one trends 1.25 miles NNW to Mathopen while
the other trends SSE to Dolvik. Tidal currents of up to 5 knots
have been reported (2008) in the N branch of the fjord. The 4.18 By Einherjer [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creativecommons.org)]
fairway through most of Grimstadfjorden has depths exceeding Norwegian frigate pier side at Haakonsvern
4.18

37m.
A light is shown on shore at the E extremity of the fjord and
4.18
also on the NW shore of Store Bogoy.
Haakonsvern (Hakonsvern) (60°20'N., 5°14'E.) (World Port
4.18
Index No. 23170) in the N part of Grimstadfjorden, contains a
restricted area surrounding the Haakonsvern Naval Base. The
base, which is the largest in Norway, is a comprehensive facili-
ty containing all the necessary resources to support the Norwe-
N of its S entrance. Liholmane, a group of islets, lie on the E
side of the fairway about 0.5 mile NW of the N extremity of
Tosoy. A light is shown from the W side of the S islet of the
group. The dangers on the E side of the fairway are well
marked by navigational aids and can best be seen on the chart.
There are no recommended anchorages in Kobbaleida.
From the junction of Vatlestraumen and Kobbaleida, a deep,
4.19

gian navy in its day-to-day operations. The base is equipped
with cranes. Two mooring buoys are available off the harbor,
0.3 mile NW of Knappen Light. Repairs, fuel, and fresh water
are available.The recommended route to Haakonsvern from sea
through the fjords is via Korsfjorden, Leroyosen, Raun-
efjorden, and Grimstadfjorden.
clear channel trends N for about 2 miles to Stangsnes, a main-
land projection at the SW end of Byfjord. Depths in the fair-
way are from 64 to 97m. A depth of 1.8m lies on the W side of
the fairway, about 0.1 mile N of the beacon marking Fuglask-
jaer.
Alvoyvag (60°21'N., 5°11'E.) lies on the E side of the above
4.19

Stamneset lies on the S side of Grimstadfjorden. A quay at

4.18 channel, about 1 mile NNE of Fuglaskjaer. A 3.6m patch lies in
an oil tank installation on the E side of Stamneset has a depth the middle of the narrow entrance to Alvoyvag.
of 14m alongside. A small quay, with a depth of 4m alongside, is located at Al-
4.19

A mooring buoy lies close E of the quay. Nordasstraumen

4.18
leads E from the S arm of Grimstadfjorden and connects the
fjord with the inner basin of Nordasvatn. The channel is very
narrow and can only be used by small vessels. The least depth
in the fairway is 3.4m. A cable with an overhead clearance of
25m spans Nordasstraumen at its narrowest part.
Anchorage.—A bight on the E side of Store Bogoy provides
4.18
good anchorage for small vessels in 12.8m. Such vessels can
also anchor in 14.6 to 20.1m, in the N arm of Grimstadfjorden,
about 1 mile NNE of the S end of Store Bogoy. Depths of 4 and
4.9m lie in mid-channel about 0.2 mile S of the anchorage.
Anchorage is found in the S arm off Dolvik; anchorage is al-
4.18
so available in a small cove on the S side of Grimstadfjorden
about 0.3 mile W of Stamneset. A 6.1m patch lies just N of the
cove entrance.
4.19 Kobbaleida (60°19'N., 5°09'E.) is an alternate pas-
sage leading N from Raunefjorden. The passage is bounded on
the W by the island of Store Sotra and on the E by the islands
of Tosoy and Bjoroy. Depths in the fairway through Kobbalei-
da are ample for large vessels, but caution is necessary because
voen, a small town on the NE side of Alvoyvag. Stongi Light
(60°22'N., 5°10'E.) marks a rock on the E side of the channel
close W of Stangsnes. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of
50m, crosses the channel close N of Stongi Light.
4.20 Brattholmen (60°21'N., 5°10'E.) (World Port Index
No. 23180), a small settlement on the W side of the channel on
Litlasotra, lies about 1 mile N of Fuglaskjaer. A pier close to
the settlement has a depth of 4m alongside. Anchorage is avail-
able for small vessels, in a depth of 11.8m, off the settlement.
The W entrance to Byfjorden lies between Stongi Light and
Hjelteskjaer Light, nearly 1 mile to the NNE. This SW reach
separates the S side of Askoy from the mainland and trends NE
for 2.25 miles to Kvarven, which shows a light, and then con-
tinues E for about 1 mile to the W limits of the port area of
Bergen at Olderneset. Both sides of this reach are steep-to,
with a few existing dangers within 183m of the shores. Depths
in the fairway are ample and in most places exceed 183m. Sub-
marine cables cross the fjord at Storebuneset and about 0.5
mile farther NE.
The Askoy Bridge (60°23.7'N., 5°12.9'E.), with a vertical
4.20

of nearby dangers. clearance of 63m, extends SSE from Skardholmen to Brystene-

There is a submarine cable across Kobbaleida about 2 miles
4.19
set and crosses the SW arm of Byfjorden in the approach to

Pub. 182
80 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
4.20 By Michael Clarke [CC BY-SA 2.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa)], via Wikimedia Commons
4.20
Bergen.
Skardholmen (60°24'N., 5°13'E.) is located about 0.2 mile
4.20
NE of Storebuneset. A tanker wharf, with depths of from 10 to
24m alongside, is located at Skardholmen. A cove close NE of
Skardholmen affords good anchorage, with mooring rings for
small vessels at its N end.
A large oil tank installation in Klampevik has a quay, 76m
4.20
long, with depths from 11 to 16m alongside, and a shorter
quay, with depths of up to 19m alongside.
4.21 Skalevik (60°24'N., 5°14'E.), about 0.2 mile SSW of
Kvarven, is marked by a cluster of oil tanks and has two quays,
the W and E, which are approximately 80 and 44m long. The
W quay, also known as the Skalevikveien Terminal is operated
by Esso Norge AS and can accommodate vessels up to 12m in
draft. The E quay is a general cargo berth and has a least depth
of 6.4m alongside. A rock, marked by an iron perch, lies close
off the W entrance point of Skalevik. Storholmen, an islet, lies
about 0.5 mile N of Kvarven. A quay on the W side of the islet
is 85m long, with depths of 14 to 17m alongside. There is a
small quay on the E side of the islet, with an alongside depth of
9m.
Anchorage.—Marikoven has good anchorage in a nearby
4.21
cove, in a depth of 30m, sand. This is a good temporary an-
chorage for deep-draft vessels. There are mooring rings in the
outer part of the cove.
Approach to Bergen from North
4.22 Fedjeosen (60°44'N., 4°44'E.) is the principal N ap-
Pub. 182
Hellisoy Light
proach to Bergen. It affords direct access from sea into the
channels of Indreleia, which continue S to Bergen for about 30
miles. It is about 1 mile wide between the island of Fedje and
the islets to the S.
On the S side of the channel, Bolleflesi, a rock lying on foul
4.22
ground which breaks, is located about 1 mile NW of Nordoyni.
A racon is situated at the lighted beacon standing on the rock.
A light is shown from the NW end of Nordoy.
On the N side of the channel, Ostre Hellisoy is situated close
4.22
to the SW side of Fedje. Hellisoy Light (60°45'N., 4°43'E.)
with its prominent light tower, 32m high, stands on the island.
A racon is situated at the light tower.
In addition to the above, at night, the lights at Onglesundet
4.22
(60°43'N., 4°52'E.) and Vardholmen (60°46'N., 4°52'E.) may
be of aid to navigation in the channel.
Hakeskallen, a 14m patch, lies about 1 mile NW of Bollefle-
4.22
si and reduces the navigable width of the channel to about 1
mile. Other dangers S and W of Hakeskallen may best be seen
on the chart.
Vessels from the N proceeding to Bergen can pass through
4.22
the length of Hjeltefjorden and then through the SW reach of
Byfjorden, the channels of which lead W and S of Askoy. An
alternative route leads from the N part of Hjeltefjorden into
Herdlefjorden, through that fjord, and then through the N reach
of Byfjorden. These two routes are the ones generally used.
Pilotage.—Pilots are transferred by helicopter at the Horda-
4.22
land-Fedje pilotage station. Pilotage rules and information are,
as follows:
1. Pilot boarding places are, as follows:
a. Fedje Vest (60°46.0'N., 4°27.9'E.).
 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 81

b. Holmengra Vest (60°51.0'N., 4°25.9'E.).
2. Pilot services for vessels that exceed 30,000 gt and are
classified to carry hazardous or polluting cargo, will be pro-
vided exclusively from the pilot boarding places mentioned
in paragraph 1 above. The same applies when vessels carry
no cargo. Fedje Traffic Control Center may decide that other
vessels should also be serviced from the pilot boarding plac-
es mentioned in paragraph 1 above.
3. Vessels as mentioned in paragraph 2 above will be of-
fered pilot transfer by helicopter. Such offer will be given to
the vessel or the agent when the initial pilot booking is made.
Vessels/agents that do not immediately accept pilot transfer
by helicopter will have up to 12 hours prior to commence-
ment of the pilotage assignment in which to make a decision.
4. Vessels that receive a helicopter shall comply with the
rules set out in “Guide to Helicopter/Ship Operations,” is-
sued by the International Chamber of Shipping.
5. Vessels as mentioned in paragraph 2 above, which
cannot or do not wish to have a pilot transferred by helicop-
ter, will have a pilot transferred by pilot boat when this can
be done safely. The pilot will be transferred to the new pilot
booked in advance, giving 24 hours notice to Fedje Traffic
Control Center.
Norwegian Coastal Administration
Pilot Services
https://www.kystverket.no
4.23 Fedjefjorden (60°45'N., 4°47'E.) lies E of Fedjeosen
and the Holmengra group, and W of many islets and rocks ex-
tending 3 miles NW from Fosnoy. On the W side of Fed-
jefjorden, there are no known dangers more than 183m off
Fedje.
Hjeltefjorden (60°35'N., 4°55'E.) is the principal part of the
N inner approach to Bergen. The fairway through Hjeltefjorden
favors the W side of the fjord and passes within 0.5 mile of the
outer islets and dangers on that side. Between Geitanger and
the entrance of Byfjorden the fairway width is considerably re-
duced. Buoys or iron perches mark some of the outer dangers,
and there are some beacons and a few lights.
Toska (Toskoy), a narrow island, lies on the E side of
4.23

boarding places mentioned in paragraph 1 above. It should Hjeltefjorden abreast of Seloy. A small inlet which is entered
be noted that to decline use of a helicopter in cases where it from Hjeltefjorden nearly divides Toska into two parts.
is not safe to use a pilot boat will result in waiting time. The N part of Toska is known as Uttoska. Norde Flesi,
4.23

6. Fedje Traffic Control Center shall not clear vessels
mentioned in paragraph 2 above for entry until the pilot has
embarked. Such vessels shall not be cleared for departure
with a pilot on board until it is confirmed that the pilot can
marked by a buoy, lies about 0.5 mile NW of the NW extremity
of Uttoska. Stureholmen, which shows a light, lies on the W
side of Hjeltefjorden.
The direct Hjeltefjorden route is used by large vessels. Small
4.23

disembark as intended.
7. If helicopters are available, other vessels than those
mentioned in paragraph 2 above may also be offered pilot
transfer by helicopter provided the vessels in question satis-
vessels and vessels of moderate size usually prefer the route
through Herdlefjorden, which is almost free from dangers in
the greater part of its length, but narrows at its N end.
Regulations.—As seen on the chart, inbound vessels will
4.23

fies the requirements of paragraph 4 above. The vessels will
in the event be provided with a pilot at the new pilot board-
ing places.
8. The helicopter company will bill the agent for the par-
ticular vessel for all costs incurred in pilot transfer by heli-
copter.
9. The above measures will be implemented immediate-
ly and shall apply until further notice.
Vessels not encompassed by these measures will continue to
4.22
be provided with a pilot by pilot boat at the pilot boarding plac-
es in Fedjeosen and off Holmengra. State pilots shall be
cross a radio reporting line drawn between Blomoyna and the
NW part of Askoy.
4.24 Sture Oil Terminal (60°37'N., 4°52'E.) is a major
facility for the export of oil received by pipeline from the
Oseberg, Grane, Svalin, Edvard Grieg and Ivar Aasen oil
fields. The terminal is located close N of Stureholmen Light
and consists of two jetties, with associated mooring dolphins,
extending E from the shore 0.4 mile and 0.8 mile, respectively,
NNW of the light tower. A short breakwater projects S from
the shore close S of the root of the N jetty to protect the tugs.

Sture Oil Terminal—Berth Information

Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Sture Terminal
Crude. Berthing length of 366m
(including dolphins). Crude vessels
See
Jetty No. 1 80m 26.0m 338.9m 23.0m 300,00 dwt under 50,000 dwt or over 150,000
Remarks
dwt are preferred to be loaded at the
jetty. Beam is unrestricted.
Berthing length of 310m (incl.
Jetty No. 2 100m 26.0m 280m 23.0m — 300,00 dwt
dolphins). Crude and LPG.

Pub. 182
82 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen

Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 300,000 dwt, 338.9m

4.24 Skjeljanger Light (60°37'N., 4°57'E.) stands on the NW
4.25

in length,and 23m in draft can be accommodated at the
terminal. For more berthing information see the table titled
Sture Oil Terminal—Berth Information
Aspect.—A conspicuous water tower, 64m in elevation, and
4.24
a conspicuous flare tower, 52m in elevation, stand in the vicini-
ty of the oil terminal and may be seen from a considerable dis-
end of Holsenoy. Kvernane, two above-water rocks, lies about
0.6 mile WNW of Skjeljanger Light. A beacon stands on Kver-
nane. Mefjordbaen Light lies about 1 mile WSW of Skjel-
janger Light. An iron perch marks the NW end of
Mefjordbaen.
Herdla, an island enclosing the NW end of Herdelfjorden,
4.25

tance. lies on the E side of Hjeltefjorden, with its W extremity about 2

Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 4,000
4.24 miles S of Skjeljanger. A white church on the W slope of the
gt carrying cargo to and from the terminal. Pilotage should be island is a good landmark. A bank, with depths of less than
ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the 5.5m, extends about 0.3 mile N from the island.
Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
Regulations.—Berthing and unberthing takes place during
4.24 4.26 Herdlesund (60°34'N., 4°58'E.), between Herdla and
daylight hours only. the N end of Askoy, is a narrow channel leading from
Vessels should send their ETA 72 hours in advance, includ-
4.24 Hjeltefjorden into the N end of Herdlefjorden. A light is shown
ing the following information: on the NW point of Askoy. A bridge, with a vertical clearance
1. Vessel name and call sign. of 16.2m, spans Herdlesund. Red fixed lights beneath the
2. Flag/nationality. bridge indicate the center of the fairway.
3. Master’s name. Herdlefluene, a group of shoals extending S from Herdla, are
4.26

4. Owners. marked by an iron perch at their E end, which dries, lying 0.2
5. Shipper. mile SW of the bridge.
6. Cargo number. Between Krabbejoneset and the Byfjorden entrance, about
4.26

7. Gross tans. 11 miles SE, the fairway of Hjeltefjorden continues to be deep

8. Summer dwt. and clear, and for the most part favors the W side of the fjord.
9. Draft fore and aft. Both shores are irregular, and most of the detached islets and
10. Last port of call. dangers are on the E side, lying up to 1.5 miles off the W side
11. ETA (local time and date). of Askoy.
12. Technical information as required by the terminal. Store Jona lies on the W side of the fairway of Hjeltefjorden,
4.26

Vessels should obtain permission from the terminal prior to

4.24 about 1 mile E of Krabbejoneset. Store Jona consists of two
proceeding to the jetty. close-lying islets. A light is shown on the S islet.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Sture Oil Ter-
4.24 Rongsund (60°30'N., 4°56'E.), on the W side of
4.26

minal—Contact Information. Hjeltefjorden, is entered between Rongoy and Toftoy, about 1

mile S of Store Jona. Vikavag, on the E side of Toftoy, has
Sture Oil Terminal—Contact Information mooring rings. The largest of several quays, situated on the E
side of Vikavag, has depths of up to 7m alongside.
VHF VHF channel 9 Hanoy and Hauglandsoy, on the W side of Hjeltefjorden, are
4.26

47-56-386000 the largest islets in an archipelago which extends about 2 miles

from the W side of Askoy and forms the NW side of a basin
47-56-386111 (main control
named Hauglandsosen.
Telephone room)
Lights and iron perches mark several intricate channels
4.26

47-56-386222 (shift supervisor) among the islets. A light is shown from a rock N of Hillesoy.
47-56-386333 (emergency) An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 22m, extends
4.26

NE from Ramsoyni (60°26'N., 5°03'E.) to Hanoy. A causeway

Facsimile 47-56-389420 and bridge have been constructed between Hanoy and Ramsoy.
E-mail skiftleder.sture@hydro.com Nordre Brattholme (60°24'N., 5°06'E.), which shows a light,
4.26

lies on the W side of the fairway, 2 miles S of Hanoy. Store

Brattholme, marked by a beacon, lies close W of Norde Brat-
Caution.—Helmferdflu, a rock with a depth of 3m, lies
4.24

tholme. Faeroy, an island, lies about 1 mile E of Nordre Brat-

about 0.5 mile NNW of Stureholmen and close N of the S tank-
er berth; it is marked by a lighted beacon. Sandvikflu lies about
1 mile NNW of Stureholmen and close SW of the S end of the
N tanker berth; it is marked by an iron perch.
4.25 Mangersfjorden (60°37'N., 5°00'E.) lies on the E
side of Hjeltefjorden and is entered about 10 miles SE of the
seaward entrance of Fedjeosen. The fjord is deep and clear in
the fairway.
tholme Light. A small boat harbor, protected by a mole, is
located at Follese, which lies on the SW side of Askoy.
4.27 Agotnes (60°24'N., 5°01'E.) (World Port Index No.
23195) is a supply and servicing base for offshore industry.
Depths—Limitations.—Vessel up to 13,000 dwt and 8m
draft can be accommodated. Berthing details are shown in the
accompanying table titled Agotnes—Berth Information.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
4.27

All dangers lie within 300m of the shores. The fjord trends
4.25
about 4 miles to the E and shows a light at its head. A marine
farm is located in the N of Mangersfjorden.
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. Pilots are
available at Korsfjorden or Fedje.

Pub. 182
 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 83

Vessels should contact the Floro pilot station on VHF chan-

4.27 spond, either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio Station will
nel 16 at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the station does not re- reply and relay details to the pilot station.

Agotnes—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Agotnes Terminal
Offshore vessels, project/heavy
No. 1 50m 7.0m — — — —
cargo, and breakbulk.
Offshore vessels, project/heavy
No. 2 52m 7.0m — — — —
cargo, bunkers, and breakbulk.
Chemicals, offshore vessels,
No. 3 169m 21.0m — — — — project/heavy cargo, bunkers,
and breakbulk.
Offshore vessels, project/heavy
No. 4 75m 21.0m — — — —
cargo, and breakbulk.
Offshore vessels, project/heavy
No. 10 30m 7.0m — — — —
cargo, and breakbulk.
Chemicals, offshore vessels,
No. 31 60m 8.0m — — — — project/heavy cargo, break-
bulk, and bunkers.
Cement, offshore vessels, proj-
No. 32 60m 8.0m — — — — ect/heavy cargo, breakbulk,
and bunkers.
Port Terminal
Offshore vessels, project/
No. 11 North 69m 30.0m — 8m — —
heavy, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Offshore vessels, project/heavy
No. 11 Middle 100m 20.0m — 8m — —
cargo, and breakbulk.
Offshore vessels, project/heavy
No. 11 South 89m 20.0m — 8m — —
cargo, and breakbulk.
Chemicals, offshore vessels,
Ro-Ro 151m 12.0m — 8m — — project/heavy cargo, break-
bulk, and bunkers.
LNG
Berthing length of 43m (in-
LNG — 8.0m — — — — cluding dolphins). Chemicals,
LNG, and bunkers.
ANP
ANP 40m 7.0m — — — — Breakbulk.
Sorta Gruppen
Sorta 40m — 34m — 15.9m 6,258 dwt Fishing vessels and breakbulk.

The pilot boards for the S entrance in position 60°08.6'N,

4.27 Agotnes, in depths of 29 to 74m. Large vessels and semi-sub-
5°00.9'E, about 0.7 mile N of Store Marstein. Pilot boarding mersible drilling platforms must anchor only in positions ap-
for the N entrance is covered under Mongstad (see paragraph pointed by the Port Authority.
5.7).
Contact Information.—See the table titled Agotnes—Con-
4.27
Agotnes—Contact Information
tact Information.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained 0.25 mile N of
4.27
VHF VHF channel 10

Pub. 182
84 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
Agotnes—Contact Information
Telephone 47-56-323000
Facsimile 47-56-335191
E-mail ccb@coastcenterbase.no
Tranvagen, a small port, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Agotnes.
4.27
A quay in the port has depths of 5 to 7m alongside. A lighted
4.27
buoy marks a 6m patch 183m W of Tranneset. Vessels of
considerable size can anchor 0.3 mile N of Tranneset.
Vessels should use care when anchoring to avoid a
4.27
submarine cable which exists between the shore W of this
anchorage and the head of Tranvagen. Near the anchorage,
there is a quay, with 3 to 7m alongside.
There area number of anchorages between Krabbejoneset
4.27
and the entrance to Byfjord. These anchorages, except as not-
ed, are suitable only for small vessels with local knowledge,
and can best be seen on the chart.
A protected area has been established around the oil termi-
4.27
nal. Berthing and unberthing are only permitted during day-
light.
4.28 Herdlefjorden (60°32'N., 5°05'E.) is a deep clear
fjord separating Holsnoy and Askoy. From the N entrance, it
trends ESE for about 9 miles, where its joins with the N part of
Byfjorden at Askeneset. The few islets and dangers in Her-
dlefjorden all lie within the several inlets on either side or close
to the shores.
An area in which anchoring and fishing is prohibited lies
4.28
within the entrance to Herdlefjorden between Nesodden and
Ypso. Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchor-
age in Herdlefjorden.
The N entrance to Byfjorden is entered between Askenset
4.28
and Galteneset, 1 mile to the NNE. This entrance is at the junc-
tion of Byfjorden, Herdlefjorden, and Salhusfjorden. This
reach is very deep and all known dangers lie close off its
shores. Submarine cables cross the reach in two places and can
best be seen on the chart.
4.29 Radoyfjorden (60°35'N., 5°11'E.) lies between Hol-
snoy and Radoy. The fjord is free from dangers in the fairway,
except in the vicinity of Saeboholmane. A quay, with depths of
3 to 6m alongside, is situated about 1 mile NNW of Saebohol-
mane.
Bongnestraumen, between the NE side of Bongno and Ra-
doy, is a narrows connecting Radoyfjorden with Mangers-
fjorden. A light is shown on the N side of Bongno. A cable,
with a vertical clearance of 37m, spans Bongnestraumen. This
channel has a least depth in the fairway of 21.9m and, although
narrow, is free from dangers.
From abreast the E extremity of Bongno, Radoyfjorden
4.29
trends in a general SE direction for about 5 miles and joins
Kvernafjorden in the vicinity of Tjuvholme. The fairway
through the fjord is deep and clear, but there are some nearby
dangers.
Kvernafjorden trends SE for about 2 miles to the N end of
4.29
Hagelsund. Navigation is prohibited to all but local vessels be-
tween Flatoy and Holsnoy. A light marks a shoal on the SW
side of Kvernafjorden, about 0.3 mile SSE of Tjuvholme.
Pub. 182
Three cables span the channel between Flatoy and Holsnoy
4.29
and can best be seen on the chart.
Salhusfjorden trends SSW from its junction with Hagelsund
4.29
for about 3 miles to its junction with Herdlefjorden and the N
reach of Byfjorden. Salhusfjorden is very deep and has a fair-
way clear of dangers. Foul ground extends about 183m SW
from a projection on the E side of the S entrance of the fjord. A
submarine cable crosses the fjord 0.5 mile within its entrance.
Salhus, on the E side of the fjord, has two small quays. At
Frekhaug, 1 mile NW of Salhus, there are quays. with depths
of from 3 to 6m alongside.
A bridge and racon, with a vertical clearance of 32m, crosses
4.29
Salhusfjorden from the SW extremity of Flatoy to Klauvneset,
about 0.8 mile SE.
4.30 Lurefjorden (60°42'N., 5°07'E.) is approached from
Fedjeosen and the S end of Fedjefjorden by passing N of Store
Sandholme and the dangers E of this islet and then through
Hoplandsosen and Fosnstraumen. The S approach is made
from Kvernafjorden by way of Alversund, Radsundet and Lu-
reosen. A light marks the N side of the NW entrance of Hop-
landsosen. Taren, awash in places and marked by an iron perch,
lies on the S side of the Hoplandsosen entrance.
Kraka is an above-water rock on the SW side of Hopland-
4.30
sosen. Fosnstraumen is the narrow channel between the N side
of Radoy and the S end of Fosnoy and connects Hoplandsosen
with the NW end of Lurefjorden. The fairway has a least chart-
ed depth of 20m. Two overhead cables, with a minimum verti-
cal clearance of 15m, span the channel.
Lurefjorden trends about 9 miles SE to the narrow Ryland-
4.30
spollen. Seimsfjorden continues about 3 miles SSE from
Lurefjorden. Both of these fjords are clear and deep in their
fairways. Numerous lights mark the channels leading N and S
from Lurefjorden. The dangers in these channels are also
marked by iron perches or beacons.
Alverstraumen (60°34'N., 5°14'E.), which leads 1.5 miles
4.30
NNW from Kvernafjorden, is spanned near the S end by a
bridge, with a vertical clearance of 27m. The fairway N of the
bridge is well marked by navigational aids.
There are quays, with least depths of 3m alongside, on the E
4.30
side of the channel at the village of Alversund, near the bridge.
There is anchorage for small vessels in several places N of a
4.30
submarine cable which lies across the channel 0.25 mile N of
the bridge, care being taken to keep clear of the fairway. The S
part of the channel is spanned by an overhead cable with a ver-
tical clearance of 28m; the N part of the channel is spanned by
an overhead cable with a vertical clearance of 36m.
Radsundet has a length of about 5 miles from its S entrance
4.30
at Alverstraumen to its N entrance at Bruknappen. The W side
and both ends of Radsundet is well marked by lights.
There are quays at Skardsvag and Notlevag. Quays at Sand-
4.30
vik, situated 1 mile SSW of Skardsvag, and Askeland have
depths of 7m alongside.
Bergen (60°24'N., 5°19'E.)
World Port Index No. 23160
4.31 Bergen is often called the capital of West Norway and
has been a city for over 900 years. It has a population of more
 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 85

than 210,000. Known for shipping and fishing in the past, it is Weather conditions vary between the outer islands, the re-
4.31

now identified as a servicing and supply base for the offshore gion near Bergen, and in the fjords of this sector. The climate at
oil and gas fields of the North Sea in the vicinity of SW Nor- Bergen is mild, humid, and rainy.
way as well. Bergen harbor freezes only during very severe winters. Fog
4.31

Located on the NW side of the Bergen peninsula and on the occurs during the summer.
SE part of Byfjorden, the city’s harbor includes bights and in- Tides—Currents.—The mean HW interval at Bergen is 10
4.31

lets which lie E of a line running N for about 3 miles from Old- hours 17 minutes.
erneset to Hella. Tidal currents in the port are negligible, except in Dams-
4.31

gardssund, where a slight set may be encountered during both

Port of Bergen Home Page the rising and falling tides.
Depths—Limitations.—Puddefjorden, the outer roadstead,
4.31

https://bergenhavn.no/en/ has general depths of 9 to 37m. Vessel with drafts up to 12.2m

Passenger, ro-ro, tanker, bulk, and general cargo vessels can
4.31
be handled. In addition, the port has drydocks and shipyard fa-
cilities for the offshore oil industry.
can be handled in the port. Close offshore the depths are less.
On the SE side, at the head of Puddefjorden, Damsgardssund
leads into Solheimsvik.
Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
4.31

Winds—Weather.—Generally, the wind direction is from S

4.31 Bergen—Berth Information.
to SE during the winter and from N to NE during the summer.

Bergen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Bontelabo Terminal
Bontelabo 130m — 340m 9.5m — 10,000 dwt Cruise vessels and breakbulk.
East 150m — 340m 9.5m — — Cruise vessels and breakbulk.
West 104m — 340m 9.5m — 14,601 dwt Cruise vessels and breakbulk.
Bradbenken Terminal
Bradbenken 80m 6.0m 82m — — — Breakbulk.
Festningskaien Terminal
Festningskaien 300m 6.0m 300m 6.5m — 10,543 dwt Cruise and breakbulk.
Dreggekaien Terminal
Dreggekaien 98m 4.4m 46m — 15m 2,900 dwt Closed. Small vessels.
Bryggen Terminal
Fast ferries and small vessels.
Bryggen — 3.5m 76m — 13.8m 2,500 dwt Closed. Continuous berthing
length of 312m.
Austevoll Laksepakkeri Terminal
Fishing vessels, reefer, and
Austevoll 155m — 94m — 20.8m 4,900 dwt
breakbulk.
CEMEX Terminal
Cement 76m 10.0m 130m — 19.4m 11,541 dwt Cement.
Damsgardskaien Terminal
Fast ferries, ro-pax, contain-
Damsgardskaien 157m 4.0m 52m — — —
ers, breakbulk, and bunkers.
DC Eikefet Terminal
DC Eikefet 130m 10.0m 143m — 22.8m 17,451 dwt Aggregates and breakbulk.
Jekleviken Terminal
Cruise vessels, ro-ro/lo-lo, and
Container 500m 8.9-12.2m 500m — — 17,110 dwt
containers.

Pub. 182
86 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen

Bergen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Ro-Ro 180m 8.9-12.2m 326m — 39.7m 14,601 dwt Ro-ro/lo-lo and containers.
Dokken Terminal
East 97m — 172m — 35.8m 21,250 dwt Ro-pax and breakbulk.
Inner 126m — 144m — 22.7m 10,508 dwt Ro-ro/lo-lo and breakbulk.
Cruise vessels, ro-pax, contain-
Southwest 240m 10.5m 240m — — —
ers, and breakbulk.
Framo Flatoy Terminal
Ro/pax, containers, and break-
Framo 60m — 86m — 16.0m 3,931 dwt
bulk.
Frieleneskaien Terminal
Ro-pax, breakbulk, coastal ex-
Frieleneskaien 400m 9.2m 166m — 25.0m 18,464 dwt press vessels, bunkers, and
reefer.
Frydenbo Industri (Hanoytangen)
Transshipment, offshore ves-
Frydenbo Main 172m 7.0m 90m — 14.4m 4,550 dwt sels, project/heavy cargo, steel
products, and breakbulk.
Holbergskaien Terminal
East 44m 5.3m 43m — 10.6m — Ro-pax.
Holbergskaien 63m 5.9m 43m — — — Ro-pax.
West 56m 5.2m 59m — 16.0m 3,850 dwt Ro-pax and fishing vessels.
Hordvikneset Terminal
Hordvikneset 40m — 117m — 22.8m 13,537 dwt Containers and breakbulk.
Horsoy Industrihavn
Horsoy 200m — 172m — 26.5m 21,250 dwt Containers and breakbulk.
Hurtigruten Terminal
Ro/pax, ro-ro/lo-lo, fishing,
Hurtigruten 154m 9.0m 87m — — —
breakbulk, and bunkers.
Mohlenspriskaien Terminal
East 156m — — — — — Breakbulk and reefer.
West 130m 4.0-6.0m 102m — 17.0m 3,850 dwt Breakbulk and reefer.
Munkebryggen Terminal
East 76m 5.2m 74m — 16.0m 3,125 dwt Breakbulk and ro/pax.
West 88m 5.2m 56m — — — Breakbulk and ro/pax.
Norcem Terminal
Norcem 70m — 117m — 31.0m 48,041 dwt Cement and breakbulk.
NorStone Askoy- Mjolkevikarden
Berthing length of 98m (in-
cluding dolphins). Aggregates,
NorStone — — 81m — 13.0m 2,900 dwt
steel products, fishing vessels,
and breakbulk.

Pub. 182
 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 87

Bergen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Northern Nostekai Terminal
Nostekai 92m 4.0m 77m — 23.6m 8,843 dwt Ro-pax.
Nykirkenkaien Terminal
East 60m — 70m — 15.2m 3,549 dwt Ro/pax and breakbulk.
Nykirkekaien 46m 17.0m 62m — 13.8m 1,725 dwt Ro/pax.
West 82m — 67m — 14.6m 2,900 dwt Ro/pax and breakbulk.
PGS Geophysical
PGS 113m — 107m — 18.2m 9,653m Closed. Breakbulk.
RadoyGryppen Terminal
RadoyGruppen 120m — 179m — 25.6m 18,972 dwt Steel products.
Saltimport Terminal
Fishing vessels, breakbulk, and
Saltimport 98m — 128m — 18.2m 9,700 dwt
reefer.
Semco Maritime (Hanoytangen)
Semco Outer 17.0- Transshipment, offshore ves-
100m 140m — 23.6m 6,672 dwt
(Hanoytangen) 20.0m sels, and breakbulk.
Simonsviken Terminal
East 72m — 58m — 20.7m 4,900 dwt Breakbulk.
West 64m — 95m — 16.0m 5,215 dwt Breakbulk.
Skaganeset Havneterminal-Skogsvag
Aggregates, ro-pax, steel prod-
Skaganeset 40m — 106m — 20.7m 5,750 dwt ucts, fishing vessels, break-
bulk, and reefer.
SkoltenTerminal
Skolten N 150m 9.2m 333m 8.8m — 8,676 dwt Cruise vessels and ro-pax.
Skolten S 330m 9.2m 253m 8.8m — 8,654 dwt Cruise vessels and fast ferries.

SLP Terminal
SLP 58m — 102m — 17.0m 3,7278dwt Breakbulk.
Quay Head 32m — 99m — 17.0m 3,727 dwt Breakbulk.
Strandkaien Terminal
Strandkaien 145m 4.7m 39m — — — Fast ferries.
Straume Naeringspark Terminal
Straume 50m — 114m — 16.0m 6,053 dwt Fishing vessels and breakbulk.
Tollboden Terminal
Tollboden 90m 6.8m 140m — 29.2m 4,661dwt Breakbulk.
Breiviken Terminal
North 37m 6.0-9.7m — — — — Breakbulk and multipurpose.
Southwest 60m — 111m — 17.5m 4,020 dwt Breakbulk and multipurpose.

Pub. 182
 Bergen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
CCBK Terminal
LNG, ro-ro freight, containers,
North 107m — 110m — 17.2m 7,569 dwt
and breakbulk.
South 20m — — — — — LNG and breakbulk.
Franzefoss Gjenvinning Eide
Berthing length: 65m (incl.
FG 28m — 88m — 20.8m 4,9000 dwt dolphins). Breakbulk, multi-
purpose, and bunkers.
Franzefoss Gjenvinning Terminal
Clean products, ro-ro passen-
ger/vehicles/rail, offshore, fish-
No. 1 157m — 107m — 17.0m 6,706 dwt
ing, breakbulk, multipurpose,
and bunkers.
Clean products, breakbulk,
No. 2 80m — — — — —
multipurpose, and bunkers.
Breakbulk, multipurpose, bun-
No. 3 164m — 111m — 16.2m 6,063 dwt kers, and reefer. Used by bun-
ker tankers.
No. 4 46m — — — — — Breakbulk.
GC Rieber Salt Terminal
Chemicals, salt, ro-pax, fish-
GC Rieber Salt 120m — 114m — 20.7m 6,419 dwt
ing, breakbulk, and reefer.
Kollsnes Industrial Processing Plant
Berthing length of 111m (incl.
North Dolphin — 8.6-24.0m 77m — 13.9m — dolphins). LNG, breakbulk,
and multipurpose.
LNG, breakbulk, and multipur-
South 96m 8.0-14.0m 77m — 13.9m —
pose.
Skalevikveien Terminal
Ro-pax, breakbulk, and bun-
General Cargo 44m — — — — —
kers.
Chemicals and clean products.
Oil 80m — 228m 12.0m — 35,560 dwt
Displacement of 41,249 dwt.
Vaksdal Mill Terminal
Chemicals, animal feeds, flour,
Vaksdal 144m — 114m — 16.8m 6,412 dwt fish meal, macaroni products,
grain, and breakbulk.
Lille Florvaagoy
East 61m — 171m 8.0m — 19,304 dwt Closed.
Closed. Displacement of
West 85m — 203.9m 10.6m — —
47,000t.
Skarholmen Terminal
Clean products and bunkers.
No. 1 75m 12.0m 200m 11.5m — 35,560 dwt
Displacement of 47,000t.
 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 89

Bergen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
No. 2 40m 11.0m 140m 9.3m — 32,000 dwt Clean products and bunkers.

Bergen—Contact Information
Port Authority Port Control
Call sign — Bergen Port Control
VHF — VHF channels 12 and 16
47-55-568980
Telephone 47-55-568950
47-55-568981
Facsimile 47-55-568986 47-55-321203
E-mail bergen.havn@bergen.kommune.no skolten.havnevakt@bergen.kommune.no

4.31 By Jan’s fotoside, via Wikimedia Commons

4.31 Vagen in Bergen, Norway from Mount Floyen

A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans the

4.31 basins close N of Sandvik.
entrance into Damsgardssund. Numerous mooring buoys are Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be
4.31

moored in Damsgardssund. Store Lungegaardsvn is entered ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the
from the NE side of Solheimsvik through a narrow passage Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
spanned by a lift bridge. The pilot boards in the S entrance in position 60°08.6'N,
4.31

Aspect.—Puddefjorden is the outer roadstead. Vagen is an
inlet entered on the NE side of Puddefjorden; it is usually
congested with ships moving in the harbor. Sandvik, a harbor
basin, is entered about 0.5 mile N of the entrance to Vagen and
5°00.9'E, about 0.7 mile N of Store Marstein. Pilot boarding
for the N entrance is covered under Mongstad (see paragraph
5.7).
See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
4.31

is used by seaplanes. Nyhaven and Breidvik are small harbor Ocean for additional information.

Pub. 182
90 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
4.31 Dokkeskjaerskaien (foreground) looking W toward Puddefjorden
Regulations.—A printed English translation of harbor regu-
4.31
lations may be obtained at the harbor office. Regulations con-
cerning explosives and lights are very stringent. Vessels
arriving at Bergen without having been assigned an anchorage
or mooring shall anchor in Puddefjorden until a berth has been
designated by the harbor authorities.
Vessels should send their ETA to Port Control at least 1 hour
4.31
prior to arrival. The ETA message should include the following
information:
1. Vessel name and call sign.
2. Length overall, beam, and draft.
3. Flag.
4. Purpose of port call.
5. Name of agent.
6. Last port-of-call and next port-of-call.
A speed limit of 5 knots is the maximum permissible speed
4.31
in the inner part of Eidsvagen.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Bergen—Con-
4.31
tact Information.
Anchorage.—Vessels of considerable size may anchor in
4.31
Puddefjorden, except W of a line extending 0.5 mile NW from
the W end of Dokkeskjaerskaien. A submarine pipeline is laid
E of this line on the NE side of Dokkeskjaerskaien leading
about 0.5 mile N to Georgernes. The fjord is exposed to NW
winds, but the holding ground is good. The prominent spire of
a church, situated 0.25 mile NNE of the bridge at the entrance
to Damsgardssund, is a useful mark for anchoring.
Skutevik affords anchorage to vessels of moderate size, in
4.31
depths of 27 to 36m, but stern mooring is necessary as the
Pub. 182
4.31 By Bjoertvedt (own work), via Wikimedia Commons
bottom shelves steeply. The quarantine anchorage is in
Florvag. There is anchorage for small vessels in Nyhavn and
Breidvik.
Anchorage is prohibited in Vagen and also W of the lighted
4.31
buoy in the entrance to Vagen.
Inner Fjords Northeast of Bergen
4.32 Osteroy, a large island, lies about 6 miles NE of Ber-
gen. The island is completely shut in by the mainland and is
encircled by Sorfjorden and Osterfjorden. Both of these fjords
have deep fairways and have comparatively few dangers.
Sorfjordskallen (60°32'N., 5°19'E.), a shoal area with numer-
ous dangerous rocks, lies towards the mouth of both Sorfjorden
and Osterjorden, and may best be seen on the chart.
Sorfjorden (60°31'N., 5°22'E.), the southernmost of the in-
ner fjords, is entered between Hammersnes (60°33'N.,
5°20'E.) and Hordvikneset, about 2 miles to the SW. Depths in
the fairway exceed 183m, except for 1.25 miles in the NE part
where it narrows, the depth is 12.8 to 33m.
The few shoal areas lie close offshore and the entire fjord is
4.32
well marked by lights. It has been reported an overhead cable,
with a vertical clearance of 60m, spans the fjord about 5 miles
within the entrance.
Votloy (60°28'N., 5°28'E.), an islet, lies about 6 miles within
4.32
the entrance near the middle of the fjord. A light is shown on
the islet.
Arnavag, which branches S from Sorfjorden, is entered 0.5
4.32
mile SSW of Votloy. There are a number of quays for small
 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
vessels inside the entrance to Arnavag.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 53m, crosses
4.32
Sorfjorden about 3 miles SE of Votloy.
Vaksdal (60°29'N., 5°44'E.) (World Port Index No. 23140),
4.32
an industrial center, is located on the E side of Sorfjorden, ENE
of the light on the islet of Ulsnesoy. Large vessels can berth at
the largest quay, which is 145m long, with depths of 7 to 21m
alongside. There are several small quays in the port.
Vessels bound for the port must first call at Bergen for cus-
4.32
toms clearance and a pilot. A conspicuous mill and silo stand
in the vicinity of the quay.
Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained by small
4.32
vessels in Veavik, on the W side of Sorfjorden, 4.5 miles N of
the entrance to Dalevagen. Stamneshella, on the N side of
Vikafjorden close within the entrance, is an anchorage with
mooring rings W and E of the main quay, which is 64m long
and has depths of up to 5m alongside.
Good anchorage can be obtained by small vessels in
4.32
Kallandsbukt close NE of Kallandsholmen, in depths of 10 to
18m, sand.
4.33 Eidsfjorden (60°43'N., 5°47'E.) trends NNE for
about 3.25 miles from the N end of Sorfjorden. It is narrow
and, except for a shoal lying within 1 mile of its head, has fair-
way depths of 30 to 106m. The depths close offshore are be-
tween 12.8 and 20.1m.
Mellesdalsund is the winding channel leading in a general
4.33
NW direction for about 3 miles on the N side of Osteroy and
connecting the N end of Sorfjorden with Romarheimsfjord.
91
The fairway through Mellesdalsund is deep and clear of dan-
4.33
gers. Romarheimsfjord, entered between Langeneset and the E
side of Haukoy, leads 3 miles NE to Mofjorden, which continues
NE for another 6.5 miles. Osterfjorden is entered between Ham-
mersnes and a mainland point, about 2 miles to the W. The fjord
trends in a general NE direction for about 13 miles and joins the S
end of Romereimsfjord. Fairway depths through the fjord are am-
ple and the fjord is clear. The only dangers are found within the
side inlets and coves or lie within 183m of the sides of the fjord.
4.34 Lonevagen (60°33'N., 5°27'E.), on the SE side of Os-
terfjorden, is entered 3 miles ENE of Hammersnes and extends
about 3 miles SE. The entrance is narrowed to a width of 183m
by submerged rocks, marked on the NE side of the entrance by
an iron perch.
On the SE side of Osterfjorden, small vessels can anchor in
4.34
Lonevagen between some islets and the W entrance point;
however, submarine cables are laid N and S of the anchor
berth, requiring local knowledge. The inlet has several quays,
with depths of from 3 to 5m alongside.
At Ostereidet, on the NW side of Osterfjorden, there is an-
4.34
chorage for small vessels W of a quay, which has a depth of 3m
alongside.
At Kleppsvag, on the S side of Osterfjorden, good anchorage
4.34
is available to small vessels at its head, in depths of 20 to 30m;
it has mooring rings. There is a rock, awash, near the middle of
the entrance to this inlet.
There are a number of other anchorages for small vessels in
4.34
Osterfjorden that can best be seen on the chart.
Pub. 182
 93
5.
Sector 5—Norway—Fedje to Alesund

Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
5.0

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION

Pub. 182

SECTOR 5
NORWAY—FEDJE TO ALESUND
5.0Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast from Fedjeosen
N to the approaches to Alesund. The Indreleia, or Inner Route,
from Fedje to Alesund, is also described, as are the various
fjords along this route.
General Remarks
5.1 Winds—Weather.—The direction and strength of the
winds in any period in this sector are controlled by the prevail-
ing depression track. The average wind strength is 11 to 27
knots, but about 10 per cent of observations reach 34 to 40
knots.
5.1Most of the strong gale force winds are from S and tend to
follow the direction of the coastline. The frequency of gales in-
creases in the N.
5.1Winds are lighter from May to August. The direction is more
variable at this time, with more frequent N winds tending to
follow the coastline.
5.1During gale force winds, a shift of the wind from S or SW to
NW or N is liable to raise a heavy sea.
5.1The unusual irregularities of the coastal topography cause
large variations in the direction and strength of the wind.
5.1Deflection and funneling increase onshore winds above the
average strength. Severe katabatic squalls come down from
steep mountain slopes and cause local hazards, with little
warning of their approach.
5.1There is a marked tendency for the wind to blow out of the
fjords toward the open sea in winter and into the fjords in sum-
mer; however, the chain of offshore islands reduces the wind
strength in some sections of the coast.
5.1South of Ytteroyane, the weather conditions on the coast are
frequently unsettled and stormy during the autumn, winter, and
spring. The least rainfall is in spring and summer, and the visi-
bility is generally good at that time. The heaviest fog occurs
during the summer months.
5.1The weather during autumn, winter and spring, on the coast
between Ytteroyane and Alesund, is frequently unsettled and
stormy also. At sea, the prevailing wind during this period is
SW; however, close to land SE and E winds prevail. During the
summer, the wind is most frequently from N to NE. The least
rainfall and the clearest weather will be found during the spring
and the greatest amount of fog occurs during the summer. In
many of the fjords on this part of the coast, heavy squalls will
be experienced from off, and in the vicinity of hills.
5.1During the winter months, S winds prevail, changing to N in
the summer. Most rain is generally accompanied with SW
winds.
5.1The amount of rain along this coast varies. The wettest plac-
es are those nearest to high mountains. Greater amounts occur
at higher levels inland.
5.1The period from September to January is the wettest while
the period from April to early June is the driest. There is no set
pattern of variations from normal in any particular month. The
total amount of rainfall varies from year to year. Because of the
95
topography, the amount of precipitation in one area may differ
considerably from another area within a short proximity.
5.1Snow usually begins in October. It is most frequent in March
and infrequent in April and May. There is no snowfall from
June to August along the coast.
5.1Snowstorms at the approaches to fjords and around the off-
shore islands may cause hazards to coastal vessels due to poor
visibility and to ice forming on the superstructure as wet snow
freezes.
5.1Fog is most common with mild S to SW winds. The highest
frequency of fog occurs over the sea in summer. Coastal areas
exposed to those winds are often obscured, but visibility over
water is normally improved when the wind veers.
5.1Most fog in the approaches to the fjords occurs in summer,
with the penetration of sea fog varying according to the degree
of exposure to onshore winds. Sea fog offshore may drift over
the coastline with the sea breeze as the land began to cool in
the evening. Better visibility is found on the lee side of the land
barriers.
5.1Radiation fog often forms over low-lying land at the head of
fjords, mostly during long clear winter nights.
5.1Arctic sea smoke or frost smoke may form temporarily over
the inner part of the fjord when extremely cold air drifts over
relatively warmer water on winter nights.
5.1Visibility is seriously restricted in snow, heavy rain, or thick
drizzle. Good visibility prevails over the region for most of the
time in all seasons. Mirages are reported along the coast at
times.
5.1Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents may be very much
influenced by the winds and floods; in turn they may influence
the general flow along the coast.
5.1In the narrower channels between the islands, the tidal cur-
rent often runs with considerable strength; because of strong
currents great caution must be exercised by vessels navigating
in Indreleia, the passage along the coast inside the off-lying is-
lands and reefs.
5.1Due to the constant coastal current, the NE flood current is
usually stronger; during the rising tide there may be a set to-
ward the islands and reefs.
5.1The velocity and direction of tidal currents, including tempo-
rary wind influences, are described with specific fairways and
ports, as required.
5.1During settled weather, the tidal currents on the coast be-
tween Ytteroyane and Alesund set NE with the rising tide and
SW with the falling tide, attaining their greatest velocity at a
distance of 30 to 50 miles from the coast. During continuous W
winds, the tidal currents set constantly NE with considerable
velocity, especially during the rising tide.
5.1On this part of the coast, the tidal currents set more strongly
and constantly NE than in the opposite direction, especially at
the distance from land mentioned above.
5.1Statthavet has long been known as an area with very severe
weather, and many have identified the area as dangerous. The
depths vary from approximately 60 to 150m.
Pub. 182
96 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund

5.1It is indicated that winds, especially from the SW to N, cre-

ate rough seas. In those circumstances, the waves go straight in
from the sea. The current in the waterway has been estimated at
between 2 and 4 knots and when the ocean waves meet it,
strong, steep waves develop and the swell becomes choppy.
5.1Pilotage.—Kvitsoy Pilot Center organizes and engages pi-
lots along the W coast of Norway from Egersund in the S lead-
ing N to the parallel of 65°08'N. Pilots should be requested 24
hours in advance. The ETA should be confirmed 2 hours prior
to arrival at the pilot station.
5.1See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
Ocean for further information.
5.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
5.1The Kinn VTS area, which is best seen on the chart, covers By JanChr [CC BY-SA 2.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/b-sa/2.0)]
5.2

mostly the inner fairways, however, it also extends out to the 5.2 Gullfaks Alpha
Norwegian baseline from Krakenes in the N, and S along the
baseline to the SW of the island of Kinn. The VTS extends fur- 5.2North Cormorant Oil Field (61°15'N., 1°09'E.), with a pro-
ther S from here all the way to where it merges with the Fedje duction platform, is situated about 19 miles NW of Brent Oil
VTS. Vessels must report to Kinn VTS on VHF channel 18 up- Field and 64 miles NE of Muckle Flugga Light (Shetland Is-
on entering the VTS Area. lands).
5.2Tern Oil Field, Eide Oil Field, and Osprey Oil Field lie 7
miles WNW, 7 miles N, and 6 miles NE, respectively, of North
Kinn VTS—Contact Information
Comorant Oil Field.
Call sign Kinn VTS 5.2Statfjorden Oil Field (61°15'N., 1°51'E.) is situated about
VHF VHF channels 16 and 18 78 miles WNW of Utvaer Light and 7 miles NNE of Brent Oil
Field. There are three production platforms and two SPM load-
47-70-231123 ing platforms in the field. In addition, there is an offshore load-
Telephone 47-95-289332 ing system (UKOLS), by which a tanker is moored to a
subsurface buoy. The largest drilling rig in the world, the Stat-
8816-214-19004 (Iridium) fjord C can be found in the vicinity of this oil field.
E-mail vts.kinn@kystverket.no 5.2Gullfaks Oil Field (61°12'N., 2°12'E.), with two platforms
and two loading systems, lies 10 miles ESE of Statfjorden Oil
Field. Dunlin Oil Field and Snorre Oil Field lie about 7 miles
For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
W and 18 miles NNE, respectively, of Statfjorden Oil Field.
5.1

(TSS) in Norwegian waters, including off Runde and Stadland-

5.2Magnus Oil Field (61°37'N., 1°20'E.) lies about 97 miles W
et, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
of Ytteroyane Light and 28 miles NW of Statfjorden Oil Field.
Ocean.
A very large production platform stands in the field.
Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Don Oil Field lies 11 miles SE of Magnus Oil Field. Thistle
5.1

5.2

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

Oil Field and Deveron Oil Field, close W, lie 17 miles SSE of
Mangnus Oil Field.
Off-lying Dangers 5.2Gjoa Oil and Gas Field (61°20.8'N., 3°53.6'E.) is marked
by a semi-submersible floating production platform located ap-
5.2 Alwyn North Oil Field (60°48'N., 1°44'E.) is situated
proximately 31 miles NE of the Troll Field (see paragraph 4.2).
86 miles W of Holmengra Light, about midway between the
Several obstruction areas, best seen on the chart, lie to the NE
coast of Norway and the Shetland Islands. A drilling and ac-
at a distance of 4.5 and 6.2 miles. Mariners should always nav-
commodations platform and a production platform stand in the
igate with and abundance of caution, when transiting approxi-
field.
mate to any North Sea oil field, due to potential charted and
Ninian Oil Field (60°51'N., 1°28'E.), is located 8 miles NW
uncharted hazards.
5.2

of Alwyn Field. Lyell Oil Field and Heather Oil Field lie about
8 and 15 miles, respectively, NW of Ninian Oil Field. A ob-
struction exists W of Lyell Oil Field. Fedje to Utvaer
Brent Oil Field (61°05'N., 1°43'E.) is situated 82 miles W
5.3 From the island of Fedje (60°46'N., 4°43'E.), the N
5.2

of Utvaer Light and about 15 miles N of Alwyn North Field.

entrance point to Fedjeosen, the channel at the N approach to
The Brent Oil Field has reached the end of its life cycle with
Bergen, the coast trends about 19 miles NNW to Utvaer Light.
decommissioning beginning in 2017.
Utvaer Light is located on one of the larger islets of the NW
5.2The South Cormorant Oil Field lies 18 miles WNW of Brent

Pub. 182
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
group of Utvaer Islets. This part of the coast is indented by
Sognesjoen, a deep and unencumbered passage leading S of
Utvaer and then E to Sognefjorden.
Between Utvaer Light and Ytteroyane Light, about 33 miles
NNE, the coast is fronted by islands and rocky islets; the conti-
nuity of the inner passage is interrupted, in places, by channels
leading directly in from the open sea to Indreleia.
The Ytteroyene group of islands lies within the vicinity of
Ytteroyan Light. Ytteroyan Light is abreast the port of Floro.
5.3Between Buelandet, a group of about 350 islands, islets, and
skerries about 15 miles N of Utvaer Light, and Ytteroyane,
there are many banks, with depths of 18.3 to 27m, which are
dangerous in bad weather. Under these conditions, there is a
confused sea within the 200m curve. In this area the off-lying
islets are thickly interspersed with rocks completely or nearly
awash. Unless a vessel is standing in to enter one of the fjords,
it is advisable to navigate at least 10 miles W of the larger is-
lands.
5.3North of Ytteroyan Light, the coast trends for about 40 miles
to the NW end of Stadttlandet, one of the most remarkable
promontories on the coast of Norway. This coast is also fronted
by islands, islets, and rocks. Indreleia is reached through a
number of channels within this area. Except when making one
of the fjords, it is advisable to keep an offing of at least 10
miles W of the larger islands.
5.3Between Buholmen Light at Stadttlandet and the approach
channels leading to Breisund and Alesund, the outer coast
trends about 25 miles in a NE direction. The coast is indented
by a number of fjords and again the mainland is fronted by ma-
ny islands, islets, and dangerous rocks. The islands are high
and steep on the seaward side, and the mainland backing them
is also high. In places, the dangers extend a considerable dis-
tance seaward from the islands. When Breisund is approached,
it will appear as a conspicuous and fairly wide opening.
5.3The main channel of Indreleia, leading N between the N ap-
proach to Bergen and the port of Floro, continues from Fedjeo-
sen through Sognesjoen and then through Krakhellesund to
Atleoy and Vilnaesfjorden.
5.3From Atleoy, there are alternative routes available to vessels
of moderate size; the W route passes W of Atleoy, while the E
route continues through Granesund at the inner end of Vilnaes-
fjorden. These routes unite to the N at Stavenes Light, and the
track then leads N to Floro.
5.4 From offshore, between Fedje and Utvaer, Sognesjoen
appears as a wide opening in the land.
5.4Utvaer, 30m high, and the islets close E are low, but farther E
the islands of Sula are high and conspicuous, and appear to be
a promontory of the mainland.
Vessels approaching the coast, intending to enter Indreleia or
the fjords N of Fedjeosen, usually stand N of Holmengra
Light (60°51'N., 4°39'E.), about 4 miles N of Fedje. The island
is small and relatively high. The light tower is 16m high and is
equipped with a radiobeacon and a racon. Rocks, above and
below-water, extend about 1 mile W from the island. About 2
miles NNW is Bergskallen, a rock covered by 17m of water.
This sunken rock is the farthest S of a chain extending about 5
miles NW of Holmengra.
5.4Fedjefjorden lies to the SE, and Fensfjorden lies to the E of
Holmengra, and leads for a distance of about 25 miles.
97
Sognesjoen, the approach to Sognefjorden from seaward,
5.4
leads about 15 miles NE from the S end of Ytre Sula, an island
about 9 miles N of Holmengra, and E of Utvaer. Small islets lie
off the entrance to Sognesjoen farther N.
The approach to Indreleia or the fjords in this vicinity N of
5.4
Holmengra is usually done by keeping in mid-channel between
Holmengra Light and the light over Bergskallen.
By Gunnar Buvik, via Wikimedia Commons
5.4
5.4 Holmengra Light
At night, enter and keep in the white sector of Grimeskjaret
5.4
Light (60°51'N., 4°45'E.), bearing between 092° and 104°,
which leads between Holmengra and Bergskallen. A racon is
located at the light tower.
5.5 Pollatind (61°06'N., 4°52'E.), 542m high, situated on
Sula about 11 miles ENE of Utvaer, is conspicuous. It rises
gradually from a base which extends about 3 miles in a N-S di-
rection.
5.5On the island of Alden, about 13 miles NNW of Pollatind, a
conspicuous saddle-shaped hill stretching E and W rises to a
height of 480m. This hill can be seen in clear weather at a dis-
tance of 32 to 40 miles. Alden will be immediately recognized
as an island.
5.5Fensfjorden is entered between Rongevaer (60°49'N.,
4°47'E.), 1.75 miles SSE of Grimeskjeret Light, and Roytingja,
an island 2.25 miles NNE.
5.5Fensfjorden presents no difficulties to navigation, but vessels
should give both shores a fair berth and the dangers near the
entrance must be avoided. This fjord extends E and SE for 15
miles, then becomes Austfjorden, which continues SE for 15
miles; it forms the approach to Mongstad Oil Terminal. From
the outer part of the fjord, several passes lead N to Sognesjoen;
from its inner part Masfjorden branches NE for 12 miles. Hind-
nesfjorden and Vagane are arms which branch S from Aust-
fjorden.
5.5Krakeflui, Mefjordbaen, and Boskallane are three shoals ly-
ing in the fairway of the entrance to Fensfjorden; they lie 0.8
mile W, 1 mile WSW, and 1 mile SW, respectively, from
Grimeskjeret Light.
5.5Rongevaerskallen (60°50'N., 4°46'E.), 0.9 mile SSE of
Pub. 182
98 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
Grimeskjeret Light, has a least depth of 6m.
Fringing dangers, branch inlets, and the lights of Fensfjorden
5.5
can best be seen on the chart.
Fedje Vessel Traffic Service
5.6 The Fedje Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) is in opera-
tion in the approaches to Mongstad and Sture Oil Terminals.
Participation is compulsory for the following vessels:
1. Vessels with a length of 24m or greater (vessels push-
ing another vessel and vessels that are pushed are considered
a single vessel).
2. Vessels towing an object that is longer or wider than
24m.
3. Vessels involved in towing operations where the total
length exceeds 35m.
4. Vessels carrying dangerous and/or polluting liquid
cargo in bulk, irrespective of length.
5.6The VTS area is bounded by lines joining the following posi-
tions:
a. 60°40'31.2''N, 4°47'42.6''E. (Rubbegamstana Light)
b. 60°40'31.2''N, 4°26'00.0''E.
c. 60°56'51.0''N, 4°18'00.0''E.
d. 60°56'51.0''N, 4°45'45.0''E. (Sogneoksen Light)
e. 60°56'45.0''N, 4°57'12.0''E. (Spafoten Light)
f. 60°48'00.0''N, 5°11'18.0''E. (Terneskjaeret Light)
g. 60°46'24.0''N, 5°09'42.0''E. (Langoyna Light)
h. 60°50'03.0''N, 4°48'24.0''E. (Northernmost Kjorhol-
men)
i. 60°47'09.6''N, 4°47'50.4''E. (Senuksen Light)
j. 60°30'00.0''N, 5°07'36.4''E.
k. 60°24'30.0''N, 5°15'05.0''E. (Oyarodden Light)
l. 60°23'42.0''N, 5°15'55.0''E. (Gravdalsneset)
m. 60°21'00.0''N, 5°13'22.0''E.
n. 60°17'31.0''N, 5°12'03.0''E. (Fleslandgrunnen Light)
o. 60°11'55.0''N, 5°15'01.0''E. (Blia Bank)
p. 60°09'58.0''N, 5°11'25.0''E. (Eldjarnet Light)
q. 60°08'08.0''N, 5°02'31.0''E. (Skjeljaboskaget Light)
r. 60°05'41.0''N, 4°57'14.0''E.
s. 60°09'17.0''N, 4°56'07.0''E.
t. 60°09'17.0''N, 5°00'23.0''E. (Tekslo Light)
u. 60°10'15.0''N, 5°06'40.0''E. (Ystaskjer Light)
v. 60°12'15.0''N, 5°10'07.0''E. (Bornestangen Light)
w. 60°40'44.0''N, 4°47'38.0''E. (Rubbegarnstana Light)
5.6All vessels carrying dangerous cargoes or pollutant cargoes
are required, as far as is possible, to navigate within the limits
of the fairways. Such vessels should report their ETA at the
limit of the operational area 6 hours in advance.
5.6The VTS area is divided into two sectors as follows:
1. Northern Sector—North of Jona Light (latitude
60°31'12.6''N).
2. Southern Sector—South of Jona Light.
5.6All vessels wishing to navigate within the VTS area must re-
quest sailing clearance from the Fedje VTS at least 1 hour be-
fore their arrival at the limit of this area. This requirement
includes vessels intending to leave a quay, berth, or mooring
within the VTS area.
5.6When requesting sailing clearance for the VTS area, the
message should include the following information:
1. Vessel name and call sign.
Pub. 182
2. Sailing Plan and destination.
3. ETA at the outer limit of the VTS area and the ETA at
the port, mooring, or anchorage—for vessels located outside
the operational area of the VTS.
4. ETD from the VTS area—for vessels inside the area.
5. Any other information requested by the VTS, such as
vessel type, nationality, and port of registration.
Vessels should send position reports to Fedje VTS, as fol-
5.6
lows:
1. When passing the limits of the VTS area when head-
ing into the VTS area.
2. When passing between VHF channel sectors.
3. Before moving with the VTS area (leaving the wharf,
berth, or mooring facility).
4. When being towed.
5. When at anchor.
6. When involved in an accident.
7. Immediately if the vessel is in difficulty and likely to
result in a change of voyage plan.
All vessels must maintain a continuous listening watch on
5.6
the appropriate VHF channel for the area. All communication
with the VTS shall be in a Scandinavian language or, if not us-
ing a pilot, in English.
Fedje VTS—Contact Information
Fedge VTS
E-mail fedje.vts@kystverket.no
Northern Sector
VHF VHF channels 16 and 80
47-56-164432
Telephone
47-56-676920
Southern Sector
VHF VHF channels 16 and 71
47-56-164430
Telephone
47-56-676920
5.7 Mongstad (60°49'N., 5°02'E.) (World Port Index No.
23138) is a coastal port situated on the S shore of Fensfjorden,
about 8 miles within its entrance. It is the site of a refinery and
is designed to handle incoming crude and to load the finished
products. The port is approached through the channel N of
Holmengra and from the channel SSE of Fedje.
5.7Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off Mongstad termi-
nal in Fensfjorden have, in general, a constant W set, but unset-
tled winds may cause them to set E.
5.7Depths—Limitations.—Maximum vessels accommodated
are up to 440,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 380m, a
maximum draft of 25m, and a maximum beam of 60m, can be
accommodated. For more berthing details see the accompany-
ing table titled Mongstad—Berth Information.
5.7Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 4,000
gross tons carrying dangerous cargo to and from the terminal.
Pilots board, as follows:
1. Fedjeosen No. 2—position 60°44.1'N, 4°44.0'E.
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 99

2. Fedjefjorden No. 3—position 60°45.7'N, 4°46.1'E (by
appointment only).
3. Holmengra No. 2—position 60°51.4'N, 4°39.0'E.
4. Fensfjorden No. 3—position 60°51.4'N, 4°45.2'E (by
appointment only).
5. Vessels over 30,000 gross tons carrying hazardous or
polluting cargo to the terminal:
6. West Fedje—in position 60°46.0'N, 4°27.9'E (Pilot
transfer by helicopter, if required).
7. West Holmengra—in position 60°51.0'N, 4°25.9'E
(Pilot transfer by helicopter, if required).

Mongstad—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Equinor Mongstad
Crude Oil
124m 26.6m 350m 23m 60.0m 380,000 dwt Clean products, crude, and bunkers.
Jetty No. 1
Crude, dirty products, and bunkers.
Crude Oil
100m 20.6m 285m 19.7m 53.0m 180,00 dwt Berthing length of 210m (including
Jetty No. 7
dolphins).
LPG, peatcoke, and multipurpose.
Jetty No. 4 50m 8.9m 119.2m 8.4m 18.2m 7,000 dwt Berthing length of 70m (incl.
dolphins).
Breakbulk. Used for harbor service
Jetty No. 11 62m — — — — —
vessels.
Coal, peatcoke, breakbulk, and
Jetty No. 12 50m — 99.9m — 15.8m 5,000 dwt
bunkers.
Crude. Dedicated as STS transfer
jetty. Capable of handing up to
Jetty No. 14 131m 28.0m 380m 25m 60.0m 440,000 dwt
127,000 dwt shuttle tanker for STS
transfer.
Product Jet- Aviation fuel, petroleum products,
70m 17.5m 255m 14.5m 45.0m 119,456 dwt
ty No. 2 and bunkers.
Product Jet-
38m 7.4m 130m 6.5m 17.8m 7,000 dwt Petroleum products and bunkers.
ty No. 3
Aviation fuel, petroleum products,
Product Jet-
80m 17.3m 235m 16.4m 40.0m 75,571 dwt and bunkers. Berthing length of
ty No. 8
160m (including dolphins).
Aviation fuel, petroleum products,
Product Jet-
80m 17.3m 235m 16.4m 36.6m 50,000 dwt LPG, and bunkers. Berthing length
ty No. 9
of 260m (incl. dolphins).
No. 10 100m 6.8m 151.5m — 25.4m 10,000 dwt Breakbulk.
No. 10 Ro-
54m 10.3m 60m 10.3m — 10,000 dwt Ro-ro/lo-lo and breakbulk.
Ro
Mongstad Base
Offshore vessels, steel products,
BOH Quay 82m 11.6m 159.8m — 24.0m 150,000 dwt breakbulk, and reefer. Used as lay
berth.
No. 1A 75m 10.4m 118.9m — 18.5m 8,363 dwt Offshore vessels, breakbulk, and
bunkers. Continuous berthing length
No. 1B 75m 10.4m 103.6m — 16.6m 6,005 dwt of 225m.
Cement, ro-ro/lo-lo, offshore,
No. 1C 75m 10.4m 117.3m — 19.7m 8,388 dwt breakbulk, bunkers, and reefer.
Continuous berthing length of 225m.

Pub. 182
100 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund

Mongstad—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Ro-ro/lo-lo, offshore vessels, break-
bulk, and bunkers. Continuous berth-
No. 2 140m 9.7m 88.1m — 12.4m 3,697 dwt ing length of 338m. Loading and
discharge ream at N end of Berth No.
2.
No. 3 90m 10.6m 117.3m — 18.7m 8,051 dwt Cement, offshore, breakbulk, and
bunkers. Continuous berthing length
No. 4 108m 10.1m 100.9m — 18.7m 5,850 dwt of 338m.
Ro-ro/lo-lo, offshore, breakbulk, and
No. 5 97m 13.1m 101.7m — 18.7m 5,850 dwt
bunkers. Used as lay berth.

5.7 By Dag Erik Hagesaeter [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0)], via Wikimedia Commons
Mongstad Base and Oil Refinery
5.7

5.7Pilots should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be or- 6. Information required for the refinery’s guidance.
dered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an addition- 5.7Tankers of 40,000 tons or more, when within territorial wa-
al cost. ters, display a black cylinder by day and exhibit three red
5.7Regulations.—Vessels should send an ETA 72 hours in ad- lights, disposed vertically, at night, to indicate that other ves-
vance and confirm their arrival 48 hours and 24 hours prior to sels must not impede their navigation.
arrival. 5.7In addition, tankers may use a sound signal of one long blast,
5.7The 72-hour ETA should contain the following information: followed by two short blasts at any time.
1. Bunkers required. 5.7All vessels underway, anchored, or at a quay within the lim-
2. Cash transactions. its of the operational area should maintain a continuous listen-
3. Personnel. ing watch on VHF channels 16 and 80.
4. Bonded stores. 5.7Contact Information.—See the table titled Mongstad—
5. Any special requirements.

Pub. 182
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
Contact Information.
Mongstad—Contact Information
Call sign Mongstad Port Control
VHF VHF channels 11, 12, and 16
Telephone 47-56-345529
47-56-344660
Facsimile
47-56-344729
Telex STATOIL MONGSTAD
Anchorage.—Anchorage for Mongstad is available in Fon-
5.7
nesflaket, W of Havarden. Permission should be requested via
the Fedje VTS Center; further instruction may be obtained
from the pilot.
5.8 Fedjefjorden, the continuation of Indreleia to the
NNW from Bergen, leads E of Fedje to Fensfjorden and is free
from dangers in the fairway. The NE side of the channel should
be avoided as rocks extend about 0.7 mile offshore.
5.8The E side of Fedje is free from dangers at a distance of
about 183m.
5.8Ytre Langoyflui (60°47'N., 4°49'E.), on the E side of the
fjord, about 2 miles ENE of the E extremity of Fedje, has a
depth of 3m or less, and is marked on its N end by an iron
perch.
5.8The lights and dangers in the fjord may best be seen on the
chart.
5.8Vetegjograskjaer Light (60°49'N., 4°45'E.), 2.5 miles NNE
of Fedje Light, stands at the NE end of Fedjefjorden.
5.8Directions.—When a vessel desires to pass through Indrelia
N of Fedjefjorden, vessels pass W of a 1.8m patch, marked by
an iron perch, situated 0.25 mile WNW of Vetegjo Graskjaer
Light; W of the dangers lying W of Grimeskjeret Light; and
then into the W end of Fensfjorden.
5.8From the W end of Fensfjorden, the deep water track leads
about 15 miles N to Sognesjoen, which leads to Sognefjorden.
5.8Vessels desiring to pass through Indrelia N of Fedjefjorden,
pass W of the 1.8m patch, described above, and then into Fens-
fjorden, continuing N at the outer end of that fjord.
5.8From the NW end of Fensfjorden, Indreleia passes W of
Roytingkalven (60°52'N., 4°47'E.), marked on its SW side by
a light, and E of a light about 0.2 mile W of Roytingkalven
Light. A rock, with a depth less than 1.8m, marked by an iron
perch, lies on the W side of the preferred channel, 0.3 mile NW
of Roytingkalven Light.
5.8After passing the above rock, the track leads in a general N
direction, passing W of the light on Sogneuksen (60°57'N.,
4°46'E.), into Sognesjoen, the broad deep channel forming the
E continuation of Indreleia.
5.8An alternative track from Fensfjorden to Sognesjoen turns N
at Vikingneset (60°51'N., 4°56'E.), the SE extremity of
Byrknesoy, and then passes between the island of Mjomna on
the W and Sandoy on the E, about 2 miles NNE of the light on
Vikingneset.
5.8A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 30m, connects Mjomna
and Sandoy, about 3.4 miles NNE of the light on Vikingneset.
5.8Caution.—Vessels crossing the cautionary area for VLCC,
101
from seaward of Holmengra into Fensfjorden, must not impede
vessels displaying signals required of tankers of 40,000 tons
and larger.
5.9 Sognesjoen (60°52'N., 4°40'E.) extends about 17
miles NE to its junction with Sognefjorden, from a position
about 7 miles NNE of Holmengra. The fairway is deep and has
a least width of 1.75 miles.
5.9 By Per Olav Boyum, via Wikimedia Commons
5.9 Sognefjorden
5.9Storsvalene and Smasvalene are two groups of islets and
rocks lying off the SW entrance to Sognesjoen. The S end of
Storsvalene lies about 6 miles N of Holmengra Light; the two
groups then extend about 2 miles N.
5.9An island, in position 60°56'N, 4°37'E, and marked by a bea-
con, lies near the S end of Storsvalene.
5.9At the S end of the approach to Sognesjoen, on the E side,
are numerous islands, islets, and rocks.
5.9Mebaen (60°54'N., 4°42'E.), an unmarked danger with
depths of less than 1.8m, is the farthest W of these dangers. It
lies about 3 miles NNE of Holmengra Light. A similar un-
marked danger lies about 0.2 mile N of Mebaen. These dangers
are covered by the red sector of Sogneuksen Light.
5.9When approaching Sognesjoen from the WSW, the most
prominent visible feature is the 722m high mountain Brosvik-
sata (61°02'N., 5°10'E.). There is a conspicuous radio mast on
the mountain. The mast is over 50m in height.
5.9Kvaereknapp (60°59'N., 4°42'E.) is the S extremity of Ytre
Sula. This extremity, on the N side of Sognesjoen, is marked by
a light.
5.9Storholmen (61°01'N., 4°47'E.) and some smaller islets and
rocks lie within 0.5 mile S of Tungodden, the S extremity of
Steinsundoy, 2.75 miles NE of Kvaereknapp. These dangers
are covered by the green sector of Sogneuksen Light.
5.9Guleskjer, situated 1.75 miles NNE of Storholmen, is an
above-water rock in the middle of the entrance to a fjord that is
mostly foul.
5.9Gronholmen (61°02'N., 4°53'E.) lies close off the SW end
of Nesoy. A light is exhibited on Gronholmen.
5.9A light is exhibited on the SE point of Sula, 2 miles ENE of
Gronholmen.
5.10 Rossoy (60°59'N., 4°48'E.), situated on the S side of
Pub. 182
102 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund

Sognesjoen, 2.5 miles NNE of Sogneuksen Light, is marked by To the S, at the N end of Ytre Sula, are numerous islets and
5.11

a lighted beacon. The dangers S of Rossoy are covered by the rocks, some of which are above water. At its end is Krakestein
red sector of Sogneuksen Light bearing more than 197°. Light.
Bunesholmane is situated 1 mile ENE of Rossoy Light and
5.10

Hamnesholmen is situated about 0.3 mile farther E. A rock,

marked by an iron perch, lies 183m N of Hamnesholmen.
A beacon stands on the NE end of Nord Glavaer, 1 mile ENE
5.10

of Hamnesholmen; it marks the W side of the N entrance to

Rossosen.
Dingenes (61°02'N., 5°02'E.), reported to be 4.5 miles ENE
5.10

of Nord Glovaer, is marked by a light.

Islets and rocks lie within 1.25 miles to 1.5 miles W and NW
5.10

of Dingenes Light. Stabben, the farthest N of these dangers,

has a depth of 1.5m, and is marked by an iron perch. These
dangers are covered by the green sector of Dingenes Light.
Rutletangen Light (61°05'N., 5°10'E.) is exhibited from the
5.10

NE point of Fjaeroy, about 6 miles NE of Dingenes. A beacon

stands on a rock close NW of the point.
Torsholmane are a group of dangers situated on two shoals
5.10

on the N side of Sognesjoen, within 1 mile SW of Hansneset

(61°07'N., 5°06'E.), the SE extremity of Losna.
When about 1 mile SSW of Kvaereknapp Light, shape a
5.10

course to pass about midway between Storholmen and Rossoy. 5.11 Utvaer Light
From this position, steer to keep in the white sector of
5.10

Krakeneset Light, until in a position about 1 mile SW of that Gasvaer, and the groups of islands in its vicinity, are low-ly-
5.11

light, then steer to pass midway between Krakeneset Light and
Stabben.
From this position, steer in the white sector of Rutletangen
5.10
Light bearing between 068° and 102° until N of Stabben and
then steer a mid-channel course between the light and Torshol-
ing islands, islets, and rocks situated about 7 miles NE of Nor-
dholmene, the farthest N of the Utvaer Islets. Gasvaer
(61°11'N., 4°42'E.), the largest and highest of the islands, is
18m high,
The waterway extending from Gasvaerosen N via Bue-
5.11

mane, and then into Sognefjorden, passing N and then SE of
Rutletangen Light.
Caution.—The area extending from Holmengra to Sognes-
5.10
joen and to Rossoy is foul with many shoals.
With an ebb tide, the current runs W. The outward current in
5.10
Sognefjorden will increase significantly during the snowmelt
period and during periods of heavy precipitation, which is
strongest on the N side of the fjord.
Interaction between waves and current, as well as refraction
5.10
of waves over shallow areas, causes choppy seas. High, steep
fjorden to the Geita Light can be dangerous. Winds especially
from W to NW cause heavy seas in the area. Rough seas and
large waves come mainly in from the W, and the outgoing tidal
current of between 1 and 2 knots causes choppy swell. High
steep waves have been observed in this waterway.
5.12 Ospa (61°13'N., 4°45'E.), an island which rises to a
height of 110m near its center, is situated on the S side of Bue-
fjorden.
A light is located close off its NW side. This island is foul on
5.12

waves have been observed in the area.
When nearing the land to the S of Utvaer, in clear weather,
5.10
Eldsfjell will be seen farthest S. This is a high rounded hill on
the island of Holsnoy rising to 324m, in a position about 31
miles SSE of Utvaer Light.
all sides, and rocks and shoals extend about 1 mile N from the
island. The islands of Drevoy and Faeroy lie E of Ospa; naviga-
tion through the numerous shoals N of them is possible only
with local knowledge.
Bulandet consists of over approximately 350 islands, islets,
5.12

and skerries. The landscape is gentle, low, and rich in vegeta-

Utvaer to Ytteroyane (including Floro) tion. It is located about 6 miles NNW of Gasvaer.
Foul ground extends 0.75 mile S and W from the islets. The
5.12

5.11 The lighthouses on Utvaer and Ytteroyane are 31m group of islets should not be approached without local knowl-
high and form good landmarks. Utvaer Light is equipped with edge.
a radiobeacon. Loftsteingrunnen, SW of Bulandet, is a group of shoals, with
5.12

From Utvaer Light (61°02'N., 4°31'E.), 12.5 miles NNW of depths of 15 to 17m, which can be dangerous in rough weather.
Holmengra Light, to Ytteroyane Light, a distance of about 33 Vvryygrunnen is a group of shoals, with depths of 23 to
5.12

miles, three fjords indent the coast. From S to N, these three 34m, which lies about 4 miles W of Buesteinane.
fjords are Buefjorden, Stavfjorden, and Rekstafjorden. Buesteinane is conspicuous with its black color and ragged
5.12

Buefjorden (61°15'N., 4°40'E.) is the open fjord which sepa-

5.11
rates Ospa and Buelandet. The middle waters of the fjord are clear,
but on both the N and S sides rocks and shoals extend well out into
the fjord. North of Buefjorden, from W to E, lies Buelandet, 41m
high; Vaeroy, 163m high; and Alden, 480m high.
peaks.
5.13 Sandoy Light (61°18'N., 4°36'E.) is exhibited on
Sandoyna and is easily identified by its close settlement and
the light on its highest peak.

Pub. 182
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
Vaeroy (61°18'N., 4°44'E.), 2.75 miles E of Sandoy Light, is
5.13
the principal island on the N side of Buefjorden; it attains a
height of 163m, and its two round knolls, of about equal size,
resemble haycocks.
Islets and rocks extend about 1 mile S of Vaeroy and three is-
5.13
lands are located in the fairway SE of that island. Geita, the far-
thest SE of these three islands, is marked by a light.
Directions.—The light on Geita leads from seaward into Bue-
5.13
fjorden, clear of the dangers, to within about 2 miles of the light.
Using the chart as the guide, no difficulty should be experienced in
passing E of Vaeroy and S of the light on Raudoy (61°18'N.,
4°55'E.), about 4 miles E of Vaeroy, then into Vilnesfjorden. The
main track of Indreleia continues N from this fjord.
5.14 Svineflu (61°20'N., 4°33'E.), with a depth of 14m,
lies at the seaward end of numerous rocks and shoals 3 miles
NNW of Sandoy Light. Hasteinosen separates these dangers
from the N side of Buelandet and the NW side of Vaeroy. An
extensive reef, which is awash, lies 1.5 miles E of Svineflu.
Hasteinen, situated 4 miles NNE of Sandoy Light, is a dense
5.14
group of small islets with many off-lying rocks.
Teinegrunnen (61°24'N., 4°29'E.), with a least depth of 13m,
5.14
lies about 4 miles NNW of Svineflu. This depth is covered by the
red sector of Sandoy Light bearing more than 151.5°.
Temba is a fishing ground, with a least depth of 13m, situat-
5.14
ed 4 miles N of Teinegrunnen.
Stavfjorden (61°27'N., 4°53'E.) lies E of these dangers; the
5.14
main track of Indreleia leads across this fjord, then through
Brufjorden to Floro.
Rekstafjorden is entered on the S side of Kinn (61°34'N.,
5.14
4°46'E.) and can be approached from the offing by passing on
either side of Jonsgrunnfalla, by keeping in the white sector of
the light on Sandoya. The white sectors of the light bearing be-
tween 056° and 059°, and between 066° and 068°, lead S and
N of Jonsgrunnfalla, respectively.
Indreleia continues N from the inner end of Rekstafjorden, into
5.14
Nekkoyosen.
5.15 Sverslingosen, the channel between Ytteroyane
(61°35'N., 4°41'E.) and Sverslingane, 1.25 miles N, should al-
ways be used when approaching Skorperfjorden.
Hoydalsnakken, a 13m patch, lies at the outer end of a chain
5.15
of shoals extending 2 miles WSW from Ytteroyane.
Havfluene, lying at the outer end of many shoals which ex-
5.15
tend up to 3 miles WSW from Sverslingane, has a least depth
of 11m.
Ternehaug (61°35'N., 4°41'E.), on the S side of the fairway,
5.15
lies 0.3 mile NE of Ytteroyane; it is marked by a light.
Ertreskjert, 0.8 mile NE of Ternehaug, is easily identified; it
5.15
Floro—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth
LOA
Norwegian Sandstone Export SA (NSE)
Loading Jetty 30m 12.0m 175m
103
lies on the NW edge of a group of islets and rocks which ex-
tend 0.7 mile SE.
Kvitingane, above-water, and Kvitingsfalla, awash, lie in a
5.15
group of shoals on the N side of the fairway 1.5 miles NE of
the light on Ternehaug.
Skallefluene (61°35'N., 4°46'E.), on the NE side of the fair-
5.15
way, 1 mile SE of Kvitingane, has depths of 2m or less. These
rocks and a 4m patch, 0.3 mile SSE, are covered by the red sec-
tor of Kinnasund Light, situated on the NE side of Kinn, bear-
ing more than 167°.
For vessels entering Sverslingosen from seaward, the 387m
5.15
height on Skorpa in line with Ertreskjeret bearing 079° will
lead to a position about 0.4 mile N of Ternehaug Light; then
change course to the NE to pass 0.2 mile N of Ertreskjeret.
From Ertreskjeret steer E until the white sector of Kinnasund
5.15
Light bears between 157° and 167°, which course will lead to
the W end of Skorpefjorden.
Skorpefjorden, an E continuation of the entrance from Svers-
5.15
lingosen, is formed between Skorpa and Ytre Annoya on the N
and Reksta and Nordre Nekkoya on the S. It extends about 5
miles ENE.
Flategrunnane (61°35'N., 4°50'E.), awash, lies on the S side
5.15
of the fairway, 0.4 mile S of the S extremity of Skorpa. It lies at
the W end of Hestholmane, which has another rock awash, 0.3
mile ENE of Flategrunnane.
Klungreskjeret lies on the S side of the channel, 0.3 mile SW
5.15
of the SE extremity of Skorpa. A light marks the E end of foul
ground 0.4 mile ENE of the SE end of Skorpa.
Foul ground lies on the S side of the fairway, about 183m S
5.15
of Ytre Annoya.
Annoyskjeret Light (61°36'N., 4°56'E.) is situated close off
5.15
the S side of Indre Annoya and about 0.2 mile E of Ytre An-
noya.
To navigate between the dangers in Skorpefjorden from W to
5.15
E, bring the white sector of Annoyskjeret Light ahead, between
the bearings of about 074° and 077°. Pass S of that light into
Indreliea, which leads N from Nekkoyosen.
5.16 Floro (61°36'N., 5°02'E.) (World Port Index No.
23130) is an administrative town, with its principal industries
primarily associated with fishing.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Floro is about 1m.
Depths—Limitations.—The general depths in the harbor
5.16
are 29 to 50m, although a 7.7m patch lies 0.15 mile ESE of
Floro Light and a 6.4m patch lies about 160m farther E; the lat-
ter patch is marked by a buoy. Inside the mole there are two
rocks, with a depth of 2.6m over them, which lie close off-
shore, 183m E of the mole.
Remarks
Draft Beam Size
Berthing length of 180m (in-
— 26.0m 50,000 dwt cluding dolphins). Aggre-
gates, and breakbulk.
Pub. 182
104 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund

Floro—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Westcon Yard- Floro
Berth used as ship mainte-
North Quay 80m 13.0m — — — —
nance and repair quay.
Berth used as ship mainte-
Outfitting Quay 170m 5.0-8.0m — — — —
nance and repair quay.
Fjord Base
Chemicals, crude products,
cement, mineral ore, ro-ro/lo-
Quay A 95m 8.5m 150m — 20.8m 10,585 dwt lo, container, offshore, break-
bulk, barite, bentonite, multi-
purpose, and bunkers.
Chemicals, dirt products, ro-
Quay B 50m 17.0m 120m — 18.7m 6,005 dwt ro/lo-lo, offshore, breakbulk,
multipurpose, and bunkers.
Chemicals, dirty products,
mineral ore, ro-ro/lo-lo, off-
Quay C 58m 8.3m 120m — 19.0m 6,700 dwt shore, barite, steel products,
breakbulk, multipurpose, and
bunkers.
Berthing length: 63m (incl.
dolphins). LNG, containers,
Quay D 40m 8.5m 120m — 11.8m 2,500 dwt offshore vessels, steel prod-
ucts, breakbulk, multipur-
pose, and bunkers.
Containers, offshore vessels,
Quay E 100m 10.0m 200m — 32.0m 40,481 dwt steel products, breakbulk, and
reefers.
Chemicals, dirty products,
containers, offshore vessels,
Quay F 90m 9.2m 120m — 18.9m 10,745 dwt
breakbulk, multipurpose, and
bunkers.
Chemicals, containers, off-
shore, project/heavy cargo,
steel products, breakbulk, and
Quay G 150m 12.3m 250m — 28.0m 37,152 dwt
multipurpose. Quay owned
by Flora Hamn KF and oper-
ated by Saga Fjordbase AS.
Ro-ro/lo-lo. Vessels along-
side either bow/stern and will
Quay H 26m 7.7m 150m — 19.0m 6,700 dwt take up perpendicular space
along side the extension of
Quay C.
Offshore vessels, steel prod-
Quay L 100m 10m 120m — 26.0m 9,000 dwt
ucts, and breakbulk.
Floro Hamn
Quay A 55m 9m 67.3m — 11.4m 1,218 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
Quay B 20m 12m — — — — Breakbulk and bunkers.

Pub. 182
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 105

Floro—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Dirty products, cruise ves-
sels, containers, offshore,
Quay C 140m 11.3m 140m — 22.6m 11,846 dwt fishing vessels, breakbulk,
multipurpose, bunkers, and
reefers.
Dirty products, cruise, ro-ro/
lo-lo, containers, offshore,
Quay D 140m 10.7m 140m — 22.5m 11,193 dwt
fishing, breakbulk, multipur-
pose, bunkers, and reefers.
Dirty products, cruise, off-
shore, fishing vessels, break-
Quay E 185m 8.0m 185m — 15.2m 4,632 dwt
bulk, multipurpose, bunkers,
and reefers.
Bunkers. Berth used as wait-
ing quay and leased to Nor-
Quay F 20m 4.5m — — — —
wegian Coastal
Administration.
Quay G 58m 4.7m 27m — 8.8m — Ro/pax and bunkers.
Quay H 35m 3.8m — — — — Ro/pax and bunkers.
Ro-ro/lo-lo and bunkers. Ves-
sels alongside either bow/
Ro-Ro 16m 10.7m 81.8m — 16.0m 2,500 dwt
stern will take up perpendicu-
lar space alongside Quay D.
Gunhildvagen
Chemicals, LNG, fishing ves-
EWOS Quay A 116m 10.0m 119.1m — 17.0m 7,124 dwt sels, breakbulk, and multipur-
pose.
Chemicals, animal feed,
limestone, fishing vessels, ro-
EWOS Quay B 70m 10.0m 117.3m — 18.0m 6,488 dwt
ro/lo-lo, breakbulk, and mul-
tipurpose.
Animal feed, fishing vessels,
EWOS Quay C 85m 4.0m 94.9m — 16.0m 5,065 dwt
breakbulk, and reefers.
Fishing vessels, breakbulk,
and reefers. Vessel usually
EWOS Quay D 43m 4.0m 89.9m — 13.7m 3,704 dwt berth alongside Quay C and
overhang over space along-
side Quay D.
Berthing length of 75m (in-
cluding dolphins). Chemi-
EWOS Quay E 65m 10.0m 119.8m — 20.7m 7,124 dwt cals, ro-ro/lo-lo, fishing
vessels, breakbulk, multipur-
pose, and reefer.
Norway Pelag-
Fishing vessels, breakbulk,
ic- Gunhild- 70m 9.0m 80m — 16.3m 2,900 dwt
and reefers.
vagen

The port can accommodate vessels up to 50,000 dwt, with a

5.16 Several quays used by the oil and gas service industry are
maximum length of 250m and a maximum beam of 32m. located E at Fjord Base (Botnaneset).

Pub. 182
106 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund

5.16 By Karennilsen [CC BY-SA 4.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0)], via Wikimedia Commons

5.16 Fjord Base facing ESE towards the Norwegian mainland

Fjord Base (Botnaneset) (61°36.7'N., 5°04.6'E.), a growing

5.16 tact Information.
oil and gas services complex, has several quays just E of Floro.
Berthing details for Floro and Fjord Base are shown in the
5.16 Floro—Contact Information
accompanying table titled Floro—Berthing Information.
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be
5.16

ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Telephone 47-57-756740
Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. Facsimile 47-57-740916
Vessels should contact the Floro pilot station on VHF chan-
5.16

nel 16 about 2 hours prior to arrival at the pilot boarding posi- E-mail hamn@flora.kommune.no
tion. Vessels that call on VHF channel 16 will be connected to
the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center via Floro or Rogaland Coast Anchorage.—Anchorage in Floro is charted about 0.1 mile
5.16

Radio Station if the station does not respond. NE of the mole. Depths in the anchorage are about 50m. An-
All direct communications with the pilots and the pilot ves-
5.16
chorage can be taken in Arebrotsfjorden just N of Rota island,
sel will take place on VHF channel 13. in depths from 8.8 to 49m.
Pilots board, as follows:
5.16

1. Vessels over 30,000 gt or vessels with a freeboard Ytteroyane to Stadlandet

greater than 8m—position 61°43.0'N, 4°23.5'E. (via helicop-
ter by appointment)
2. West of Kvannhovden Light—position 61°42.2'N,
4°45.5'E.
3. In bad weather, by appointment:
a. Hellefjorden—position 61°39.1'N, 4°51.2'E.
5.17 From Ytteroyane Light (61°35'N., 4°41'E.), the
coastline extends for about 40 miles in a N direction to the NW
end of Stadlandet, one of the most remarkable promontories on
the Norwegian coast.
The mainland is fronted by islands, islets, and rocks, which
5.17

b. Froysjoen—position 61°45.0'N, 4°56.6'E. lie up to 12 miles offshore, and is frequently interrupted by

Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA is required 24 hours before
5.16
channels leading from the open sea to Indreleia. There are no
arrival. off-lying islands or islets in the vicinity of Stadlandet. Except
Contact Information.—See the table titled Floro—Con-
5.16 when making for one of the fjords, it is advisable to keep an

Pub. 182
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
offshore distance of at least 10 miles W of the larger off-lying
islands.
The principal fjords along this section of coast are, from S to
5.17
N, Hellefjorden, Froysjoen, Nordfjorden, Fafjorden, and Vags-
fjorden; the latter two connect with Nordfjorden S of Stadland-
et.
The Kinn Vessel Traffic Service (VTS), located just W of
5.17
Kinn, is best seen on the chart. The VTS includes inbound ra-
dio reporting points, which use VHF channel 18, and follows a
track to the NNE towards Krakenes. For further information,
see paragraph 5.1.
The most important lights for making a landfall between Yt-
5.17
teroyane and Stadlandet are Ytteroyane Light (61°34'N.,
4°41'E.), Kvanhovden Light (61°42'N., 4°50'E.), and Hen-
danes Light (61°58'N., 5°02'E.), on the W side of Vagsoy, and
Krakenes Light (Kraakenes) (62°02'N., 4°59'E.), on the NW
extremity of Vagsoy.
The most conspicuous island among the islands in the vicini-
5.17
ty of Ytteroyane is Kinn (61°34'N., 4°46'E.). It is 316m high
and lies 2 miles ESE of Ytteroyane Light. This dome-shaped
island has two hills separated by a deep ravine with steep sides.
On the N end of the island there is a church which is visible at
a distance of 8 miles.
During the winter months, with long nights and frequent bad
5.17
visibility, when approaching the land during W winds, vessels
should avoid being set N of the entrances to the channels.
Skorpa, about 3 miles ENE of Ytteroyane Light, rises to a
height of 393m. The island of Batalden, 1.5 miles NNW of
Skorpa, rises to a height of 491m.
From offshore, W of Floro, Alden (61°19'N., 4°48'E.)
5.17
should be visible to the SE and Kinn should be visible to the E.
Batal Den, a good landmark 4 miles N of Kinn, is 491m high
5.17
and precipitous.
5.18 Sendingane (61°39'N., 4°34'E.), a group of above-
water rocks, and Loynefallet, a 4m shoal, 0.6 mile WSW, lie
5.75 miles NW of Ytteroyane, at the W end of a chain of rocks
extending W from Batalden.
Bremangerlandet (Bremangerland), an island which rises to
a height of 910m at Hornelen (61°51'N., 5°14'E.), appears to
be part of the mainland.
Stadlandet projects NW from the mainland E of Vagsoy for a
5.18
distance of about 14 miles. Kjerringa (62°11'N., 5°08'E.), at
the NW end of Statdandet, is 497m high. Radio masts, which
are prominent, stand near the summit of Kjerringa.
The waterway near Haugsholmen and Stalrevet, a shoal with
5.18
a depth of 20m, as well as several shoal areas between them,
have been mentioned as areas with particularly heavy seas.
5.19 Skorpefluene and Bataldfluene (61°54'N., 4°48'E.),
with a least depth of 10m, lie 5 and 4.5 mile SW, respectively,
from the N extremity of Bremangerlandet. These two dangers,
which break when a swell is running, are the farthest W in the
approach to Fafjorden and Vagsfjorden. Veststeinen, an islet
44m high, lies 2.75 miles W of the N extremity of Bremanger-
landet. The islet is surrounded by foul ground to a distance of
0.6 mile.
Toytemulen, awash and always marked by breakers, lies 1.25
5.19
miles NNW of Veststeinen. There is a 5m patch 0.3 mile NNE
of this rock.
107
Several dangers lie in the general area between Veststeinen
5.19
and Klovningen. Seiabaane, with a least depth of 4m, lies
about 2 miles NNE of Veststeinen, and Brunebaen, a rock,
awash, lies about 2 miles ENE of the same islet.
Several shoals, which reportedly break in a swell, lie S of
5.19
Brunebaen. Their positions may be seen on the chart.
Harfluene, with a least depth of 19m, lies about 2 miles NW
5.19
of Klovningen. Between this patch and the islet is Norefluene,
covered by a least depth of 8m. Klovningskjer, which covers
1.5m, lies at the NNW end of the foul ground 0.3 mile from the
N end of Klovningen.
Skoringane, a chain of small islets, lies 0.5 mile E of
5.19
Klovningen. Svarteskjera are above-water rocks 0.3 mile far-
ther E.
5.20 Basundskjera (61°56'N., 5°00'E.), a group of above-
water rocks marked by a light, lies on the N side of the ap-
proach to Vagsfjorden, in a position 0.75 mile NW of Hovde-
neset Light.
Mehuken, in the NW part of Vagsoy, is 433m high and steep
5.20
on its N side.
Havfruskallen (62°03'N., 4°51'E.), a 4.5m shoal, lies 3.75
5.20
miles WNW of the NW extremity of Vagsoy.
Vessels making for the open sea S of Kraka can alter course
5.20
when Krakenes Light is open N of Skongenes Light and bear-
ing about 271°. The white sector of Skongenes Light, bearing
astern, leads between Torsflu and Noreskallen (62°03'N.,
4°52'E.), 2.75 miles WSW.
The white sector of this light, astern, leads between Kraka
5.20
and Melsfluene, and about 0.5 mile SW of Oddeskallane, a
12m depth, 2 miles NW of Kraka. When Svinoy, about 7 miles
NNE of the N end of Stadlandet, is open W of the NW extrem-
ity of Statdandet bearing about 030°, course should be altered
NNE.
5.21 Hellefjorden, a passage extending from seaward in a
SE direction to Indreleia and Floro, leads SE from the ap-
proach to Froysjoen. The islands of Aralden and Batalden lie
on the SW side of the seaward entrance to the fjord and Hov-
den lies on the NE side. Hellefjorden is about 7 miles in length
and 1.75 miles in width at its narrowest part.
On the N side of the approach to Froysjoen are many dan-
5.21
gers; some of them break. These dangers extend to a distance
of about 3 miles S, 8 miles W, and about 2.1 miles N of Froya.
Shoals also extend about 8 miles W of the entrance to
Hellefjorden, on the S side of the approach to Froysjoen.
From Aralden (61°41'N., 4°46'E.), the NW entrance point of
5.21
Hellefjorden, shoal water extends about 0.7 mile N; vessels
must keep well clear. A light, with a racon, is displayed from
the islet.
From the offing, vessels can stand in toward Frojsoen
5.21
through a deep channel clear of all dangers, with Skarekina, the
310m high hill on the NW end of Hovden, bearing 090°.
The white sector of Kvanhovden Light, close W of Skarekin-
5.21
na, leads from seaward through the fairway to within 1 mile of
the light.
5.22 The inner part of Hellefjorden is free from dangers in
the fairway except for Risholmflua (61°38'N., 4°53'E.), awash,
on the W side of the fairway about 3 miles NW of Stabben
Pub. 182
108 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
Light, and two shoals. The two shoals have least depths of 9.4
and 11m. They lie in the fairway about 1 and 2 miles SE, re-
spectively, from Risholmflua. An anchor berth, with a depth of
17m, lies 0.7 mile E of Risholmflua in position 61°38'N,
4°54'E.
To enter the N end of Hellefjorden, steer in the white sector
5.22
of Stabben Light. This course will lead close W of Dombesk-
jaerene Light, which is situated on the SW side of Hovden.
When near Stabben Light, steer S in the white sector of Nek-
5.22
koyosen Light and continue S into Indreleia or steer E in the
white sector of Floro Light and proceed to Floro.
Skarekinna (61°42'N., 4°51'E.) attains an elevation of 310m
5.22
on the NW part of Hovden. Hovden lies 1.25 miles NE of Bat-
alden; they are separated by Hellefjorden. Froya rises to a
height of 379m, 5.5 miles N of Skarekinna.
5.23 Froysjoen is a deep channel about 15 miles long and
not less than 1 mile wide. The tidal currents usually set E and
N with the rising tide and W and S with the falling tide. Froys-
joen may be entered from seaward or from the S through Indre-
leia.
The approach from the offing may be the same as that direct-
5.23
ed for Hellefjorden. When within 1 mile of Kvanhovden Light,
steer in a NE direction in the white sector of Smorhavn Light.
When within 1.5 miles of that light, steer a mid-channel course
in a NE direction.
The passage from Floro to Froysjoen through Hellefjorden is
5.23
the preferred track. However, a passage for vessels of moderate
size leads N through Naeroyfjorden, then into Froysjoen. The
channel through Naeroyfjorden, though more protected, is
much obstructed by shoals.
Naeroyfjorden lies between Sore Naeroy and Nordre Naeroy,
5.23
on the W side, and the mainland. The S entrance is about 2
miles NNE of Stabben Light.
Speed restrictions have been established in Naeroyfjorden.
5.23
Mariners are advised to contact the local authorities for details.
Vessels running for Naeroyfjorden from Floro alter course
5.23
N, after passing S of Floro Light and enter the white sector of
Arebrotsneset Light (61°38'N., 5°00'E.). This track will lead
W of Sandvoeret, 1.25 miles NW of Floro and Naeroyflua, a
6m shoal 0.5 mile WNW.
When NW of Sandvoeret, enter the white sector of Dragja-
5.23
skjaerflu Light (61°39'N., 4°59'E.) ahead, which leads be-
tween Nordre Naeroy and the dangers on the E side of the
fairway. A vessel may steer in the white sector of the light 1
mile N of Dragjas Kjaerflu Light. This also leads through the
channel and E of Dragjaskjaerflu Light. When NE of Dragjask-
jaerflu Light, alter course NW and bring that light astern show-
ing white.
This track leads E of Hollendarane (61°41'N., 4°56'E.),
5.23
awash, and Rognane, 1.5 miles farther N, and into the white
sector of Smorhavn Light; the track then leads into Froysjoen.
An anchorage, best seen on the chart, lies 0.8 miles E of
5.23
Rogname and 1.3 mile NE of Hollendarane, in depths from 11
to 52m. An anchor berth lies approximately 0.8 mile WNW of
Hollendarane in position 61°41.5'N, 4°54.6'E just off the E
coast of Hovden island.
Between Fiskholmen (61°46'N., 4°56'E.) and the entrance
5.23
to Berlepollen, 6.5 miles ENE, the fairway of Froysjoen is de-
fined by the white sector of Smorhavn Light, situated on the
Pub. 182
SW extremity of Fiskholmen, bearing between 240° and 332°,
astern, which marks the N shore. The S edge is marked by Ola-
skjaer Light (61°44'N., 4°57'E.).
When abeam the Berlepollen entrance, keep within the white
5.23
sector of Hornelen Light bearing between 061° and 078°,
ahead. When not less than 0.5 mile from Hornelen Light, alter
course to the E until in the white sector of Haukedalsholmen
Light (61°52'N., 5°16'E.), which leads between the E coast of
Bremangerlandet and Maroy, 0.5 mile E, and into the E en-
trance of Skatestraumen.
Skorperauva (61°46'N., 4°40'E.), a 6.5m shoal, lies at the
5.23
W end of several rocks and dangers extending WSW from
Froya. A 19m patch lies 1 mile W of this shoal; a depth of 24m
is charted 2.5 miles farther WSW.
Skorpefluene (61°55'N., 4°46'E.), the W rocks off the NW
5.23
side of Bremangerlandet, have a least depth of 5m, and are
sometimes marked by breakers.
Vetrungane (61°56'N., 4°49'E.), a group of rocks partly
5.23
above water, lies 1 mile NNW of Toytemulen. Fallet, covered
by a least depth of 2m, lies 0.6 mile N of Vetrungane.
Klovningen (61°56'N., 4°57'E.), an islet, 84m high, sur-
5.23
rounded by foul ground, lies just over 1 mile N of the N ex-
tremity of Bremangerlandet. Both Veststeinen and Klovningen
can be distinguished from a distance of 10 to 12 miles.
5.24 Maloy (61°56'N., 5°07'E.) (World Port Index No.
23125) also known as Maaloy, is situated on the SE side of
Vagsoy. It is a center of the fishing industry. There are several
quays in the harbor.
Depths—Limitations.—The Inter-Comtermnalen is the
main quay and includes two deep-sea berths. There is a local
traffic quay and facilities for ro-ro vessels. The fishing harbor
has a pier and a quay.
Vessel up to 22,300 dwt, 178.5m in length, 27.6m beam, and
5.24
8.2m draft can be accommodated in the port. For more berthing
information see table titled Maloy—Berth Information.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
5.24
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
Vessels should contact the Floro pilot station on VHF
5.24
channel 16 at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the station does
not respond, either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio
Station will reply and relay details to the pilot station.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Maloy—Con-
5.24
tact Information.
Maloy—Contact Information
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Telephone 47-57-852620
Facsimile 47-57-852621
E-mail post@nordfjord.havn.no
Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 30 to 40m, sand
5.24
and mud or rock, about 0.1 mile off the quays. Anchorage is
prohibited in the fairway E of a line joining Maloy North Light
and Goteberghamaren (61°57'N., 5°08'E.), a point 0.6 mile
N, and W of a line joining the N light on the E side of
Maloysundet to Trolleboflu Light.
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 109

Ulvesund, between Vagsoy and the mainland, leads N for 4

5.24 5.25 Ulven Light (61°58'N., 5°09'E.) is exhibited from a
miles to Sildegapet, and has few dangers. There is a speed limit pile of rocks in the center of Ulvesund, about 2 miles N of
of 10 knots in the central and N part of the channel. Maloy.

Maloy—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depths Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Domstein Fish AS, Raudeberg
Fishing vessels, breakbulk,
Cargo 150m — 95.5m — 16.3m 3,546 dwt bunkers, and reefer. 3,968 gt
and 163 teu.
Fiskerikaia Havneteminal
Ro-ro freight, fishing vessels,
Fishing Pier E 100m 10.0m 109m — 18.2m 6,519 dwt bunkers, and reefer. 5,084 gt
and 374 teu.
Ro-ro freight, fishing vessels,
Fishing Pier W 110m 10.0m 62.2m — 11.0m 1,150 dwt
and bunkers. 1,253 gt.
Ro-ro freight, fishing vessels,
No. 1 120m — 117.3m — — 6,693 dwt
and bunkers. 6,693 gt.
No. 2 80m — — — — — Fishing vessels and bunkers.
Intercom Terminal
Containers, bunkers, and
North No. 1 160m 9.0m 119.9m — 20.8m 4,900 dwt
breakbulk. 9,132 gt.
Ro-ro/lo-lo, containers, break-
North No. 2 67m 6.0m — — — —
bulk, and bunkers.
ro-ro freight, container, break-
South 127m 6.5m 119.9m — 20.8m 4,900 dwt
bulk, and bunkers.
Maaloy Seafood
Fishing, breakbulk, and bun-
Cargo 52m — — — — —
kers.
Maaloy Terminal
Ro-Ro 10m — — — — — Fast ferries and breakbulk.
Pelagia Maaloy
Trollebo N Ro-ro freight, container,
345m 10.0m 154.5m 8.2m 22.7m 8,843 dwt fishing, and bunkers.
12,251GT and 327TEU.
Trollebo S Fishing, breakbulk, and
100m 9.0m 77.2m — — 1,150 dwt
bunkers.
Brodene Tennebo ANS
Clean products, fast ferry, fish-
ing, breakbulk, multipurpose,
Multipurpose 57m — 115.5m — 16.9m 6,665 dwt bunkers, and reefer. Displace-
ment of 9,374t, 5,232 gt, and
348 teu.
Maaloy Havneserive AS
Clean products, ro-pax, fish-
Bunker 42m 8.5m 100m — — — ing vessels, multipurpose, and
bunkers.

Pub. 182
110 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund

Maloy—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depths Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Pelagia Maaloy Sildoljefabrikk
Breakbulk, bunkers, and multi-
Pelagi 70m — — — — —
purpose.

At Hagevik, 0.3 mile ESE of Ulven Light, there is a quay,

5.25 should be avoided.
with a depth of 6m alongside. On the opposite shore at In bad weather, northbound vessels should always stand out
5.26

Barstadvik is a quay, 110m long, with depths of 5 to 8m to sea through the channel between Kraka and the dangers off
alongside. Stadlandet.
There are lights, in range, which lead to Olvesund from the
5.25 From a position about 0.5 mile SW of Ulvesund Range
5.26

N. Light, vessels can steer about 021° until Ulvesund Range

The usual track of Indreleia is on either side of Trolleboflu,
5.25
then into the white sector of Ulven Light, passing on either side
of that light. When passing through Ulvesund, vessels keep
Lights, in line astern, lead between the fringing dangers on ei-
ther side of the fairway to the seaward channel N of Kraka.
This course passes about midway between Toren and Ytste-
5.26

about 91m from Trolleboflu and Ulven. North of Ulven the baan (62°09'N., 5°04'E.), with a depth of 5.5m, situated 1.25
shore should not be approached nearer than 183m. The dangers miles off Stadlandet. Ytstebaan breaks in bad weather.
and lights in Ulvesund are best seen on the chart. When W of Ytstebaan, about 1 mile distant, steer a N course
5.26

From Ulvesund, several channels lead through Sildegapet to

5.25 to pass W of Bukketjuvane (62°11'N., 5°04'E.) about 0.5 mile
the open sea. distant. Bukketjuvane is a partially submerged reef lying about
Seaward bound vessels in Sildegapet can pass through the
5.25 1 mile SW of the NW extremity of Stadlandet.
southernmost channel between Breidflu, a 10m bank about 2 Vessels can proceed N past Bukketjuvane until Dollstein, a
5.26

miles W of Skongenes Light (62°02'N., 5°08'E.), and Melsflu-
ene, 0.25 mile NE. Skongsnes Light is situated on the NE ex-
tremity of Vagsoy.
hill at the W end of Sandsoy, about 7 miles ENE of Stadlandet,
bears about 067°, when course can be altered NE for the N end
of Skorpa, to pass N of Stadlandet, then into Vanylvsgapet and
Indreleia.
Buholmen Light (62°10'N., 5°05'E.) is off the W side of
5.26

Stadlandet, on the SE islet.

Stadlandet to Alesund
5.27 The coast from Stadlandet (62°12'N., 5°08'E.) to
Alesund is indented by fjords and is fronted by many islands,
islets, and dangerous rocks. This section is about 25 miles long
and runs in an ENE direction. The appearance of the coast is
rugged, bare, and gray. The two main openings are Vanylvsga-
pet, on the NE side of Stadtlandet, and Breisunddjupet, NE of
Runde.
Runde (62°25'N., 5°35'E.) is a bare gray island, with a
5.27

height of 331m at Rundesundet, in the E, and 293m at Bran-

den, in the W. On the seaward side it is steep-to, except on the
5.25 Skongenes Light S where cultivated land is seen.
Rundesundet (Rundo Sund) lies between Runde and Ri-
5.27

Further N, vessels can pass through the channel between

5.25 moya, 0.5 mile S. The islands are connected by a causeway
Melsfluene, which has a least charted depth of 11m, and Kra- leading to a bridge in the S with a vertical clearance of 24m. A
ka, which is well above water. red light marks the N pillar of the bridge and a green light
It is reported that the channels S of Kraka should be used on-
5.25 marks the S pillar, with a 118m horizontal distance between
ly in fine or moderate weather. A 16m bank, which breaks in them; a white light marks the center of the bridge. Rundesund
heavy weather, lies NW of Kraka. Light stands on Saeviksteinen.
A broad channel leads N between Kraka and the shoals ex-
5.25 The summits of Sauehornet (62°14'N., 6°09'E.), 1,303m
5.27

tending SW from Stadlandet. Ramseflu, an 8.6m patch, lies at
the S extremity of these shoals, about 2 miles SSW of the SW
extremity of Stadlandet.
5.26 Torsflu (62°04'N., 4°57'E.), a small isolated bank
high, 28 miles E of Kjerringa, on Stadlandet, and Slogen,
1,564m high, 15 miles farther ESE, may be used in the ap-
proaches from seaward, and on the fishing grounds farther sea-
ward.
Statthavet (62°12'N., 5°06'E.) has long been known as an
5.27

with a charted depth of 13m, lies 2 miles NNW of Krakenes area with very severe weather, and many have identified the ar-
Light. This bank, which occasionally breaks in bad weather,

Pub. 182
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 111

ea as being dangerous.
It has been indicated that heavy sea is created particularly by
5.27
winds from SW to N. In these cases, the waves come straight in
sage between Svinoy and Skorpa should not be attempted with-
out local knowledge.
Skorpa (62°20'N., 5°30'E.) and Nerlandsoy, close NE and 4
5.28

from the ocean. The current in the passage has been estimated miles NE of Skorpa, respectively, stand out clearly from the
at between 2 and 4 knots, and when the ocean waves meet this background.
current, strong precipitous breakers are developed. Juklebaen (62°22'N., 5°24'E.), a 2m patch lying 4.25 miles
5.28

The swell becomes choppy.

5.27 ENE of Svinoy, usually breaks.
The passage near Haugsholmen and the shoal of Stzlrevet, as
5.27 Heroyfjorden lies between Sandoya and Gurskoya
5.28

well as several small shoal areas between these, have been
mentioned as areas with particularly heavy seas.
Vessels intending to pass in the vicinity of Stadlandet may
5.27
(62°15'N., 5°40'E.), on the S, and Skorpa, Nerlandsoy
(62°21'N., 5°33'E.), and Bergsoya (62°20'N., 6°38'E.).
Goldnes Light (62°22'N., 5°34'E.) is situated on the N ex-
5.28

request a 2-day wind/wave warning forecast. tremity of Nerlandsoy, 4.25 miles ENE of Juklebaen.
Vessels should supply the following information when mak-
5.27 Geitmaren, a 5m patch, lies 1.75 miles NNW of Goldnes
5.28

ing the request:
1. Vessel name.
2. Vessel type.
3. Area and time of passing.
4. Intended course (passing N or S, etc.).
5. Return address (complete with facsimile number).
The currents on this part of the coast, irrespective of the tide,
5.27
usually set in a NE direction and are known to have a velocity,
at times, of more than 1 knot. At a distance of 30 to 60 miles
Light. The sea occasionally breaks over it in quiet weather,
though seldom during calms or offshore winds.
5.29 Rundoy Light (62°25'N., 5°36'E.) is situated on the
NW extremity of Runde (Rundoy), 2.5 miles NNE of Goldnes
Light. Numerous dangers extend 1.75 miles ENE from a rock,
awash, 0.9 mile NW of Rundoy Light. Some of these dangers
are above water.
Langenes Light stands on the NE extremity of Runde. A line
5.29

from land, a vessel will be set to the NE.
Pilots cruise NE of Runde; vessels enroute to Alesund or
5.27
Bergen may embark a pilot here. During N gales, the pilot may
be forced to seek shelter at Nerlandsoy.
of rocks and islets extends from Treholmane, 0.6 mile E of
Langenes Light, to Grasholmen, 3 miles NE. The sea some-
times breaks over a spit, which extends 0.5 mile ENE from
Grasholmen and terminates in Breiflu, an 8m patch.
Grasoyane Light (62°26'N., 5°46'E.) stands on Grashol-
5.29

Stadlandet—Contact Information for men.

Wind/Wave Warning Forecast The channels through the dangers between Langenes Light
5.29

and Grasoyane Light are navigable only with local knowledge.

Vervarslinga Florauden Light (62°26'N., 5°50'E.) is situated on the cen-
5.29

Telephone 47-55236600 tral islet of Florauden, a group of islets lying 2 miles E of Gra-
sholmen. A racon is located at the light tower.
Facsimile 47-55236603
Maloy Harbor Office 5.30 Breisundet (62°27'N., 6°00'E.), between Hareidland-
et on the S and Godoya, gives access from the sea to Alesund
Telephone 47-57851278
and Indreleia. It is deep and clear of dangers except close in-
Facsimile 47-57850634 shore.
Svinoy Light Vessels entering Breisundet steer for a position 1.5 miles N
5.30

of Florauden; a mid-channel course will then lead to a position

47-70132544 0.7 mile NW of Eltraneset, the NW extremity of Sula.
Telephone
47-94662647 (mobile) Heissafjorden leads E from this position to Alesund.
5.30

Sulefjorden leads SE from the above position.

Facsimile 47-70132544 Hogsteinen Light (62°28'N., 6°02'E.) is situated off the SE
5.30

extremity of Godoya, on the NE side of Breisundet.

5.28 Sandsoy (62°15'N., 5°26'E.), lying 5.5 miles ENE of
Stadlandet, rises to a height of 370m. There is a height of
227m, shaped like a haystack, at the W end of the island. This
height is easily identified from SW or NW, but merges into the
background when viewed from the W.
Numerous dangers extend up to 2 miles W of Sandsoy. The
5.28
farthest NW of these dangers is Skjeggene (62°16'N., 5°20'E.),
5.31 Alesund (62°28'N., 6°10'E.) (World Port Index No.
23120), also known as Aalesund, is situated on the islands of
Norvoya, Heissa, and Aspoya. These islands are interconnect-
ed and are also connected to the mainland by fixed bridges.
The waters of Alesund Havn comprise the harbor at Alesund.
Alesund is a major commercial and fishing port. Products in-
5.31

a group of rocks with a least depth of 0.5m over its N end; they clude clothing and dairy products, as well as furniture and fish
are usually marked by breakers. products.
A group of shoals, with a least depth of 24m, lies about 3
5.28

miles W of Skjeggene. Alesund Port Authority Home Page

Svinoy (62°20'N., 5°16'E.), 6 miles W of Skorpa, is easily
5.28

identified by its remote position although it is comparatively http://www.alesund.havn.no

small. A light is shown from a tower 11m in height, standing
on the SE side of the island. Due to numerous dangers, the pas- 5.31 Depths—Limitations.—Berthing details are shown in the

Pub. 182
112 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund

accompanying table titled Alesund—Berth Information. A fixed bridge, with a navigable width of 50m and a vertical
5.31

The port area has mooring facilities for the lay-up of vessels
5.31 clearance of 17m, spans the channel. The port is open all the
of all sizes. Vessels up to 508,000 dwt can be accommodated at year.
lay up and 12.1m draft have been accommodated in the port. Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 500 gt
5.31

Vessels may, draft permitting, transit the channel which lies

5.31 and all vessels carrying dangerous cargo. Pilotage should be
between Aspoya and Heissa. There is a least depth of 5m in the ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the
channel, but depths of 4.2m are charted near the range line. Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.

Alesund—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Aaleund Havn
Ro/pax, breakbulk, bulk cargo,
Brunholm 90m 4.0m 91.5m — 14.0m 3,758 dwt general cargo and bunkers.
Mooring rescue vessels.
Sjogata 190m 8.0m 81.3m 16.0m 3,850 dwt Fishing, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Cruise, ro-ro/lo-lo, breakbulk, and
Skanse N 195m 10.0-13.0m 228m — 28.9m 11,407 dwt
bunkers.
Skanse S 110m 4-5m 65.8m — 13.8m 1,612 dwt Cruise, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Skanse W 60m 4-8m 230.6m — 29.2m 5,168 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
Celsa Group- Aalesund
Steel products, breakbulk, and
Verpingsvika 64m — 125.7m — 18.2m 9,653 dwt
bunkers.
Fjordlaks AS
Fjordlaks 66m — 67m — — — Fishing and breakbulk.
Flatholmen Havn
Flatholmen 1 50m 7.0m — — — —
Closed. Breakbulk.
Flatholmen 2 50m 7.0m — — — —
Flatholmen 3 42m 12.0m — — — — Closed. Ro-ro/lo-lo.
Containers, breakbulk, and
Flatholmen
— 12.0m 161.3m — 25.0m 16,986 dwt bunkers. Continuous berthing:
4/5
length of 330m.
Flatholmen 6 110m 12.0m 155m — — — Breakbulk and bunkers.
NCC Industry AS-Aalesund
No. 1 10m — 108m — 17.2m 4,995 dwt Sand, breakbulk, bunkers, stone,
No, 2 — — 68m — 10.8m 2,218 dwt and gravel.
Norma Norsk AS
Breakbulk, dry cargo, and
Norma Norsk 92m — 132m — 15.2m 6,460 dwt
bunkers.
Skutvitka Container Terminal
Ro-ro/lo-lo, project/heavy,
Pier N 150m 10.0-16.0m 115m — 16.8m 5,508 dwt
breakbulk, bunkers, and reefer.
Closed. ro-ro/lo-lo and project
Pier S 165m 10.0-16.0m 93m — — —
heavy.

Pub. 182
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 113

Alesund—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Ro-ro freight, containers, break-
bulk, bunkers, and reefer. Contin-
Skutvitka — 10.0-16.0m 138.5m — 21.7m 12,264 dwt uous berthing length of 203m.
Can berth two vessel simultane-
ously.
Stornespiren/Prestebrugga Cruise Terminal
Prestebrugga Cruise vessels, ro/pax, breakbulk,
205m 13.0-16.0m 315.7m — 35.8m 14,33 dwt
S and bunkers.
Stornes N 200m 10.0m — — — — Cruise vessels.
Stornes S 365m 12.0-16.0m 290m — 37.5m 14,601 dwt Cruise and bunkers.
Sunnmore Fiskeindustri AS
Containers, fishing vessels,
general cargo, breakbulk, and
Sunnmore 240m — 99.4m — 17.0m 4,418 dwt
bunkers. Used by fishing vessels
and waiting berth.
Larsgaarden Terminal
Chemicals, breakbulk, and multi-
purpose. Berthing length of 145m
West Bulk 60m 10.0m 200m 10.3m 26.0m 24,783 dwt
(incl. dolphins). Displacement:
51,592t.
Bunker Oil AS
Bunker 75m — 177m 12.1m 26.0m 24,853 dwt Clean products and bunkers.
Epax SA
Tanker 106m — 99.8m — 15.0m 4,570 dwt Liquid cargo.
Morebunkers AS
Bunker 25m — 58m — — — Clean products and bunkers.

When entering into or departing from the pilot boarding po-

5.31 1. Within the harbor area, powered vessels are not to ex-
sition in Breidsundet, vessels are requested to navigate inside ceed the minimum speed required for good seamanship and
the Recommended Fairway, bounded, as follows: maneuverability, or to proceed at such a speed as to cause
a. 62°31.8'N, 5°44.4'E. damage or danger to vessels or harbor installations from
b. 62°30.2'N, 5°45.8'E. wash.
c. 62°27.5'N, 5°55.1'E. 2. When near the entrance to Indre Havn or Steinvagsun-
d. 62°27.5'N, 5°57.2'E. det, a risk of collision exists between inbound and outbound
e. 62°26.5'N, 5°57.2'E. vessels, the inbound vessel must wait at a suitable distance
f. 62°26.5'N, 5°53.5'E. off the entrance until the outbound vessel is well clear of the
g. 62°29.5'N, 5°43.3'E. breakwater at Indre Havn or of the lights in Steinvagsundet.
h. 62°29.5'N, 5°38.2'E. 3. In Indre Havn, Skutevika, or Steinvagsundet, vessels
i. 62°31.8'N, 5°44.4'E. are not permitted to swing to their anchors, or to anchor in
Pilots board in Breidsundet, in position 62°27.0'N, 5°58.9'E,
5.31 such a way as to obstruct the harbor entrances or the ap-
weather permitting; by request, the pilot can also board in Bre- proaches to alongside berths.
idsunddjupet, in position 62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E. Vessels should advise Port Control of their ETA; the follow-
5.31

Vessels should call the pilot station 2 hours prior to arrival on

5.31 ing information should also be included:
VHF channel 16. If the station does not respond either the Ro- For the requirements for non-military vessels entering Nor-
5.31

galand or Floro Coastal Radio station will reply and relay de- wegian internal waters, see Pub. 180. Sailing Directions (Plan-
tails to the pilot station. ning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
The pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 16.
5.31 1. Vessel name.
Regulations.—Within the harbor area of Alesund, the fol-
5.31 2. Flag.
lowing regulations are in effect: 3. Port of registry.

Pub. 182
114 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund

5.31 By Markus Trienke [CC BY-SA 2.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0)], via Wikimedia Commons
5.31 Alesund Harbor

4. Call sign. Alesund Harbor—Contact Information

5. IMO number.
6. Gross tonnage, loa, actual draft, and maximum sum- 47-70-163410
Telephone
mer draft. 47-99-853400
7. Last port-of-call and next port-of-call.
8. Dangerous cargo information, if any. Port Authority
Signals.—Signals are exhibited at night, from signal masts
5.31 Telephone 47-70-163400
on Skanskaien and Storneskaien, using fixed red, green, and
Facsimile 47-70-163401
white lights to give berthing instructions and to indicate an ar-
riving vessel’s berth. Such signals should be acknowledged by E-mail havnevesenet@alesund.havn.no
a blast on the whistle. The berth signals are given in the accom-
panying table titled Alesund—Berth Signals. Indreleia and the Inner Fjords
By day a red flag is displayed at the berth allocated to the
5.31

vessel. 5.32 Indreleia is a navigable inner route and is, to some ex-
The general night signals are, as follows:
5.31
tent, protected by offshore islands. The route is continuous
1. Fixed red, green, and white—All berths occupied. from Fedje to Alesund. At times it extends to near the coast.
2. Flashing red—Continue into harbor. Sognefjorden, the continuation of Sognesjoen E from Rutle-
3. Flashing green—Anchor and await orders. tangen (61°05'N., 5°10'E.), is the longest and deepest fjord in
4. Flashing white—Close to hailing distance. Norway. The inner recesses of the fjord are more than 100
Contact Information.—See the table titled Alesund Har-
5.31
miles from the open sea, but in few places is it as much as 2.5
bor—Contact Information. miles wide. The mountains rise almost vertically from the wa-
ter’s edge in many places, and exceed an elevation of 1,800m
Alesund Harbor—Contact Information near Aurlandsfjorden, where their summits are always covered
with snow. There are numerous waterfalls and cascades, and
Port Control the scenery is grand, but somber.
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 The principal branches of Sognefjorden are Aurlandsfjorden
5.32

and Naeroyfjorden, on the S side; Fjaerlandsfjorden, Sogndals-

Pub. 182
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
fjorden, and Lustrafjorden, on the N side; and Ardalsfjorden,
an extension of Songnefjorden, at the E end.
The tidal currents in Sognefjorden usually set W and run
5.32
strongest along the N side; they are, however, irregular and
may be found setting W under one shore and E under the other.
In the middle of the entrance the current is rotary, counter-
5.32
clockwise, and weak; the spring rate in all directions is 0.25
knot.
There are few anchorages in Sognefjorden, but at the heads
5.32
of nearly all the branches there are banks formed by the deposit
from the various rivers that flow into it. These banks, consist-
ing generally of soft mud or sand, afford excellent holding
ground, but they are continually changing in shape and increas-
ing in size.
Sognefjorden is fringed with a number of towns, the most
5.32
important one being Ardal at the head of Ardalsfjorden.
5.33 Bofjorden (61°07'N., 5°20'E.), situated on the N side
of Sognefjorden, close within its W entrance, affords anchor-
age to vessels of moderate size. Vessels anchor 0.25 mile NNE
of the light, in 30 to 40m, good holding ground. An iron perch,
reported 0.15 mile WNW of the light structure, marks a rock
off the E edge of a bank. A light is exhibited from a rock 0.2
mile N of the anchorage.
A marine farm is situated 0.7 mile WSW of Bofjord Light.
5.33
There are other marine farms situated 0.85 mile SSE and 2
miles SSE of the same light.
Risnefjord provides good anchorage for moderate size ves-
5.33
sels off the W shore, 0.5 mile S of Ortneset. Vessels anchoring
in Risnefjord should avoid a submarine cable crossing the
fjord. A marine farm is located in position 61°00.6'N, 5°28.4'E.
A bay at Vikum (61°10'N., 5°43'E.), on the N side of
5.33
Sognefjorden about 22 miles E of Bofjorden, is one of the bet-
ter harbors for vessels of moderate size in this fjord.
Vessels anchor in the N part of the bay, in about 30 to 40m,
5.33
clay. There is a quay in the bay, with depths of 4 to 5m along-
side.
Hoyanger (61°13'N., 6°04'E.), situated at the head of Hoy-
5.33
angsfjorden, 10.5 miles ENE of Vikum, is an industrial town
and an administrative center. There is a mooring buoy off the
largest quay, which has a least depth of 8m alongside.
Depths—Limitations.—The port can accommodate vessels
with a maximum draft of 10.7m draft. Hydro Aluminum Berth,
located at Hydro Aluminum Hoyanger. Hydro, is 220m in
length and has a depth of 12m alongside. The berth can handle
vessels with a draft of 10.7m. The cargo handled is aluminum
and breakbulk.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
5.33
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. For further
information, see paragraph 5.1.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Hoyanger—
5.33
Contact Information.
Hoyanger—Contact Information
VHF VHF channels 6, 9, and 16
Telephone 47-57-715287
Facsimile 47-57-715377
115
5.34 Ardal (61°14'N., 7°43'E.) (World Port Index No.
23136) is a coastal harbor situated at the NE extremity of Ar-
dalsfjorden. This ice-free port is directed by the Bergen Cus-
toms District.
There are a number of quays in the port. Quay I is 220m long
and has a depth of 9.25m alongside. Quay II is 100m long and
has 11.5m alongside. The largest vessel that can be accommo-
dated is 220m long with a 9.6m draft.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
5.34
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. For further
information, see paragraph 5.1.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Ardal—Con-
5.34
tact Information.
Ardal—Contact Information
VHF VHF channels 6, 9, and 16
Telephone 47-57-715287
Facsimile 47-57-715377
Directions.—Vessels, when in transit of Rekstafjorden from
5.34
the WSW, may, when within 0.75 mile of Sandoya Light
(61°33'N., 4°46'E.), alter course to the E to pass 0.25 mile S of
that light.
When E of Sandoya Light, steer in its white sector, astern,
5.34
and continue to the E end of Rekstafjorden and enter the white
sector of Nekkoyosen Light, as directed above, which leads in-
to Nekkoyosen.
5.35 The better Indrelia track for large vessels passes from
the E end of Sognesjoen, and then turns abruptly N leading
through Krakhellesund between the islands of Sula, on the W,
and Losna.
Klauva Light (61°07'N., 5°02'E.) is situated on the SW ex-
5.35
tremity of Losna and on the E side of the S entrance to Kra-
khellesund.
A light is situated on the W side of Losna, about 2 miles
5.35
NNW of Klauva. A light is situated on a rock on the W side of
Krakhellesund, 0.5 mile farther NNW.
The channel of Krakhellesund, about 5 miles long, is free of
5.35
dangers in the fairway, except for a rocky patch lying 183m
SSE of the salient point on the W side of the S entrance and a
reef lying close off the rock marked by a light about 2 miles N.
The tidal currents in the channel nearly always set N.
Klauva Light, showing white, leads N from Sognesjoen into
5.35
the entrance of Krakhellesund. The white sector of the light sit-
uated on the rock on the W side of the channel leads through
the fairway of the S part of the channel.
After passing E of this light, vessels can keep in the white
5.35
sector of the light, astern, which will lead W of the island Skor-
pa then into Afjorden.
Losneosen, between the E side of Losna and the mainland,
5.35
connects Sognesjoen and Sognefjorden with Krakhellesund
through Tollesund, which separates Losna from Skorpa. Los-
neosen connects with Afjorden through Storakersundet E of
Skorpa.
These channels are deep and free of dangers. An overhead
5.35
cable, with a vertical clearance of 70m, crosses the SE end of
Pub. 182
116 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
Tollesund.
Afjorden trends about 6 miles ESE from its confluence with
5.35
Storakersundet, and branches into Hylestadfjorden and
Sorfjorden, at its head.
5.36 Sakrisskjer (61°14'N., 4°57'E.) is the NW entrance
point of Afjorden. From the W end of Afjorden the track of In-
drelia takes a N direction past the W sides of the islands
Sakrisoy and Lutelandet, and Lammetu. From the W end of
Vilnesfjorden the direction is E through that channel to the W
end of Dalsfjorden, then N into Granesundet. A light is situated
on Sakrisskjer.
Midtfjordskjer (61°16'N., 4°54'E.), marked by a light, is
5.36
situated in the S entrance to Vilnesfjorden, 3 miles NNW of the
light on Sakrisskjer. Araldeflu is a 4m patch 0.25 mile N of
Midtfjordskjer.
Morpolsa, a rock, awash, is situated at the extremity of the
5.36
foul ground extending W from Lammetu. It lies about 0.7 mile
ENE of the light on Midtfjordskjer.
Ytste Taren (61°17'N., 4°55'E.), a 5m shoal, lies 0.3 mile N
5.36
of Morpolsa.
Vessels enroute from Krakhellesund to Vilnesfjorden can
5.36
keep in the white sector of the light on Sakrisskjer until about 1
mile from the light. Vessels may then steer W to pass S of the
light and then enter the white sector of the light on Raudoy.
This sector will lead W of Morpolsa and E of Midtfjordskjer,
into the SW entrance Vilnesfjorden.
5.37 Vilnesfjorden is a broad channel which extends about
4 miles E from the light on Raudoy.
Haskallen (61°18'N., 4°57'E.), with a least depth of 14m,
5.37
lies in the fairway just over 1 mile ESE of Raudoy Light, and
close S of the dangers E of Raudoy.
Einingsflu, lying on the S side of the fairway 1 mile SSE of
5.37
Haskallen, has a depth of 2.3m.
Mokalasset (61°18'N., 5°01'E.), a reef, awash, is situated on
5.37
the N side of the fairway, about 1 mile W of Vilnesfjorden
Light. There is an 11m patch 0.25 mile SW of the beacon situ-
ated on Mokalasset. Several rocks and shoals lie between
Mokalasset and Atloy.
Vilnesfjorden Light (61°18'N., 5°04'E.) is situated on the S
5.37
side of the E end of Vilnesfjorden.
Vessels in transit of Vilnesfjorden from W to E may steer in
5.37
the white sector of Vilnesfjorden Light to within 0.5 mile of the
light. Haskallen lies in this sector. The white sector of Lan-
genes Light, 1.25 miles NNE of Vilnesfjorden Light, leads S of
Flatoyflu, then into the white sector of Vilnesfjorden Light,
astern, which leads to the S entrance of Granesundet.
Dalsfjorden continues ENE from Vilnesfjorden for 17 miles
5.37
to the vicinity of Bogstad.
5.38 Granesundet, separating the E side of the island Atloy
from the mainland, is about 4 miles long and has a least width
of 0.25 mile. It is nearly free of danger in the fairway.
Flatoyflu (61°19'N., 5°03'E.), awash, lies 0.3 mile S of
5.38
Flatoy in the SW approach to Granesundet. It is marked by two
iron perches.
Flatoy, an islet at the S end of Granesundet, lies on the W
5.38
side of the entrance 1 mile N of Vilnesfjorden Light. The islet
is surrounded by a shore reef to a distance of about 0.1 mile
Pub. 182
Langenes Light is situated about 0.8 mile E of Flatoy; anoth-
5.38
er light is situated on the SW side of Prestoy, 0.45 mile NNE of
Flatoy. Both of these lights are on the E shore of Granesundet.
A depth of 9.5m lies nearly in mid-channel about 0.3 mile
5.38
WNW of Langenes Light. A 12m patch lies 0.15 mile WSW of
the light on Prestoy.
Englandsflu is a 4m patch situated on the W side of the fair-
5.38
way, 0.8 mile NW of the light on Prestoy.
Granebaen (61°23'N., 5°01'E.), a 3.5m shoal, lies on the W
5.38
side of the fairway in the N entrance to Granesundet.
A light is exhibited on Trettenes, on the E side of the N end
5.38
of Granesundet.
Vessels entering Granesundet should keep in the white sector
5.38
of Vilnesfjorden Light, astern, until it intersects the white sec-
tor of the light on the W side of Prestoy, which will lead be-
tween the dangers in the S entrance of Granesundet. Alter
course to the NNW when the white sector of Langenes Light,
astern, bears between 118° and 122°. Continue in this sector
until the white sector of the light on Trettenes bears between
350° and 356.5°. Alter course to the N to keep in this sector
which leads through the fairway of Granesundet, into the white
sector of the light on Prestoy, bearing astern, which leads be-
tween Trettenes and Granebaen.
The white sector of Trettenes Light, bearing astern, leads to-
5.38
ward Stavfjorden.
An alternate route from the W end of Vilnesfjorden to
Stavenes Light, is to pass through Aldefjorden, W of the island
of Tvibyrgje and Tussen Light and then to the E on the S side
of Heggoyane.
Aldefjorden, the passage between Alden and Tvibyrgje, is
5.38
situated on the E and S sides, respectively, of these islands.
5.39 Midfjordflu (61°19'N., 4°49'E.), a 10m patch, lies 0.8
mile SW of the SW point of Tvibyrgje. Senholmtaren, an un-
marked 4m shoal, lies about 0.6 mile ESE of Midfjordflu and an
8m patch marked by a buoy lies 0.5 mile N of Midfjordflu.
There are other dangers in Aldefjorden which may best be
5.39
seen on the chart.
Alden is saddle-shaped and rises to a height of 480m in its E
5.39
part. Tvibyrgje lies about 1 mile NE of Alden and about 0.5
mile W of Atloy. The island resembles two haycocks; the one
farthest W is 192m high.
Tussen (61°23'N., 4°50'E.) lies 1 mile N of Tvibyrgje. It is
5.39
marked by a light and a beacon. A reef projects about 183m
NW from Tussen; a 14m bank lies 0.3 mile W of the light.
Heggoyosen is the channel between Heggoyane on the N and
5.39
Atloy on the S.A light is shown from the S extremity of Heg-
goyane, in a position about 3 miles ENE of Tussen.
A light is shown from the NW extremity of Raudoy, an is-
5.39
land lying 1 mile E of Heggoyane, and on the W side of the N
entrance of Granesundet.
5.40 Vessels from the S desiring to pass through the W part
of Vilnesfjorden then into Aldefjorden may do so by keeping in
the white sector of the light on Raudoy (61°18'N., 4°55'E.) as
previously suggested, until within 0.5 mile of that light, when
course should be changed to the NW.
With the white sector of the light on Raudoy, astern, proceed
5.40
until within the white sector of the light on Geita. Navigate
with Geita Light, astern, which leads W of Midfjordflu and the
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
8m patch 0.5 mile N of it, until abeam of Tussen, about 1 mile
distant. A 14m depth is charted 1.25 miles W of Tussen Light.
To enter Heggoyosen from the white sector of Geita Light,
5.40
steer in the white sector of the light on Raudoy, passing no less
than 0.25 mile N of Tussen Light. When the white sector of
Stavenes Light bears between 017° and 032°, steer in that sec-
tor to clear the dangers N of Raudoy and E of Heggoyane. This
course will join the track leading NNW from the N entrance of
Granesundet.
Kjerringholmen (61°24'N., 4°58'E.), an islet 19m high, lies
5.40
W of the fairway leading NNW from Granesundet and E of the
fairway leading NNE from Heggoyosen, in a position 0.45
mile N of Raudoy. The islet is surrounded by shoal water to a
distance of 183m. Melsholmen, an islet 21m high, lies 0.6 mile
NW of Kjerringholmen.
Stavenes Light (61°25'N., 4°59'E.) is situated on an islet on
5.40
the E side of Indreleia, in a position 1.75 miles NNE of the
light on Raudoy.
From Stavenes Light, the main track leads across
5.40
Stavfjorden between Baane (61°29'N., 4°59'E.) and Trefotsk-
jeret, about 0.6 mile E; it then leads between Askrova Light, on
the E end of the island Askrova, and Leieskjera, about 0.1 mile
SSE.
This narrow passage has a least charted depth of 14m and
5.40
should be navigated with caution.
5.41 Folvagfluene (61°25'N., 4°58'E.) is a group of rocks,
awash, which lies on the W side of Indreleia, 0.5 mile SW of
Stavenes Light. Faneskjera, above water, lies on the same side
of the track, within 0.25 mile N of Folvagfluene.
Ryggene, reefs marked at their E end by a buoy, are situated
5.41
0.75 mile NNW of Stavenes Light.
The white sector of Stavenes Light, bearing astern, leads
5.41
across Stavfjorden from a position E of Ryggene; the white
sector of Askrova Light (61°31'N., 5°00'E.) then leads
through the fairway E of Baane. An 11.5m patch lies on the E
limit of this sector 0.2 mile WSW of Trefotskjeret.
When within 0.2 mile of the light, alter course NNE to pass
5.41
between it and Leieskjera, and then into Brufjorden.
Oddane (61°33'N., 5°00'E.) is marked on its E extremity by
5.41
a light. A marine farm and submarine cable are located NE of
Oddane. Andalsskjera, 1.25 miles NE of Oddane, is marked by
a light.
5.42 To continue across Brufjorden, from a position close
E of the light on Askrova, steer N with the white sector of this
light bearing more than 179°, astern, and keep the light on An-
dalsskjera ahead, which leads E of Oddane.
When entering the white sector of Nekkoyosen Light
5.42
(61°35'N., 4°57'E.), alter course NW to keep in this sector,
which leads NE of Oddane and out of Brufjorden to the en-
trance of Nekkoyosen.
Nekkoyosen, a continuation of Indreleia, is entered between
5.42
Sore Nekkoya and Nordre Nekkoya (61°35'N., 4°56'E.), on
the W side, and Faeroya and Faeroykalven, on the E side.
Mortingbaen, 1 mile NNE of Nekkoyosen Light, is marked
5.42
by a light. It lies on the E side of the channel. Annoyholmbaen,
with depths of 2m or less, lies on the W side of the fairway 0.3
mile SW of the light on Mortingbaen.
Stabben Light (61°36'N., 4°57'E.) is situated on the E end
5.42
117
of foul ground, in a position just over 1 mile NNE of Nekkoyo-
sen Light. There is a least depth of 3.4m on the foul ground
WSW of the light.
Grasskjeret Light is situated on the W part of a reef, about
5.42
0.3 mile ENE of Stabben Light.
5.43 Floro Light (61°36'N., 5°01'E.) is situated on the N
side of the channel, 1.25 miles E of Grasskjeret Light. A 6m
patch lies 183m W of the light.
Vessels en route through Nekkoyosen to Floro keep Stabben
5.43
light structure bearing about 005°, which leads between Nordre
Nekkoya and Faeroya. Enter the white sector of Nekkoyosen
Light, astern, which will lead W of Mortingbaen.
When NW of the light on Mortingbaen, enter the white sec-
5.43
tor of Floro Light. When within 0.35 mile of Floro Light, steer
a mid-channel course between the light and the shoal water
about 183m to the S. This course will lead into Floro.
An alternate track from Nekkoyosen for approaching Floro
5.43
is with the white sector of Nekkoyosen Light bearing astern. It
leads between Mortingbaen and Svartskjeret, marked by a bea-
con, which is situated 0.3 mile E of the light on Mortingbaen,
into the white sector of Grasskjeret Light, then into the white
sector of Floro Light as indicated above.
Froysjoen
5.44 Vessels may approach Fafjorden and Vagsfjorden by
keeping in the white sector of Hovdeneset Light (61°56'N.,
5°01'E.), which leads N of Skorpefluene, Bataldfluene, and
Veststeinen, and S of Toytemulen and Seiabaane to within
about 3 miles of the light.
Vessels heading for Fafjorden then enter the white sector of
5.44
Kvitnes Light, which leads to the white sector of Fafjorden
Light. Enter the white sector of Fafjorden Light ahead, which
leads into Fafjorden.
Vessels approaching from the NW may keep the summit of
5.44
Ronelden (61°55'N., 5°01'E.), a steep conical hill 321m high,
in line with the summit of Klovningen, bearing 115°, which
passes NE of Fallet and SW of Harfluene and Norefluene.
When E of Fallet, steer in the white sector of Kvitnes Light
5.44
and proceed as directed above.
Vessels approaching the entrance from the N should keep
5.44
Hornelen, the 889m hill on the E end of Bremangerlandet,
bearing about 124°. When N of Klovningen, alter course S and
enter the white sector of Fafjorden Light.
Care must be taken to avoid Jokkulflu, an 11m depth, 0.7
5.44
mile NNE of Klovningen.
Alternative routes lead, respectively, N and S of Jokkulflu
5.44
and then between Basundskjere and Svarteskjera.
5.45 Fafjorden, a narrow inlet, is the farthest S of two sea-
ward entrances to Nordfjorden. It leads between Bremanger-
landet and Husevagoy and connects with Vagsfjorden by a
shallow channel at the E end of Husevagoy. Farther E is the
channel that leads N from Froysjoen.
Ribba (61°54'N., 5°00'E.), awash, lies on the W side of the
5.45
fairway 0.6 mile WSW of Kvitnes Light; between this danger
and the shore to the S are some above and below-water rocks.
Spenfluene, situated on the N side of the fairway 0.4 mile S
5.45
of Kvitnes Light, consists of a group of sunken rocks, awash, at
Pub. 182
118 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
their E end.
To transit Fafjorden, keep the white sector of Fafjorden Light
5.45
ahead, which leads between the dangers of Ribba and Spenflu-
ene. When about 0.3 mile distant from Fafjorden Light, steer a
mid-channel course in an ESE direction and pass on either side
of Bjornoy, an island 2.5 miles ESE of Fafjorden Light. The
white sector of Skaten Light (61°52'N., 5°13'E.) leads through
the fairway N of Bjornoy; another white sector of the light
leads S of Bjornoy.
Approach to Vagsfjorden
5.46 When E of Bjornoy, a vessel may continue E and join
Indreleia and proceed through Skatestraumen or proceed N to
Nordfjorden by passing between the islands of Gangsoy and
Risoy. When vessels pass between these two islands, they
should keep in mid-channel, favoring the W side of Risoy,
which is steep-to.
Vagsfjorden leads between Husevagoy and Vagsoy into the
5.46
W end of Nordfjorden. It also is the S entrance to Maloy, a port
on the SE side of Vagsoy.
Gasholmen (61°55'N., 5°06'E.), a reef-fringed islet, lies on
5.46
the S side of the fairway in a position about 3 miles ESE of Ho-
vdeneset Light. An unmarked patch, with a least charted depth
of 6m, lies on the N side of the channel 0.5 mile NE of Gashol-
men.
Bergsholmane Light is situated on the N side of the channel,
5.46
0.9 mile E of Hovdeneset.
Vessels that have approached Vagsfjorden from the W with
5.46
the white sector of Hovdeneset Light ahead steer in the white
sector of Bergsholmane Light, which leads to within 0.5 mile
of that light.
The white sector of Hovdeneset Light, astern, and the white
5.46
sector of Bergsholmane Light, astern, lead N of Gasholmen in-
to Indreleia, which leads SE, passing E of Gangsoy, and con-
tinues N and, E of Vagsoy through Ulvesund.
Nordfjorden
5.47 Nordfjorden, entered N of Risoy, is approached from
seaward through Fafjorden or Vagsfjorden. It extends E of
Risoy for a distance of about 50 miles under various names.
The main fjord has several branches, most of them extending S,
that provide several anchorage areas.
At the seaward end of Nordfjorden, the shores are barren and
5.47
rugged, but farther inland there is often a narrow coastal ter-
race, with scattered farms and forest. The fjord is deep and
practically free from dangers.
The first reach of Nordfjorden extends to the vicinity of As-
5.47
neset, situated 8 miles ENE of Risoy.
Allmenningsfluene (61°54'N., 5°16'E.), marked by a light,
5.47
is situated on the N side of the fairway in a position 2.5 miles
ENE of Risoy. These rocks are covered by less than 1.8m of
water.
Skorpeholmane, a chain of islets and rocks, lies on the S side
5.47
of the fairway, 1 mile ENE of Risoy. Etreskallen, with a least
depth of 5.5m, lies on the S side of the fairway, 0.6 mile S of
Allmenningsfluene.
A light is situated on Asneset (61°56'N., 5°28'E.). Good an-
5.47
chorage with sand bottom can be obtained near the head of the
Pub. 182
bay at Maurstad, 0.7 mile N of Asneset. Care must be taken to
avoid a 6m shoal 0.8 mile NW of the light on Asneset.
5.48 From Asneset, Nordfjorden continues ESE for 19
miles to Anda (61°51'N., 6°05'E.).
Davika, on the S side of the fjord, is entered 2.75 miles SE of
5.48
Asneset. It affords good anchorage, in depths up to 26m, sand
and stones.
Eidsfjorden extends 7 miles E from Davikfjorden. Winds
5.48
from W raise a considerable sea in this branch.
Anchorage, with sand bottom, can be obtained in a cove W
5.48
of the river mouth at Starheim, on the N side of Eidsfjorden, 2
miles within the entrance. At Starheim, there is a quay, with
depths of 4 to 6m alongside.
Nordfjordeid (61°54'N., 5°59'E.), at the head of Eids-
5.48
fjorden, is an industrial and administrative town.
Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 350m in length can
5.48
be accommodated at the port.
SeaWalk Pier 1, located at SeaWalk Nordfjord Terminal, has
5.48
a length of 220m, including dolphins, and can handle vessels
with a maximum length of 350m.
Cruise vessels tie up to two mooring buoys. Passengers dis-
5.48
embark from cruise vessels by an extending floating pier. The
cruise ship has to be moored toward the shore at a course of
111 degree.
Isefjorden, a continuation of Nordfjorden, is entered 7.5
5.48
miles ESE of Asneset; it extends 3 miles SE.
Anchorage.—Anchorage, with a bottom of mud, can be ob-
5.48
tained 0.3 miles SW of the head of the mole. A submarine ca-
ble lies close N of the anchorage. There are depths of 5 to 7m
alongside the quay situated inside the N end of the mole.
Two sets of mooring buoys, best seen on the chart, lie in the
5.48
anchorage area and closer to shore close NNW of the Nodre
Terminal quay.
Alfoten, entered S of Hjelteneset (61°51'N., 5°47'E.), ex-
5.48
tends 4.5 miles WSW from the main fjord; its head ices over.
Hundvikfjorden, the continuation E from Isefjorden, is en-
5.48
tered between Hjelteneset and Krokeneset, 0.8 mile ENE.
At Yksenelvane, on the S side of this reach 1 mile S of Kro-
5.48
keneset, the larger of two quays has depths of 9 to 14m along-
side.
Hyen, entered E of Hyenese (61°51'N., 5°59'E.), extends 7
5.48
miles SSW from Hundvikfjorden.
Gloppen, entered W of Anda, branches SE from Hundvik-
5.48
fjorden for 6 miles. The head of Gloppen affords spacious an-
chorage, in depths of 20 to 50m. Care should be taken to not
anchor near the submarine cables E of this berth.
Ufjorden, the continuation of Nordfjorden E from Hundvik-
5.48
fjorden, is entered N of Anda.
Innvikefjorden, the next reach E of Utfjorden, affords an-
5.48
chorage off Innvik (61°51'N., 6°37'E.), in depths of 30 to 40m.
A quay at this village has depths of 5 to 6m alongside.
Faleidfjorden, the last reach of Nordfjorden, is entered
5.48
about 2 miles NW of Innvik, and extends 7 miles E to its head.
Good anchorage can be obtained about 0.6 mile N of the
5.48
church at Olden (61°50'N., 6°49'E.), in 50 to 60m, clay.
Off Loen, the village at the head of the bay, there is good an-
5.48
chorage, in 15 to 20m, sand and clay.
5.49 Skatestraumen, the continuation of Indreleia from
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
Froysjoen, leads between the SW side of Rugsundoy and Bre-
mangerlandet to Fafjorden; it is about 3 miles in length in an E-
W direction.
Hornelsflua (61°52'N., 5°16'E.), on the N side of the fair-
5.49
way 0.25 mile WSW of Haukedalsholmane, has a least charted
depth of 1m.
Kalveholmen Light is situated on the N side of the fairway, 1
5.49
mile WNW of Hornelsflua; Skaten Light is situated 0.3 mile
farther W. Shrukken, a rock, lies 183m SE of Skaten Light.
A light is situated on the SW extremity of Risoy, a little over
5.49
1 mile WNW of Skaten.
In Skatestraumen, the current is usually W during the falling
5.49
tide, with a rate up to 3 or 4 knots, and Eduring the rising tide,
with a rate of 2 knots. Current conditions are irregular, as wind
and weather can greatly influence both direction and rate.
Vessels may enter Skatestraumen from the S by steering in
5.49
the white sector of Kalveholmen Light, then steering in the
white sector of Skaten Light until SW of Kalveholmen Light.
Then steer to pass N of Skaten in the white sector of Risoy
Light or in the white sector of Kalveholmen Light, astern; this
leads N of a 7.5m patch close ENE of Skaten. The white sector
of Risoy Light leads over this patch.
After passing N of Skaten, bring the white sector of this light
5.49
astern; this leads S of Bjornoy into Fafjorden. Another sector
of this light, bearing astern, leads into the white sector of the
light on the E end of Gangsoy. This light ahead leads to the
fairway between Gangsoy and Risoy.
After passing Risoy, the track leads W into Vagsfjorden and
5.49
then N through Maloysundet, the entrance to Ulvesund. The
5.50 Vartdalsfjorden
119
channel of Indreleia lies on the E side of the island of Maloy.
5.50 After passing between Risoy and Gangsoy, steer for
Vemmelsvikholmen (61°54'N., 5°10'E.) until Gasholmen
bears 305°, when course may be altered toward that island to
bring the light on Gangsoy astern, which leads between Gas-
holmen and the unmarked patch on the N side of the channel.
Vessels then continue NW in the white sector of Bergsholmane
Light.
Kariskjer Light (61°55'N., 5°07'E.) is situated on a point
5.50
0.75 mile NNE of Gasholmen.
A light is situated on the S extremity of Maloy, 0.45 mile
5.50
NNW of Kariskjer Light.
Maloysundet is the channel between the island of Maloy and
5.50
the mainland and is the approach, from S, to the port of Maloy.
Maloysundet is spanned by a bridge, and is divided into two
5.50
separate channels by the central pillar. The W passage has a
vertical clearance of 42m over a width of 23m, or of 40m over
a width of 76m. The E passage has a vertical clearance of 41m
over a width of 50m. The W channel has a least charted depth
of 10.5m and the E channel has a least charted depth of 7m.
Lights are exhibited on both sides of the bridge to indicate
5.50
the center of each passage.
The flow in Maloysundet usually sets N on both the flood
5.50
and ebb. The strongest rate is about 1 hour before HW. During
springs, with a S wind, the rate is reported to reach 3 knots.
Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards off Homengra
5.50
(60°51'N., 4°37'E.) or Breisundet (62°27'N., 5°59'E.)
Pub. 182
120 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
Between Maloysundet and Leistholmen, there is a speed
5.50
limit of 6 knots, but larger vessels may proceed at 8 knots to
improve steering if wind and current conditions make this
speed necessary. In Maloysundet itself, vessels may adjust
speed as necessary for safe steering.
Stalrevet, 0.6 mile N of the N extremity of Stadlandet has a
5.50
least charted depth of 29m. It breaks in heavy weather to a dis-
tant of 1.25 miles ESE, which is an area of foul ground.
Barskallen, about 1 mile WSW of Kvamsoy, has a least
5.50
depth of 28m. Svarteskjaer (62°11'N., 5°21'E.), a reef above
and below water, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Haugsholmen
Light, on the NE side of the channel.
When making Vanylvsgapet from W or NW, pass N of Stal-
5.50
revet and enter the white sector of Haugsholmen Light ahead.
When about 0.3 mile NW of Svarteskjaer, steer S to pass about
midway between Haugsholmen Light and the islets off the NE
side of Stadlandet.
The white sector of Terneskjerflu Light (62°11'N., 5°24'E.)
5.50
leads into the channel between Storholmen and Haugsholmen.
When the two lights marking the W end of the channel are
abeam, course may be adjusted to pass clear N of Terneskjerflu
Light, then into Haugsfjorden.
Anchorage, in depths of 11 to 25m, is charted 0.35 mile
5.50
WNW of Terneskjerflu Light.
5.51 Haugsfjorden is formed between Stadlandet, Storhol-
men, Kvamsoy, and Haugsholmen, on the W and NW sides,
and by the mainland, on the E side.
Ytsteflu (62°12'N., 5°27'E.), awash, lies about 0.3 mile off-
5.51
shore, 1.75 miles NE of Terneskjerflu Light.
Aramsund Light (62°12'N., 5°29'E.) is situated 2.75 miles
5.51
NE of Terneskjerflu Light, in the W entrance to Aramsundet.
The white sector of this light leads from a position close N of
Terneskjerflu Light, across the N end of Haugsfjorden and N of
Ytsteflu. Two 10m patches lie in this white sector.
Aramsundet leads from Haugsfjorden E to Rovdefjorden.
5.51
The channel is marked by Aramsund Light, at the W en-
5.51
trance; Stabbane Light, in the E entrance; and a third light
about midway between these two.
To enter Aramsundet, vessels, after passing Ytsteflu, should
5.51
steer to pass S of the 6.5m shoal lying about 0.4 mile WNW of
Aramsund Light, then between this light and the wreck and 9m
depth 0.15 mile NE. Then course may be shaped to pass W and
S of Stabbane Light. Larger vessels may pass N of the iron
perch 183m NW of Stabbane Light and S of Raedene, a reef
awash, 0.15 mile N of the light. This track leads over a 7.5m
depth.
Rovdefjorden extends about 3 miles SE from Stabbane Light
5.51
to Saudeholmen Light (62°11'N., 5°36'E.), then ENE to the
entrance to Voldsfjorden. Vartdalsfjorden is the NE extension
of Rovdefjorden.
5.52 Rovdeskjeret Light (62°11'N., 5°45'E.) is situated on
the S side of Rovdefjorden, 3.75 miles E of Saudeholmen
Light. There are a number of dangers in the vicinity of this
light.
There is anchorage available off Knarrdal, Little Rovde, and
5.52
Sundnesbogen, which lie 0.4 mile E, 0.9 mile E, and 1.5 miles
ENE, respectively, from Rovdeskjeret Light, in depths up to
33m, sand. When approaching these anchorages from the W, it
Pub. 182
is advisable to keep well N of the dangers in the vicinity of Ro-
vdeskjeret Light.
Vessels may keep Stabbane Light astern, which leads into
5.52
the W part of Rovdefjorden. Pass S of Saudeholmen Light,
then steer ENE with the white sector of that light bearing
astern. Vessels may continue E, with the white sector of Ys-
noya Light bearing ahead.
When about 2 miles WSW of Ysonya Light, alter course to
5.52
the E, then steer NNE to pass between Ysonya Light and the
dangers 1 mile E, and enter Vartdalsfjorden.
Syvdsfjorden extends 6 miles SSE from Rovdefjorden in a
5.52
position 1.5 miles SE of Saudeholmen Light.
5.53 Voldsfjorden (62°12'N., 5°56'E.) extends 9.25 miles
SSE from its entrance at the E end of Rovdefjorden. Its two in-
ner arms, Dalsfjorden and Austefjorden, are deep and clear of
dangers.
An ammunition dump is situated close within the entrance to
5.53
Voldsfjorden.
Vartdalsfjorden leads 10 miles NE toward Sulefjorden. It is
5.53
flanked by high, partly-wooded mountains. The fjord is deep,
and almost everywhere steep-to up to the shore. It is easy to
navigate by day.
Vessels may enter Vartdalsfjorden with the white sector of
5.53
Ysonya Light astern. After passing Skolten (62°16'N.,
6°00'E.), a 2m patch, keep Ysonya Light bearing 222° astern.
This leads through the NE part of Vartdalsfjorden.
Orstafjorden (62°14'N., 6°00'E.) leads off the SE side of
5.53
Vartdalsfjorden and extends 5 miles SE. It is surrounded by
mountains and is almost free of dangers.
Raudoy and Raudoyholmen, close E, lie in the entrance to
5.53
Orstafjorden. Raudoy Light (62°14'N., 5°59'E.) is situated on
Raudoyholmen. Vessels can anchor, in 25 to 40m, sand, 0.25
mile NW of Raudoy Light.
Vessels may enter with the white sector of Ysonya Light
5.53
bearing astern, which leads S of Raudoy. The white sector of
Raudoy Light bearing astern, leads to the vicinity of Lianes,
about 2 miles SSE.
Orsta (62°12'N., 6°08'E.) (World Port Index No. 23118) lies
5.53
at the head of Orstafjorden. It is the site of several industries.
There are several quays, one being 61m in length. There are
depths alongside the quays from 1.7 to 7m.
Anchorage is available SW of the quays, in 15 to 45m, sand
5.53
and mud.
5.54 Indreleia continues through Sulefjorden, between Ha-
reidlandet and Sula, from the junction of Vartdalsfjorden and
Storfjorden, into Breisundet.
For the requirements for non-military vessels entering Nor-
5.54
wegian internal waters, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Plan-
ning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
Hjorungneset Light (Hjoringnes Light) (62°21'N., 6°07'E.),
5.54
stands on the NE end of Hjorungneset. This light is situated on
the S side of the E entrance to Sulefjorden. A monument/cairn
is located a little over 1 mile WNW of Hjorungneset Light.
Overaflu, a reef awash, lies 0.15 mile offshore, 1 mile NW of
5.54
Hjorungneset.
Eltraneset (62°26'N., 6°03'E.), the W extremity of Sula, is
5.54
fronted by a shore reef which extends about 0.2 mile SW. Eltra-
flu, about 0.2 mile N of Eltraneset, has a least depth of 10m.
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 121

Hareid (62°22'N., 6°02'E.), situated on the SW side of

5.54 Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
Sulefjorden, 2.25 miles WNW of Hjorungneset, is protected by Vessels should call the Alesund pilot station 2 hours prior to
5.56

two moles.
Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 20,000 dwt, 150m in
5.54
length and 8.7m in draft can be accommodated at the terminal.
The dredged depth inside the harbor was 5m; the depths along-
arrival on VHF channel 16. If the station does not respond ei-
ther the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio station will reply and
relay details to the pilot station.
Pilots board in the following positions:
5.56

side the quays ranged up to 6m. a. 62°27.0'N, 5°58.9'E.

The General Cargo Berth, located at the Hareid Service
5.54 b. 62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E. (by prior arrangement)
Base, is 120m in length and handles containers and breakbulk. Contact Information.—See the table titled Stranda—Con-
5.56

Vessels up to 20,000 dwt, 150m in length, and 8.7m draft can tact Information.
be accommodated.
Brandal (62°24'N., 6°01'E.) is a small harbor about 2 miles
5.54
Stranda—Contact Information
NNW of Hareid. There is a ferry quay, 35m long, with depths
of 1.7 to 4.6m alongside; a fish oil quay, 108m long, with VHF VHF channels 13 and 16
depths of 4 to 7.8m alongside; and a disused factory quay, Telephone 47-46-411113
110m long, with depths of 2.9 to 4.2m alongside.
Facsimile 47-70-268001
5.55 Storfjorden, with its continuations, extends about 55
miles SE from the junction of Vartdalsfjorden and Sulafjorden. 5.57 Sunnylvsfjorden extends 13 miles SSW from its junc-
The terrain alternates between wild mountain areas and pro-
5.55
tion with Storfjorden and Norddalsfjorden.
ductive lowlands and valleys. Geirangerfjorden leads about 7 miles E from the SE side of
5.57

Storfjorden extends ENE about 18 miles to Gausneset

5.55
(62°28'N., 6°46'E.), then in a general SSE direction about 14
miles to its continuation as Norddalsfjorden.
Sunnylvsfjorden between Lundanes (62°07'N., 6°58'E.) and
Nokkeneset, 0.75 mile SW.
Both of these fjords are deep and clear of dangers, but navi-
5.57

Hjorundfjorden, with its two inner arms, Norangsfjorden and

5.55
Storfjorden, is entered from a position 7.25 miles ENE of Hjo-
rungnes Light. These fjords extend 18 miles in a SSE direction.
gators are advised to keep well out into the center owing to the
risk of rock falls from the precipitous mountains.
Hellesylt (62°05'N., 6°53'E.) is a small cruise ship port at the
5.57

They are surrounded by high mountains which fall steeply to head of Sunnylvsfjorden.
the water. Geiranger (62°06'N., 7°12'E.) lies at the head of Geiranger-
5.57

fjorden, 8 miles E of Lundanes. The S side of the ferry quay is

5.56 Sykkylvfjorden (62°24'N., 6°33'E.) is entered 4 available for berthing and is 50m long, with depths of 3.5 to
miles E of Hjorundfjorden. Anchorage is available 2.5 miles 8.4m alongside.
within the entrance near the middle of the fjord, in depths of 28 Anchorage is available, in depths of 30 to 40m, sand and
5.57

to 35m. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 16m, spans the clay, as seen on the chart.
fjord about 0.3 mile N of Vik. Care is necessary to avoid submarine cables which are laid
5.57

At Sykkylven, 1.5 miles within the fjord on the E side, there

5.56
along the SW shoreline and the cables which extend across the
are quays, exposed to W winds, with depths up to 7.5m along- fjord in a N direction from the S shore in a position 0.85 mile
side. NW of the quay.
At Ikornes, on the W side of the fjord SW of Sykkylven,
5.56

there are depths up to 7.2m alongside the quays.

Stordalsvika (62°23'N., 6°58'E.) opens off the E side of
5.56

Storfjorden, 6.75 mile SSE of Gausneset. Stordal, at the head

of the bay, has berths with 1.1 to 10.3m alongside. Anchorage
is available in the NE corner of Stordalsvika, in 16 to 27m,
mud.
Stranda (62°18'N., 6°57'E.), on the W side of Storfjorden,
5.56

about 4 miles SSW of Stordalsvika, is the principal town in the

inner part of the fjord.

Stranda Home Page

http://www.stranda-hamnevesen.no

Winds—Weather.—Strong winds raise considerable seas

5.56

and make berthing difficult at the quays.

Depths—Limitations.—There are several berths at the vari-
5.56
5.57 By Ximonic (Simo Rananen) (Own work), via Wikimedia Commons
ous quays that range in depth from 1.4 to 7.7m. 5.57 Geiranger
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 500 gt
5.56

and all vessels carrying dangerous cargo. Pilotage should be 5.58 Norddalsfjorden leads E from the SE end of
ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Storfjorden and then in to Tafjorden. Both fjords are deep and

Pub. 182
122 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
present no navigational difficulty.
There is anchorage off Tafjorden (62°14'N., 7°25'E.), at the
5.58
head of the fjord, in 30 to 50m, sand and clay, clear of the
banks at the river mouth.
Sandsfjorden (62°15'N., 5°31'E.) is an alternate route from
5.58
the sea to Rovdefjorden and the inner route to Alesund. This
fjord lies between Sandsoy, and the islands extending S from
this island, on the W, and Gurskoy on the E.
From Sondre Flavaerleia, a S course in mid-channel avoids
5.58
all dangers and leads clear E of Kleveboen (62°16'N., 5°30'E.),
a 2.3m patch lying off the NE point of Sandsoy.
The white sector of Stabbane Light, bearing ahead, leads to-
5.58
ward the S end of Standsfjorden. The white sector of Sand-
shamn Light (62°15'N., 5°30'E.), bearing astern, leads SSE
into the W entrance of Rovdefjorden.
Sandshamn, a harbor protected by a mole, is situated on the
5.58
E side of Sandsoy. There is a berth on the inner side of the
mole 25m long, with depths of 8.4 to 10.3m alongside.
Gursken, a narrow inlet, is entered with the white sector of
5.58
Sandshamn Light, bearing astern. Saltflu, awash, lies in this
sector about 3 miles distant from the light. A mole lies on the N
side of the inlet, N of Saltflu, at Haugsbygda.
Vagen (62°13'N., 5°39'E.) lies at the head of Gursken, where
5.58
there is a shipyard. There is a fitting out quay at the shipyard,
60m long, with depths of 3.5 to 7m alongside.
5.59 Breisunddjupet, which has depths of over 200m, leads
8 miles SE from position 62°31'N, 5°40'E into Breisundet.
A number of shoals and patches lie between Runde and the S
5.59
side of Breisunddjupet. Nyttarsskallane, with a depth of 24m,
and Golla, three patches of 9m each, lie 3.5 miles NNW and 3
miles NNE, respectively, from Runde Light.
Heavy seas have been observed in the Breisunddjupet and
5.59
Breisundet area with winds from the W and NW. The outgoing
current is approximately 1 knot from Storfjorden and causes
choppy waves and heavier seas.
Refraction centers will occur on the leeward side of the local
5.59
shoal areas on both sides of Breidsunddjupet.
Vallabaane (62°28'N., 5°41'E.), with a least depth of 2.4m,
5.59
and Keipbaane, with a least depth of 7m, lie 3.5 miles NNW
and 4 miles NNW, respectively, from Grasoyane Light. Other
shoals lie in this area. An 18m depth is charted 1.25 miles ENE
of Vallabaane.
Heroyfjorden lies between Sandsoy and Gurskoy on the S,
5.59
and Skorpa, Nerlandsoy, Bersoy, and Leinoy on the N.
In Heroyfjorden, there are many islets separated by rock-ob-
5.59
structed channels, which in places are narrow. The three princi-
pal channels through these dangers are Sondre Flavaerlia,
Mellomste Flavaerlia, and Nordre Flavaerlia, which are collec-
tively known as Flavaerlia.
These channels lead to the intricate passages which lead N of
5.59
Gurskoy and NW of Hareidlandet into Breisundet. Some of
these channels can only be used by small vessels with local
knowledge.
Heroyfjorden may be approached with the white sector of
5.59
Flavaer Light (62°19'N., 5°35'E.) bearing ahead, which leads
N of Stadlandet; however, this track leads over charted depths
of 30m. A racon is located at the light tower.
5.60 Sondre Flavaerlia leads between the N side of Sand-
Pub. 182
soy and a group of islets, rocks, and shoals about 1 mile N.
Flesene (62°17'N., 5°27'E.), marked by an iron perch, lies
5.60
near the W end of this group.
Sandsfjorden, previously described in paragraph 5.58, may
5.60
be entered from Sondre Flavaerlia.
The white sector of Hidsneset Light (62°17'N., 5°33'E.), at
5.60
the W end of Gurskoy, leads S of Flesene and N of the foul
ground extending NW of Sandsoy.
Sondre Flavaerlia then passes NE. The white sector of Hids-
5.60
neset Light, bearing astern, leads W of Langflu, which lies 1
mile NNE of that light, and W of Blomrokkene, which lies
0.45 mile NE of Langflu, and into the E end of Mellomste Fla-
vaerlia.
The white sector of Klubben Light (62°19'N., 5°37'E.), situ-
5.60
ated at the SE end of the Flavaer Group, bearing ahead, leads S
of Langflu.
From E of Langflu, Sondre Flavaerlia leads ENE to pass be-
5.60
tween Klubben Light and an iron perch which marks Kvale-
baen, a 3m patch, 0.2 mile S.
The white sector of Steinsholmskjer Light, 1.25 miles ESE
5.60
of Klubben Light, bearing ahead, leads between Klubben Light
and Kvalebaen.
Mellomste Flavaerlia leads ENE directly toward the Flavaer
5.60
Group. This channel is entered as directed for Heroyfjorden.
The sea sometimes breaks over Hoven, the 30m patch lying
5.60
about 1 mile N of Sandsoy, near the entrance to Mellomste Fla-
vaerlia.
After passing Penningflu (62°19'N., 5°33'E.), 0.8 mile
5.60
WSW of Flavaer Light, course may be altered N to join Nordre
Flavaerlia, or E to join Sondre Flavaerlia, by steering in the
white sector of Steinsholmskjer Light. Nordre Flavaerlia leads
ENE, passing S of Skorpa and Nerlandsoy.
The white sector of Kyrkjeholmen Light, leads between
5.60
Langfallet, partly awash, and Store Godoyflu, at the W en-
trance of Nordre Flavaerlia. When within 0.5 mile of Kyrkje-
holmen Light, steer in an E direction to pass N of the Flavaer
Group, then steer SE with the white sector of Kyrkjeholmen
Light as tern, which leads into the inner part of Heroyfjorden.
Tronden (62°19'N., 5°38'E.), above-water, lies in this white
5.60
sector, about 0.5 mile E of Klubben Light.
Well-sheltered anchorage is available in a bay off Moldtu
5.60
(62°18'N., 5°38'E.), on the N coast of Gurskoy, in 20 to 30m,
sand. The anchorage lies 0.9 mile SSE of Klubben Light, and is
entered from the E end of Sondre Flavaerlia.
Moldtustranda (62°18'N., 5°39'E.) (World Port Index No.
5.60
23115) is entered SSE of Steinsholmskjer Light, and lies E of
Moldtu. There are several quays in Moldtustranda, with
lengths from 10 to 130m and depths up to 10m alongside.
There is a fish meal factory with a large quay installation.
5.60
Vessels approaching from seaward may embark pilots at the
5.60
pilot station NE of Runde. Customs officers from the port of
Alesund meet inbound vessels at the above pilot station.
Breisundet
5.61 Heissafjorden (62°27'N., 6°08'E.) leads 2.5 miles E
from Breisundet into Borgundfjorden; at its E end gives access
to Aspevagen, which is the principal entrance to Alesund
Havn.
Alesund Havn (62°28'N., 6°09'E.) consists of Aspevagen, S
5.61
 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
of Aspoya; Steinvagsundet and Steinvagen, W of Aspoya; and
Indre Havn, E of Aspoya.
Aspevagen is entered E of Slinningen, the E extremity of
5.61
Heissa; it is the principal entrance to Alesund Havn.
Submarine cables are laid from Slinningsodden, the NE ex-
5.61
tremity of Slinningen, NE to Norvoya.
Aspa (62°28'N., 6°09'E.), a reef awash, lies in the middle of
5.61
Aspevagen.
Vikanesflu Light (62°28'N., 6°07'E.) is situated in the SW
5.61
part of Aspevagen. The white sector of this light bearing be-
tween 262° and 269° leads from N of Slinningen, S of Aspa to
the anchorages in the S part of Aspevagen. A depth of 9.1m
lies in this white sector.
Anchorage may be taken, in 30m, 0.35 mile E of Vikanesflu
5.61
Light and, in 36m, 0.7 mile ESE of the same light.
There is a quay at the tank installation on the S shore of As-
5.61
pevagen, about 0.2 mile SE of Vikanesflu Light, which is 75m
long and has depths of 7.5 to 11.1m alongside.
5.62 Hoggsteinen Light (62°28'N., 6°02'E.) is situated off
the SE extremity of Godoya, on the NE side of Breisundet.
123
Djupeflua, with a charted depth of 12m, lies 0.3 mile SSE of
5.62
the light. Skarvoyflua, a 5m patch which breaks in bad weath-
er, lies about 1 mile E of the light.
Nordtaren, with a least charted depth of 7.5m, lies about
5.62
midway between Heissa and Godoya, 1 mile ENE of Hogg-
steinen Light.
To enter Valderhaugfjorden, which lies N of Alesund, steer
5.62
in the junction of the red and green sectors of Havsteinen
Light (62°29'N., 6°04'E.). This track leads over Djupeflua and
W of Nordtaren.
When W of Erkneflua, which lies close N of Nordtaren, steer
5.62
NE with the white sector of Hoggsteinen Light astern; this will
lead to a position NW of Alesund.
Foul ground extends about 0.2 mile N from the NE extremity
5.62
of Heissa. Steer a SE course from the white sector of Hogg-
steinen Light to pass E of this foul ground, to the berths on the
N side of Alesund.
Olsskjer, a partly submerged reef, lies on the N side of the
5.62
fairway, about 0.5 mile N of Aspoya Olsskjerboen, a 3m shoal,
lies 0.15 mile ENE of this reef.
Pub. 182
 6.
Sector 6—Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

6.0 Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
Pub. 182

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION

125

SECTOR 6
NORWAY—BREIDSUND-DJUPET TO TRONDHEIM
Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast from Bre-
6.0
idsund-Djupet to Halten, including the seaward approaches to
Indreleia, the connecting fjords, and Trondheim. The inner
route N of Alesund is included in this sector.
General Remarks
6.1 Winds—Weather.—Between Alesund and Trond-
heim, during autumn, winter and spring, the weather is fre-
quently unsettled and stormy. During this period the prevailing
wind is SW. In summer, the wind is most frequently between N
and NE.
Tides—Currents.—During settled weather, the tidal cur-
rents set NE with the flood and SW with the ebb. They attain
their greatest strength at a distance of 30 to 50 miles offshore.
At 30 to 50 miles offshore, on this part of the coast, the NE tid-
al current is generally the stronger and the most constant.
6.1When the wind is continuously E the tidal current is always
SW.
6.1During the winter months, when the nights are long and the
visibility is frequently bad, vessels approaching land with a W
wind should exercise caution to avoid being set N of the har-
bor, channel, or channel entrance.
6.1Within the various channels of the fjords the tidal currents,
as a rule, flow NE with the rising tide. The tidal currents in
some channels are negligible, while a rate of 3 to 4 knots have
been observed in others.
From Breidsund-Djupet, the outer coast trends in a general
NE direction for about 39 miles to Buadjupet. From Buadjupet,
the coast trends in a general ENE direction for about 27 miles
to Kristiansund. This coast is fronted by islands, groups of is-
lets, and rocks which extend up to 8.5 miles off the mainland.
6.1From Kristiansund, the islands and rocks lying off the coast
extend about 75 miles NE to the islands of Halen. These is-
lands are located on the W side of the main N approach to
Trondheim.
6.1For details and information concerning the color and bear-
ings of the sector lights mentioned within this sector, see the
Light List.
6.1Rain, fog, and storms usually occur during SW winds. The
least rainfall and the clearest weather are experienced during
the spring. Summer is the season with the greatest number of
foggy days; however, at Trondheim, fog is more prevalent in
autumn and winter.
6.1Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
6.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
6.1A traffic separation scheme and recommended route is estab-
lished off Halten connects with the existing TSS and recom-
mended route lying off Runde in the S. The scheme can best be
viewed on the chart. This section off Halten is part of the larger
previously-existing offshore routing schemes connecting key
points off the coast. These routes, adopted by the International
127
Maritime Organization, establish a safe route for sea transport.
6.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
(TSS) in Norwegian waters see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions
(Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
6.1Vessel Traffic Service.—Norwegian Oceanic Region Vessel
Traffic Service (NOR VTS) is in operation for vessels transit-
ing the Norwegian Economic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/
Sweden border in the S to the Norway/Russia border in the N.
The NEZ also includes the areas around Svalbard and Jan
Mayen Island. For further information, see paragraph 1.1.
6.1Caution.—Due to continued damage to floating navigation
aids in the area, mariners are requested to give a wide berth
when passing them. Vessels are to report observance of any
dysfunctional or irregular lights or damaged buoyage to the
nearest coast station.
6.1Fishing is prohibited in the environmentally sensitive sea ar-
ea, best seen on the chart, located in the vicinity of the Ak-
tivneset (62°30'N., 3°36'E.) continental slope, approximately
140 miles W of Alesund.
Off-lying Dangers
6.2 Dangerous Waves Areas.—Coastal areas where re-
peated marine casualties occur, due to heavy seas in rough
weather, are frequently designated by the Norwegian authori-
ties as Danger Areas.
Stattlandett (62°12'N., 5°00'E.) is exposed to SW to N winds
which raise heavy seas.
6.2Haugsholmen (62°11'N., 5°23'E.) and Stalrevet (62°13'N.,
5°11'E.) are particularly known as rough sea areas.
6.2Breidsunddjupet and Breidsundet (62°28'N., 5°50'E.) are
areas where W and NW winds cause heavy seas.
6.2Haustadvika (63°00'E., 7°00'E.), extensive offshore shoals,
completely exposed to SW to NW strong winds. These condi-
tions are especially severe in the area of Buadjupet, Bjornsund
(62°54'N., 6°45'E.), and Kolbeinsflua,.
6.2Ytrefjorden (63°12'N., 7°50'E.) is an area extending from
SW of Gripholen to Ytrefjorden S of Smola, where depths are
100 to 150m. Griptarane, the westernmost shallow area where
the sea breaks heavily, lies about 11 miles W of Smola.
6.2The Folla (63°55'N., 9°30'E.) area is known for rough seas
with strong W or NW winds, especially in the winter. Many
large and small ships have been lost in the area through the
years. The coast line is steep-to, with depths of 300 to 500m
near offshore that also contributes to rough conditions, along
with the outflow of tidal current.
6.3 Oil and Gas Fields.—Draugen Oil Field lies 45 miles
WNW from Halten Light (64°10'N., 9°25'E.) A lighted con-
crete platform LF3F (64°21.2'N., 7°47'.0E.) stands on in the oil
field. There are numerous underwater installations within 6.5
miles of the platform.
6.3The Njord Oil Field lies 16 miles W of Draugen and was
temporarily shut down in 2016. At that time, Njord A, the
Pub. 182
128 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
floating steel platform unit containing drilling and processing
facilities, was towed to shore for reinforcement and modifica-
tions. Njord B, the associated floating storage unit, is also pres-
ently undergoing refurbishment. The field expects to resume
production in 2020.
6.3Caution.—An environmentally sensitive sea area and ma-
rine reserve, best seen on the chart, lies due S of the Draugen
Oil Field. Trawling is prohibited in this area.
6.3Asgard, Norway’s largest and most complex offshore devel-
opment, is situated 87 miles NW of Halten Light and consists
of three permanent structures, as follows:
1. Asgard B (65°06.6'N., 6°47.5'E.), a floating semi-sub-
mersible facility for gas and condensate processing, is moored
with 16 anchor lines, each extending a distance of 1,900m.
2. Asgard A, a floating production storage and offload-
ing vessel (FPSO) located about 3.2 miles SSW of Asgard B,
is moored with 12 anchor lines.
3. Asgard C, a floating storage and offloading vessel
(FSO) located about 2.5 miles ENE of Asgard B, is moored
with nine anchor lines, each extending a length of 1,200m.
6.3Gas is delivered via a submarine pipeline running 385 miles
from Asgard B to Kallsto, located on the mainland 6 miles S of
Haugesund (59°25'N., 5°16'E.).
6.3Kristin Oil Field (64°59'N., 6°33'E.), situated 6 miles SW
of Asgard A, is a semi-submersible processing facility. Gas is
transported via the Asgard Transport System to the Karsto Ter-
minal. Light oil is transferred to the Asgard C facility for stor-
age and export.
6.3Numerous wells, structures, and other obstructions exist on
the sea bed within the boundaries of Kristin Oil Field and
Asgard Oil Field, which are best seen on the chart. Anchoring
and fishing are prohibited within 500m of the sea bed installa-
tions. A lighted buoy is moored close N of a well located 9.5
miles N of Asgard B.
6.3Statoil Marin VTS conducts radar surveillance from these
offshore structures and can be contacted on VHF channel 6.
Vessels are requested to pass at least 3 miles off all installa-
tions.
6.3Caution.—Submerged obstructions, best seen on the chart,
lie near Asgard, in position 65°09.8'N, 6°29.6'E and in position
65°08.2'N, 6°28.6'E. Numerous obstructions lie W of Halden
Bank, including in the vicinity of Heidrun Platform. An ob-
struction area with a radius of 1.3 miles lies SW of the Njord
Oil Field, at a distance of 19 miles, in position 64°01.8'N,
6°45.0'E.
Breidsund-Djupet to Buadjupet (Buddjupet)
6.4 The coast NNE of Breidsund-Djupet, the NW ap-
proach to Alesund and the recommended fairway to Alesund,
is fringed with a number of islands which are fronted by foul
ground to a distance of 6 miles in places. Vessels approaching
the coast from seaward should maintain a considerable dis-
tance offshore until their position is positively determined.
Vallabaane, with a charted depth of 2.4m, lies about 7 miles
W of Godoya. Keipbaane lies 0.6 mile NNW of the 2.4m
depth.
Alnes Light (62°29'N., 5°58'E.), situated on the NW extrem-
ity of Godoya, is a good mark for making Giskesundet, the pas-
sage between the islands of Godoya and Giske.
Pub. 182
Alesundaksla (62°28.5'N., 6°11.0'E.) rises to an elevation of
197m, on the island of Norvoya, close E of Alesund. It is used
as a mark in the approach to Giskesundet.
6.4Klovgrynna, an 18m patch; Dyngeskallen, a 26m patch; and
Stadsgrunnskallen, a 20m patch, lie about 5 miles WNW of the
NW extremity of Godoya.
6.4Olsflua (62°30'N., 5°51'E.), an 11m patch, and Lyren, a 16m
patch, lie 3 and 2 miles W, respectively, from the NW extremity of
Godoya.
6.4To enter Giskesundet (62°30'N., 6°01'E.) from the W, Alnes
Light, just open N of the highest point of Havsteinen, bearing
092° leads N of Keipbaane, but directly over Olsflua.
6.4The NW extremity of Godoya, in line with the S point of
Havsteinen bearing 098°, leads close S of Klovgrynna and Dy-
ngeskallen and N of Olsflua toward Giskesundet.
6.4Vessels may approach Giskesundet at night with the white
sector of Erkna Light.
6.4A middle course steered through Giskesundet avoids the
dangers and Valderhaugfjorden may be entered by passing N or
S of Havsteinen.
6.4Vessels having entered Valderhaugfjorden whose destination
is Alesund, proceed as previously directed.
6.5 Fauskane (62°34'N., 5°45'E.), shoals with a least
depth of 8.8m, lie in the NW approach to Giskesundet, about 8
miles NW of Godoya. These are marked by breakers in any
swell and a lighted buoy moored close W. Onglegrunnen, a
17m patch, and Kvalsbaen, a 2m patch, lie 6 and 4.75 miles, re-
spectively, NW of Godoya. Kvalsbaen is usually marked by
breakers.
Langeskjeret (62°32'N., 5°52'E.), an islet marked by a bea-
6.5
con, lies 4 miles NW of Godoya. A chain of rocks extends 1
mile N to Leiafalla, a rock, awash. Oddebaen, a group of rocks,
awash, lie 0.85 mile NW of Langeskjeret.
Leiafallet, rocks, awash; Alnesbreidflua, awash; Bjornebaen,
6.5
awash; and Alnesraunen, marked by a beacon; lie 1.25 miles
NW, 2 miles NW, 2 miles NW and 2 miles NW, respectively, of
Godoya.
Vessels approaching Giskesundet from NW keep the SW
6.5
point of Godoya in line with the top of the SW slope of Sula
bearing 125°. This track will lead SW of Fauskane and Ongle-
grunnen, but Olsflua lies close N of this track further inshore.
6.6 Giskesundet, between Godoya and Giske (62°30'N.,
6°03'E.), 1 mile N, gives access to Indreleia from seaward and
is used by vessels leaving Alesund for the open sea. It is affect-
ed by strong mountain squalls from Godoya, when winds are
strong between S and W.
6.6When entering Giskesundet, the NW extremity of Godoya
should be given a wide berth, owing to the banks which extend
up to 0.2 mile from it. Foul ground extends 2.5 miles NW from
Giske, and 0.3 mile SW.
6.6Erkna Light (62°33'N., 5°56'E.), situated on the summit of
an island 1.75 miles W of Vigra, is a useful landfall light.
6.6Synesfjellet (62°33'N., 6°02'E.), 87m high, is situated near
the SW extremity of Vigra. Blindheimsfjellet, 77m high, and
Molnesfjellet, 128m high, are situated 1.25 miles and 2.5 miles
NE, respectively, from Synesfjellet.
6.6Storholmane (62°39'N., 5°56'E.), 5.5 miles NW of Vigra,
consists of three easily identified islands.
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
6.4 By Svema [CC BY-SA 4.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0)], via Wikimedia Commons
6.4
Storholmen (62°39'N., 5°56'E.) is the largest of the three is-
6.6
lands which comprise the group. A light is situated on this is-
land.
The waters N and E of Storholmen can be difficult to navi-
6.6
gate without local knowledge, despite the ample provision of
navigational lights.
6.7 Lepsoya (62°37'N., 6°11'E.), Haramsoya, and Flem-
soya are easily identified, especially when the mountains in the
background are visible. When viewed from the NW, these is-
lands appear equal in width to the openings, about 2 miles, be-
tween them.
6.7Godalde, the summit of Lepsoya, is 489m high. Mannen, at
the center of Haramsoya, is 347m high; Skulen, the summit of
Flemsoya, is 493m high.
6.7Lepsoyklovningen (62°38'N., 6°03'E.), an islet, lies 3.25
miles E of Storholmen. Kloningsgrunnen, a 4.8m patch, lies
0.25 mile S of Lepsoyklovningen; Klovningsfallet, a 2m patch,
lies 0.4 mile SE of the same islet.
6.7Knappen (62°38'N., 6°02'E.), an isolated above-water rock,
lies 0.7 mile S of Lepsoyklovningen. Nordreflua, a 3m patch,
lies about 1 mile W of Knappen. Melingskjeret, above water,
lies 1.25 miles SW of Nordreflua.
6.7A light is situated on Rossholmen (62°36'N., 6°03'E.), an is-
let 1.25 miles NW of Vigra. Rossholmbaen, a 1.5m patch, lies
0.45 mile N of the light.
6.7Flatskjeret lies 1.5 miles ENE of Rossholmen; Flatskjergrun-
nen, a 1.7m patch, lies 0.2 mile farther ENE.
129
Draugen Platform
6.8 The island of Mia (62°40'N., 6°38'E.), 6 miles E of
Flemsoya, rises to a height of 533m. Several hummocks pro-
trude from its summit.
6.8Skjerdingen, on the mainland about 5 miles SSE of the sum-
mit of Mia, has a saddle-shaped summit 1,062m high, and is
visible for a considerable distance at sea.
6.8Farther NE, on the coast about 30 miles from Flemsoya, will
be seen Stemshesten, 667m high, and Maelen, 769m high.
6.8Jendemsfjellet (62°48'N., 7°03'E.), 633m high, is situated
on the mainland, about 11 miles SSW of Maelen;. It may be
identified by its perfectly round form.
6.8Gulberget, 160m high, about 7 miles NNW of Jendemsfjel-
let. The hill rises from a level plain and is conspicuous because
of its detached position. Its summit is almost flat and presents
the same appearance when sighted from various bearings. A
church 1 mile WSW of the hill is also visible from seaward.
6.9 Vigrafjorden lies between Vigra and Lepsoya, which
lies 1.75 miles NE. Vigrafjorden is entered from the vicinity of
Storholmen, about 7 miles WNW.
The recommended route into Vigrafjorden by day leads E
from a position 0.4 mile S of Storholmen, then passes between
Knappen and Klovningsgrunnen, then turns SE, passing W of
Flatskjeret or E of Flatskjergrunnen.
6.9When E of Flatskjergrunnen, steer SSE with the white sector
of Innholmen Light (62°38'N., 6°07'E.), astern, which leads
to the S part of Vigrafjorden.
6.9When Rognodden, the E extremity of Vigra, bears 270°, en-
ter the white sector of Oksebasen Light (62°31'N., 6°09'E.)
Pub. 182
130 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
until about 0.5 mile distant from the light, then change course
to pass midway between Oksebasen Light and the island of
Valderoya, about 0.5 mile distant, W.
6.9Enter the white sector of Gildreneset Light (62°30'N.,
6°11'E.) bearing between 116° and 120°, ahead, which leads
through a channel about 0.2 mile wide.
6.9When clear of the channel, steer SW and enter Valderhaug-
fjorden, then SE to Alesund or continue SW through Indreleia
as previously directed.
6.9Caution.—The glide path for aircraft landing at Alesund air-
port passes over Vigrafjorden 3 to 4 miles N of Hamnoya.
6.9At the E limit of the approach zone, the aircraft will be at an
altitude of only about 60m when descending to the runway.
6.10 Lepsoyrevet (62°36'N., 6°15'E.), a shallow reef of
shingle, sand, and shells, with rocky heads, extends from Lep-
soya to the mainland, about 2 miles SE. This is the shallowest
part of Indreleia; a depth of little more than 5m can be carried
across it. A bridge, best seen on the chart, crosses over the reef.
Two channels pass through the bridge, with vertical clearances
of 7m and 41m, respectively.
Unexpected and unsteady winds are liable to blow off the
6.10
mainland and off Lepsoya.
The tidal currents flow NE and SW. The flow is strong and is
6.10
greatly influenced by wind.
A light is shown from the head of a breakwater extending
6.10
0.15 mile from the shore, on the SE side of Lepsoyrevet.
The fairway across Lepsoyrevet is entered about 0.3 mile
6.10
SSW of Sore Kverna. The white sector of Lepsoyrevet Light
leads toward the entrance of the fairway. The fairway leads NE
to Haramsfjorden, and is marked by buoys.
When clear of Lepsoyrevet, course may be shaped to pass
6.10
NW of Haugneset (62°37'N., 6°20'E.), or NW through Ha-
ramsfjorden, to the open sea.
The waters NW of Lepsoya are foul and should not be en-
6.10
tered without local knowledge.
Haramsfjorden is difficult to access and should not be at-
6.10
tempted without a pilot.
Pass S of Hella (62°41'N., 5°59'E.) and N of Utbaane,
awash, 2 miles ESE of Hella.
A light is shown from Hellevik (62°38'N., 6°10'E.). Naggen,
6.10
awash, lies about 2 miles WNW of Hellevik Light.
When S of Naggen, the white sector of Haugneset Light
6.10
(62°37'N., 6°20'E.) leads into the NW entrance of Harams-
fjorden. This track lies close N of a 1m depth just off the N side
of Lepsoya. When about 0.9 mile ESE of Hellevik Light, steer
SE as required, to join Indreleia.
6.11 Nogvafjorden (62°41'N., 6°20'E.), entered between
Flemsoya and Fjortoft, about 1 mile NE, is the best entrance
from seaward to Indrelia between Lepsoya and Buadjupet.
Tides—Currents.—On the N side of the seaward approach
6.11
to Nogvafjorden, the NE flow, experienced during the rising
tide, sets markedly in toward the dangers W of Fjortoft and
Haroya.
Directions.—To enter Nogvafjorden from seaward, steer for
6.11
Skulen (62°41'N., 6°19'E.) bearing 126°, which leads NE of
Grunnflua, a 3.5m patch, lying 2.5 miles WNW of Kjeholmen
Light, and SW of Breidflua, a 5m patch lying 1.75 miles NW
of the light.
Pub. 182
A mid-channel course through Nogvafjorden leads clear of
6.11
dangers; however, a 15m patch lies 0.9 mile ENE of Kjehol-
men Light, and a 16m patch lies 0.25 mile farther E.
At night the white sector of Kjeholmen Light (62°42'N.,
6.11
6°15'E.) leads between Grunnflua and Breidflua.
The white sector of Fjortoftneset Light, 2 miles ENE of Kje-
6.11
holmen Light, leads N of the dangers close off Flemsoya.
The white sector of Kjeholmen Light bearing astern, and the
6.11
white sector of Fjortoftneset Light bearing, astern, lead from
Nogvafjorden into Haroyfjorden.
6.12 Haroyfjorden (62°52'N., 6°55'E.) is bound on the
NW by Flemsoya, Fjortoft, Haroya, Finnoya, and Sandoya, and
on the E by Dryna, Midoya, the NW end of Otteroya, and the
islets and rocks SW of Gossa.
The current through Haroyfjorden usually flows NE, with
6.12
the strongest flow during the rising tide.
6.13 Nyhamna (Nyhavna) (62°51'N., 6°57'E.) is a gas ter-
minal situated on the N side of Gossa, about 4 miles SE of the
entrance to Haroyfjorden.
Depths—Limitations.—Nyhamna is located near Gossa on
6.13
the W cost of Norway. Vessels up to 100,000 dwt, 170 to 250m in
length, 18.5m draft, and 50m beam can be handled at the port.
The Shell Refinery receives gas from the Ormen Lange Field
6.13
and has an oil berth handling recovered condensate oil for
export.
The oil berth at Nyhamna Marine Terminal is 105m in length
6.13
and has a depth of 21m alongside. The berthing length is 295m,
including dolphins. Vessels up to 100,000 dwt, 250m in length,
18.5m draft, 50m beam, and a displacement of 120,000t casn
be accommodated. The BERTH handles clean products, crude,
and dirty products.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is provided by
6.13
Mongstad (paragraph 5.7). Pilotage should be ordered using
SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot
Booking Center at an additional cost.
Pilots board in the following positions:
6.13
1. Vessels greater than 25,000 gross tons—Pilots board
by helicopter N of Ona (62°56'N., 6°27'E.).
2. Vessels less than 25,000 gross tons—In Breisundet S
of Godoy (Godoya), in position 62°26'50.4''N, 5°58'51.0''E.
Regulations.—A cautionary area has been established in the
6.13
water area bounded, as follows:
1. North boundary—latitude 62°56'52.8''N.
2. West boundary—longitude 6°33'48.0''E.
3. South boundary—latitude 62°38'40.8''N.
4. East boundary—longitude 7°22'19.8''E.
Vessels should use extreme caution when navigating in this
6.13
area. In addition, vessels underway or at anchor in the waters
covered by the cautionary area must maintain a continuous lis-
tening watch on VHF channels 14 and 16.
Category 1 and Category 2 vessels calling at Nyhamna must
6.13
notify the terminal on VHF channel 14 or 16 of the following
information:
1. Vessel name.
2. Call sign.
3. Planned sailing route to and from the terminal.
These broadcasts must be made, as follows:
6.13
1. Thirty (30) minutes prior to arrival at the cautionary
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
area.
2. Fifteen (15) minutes prior to arrival at or departure
from the terminal.
3. When leaving the cautionary area.
4. When arriving at or departing from the anchorages at
Karlsoyfjorden and Midfjorden, S of Tautra.
Category 1 and Category 2 vessels must use escort vessels,
6.13
as follows:
1. From the pilot boarding position to Nyhamna.
2. From Nyhamna to the pilot boarding position.
3. When en route to the anchorage—from prior to de-
parting Nyhamna until anchored in the anchorage area.
4. When departing the anchorage area—from prior to
raising the anchor until arriving at the quay at Nyhamna.
Additional regulations for Category 1 and Category 2 vessels
6.13
govern entry into Nyhamma. Consult local authorities for de-
tails.
6.14 Indreleia continues from Lepsoyrevet, NE, to pass W
of Haugneset and Raudholmane, about 2 miles farther NE.
Grunnrevet, a spit extending 0.4 mile E from Rogneholmen,
6.14
lies 0.8 mile W of the light on Raudholmane.
The white sector of the light on Raudholmane leads to a po-
6.14
sition 0.6 mile WSW of the light. The white sector of the light
on Haugneset, astern, leads between Raudholmane and Grunn-
revet, and then into Haroyfjorden. Nogvafjorden joins Indreleia
in this area.
From a position 0.75 mile N of Haugneset, Dronenholmen
6.14
Light, 3 miles E of Raudholmane, bearing between 076° and
084°, leads N of foul ground and S of Raudholmane to Mid-
fjorden.
Anchorage.—There is anchorage available, in 29m, off the
6.14
SE extremity of Haramsoya. There is an 18m depth charted
close E of the anchorage and a cable extends SE from the is-
land to the mainland.
Anchorage is available for medium and small vessels S of
6.14
Hestoya, which lies 0.85 mile E of Lepsoya, in 14 to 15m, sand
and shells.
6.15 Indreleia continues from Raudholmane (62°38'N.,
6°24'E.) through Haroyfjorden, which is broad and deep, to the
vicinity of Sandoya (62°49'N., 6°36'E.), 12 miles NNE.
The white sector of the light on Raudholmane astern leads E
6.15
of the dangers off the SE side of Fjortoft.
Husevikflua (62°46'N., 6°32'E.), a 1.9m patch situated 1
6.15
mile ENE of the E extremity of Haroya, lies within these bear-
ings.
Aersteinen Light (62°48'N., 6°36'E.) is situated 0.35 mile S
6.15
of Sandoya. The white sector of this light leads E of Husevik-
flua and W of the dangers W of Orta, an island 3 miles ENE of
Husevikflua.
Molde—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth
LOA Draft Beam
Moldegard Terminal
Moldegard
130m 10.5m 132.6m 11.0m
Main
131
Flatflesa Light (62°50'N., 6°41'E.) is situated 3.25 miles NE
6.15
of Aersteinen Light. The white sector of this light, ahead, leads
E of Aersteinen Light and W of the foul ground and islets ex-
tending 1.25 miles N of Orta.
The white sector of Aersteinen Light bearing 220°, astern,
6.15
leads E of the foul ground extending NE from Sandoya, and
farther NE to the S entrance to Saltsteinsleia.
6.16 Midfjorden (62°38'N., 6°40'E.) is approached from
Haroyfjorden, and extends 4.5 miles ENE from Dryna to its
junction with Moldefjorden, S of the SW extremity of Otte-
roya.
The main channel through Midfjorden and Moldefjorden
6.16
from Dryna to Molde, 19 miles E, is deep and clear of dangers
except close to shore and in the final approach to Molde.
A mid-channel course in the fjords clears all dangers, but a
6.16
course adjustment may be needed to avoid Tautreflua
(62°41'N., 6°56'E.), a 16m patch lying in the fairway NE of
Tautra.
Dronenholmen Light (62°38'N., 6°31'E.), bearing between
6.16
253° and 274°, astern, and the white sector of Arnesklubben
Light lead clear of Midoya.
The white sector of Arnesklubben Light, situated on the SW
6.16
extremity of Otteroya, bearing astern, leads clear of Otteroya
and Tautra.
Moldefjorden, the continuation of Midfjorden, from the vi-
6.16
cinity of Arnesklubben Light (62°40'N., 6°41'E.), passes be-
tween Tautra and the SE side of Otteroya, just over 1 mile to
the N.
Julsundet extends N from Moldefjorden, between Otteroya
6.16
and the mainland.
From Tautra to Molde, about 7 miles ENE the fairway is
6.16
clear of dangers. South and SW of Molde, there are numerous
islets and scattered rocks, making it advisable to keep on the N
side of the channel when entering the roadstead.
Mekgrunna (62°43'N., 7°06'E.), a 3.5m patch, lies 0.6 mile
6.16
offshore, about 2 miles WSW of Molde Light. The patch may
be passed on either side.
The white sector of Molde Light, bearing ahead, leads N of
6.16
Mekgrunna, which is the preferred channel.
Dangers lie 0.45 mile S of Molde Light. Their position may
6.16
best be seen on the chart.
6.17 Molde (62°44'N., 7°10'E.) (World Port Index 23110)
is a coastal natural harbor, which lies on the N side of Mold-
efjorden, about 5 miles E of Julsundet, and has a small ice-free
harbor.
Port of Molde
https://www.molde-romsdalhavn.no
Remarks
Size
Aggregates, ro-ro/lo-lo, containers,
20.7m 8,199 dwt
breakbulk, bunkers, and reefer.
Pub. 182
132 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

Molde—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Moldegard Cement, ro-ro/lo-lo, breakbulk, and
95m 6.0m 139.5m 6.0m 20.8m 8,388 dwt
Ro-Ro bunkers.
Steel 5.0- Cement, ro-ro/lo-lo, steel products,
138m 117.3m — 19.7m 8,388 dwt
Products E 6.0m breakbulk, and bunkers.
Storkaia Terminal
Cruise vessels, fishing vessels, break-
9.0- See
Cruise 300m 350m 9.0m — bulk, and bunkers. No beam restric-
11.0m Remarks
tions. 150,000 gt.
Ferry 30m 6.0m 32m — 8.8m — Fast ferry and bunkers.
Ro-Ro E 80m — 123.1m — 16.8m 1,024 dwt Ro/pax and bunkers.
Ro-Ro W 40m — 49m — 10.3m — Ro/pax and bunkers.

Tides—Currents.—The tide rises about 2m at springs and

6.17
Signal Meaning
1.6m at neaps.
The tidal current within the harbor is hardly noticeable.
6.17
One green light and two red lights Moldegard Havn
Winds between SE and SW can be troublesome, and raise a One green light and three red lights All berths occupied
considerable sea.
Depths—Limitations.—The port has quay facilities for
When vessels arrive simultaneously from E and W, the first
6.17

6.17

cruise ships, ro-pax, ro-ro, containers, palletized cargo, ce-

signal shown refers to the vessel from the W.
ment, and other dry bulk. Vessels up to 8,388 dwt, 350m in
When a signal is understood, the vessel concerned should ac-
6.17

length, 20.8m beam, 11m draft can be accommodated. For

knowledge it with a short blast on the whistle.
more information see the table titled Molde—Berth Informa-
Contact Information.—See the table titled Molde—Con-
6.17

tion.
tact Information.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
6.17

dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-

soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. Molde—Contact Information
Vessels should contact the Alesund pilot station on VHF
6.17
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
channel 16 at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the station does
not respond, either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio Sta- Telephone 47-71-191620
tion will reply and relay details to the pilot station. Facsimile 47-71-191621
The pilot boards in position 62°27.0'N, 5°58.9'E or by ar-
6.17

E-mail office@molde-romsdalhavn.no
rangement in position 62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E.
Regulations.—From Reknes Mole to the light at Aroy, 3.25
6.17

miles E, there is a speed limit of 6 knots, to be exceeded only Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor off Molde, in depths of 30
6.17

with the harbormaster’s permission. to 35m, sand and clay.

Vessels in quarantine are required to anchor near Moldehol-
6.17

men, which is situated 1 mile ESE of Reknes mole.
Signals.—The quays are numbered 1 to 5 from W to E. Sig-
6.17
nals consisting of flags by day and a combination of red and
green lights at night are shown to indicate the allotted berth. By
day a red flag is shown at the assigned berth. By night, lights
6.18 Romsdalfjorden is entered E of Tuautra and extends
24 miles ESE to Andalsnes and then 3 miles E to its head at Is-
fjorden. The fjord is deep and clear of dangers and is not diffi-
cult to navigate.
A submarine cable lands close S of Furneset. Four subma-
6.18

are shown from a signal mast on the steamer quay, as follows: rine pipelines extend up to 300m from the shore on the E side
of Tresfjorden. A discharge pipe extends 230m S from Vorpne-
set (62°38.5'N., 7°05.5'E.), another discharge pipe extends
Signal Meaning
about 0.3 mile W of the N point of Feoya.
One red light Berth 1 Tresfjord Bridge (62°36.68'N., 7°06.78'E.), with a vertical
6.18

Two red lights Berth 2 clearance of 32m and a navigational width of 60m, spans the N
end of Tresfjorden between Helland and Vikebukt.
Three red lights Berth 3 To enter Romsdalsfjorden steer in the white sector of Helge-
6.18

One green light Berth 4 stones Light (62°36'N., 7°22'E.), which leads between Sekken
and Skalhamnholmen, about 10 miles ESE of Tautra.
One green light and one red light Berth 5 Steer to pass NE of Helgestones Light and enter the white
6.18

Pub. 182
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
sector of Hovdenes Light (62°33'N., 7°31'E.), about 6 miles
SE of Helgestones Light.
When about 0.5 mile distant from Hovdenes Light, steer an
6.18
E course to bring the white sector of Hovdenes Light astern.
This course will lead to Andalsnes.
6.19 Andalsnes (62°34'N., 7°41'E.) (World Port Index No.
23111) stands on a point on the S side of Romdalsfjorden. This
natural coastal port is a district capital.
Port of Andalsnes
https://www.molde-romsdalhavn.no
There is one large commercial berth, popular with cruise
6.19
ships, that is 157m long with depths alongside between 8 and
14m.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots may be ordered
6.19
via SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot
Booking Center at an additional cost. Vessels should call the
pilot on VHF channel 16, at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the
station does not respond, either the Rogaland Coast Radio Sta-
tion or Floro Coast Radio Station will reply and relay details to
the pilot station. The pilot boards in position 62°27.0'N,
5°58.9'E or by arrangement in position 62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Andalsnes—
6.19
Contact Information.
Andalsnes—Contact Information
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Telephone 47-71-191620
Facsimile 47-71-191621
E-mail office@molde-romsdalhavn.no
Anchorage is available over the whole of Isfjorden from An-
6.19
dalsnes to Stein, 2.5 miles E, in a depth of 35m, mud.
An obstruction was reported (1996) 2.5 miles NE of the end
6.19
of Andalsnes.
6.20 Julsundet is entered between Heggneset (62°43'N.,
6°56'E.), the SE extremity of Otteroya, and Julneset, a point on
the mainland 1.5 miles NE. Julsundet leads 10 miles N from
Moldefjorden, E of Otteroya and Gossa to join Buadjupet. It is
deep and clear.
The current in Julsundet is always N, but in unsettled weath-
6.20
er there may be a S flow during the rising tide.
Vessels may enter Julsundet by steering in the white sector
6.20
of Julholmen Light (62°44'N., 6°58'E.). When abeam of Jul-
neset, steer a NNW mid-channel course, to pass W of Julhol-
men Light.
Vessels enter the white sector of Hogsnes Light (62°50'N.,
6.20
6°58'E.).
This track will lead E of Kua, a small reef marked by a light,
6.20
situated 2 miles NNW of Julholmen Light.
Steer to pass E of Hogsnes Light and bring the white sector
6.20
of that light astern which will lead W of Herringen, situated
about 1 mile NNE of the light, and E of the NE extremity of
Gossa.
133
The white sector of Indre Haroy Light (62°53'N., 6°56'E.)
6.20
located at Degerhalsen, bearing 305°, leads NW towards Buad-
jupet. The white sector of Indre Haroy Light, astern, leads clear
of the dangers SW of Oddane (62°54'N., 6°53'E.) and NE of
Bjornsund (62°54'N., 6°50'E.).
Oddane, a group of islets, lies about 2.25 miles NW of Indre
6.20
Haroy Light.
6.21 Haroysund (62°54'N., 6°58'E.) (World Port Index
No. 23108) is a spacious coastal harbor, situated between Ytre
Haroy, Indre Haroy, and the mainland. The harbor is normally
entered W of Indre Haroy.
There are a number of berths in Haroysund. They range up to
6.21
220m in length and have depths up to 9m alongside.
Anchorage is available E of Ytre Haroy and NE of Indre
6.21
Haroy, in about 8m, sand.
Bud (62°54'N., 6°55'E.) is situated on a point of the main-
6.21
land, about 1 mile E of Oddane. The town is rather low but the
church is visible from seaward. Vessels with a draft not exceed-
ing 5.5m can anchor in the outer harbor.
Buadjupet
6.22 From the seaward entrance to Nogvafjorden, the off-
lying dangers run for a distance of about 22 miles in a NE di-
rection to Buadjupet.
Several channels lead in from seaward. The waters in this ar-
6.22
ea are foul and passage through them should not be attempted
without local knowledge.
From Storholmen Light (62°39'N., 5°56'E.), about 6 miles
6.22
WNW of Lepsoya, the off-lying dangers lie E of a line between
the light and Rosok-Havflua, a 9m patch, 13 miles NE. Howev-
er, Hella, Skreia, and Seigrunnane lie close W of this line about
2.75, 3.5, and 5.5 miles NNE, respectively, of Storholmen
Light.
Rosok Havflua (62°49'N., 6°13'E.), marked by a lighted
6.22
buoy, is situated on the NW side of the foul ground which ex-
tends 6.25 miles WNW from Haroya.
Ona Light (62°52'N., 6°33'E.), situated on an island, is
6.22
shown at a height of 40m.
Klakken (62°57'N., 6°43'E.), with a charted depth of 10m,
6.22
lies 15.5 miles ENE of Rosok-Havflua and 6 miles WNW of
Bud. Vessels approaching Buadjupet from the SW are advised
to keep well to the seaward to avoid the shoal water lying E of
a line between Rosok-Havflua and Klakken.
In gales, breakers form over shoals in this area, with depths
6.22
as great as 20 to 30m.
6.23 Bjornsund Light (62°54'N., 6°49'E.) is situated on
the E end of the islet of Mooya, at the N end of the Bjornsund
group, about 3 miles WSW of Bud.
Karlmedhammaren and Turiskallen lie, respectively, 6 and
6.23
6.25 miles NNW of Bjornsund Light. They have a least depth
of 26m, but vessels should avoid them in bad weather.
Jendemsfjellet, bearing between 134° and well open of
6.23
Bjornsund Light, leads in from seaward NE of Klakken.
The white sector of Bjornsund Light, ahead, leads in from
6.23
NW between Klakken and Karlmedhammaren to within 2.5
miles of the light, when course may be shaped either into Bu-
adjupet or Saltsteinsleia.
Pub. 182
134 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
Saltsteinsleia, which leads SSW to Haroyfjorden, passes W
6.23
of Krabben Light (62°52'N., 6°43'E.). The white sector of
Flatflesa Light, 1.75 miles SSW of Krabben Light, leads W of
toward Haroyfjorden.
For a continuation of Indreleia S, follow a reciprocal course
6.23
of directions previously given.
Buadjupet and Julsundet comprise the usual N approach
6.23
from seaward to Moldefjorden and Molde.
Buadjupet is about 1 mile wide between Staflua (62°54'N.,
6.23
6°51'E.), a 6.4m shoal 0.75 mile E of Bjornsund Light, and the
outer island lying W of Bud.
Vessels approaching Buadjupet from N steer in the white
6.23
sector of Bjornsund Light. which leads into the white sector of
Indre Haroy Light.
To enter Bud and Julsundet, follow a reciprocal course of di-
6.23
rections previously given.
Buadjupet to Kristiansund
6.24 From Buadjupet, the coast trends in a general ENE di-
rection for about 27 miles to Kristiansund. The coast is fronted
by groups of islets, rocks, and shoals which extend up to 8.5
miles from the mainland.
The coast is formed partly by the mainland and partly by the
6.24
NW coast of Averoya and by the islands on which Kristiansund
stands. The coast is mainly low and sparsely vegetated, and the
off-lying islands are bare and grey.
This is one of the most difficult parts of the Norwegian coast
6.24
to navigate. From Buadjupet, Indreleia leads into the open sea,
continuing NE through Hustadvika, then through
Ramnefjorden into Kristiansundsleia (63°09'N., 7°42'E.).
Several channels lead from seaward into this part of Indre-
6.24
leia. Local knowledge is required in some of the channels and
pilots should always be employed. Large vessels proceeding to
Kristiansund or Trondheim use Gripholen.
Tides—Currents.—Between Buadjupet and Kristiansund,
6.24
in calm weather, the tidal current usually sets ENE with the ris-
ing tide and WSW with the falling tide. With strong long-con-
tinued winds, the set of the current follows the direction of the
wind.
Hustadvika is the name used for the W part of the waters,
6.24
from Bud to Fugen. Hustadvika coastline is totally unprotected
against the sea, and the passage is foul with many shoals.
Waves from the SW to NW will be refracted over the Bua-
6.24
grunnen shoals, and refraction centers occur on the leeward
side. With waves from the N, Griptarane may cause a refrac-
tion center in the N portion of Hustadvika.
When the waves meet the current, the seas turn even more
6.24
turbulent. This is particularly noticeable in the passage be-
tween Kolbeinsflu and Bjyrnsund. Falling water causes an out-
going current from Julsundet, and with wind and waves from
the NW, the seas become very turbulent.
Precipitous breakers have been reported from the entire area.
6.24
Shemshesten (62°58'N., 7°11'E.), 665m high, rises 8.75
6.24
miles NE of Bud. Shemshesten is not only the name of the
above peak, but is also the name of a range of mountains, with
two other summits. From N, this range resembles a large prom-
ontory with three rounded summits and a steep fall on the sea-
ward side.
Pub. 182
6.25 Reinsfjellet (62°56'N., 7°56'E.), 12 miles SSE of
Kristiansund, is 994m high, and is surmounted by a television
mast.
Bremsneshatten, situated in the N part of Averoya 3 miles
6.25
SW of Kristiansund, is 130m high. It resembles a hat with a flat
crown.
Freikollen (63°03'N., 7°46'E.), 3.5 miles S of Kristiansund,
6.25
is a prominent summit, 629m high.
Kvernberget is a long light-colored mountain, 205m high,
6.25
with steep slopes on the NE and SW sides. It is situated in the
center of Nordlandet, 2 miles E of Kristiansund.
Magnillen (63°06'N., 8°05'E.), on the mainland 10 miles E
6.25
of Kristiansund, is 486m high. Although it is lower than the
surrounding mountains, it stands out owing to the steep fall on
its E side and three jagged peaks at the summit, recognizable at
a considerable distance.
There are three peaks on the island of Tustna, which are
6.25
220m, 856m, and 892m high, located, respectively, 8, miles
10.5 miles, and 11.25 miles ENE of Kristiansund.
Kristiansund has been reported to be a good radar target
6.25
from a distance of 26 miles.
Kvitholmen Light (63°01'N., 7°14'E.) is situated on an is-
6.25
land by the same name, which lies 1.25 miles offshore, about
11 miles NE of Bud. A racon is located at the light tower. Part
of a former light tower stands close to the light as a daymark.
Hestskjer Light (63°05'N., 7°30'E.) is situated on the W is-
6.25
let of the Hestskjer group, which lies 8 miles ENE of Kvithol-
men. A racon is located at the light tower, which is a square
house built into a conical tower 20m in height.
Grip Light (63°14'N., 7°37'E.), situated at the N end of the
6.25
Grip group on the S side of the seaward entrance to Gripholen,
is described in paragraph 6.30.
Approaches to Kristiansund
6.26 Hustadvika, the coastal waters between Buadjupet
and Kvitholmen, 11 miles NE, is encumbered by rocks, shoals,
and small islets. Indreleia leads through Hustadvika, at a dis-
tance of about 3 miles from the shore.
An area of isolated shoal heads lies on the N side of Hustad-
6.26
vika from Karlmedhammaren to the vicinity of Kroppen
(63°03'N., 6°59'E.), 7 miles ENE. Kroppen, a rock with a depth
of 5m, breaks in bad weather and is marked close NW by a
lighted buoy.
Kolbeinsflu (62°58'N., 6°53'E.), 4.5 miles NNE of
6.26
Bjornsund Light, has a least charted depth of 5m. It is the NW
extremity of the dangers fronting the mainland N of Bud and is
marked by a lighted buoy. Lyroddane Beacon, equipped with a
racon, is situated about 5 miles NE of Bjornsund Light.
Between Kolbeinsflu and Kvitholmen there are several chan-
6.26
nels, but local knowledge is required in them.
Fuglen (63°03'N., 7°09'E.), a small black islet marked by a
6.26
light and a racon, lies about 3 miles WNW of Kvitholmen.
Foul ground extends E and SE of Fuglen to Stabbeflu, a
6.26
1.4m patch lying 1 mile ESE; Midtflu, a 4.2m patch lies 0.35
mile SSW of Stabbeflu.
Ekneskjerfluene, with least depths of 10m, lies 1.75 miles
6.26
SE of Fuglen.
Fugleleia leads from seaward, N of Fuglen, to join Indreleia
6.26
N of Kvitholmen Fugleleia. It is about 3 miles wide between
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 135

Fuglen and Follingen, an islet situated to the NE. On the seaward side of Ramnefjorden, a line of rocks and is-
6.29

Orskjera is an extensive area of low-lying islets and rocks

6.26 lets extend from Sore Ramnen to Hilbaren (Hilbaane), 10 miles
which extends about 3 miles N from Follingen. They cannot be ENE. Shoals lie S of a line joining the two above points.
seen at any great distance and are awash in high seas. Midfjordsfallet, awash, lies 3.25 miles NNE of Hestskjer
6.29

Freikollen, in line with Follingen bearing 097°, leads close S

6.26 Light. Indre Skjellingen, a 4.5m patch, lies 0.6 mile E of Mid-
of Spunset, a 21m patch, which lies 3 miles NNW of Fuglen. fjordsfallet.
Bjogna (63°03'N., 7°17'E.), a rock, awash, lies on the N side
6.26 Helklakken (63°09'N., 7°38'E.), an 11m patch, lies in the
6.29

of the inner end of Fugleleia, 2 miles NE Kvitholmen. fairway, 5.25 miles NE of Hestskjer Light. Fausken, a 0.8m
patch, lies 1.25 miles NNE of Helklakken.
6.27 From a position about 5 miles WNW of Fuglen, steer From the vicinity of Hestskjeret, a course shaped to pass SE
6.29

toward Magnillen (63°08'N., 8°05'E.), bearing 085°, which
leads N of Kroppen and the shoals in that vicinity.
When N of Kroppen, and Fuglen is in sight, steer in an ESE
6.27
of Helklakken avoids all danger and leads to Kristiansundleia,
which forms part of the approach to Kristiansund.
Treflisleia leads into Ramnefjorden, about 5 miles NE of
6.29

direction to pass N of Fuglekrakken, a 4.4m patch lying 0.25
mile N of Fuglen. When clear of Fuglekrakken, steer to pass
about mid-way between Kvitholmen and Bjogna.
When approaching Fugleleia from NW at night, the white
6.27
Ramnegapet, and is not difficult access if Stavenes Light and
the beacon on Litle Skjelbreida (63°10'N., 7°10'E.), 5 miles
NW of Stavenes Light, can be identified.
Treflisa, marked by a beacon, is situated on the N side of the
6.29

sector of Kvitholmen Light leads E of Spunset and W of Snap- fairway, about 1 mile NE of Litle Skjelbreida.
ane, a 6m patch, situated nearly 4 miles N of Fuglen. Gamle Jakob, a rock, awash, and Gardstaren, an 11m patch,
6.29

When clear of Spunset and Snapane, the white sector of

6.27 lie 0.9 mile and 2 miles SE, respectively, from the beacon on
Kraka Light (63°01'N., 7°18'E.), situated 1.75 miles ESE of Litle Skjelbreida.
Kvitholmen, leads NE of Fuglekrakken and W of Follingsflu, a Lontarane (63°11'N., 7°31'E.), with a least depth of 3.7m,
6.29

3.8m patch situated 0.7 mile WSW of Follingen.
On reaching a position 2 miles NW of Kraka Light, course
6.27
may be altered ENE to join Indreleia.
lies 1.5 miles NW of Treflisa. Other shoals lie 1.5 miles NNW
of Lontarane.
Sydskjellingen, above water, lies on foul ground 0.9 mile SE
6.29

Ramnegapet, 6 miles NE of Fugleleia, leads in from seaward

6.27 of Treflisa.
E of Orskjera to join Indreleia in the vicinity of Hestskjeret. It From the vicinity of Lontarane, the white sector of Stavenes
6.29

is comparatively free from dangers and offers an easier ap- Light, bearing between 126° and 131°, leads between the bea-
proach than Fugleleia. cons on Litle Skjelbreida and Treflisa, and N of Gardstaren.

6.28 Stabben (63°08'N., 7°16'E.), a reef on the S side of
Ramnegapet, on the NE side of Orskjera, is awash. Jonstaren,
with a charted depth of 11m, lies 0.5 mile NE of Stabben, and
Grunnkampen, with a charted depth of 14m, lies in the fairway
1.5 miles ENE of Stabben.
The Ramnane group of islets, on the NE side of Ramnegapet,
6.28
are small black rocks which are not visible from any great dis-
tance.
Sore Ramnen (63°08'N., 7°24'E.), 3.5 miles NW from Hest-
6.28
6.30 Grip Light (63°14'N., 7°37'E.) is situated on the N
end of the Grip group, which is an extensive group of islets and
rocks from 5 to 9 miles NNW of Kristiansund. A racon is lo-
cated at the light tower, which is 44m in height and prominent.
All the islands of the group are small and low, and afford little
protection from wind and sea. They are not visible at any great
distance.

skjeret, is precipitous on its W side but slopes to the E; it is

marked by two beacons.
Boggrunnstaren, a 5.4m patch, lies on the S side of
6.28

Ramnegapet, 1.5 miles SE of Stabben.

Store Sortna (63°05'N., 7°24'E.), 6m high, lies 2.75 miles
6.28

WNW of Hestskjeret.
Store Sortna and Little Sortna, 0.8 mile SE, in range lead
6.28

through the fairway of Ramnegapet, passing S of Grunnkamp-

en and N of Jonstaren.
After passing Sore Ramnen, course can be altered E through
6.28

Ramnefjorden until N of Hestskjeret, where the track to Kris-

tiansund joins the track leading E from Fugleleia.
The white sector of Hetskjer Light (63°05'N., 7°30'E.)
6.28

leads in from seaward N of Grunnkampen and SW of Sore

Ramnen, to within about 3 miles of the light, when course can
be altered E into Ramnefjorden.

6.29 Ramnefjorden leads from the vicinity of Hestskjeret, By Alfred Diem, via Wikimedia Commons
6.30

8 miles ENE, into Kristiansundleia. 6.30 Grip Light

Stavenes Light (63°07'N., 7°40'E.) stands on Staveneset, the NE
6.29

extremity of Averoya, about 5 miles ENE of Hetskjer Light. 6.30 Griptarane comprise shoal patches which lie in the approach

Pub. 182
136 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
to Gripholen, 8 miles 2NW of Grip Light.
Nordre Fausken (63°14'N., 7°33'E.), a 1m patch, lies 1.5
6.30
miles W of Grip Light; Ytre Langfallet, another 1m patch, lies
0.8 mile ESE of the light.
Lonnfallet, a 1.5m patch, lie s about 2 miles ESE of Ytre
6.30
Langfallet.
Hilbaren (Hilbaane) (63°12'N., 7°44'E.), with a charted
6.30
depth of 2m, is marked by a light. It lies 1.25 miles SE of Lon-
nfallet.
Vestkleppen (63°18'N., 7°21'E.) is the shallowest part of
6.30
Griptarane and is usually marked by breakers. It lies 7.75 miles
NW of Grip Light.
Jorngrunna, a 24m patch, lies in the middle of Gripholen, 1.5
6.30
miles NNE of Grip Light.
Nordre Godtaren, with a least charted depth of 9m, lies in the
6.30
middle of the fairway, 1.5 miles NNE of Hilbaren.
Kjefallet (63°16'N., 7°40'E.), a 2m patch, lies on the NE
6.30
side of Gripholen, 3 miles NNE of Grip Light. Lontaren, an
11m patch, lies 0.35 mile S of Kjefallet.
Gasskjera, above water in places, lies 3 miles NE of Grip
6.30
Light. Gaseflua, with a charted depth of 10m, lies 0.6 mile SSE
of Gasskjera.
6.31 Gjeslingskjer Light (63°15'N., 7°48'E.), situated on
Gjeslingskjeret, stands 5 miles E of Grip Light. Islets and foul
water extend 0.6 mile SSW from the light.
When approaching from the W, the white sector of Grip
6.31
Light leads S of Griptarane to within 5 miles of the light.
When Hestskjer Light changes from white to red, course
6.31
should be altered into the white sector of Gjeslingskjer Light,
which leads N of the dangers off Grip.
From a position 1 mile NE of Grip Light, the white sector of
6.31
Ytre Langholmen Light (63°11'N., 7°52'E.) leads S of Nodre
Godtaren into Ytrefjorden.
When approaching from the N the white sector of Grip Light
6.31
leads between Griptarane and the dangers lying NW of Gjes-
lingskjer Light.
From the vicinity of Grip Light proceed as indicated above.
6.31
Pilotage.—There is a pilot boarding station 1 mile NNW of
6.31
Grip Light.
Caution.—Heavy seas in the passage SW of Gripholen to
6.31
Ytrefjorden S of Smyla are created particularly by wind from
the NW. The waves will come straight in from the sea, turning
E, S of Smyla. With falling water, the current goes against the
waves and causes heavy and choppy sea.
When the waves come from between NW-SW, a refraction
6.31
center will be created leeward of Griptarane. The conditions
become even worse when the tidal current toward the W is
combined with falling water. Under such conditions, precipi-
tous breakers have been observed.
6.32 After proceeding from seaward through Gripholen,
vessels should pass SW in Indreleia, steering in the white sec-
tor of Stavenes Light. Sondre Godtaren, with a charted depth of
29m, lies within this light sector, about 0.8 mile S of Nordre
Godtaren.
When the white sector of Raudsandnes Light (63°04'N.,
6.32
7°41'E.), situated 2.75 miles S of Stavenes Light, comes ahead,
steer on that light and enter Bremsnesfjorden.
When approaching Bremsnesfjorden from the SW, the white
6.32
Pub. 182
sector of Baltserneset Light, 1.5 miles SE of Stavenes Light,
leads through the entrance.
Bremsnesfjorden (63°06'N., 7°41'E.) is entered from N be-
6.32
tween Staveneset and Klubbeneset, 0.6 mile E. It is the princi-
pal entrance to Kristiansund.
Kverven (63°07'N., 7°40'E.), a 4m patch, lies 0.2 mile NW
6.32
of Stavenes Light on the W side of Bremsnesfjorden. A 2m
patch lies close off Klubbeneset on the E side of the fairway.
Bremsnesflua, a 4m patch, lies about 1 mile SE of Stavenes
6.32
Light, near the middle of the fairway.
6.33 Sorsundet (63°06'N., 7°44'E.) is entered between
Baltserneset, the SW extremity of Innlandet, and Smorvikne-
set, 0.3 mile N. It is not more than 91m wide between the shoal
depths on either side, and has a least depth of 13m in the fair-
way.
A breakwater, marked at its outer end by a light, extends
6.33
91m N from Innlandet, 0.35 mile ENE of Baltserneset. A 3m
patch lies 183m WNW of the breakwater head.
A bridge spans Sorsundet close E of the breakwater; it has
6.33
vertical clearances of 38m in the center and 32m on the sides.
A rock, with a depth of 6.8m, lies on the S side of the fair-
6.33
way 0.15 mile ENE of the breakwater head.
Vessels entering Sorsundet from Bremsnesfjorden steer in
6.33
the white sector of the light on the breakwater. When in the en-
trance of Sorsundet, steer on the light in the center of the
bridge bearing 061°, which leads through the sound.
6.34 Bolgsvaet (63°06'N., 7°44'E.) is entered from Brems-
nesforden S of Innlandet, and extends E to Talgsjoen.
Skjerveskjeret, marked by a light, lies 0.3 mile SE of Balter-
6.34
sneset, at the seaward edge of the foul ground which extends
0.2 mile S of Innlandet.
A 1m patch lies 160m NW of Skjerveskjeret; an isolated
6.34
7.9m patch lies the same distant SE.
Linflua (63°06'N., 7°44'E.), with a charted depth of 4m, lies
6.34
on the SE extremity of the foul ground, 0.25 mile E of Skjerve-
skjeret. Sjursvikgrunnen, a 7.5m patch, lies 0.4 mile ENE of
Linflua.
Bolgfallet, awash, lies near mid-channel, 0.8 mile S of Lin-
6.34
flua. A 4.2m patch lies 183m WSW of Bolgfallet and Vestre
Bolgfallet, a 5.2m patch, lies 91m farther WSW.
Kopparholmflua, awash, lies 0.25 mile S of Vestre Bolgfall-
6.34
et.
Kopparholmane, 3 small islets, lie on the S side of Bolgs-
6.34
vaet, 0.5 mile S of Linflua.
6.35 Vikaholmen Light (63°06'N., 7°46'E.) stands on the
S point of Vikaholmen, about 1.25 miles E of Baltersneset.
Vikaholmen is connected to the land to the N by a breakwater.
Vikaholmflua, a 1.6m patch, lies 0.15 mile W of Vikaholmen
6.35
Light. A 7.4m patch lies 0.4 mile SE of the light.
Anchorage may be taken on the E side of Vikaholmen, in
6.35
15m, sand, with patches of rocks.
Markussundet (63°06'N., 7°45'E.) lies between Innlandet,
6.35
on the W, and Nordlandet, on the E. Lights in line lead through
the fairway to the inner harbor of Kristiansund. Markussundet
it is deep and clear of dangers.
Austre Fugloygrunnen (63°06'N., 7°47'E.), on the S side of
6.35
Bolgsvaet, lies about 0.1 mile ENE of Fugloya. It has a least
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
charted depth of 2m. Vorpholmbaen, a 5m patch, lies about 0.1
mile SE of Austre Fugloygrunnen.
Vorpholmen lies in the entrance to Bolgvagen, about 0.1
6.35
mile S of Vorpholmbaen. A cable, with a vertical clearance of
30m, spans the narrow channel E of Vorpholmen.
Bolgvagen (63°05'N., 7°47'E.) is entered E of Vorpholmen.
6.35
Husoya forms its W side.
Close within the entrance, on the NE point of Husoya, there
6.35
are quays, totaling 110m in length, with depths of 13.6 to 3.3m
alongside.
6.36 Omsundet extends E about 3 miles, from a position S
of Vikaholmen Light, to its junction with Arsundfjorden. The
fairway is spanned with overhead cables about 1 mile and 1.25
miles E of Vikaholmen Light. A bridge, with a vertical clear-
ance of 18m over a width of 30m in mid-channel, also spans
the strait.
Anchorage.—Anchorage, with mooring rings, for medium and
6.36
small vessels, is available in the SW part of Bolgvagen, in 16m,
mud. Care should be taken to avoid the shoal bank which fringes
the S shore and a pipeline laid across the W part of the bay.
A light is situated on the foul ground in the center of the fair-
6.36
way, 0.7 mile E of the bridge. A beacon is situated on the foul
ground 160m ENE of the light. This area may be passed on ei-
ther side.
Omsundet is entered from Arsundfjorden N of Arholmen
6.36
(63°06'N., 7°53'E.), about 1 mile E of the bridge which spans
the fairway.
Kristiansund may be entered from the E through Norsundet,
6.36
which is spanned by a bridge with vertical clearance of 28m.
Kristiansund has a depth of 5.8m at LW.
Dalasundet extends ENE 1.75 miles from Norsundet and en-
6.36
ters Talgsjoen N of Kvitnes Light (63°08'N., 7°48'E.).
Tanker berths are situated in Dalasundet on NW side of Nor-
6.36
sundet.
A light stands on the NW edge of the spit which extends W
6.36
from a point that lies just over 1 mile ENE of the bridge which
spans Norsundet. A rocky bank, with a depth of 7.5m, lies on
the N side of the fairway 183m N of the light.
The white sector of Kvitnes Light, astern, leads NNW to-
6.36
ward Gripholen.
Talgsjoen is formed between Norlandet, on the SW side, and
6.36
the islets W of Tustna, on the NE side. It leads to Arsund-
fjorden, Freifjorden, and to Dalasundet.
Talgsjoen is deep and free of dangers; however, Talsgrun-
6.36
nane (63°10'N., 7°46'E.), a bank with a depth of 36m, lies 2
miles NNW of Kvitnes Light, and Klakkane, with a depth of
30m, lies 0.7 mile E of Talsgrunnane.
Kristiansund—Berth Information
Berth Length Depth
LOA
Vagekai
No. 1 60m 4.5m 90m
No. 2 90m 4.5m 90m
137
Kristiansund (63°07'N., 7°44'E.)
World Port Index No. 23100
6.37 During WWII, Kristiansund sustained heavy damage,
especially by a German bombardment in April of 1944. Com-
pletely rebuilt, it is now the home port for a large Norwegian
trawler fleet.
Kristiansund is situated on three small islands facing the
Norwegian Sea. Its harbor is protected by an inlet in the adja-
cent island of Frei and by the island of Averoy, and is bound on
the N by Kirkelandet and Gomalandet, on the S by Innlandet,
and on the E by Nordlandet.
The town of Kristiansund stands on all sides of the harbor.
6.37
Communications between the several parts are maintained by
ferries. When approached from seaward no houses can be seen
until close to the harbor entrance.
Port of Kristiansund Home Page
http://www.knhavn.no
Winds—Weather.—The predominant wind in Kristiansund
6.37
is from the S at a mean speed of 6 knots. However, in the
months of June, July, and August, in the afternoons, the winds
shift to the NW and N at about 4 knots. During the months De-
cember through March, there are an average of 2 days a month
with gale force winds of 34 knots or more.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Kristiansund is from
6.37
about 1 to 2m. The currents in Sorsundet and Norsundet some-
times reach a velocity of 3 knots.
The current in Sorsundet changes at HW and LW. The flow
6.37
is greatly influenced by the wind. In Norsundet, the current oc-
casionally changes with the tide, but is usually E.
Depths—Limitations.—The port is a main service base for
6.37
the coastal exploration and development of oil and gas fields.
There are facilities for mooring semi-submersible rigs. Vesslsl
with a maximum draft of 9.8m can be accommodated in the
port. Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table ti-
tled Kristiansund—Berth Information.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is available. Pilots should be ordered
6.37
through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
Vessels should call the Kristiansund pilot station on VHF
6.37
channel 16, at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the station does
not respond, the Floro or Rogaland Coastal Radio Station will
reply and relay information to the pilot station.
Maximum Vessel
Remarks
Draft Beam Size
Fishing vessels, breakbulk,
4.0m — —
and bunkers.
Fishing vessels, breakbulk,
4.0m — —
and bunkers.
Pub. 182
138 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

Kristiansund—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Fishing vessels, breakbulk,
No. 3 80m 4.5m 90m 4.0m — —
and bunkers.
Storkaia
Offshore vessels and bun-
No. 5 60m 9.0m 140m — 28.0m —
kers.
No. 6 — 10.0m 250m — — — Cruise vessels, offshore ves-
sels, and bunkers. Continu-
No. 7 — 10.0m 250m — — — ous berthing length of 97m.
Cruise vessels, offshore ves-
No. 8 104m 10.0m 320m — — —
sels, and bunkers.
Cruise vessels, offshore ves-
No. 9 105m 9.0m 180m — — —
sels, and bunkers.
Nordmorskaia
Ro/pax, ro-ro/lo-lo, trans-
No. 10 90m 8.0m 95m — — — shipment, offshore vessels,
fishing vessels, and bunkers.
Devoldholmen
Ro-pax, ro-ro freight, con-
tainers, offshore vessels,
No. 11 80m 8.0m 110m — 16.5m —
project/heavy cargo, and
bunkers.
No. 12 — 10.0m 260m — — — Fast ferries, ro-ro/lo-lo, ro/
pax, containers, offshore
vessels, project/heavy cargo,
No. 13 — 10.0m 260m — — — and bunkers. Continuous
berthing length of 205m.
Ro-pax, ro-ro freight, con-
tainers, offshore vessels,
Ro-ro 38m 17.0m 110m — — —
project/heavy cargo, and
bunkers.
Fishing Terminal
Fishing vessels, breakbulk,
Fisheries S 60 8.0m 130m — — —
and, bunkers.
Vestbase
No. 1 12m 6.0m 120m — 18.0m — Cement and bunkers.
Clean products, container,
No. 2 60m 10.0m 150m — 25.6m — breakbulk, and bunkers. 850
teu.
Clean products, container,
No. 3 45m 8.0m 100m — 17.0m —
steel products, and bunkers.
Clean products, ro-ro
No. 4 80m 1.00m 120m — 20.0m — freight, multipurpose, and
bunkers.
Clean products, ro-ro
No. 5 80m 10.0m 120m — 20.0m — freight, multipurpose, and
bunkers.

Pub. 182
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 139

Kristiansund—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Chemicals, clean products,
4.0-
No. 6 E — 130m — 20.0m — cement, multipurpose, and
9.0m
bunkers.
Chemicals, clean products,
4.0-
No. 6 W — 120m — 20.0m — cement, multipurpose, and
9.0m
bunkers.
Chemicals, clean products,
3.0-
No. 7 63m 120m — 20.0m — cement, multipurpose, and
7.0m
bunkers. 620 teu.
Ro/pax, ro-ro freight, con-
No. 7 E 45m 9.0m 100m — 18.0m —
tainers, bunkers.
Clean products, ro.pax, ro-
4.0-
No. 8 45m 230m — 28.0m — ro freight, containers, and
21.0m
bunkers.
No. 9 40m 10.0m 140m — 16.5m — Chemicals and LNG.
ExxonMobil Terminal
Bunkering 33m 12.1m 119.9m — — — Clean products.
GC Rieber Marine Oils Terminal
CG Rieber Marine
120m 10.0m 110m — 17.0m — Clean products.
Oil
Norske Shell Kristiansund
Chemicals and clean prod-
Norske Shell 18 12.1m — — 26.0m 35,000 dwt
ucts.
Veidekke Industri
Dirty products and bunkers.
Veidekke 15m — 135m — 23.0m — Berthing length of 70m (in-
cluding dolphins).
Kristiansund Fryseterminal
Clean products, containers,
Kristiansund
80m 10.0m 150m 9.8m — — offshore, fishing, bunkers,
Fryseterminal
reefer.
Kristiansund Base
Chemicals, containers, steel
East 70m — 135m — 22.5m — products, breakbulk, and
bunkers. 862 teu.
Aggregates, sand, and
Platform 90m — 90m — 25.0m —
breakbulk.
Clean products, container,
West 80m — 150m — 25.0m —
breakbulk, and bunkers.
Dale Industripark Terminal
Project/heavy cargo and
No. 1 44m 7.5m 117m — 18.0m —
bunkers.
Project/heavy cargo, break-
No. 2 37m 10m 86m — 16.0m —
bulk, and bunkers.

Pub. 182
140 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

Kristiansund—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Clean products, project/
No. 3 60m 6m 90m — 14.5m — heavy cargo, breakbulk, and
bunkers
Averoy Industripark
Clean products, containers
Averoy 240m 6m 150m — 25m —
breakbulk, and bunkers.
Aibel AS
Offshore vessels, project/
Northwest 105m 5m 81m — 16.0m —
heavy cargo, and bunkers.
Clean products, project/
South 52m 5-9m — — — —
heavy cargo, and bunkers.
Offshore vessels, project/
West 109m 5-12m — — — —
heavy cargo, bunkers.
Sub Sea Base
Ro/pax, ro-ro fright, con-
East 50m — 120m — 21.0m — tainers, breakbulk, and bun-
kers. Waiting berth.
Containers, breakbulk, and
West 40m — 90m — 14.5m —
bunkers. Waiting berth.
Skretting Averoy
Clean products, animal
feeds, and bunkers. Berthing
Averoy Jetty 54m — 120m — 18.0m —
length of 180m (including
dolphins).
Animal feeds, containers,
Northwest 40m — 100m — 16.0m —
and bunkers. 225 teu.
Southwest 33m — 100m — 16.0m — Animal feeds and bunkers.
Raudsandneset
Containers, steel products,
General Cargo 34m — 70m — 12.0m —
breakbulk, and bunkers.
Leroy Hydrotech Terminal
Containers, steel products,
Leroy Hydrotech 112m 2.0m 200m — 32.2m — fishing vessels, breakbulk,
and bunkers.
Hogset Terminal
No. 1 42m 8.2m 137.9m — — — Containers and reefer.

The pilot boards 1 mile NNW of Grip Light. Depending on

6.37 Regulations.—Within the harbor limits the speed of a vessel
6.37

weather conditions, vessels may be directed to proceed E of is to be no more than good seamanship and maneuverability re-
Grip Light to make boarding easier. quire.
Sea pilots are stationed at Kristiansund. They also act as har-
6.37 Speed is to be reduced to prevent wash in Norsundet W of
6.37

bor pilots, however, harbor pilotage is not compulsory for mer- Teistholmen; Markussundet, N of the cold store at Sjursvika;
chant ships. Sorsundet, E of the breakwater; Holmasundet; and Overvagen.

Pub. 182
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 141

6.37 Kristiansund Harbor

Signals.—Berthing signals are shown from a signal mast

6.37 Contact Information.—See the table titled Kristiansund—
6.37

which stands on Storkaia. They consist of red, green, and white Contact Information.
flags by day and red, green, and white lights by night.
Kristiansund—Contact Information
Signal Meaning VHF VHF channel 12
One white Berth No. 1 Telephone 47-40-006504
Two white Berth No. 2
Facsimile 47-71-671483
Three white Berth No. 3 E-mail info@knhavn.no
One red Berth No. 4
Two red Berth No. 5 Anchorage.—There is limited anchorage for medium size
6.37

ships in the main port area, but there is ample space in the close
Three red Berth No. 6 approaches to the harbor with well sheltered holding ground, in
One green Berth No. 7 depths of 13 to 49m.
Two green Berth No. 8
6.38 In the vicinity of Kristiansund there are several fjords
Three green Berth No. 9 collectively known as Nordmorsfjordene. These fjords lie in
the N part of the district of More. They penetrate inland to po-
One red and one green Berth No. 10
sitions about 12 miles S and 35 miles SE and E of the town.
One white and one red Berth No. 11 The islands of Averoya (63°00'N., 7°30'E.), Frei, Tustna, Stab-
6.38

One white and one green Berth No. 12 ben, and Ertvagoya, lie, in that order, from W to E and are separat-
ed from the mainland by the outer fjords of Nordmorsfjordene.
Flashing green Anchor in the harbor Lauvoyfjorden (Lovofjorden) (63°00'N., 7°20'E.) lies on
6.38

Flashing white Close to hailing distance the W side of Averoya, and is entered from seaward by passing

Pub. 182
142 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
through the chain of islets which extend ENE from the vicinity
of Kraka Light.
There are several passages between the islets, all of them
6.38
narrow and requiring local knowledge.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents run strongly in the
6.38
entrance to Lauvoyfjorden, with reported rates of up to 4 knots
at half tide. Strong NW winds raise heavy seas during ebb cur-
rents. In these circumstances, the entrance channels are diffi-
cult to navigate.
Tovikholmen Light (62°59'N., 7°21'E.) is situated close off
6.38
the W extremity of Averoya. Trovikholmane lies in Lauvoy-
fjorden, 0.75 mile NNE of the light.
Lauvoyfjorden is practically free of dangers, with the excep-
6.38
tion of Trovikholmane and Hjertvikholmane, which lies about
1 mile farther NE.
Kornstadfjorden (62°57'N., 7°25'E.) is entered from Lau-
6.38
voyfjorden SW of Tovikholmen Light, and leads 5 miles SE to
its junction with Kvernesfjorden, off the S extremity of Ave-
roya.
Kvernesfjorden (62°57'N., 7°37'E.) trends NE from its
6.38
junction with Kornstadfjorden for about 8 miles to the S end of
Bremsnesfjorden. It is free of dangers in the fairway. Brems-
nesfjorden is about 7 miles long from its seaward entrance.
6.39 The S part of Bremsnesfjorden lies between Frei, on
the E side, and Averoya, on the W, and, apart from shoals
which are marked, is clear of dangers.
Bremsnesfjorden is entered from S between Lundenes
6.39
(63°00'N., 7°44'E.), the E extremity of Averoya, and Kvitneset,
the S extremity of Flatsetoy, 1 mile NE.
Gullsetholmen, a small islet, lies on the W side of the fjord
6.39
0.7 mile NNW of Lundenes.
Leitnes Light (63°02'N., 7°41'E.) stands on the W side of
6.39
the fjord, 1.75 miles NW of Lundenes. The white sector of this
light leads into Bremsnesfjorden.
Steer to pass E of Leitnes Light, and bring the light, astern,
6.39
which will lead N through the fjord and E of Raudsandnes
Light, situated 2.5 miles N.
An overhead cable, with vertical clearance of 39m, spans
6.39
Bremsnesfjorden close N of Leitnes Light.
Flatoya, Amundoya, Brattoya, Arholmen, and Tjuvholmen
6.39
(63°04'N., 7°42'E.) lie off the W coast of Frei, from 0.5 to 1
mile SE of Raudsandnes Light.
Freifjorden (63°03'N., 7°55'E.) is entered between Flatsetoy
6.39
and Bergsoya, 2 miles SE. It leads 7 miles NE. Freifjorden is
formed between Frei, on the W side, and Bergsoya, Aspoya,
and the NW part of the Tingvoll peninsula, on the E.
Freines Light (63°01'N., 7°49'E.) stands on the S extremity
6.39
of Frei, 0.75 mile E of Flatsetoy. Refsholmtaren, a 2.4m shoal
patch, lies 0.8 mile SSW from the light.
6.40 Steet (63°00'N., 7°48'E.), consisting of islets and
rocks, awash, lies 0.5 mile S of Revsholmtaren. Jaholmen lies
0.7 mile E, and an 8.8m rocky patch, lies 0.6 mile ENE, respec-
tively, from Steet.
Vessels may enter Freifjorden by steering in the white sector
6.40
of Freines Light, which leads between Revsholmtaren and
Revsholmen (63°01'N., 7°47'E.), a small islet 0.85 mile WSW
of Freines Light.
The white sector of Strandanes Light (62°59'N., 7°42'E.),
6.40
Pub. 182
astern, leads SE of Revsholmtaren and N of Steet into
Freifjorden. Once clear of the shoals, the fjord is almost entire-
ly clear of dangers in the fairway.
The white sector of Skarvbergnes Light (63°05'N., 7°58'E.)
6.40
leads NNE into Freifjorden.
Kvisvikholmane (63°03'N., 7°57'E.), among which are Sto-
6.40
rholmen and Klubbholmen, lie up to 1 mile N of Aspoya on the
E side of Freidfjorden.
Arsundoya (63°06'N., 7°59'E.), situated close off the
6.40
Tingvoll Peninsula and about 2 miles E of Frei, lies at the junc-
tion of Freifjorden, Arsundfjorden, and Talgsjoen. Skarvberg-
nes Light is situated on the SW extremity of Arsundoya.
The Inner Fjords
6.41 The Tingvoll district occupies the greater part of a
peninsula, which has an average width of 4 miles and extends
30 miles NNW from the head of Sundalsfjorden. Tingvoll-
fjorden and Sundalsfjorden lie on the W side of this peninsula,
and are reached from Kvernesfjorden and Freifjorden through
Gjemnessundet or Bergsoysundet and Bergsoyfjorden.
Gjemnessundet (62°58'N., 7°48'E.) is entered between Kra-
6.41
kholmen, which lies close off the SW extremity of Bergsoya,
and Ikkorneset, 1 mile WSW.
Seiholmane, situated on a shoal, awash, lies 0.4 mile WSW
6.41
of Krakholmen. Omolmane, on the W side of the fairway, lies
0.4 mile SSE of Seiholmane. A 7.3m rocky patch lies in the
fairway 0.7 mile ESE of Omolmane.
The Gjemnessund Bridge, with a vertical clearance of 42m
6.41
and a main span of 632m between two 108m high towers, ex-
tends SSW across Gjemnssundet from a position about 0.2
mile SE of Krakholmen Light (62°59'N., 7°47'E.).
Bergsoysundet is formed between Bergsoya, on the W, and
6.41
Aspoya, on the E.
Maloya, a small islet, is connected to the N extremity of
6.41
Bergsoya by a bridge.
Brusen (63°00'N., 7°52'E.) lies close NE of Maloya;
6.41
Skallen, a 7.3m patch, lies 0.4 mile NE of Brusen.
The tidal current in Bergsoysunde can be strong, especially
6.41
when from the N.
6.42 Bergsoyfjorden extends about 5 miles ENE from its
W entrance, at the junction with Gjemnessundet. Except for the
shoals, which are marked, the fjord is clear of dangers.
Bergsoyholmen (62°58'N., 7°53'E.) lies close offshore, 0.2
6.42
mile SE of the E extremity of Bergsoya. A shoal, awash, lies at
the extremity of the foul ground which extends 0.4 mile SW of
Bergsoyholmen.
Kvalvagholmen Light (62°59'N., 8°00'E.), situated at the
6.42
SE entrance point of Bergsoyfjorden, lies 3.5 miles SE of
Bergsholmen.
Vessels may enter Bergsoyfjorden from Gjemnessundet as
6.42
previously directed. When clear of that fairway, steer in the
white sector of Kvalvagholmen Light. When S of Bergshol-
men, steer to pass about 0.3 mile N of that light.
Vessels entering Bergsoyfjorden from Bergsoysundet, when
6.42
clear of the SW extremity of Apsoya, steer in the white sector
of Kvalvagholmen Light. Then steer to pass N of the light, then
into Tingvollfjorden.
Batnfjorden (62°56'N., 7°45'E.) leads 5 miles SW from
6.42
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
Gjemnessundet and Bergsoyfjorden. The fjord is clear of dan-
gers but there are no anchorages.
Batnfjordsoren, at the head of the fjord, is the administrative
6.42
center for the district. On the S side of the bay there is a quay,
10m long, with a depth of 3.1m alongside.
Tingvollfjorden is entered between Kvalvagholmen
6.42
(62°59'N., 8°00'E.) and Strupneset, 1.5 miles N, and extends
19 miles SE. Sundalsfjorden continues 5 miles farther SE. The
fjord is to a large extent clear of dangers and is not difficult to
navigate.
Ekremsholmane (63°00'N., 8°02'E.) lie up to 0.45 mile off-
6.42
shore, on the NE side of the fjord, 1.5 miles NNE of Kvalvag-
holmen.
Sognskjer Light is situated on the W side of the fjord, 4.75
6.42
miles SSE of Kvalvagholmen. The white sector of Sognskjer
Light leads through the N part of Tingvollfjorden.
Anchorage is available in Gagnat, 0.5 mile WNW of Sogn-
6.42
skjer Light, in depths of 35 to 45m, sand and clay, steeply
shelving. It is advisable to lay out hawsers to the shore.
A 1.2m patch lies in mid-channel, 0.75 mile SE of Sognskjer
6.42
Light. A 3.4m patch, marked by a beacon, lies 0.5 mile SSW of
the 1.2m patch.
The white sector of Sognskjer Light, astern, leads S in
6.42
Tingvollfjorden, W of the above dangers.
6.43 Tingvollvagen (62°54'N., 8°11'E.), an inlet on the E
side of the fjord 1.5 miles SSE of Sognskjer Light, affords an-
chorage at its head, in 15m, clay.
Tingvoll, at the head of Tingvollvagen, is the administrative
6.43
center for the district. Near the church is a quay, 7m long, with
a depth of 4m alongside. There is also a quay near the ferry
berth at the head of the inlet; it is 25m long, with depths of 0.6
to 5m alongside.
Angvik (62°53'N., 8°06'E.) lies on the W side of the fjord, 2
6.43
miles SSW of Sognskjer Light. Anchorage may be taken off
Angvik, in 18 to 40m, clay. Southwest winds can raise a con-
siderable sea in the bay, and it is advisable to lay out hawsers to
the shore.
Berths are situated at an iron ore and gravel works situated
6.43
on the W side of the fjord, 3 miles S of Angvik. There are
depths of 4 to 10.3m alongside the quays.
At Rausand, close S of the iron ore works, there is a quay,
6.43
12m long, with depths of 2.6 to 4.4m alongside.
6.44 Meloy Light (62°48'N., 8°18'E.) is situated on an is-
let in the middle of Tingvollfjorden, 5 miles SE of Rausand.
The white sector of the light leads ESE from the vicinity of
Rausand.
Flaoya Light stands on the SW side of Flaoya, 5 miles ESE
6.44
of Meloy Light.
The fairway, either N or S of Meloy Light, is free of charted
6.44
dangers.
The white sector of Flaoya Light leads about 4 miles SE in
6.44
Tingvollfjorden from the vicinity of Meloy.
Oksendal (62°43'N., 8°26'E.) is situated at the head of a
6.44
cove entered about 1 mile SSW of Flaoya. Good anchorage is
available off the public jetty, in clay, where the depths change
less rapidly than elsewhere.
Sunndalsfjorden leads 5 miles SSE from Flaoya to Sunndal-
6.44
sora.
143
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 46m, spans
6.44
Sunndalsfjorden, about 2 miles SE of Flaoya.
The white sector of Flaoya Light, astern, leads ESE in Sun-
6.44
dalsfjorden, but patches of 7.3 and 9.1m, lie within this sector
about 0.3 mile ESE of Flaoya.
Sunndalsora (62°41'N., 8°33'E.) (World Port Index No.
6.44
23105) lies on the E side of Sunndalsfjorden, near its head.
Depths—Limitations.—The Sunndalsora Quay is located at
6.44
the Hydro Aluminum Terminal. The quay is 305m in length
and vessels up to 200m in length, 11m draft, 32.5m beam, and
50,000 dwt can be accommodated. The quay handles coal, pet-
coke, ro-ro/lo-lo, containers, steel products, breakbulk, and
bunkers. A ro-ro ramp is located E of the quay; LNG is trans-
ferred by a road tanker.
Pilotage.—For pilotage information, see paragraph 6.37.
6.44
Contact Information.—See the table titled Sunndalsora—
6.44
Contact Information.
Sunndalsora—Contact Information
VHF VHF channels 9 and 16
Telephone 47-71-693453
Facsimile 47-71-693607
Krokshavn (62°41'N., 8°32'E.), situated on the W shore of
6.44
Sunndalsfjorden WSW of Sunndalsora, has two bunkering
quays, each 9m long, with 2.8 to 10m alongside. A quay at the
power station is 55m long, with depths of 6.2 to 18m along-
side.
6.45 From Arsundfjorden (63°07'N., 8°00'E.),
Halsefjorden and Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden), which lie E of
the Tingvoll Peninsula, lead SSE and give access to a group of
fjords which include Bofjorden, Alvunfjorden, Stangvik-
fjorden, Todalsfjorden, Surnadalsfjorden, and Hamnesfjorden.
Arsundfjorden is entered between Arsundoya and Krakoya,
6.45
1.75 miles N. The fjord leads 5 miles E from its junction with
Talgsjoen and Freifjorden, S of Tustna.
Arsundbaen (63°07'N., 8°02'E.) lies on the S side of the
6.45
fjord, about 1.2 miles ENE of Arsundoya. Rocks, awash, lie
close W.
Hestholmen, with foul ground W and NW of it, lies 0.3 mile
6.45
offshore, 1.5 miles E of Arsundbaen. A 1.2m patch lies about
0.6 mile ESE.
Volongoya (63°08'N., 8°09'E.) lies on the S side of Arsund-
6.45
fjorden, 2 miles ENE of Hestholmen. Langskjera, on which a
beacon stands, lies 0.2 mile N of Volongoya; Hattholmen lies
about 0.1 mile off its SW point.
The white sector of Haukomin Light (63°09'N., 8°16'E.)
6.45
leads through Arsundfjorden to the entrance of Halsefjorden
and into Korsnesfjorden.
6.46 Halsefjorden (63°04'N., 8°12'E.) is entered between
Furuholmane, 0.4 mile SE of Hestholmen, and Volongoya. It
leads 9 miles SSE from Arsundfjorden into Trongfjorden
(Trangfjorden).
Furunes Light stands on Furuneset, near the W entrance to
6.46
Halsefjorden. The white sector of this light leads from Kors-
nesfjorden into Halsefjorden, keeping SE of Volongoya.
Pub. 182
144 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

By Carl S Bj (Own work), [CC-BY-SA-3.0 (http://crearivecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/)], via Wikimedia Commons

Sunndalsfjorden and the Sunndal Aluminum Works as viewed from Litjkalkinn summit

Anchorage is available off Vikan, on the W shore, about 1

6.46 of Bofjorden, about 0.8 mile within the entrance. Numerous
mile SSE of Furuneset, in 9 to 22m. dangers lie on the N side of the fairway, N and NE of the light.
Saksnes Light (63°02'N., 8°14'E.), situated on the E side of
6.46 Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden) continues 2 miles SE from the
6.46

the fjord 5.5 miles SSE of Furuneset, bearing between 147°
and 157° leads through the N part of Halsefjorden; pass W of
this light and bring it astern bearing between 312° and 320°,
which leads into Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden).
An ammunition dump is charted with its center situated
6.46
about 0.9 mile SSE of Saksnes Light.
Bofjorden is entered on the E side of Halsefjorden, 3 miles
6.46
SE of Saksnes Light, and leads 2 miles E. Asskardfjorden con-
tinues 3 miles farther E.
Bosundet, the narrow channel leading from Bofjorden into
6.46
entrance to Bofjorden, to an exit between Aksneset (62°57'N.,
8°20'E.) and Batvikneset, a promontory, 1.25 miles ENE. A
light is situated on Aksneset; a cable with a vertical clearance
of 35m spans Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden), close N of Aksne-
set.
6.47 Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden) exits into a basin from
which several fjords open; they are discussed in order from S to
N.
Alvunfjorden (62°54'N., 8°22'E.) is entered between Aks-
6.47

Asskardfjorden, has a least depth of 6.7m. It is spanned by a
drawbridge with a vertical clearance of 2m when closed.
Staknes Light (63°01'N., 8°21'E.) is situated on the SE side
6.46
neset and Nesoya, 2.75 miles SSE. For the most part the fjord
is clear of dangers and is easy to navigate.
The white sector of the light on Aksneset, bearing astern,
6.47

Pub. 182
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
leads into the N part of Alvunfjorden, keeping E of the dangers
which lie SSE of the light.
Meisingsetvagen is entered on the S side of Alvunfjorden,
6.47
about 4 miles SSE of Aksneset. It extends about 2 miles SW.
Alvund lies at the head of Alvundfjorden. It is connected to
6.47
the national road network.
Stangvikfjorden is entered between Nesoya and Soloyet
6.47
(62°57'N., 8°26'E.), 2 miles NNE.
A bank, which dries in places and is marked by a beacon, ex-
6.47
tends 0.2 mile offshore, 0.8 mile S of Soloyet.
Rokkem Light (62°53'N., 8°30'E.), situated on the S side of
6.47
Stangvikfjorden, 3.75 miles within its entrance, is a good mark
for entering the fjord. This light bearing between 133° and
151°, ahead, leads into the fjord, clear of the dangers. Pass on
the N side of the light, then bring it astern bearing between
272° and 282°, which will lead into Todalsfjorden.
Todalsfjord is entered E of Flesa (62°52'N., 8°35'E.), a low
6.47
islet lying close off a headland, 2.5 miles ESE of Rokkem
Light, and extends 4.5 miles SSE.
Todalsfjorden ices over every year; in severe winters the ice
6.47
extends into Stangvikfjorden.
A good anchorage is available in Svinvik, on the E side of
6.47
the fjord 1.75 miles SSE of Flesa, in 17 to 19m, sand. The an-
chorage is exposed to mountain squalls.
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 65m, spans
6.47
Todalsfjorden close S of Svinvik.
Todalsfjorden Light (62°50'N., 8°38'E.) stands on the W
6.47
shore 2.25 miles SSE of Flesa. The white sector of the light
leads through the N part of Todalsfjorden. With the light bear-
ing between 271° and 285°, astern, transit may be made toward
the head of the bay.
A good anchorage is available on the W side of the head of
6.47
the fjord, in 16m, clay, close N of Todalen.
6.48 Surnadalsfjorden extends 4.5 miles E from its en-
trance between Torvikneset (62°57'N., 8°26'E.) and Kjer-
groneset, 0.7 mile NW.
There are two quays, each 10m long, located at Arnes, a vil-
6.48
lage on the N side of the fjord, situated 0.8 mile NE of Torvi-
kneset. There are depths of 7.5 to 8.5m and 3 to 7.5m,
respectively, alongside the quays.
Hamnesfjorden is entered W of Kjergroneset (62°58'N.,
6.48
8°28'E.) and leads 5 miles NE. Vargoya, a small islet, lies 0.25
mile W of Kjergroneset A shoal, awash, lies off the SW point
of the islet. Hamnesfjorden affords shelter for small vessels.
Korsnesfjorden is entered from Arsundfjorden N of Volon-
6.48
goya (63°08'N., 8°09'E.) and leads 5 miles E between Tunsta
and Stabben on the N and the mainland on the S, into Arasvik-
fjorden.
Haukomkin Light (63°09'N., 8°16'E.) is situated on the S
6.48
shore of Korsnesfjorden, about 3 miles E of Volongoya.
The white sector of Haukomkin Light leads from Arsund-
6.48
fjorden, N of Volongoya, toward the entrance to Skalvik-
fjorden. Overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 40m, span
Korsnesfjorden, close E of Haukomkin Light.
Skalvikfjorden, a relatively shallow fjord, extends 4.5 miles
6.48
SSE from its entrance, close SW of Haukomkin Light.
One mile within the entrance of the fjord, an islet lies in the
6.48
center of the fjord. An overhead cable spans the fjord at the is-
let, with a vertical clearance of 26m over the W channel and
145
30m over the E channel.
6.49 Solemsundet (63°12'N., 8°11'E.) leads from the N
side of Korsnesfjorden between Tustna and Stabben, 5.5 miles
NNW to Edoyfjorden. It has been reported to be navigable by
vessels of 90m length, 13m beam and 6m draft.
Halsneset Light, situated on the SE extremity of Tustna, and
6.49
other lights in Solemsundet provide marks for vessels in tran-
sit. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 18m, spans the chan-
nel 3 miles within its S entrance. An overhead cable, with a
vertical clearance of 20m, spans the channel close N of the
bridge.
Imarsundet (63°12'N., 8°18'E.), a shallow passage, is en-
6.49
tered from S between Oykan, the SE point of Stabben, and the
SW point of Ertvagoya and leads NNW between these two is-
lands for a distance of 4.5 miles, then 2 miles farther NNW into
Edoyfjorden.
The fairway of Imarsundet, off the N point of Stabben, is
6.49
spanned by an overhead cable with a vertical clearance of 20m.
Arasvikfjorden (63°09'N., 8°25'E.) is entered between Tak-
6.49
neset (63°09'N., 8°20'E.), and the SW extremity of Ertvagoya,
0.9 mile NNW, and leads 7 miles ENE to Aroya, an islet lying
on the W side of the entrance to Auresundet.
The fjord is, for the most part, clear of dangers and is steep-
6.49
to up to the shore.
Risholmen Light (63°09'N., 8°32'E.) stands on an islet 5
6.49
miles E of Takneset. A white sector of the light leads through
the W part of Arasvikfjorden, clear of the dangers.
A white sector of Risholmen Light, bearing astern, leads
6.49
through the E part of Arasvikfjorden, keeping NW of Aroya
(63°11'N., 8°36'E.), and into Auresundet. Another white sector
leads S of Aroya and into Vinjefjorden.
Valsoyfjorden is entered between Otneset (63°08'N.,
6.49
8°31'E.) and Stokkneset, 1.75 miles NE, and leads 4.5 miles
SE.
Valsoya and Kjoloya lie on the S side of Korsnesfjorden, in
6.49
the entrance to Valsoyfjorden. Although the outer part of Val-
soyfjorden is foul, it is well marked. Channels leading E and W
of Valsoya each have a least depth of 3.8m. A bridge, with a
vertical clearance of 24m, spans the E channel.
Valsoyfjorden is often frozen in winter.
6.49
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 28m, spans
6.49
Valsoyfjorden 2.25 miles within its entrance.
Vessels should not enter Valsoyfjorden without local knowl-
6.49
edge.
6.50 Auresundet is entered at the E end of Arasvikfjorden
E of Rumpenneset (63°11'N., 8°35'E.), the SE extremity of
Ertvagoya, and leads 7 miles NNW between Ertvagoya, Rot-
toya, and Ruoya on the W, and the mainland, on the E, into
Gjerdesvika. It has been reported to be navigable by vessels up
to 90m in length, 13m beam, and 6m draft.
The tidal current in Auresundet is usually flowing N and
6.50
strongest during the rising tide. There may, however, be a S
flow during the falling tide, which is considered to be a sign of
bad weather at sea. The flow can be strong in the narrows at the
N end of Auresundet.
A light stands on the W extremity of Vikaneset (63°12'N.,
6.50
8°36'E.) just over 1 mile NNE of Rumpenneset. A white sector
of the light leads W of Aroya and E of a spit with 1m depth 0.5
Pub. 182
146 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
mile NNW of Aroya. Another white sector of the light leads E
of Aroya and N into Auresundet.
There is anchorage, in 22m, in a cove W of the light on
6.50
Vikaneset.
A cable spans Auresundet between Rottoya and the main-
6.50
land. It has a vertical clearance of 30m.
The white sector of the light on Vikaneset, bearing astern,
6.50
leads farther N into Auresundet. A shoal patch with a depth of
2.7m, lies within these bearings close NE of the N point of Rot-
toya. The light bearing 151° leads through the narrows between
Rottoya and the mainland.
Sveholmen Light (63°17'N., 8°29'E.) is situated on the SW
6.50
extremity of Sveholmen. The white sector of this light leads
NE of Ruoya. When NE of Ruoya steer a mid-channel course
and pass SW of Sveholmen Light and then into Gjerdesvika.
Transit of Auresundet should not be attempted without local
knowledge.
Vinjefjorden continues E from Arasvikfjorden, and leads 10
6.50
miles E from Aroya to Vinjeora, at its head.
Hovedehammaren Light (63°12'N., 8°51'E.) is situated on
6.50
the S side of the fjord, 6.75 miles within its entrance.
A white sector of the light ahead, leads through the W part of
6.50
Vinjefjorden; another white sector, bearing astern, leads
through the E part of the fjord to its head.
Anchorage is available WNW of Vinjeora, in 16 to 20m,
6.50
sand and clay.
Caution.—A bridge, with a maximum clearance of 15m, has
6.50
been constructed spanning the N part of Auresundet.
The Outer Coast—Kristiansund to Trondheim
6.51 From Grip Light(63°14'N., 7°37'E.), at the seaward
end of Gripholen, the islands and rocks off the coast extend
about 75 miles NE to the island of Halten.
The Halten Islands are situated on the W side of the entrance
6.51
to Frohavet, the primary approach channel from N to Trond-
heim, a distance of about 75 miles, through the various chan-
nels.
The three large islands of Smola, Hitra, and Froya front this
6.51
stretch of coast. Smola, the farthest S, is low-lying in compari-
son with the mainland and other islands in its vicinity. It rises
to a height of about 67m at the SE end. Hitra, situated NE, is
the highest, about 305m high, and the largest of the three.
Froya, the farthest N, lies close N of Hitra.
Numerous small islands, islets, and dangers extend seaward
6.51
to a distance of about 8 miles from Smola and up to 12 miles N
and more than 30 miles.
The tidal currents usually set ENE with the rising tide and
6.51
WSW with the falling tide, following the trend of the coast.
Caution.—Several environmentally sensitive sea areas, with
6.51
trawling restrictions and best seen on the chart, lie E and S of
Storeneset (63°44.7'N., 5°20.2'E.). These areas lie approxi-
mately 40 miles W of Froya Bank (63°46.8'N., 7°21.3'E.).
6.52 Morkedalstua (63°30'N., 8°31'E.), in the SW part of
Hitra, and Havikfjellet, 5 miles NE, are both conspicuous.
When approaching the coast, at a distance of 5 or 10 miles N
6.52
of Halten, the land may be seen as far as Tonnelsfjell, 372m
high, which rises about 24 miles SSE of Halten.
To the N, Oksbasheia, 228m high, is visible at a distance of
6.52
Pub. 182
32 miles ENE of Halten.
Store Kopperen (63°48'N., 8°44'E.), 476m high, rises about
6.52
3 miles ENE of Tonnelsfjell. It resembles a haystack. In clear
weather, Store Kopperen may be seen from 40 miles distant.
On Linesoya, an island 14.5 miles SE of Halten, Linesfjell
6.52
(64°01'N., 9°54'E.), rises to a height of 229m. Linesfjell is sep-
arated from a similar height by a steep cleft with a small round
knot in it.
Almeningskollen, situated on an island about 16 miles E of
6.52
Halten, can be seen from a distance of 15 to 20 miles. It ap-
pears rounded from W or N, and is easily identified. Tron-
ningsfjell, 297m high, rises about 5 miles SE of
Almeningskollen, can be seen from 15 to 17 miles seaward. It
is marked by a conspicuous slanting road.
6.53 Reimane (63°31'N., 7°50'E.) lies in the S part of a
large area of low light-colored rocks which cannot be distin-
guished from afar. Storbaen lies on the NE edge of this group.
Small islets, surrounded by above and below water rocks, ex-
6.53
tend about 12 miles N from the W extremity of Froya, then
continue about 35 miles NE terminating in the Halten Islands.
Below-water rocks and dangers extend from 6 to 8 miles out-
6.53
side this line of islets, and in general the islets are not easily
identified. The entire area should be given a good berth as it is
dangerous. The 200m curve lies within a short distance of the
outer dangers and soundings afford little warning.
The most important lights along this coast, from S to N, are
6.53
Haugjegla Light, situated 4 miles N of Smola; Sletringen
Light (63°40'N., 8°16'E.), situated close off the W extremity of
Froya, about 11 miles NE of Haugjegla Light; and Sula Light
(63°51'N., 8°28'E.), situated on the N part of Store Sula, well
inside the dangers, about 12 miles NNE of Sletringen Light.
Farther N are Vingleia Light (63°55'N., 8°41'E.), situated 7
6.53
miles NE of Sula Light; Finnvaer Light (64°04'N., 9°07'E.),
situated in an islet group about 22 miles NE of Sula Light; and
Halten Light (64°10'N., 9°25'E.), situated on the W side of the
entrance to Frohavet about 10 miles NE of Finnvaer Light. A
racon is located at Halten Light.
There are numerous lights and navigational aids charted
6.53
along this section of the coast.
6.54 Gripholen is the principal S approach from seaward
to Trondheimsleia, but it may also be entered through Ramsoy-
fjorden, which is entered about 24 miles NNE of Grip Light.
Ramsoyfjorden is formed between Smola, on the W side,
6.54
and Hitra, on the E. It leads about 8 miles SSE toward a junc-
tion with Trondheimsleia.
A submarine gas pipeline extends from Heidrun (65°19.5N.,
6.54
7°19.1E.), a platform described in paragraph 7.1, to Tjeldber-
godden (63°25'N., 8°42'E.) and enters Ramsoyfjorden about
0.5 miles W of Saebuodden Light (63°29.4N., 8°14.3E.). The
pipeline then extends to a position 3 miles NNW of Rognannes
Light, where it extends SSE to a position about 0.2 mile SW of
Stangnesflua.
6.55 Tjeldbergodden (63°25'N., 8°42'E.) is the site of a
methanol terminal. The pipeline comes ashore on the E side of
the terminal. A safety zone extends up to 0.3 mile seaward of
the terminal.
Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 54,000 dwt, 190m in
6.55
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
6.55 Tjeldbergodden Methanol Terminal
length, and 7.9m draft can be accommodated.
At the Methanol Plant Terminal the Methanol Berth is 78m
6.55
in length with depths 12.9 to 16.3m alongside. Vessels up to
54,000 dwt, 190m in length, and 7.9m draft can be accommo-
dated. This berth handles methanol.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
6.55
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot
boards about 1 mile NNW of Grip Light.
Vessels should contact the Kristainsund pilot station on VHF
6.55
channel 16 about 2 hours prior to arrival at the pilot boarding
position. Vessels that call on VHF channel 16 will be connect-
ed to the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center via Floro Coast Radio
Station or Rogaland Coast Radio Station if the station does not
respond.
Product tankers should send their ETA via their agent 72
6.55
hours prior to arrival. Confirmations should be sent 48 hours,
24 hours, and 12 hours prior to arrival. Any changes to the ETA
must be sent immediately.
Coaster and dry cargo vessels shall send their ETA via their
6.55
agent 24 hours prior to arrival. The terminal shall be contacted
no later than 30 minutes prior to arrival on VHF channel 11 to
receive berthing instructions.
Main Control Room—Contact Information
Call sign Statoil Tjeldbergodden
VHF VHF channels 11 and 16
Telephone 47-71-649393
Facsimile 47-71-649055
147
6.56 Steinsoy, close off the NE coast of Smola, 5.75 miles
SSE of Haugjegla Light, and Saebuoy (63°30'N., 8°15'E.), 3
miles ENE are the N entrance points of Ramsoyfjorden. A light
is situated on the SW end of Saebuoy.
Tides—Currents.—In Ramsoyfjorden, the tidal currents set
6.56
S with the rising tide and N with the falling tide. The N current
is always stronger, and when it is opposed by N winds at
springs, considerable turbulence occurs in the NW entrance to
the fjord.
Kvaloy Light (63°24.6'N., 7°50.8'E.) stands on the W end of
6.56
Kvaloya, close E of Maholmen.
Dyrnes Light (63°26'N., 7°51'E.) stands at the N entrance
6.56
point of Dyrnesvagen, a cove on the NW side of Smola; the
white sector of the light leads towards the cove from the vicini-
ty of Store Kvaloya.
Dyrnesvagen is protected from NW by a breakwater that ex-
6.56
tends 160m SW from Kalvoya, about 0.15 mile NW of Dyrnes
Light. The breakwater has several alongside berths on its NE
side; the berths have lengths of 12 to 40m, with alongside
depths of 3 to 7m.
Sorgrunnen (63°33'N., 8°00'E.) and Nordgrunnen, patches
6.56
with depths of 20 and 32m, lie in the NW approach to Ramsoy-
fjorden, 1.25 and 1.75 miles, respectively, NE of Haugjegla
Light.
Gjesingboerne, awash in places, lies 2 miles NW of Steinsoy,
6.56
and Mefjordbaen, a drying patch, lies 1.25 miles ENE of that
island.
Austre Reiflua (63°27'N., 8°13'E.), a 6m patch, lies in the
6.56
fairway about 2 miles SE of Steinsoy. Ramsoybaen, drying and
marked by a beacon, lies on the E side of the fairway 2.75
miles SSE of Austre Reiflua. Fosflua, a 6m patch, lies 1.5
miles SSE of Ramsoybaen. Ramsoygalten, marked by a bea-
con, lies 1.5 miles SE of Fosflua. Austklakkane, 10m patches,
Pub. 182
148 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
lies 1.25 miles ENE of Ramsoygalten.
Shoal water extends about 2 miles into Ramsoyfjorden from
6.56
the E coast of Smola, and 1.75 miles W from Hitra.
6.57 Vessels may approach Ramsoyfjorden from N or NW
by steering in the white sector of the light on the SW side of
Saebuoy. Steer to a position 1.5 miles NW of the light and en-
ter the white sector of Remmingskjer Light (63°22'N.,
8°17'E.), which course leads into Ramsoyfjorden, between the
dangers off each coast of the fjord.
When the vessel is abeam of Fosflua, with the light about 2
6.57
miles distant, steer SE to pass about midway between Rem-
mingskjer Light and Ramsoygalten and enter Trondheimsleia,
steering as required to destination.
Froyfjorden (63°40'N., 8°40'E.) lies 9 miles N of the W en-
6.57
trance to Ramsoyfjorden. The whole W side of Hitra from
Saebuoy to the entrance of Froyfjorden is fronted by islets
which extend up to 4.5 miles offshore.
Froyfjorden extends about 16 miles ENE from its W en-
6.57
trance, S of Sletringen Light, and leads into Frohavet.
The W half of the fjord is relatively free from danger, but the
6.57
E half is narrow and encumbered with many dangers in or near
the fairway. Local knowledge is necessary to transit this fjord.
Regulations.—A speed limit of 5 knots is in force along the
6.57
coastal waters of Ulvoya (63°40'N., 8°04'E.) and Fjellvaeroy,
Lille Helsoy (63°40'N., 8°04'E.), Store Helsoya, Kvaenvaer,
and Kvernvaer. This speed limit applies to all vessels except
those engaged in operations for the Norwegian armed forces or
craft engaged in emergency police, custom, fire fighting, am-
bulance, or search and rescue missions.
6.58 Kya (63°46'N., 8°19'E.), marked by a light, is a small
islet situated 6 miles N of Sletringen Light.
Foul ground extends 2.5 miles SW from Kya, and the same
6.58
distance NNW. Synstflua, a 9m patch, lies 2.75 miles WSW
and Oreklakken, with a least charted depth of 13m, lies 3.25
miles WNW, respectively, from Kya. They are the farthest W
of these dangers.
Sula Light (63°51'N., 8°27'E.) is located about 6 miles NE
6.58
of Kya, at the S end of Froan.
Froan, the waters lying between Sula and Halten, 30 miles
6.58
NE, are foul and large areas are not navigable. A few channels
lead between the islets and reefs, but local knowledge is essen-
tial.
Vingleia, entered 7.5 miles NNE of Sula, affords the only
6.58
passage for large vessels, in the vicinity, from the sea to Fro-
havet, but as the entrance is difficult to distinguish, use of the
channel is not recommended unless a local mariner is em-
barked.
6.59 Frohavet, a deep arm of the sea, is entered between
Halten Light (64°10'N., 9°25'E.) and Almenningen, an island
situated 16 miles E. The channel leads SSW to Krakvag-
fjorden, and is formed between Froan and Froya on the W side
and the islands lying off the mainland on the E.
From a position 5 miles E of Halten, the distance to Trond-
6.59
heim is 75 miles.
Vessels bound for Trondheim and entering Frohavet from the
6.59
offing W of Halten should keep at least 5 miles N of Halten
Light. When the light bears not less than 236°, course may be
Pub. 182
altered S, steering to pass from 4 to 5 miles E of the light and
then in about mid-channel.
Vessels proceeding from the N should approach Halten Light
6.59
on a bearing of about 183°, so as to pass well W of the dangers
off the mainland; they should then pass E of the light and
through mid-channel as directed above.
Tides—Currents.—Currents in Frohavet flow S on the ris-
6.59
ing tide and N on the falling tide. These directions are opposite
those at Halten and farther seaward. During the rising tide, the
current runs S to join the flood current in Trondheimsleia.
The tidal current often runs strongly, notably on the W side
6.59
of Frohavet.
When a S or SW gale is imminent, there is usually a W flow
6.59
in Frohavet. In winter, an E and N flow is considered a sure in-
dication of an E gale.
An unusually strong flood current is considered to be an in-
6.59
dication of W or NW gales. An unusually low tide is an indica-
tion of N winds.
The W side of Frohavet is comparatively free from dangers,
6.59
but the E side is encumbered by numerous fringing islands and
shoals.
Borklakken, a shoal with a least charted depth of 8.5m, lies
6.59
on the E side of the entrance about 6 miles NNW of Almening-
skollen (64°11'N., 10°01'E.), the summit of Almenningen, and
Ranen, with a least charted depth of 4.9m lies about 5 miles
NW of the summit.
Ravnfaldet, awash, 3.25 miles W of the S point of Almennin-
6.59
gen, is the farthest W of the dangers off that island.
Flessa (64°06'N., 9°54'E.) is the largest and farthest N of a
6.59
group of islets situated about 5 miles SW of Almenningen. The
islets and shoal water extend 3.5 miles farther SW.
Borklakken and Ranen are considered the most dangerous of
6.59
the shoals W of Almenningen.
6.60 Melsteinen (63°58'N., 9°35'E.), comprised of a group
of low flat islets and rocks lying between 8 and 15 miles SW of
Flessa, is separated from that island group by a deep wide
channel.
In the Melsteinen group, the tidal currents are S on the rising
6.60
tide and N on the falling tide. The currents are strong and con-
siderable overfalls occur.
To the SSW of Melsteinen is the Tarva Group of islets and
6.60
rocks. which lie from 7 to 12 miles distant from the light in
Melsteinen. Husoya is the largest islet in the group. A light is
situated on a small islet off the N extremity of Husoya.
Krakvagfjorden (63°40'N., 9°15'E.) connects Frohavet and
6.60
Trondheimsleia, and leads on the E side of Ulvoya and Fjell-
vaeroya, and W of Krakvagoya.
Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity of Flesa, in the center of
6.60
Krakvagfjorden, the incoming current sets S during the rising
tide, continuing so as to pass on either side of Sore Leksa and
Nordre Leksa, and join the E flood current in Trondheimsleia.
The outgoing currents set in the opposite directions.
6.61 Gronholmen Light (63°41'N., 9°09'E.) stands on
Gronholmen, 9 miles SW of Husoya, in a position about 1 mile
off the E coast of Ulvoya.
Tarnet, above water in places, lies on the E side of the en-
6.61
trance to Krakvagfjorden, about 5 miles ENE of Gronholmen
Light. Ugsteinskjerane, with a least charted depth of 4.6m, lies
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
2.25 miles SW and an 18.3m patch lies 2 miles WSW, respec-
tively, from Tarnet.
Flesa Light (63°39'N., 9°14'E.) is situated on the W side of
6.61
Krakvagfjorden, 3 miles SE of Gronholmen Light. A racon is
located at the light tower which stands on Flesa Islet.
The dangers off Fjellvaeroya lie W of a line joining these
6.61
two lights. A patch, with a depth of 20m, is charted 0.45 mile N
of Flesa Light. A pilot boarding station is located 0.75 mile NE
of the light.
Krakvagoya, 31m high, is situated 2.25 miles E of Flesa
6.61
Light. Kommersoyflua, a 7.3m patch, lies 0.6 mile SSE.
A vessel bound for Trondheim should pass in mid-channel E
6.61
of Flesa Light and then round the SW end of Krakvagoya at a
distance of about 1 mile.
Course should then be altered to pass about midway between
6.61
Nordre Leksa, 3 miles SSE of Krakvagoya, and Smellingflua,
awash, 3 miles NE of Nodre Leksa. The normal route into
Trondheimsleia leads E of Sore Leksa.
The white sector of Rognan Light (63°34'N., 9°17'E.) leads
6.61
from Krakvagfjorden, W of Ugsteinskjerane, and E of Sliskjer-
taren and Sliskjeret, which lie just over 2 miles and 1.25 miles,
respectively, NNW of the light.
When clear of Sliskjeret, alter course to pass W of Rognan
6.61
Light and W of Storaflua, a 1m patch lying 1.3 miles SSE of
the light, then into Trondheimsleia, altering course toward the
ENE to Trondheim or WSW toward Kristiansund.
The Main Route—Kristiansund to Trondheim
6.62 The main route from Kristiansund to Trondheim leads
through Ytrefjorden, Edoyfjorden, and Trondheimsleia, pass-
ing S of Smola, Hitra, Sore Leksa, and Nordre Leksa to Agde-
neset, which is situated at the entrance to Trondheimsfjorden.
A route leading seaward of the Froan Archipelago, NE of
6.62
Smola, branches NW through Ramsoyfjorden, between Smola
and Hitra.
A route leading N through Krakvagfjorden and Frohavet,
6.62
branches N between Hitra and Sore Leksa.
Ytrefjorden, Edoyfjorden, and the greater part of Trondhe-
6.62
imsleia form part of Indreleia, the N continuation of which,
through Grandevika, is approached NNE of Nordre Leksa.
Ytrefjorden, from its junction with Gripholen, N of Ytre
6.62
Langholmen Light (63°11'N., 7°52'E.), leads 7 miles ENE in-
to Edoyfjorden. Ytrefjorden is deep and in mid-channel, clear
of dangers, presents no navigational difficulty.
Baeflua (63°14'N., 7°52'E.), a 3.5m patch, lies 2.25 miles
6.62
NNE of Ytre Langholmen Light. Kutmannsflua, a 6m patch,
lies 3 miles ENE of Baeflua. Depths of 1m, 6m, and 3m lie, re-
spectively, 1 mile, 1.5 miles and 2.5 miles, ENE of Baeflua.
Edoyfjorden is entered from Ytrefjorden and leads ENE into
6.62
Trondheimsleia. The channel is deep and free from dangers in
the fairway; from abreast Ytre Langholmen Light, vessels
should steer a mid-channel course, passing about 1 mile SE of
Tyrhaugh Light.
Tyrhaug Light (63°19'N., 8°14'E.) is situated close off the
6.62
NE end of Edoya, on the N side of Edoyfjorden, about 12 miles
NE of Ytre Langholmen Light.
Trondheimsleia is considered to extend from Tyrhaug Light
6.62
to Beian Light and Agdenes Light, or to the mouth of Trondhe-
imsfjorden, a distance of about 45 miles ENE; the channel, for
149
the most part, is free from sunken dangers. It can be navigated
by the largest vessels.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Trondheimsleia set E
6.62
with the rising tide and W with the falling tide. At the narrows,
about 25 miles ENE of Tyrhaug Light, they run with considerable
velocity.
Gjerdesvika leads 7 miles E from the junction of Edoy-
6.62
fjorden and Trondheimsleia.
Tidal currents flow to the E on the rising tide and W on the
6.62
ebb. The flow can be strong in the W entrance.
6.63 Svartskjeret (63°18'N., 8°18'E.) lies near the center
of the E entrance to Gjerdesvika, 2 miles SE of Tyrhaug Light.
It is marked by a beacon. A chain of islets extends ENE from
Svartskjeret to Grisvagoya, about 2 miles distant.
Gjerdesvika is entered between Svartskjeret and Omoyflua,
6.63
awash, 0.8 mile S.
Steinholmen Light (63°17'N., 8°20'E.) is situated on the S
6.63
side of Gjerdesvika, just over 1 mile SE of Svartskjeret. The
white sector of this light bearing between 078° and 112° leads
from Edoyfjorden into Gjerdesvika.
Charted depths of 5, 9, 12 and 11m lie in the white sector
6.63
above, and are situated 0.35 mile S, 0.5 mile SSW, 0.9 mile SW
and 1.25 miles SW, respectively, from the beacon on Svartsk-
jeret.
When within 0.75 mile of Steinholmen Light, steer to pass N
6.63
of the light, then steer ENE on a midchannel course.
Auresundet, previously described in paragraph 6.50, may be
6.63
entered from Gjerdesvika by steering in the white sector of
Sveholmen Light (63°17'N., 8°29'E.). Sveholmen Light is sit-
uated about 4 miles ESE of Steinholmen Light.
Torsetsundet is formed between Skarsoya and the mainland
6.63
on the S and extends 4.75 miles ENE. It is entered from
Gjerdesvika, S of Alfartangen, and terminates at its junction
with Arvagfjorden and Dromnessundet.
Alfartangen (63°19'N., 8°34'E.), the SW extremity of Skar-
6.63
soya, lies 3 miles NE of Sveholmen Light. A 2.1m patch lies
0.5 mile WSW of Alfartangen.
Torsetsundet is narrowest off Tua, 1.25 miles E of Alfartan-
6.63
gen. The least depth in the fairway is 7.5m.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 16m, spans Torsetsun-
6.63
det at Tua.
6.64 Glomstadholmen Light (63°19'N., 8°38'E.) is situat-
ed on the S side of the fairway, 0.7 mile ENE of the bridge. The
white sector of the light leads through the W part of Torsetsun-
det, N of foul ground which lies close E of Tua.
Glomstadholmen Light bearing between 246° and 250°,
6.64
astern, leads through the E part of Torsetsundet. A charted
depth of 11m lies within this white sector, about 1 mile ENE
from the light.
Lilleoya Light (63°20'N., 8°44'E.) stands on the N point of
6.64
an island, Lilleoya, at the E end of Torsetsundet. A 5.5m patch
lies 183m NNW and Russen, a drying patch, lies about 0.1
mile N. Storoya, an island, lies 0.2 mile NNW from the light.
Three routes lead NE or E from the E end of Torsetsundet, as
6.64
follows:
1. A route W of Storoya.
2. The channel E between Russen and Lilleoya Light.
3. The channel S of Lilleoya Light.
Pub. 182
150 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
Arvagfjorden is the continuation of Torsetsundet, leading 3.5
6.64
miles E from Lilleoya and is entered S of Hellandneset, a
promontory standing 0.8 mile ENE of Lilleoya.
Arvag lies at the head of the fjord.
6.64
Dromnessundet leads 4 miles NNW along the E side of
6.64
Skarsoya into Trondheimsleia. It is foul in places, but well
marked.
There is usually a N flow at all stages of the tide; a S flow
6.64
occurs only during strong NW winds.
Espenes Light (63°21'N., 8°43'E.) stands on a point on the E
6.64
side of Dromnessundet, 0.75 mile NW of Lilleoya Light. Rog-
nannes Light is situated on the W side of the channel, 2.5 miles
NNW of Espenes Light.
Vessels should enter Dromnessundet by passing E of Storoya
6.64
in the white sector of Espenes Light. When N of Storoya, alter
course to the W, then steer to pass W of the light and bring it
astern bearing between 173° and 187°, which course leads E of
a point 0.75 mile N of the light.
Rognannes Light (63°23'N., 8°39'E.), bearing between 313°
6.64
and 316°, ahead, leads farther N through Dromnessundet, pass-
ing between dangers which lie off either coast.
The white sectors of Rognannes Light, astern, offer three al-
6.64
ternative routes farther N into Trondheimsleia, depending on
the destination.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 15m, crosses Drom-
6.64
nessundet at Ulvnestangen, about 0.7 mile NNW of Espenes
Light.
6.65 Remmingskjer Light (63°22'N., 8°17'E.) is situated
3.5 miles NNE of Tyrhaug Light at the junction of Trondhe-
imsleia and Ramsoyfjorden.
Klakksbroren Light (63°21'N., 8°25'E.) is on the S side of
6.65
Trondheimsleia, 5.5 miles ENE of Tyrhaug Light.
A line of above-water rocks and shoals extends from
6.65
Kvitholmen, 2.75 miles ENE of Tyrhaug Light, NE to Klakks-
broren Light. Friskjeret, marked by a beacon, lies 0.8 mile NE
of the light.
Vessels proceeding E through Trondheimsleia steer with the
6.65
white sector of Tyrhaug Light, astern, which leads N of
Klakksbroren Light. Austklakkane, 6.5 miles NE of the light,
falls within the sector.
When reaching a position S of Austklakkane (63°23'N.,
6.65
8°24'E.), vessels should steer E, keeping a mid-channel course.
The channel is broad and free from dangers in the fairway,
6.65
though a number of rocks lie close under the land on either
side. Terningen Light, bearing about 070° ahead, may be
steered for. The course will lead clear of the dangers.
Terningen Light (63°30'N., 9°03'E.) stands on the S side of
6.65
Store Terningen, about 19 miles E of Klakksbroren Light.
Hevnefjorden is entered on the S side of Trondheimsleia, in a
6.65
position 1.5 miles SSE of Terningen Light and leads 133 miles
S. Astfjorden extends nearly 9 miles E, 4 miles within the en-
trance; Snildfjorden extends 8 miles E, 8 miles within the en-
trance.
Hevnefjorden is, to a large extent, deep and clear of dangers.
6.65
Anchorage is available at the head of Hevnefjorden, in 23 to
6.65
28m, sand and clay, but is not recommended in N winds to
which the bay is exposed.
6.66 To pass through the narrows situated close E of
Pub. 182
Terningen Light, vessels steering for the light, from W, should
alter course when within about 1.5 miles; the fairway then
leads S of the light and between Josnoya, on the N, and Hevn-
skjelova (63°29'N., 9°08'E.), on the S. These islands are nearly
steep-to, but attention must be paid to the strength of the tidal
currents.
Between Terningen Light and the entrance to Trondheims-
6.66
fjorden, the distance is about 20 miles. The channel is entered
by vessels proceeding from Frohavet and Kjrakvagfjorden, E
of Nordre Leskka, about 10 miles ENE of the light.
Garten (63°39'N., 9°32'E.), an island 72m high, lies on the
6.66
N side of Trondheimsleia, 4 miles ENE of Nordre Leksa.
Smellingflua, awash and marked by a light, lies about 0.8 mile
SW of Garten.
Vessels after passing Terningen steer a mid-channel course
6.66
between the mainland and the islands to the N. After passing
Smellingflua, the mainland coast should not be approached
within 0.25 mile as it is foul, and the dangers W of Agdenes
Light should be given a good berth. The light should be round-
ed at a distance of 0.75 mile.
Stornafjorden extends about 6 miles NE from the E end of
6.66
Trondheimsleia, at the entrance to Trondheimsfjorden. It termi-
nates in two inlets which are frozen over in severe winters.
There is considerable traffic in the fjord during the herring fish-
ing season.
Trondheimsfjorden
6.67 Trondheimsfjorden is entered E of Agdeneset
(63°39'N., 9°46'E.), and, with its branches, leads SE and NE
for a total distance of 70 miles to Steinkjer, which is situated 52
miles ENE of Agdeneset.
Trondheim lies 24 miles from Agdeneset.
6.67
Ice.—The outer part of Trondheimsfjorden is ice-free all
6.67
year round and Skarnsundet is normally ice-free.
Beitstadfjorden is frozen over during January, February, and
6.67
March in some years, and some of the other branch fjords may
be frozen over at times.
Tides—Currents.—A normal tidal current runs in Trondhe-
6.67
imsfjorden. Off Agdeneset and W of Tautra, the maximum rate
is 1 knot, and the currents are reported to run strongly in
Skarnsundet and in the entrance to Borgenfjorden and in Beit-
stadsundet. Elsewhere the rate does not exceed 0.5 knot.
Pilotage.—Trondheim has a pilot office, which has a pilot
6.67
boat station at Hetvika. A pilot boat station has been estab-
lished off Flesa Light. Pilots for ports in Trondheimsfjorden
can be obtained at Kristiansund.
Caution.—Gunnery firing practice takes place, in an area
6.67
which includes the outer part of Trondheimsfjorden, within 3.5
miles of Agdeneset. For further information on gunnery firing
areas, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
Ocean.
An ammunition dumping ground is situated in Trondheims-
6.67
fjorden and is centered about 2 miles SSE of Agdeneset.
6.68 From Agdeneset, Trondheimsfjorden trends about 12
miles SSE to Rodberg (63°29'N., 10°00'E.). A light is situated
on the mole at Rodberg.
Selvbukta (63°37'N., 9°43'E.), a cove on the W side of the
6.68
fjord, 1.5 miles S of Agdeneset, affords anchorage to medium-
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 151

sized vessels, in 13 to 28m. The cove dries within 183m of its Anchorage, in 22 to 30m, clay, steeply shelving, is available
6.69

head. Larger vessels may anchor, in 37m, sand, 0.2 to 0.25 mile about 1 mile SE of the quay.
offshore, in the vicinity of a cove 2.5 miles S of Selvbukta.
This anchorage is exposed, particularly in N and S winds. Thamshamn—Contact Information
A light is situated on Gjetneset, a promontory situated 2.75
6.68

miles S of Rodberg. Port Control

Vessels may transit this part of Trondheimsfjorden by steer-
6.68 Call sign Trondheim Port Control
ing a mid-channel course to a position off Rodberg, which
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
leads clear of danger.
Orkedalsfjorden and Gaulosen comprise a branch of Trond-
6.68 47-73-991710
heimsfjorden which is entered between Gjetneset and Frosk- Telephone
47-91112600 (mobile)
jeret (63°25'N., 10°07'E.), 4 miles ESE.
A light is situated near the end of a spit extending 0.2 mile
6.68
E-mail havnevakt@trondheimhavn.no
NW from Froskjeret. Port Authority
The E part of the entrance to Orkedalsfjorden and Gaulosen
6.68

forms part of the harbor area of Trondheim. Telephone 47-73-991700

The white sector of the light at Rodberg, bearing astern,
6.68
Facsimile 47-73-991717
leads E of Gjetneset to the mouth of Orkedalsfjorden.
Orkedalsfjorden is entered W of a point 5.5 miles S of Gjet-
6.68
E-mail firmapost@trondheimhavn.no
neset. The fjord is deep except at its head, where drying banks
lie at the mouth of the river flowing into it. Buvika (63°18'N., 10°11'E.) is situated at the head of
6.69

Gaulosen, 3.25 miles ESE of Borsa. A narrow dredged chan-

6.69 Thamshamn (Thamshavn) (63°19'N., 9°53'E.)
(World Port Index No. 23095) is part of the harbor area named
Orkdalsora. It extends 1.5 miles along the SE side of the fjord
near its head where the town of Orkanger is located.
Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 8.3m in draft can be
nel, with a least depth of 6.5m, leads into a basin at the mill. A
quay on the W side of the basin is 103m long, with depths of
8.5m alongside and a quay on the E side is 65m long, with 3 to
4m depths alongside.
Munkholmen Light (63°27'N., 10°23'E.) is situated on the
6.69

accommodated. Information on berthing facilities is given in island of Munkholmen at Trondheim Road, off the city of
the table titled Thamshamn—Berth Information. Trondheim.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels ar-
6.69 Trondheim Road is a nearly unobstructed basin affording an-
6.69

riving, departing, and shifting berths. Pilotage should be or- chorage to a large number of vessels. The limits of the harbor
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the area are as charted.
Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot The roadstead is open to the NW, N, and NE, which are the
6.69

boards in position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. directions of prevailing winds, and a considerable sea is raised
Contact Information.—See the table titled Thamshamn—
6.69 by these winds at times.
Contact Information. Vessels may approach Trondheim Road by giving the light at
6.69

Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in 9 to 28m, mud, N

6.69
of the berths at Orkanger.
Gaulosen is entered between Lundsneset (63°20'N.,
6.69
10°02'E.) and Vevikneset, 1.5 miles NE. It extends 4.5 miles
SE. The E part forms part of the harbor area of Trondheim.
Rodberg a berth of about 1 mile. They should then proceed E in
mid-channel until Munkholmen Light bears about 113°, when
course may be altered S into the roadstead, passing W of
Munkholmen.
Holmgrunnane, a shoal which extends about 0.8 mile NNE
6.69

Borsa is situated on the S shore of Gaulosen 1.75 miles SSE

6.69 from Munkholmen, is marked by a light on Tua, near its N ex-
of Lundsneset. A quay, 15m long, with depths of 6.7 to 12m tremity. Depths of 1.5m are charted on Holmgrunnane.
alongside, is situated 1.25 miles E of the church at Borsa. Caution.—Shallower depths than charted may be encoun-
6.69

tered between Munkholmen Light and the light on Tua.

Thamshamn—Berth Information
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Elkem Thamshamn
Thamshavn 182m 7.0-9.7m Dry bulk and breakbulk. Maximum draft of 8.3m.
Orkanger Terminal
No. 2 Krankai 82m — Containers.
No. 3 Vigorkaia 85m — Dry bulk and breakbulk.
No. 4 Stenakaia 32m — Dry bulk, containers, and breakbulk.

Pub. 182
152 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

Trondheim (63°26'N., 10°24'E.) some 13 days of the year when gale force winds of 34 knots or
more occur. Gales are rare from May through August.
World Port Index No. 23090 The harbor is always ice-free, and almost always free from
6.70

fog.
6.70 Trondheim is a coastal natural harbor, but the main Tides—Currents.—The mean tidal range is 2m and the
6.70

port facilities are sheltered by breakwaters which divide the spring range is 2.7m.
harbor into several protected basins. The Nidelva flows into The ebb current from Nidelva sets out fairly strong, occa-
6.70

Trondheimsfjorden here and is crossed by several bridges.
The city is the junction for both land and sea traffic between
6.70
S and N Norway, and with rail service to Sweden.
sionally attaining a maximum velocity of 5 to 6 knots during
the thawing season.
Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 42,000 dwt, 193.9m
6.70

in length, and 10.5m draft can be accommodated. Several

Port Authority of Trondheim
https://trondheimhavn.no/en/front-page
berths are available at the port. Berthing details are shown in
the accompanying table titled Trondheim—Berthing Infor-
mation.
Aspect.—The cathedral situated 1.5 miles SSE of Munkhol-
6.70

Winds—Weather.—The predominant winds in Trondheim

6.70
are from the S throughout the year; however, during the months
of April through September, the afternoon winds will shift to
the NW and N. The average winds are about 6 knots, with
men Light has a green roof and a tall conspicuous green spire.
Stiftsgarden, a large wooden house 0.25 mile N of the cathe-
dral, is conspicuous.

Trondheim—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Size
Pier I
No. 1 135m 8.0m 139.5m — — Ro-ro/lo-lo, containers, and breakbulk.
No. 2 135m 8.0m 138.5m — — Fast ferries and breakbulk.
Pier II
No. 4 58m 5.5m — — — Cruise vessels.
No. 5 68m 5.5m 45m — — Fast ferries and breakbulk.
No. 6 68m 6.3m 64.4m — — Fast ferries and breakbulk.
No. 7 90m 6.9m 86.5m — — Breakbulk.
No. 8 102m 6.9m 77.2m — — Breakbulk.
No. 9 104m 9.0m 57.3m — — Breakbulk.
No. 10 60m 9.2m 115.4m — — Breakbulk.
No. 11 56m 9.2m 94.7m — — Breakbulk.
No. 12 70m 9.2m 193m — — Breakbulk.
No. 13 94m 9.2m 123m — — Aggregate, cement, sand, and breakbulk.
No. 14 130m 6.5m 89.9m — — Breakbulk.
No. 15 50m 3.0m — — — breakbulk.
West Canal Wharf
No. 19 105m 5.1m — — — Breakbulk.
No. 20 65m 5.1m 41.3m — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.
No. 21 70m 5.1m — — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.
No. 22 70m 5.0m — — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.
No. 23 140m 3.8m 39.7m — — Breakbulk.
Ila Pier
No. 26 191m 8.4m 109m — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.

Pub. 182
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 153

Trondheim—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Size
No. 27 100m 8.4m 111.4m — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.
No. 28 132m 8.7m 113.7m — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.
No. 29 66m 8.4m 114.4m — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.
No. 30 90m 8.7m 108.5m — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.
No. 31 132m 10.6m 89.9m — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.
No. 32 155m 8.4m — — — Bulk cargo and breakbulk.
Transittkaia
No. 41 70m 8/0m — — — —
No. 42 42m 8.0m — — — —
No. 43 80m 8.0m — — — —
Kullkranpiren
No. 45 130m 1.5m — — — Breakbulk, salt, scrap metal, and bulk cargo.
No. 46 95m 8.0m 119.3m — — Scrap metal and bulk cargo.
No. 47 95m 6.0m — — — —
No. 48 80m 4.5m 89.9m — — —
No. 49 80m 5.0m 89.9m — — Salt, bulk cargo, and scrap metal.
No. 50 70m 4.5m — — — Fast ferries and bulk cargo.
Strandveikaia
No. 52 165m 6.0m — — — —
No. 53 105m 6.0m 88.1m — — —
No. 54 70m 6.0m — — — Transshipment and project/heavy cargo.
Ladehammerkaia
No. 55 141m 6.0m 94.1m — — —
No. 56 91m 6.0m 111.4m — — Cement, sand, breakbulk, and bulk cargo.
No. 57 50m 7.0m 179.9m — — Cement and petcoke.
Fagervika Terminal
Fagervika 68m — 78.8m — — Cement, bulk cargo, and breakbulk.
No. 60 57m 11.0m 180m 10.5m 28,000 dwt Aviation fuel, clean products, and bunkers.
Tourist Wharf
No. 68 98m 13.0m 208m — — Cruise vessels.
Transit Quay
No. 41 70m 6.2m 87.5m — — —
No. 42 42m 8.0m 119.9m — — —
No. 43 80m 8.0m 128.4m — — —
Trondheim Hurtigbatterminal
Hurtigbatterminal 80m — — — — Fast ferries.
Trondheim Pirterminalen
No. 1 40m — 40.8m — — Fast ferries.

Pub. 182
154 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

Trondheim—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Size
No. 2 40m — 40.8m — — Fast ferries.
Heggdalen
Biologisk 10m — — — — —
Norske Shell 28m — — — — —
Hovringen
No. 62
50m 11.3m 193.9m — 28,000 dwt —
ExxonMobil

Pilotage.—A pilot station has been established off Flesa

6.70 Trondheim on Pier 2.
Light in position 63°39'N, 9°15'E. Vessels approaching from the S should contact the pilot
6.70

Harbor pilotage is compulsory for foreign vessels arriving,

6.70 when about 10 miles from Grip Light. The pilot station moni-
departing, or shifting berths. Pilotage should be ordered using tors on VHF channel 16.
SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Regulations.—An arrival message should be sent 72 hours
6.70

Booking Center at an additional cost. They normally embark
on the landward side of Munkholmen, or, in bad weather, off
the appropriate harbor entrance.
The pilot for Krakvagfjorden boards in position 63°39.0'N,
6.70
prior to arrival via Rogaland Radio and also 24 hours prior to
arrival via Kristiansund Radio. Any significant change in the
24 hours ETA must be advised to the Pilots.
In addition, tankers radio the agent “Petroleum Trondheim”
6.70

9°14.9'E. Trondheim also provides pilotage for Stjordal and
Orkanger.
A pilot station, with State Pilots, who do outbound transit
6.70
and coastal pilotage, is established at the public pilot office at
at least 72 hours prior to arrival via Rogaland Radio giving
ETA at Grip in UTC and advising all requirements and other
information pertinent to the turnaround of the vessel. Confirm
the ETA via Kristiansund Radio 12 hours before arrival at Grip.

By Trondheim Havn, via Wikimedia Commons

6.70

6.70 Trondheim looking NE over Brattora Island

Pub. 182
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 155

6.70 By Trondheim Havn, via Wikimedia Commons

6.70 Trondheim looking SW down the Nidelva Canal with Brattora Island on the right

6.70 By Trondheim Havn, via Wikimedia Commons

6.70 Trondheim looking N past Munkholmen Island into Trondheimsfjorden

Pub. 182
156 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

Contact Information.—See the table titled Trondheim—

6.70 Stjordalsfjorden is entered between Haugberget (63°26'N.,
6.71

Contact Information. 10°41'E.), a point 6.25 miles ESE of Ostmarktangen, and Sk-
jervauran, 4 miles NE.
Trondheim—Contact Information Hommelvik (63°25'N., 10°48'E.) (World Port Index No.
6.71

23080) stands at the head of a small bay of the same name,

Port Authority which is entered SE of Rota Light.
Telephone 47-73-991700 Depths—Limitations.—There are two quays at the head of
the bay. Vessels with a draft up to 4.1m can be accommodated.
Facsimile 47-73-991717 The main quay at Hommeivik is 300m in length, with depths
E-mail firmapost@trondheim.havn.no of 5.2 to 11m alongside. A second quay has a berthing length
of 350m with an additional 405m including dolphins.
Port Control
Road and quay side are supported by metal piles and the
6.71

Call sign Trondheim Port Control quay handles scrap metal, transshipment, and breakbulk.
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
VHF VHF channels 14 and 16
6.71

may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an

Telephone 47-91112600 (mobile) additional cost. The pilot boards in position 63°39.0'N,
9°14.9'E. The port monitors VHF channels 9 and 16.
Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken in Trondheim Road-
6.70
Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 25 to 35m, sand,
6.71

stead, in 22 to 42m, fine sand and mud, about 1 mile SW of
Munkholmen Light. There is also anchorage 0.5 mile SSE of
Munkholmen, in 34m, 0.5 mile SE.
6.71 The main part of Trondheimsfjord, with its continua-
tions, extends about 45 miles NE from Trondheim. It is irregu-
lar in shape and varies greatly in width.
The fjord is deep and navigable throughout the year. The SE
6.71
shore is indented by several large bays and toward its head is
less rugged than in the vicinity of Trondheim.
on the W side of Hommelvik, near its head.
6.72 Muruvik (63°26'N., 10°51'E.) (World Port Index No.
23075), 2 miles NE of Hommelvik, lies at the head of a small
bay between two drying coves. The town of Stjordalshalsen,
lies 2.5 miles NE of Muruvik, at the head of Stjordalsfjorden.
Depths—Limitations.— There are two berths. The export
quay and the import quay. Vessel with a maximum draft of
5.7m can be accommodated.
In a cove close E of Muruvik, an oil transit installation has a
6.72

Storegrunnen (63°30'N., 10°26'E.), a 7.3m patch, lies near

6.71
the middle of Trondheimsfjorden, 2.75 miles NNW of the light
on Tua. Indregrunnen and Treungsgrunnen, two 14.6m patches,
quay; vessels berth either side. For more berthing information
see the table titled Muruvik—Bertg Information.
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
6.72

lie 1.75 and 2.5 miles, respectively, NE of Storegrund.
Strindfjorden is the water area on the SE side of Trondhe-
6.71
imsfjorden, and is entered between Ostmarktangen (63°27'N.,
10°27'E.) and Tautra, an island situated about 8 miles NNE of
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
additional cost. The pilot boards in position 63°39.0'N,
9°14.9'E.
Contact Information.—The port monitors VHF channel 9.
6.72

the point. From its entrance, the fjord trends about 6 miles E to Anchorage.—There is an anchorage. with depths of 25-
6.72

Stjordalsfjorden, on the SE side, and Asenfjorden, on the NE 30m, clay, is located near the entrance to the bay.
side. The fjord is free from dangers in its middle part. Caution.—A submarine cable lies across the bay’s entrance.
6.72

Saksvikskjer, above water, lies 0.6 mile offshore, 3.75 miles

6.71
Asenfjorden is entered between Vaberget (63°31'N.,
6.72

ESE of Ostmarktangen. 10°46'E.) and Slaegga, 3 miles WNW. From its entrance on the
A conspicuous tower, with a restaurant near the top, stands
6.71
NE side of Strindfjorden, Asenfjorden trends about 8 miles
about 2 miles S of Ostmarktangen Light. A mast stands close E ENE.
of the tower. Steinviksholm, close offshore 2 miles NE of Vaberget, is the
6.72

Litlegrunnen (63°28'N., 10°46'E.), a 6.7m patch, lies in the

6.71
E part of Strindfjorden, 4.75 miles ENE of Saksvikskjer. Fisk-
vikgrunnen, a 12.8m patch about 2 miles N of Litlegrunnen,
lies 0.3 mile offshore.
site of the ruins of a monastery. Anchorage for medium-size
vessels may be taken, in 20 to 30m, clay, close E of Steinvik-
sholm.

Muruvik—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Vessel Draft
Muruvik Harbor Terminal
East 80m 11.5m 5.7m Closed. Breakbulk.
North 84m 5-6m — Closed. Rail and breakbulk. LPG tanks shipped by ro-ro rail.
Coal, sand, scrap metal, ro-ro/lo-lo, and breakbulk. Berthing
West 58m 7.5-9.5m 5.7m length of 128m (including dolphins). Handles RDF (refuse de-
rived fuel) cargo.

Pub. 182
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
Storgrunnen, an 11m patch, lies 0.8 mile NNE of
6.72
Steinviksholm. Storholmen and Smaskjera, which are partly
awash, lie 0.5 to 1 mile farther NNE.
Skarvholmane and Furuholmen, with foul ground close NE,
6.72
lie in the entrance to the E arm of Asenfjorden, from 1.25 to
1.75 miles ENE of Steinviksholm.
Saltoya (63°33'N., 10°54'E.) lies in the S central part of the
6.72
E arm, 0.35 mile SSE of Furuholmen. A light stands on its W
end. The white sector of the light on Saltoya leads clear of dan-
gers into the E arm of Asenfjorden.
Langstein (63°33'N., 10°54'E.) is situated in a cove on the S
6.72
shore, 73m SE of Saltoya. A quay, 36m long, with depths of 6
to 7.2m, is situated at the W entrance point of the cove.
Korsnesodden Light (63°35'N., 10°50'E.) is situated on the
6.72
N side of Asenfjorden, 5.25 miles NE of Slaegga. The white
sector of the light leads into the fjord, clear of the entrance
points.
Lofjorden is entered between a point 1.5 miles ENE of
6.72
Korsnesodden Light and a point 0.3 mile NE. Vessels can
anchor anywhere in the fjord, clay, clear of the submarine
cables.
6.73 Ambornes Light (63°34'N., 10°26'E.) is situated on
the W side of Trondheimsfjorden, 4.5 miles W of the S extrem-
ity of Tautra. From Ambornes Light, the NW coast of Trondhe-
imsfjorden trends 18 miles NE to the S entrance of
Norviksundet. This coast is free of off-lying dangers.
On the SE side of Trondheimsfjorden, foul ground extends
6.73
0.4 mile SSW from Tautra, with a depth of 1.5m charted near
the edge of the foul area. An 18m depth is charted 0.7 mile
WSW of the SW end of Tautra.
Tautra Light (63°35'N., 10°37'E.) stands on the NW side of
6.73
Tautra. A 1m patch lies 0.3 mile NE of the light; patches with
depths of 12.8m, lie 0.35 mile W and 0.75 mile SW, from the
light. The E side of Tautra is joined to the mainland by a cause-
way.
Fanes Light, situated on the SE side of Trondheimsfjorden,
6.73
stands on a point about 6 miles NE of Tautra Light. Vessels can
find anchorage SE of the light, in 20m.
Flagrunnen, with depths of 6.5 to 7m, lies 0.5 mile NE of
6.73
Fanes Light. Nordrunnane, a group of shoal patches, lies up to
1.5 miles offshore, 2.25 miles NE of the light.
Vesterholmen (63°43'N., 11°00'E.), a promontory, lies
6.73
about 8 miles NE of Fanes Light.
6.74 Head of Trondheimsfjorden.—At its head, Trondhe-
imsfjorden opens into a basin; and Ytteroy, an island, lies in
this basin. Skarnsundet leads from the NW side of the basin in-
to Beitstadfjorden.
Sandsora Light (63°45'N., 11°03'E.) is situated on the SE
6.74
extremity of Ytteroy, 2.25 miles NNE of Vesterholmen.
Verdal Havn—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth
LOA Draft
Verdal Havneanlegg
No. 1 Kalkkai 100m — 170m 9.5m
157
The dangers off the SE side of Ytteroy lie W of a line drawn
6.74
from Sandsora Light, to a point on the island, 5 miles NE.
Hokstad, on the NE side of a bay 4.75 miles NE of Sandsora
6.74
Light, has a quay, 17m long, with depths of 4.4 to 7.8m along-
side.
Hestoyflua (63°43'N., 11°04'E.), marked by a light, lies
6.74
about 2 miles SSE of Sandsora Light. South of this danger are
patches with depths of 8 and 8.5m.
Hestoya, an island, lies 1.5 miles ENE of Hestoyflua. Sub-
6.74
marine cables extend from the island in a SSE direction to a
point of land. A 9.5m patch and a 1m patch lie 0.4 mile SSW
and 0.8 mile SSE, respectively, from the S extremity of Hes-
toya.
Fiborgtangen (63°43'N., 11°09'E.), situated 1 mile SSE of
6.74
Hestoya, is a peninsula consisting of a former, island and
reclaimed land.
Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 15,000 dwt, 200m in
6.74
length, and 8.2m draft can be handled. For berthing informa-
tion see the table titled Fiborgtangen—Berth Information.
Levangerbukta is entered between Langneset, a point 4.25
6.74
miles ENE of Hestoya, and Borgsoen 1.25 miles farther ENE.
Fiborgtangen—Berthing Information
Berth Length Remarks
Fiborgtangen Terminal
East 140m Timber and general cargo.
North 100m Timber and general cargo.
Levanger (63°45'N., 11°18'E.) (World Port Index No.
6.74
23060) is an ice-free harbor situated at the head of Levanger-
bukta. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 100 gt. Pilotage
should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered
through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
The pilot boards in position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. The port
monitors VHF channels 12, 14, and 16.
The controlling depth is 4.2m. The berths are 16 to 81m long
6.74
and have depths of 3 to 6m alongside.
Vessels arriving without a reserved berth are required to an-
6.74
chor in Levangerbukta, in depths of 8 to 24m. A submarine ca-
ble extends about 0.3 mile NNE into the W part of the bay,
from a position on shore close S of Langneset.
6.75 Verdal Havn (63°47'N., 11°27'E.) (World Port Index
No. 23058) is built on reclaimed land situated 3 miles ENE of
Borgsoen. The basin is enclosed by breakwaters and is 212m
by 272m, with a dredged depth of 10m.The harbor can be ap-
proached in the white sector of the light situated on the outer
end of the N breakwater.
Remarks
Size
26,000 dwt Cement, limestone, and bunkers.
Pub. 182
158 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
Verdal Havn—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth
LOA Draft
No. 3 Hovedkaia 232m 8.0m 170m — —
No. 4 Ro-Ro 25m 8.0m — —
Verdal Utrustningskaia
No. 5 90m 7.0m 110m — —
Vessels up to 26,000 dwt, 170m in length, and 9.5m draft can
6.75
be accommodated. For more berthing information see the table
titled Verdal Havn—Berth Information.
Fjordgrunnskjeret (63°48'N., 11°19'E.), awash, lies 2 miles
6.75
E of the E extremity of Ytteroy, in the middle of
Trondheimsfjorden.
Fjordgrunntaren, a 0.3m patch, and Skallen a 0.7m patch, lie
6.75
0.25 mile NE and 0.6 mile ENE, respectively, from Fjord-
grunnskjeret.
Norviksundet is entered from S between the SW extremity of
6.75
Ytteroy and Rodberget, 1.25 miles W, and leads N between the
island and the mainland. It is clear of dangers in the fairway.
Saltvikhamn Light (63°47'N., 11°00'E.) is situated on the
6.75
W side of Norviksundet, 2 miles N of Rodberget. The white
sector of this light leads E of Rodberget into the fairway. Pass
E of the light and bring it astern bearing between 210° and
229° which will lead clear of the dangers and NNE to the S en-
trance of Skarnsundet.
6.76 Skarnsundet is entered from S between Brasetham-
meren (63°50'N., 11°04'E.), a point about 4 miles NNE of
Saltvikhamn Light, and Vangsholmen, a point 0.8 mile E. It is
formed between Inderoy on the E and the mainland on the W.
The fairway leads 2.75 miles N to the S end of Beitstadfjorden.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 45m, crosses
6.76
Skarnsundet.
Though narrow, Skarnsundet has a deep channel free of dan-
6.76
gers; however, some ice usually appears at the beginning of the
year, but it seldom obstructs the fairway.
The tidal currents in Skarnsundet are strong, reaching a max-
6.76
imum velocity at about half tide.
Vennesodden Light (63°53'N., 11°03'E.) stands on a low-
6.76
lying point, on the W side of the N entrance to Skarnsundet.
A good anchorage is available in Venneshamn, a cove locat-
6.76
ed close SW of Vennesodden Light, in 20 to 40m, sand.
Beitstadfjorden and Steinkjerfjorden together form a land-
6.76
locked basin in which all known dangers lie within about 0.6
mile offshore. On the N side of the junction of the two fjords,
Beistadsundet trends about 7 miles NNW.
Giplingoya (63°54'N., 11°01'E.), a small island, lies on the
6.76
SW side of Beitstadfjorden, 1.5 miles NW of Vennesodden
Light. A 5m patch lies about 0.3 mile SE of the island.
A good anchorage is available between Giplingoya and the
6.76
shore, in depths of 12 to 20m, sand and shingle.
Verrasundet is entered from the W extremity of Beitstad-
6.76
fjorden, about 2 miles NW of Giplingoya. Foul ground, with a
Pub. 182
Remarks
Size
Cement, breakbulk, and bunkers.
— Ro-ro freight, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Chemicals and bunkers.
charted depth of 5m at its outer end, extends 0.4 mile N from
the E entrance point of Verrasundet.
Verrasundet extends about 11 miles WSW from its entrance
6.76
and is narrow about 8 miles within its entrance. A submarine
cable is laid close within its entrance. An overhead cable, with
a vertical clearance of 45m, crosses the channel 2.25 miles
within the entrance; another overhead cable, with a vertical
clearance of 47m, crosses at the narrows.
6.77 Hooya (63°54'N., 11°05'E.), on the E side of the en-
trance to Beitstadfjorden, lies 1.25 miles NE of Vennesodden
Light. A 7.3m patch lies close N of the island, with a 15m
patch lying 0.5 miles farther N.
A 2m patch lies at the end of a shoal spit extending NNE
6.77
from a point lying 1.5 miles NE of Hooya.
Kirknestangen Light (63°55'N., 11°12'E.) stands on a point
6.77
3 miles NE of Hooya.
Kirknesvagen, a cove on the E side of the light, affords good
6.77
anchorage, in depths of 12 to 30m, sand and clay.
Stornesora Light (63°59'N., 11°18'E.) stands on a point at
6.77
the NE end of Beitstadfjorden, about 4 miles NNE of Kirknes-
tangen Light.
Follafoss (63°59'N., 11°07'E.), situated on the NW side of
6.77
Beitstadfjorden, about 5 miles NNW of Kirknestangen Light,
stands on the W bank of the Folla River.
A wood pulp factory situated close SW of the river mouth
6.77
has an export quay, 116m long, with depths of 8 to 9.8m along-
side.
Beistadsundet is entered on the N side of the junction of Be-
6.77
itstadfjorden and Steinkjerfjorden. The sound is narrow but
free from dangers in the fairway.
Tidal currents in Beitstadsundet can be strong, and are stron-
6.77
gest at half tide.
Beitstadsundet is entered between Rambergholmen
6.77
(64°02'N., 11°14'E.) and a point 0.25 mile E.
A submarine cable is laid across the entrance and an over-
6.77
head cable, with a vertical clearance of 45m, spans the sound
close N of Rambergholmen.
The white sector of the light on Rambergholmen, bearing
6.77
astern, leads N to the anchorage off Malm, 2.5 miles distant N.
Malm (64°04'N., 11°14'E.) (World Port Index No. 23053) is
6.77
situated on the W side of Beitstadsundet and is the administra-
tive center for the district.
Depths—Limitations.—There is a jetty at Malm, with a
6.77
berth at its head and a berth on each side. It is reported that ves-
sels up to 35,000 dwt and 11.2m draft can be berthed at the jet-
ty.
 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 159

6.77 Steinkjer Harbor

For more berthing information see the table titled Malm—

6.77 Ytre Logrunnen (64°01'N., 11°24'E.), a 2.5m patch, lies 0.5
6.78

Berth Information. mile off the N shore, 3.5 miles NE of Stornesora Light. A 5m
patch lies 0.5 mile farther E.
Malm—Berth Information Eggebogtangen Light stands on the S part of a peninsula in
6.78

the E part of Steinkjerfjorden, 5.5 miles ENE of Stornesora

Berth Length Depth Remarks Light. Rodskjeret, above-water and marked by a beacon, lies
Malm Terminal 0.5 mile S of Eggebogtangen Light.
In the approach to Steinkjer, at the head of the fjord, the
6.78

No. 1 11m 10.0m —

white sector of Eggebogtangen Light, ahead, leads between the
Two mooring buoys are dangers off either shore.
No. 2 38m 3.0m mored on each side of the Steinkjer may be approached by passing either N or S of
6.78

jetty. Rodskjeret, however, the N side is preferred. Rodskjeret should

be given a wide berth.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory for merchant vessels,
6.77

but pilotage and berthing are usually undertaken by the sea pi-
lot.
Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor off Malm, in 23m, clay,
6.77
about 0.2 mile E of the church. A 2m patch lies about 183m off
the S shore opposite the jetty.
Beitstadsundet continues about 5 miles ENE from Malm.
6.77
6.79 Steinkjer (64°01'N., 11°30'E.) (World Port Index No.
23055) lies at the head of Steinkjerfjorden; the harbor is bound
on the W by a N-S line approximately 2 miles W of Eggebog-
tangen Light and on the E by the highway and railroad bridges
over the rivers.
Ice.—The harbor is frozen up from January to March in
6.79

some years.
6.78 Steinkjerfjorden extends 6 miles E from Beitstad- Tides—Currents.—A noticeable current flows among the
6.79

fjorden from its entrance between Stornesora Light and the E quays.
entrance to Beitstadsundet, 3 miles NNW.

Steinkjer—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Size
Sorsikaia
Boga 65m 6.0m — — Berthing length of 125m (including dolphins).

Pub. 182
160 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

Steinkjer—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Size
Southside 330m 7.0m — — —
Equinor Bogen
Petroleum products. Berthing length of 65m
Equinor 15m 7m 150m 16,000 dwt
(including dolphins). Displacement of 20,000t.

Depths—Limitations.—The depth in the approach to

6.79 Contact Information.
Steinkjer is 9.1m. Vessels up to 35,000 dwt, 185 in length, 28m
beam, and 11m draft can be accommodated. Steinkjer—Contact Information
For more berthing information see the table titled
6.79

Steinkjer—Berth Information. VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16

Pilotage.—Harbor pilotage is not compulsory for merchant
6.79
Telephone 47-74-161825
vessels, but harbor pilots are available if required. Pilotage
Facsimile 47-74-164606
should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered
through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
The pilot boards in position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. The port Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 25 to 30m, clay, on a
6.79

monitors VHF channels 12, 14, and 16.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Steinkjer—
6.79
line joining Eggebogtangen Light and the beacon on
Rodskjeret. The anchorage is unsafe in bad weather from SW
to NW.

Pub. 182
 161
7.
Sector 7—Norway—Trondheim to Bodo

Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
7.0

SECTOR 7 — CHART INFORMATION

Pub. 182

SECTOR 7
NORWAY—TRONDHEIM TO BODO
Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast from Trond-
7.0
heim to the approaches to Bodo and Saltenfjorden.
General Remarks
7.1 Winds—Weather.—Weather reports and forecasts
are broadcast regularly from shore stations. Warnings of haz-
ardous conditions are also issued when appropriate.
7.1This is an area of frequent changes in barometric pressure
which result in frequent change in the direction of the wind.
There are frequent depressions in this area.
7.1Fairly large and rapid changes of pressure occur in this area.
A change of 24 millibars in 24 hours is relatively common, and
a larger 24 hour change is not rare. Also, the actual pressure on
a particular day may differ from the average, and on occasions
by perhaps 50 millibars.
7.1Since most depressions approach from the Atlantic, and
cross N of the area, the most common sequence is that of back-
ing and increasing, followed by veering and decreasing as a de-
pression moves away. The sequence can vary if a depression
moves further S over the area or if a polar low move S in a
strong N air current in winter.
7.1Because of the rugged topography in this area, strong winds
may blow from different directions at places relatively close to
each other.
7.1Strong winds outside a fjord may give way to calm weather
within, gales may be generated in the fjord or strait through
funneling of wind on occasions when winds are light outside.
Accordingly, any generalizations made about winds around
these coasts must be regarded as subject to large local varia-
tions.
7.1In the area of this sector, the average number of days per
month with gales force winds of force 8 or above, for the
months of November, December, January, and February is 9.8.
The average number of days per month with gales force winds
of force 8 or above, for the months of May, June, July, and Au-
gust is 1.1.
7.1Fog forms more often over the coast than over the open sea.
Coastal fog is more frequent in summer than in winter, and ear-
ly in the morning than later in the day. Frequency in the sum-
mer is more than 5 per cent about 2 days a month and from 2 to
5 per cent in winter, between 1 and 2 days monthly.
7.1The conditions which favor fog at sea and over exposed
coast do not usually favor fog formations inland or in the shel-
tered inner parts of the fjords. As a result, when there is a wide-
spread fog at sea the inner reaches of landlocked fjords are
usually clear and when fog affects the inner reaches there is
usually clear weather in the offing.
7.1Tides—Currents.—During fine weather, the flood current
sets to the NE and the ebb to the SW. In general the NE current,
increased by the prevailing ocean current, is the stronger, espe-
cially at a distance of 20 to 30 miles offshore.
7.1In periods of stormy weather the current runs strongly and
constantly to the NE when the wind is S or W, and with N or E
163
gales the set is constantly SW, but with less velocity.
7.1Within the fringing islands, the flood current always sets to
the NE and the ebb to the SW; here the NE current is also the
stronger.
Aspect.—From Halten, a generally steep coast trends about
50 miles NE to Vikna, 3 conspicuous islands close N of the
seaward approach to the port of Namsos.
7.1This stretch of coast is fringed with rocky islands, but there
are comparatively few off-lying dangers. It is heavily indented
by small fjords and inlets which penetrate in all directions, and
is remarkably barren except from some cultivation and forests
at the heads of the fjords.
7.1This part of the coast can be approached with greater safety
than that farther N, but is fully exposed to the SW gales.
7.1From Nordoerne Light (64°48'N., 10°33'E.) on the W side
of Vikna, the coast trends about 80 miles NNE to Ytreholmen
Light. Along this coast off-lying islands and reefs extend, gen-
erally, to a distance of 25 to 30 miles from the mainland.
7.1Along this part of the coast the outer rocks and islets are al-
most without exception, low and without distinctive features,
so a vessels position can be determined by bearings of distant
objects. The mountains on the larger islands and the mainland
possess such striking characteristics and attain such elevations
that in fairly clear weather they may be identified at 40 to 65
miles distant. These conspicuous landmarks may be selected to
fix the vessel’s position before the off-lying dangers are ap-
proached.
7.1The sea breaks over the outer shoals more readily with W
and NW winds, partly because the winds raise the heaviest sea,
and partly because the reefs are generally steep-to on their W
and NW sides.
7.1Along the coast extending about 100 mile NNE from Ytre-
holmen Light (66°01'N., 11°42'E.) to Bodo, the aspect is bleak
and precipitous. There is, however, some low land at the sea-
ward ends of the promontories which separate the fjords.
7.1The off-lying islets and reefs extend from 25 to 30 miles sea-
ward as far N as Traena, a group of islands about 35 miles N of
Ytreholmen Light. It has been reported (2008) that an obstruc-
tion lies 95 miles W of Ytterholmen Light near Traena Bank.
7.1North of this group, there is a gradual decrease in the off-
shore distance of the outer dangers until W of Kunna, a head-
land some 40 miles NE of Traena, where the distance is about
10 or 11 miles from the mainland.
7.1North of Kunna, the offshore distance again increases; W of
Bodo the dangers lie about 20 miles offshore.
7.1The principal fjords within this sector are Bindalsfjorden,
Velfjorden, Vefsnfjorden, Ranafjorden, Sjonafjorden,
Melfjorden, Tjongsfjorden, Skarsfjorden, Sorfjorden, Nord-
fjorden, Saltfjorden, and Skjerstadfjorden.
7.1In general, the channels leading from seaward to Indreleia
are longer and more difficult to navigate than those to the S. In
the N part of the sector, the entrances are difficult to make out
and a vessel’s position must be determined by the peaks on the
larger islands and on the mainland.
Pub. 182
164 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
7.1For details and information concerning the color and bear-
ings of the sector lights mentioned within this sector, see the
Light List.
7.1Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
7.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
7.1A traffic separation scheme and recommended route is estab-
lished off Traena and connects with the existing TSS scheme
and recommended route lying off Rost in the N.The scheme
can best be viewed on the chart. This section off Traena is part
of the larger previously-existing offshore routing schemes con-
necting a key points off the coast. These routes, adopted by the
International Maritime Organization, establish a safe route for
sea transport.
7.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
7.1Caution.—Three patches with depths of 16.8m, 19.8m, and
24m, lie, respectively, 5, 6.25 and 7.5 miles, NNE of Kya
(64°28'N., 10°13'E.). A restricted area, with a radius of 500m
centered on position 64°58'13.8''N, 07°37'13.2''E is located
about 23 miles S of the Heidrun platform and 88 miles W of
Sklinna Light.
7.1Heidrun (65°19.5'N., 7°19.1'E.), a platform equipped with a
racon, lies 92 miles W of Sklinna Light (65°12'N., 11°00'E.).
Awell lies 5 miles NNE. Gas is delivered to Trondheimsleia
(63°30'N., 9°00'E.) via a 130-mile long pipeline.
7.1Statoil Marin VTS conducts radar surveillance from the
Heidrun platform and can be contacted on VHF channel 9.
Vessels are requested to pass all installations at a distance of at
least 3 miles.
7.1Numerous structures, both above-water and submerged,
sometimes marked by buoys, as well as moored storage tank-
ers, all associated with oil and gas activity, are located off this
section of the coast.
Trondheim to Buholmrasa
7.2 The portion of Indreleia leading N from Trondheim
and Grandevika (63°41'N., 9°29'E.) to Buholmrasa requires
exact knowledge to avoid the shoals close to the fairway, which
in some places is reduced to a width of only 46m; because of
this, only an outline of the routes is given.
7.2Between Valsoya (63°52'N., 9°44'E.), an island, and Stok-
koya, an island about 13 miles NNE, the fairway is quite nar-
row in places, but from abreast the S end of Valsoya large
vessels can take an outer, and broader, channel known as Asen-
leia, which rejoins Indreleia in the fairway N of Stokkoya.
7.2The inner channel passes W and N of Valsoya, through the
narrow channel between Skjoroya and Lysoya, then E of Lei-
kua, 1.5 miles N of Lysoya, and W of Lauvoy.
7.2Linesfjorden, entered NW of Lauvoy, may be navigated by
large vessels, and Stokksundet, between Stokkoya and the
mainland, may be used by vessels of about 6.1m draft; howev-
er, there is a sharp turn E of Stokkoya.
7.2Stokken, which separates the NE side of Stokkoya from the
Pub. 182
mainland, is deep and free from dangers in the fairway; it leads
2.5 miles NW from Stokksundet to the junction with Asenleia.
7.2Asenleia lies between Hosenoyan, on the W, and Linesoya,
Stokkoya, and the mainland, on the E. Indreleia, N of the junc-
tion of Stokken and Asenleia, is deeper and wider than farther
S.
7.3 Marflessa Light (64°10'N., 10°08'E.), situated on an
islet about 5 miles NE of the junction of Stokksundet and
Asenleia, may be passed on either side. Kjeoya lies on the W
side of the fairway, 2 miles NNE of Marflesa Light, and is
passed on its E side. A light is situated on the SE extremity of
Kjeoya. Northeast of Kjeoya, the track passes W of Terningen
Light (64°13'N., 10°15'E.) and then farther N toward Borova.
7.3Kaurleia leads into this part of Indreleia from seaward, pass-
ing N of Kaura (64°14'N., 10°08'E.); this entrance is difficult
and local knowledge is necessary.
7.3Boroya (64°16'N., 10°17'E.) lies with its S extremity about
1.75 miles NE of Terningen Light. Indreleia leads between
Boroya and the mainland, and then proceeds N passing E of the
Skjervoyan group. From the Skjervoyan group, the track leads
E of Ramsoya and then E of the Rodoya group, farther N.
7.4 Saksa Light (64°24'N., 10°26'E.) lies on the W side
of Indreleia, at the S entrance to Buholmrasa; a lighted buoy is
situated about 250m E of Saksa Light; a patch with a charted
depth of 7.9m lies in the fairway 90m NW of this light. Lights
in range, situated on the W side of Sondre Rodoya, lead
through the S entrance to Bulholmrasa.
7.4Bulholmrasa can be navigated by large vessels, but the chan-
nel is narrow and is considered to be one of the most difficult to
transit, in bad weather, on the Norwegian coast.
7.4Buholmrasa Light (64°24'N., 10°27'E.) is shown from a
tower, 23m in height, standing about 1 mile E of Saksa Light.
A racon is located at the light.
7.4Langro Light (64°29'N., 10°30'E.) is shown from a tower
standing about 5 miles NNE of Buholmrasa Light and 7.5
miles ENE of Kya. The tower is equipped with a racon and is
located on the SE side of Grunnane, a group of dangerous
rocks and islets.
Grandevika to Folla
7.5 Between Grandevika and Folla, about 65 miles N, nu-
merous small fjords lie E of Indreleia. In general, the fjords
have no significant ports.
Bjugnfjorden, the fjord next N of Grandevika, leads E from
7.5
Indreleia and extends about 7 miles from Bjugnskjaer Light
(63°46'N., 9°33'E.), its N entrance point.
An islet fringed on its S side by foul ground, lies 2.75 miles
7.5
E of the light.
Bjugnfjorden may be entered from the SE part of Frohavet.
7.5
Tarvfjorden (63°46'N., 9°25'E.) separates Tarva from the
7.5
mainland, and lies in a NE and SW direction. It is entered be-
tween Gyltingtarren, off the S extremity of Tarva, and Bjugn-
skjaer Light, 5 miles E.
Torskjaer Light (63°46'N., 9°28'E.), is situated in the S part
7.5
of Tarvfjorden, 2.5 miles W of Bjugnskjaer Light. The fjord is
divided by foul ground running in a SSW-NNE direction.
The W part of the fjord, between the foul ground and Tarva,
7.5
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
7.2 Buholmrasa Light
should not be entered without local knowledge. Indreleia leads
through the E part of the fjord, between the foul ground and the
mainland.
7.5 Kjeungskjer Light
Kjeungskjer Light (63°43.6'N., 9°32.2'E.) stands on 20m
7.5
high red stone tower on Kjeungskeret, that lies on the W side of
Indreleia fairway at the N entrance of Grandevika.
Valsfjorden extends 2.5 miles NE from its entrance between
7.5
Valsholmskjaer Light (63°49'N., 9°36'E.) and the foul ground
about 0.5 mile S. It is reported that a racon is located at
Valsholmskjaer Light.
The fjord is free from dangers in the fairway. Lauvoyfjorden,
7.5
165
about 10 miles NE of Valsholmskjaer Light, on the SE side of
Indreleia, leads into Afjorden E and Skrafjorden NE. Vessels
with local knowledge can enter the fjord from Indreleia when
NE of Skjelholmen (63°54'N., 9°51'E.). Afjorden extends 8
miles in a general NE direction from its junction with Lauvoy-
fjorden. It has depths of 80m but there are isolated shoal patch-
es in the fjord.
7.5Skrafjorden, entered from Lauvoyfjorden, extends about 5
miles NE from abreast the S end of Lauvoy (63°56'N.,
9°56'E.). It is foul and should only be entered by small vessels
with local knowledge.
7.6 Linesfjorden is formed between the dangers SSW of
Linesoya (64°01'N., 9°54'E.), and Linesoya on the NW and the
mainland on the E. Indreleia passes through this fjord from
SSW to NNE. The track passes over a charted depth of 7.9m in
the S part of Linesfjorden.
Skjorafjorden (64°06'N., 10°10'E.), about 6 miles NE of
7.6
Linesfjorden, is entered from Indreleia, and is deep and free of
dangers in the fairway, with the exception of a 3m shoal lying
about 2 miles within the entrance. A 10m patch lies 0.35 mile
SE of the shoal.
The fjord extends about 2 miles SE and then continues about
7.6
2.5 miles NE.
Anchorage is available, in depths of 20 to 23m, sand and
7.6
clay, in a cove extending SSW from the S extremity of Skjo-
rafjorden. Foul ground lies in the vicinity of the anchorage.
Brandsfjorden, situated 3 miles E of Kaura (64°14'N.,
7.6
10°08'E.), is entered N of Terningen. The fjord extends 5 miles
SE and S and is deep and free from dangers.
Pub. 182
166 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
Kaurleia leads from seaward in a SSE direction toward Kau-
7.6
ra and joins Indreleia ESE of that islet.
Svefjorden (64°23'N., 10°30'E.) is entered from Indreleia
7.6
close S of the S entrance to Buholmrasa. It extends 5 miles
ESE and is deep and fairly clear of dangers. A marine farm is
located about 2 miles S of Svefjorden and is best seen on the
chart. There is little traffic in the fjord.
Folla—Namsfjorden
7.7 Folla is the body of water extending between the S
rocks of Vikna and the mainland S; it is entered between
Buholmen (64°25'N., 10°26'E.) and Nylandskjeret, marked by
a light, 12 miles N.
7.7Folla gives access at its E end to Namsfjorden and the port of
Namsos, to Foldfjorden, and to Naeroysundet and the port of
Rorvik.
7.7The passage outside Folla has particularly severe weather;
the seas go straight towards the coast when the winds are from
the WNW.
7.7The passage is very deep immediately outside the coastline
and reflections against the steep continental shelf may be one
of the reasons for the turbulent seas. In combination with out-
going current, this may possibly be one of the reasons that the
seas are particularly heavy W of the shoals.
7.7The open sea passage across Folla, from Bulholmrasa to
Naeroysundet, forms part of Indreleia.
7.7Kya (64°28'N., 10°13'E.), an isolated islet marked by a light,
is an excellent mark in the approach to Folla.
7.7Some of the mountains are visible from the vicinity of Kya
for a distance of 45 miles SSW and as far as 60 miles NE.
7.7Halsfjell (64°19'N., 10°'37'E.), 13.5 miles SE of Kya and
504m high, is seen as a prominent mountain with a deep cleft,
and a large round hummock S of the cleft. Helvikkeipen, 3.5
miles NNW of Halsfjell, is 347m high, it is identifiable by its
prominent location on a peninsula, with a fjord on either side.
7.7Oksbasheia (64°25'N., 10°31'E.), 8.5 miles ESE of Kya and
228m high, is prominently situated on a peninsula. Nes-
vagklubben, consisting of two hummocks about 103m high,
rises in the SW part of the same peninsula.
7.7The tidal current seaward of Namsfjorden sets W with the
falling tide and E with the rising tide. The direction, however,
is greatly affected by the wind and at times the velocity is fairly
strong.
7.7The islet of Kya lies in the S approach to Namsfjorden. On
the N side of the fairway, about 15 miles NNE of Kya, is
Nylandskjeret (64°41'N., 10°33'E.), which consists of several
rocks.
7.7Hilleroen (64°46'N., 10°25'E.), covered by 2.7m, always
breaks. It is the farthest W of the shoal patches off Vikna and
lies 5 miles NW of Nylandskjeret.
7.7Klakken, a 16.7m patch, lies about 2 miles W of Nylandsk-
jeret.
7.8 Sveskallen (64°33'N., 10°15'E.), with a least charted
depth of 16.8m, lies 5 miles N of Kya Light. Ostvikklakken, a
19.8m patch, lies 1.75 miles ENE of Sveskallen; Skillengen, a
24m patch lies 1.25 miles farther NE. These three patches
break and the area should be avoided.
Kya, situated about 5 miles seaward of the dangers to the S,
7.8
Pub. 182
affords a good landmark when approaching Folla from the SW.
From abreast this islet course, should be shaped to pass about 2
miles NW of the islets and dangers lying off the mainland in
the approach to Namsfjorden.
7.8When approaching Folla from N, a wide berth should be giv-
en to the dangers lying off the W side of Vikna; course should
be shaped to pass S of Klakken (64°40'N., 10°27'E.).
7.8After clearing Klakken, course should be adjusted to pass 1
mile NW of Bjoroyvaer (64°36'N., 10°48'E.), lying 18 miles
NE of Kya. Continue NE and pass S of Sorhunden, a small islet
3.75 miles NNE of Bjoroyvaer, then steer SE and enter Nams-
fjorden, W of Otteroya.
7.9 On the S side of Folla is a large indentation in the
mainland, in which are the islands of Otteroya, Joa, and Elva.
7.9The fjords which separate these islands have distinctive
names. They are collectively known as Namsfjorden, but the
fjord which leads W of Otteroya to Namsos is the one to which
the name is specifically assigned.
7.9Namsfjorden is entered between Knapholmene (64°36'N.,
11°02'E.), an islet off the W end of Otteroya, and the mainland
1 mile W.
7.9The fjord, which is deep throughout, with an average width
of 1 mile, leads 18 miles SE to the port of Namsos.
7.9Tides—Currents.—From the entrance of Namsfjorden to
Finsneset, 3.5 miles SE, the tidal currents can be quite strong.
7.9Pilotage.—The services of a State Pilot in the Namsos area
can be arranged through the harbor authority at Trondheim. Pi-
lot boarding locations are located at Raudoyleia (64°24'N.,
10°14'E.) and 2 miles SW of Sorhunden islet.
7.10 Mefaldtaren (64°37'N., 11°00'E.), a 14.9m patch,
lies about 1 mile NNW of the light on Knapholmene; Svarttar-
en, a 2.4m patch, lies 2.5 miles WNW. Foul ground extends
0.25 mile from the mainland, 0.8 mile WSW from the light.
Finsneset, marked by a light, is located on the W side of
7.10
Namsfjorden, 3 miles SSW of Knapholmene; it rises to a
height of 151m, 0.25 mile inland.
Anchorage is available, in 23 to 32m, sand, off Lovika on the
7.10
W side of Namsfjorden, 1 mile SSW of Finsneset.
During bad weather from SW of Folla, large vessels seeking
7.10
shelter anchor SE of Krokvik (64°31'N., 11°04'E.), in the SW
part of Leirfjorden, 3 miles SSW of Finsneset, in depths of 40
to 44m, clay.
7.11 Hoddoya (64°28'N., 11°14'E.), an island which rises
to a height of 208m on its W side, is located on the W side of
Namsfjorden, about 9 miles within its entrance. Hoddoygrun-
nen, a 1.5m patch, lies 0.25 mile off the N side of Hoddoya.
Shoal water extends about 0.1 mile off the NE extremity of
7.11
Hoddoya. Namsfjorden is about 0.7 mile wide in this area.
Bromsneset Light stands on a point in Otteroya, E of Hod-
7.11
doya. A series of islands lies on the S side of the fairway from
1 to 2.75 miles ESE of the light.
Ansneset (64°28'N., 11°24'E.), the S point of Otteroya, has a
7.11
drying spit extending about 0.2 mile S from it. A rocky shoal,
covered by less than 1.8m, lies on the S side of the fairway, 1
mile S of the point.
Maerranes, a promontory on the mainland, lies 1.5 miles SE
7.11
of Ansneset. Namsos is situated 1.25 miles NE of Maerranes.
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 167

Vessels in transit to Namsfjorden steer a mid-channel course

7.11 may be blocked; the port is kept open by icebreakers.
until abreast of Hoddoya. Shape a course to pass N of Hoddoy-
grunnen, then between Hoddoya and Otteroya. Port of Namsos
The white sector of Bromsneset Light bearing between 286°
7.11

and 293°, astern, leads clear of the dangers until SW of Ansne- http://www.namsos.kommune.no
set, when a course should be shaped to pass S of Maerranes,
then NE to Namsos. Tides—Currents.—The spring range of tide is 2.7m.
7.12

Strong tidal currents may be experienced in Namsos. The

7.12

Namsos (64°28'N., 11°30'E.) flow is affected by the outflow from Namsenelva, the shallow
water area E of Namsos, and can cause difficulty in berthing.
World Port Index No. 23050 Depths—Limitations.—The quays of Namsos are situated
7.12

around a small bay. The older part of the town, including the
7.12 The coastal port of Namsos is situated on the N side railway station and the church, occupies the E side.
of mouth of Namsen. The S part is called the Spillum harbor, Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
7.12

with berths on reclaimed land. Namsos—Berth Information.

The port can accommodated vessels up to 100,000 dwt, with
7.12

a maximum length of 250m in and a maximum draft of 15.5m.

Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
7.12

may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an

additional cost. Pilot boarding locations are located at
Raudoyleia (64°24'N., 10°14'E.) and 2 miles SW of Sorhund-
en islet. but if heavy swell is present, vessels may be directed
into smooth water by the pilot boat. Contact the pilot office by
VHF at Kristiansund.
Regulations.—A speed limit of 5 knots is in force. This
7.12

speed limit applies to all vessels except those engaged in oper-

ations for the Norwegian armed forces or craft engaged in
emergency police, custom, fire fighting, ambulance, or search
and rescue missions along the Namsos coastal region.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Namsos—Con-
7.12

tact Information.

Namsos—Contact Information
7.12 By Sven McCullough (Svenhaus) via Wikimedia Commons VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Namsos
7.12

Telephone 47-74-272400
Ice.—The harbor is well sheltered and cargo operations are
7.12 Facsimile 47-74-272550
seldom interfered with. Navigation is seldom impeded by ice
E-mail havnekontoret@namsos.kommune.no
except during exceptionally severe winters, when entrances

Namsos—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Size
Kiskaia-Tiendeholmen
Kiskai 56m 8.0m — — — Sand, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Moelvan Van Severen
Moelvan 120m 5.0m — — — Wood chips, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Spillum Nord
North 65m 10.0m — — — Sand, wood chips, breakbulk, and bunkers.
South 45m 10m — — — Sand, wood chips, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Namsen Depot
Shell Namsen 16.5.0 Clean products. Berthing length of138m (in-
60m 250m 15.5m 100,000 dwt
Depot m cluding dolphins).

Pub. 182
168 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
Anchorage.—There is a good, spacious anchorage available
7.12
in the harbor, in depths of 50 to 60m. Anchorage is available
closer in, in depths of 18 to 42m.
7.13 Lygnenfjorden is entered from Namsfjorden and ex-
tends about 9 miles SSE from its entrance between Skjerpoya
on the W and Kvarvodden, 1.5 miles E.
Bangsund Light (64°25'N., 11°21'E.) is situated on an islet
7.13
on the E side of the fjord 1.5 miles S of Skjerpoya.
On each side of the entrance to the fjord are several dangers,
7.13
whose positions may be seen on the chart. The white sectors of
Bangsund Light lead clear of the dangers lying 0.25 mile E of
Skjerpoya.
Anchorage, in 10 to 19m, mud, with mooring rings, is avail-
7.13
able off Bangsund, 1 mile SE of the light.
Lokkaren, Surviksundet, Lauvoyfjorden, and
Rodsunda
7.14 Lokkaren, Surviksundet, Lauvoyfjorden, and Rodsun-
da lead N from Namsfjorden, along the E and NE sides of Otte-
roya, to join Folla N of Otteroya.
Lokkaren (64°30'N., 11°26'E.) is entered E of Ansneset and
7.14
extends 3.5 miles N, along the E side of Otteroya, to its junc-
tion with Surviksundet, in the vicinity of Levra.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 30m, spans the fairway
7.14
2 miles within the entrance. A depth of 4.9m is charted close S
of the bridge. Lokkaren may be entered within the white sec-
tors of the light situated on the W side of the fairway 0.75 mile
NNE of its S entrance. Another white sector of this light,
astern, leads farther NNE.
Levra Light (64°32'N., 11°28'E.) changing from red to
7.14
green leads W of the 4.9m patch S of the bridge.
Surviksundet (64°33'N., 11°24'E.), a narrow sound lying
7.14
between Otteroya on the SW and Elva and Hooya on the NE,
connects Lokkaren with Lauvoyfjorden. The sound is spanned
by several overhead cables, the lowest having a vertical clear-
ance of 30m.
An 8.8m patch lies in the NW entrance of Surviksundet; oth-
7.14
erwise it is clear of dangers.
Levra Light, bearing 124° astern, changing from red to
7.14
green, leads through the middle of the sound, to Kraka, foul
ground extending 160m NE from Otteroya, 2.75 miles NW of
the light. From Kraka, the white sector of the light situated on
Lauvoy leads into Lauvoyfjorden; however, the 8.8m patch lies
within this sector.
7.15 Lauvoyfjorden (64°35'N., 11°20'E.) lies between Ot-
teroya and Joa on the W and Elva on the E; it is mostly clear of
dangers and is well marked.
Lauvoytaren (64°33'N., 11°20'E.), a 3m patch, lies 0.5 mile
7.15
SW of the SW point of Elva. Lauvoy, a small islet, is located
0.3 mile W of the SW point of Elva. Foul ground extends 0.2
mile N from the islet; a 4m patch lies 0.6 mile N.
Lyngholmen (64°35'N., 11°24'E.) lies in the middle of the
7.15
fjord, 0.8 mile N of Lauvoy; a drying patch lies 183m N.
Vessels which have entered Lauvoyfjorden from Surviksun-
7.15
det, pass W of Lauvoy, and steer with the white sector of that
light, astern, which leads into the SW part of Rodsunda.
Anchorage may be taken off Fosslandsosen, in the SW part
7.15
Pub. 182
of Lauvoyfjorden, in 44m, clay.
Rodsunda (64°38'N., 11°10'E.) is formed between Otteroya,
7.15
on the S and W, and by Joa on the E; it is about 6 miles from its
junction with Lauvoyfjorden to its NW entrance. The fairway
is mostly clear of dangers.
Holviktaren (64°36'N., 11°18'E.), a 1m patch marked by a
7.15
light, lies 0.15 mile offshore, 0.6 mile NW of Holvikneset, the
S extremity of Joa.
Stonga, drying, lies at the extremity of a spit extending 0.5
7.15
mile from Joa, at the NW entrance to Rodsunda.
Vessels which have entered Rodsunda from Lauvoyfjorden
7.15
steer a mid-channel course and pass E of Jervika Light
(64°38'N., 11°09'E.), close within the NW entrance point. The
white sector of Jervika Light, astern, leads W of Gauvene into
Folla.
7.16 Gyltefjorden (64°39'N., 11°22'E.) is entered between
Skreddarneset, the NE point of Joa and Storhovedet, 2.5 miles
NE, and leads 3.5 miles S to the entrance to Seirstadfjorden
and Nordsunda. A marine farm is situated on the E side of Joa.
The fjord is deep and clear of dangers.
A mid-channel course will lead SSW to the entrance to
7.16
Seirstadfjorden.
Anchorage may be taken, in 20 to 24m, clay, in Movika,
7.16
close within the N entrance to Gyltefjorden, on the E side.
Seirstadfjorden (64°37'N., 11°22'E.) is entered W of Ol-
7.16
hammeren, the N point of Elva, and leads 2.5 miles S into Lau-
voyfjorden. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of
45m, spans the fjord in the vicinity of the light on Olham-
meren.
Shoal water extends up to about 0.2 mile off the E side of
7.16
Joa, which reduces the fairway to about 0.2 mile in places.
Nordsunda and Arbustraumen, which separate Elva from the
7.16
mainland, lead SSE from Gyltefjorden and connect with the
various fjords E of Elva.
Nordsund and Arbustraumen, especially the latter, are fre-
7.16
quently difficult and even dangerous to navigate, due to the
strong tidal currents and to the squalls which come off the high
land E. These channels, which can be used only by small ves-
sels, are not recommended in the absence of good local knowl-
edge.
Foldfjorden
7.17 Follfjorden is entered at the inner end of Folla and ex-
tends 25 miles ENE towards the entrances to Opployfjorden,
and Indre Foldjorden.
Flottra (64°40'N., 11°04'E.), an island marked by a light, is
7.17
situated at the E end of Folla, just over 1 mile N of Otteroya.
Foul ground extends about 0.4 mile W and 0.3 mile N and E
7.17
from the island.
Stokkgrunnen (64°39'N., 11°00'E.), a dangerous drying
7.17
reef, lies in the middle of the fairway, 2 miles SW of Flottra.
Smatarene, a patch with a depth of 11.9m, lies 0.5 mile NE
7.17
of Flottra; isolated patches, with depths of 9.8m and 9.1m, lie,
respectively, 0.3 and 0.75 mile, N of Flottra.
Tarnfallene, islets and rocks which usually break, lies on the
7.17
S side of the approach to Foldfjorden, 2 miles E of Flottra.
Vessels approaching Foldfjorden from Folla can pass on ei-
7.17
ther side of Stokkgrunnen and then SE of Flottra. Then shape a
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
course to enter the white sector of Abelvaer Light (64°43'N.,
11°10'E.), 4 miles NE of Flottra.
When N of Tarnfallene, shape an ENE course to pass about
7.17
midway between Mefallstaren (64°46'N., 11°29'E.), awash,
and Kvalholmen, 1.25 miles SE. When clear of Mefallstaren,
steer E toward Opployfjorden.
Opployfjorden (64°48'N., 11°45'E.), the E continuation of
7.17
Foldfjorden, is entered between Digermulen (64°47'N.,
11°43'E.) and Galtnesodden, 0.75 mile NE and extends 3.5
miles E to Salsbruket.
Galtnesskjaer Light is situated on a rock which lies in the en-
7.17
trance to Opployfjorden.
Several overhead cables, with a vertical clearance of 30m,
7.17
cross the entrance to the fjord approximately 0.3 miles E of
Galtnesskjeret. Overhead cables with a vertical clearance of
10m cross from the S side of Krokoya to Monsoya.
The fjord may be entered by passing N or S of Galtnesskjaer
7.17
Light, then E with the white sector of that light astern, passing
S of the island about 1 mile E.
Steer to pass N of Garsoya, just over 1 mile farther E, then N
7.17
of Opployskjeret, 0.2 mile E of Garsoya, then directly to Sals-
bruket.
7.18 Salsbruket (64°48'N., 11°52'E.) stands on the N side
of the head of Opployfjorden, 0.5 mile ENE of Opployskjeret.
Salsbruket Church, situated 0.5 mile W of Salsbruket is floodlit
and makes a good landmark. The harbor is good, but winds can
be troublesome.
7.18The export quay is 70m long and has depths of 7.5 to 9.2m
alongside. Vessels of 1,000 to 3,000 gt regularly use the quay;
vessels of 10,000 gt have berthed there but have only been part-
ly loaded.
7.18Anchorage is available off the quays, in 25 to 30m, sand and
clay.
7.18Indre Foldfjorden (64°53'N., 11°44'E.) is connected to the
NE end of Foldfjorden through Korsnesstraumen, a narrow
sound. From the N end of Korsnesstraumen, Indre Foldfjorden
extends ENE 13 miles, then SE for 10 miles.
7.18Korsnesstraumen and Indre Foldfjorden are mostly clear of
dangers but are narrow in places. Korsnesstraumen is navigable
without difficulty, even though the tidal currents run strongly in
it.
7.18Indre Foldfjorden is narrowest at Foldereidstraumen, about
16 miles ENE of the S entrance to Korsnesstraumen; large ves-
sels should not pass it without a pilot or a local mariner on
board.
7.18Korsnesstraumen is entered between Falskeneset (64°50'N.,
11°39'E.), a headland, and a point 0.35 mile WNW.
7.18The white sector of Kjeoy Light (64°48'N., 11°35'E.),
astern, leads into the fairway of Korsnesstraumen. A mid-chan-
nel course leads N through Korsnesstraumen to Indre Fold-
fjorden; the sound is spanned by an overhead cable, with a
vertical clearance of 45m.
7.19 Kvalbakskjer Light (64°52'N., 11°41'E.) is situated
at the extremity of a spit which extends 0.15 mile W from the
mainland, at the entrance to Indre Foldfjorden; the fairway
passes W and N of this light. The fjord is spanned by overhead
cables, with a vertical clearance of 43m, 1 mile NE of the light.
The white sector of Skaftenes Light (64°57'N., 12°01'E.)
7.19
169
leads from the vicinity of the overhead cables above to within
about 1 mile of the light. Steer a mid-channel course to pass S
of Skaftenes Light; then steer in the white sector of that light,
astern, which leads N of Ahamaren, a point 2.5 miles ENE of
the light.
A 5m patch lies on the S side of the fairway 0.75 mile ENE
7.19
of Ahamaren. There is a light situated on shore N of Ahamar-
en; the white sector of this light, astern, leads N of the 5m
patch.From this area SE to the head of the fjord, passage
should not be attempted without local knowledge.
Kongsmoen (64°53'N., 12°26'E.), situated at the head of the
7.19
fjord, 9.75 miles SE of Ahamaren, is the site of a quay, 50m
long, with depths of 9.2 to 10.3m alongside.
Anchorage can be obtained, in charted depths of 49m, off
7.19
Kongsmoen.
Arnoyfjorden (64°46'N., 11°15'E.) lies ENE of Tviberg and
7.19
may be entered by passing either N or SE of the island; the SE
side, however, is preferred. A 4m rocky shoal lies on the SE
side of the fairway, about 1 mile ENE of the S point of Tviberg.
Naeroysundet
7.20 Indreleia crosses Folla in open sea for a distance of 20
miles, then leads through Naeroysundet (64°50'N., 11°11'E.)
between Indre Vikan on the NW and Naeroya, Maroya, and the
mainland on the SE.
Tidal currents in Naeroysundet are NE on the flood current
7.20
and SW on the ebb current. The spring rate in each direction is
3 knots off the W side of Maroya and 4 knots off the E side of
Stromoya.
The group of shoals which separates the NW side of the en-
7.20
trance to Foldfjorden from the SE side of the approach to Nae-
roysundet includes the following significant dangers; the
positions are given from the islet Sorhunden (64°39'N.,
10°53'E.):
1. Bondfallet, a 4.6m patch, lying 1.5 miles NW.
2. A 2m patch lying 1.75 miles NNW.
3. A 5.8m patch lying 2 miles NNW.
Gjeslingene Light (64°44'N., 10°51'E.) is situated on the
7.20
NW side of the approach to Naeroysundet, 4.75 miles N of So-
hunden. A racon is located at the light tower, which is 24m in
height.
Grinna Light is situated about 3.75 miles ENE of Gjesling-
7.20
ene Light.
Finskjerane, a group of rocks partly awash, extends NE from
7.20
Grinna Light. Spygrunnsfallet, awash, lies on the E side of the
fairway, 1.5 miles ESE of the light.
Naeroysundet is entered between Finskjerslua (64°46'N.,
7.20
11°00'E.), at the E extremity of Finskjerane, and Spygrunsfall-
et.
Naeroysund Light stands on the NW side of Naeroysundet,
7.20
7.75 miles NE of Grinna Light. A bridge, with a vertical clear-
ance of 41m, stands 0.8 mile NE of Naeroysund Light.
Vessels approaching Naeroysundet should adjust course to
7.20
pass about 1 mile SE of Gjeslingene Light, then pass 0.7 mile
SE of Grinna and continue NE into Naeroysundet, and in mid-
channel to Rorvik.
7.21 Rorvik (64°52'N., 11°14'E.) (World Port Index No.
23040) is a resort and fishing harbor protected by moles. The
Pub. 182
170 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo

entrance is about 50m wide. The harbor is separated into two (64°55'N., 11°32'E.) a group of islets, on the NW, and Kvingla
parts by a peninsula situated in Indre Vikna at the NE end of and the mainland on the SE, passing either side of Svinoya.
Naeroysundet. A light is situated on the SE point of Stromoya; a 4m patch,
7.22

Winds—Weather.—Strong SW winds raise a considerable

7.21 marked on its W side by a lighted buoy, lies 0.25 mile NE of
sea, sometimes making the quays untenable. Southeast winds the light.
can bind vessels to many of the quays. The tidal flow off the 4m patch above is 4 knots at springs
7.22

Depths—Limitations.—Vessels with a maximum draft of

7.21 tide. It is 3 knots off Krakoya, 1.25 miles NNE.
6m can be accommodated. See the table titled Rorvik—Berth Humulrasa Light (64°55'N., 11°22'E.) stands on the SW
7.22

Information. point of Svinoya. The following features positions are given

Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
7.21 from this light:
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an 1. Krigsborgene Islets, lying about 1 mile SW, on the
additional cost. The pilot boards in position 64°44.0'N, NW side of the fairway.
10°58.0'E by arrangement. 2. Krigsborntaren, a rock marked by a light, lying 0.8
Regulations.—The harbor area of Rorvik extends from Naer-
7.21 mile SW.
oysund Light, 1.5 miles SW of Rorvik, to Haganes Light, 1.5 3. A light standing on the E coast of Svinoya, 0.7 mile
miles NE of Rorvik, including the waters on the N side of Maroya. NE.
Within the harbor area, powered vessels must not proceed at
7.21 4. A light standing on Valhaugen, on the NW coast of
a greater speed than necessary for good seamanship and ma- Kvingla, 0.7 mile ENE.
neuverability. Cautionary notice boards are placed at the SW A light is situated on Gjerdinggalten (64°56'N., 11°28'E.),
7.22

and NE limits of the harbor area. on the NW side of the fairway, SE of Gjerdingen. A light is sit-
Contact Information.—See the table titled Rorvik—Con-
7.21 uated on Stangholmgalten, on the SE side of the fairway, 0.4
tact Information. mile E of Gjerdinggalten.
Vessels proceeding N from Rorvik and vicinity, pass E of
7.22

Rorvik—Contact Information Stromoya and W of the 4m patch, and then in mid-channel,

passing E of Krakoya about 1 mile NNE of Stromoya. The
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
white sectors of the charted lights lead clear of the dangers.
Telephone 47-74-390081 The main fairway E of Stromoya has been used by vessels of
7.22

Facsimile 47-74-391470 20,000 gt with a draft of 10m. Larger vessels can pass if
assisted by tugs. Large vessels should only use this channel
E-mail havnekontoret@namsos.kommune.no during the period of slack water.
The narrow channel W of Stromoya, in which the least
7.22

Rorvik to Risvaerjorden charted depth is 7m, can be used by vessels up to 1,200 gt.
Powered vessels should observe the speed as required for
7.22

7.22 Indreleia continues from Rorvik to Risvaerfjorden, 12 Rorvik. When the vessel has cleared Krakoya and Krigsborn-
miles NE, between Indre Vikna, Stromoya (64°52'N., taren (64°54'N., 11°20'E.), 1 mile NE, course may be shaped
11°16'E.), Krakoya, Lauvoya, Gjerdingen, and Risvaer to pass either E or W of Svinoya.

Rorvik—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Vessel Remarks
Draft
Refa Terminals
General 44m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Nord-Trondelag Terminal
Chemicals, ro/pax, ro-ro freight,
Main 253m 6.0m containers, breakbulk, multipurpose,
bunkers, and reefer.
Ottersoya Terminal
Bunker 34m 6.0m Dirty products and bunkers.
Naeroysund 30m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Purkholmen 20m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Skansen 27m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Esso Terminal
Bunker 28m — Dirty products and bunkers.

Pub. 182
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
Rorvik—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Vessel
Draft
Shell Terminal
Bunker 72m — Dirty products and bunkers.
Svinestien, the passage between Svinoya and Kvingla, may
7.22
be entered with the light on the NW coast of Kvingla, bearing
between 051° and 059°; steer to clear the light, then bring it
astern to bear between 227° and 231°, which will lead NE be-
tween Gjerdinggalten and Stangholmgalten.
7.23 Humulrasa (64°57'N., 11°23'E.) is entered off the
NW side of Indreleia, N of Svinoya, and leads N between Lau-
voya and Gjerdingen into the open sea.
Indre Haugoytaren (64°56'N., 11°22'E.), a 6.3m patch, lies
7.23
1 mile N of the SW point of Svinoya. A 6m patch lies 0.3 mile
W of Indre Haugoytaren.
Range lights are situated on Lamholmen, off the NW coast
7.23
of Gjerdingen.
The recommended route through Humulrasa passes close E
7.23
of Indre Haugoytaren, with the white sector of Humulrasa
Light astern. When clear of Lamholmen, vessels may proceed
to the open sea or NE toward Lekafjorden and Indreleia.
Risvaersundet (64°58'N., 11°31'E.) is a much-used passage
7.23
which extends NNE from Oteren (64°58'N., 11°31'E.), located
1.75 miles NE of Gjerdinggalten, and leads between Blikoya,
Kalvoya, Skarvholmen, Hamneholmen, and Leroya on the W
and Risvaer, Risvaeroya, and Stensoya on the E.
Oterholmflakket, a 3m patch, lies 0.25 mile WSW of Oteren.
7.23
Patches of 6 and 8m lie between Oterholmflakket and Oteren.
Risvaersundet may be entered either between Oterholmflak-
7.23
ket and Oteren, where the least depth is 6m, or E of Oteren in
deeper water. The white sector of the light on Risvaer will lead
in the fairway NNE, E of Blikoya.
Steer to pass W of the light, then bring it astern bearing be-
7.23
tween 209° and 215°. After passing clear of Leroya, course
may be altered WNW into Risvaerfjorden or NE into Dolm-
sundet.
7.24 From Stangholmgalten (64°56'N., 11°28'E.), Indre-
leia leads close off the mainland, passing SE of Oteren and
Store Oterholmen, 0.3 mile NE, and then 183m W of Eiternes-
tangen which is situated 4 miles ENE of Stangholmgalten, then
NNE into the E end of Risvaerfjorden.
Risvaergalten, with rocks partly awash, lies 1 mile NE of
7.24
Oteren. A 2m patch lies 0.2 mile farther NNE.
Ivarholmen, marked by a light, Lamholmen, Drenken, and
7.24
Bardskjeret lie across the passage between Risvaer and Eit-
ernestangen.
From the vicinity of Stangholmgalten, the white sector of
7.24
that light, bearing between 230° and 238°, astern, leads SE of
Store Oterholmen (64°58'N., 11°32'E.). From a position 0.2
mile SE of Oteren the fairway leads NE between Eiternes-
tangen and Bardskjeret, taking care to avoid the 7m patch, 0.15
mile NE of Bardskjeret and Hornbaen (64°59'N., 11°35'E.),
rocks, partly awash, about 0.6 mile NNE of Bardskjeret.
171
Remarks
When the vessel has cleared the passage E of Bardskjeret,
7.24
steer NW into Risvaerfjorden, passing SW of Hornbaen, or
midway between Hornbaen and the mainland, then NE into
Dolmsundet.
Folla to Yetterholmen
7.25 Sklinna Banken (65°16'N., 10°10'E.), an extensive
bank with general depths of less than 183m, and a least charted
depth of 121m, lies with its center about 21 miles WNW of Sk-
linna.
Sklinna (65°12'N., 11°00'E.), a small group of isolated is-
7.25
lands, lies 26.75 miles NNE of Nordoyan.
Sklinna Light is shown from a tower, 14m in height, standing
7.25
on Heimoya, the principal island of the group. Several rocky
patches, which sometimes break, lie N of the W shoals off Vik-
na.
Galttaren (65°09'N., 10°41'E.) has a least charted depth of
7.25
11m and lies 8 miles WSW of Sklinna. Breigrund, 2.75 miles S
of Galttaren, has a charted depth of 14.6m. A shoal, with a
depth of 2.7m, lies 2.75 miles NNE of Galttaren.
Hogbraken (65°24'N., 11°02'E.), an isolated islet located
7.25
11.5 miles N of Sklinna, is visible for a distance of about 4
miles. Two above water rocks lie about 2.5 miles S of the islet;
in moderate weather these two rocks are marked by heavy
breakers. Shoals, which always break, extend about 1 mile W
of these two rocks.
Steinan (65°36'N., 11°17'E.), a group of islets and rocks,
7.25
lies 14 miles NNE of Hogbraken. They lie at the SW end of a
larger group of islets known as Bremsteinan, which lies 9 miles
W of Vega.
Skjaervaergrunnan, located 9 miles N of Bremsteinan, has
7.25
depths of 16.4 to 18.3m and is rocky; this area should be avoid-
ed in heavy weather, when the flow in the vicinity is strong and
the sea troublesome. Nordvaer, Skjaevaer, and Hysvaer are
three groups of islets which lie 4.5 miles NE, 4 miles E, and
7.5 miles ESE, respectively, from Skjaervaergrunnan; these ar-
eas are foul and should be avoided.
The area 14 miles NE of Nordvaer is a mass of islets and
7.25
reefs which are unapproachable from seaward.
Ytreholmen (Ytterholmen) (66°01'N., 11°42'E.), 13 miles
7.25
NNE of Nordvaer, lies about 15 miles W of the SW point of
Donna; the island is marked by a light. Skalsveskolten,
Skalsveet, and Baksveet, covered by depths of 24 to 29m, lie
4.5 to 6.25 miles W and WSW of Ytreholmen (Ytterholmen)
and are the farthest patches W in the approach to Ytreholmen.
The sea breaks over these rocky patches in bad weather.
7.25
Meloya (66°04'N., 11°37'E.), a rock, awash, with surround-
7.25
ing shoals, lies about 2 miles NW of Ytterholmen. In bad
weather, these dangers form a large breaker which extends in a
NE to SW direction.
Pub. 182
172 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
Caution.—From the vicinity of Hogbraken to Ytterholmen,
7.25
a wide berth should be given to the 183m contour; this is little
more than 1 mile seaward of the outer line of islets and shoals
in some places.
Vikna to Donna
7.26 Vikna (64°55'N., 11°00'E.) consists of three large is-
lands, Indre Vikna, Mellem Vikna, and Ytre Vikna. These are
surrounded by a number of islets, rocks, and shoals.
Among the several shoal areas S and W of Vikna, the tidal
7.26
currents set towards the land.
In the vicinity of Vikna, mariners bound for Indreleia or the
7.26
inner fjords are strongly advised to enter through Folla or Ma-
holmrasa.
Maholmrasa (65°00'N., 10°55'E.) is a good and deep chan-
7.26
nel leading ESE, from seaward, between the coastal reefs off
the NW side of Vikna, then S of the islets Maholmen
(65°00'N., 10°58'E.), Rauoya, and Kvaloya, lying off the N
side of Vikna. Indreleia can be reached through Humulrasa or
Risvaerfjorden.
Maholmrasa is approached from W by passing N of the Ars-
7.26
grunnane patches, which lie 2 miles NW of Arsflesa
(65°01'N., 10°41'E.); these shoal patches, with a least charted
depth of 12.8m, break in bad weather.
The range lights on Maholmen, in line bearing 105°, ahead,
7.26
lead 0.15 mile N of Djupbaen, awash, lying 0.75 miles ENE of
Arsflesa, then S of Brosjetarene, patches with a depth of 10m,
lying 0.5 mile farther ENE.
Oksrevltaren (65°01'N., 10°51'E.), a 16.5m patch, which
7.26
breaks in heavy weather, lies close N of the range line, 2.5
miles WNW of the front range light.
It is advisable to keep the rear light open of the front range
7.26
light in order to pass safely S of Oksrevltaren and the 1 and 2m
patches which lie close N of the track, 1.5 miles ESE of Oks-
revltaren.
The fairway of Maholmrasa S and E of Maholmen is flanked
7.26
by numerous dangers, which are charted. The white sector of
Ternholmen Light (65°00'N., 11°07'E.), standing on an islet
off the S side of Kvaloya, leads clear of the dangers; however,
Maholmtaren, a 1m patch, situated 0.5 mile WSW of the rear
range light, lies within these bearings.
In the E approach to Maholmrasa, a drying reef lies 0.7 mile
7.26
E of Ternholmen Light. A 10m patch lies 1 mile ESE of the
light, and Ytre Ragnildtaren, a 3m patch, lies about 2 miles
ESE of the same light.
Mefjordsbaen, with a least charted depth of 3.9m, lies 1 mile
7.26
SE of Ternholmen Light.
The white sector of Ternholmen Light bearing leads clear of
7.26
the above danger.
The range lights on Gjerdingen bearing 147° leads SE to-
7.26
ward Indreleia; it may be reached alternatively, by continuing
E and entering Risvaerfjorden.
7.27 Helmoya (65°12'N., 11°00'E.), 35m high, is the larg-
est and highest of the Sklinna group; it is marked by Sklinna
Light. A vessel proceeding to Indreleia may pass either N or S
of the group, but only the N approach will be described.
From positions NW of Sklinna, the approach to a position
7.27
about 4 miles W of Sklinna Light (65°12'N., 11°00'E.) is clear
Pub. 182
of dangers in the fairway. With the light bearing not less than
087°, a vessel will pass N of Horsgrunnskoltane, which has a
least depth of 6.7m, and Horsgrunnen, with a least depth of
2.7m, situated about 5 miles WSW of the light; these patches
sometimes break.
The light on Sklinnaflesan (65°08'N., 10°59'E.), 4.5 miles S
7.27
of Helmoya, bearing between 125.5° and 142°, leads NE of
Horsgrunnskoltane, and SW of Sawgrunnen, an 11.9m patch
lying 2.25 miles NNW of the light.
From a position 4 miles W of Sklinna Light, the route leads
7.27
ESE, passing N of Sawgrunnen (65°09'N., 10°56'E.) and S of
Breidgrunnen, a 2.7m patch which breaks, 1.25 miles SSW of
the light. Flotran, 0.5 mile SSE of Breidgrunnen, a patch with a
depth of 8.5m, is passed on its S side.
7.28 Stortaren (65°08'N., 11°01'E.), a rocky patch with a
least depth of 4.8m, lies 1 mile NE of Sklinnaflesan. Lilletaren,
a patch with a depth of about 10m, lies 1.25 miles ESE of Stor-
taren. Both of these patches are passed on the N side.
From a position in Storgrunden (65°09'N., 11°07'E.), 3.25
7.28
miles ENE of Sklinnaflesan, the range lights on Gjerdingen
bear 147°, 15 miles distant; however, they will not be visible.
This alignment leads toward Humulrasa passing about 2 miles
SW of Mefjordbaen (65°08'N., 11°12'E.), which breaks and is
reported to always be visible.
The track continues SE. passing NE of Gjuvtaren, a rocky
7.28
patch with a least charted depth of 4.9m, lying 3.25 miles SSW
of Mefjordbaen. The track also passes NE of Sporsluene, a
4.9m patch lying 1 mile SE of Gjuvtaren; an isolated 8.5m
patch lies 0.5 mile NE of Sporsluene.
Brunflesan Light (65°03'N., 11°17'E.), which stands among
7.28
drying patches about 2 miles ESE of Sporsluene, is passed to
the SW, then SW of Vevlan 2.75 miles SSE of Brunflesan
Light. It is advisable to keep on the SW side of the range light
in the vicinity of Vevlan which lies almost on the line; a 7m
patch lies 0.2 mile SE of Vevlan.
When the vessel is clear of Vevlan. the front range light on
7.28
Gjerdingen. bearing between 143° and 200°. leads NE of
Djuptarskjeret (64°58'N., 11°22'E.), a 7m patch marked by a
beacon, situated 3.25 miles SE of Vevlan. From Djuptarskjeret.
proceed to pass W of Lamholmen and then S as previously di-
rected into Humulrasa.
7.29 From the vicinity of Vevlan (65°01'N., 11°19'E.). the
route passes W of Vevlan, then W and S of a 7m patch lying
0.3 mile SSE.
When the N tangent of Store Kvitholme (65°01'N.,
7.29
11°36'E.), 7 miles E of Vevlan, bears 080°, steer on that course,
until clear of Skjeribaen, 3 miles E of Vevlan.
When the vessel is S of Skjeribaen, about 0.5 mile distant, a
7.29
mid-channel route ENE passing about 0.4 mile N of Store
Kvitholme and the same distance S of Madsoygalten
(65°02'N., 11°41'E.), 2.5 miles NE of Store Kvitholme, leads
into the S entrance of Lekafjorden and joins Indreleia.
A 2.4m patch lies 0.5 mile WSW of Madsoygalten.
7.29
From the vicinity of Mefjordbaen (65°08'N., 11°12'E.), 7
7.29
miles SE of Sklinna, a branch of the entrance channel leads NE
through Hortafjorden, passing about 3 miles NW of Leka to
join Indreleia in Melsteinfjorden by one of two alternative
routes.
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
From a position clear S and E of Mefjordbaen, Hor-
7.29
tafjorden (65°10'N., 11°30'E.) may be entered on an E course.
The alignment of Sorflesa, the S islet of Steinsflesan, and the
7.29
summit of Gutvikfjellet (65°08'N., 11°56'E.), 11 miles farther
E, bearing 091.5°, leads toward a position about 2 miles W of
Sorflesa. Storslua, a large shoal area with a least charted depth
of 3.3m, lies 0.4 mile N of this track about 4 miles W of Sorfle-
sa.
From a position about 2 miles W of Sorflesa, a mid-channel
7.29
route will lead into Hortafjorden, passing N of Steinsflesa
(65°09'N., 11°31'E.) and SE of Breigrunnen, a shoal patch 2.25
miles WNW.
When N of Steinsflesa, a vessel may steer E and enter the
7.29
white sector of the light on that island. This sector, astern, will
lead into the white sector of Helgelandsflesa Light (65°13'N.,
11°53'E.), which has a racon.
The S of two alternative routes into Melsteinfjorden leads
7.29
ENE, E, and NE from the vicinity of Steinsflesa, passing N of
the dangers lying off Leka. There are numerous less than chart-
ed depths exist in the W approaches to Leka.
When N of Steinsflesa, the S end of Melsteinen (65°11'N.,
7.29
11°51'E.), in range 078° with the N extremity of a headland 10
miles farther E, leads 183m N of Kriskjaertaren, 3.75 miles
ENE of Steinsflesa, and 0.25 mile N of Storgrunnen, 2 miles
farther ENE.
Melsteinfjorden may be entered by passing either W or E of
7.29
Melsteinen. Care is necessary to avoid shoal water extending
0.2 mile SSW of Melsteinen, and Lilletaren (65°10'N.,
11°50'E.), 0.5 mile farther SSW.
The white sector of the light on Helgelandsflesa leads into
7.29
Melsteinfjorden passing between Steinstaren on the W and
Melsteinen on the E.
Lekafjorden may be entered from N by rounding the dangers
7.29
NE of Leka and passing SW of Stortaren (65°09'N.,
11°50'E.), 2 miles S of Melsteinen, and then SSW into the fair-
way of the fjord.
7.30 Ytreholmen (66°01'N., 11°42'E.), previously de-
scribed in paragraph 7.25, may be approached from the SW,
avoiding Baksveet, Skalsveskolten, and Skalsveet, which lie 6
miles WSW, 6 miles W and 5.5 miles W, respectively, from
that islet. The sea breaks over these shoals in heavy weather.
From a position SW of Ytterholmen, the SW summit of
7.30
Store Steinen (66°00'N., 12°01'E.) is the only part of the
Steinan group that can be seen. Vessels approaching Husvaet-
fjorden should keep this summit bearing between 072° and
080°, which will lead S of Langskolten and Storgrunnsveet, 1.5
miles S and 1.75 miles SSE, respectively, from Ytterholmen,
and N of Kastsveet, which is reported to break in heavy weath-
er, 3.5 miles S of Ytterholmen.
Langfallet, a 2m rocky patch, lies about 2 miles, ESE of Yt-
7.30
terholmen, on the N side of the fairway.
The white sector of the light on Store Steinen leads over the
7.30
same area described above.
From a position about 2 miles WSW of Store Steinen, the
7.30
white sector of the auxiliary light on Ytterholmen, astern, leads
S of all dangers in Steinan and N of Kvanflessveet (65°58'N.,
12°03'E.), an 11m patch 9 miles ESE of the light.
Husvaerfjorden (65°58'N., 12°05'E.) extends SE from the
7.30
vicinity of Steinan to Husvaersundet, which is entered between
173
Traetholmen (65°56'N., 12°12'E.), and Dragan, an islet 0.2
mile WSW. From a position about 2 miles SE, the white sector
of the light on Store Steinen, bearing between 308° and 326°,
astern, leads toward Traetholmen, passing SW of Langodbaen
(65°58'N., 12°07'E.), which lies 1.75 miles ENE of Kvanf-
lessveet. Indre Flesa, an extensive area of foul ground, lies S of
Kvanflessveet.
Langobaen, 1.25 miles N of Traetholmen, should be passed
7.30
on its SW side; then steer toward the light on Traetholmen
passing SW of Stappen, which is marked by a beacon. A 6.4m
patch lies 183m S of Stappen.
Husvaersundet (65°56'N., 12°12'E.) lies in a N-S direction;
7.30
the white sector of the light on Traetholmen, astern, leads
through the fairway for a distance of 1 mile.
Seisholmtaren, a 1.5m patch, lies on the E side of the fair-
7.30
way, 1 mile S of Traetholmen.
Two marine farms are situated on the E side of the fairway
7.30
between Tennvalen and Seisholmtaren.
A submarine pipeline and submarine cable are laid across
7.30
Husvaersundet between Brasoya and Tennvalen.
Tennsundet (65°57'N., 12°14'E.) lies between Heroya and
7.30
Tenna; a track leads 2 miles ENE from Husvaerfjorden to the S
entrance for Heroysundet. The controlling depth at the E end of
the fairway at Tennsundet is 3m.
A submarine pipeline is extends SW from Lendingen, at the
7.30
head of Tennsundet.
Altfjorden (65°56'N., 12°19'E.) is entered from the S end of
7.30
Husvaersundet; the fairway passes S of Seisholmtaren and NW
of Springen Light (65°55'N., 12°13'E.). Buoy Light, 2.75
miles ENE of Springen Light, bearing 069°, passes between
Seisholmtaren and Springen Light.
From Springen, the white sector of Springen Light leads into
7.30
the fairway, passing clear of the islets on each side.
Indreleia continues NNE through Alstfjorden to Ulvangen.
7.30
Risvaerfjorden to Ulvangen
7.31 Indreleia continues N from Risvaerfjorden to Ulvan-
gen, about 70 miles distant. At position 65°08'N, 11°51'E,
there is a choice of three different routes. The W route through
Vegafjorden is the preferred route. Caution is advised in the W
approaches to Leka (65°02'N, 11°26'E.) where many depths
less than charted are known to exist.
Dolmsundet (65°00'N., 11°37'E.) leads ENE from Risvaer-
7.31
fjorden, passing between Dolma and the mainland SE, and
forms the principal channel of Indreleia.
The white sector of the light close NNE of Eiternestangen,
7.31
bearing between 199° and 203°, astern, leads toward Dolmsun-
det, leading E of Hornbaen, then E of an 11.9m patch, 0.35
mile NE of Hornbaen, and E of Abregtaren, 0.4 mile farther
NE.
From a position E of Abregtaren, Dolmsund Light
7.31
(65°00'N., 11°39'E.) ahead, leads clear of danger into Dolm-
sundet. This sector also leads from seaward passing N of Horn-
baen and the 11.9m patch NE of it; however, Abregtaren lies
within the light sector. With Dolmsund Light astern, this leads
clear N of Tenfjordsluen, a 5.8m patch, lying 0.8 mile NE of
the light. The 245.5° line of bearing should be favored.
Madsoygalten Light (65°03'N., 11°41'E.) ahead, leads into
7.31
the center of the fairway of Lekafjorden.
Pub. 182
174 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
Indreleia leads from the NE end of Dolmsundet through
7.31
Lekafjorden, between Madsoya and Leka on the NW and Aus-
tra on the SE. Lekafjorden is joined at its SW end by one of the
channels leading inwards from Sklinna.
Lekafjorden (65°05'N., 11°47'E.) may be entered from a
7.31
mid-channel position SE of Magsoygalten Light, with the
white sector of Sore Gutvik Light (65°05'N., 11°49'E.) ahead.
When E of Magsoygalten Light, steer a mid-channel course to
clear off-lying dangers on either side.
From the N end of Lekafjorden, the track of Indreleia passes
7.31
between Melsteinen and Sorflesene, a group of partly sub-
merged rocks about 0.4 mile E of the island, then between Hel-
gelandsflesa (65°13'N., 11°54'E.), 2 miles NNE of Melsteinen,
and Uertaren, a reef which dries, 0.7 mile SSE of Helgelands-
flesa. Several shoals lie between Sorflesene and Uertaren on
the E side of the fairway.
Vessels in the vicinity of Melsteinen may expect a SW tidal
7.31
current out of Royningen, except during strong W winds, when
a weak tidal current may set to the E.
Vessels approaching Melsteinenfjorden from the S should
7.31
pass E of Lilletaren, 0.75 mile SSW of Melsteinen. The white
sector of the light on Helgelandsflesa leads E of Lilletaren and
then between Melsteinen (65°11'N., 11°51'E.) and the shoals
to the E and NE of the island.
With the light on Melsteinen, astern, and showing green, this
7.31
leads through the fairway between Helgelandsflesa and the
NW side of Uertaren.
Langsundet (65°14'N., 11°58'E.) is formed between Lan-
7.31
goya on the W, and Kvaloya on the E, and lies 2.25 miles NE
of Melsteinen.
Good anchorage may be taken in Langsundet, in 10 to 17m,
7.31
sand and clay, abreast the summit of Langoya.
7.32 After passing SE of Helgelandsflesa in Melstein-
fjorden, Indreleia continues NNE on the W sides of the islands
of Langoya and Kvaloya.
Lyngvaer (65°16'N., 11°58'E.) is a group of islets and rocks
7.32
extending about 3 miles N from Kvaloya. Tyven, lying about 1
mile NW of Kvaloya, and Vagoytaren, a 7m patch a little over
1 mile NNE of Tyven, are the farthest W of the dangers off
Lyngvaer.
Gronstabben (65°16'N., 11°56'E.), a reef, lies on the W side
7.32
of the fairway, 0.85 mile NW of Vagoytaren.
From Gronstabben, Indreleia passes between Gloven, 3.5
7.32
miles NE of Gronstabben, on the E side of the fairway, and
Biskoptaren, a 1.8m patch on the W side of the fairway, 0.9
mile NW of Gloven.
Helbergotaren (65°20'N., 12°03'E.) lies on the E side of the
7.32
fairway, 1.25 miles NNE of the light on Gloven; it has a least
depth of 1.8m.
Helbergsoya, marked by a light, lies on the W side of the
7.32
fairway, 0.7 mile NNE of Biskoptaren; foul ground extends 0.1
mile SSW and 0.8 mile NNE from the island. The many shoal
patches in this area may be seen on the chart.
Torgfjorden extends NE from the vicinity of Sandvaerod-
7.32
taren (65°22'N., 12°03'E.), situated at the extremity of the foul
ground NNE of Helbergsoya.
Vessels proceeding N pass E of Helgelandsflesa; then a mid-
7.32
channel course NNE will pass about 0.2 mile E of the light on
Gronstabben. When abreast of Gronstabben, steer in the white
Pub. 182
sector of the light on Helbergsoya, which leads in the fairway
passing W of Gloven and E of Biskoptaren.
When SE of Biskoptaren, steer a mid-channel course to pass
7.32
about 0.2 mile E of Helbergsoya and the same distance E of
Sandvaerodtaren, and then into the SW entrance of Torg-
fjorden.
7.33 Lyngvaerfjorden (65°15'N., 12°05'E.) is enclosed by
Kvaloya and Lyngvaer, on the W, and the mainland, on the E.
Vessels entering Lyngvaerfjorden should proceed to a posi-
7.33
tion about 1 mile NNE from the entrance, then steer E passing
N of Lyngvaertaren, at the N end of Lyngvaer.
When in the white sector of Lyngvaergalten Light
7.33
(65°16'N., 12°03'E.) steer a course mid-channel to pass 0.5
mile NE of the light.
The white sector of Lyngvaergalten Light, astern, will lead
7.33
into Vikvagen, where anchorage may be taken, in 19m, hard
sand.
Vikvagen (65°18'N., 12°07'E.) is encumbered with shoal
7.33
patches and small islets; the approach to the anchorage passes
close SE of a 1m patch and a 7m patch lies close off the S side
of the fairway. These and other dangers may be seen on the
chart.
Somnesvagen (65°23'N., 12°10'E.) is entered off the SE side
7.33
of Torgfjorden, 2.25 miles from its S entrance. Somnesvagen is
approached between Somnesoya, an islet, on the S side, and
the S extremity of Sylskjaerene, 0.75 mile N.
Anchorage may be taken SE of Jarholme, an islet 0.75 mile
7.33
within the entrance to Somnesvagen, in 18.3m, sand and clay.
Berg (65°22'N., 12°12'E.) (World Port Index No. 23020)
7.33
close NE of Jarholme, has two quays. One quay is 62m long,
with depths of 9.3 to 12m alongside; the other quay is 55m
long, with depths of 7.6 to 10.8m alongside.
7.34 Bronnoysundet (65°27'N., 12°10'E.), on which the
port of Bronnoysund is situated, is entered between Ormoya
(65°26'N., 12°09'E.), situated on the W side of Torgfjorden 5
miles NE of its S entrance, and Stokholmen close E; it leads 3
miles NNE into Tilremfjorden.
The passage through Bronnoysundet is narrow and local
7.34
knowledge is required; however, it is well-marked.
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Bronnoysundet are
7.34
strong, making navigation difficult.
7.35 Bronnoysund (65°28'N., 12°12'E.) (World Port Index
No. 22990) is a coastal natural harbor situated on the E side of
Bronnoysundet, 2 miles NNE of Ormoya. The harbor area cov-
ers most of Bronnoysundet.
Port of Bronnoysund
http://www.bronnoyhavn.no/en/
Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 2.7m at springs and
7.35
2.1m at neaps.
Depths—Linitations.—Bronnoysund may be approached
7.35
from N or S. The least depth in the S approach from Torg-
fjorden is 6m and in the N exit to Tilremfjorden the least depth
is 6.5m. A bridge with a vertical clearance of 30m spans the
fairway in a position about 0.4 mile SW of the church in Bron-
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 175

7.35 By DXR (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

7.35 Bronnoysund

noysund. Vessels up to 4,500 dwt with a maximum draft of 6m Bronnoysund—Berth Information

can be accommodated. See the table titled Bronnoysund—
Berth Information. Berth Length Depth Remarks
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using the SafeSeaNet
7.35
North Quay 75m 6.5-8.3m —
but may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking
Center at an additional cost. The pilot boards in the following Algia Tangmell-
14m 3.7m —
positions: fabrik
a. 66°15.2'N, 12°35.9E for Asvaer. Multipurpose Berths
b. 64°44.0'N, 10°58.0'E for Grinna.
Shell Bunkering 15m 3.8-4.3m Bunkering.
Bronnoysund—Berth Information Esso Bunkering 47m 6.9-8.2m Bunkering.
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Regulations.—Within the harbor area power-driven vessels
7.35

Northern Port Gardsoya are required to proceed at no greater speed than good seaman-
Passengers and ship and maneuverability demand to avoid creating a damaging
Outer 100m — wash.
general cargo.
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
7.35

Passengers and Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph
Inner 81m —
general cargo. 1.1.
Central Point Town Center Contact Information.—See the table titled Bron-
7.35

noysund—Contact Information.
Passengers and
South 74m 5.3-7.3m
general cargo.
Bronnoysund—Contact Information
Passengers and VHF VHF channels 12, 13, 14, and 16
North 70m 7.7-10m
general cargo.
Telephone 47-75-012070
Passengers and
Felix 46m 6.8-8.8m Facsimile 47-75-012071
general cargo.
Concrete 102m 6.3-7.3m — E-mail bronnoy.havn@bronnoy.kommune.no
South Stone 45m 6.8m —
7.35 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 12 to 16m, 1.25

Pub. 182
176 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
miles SSW of the church in Bronnoysund, and in depths of 20
to 24m, sand, 1.5 miles NNE of the church.
Anchorage is prohibited close N of the quays to permit ma-
7.35
neuvering for vessels berthing and unberthing at the packet
boat quays.
7.36 The W route of Indrelia leads from the S entrance of
Torgfjorden, WNW, N of Sandvaer (65°21'N., 11°58'E.), and
Klubholmen Light, then NNW passing close E of Blabakflua
Light, then the track passes S and W of Uttorgvaer, an island
group 6 miles NNW of Helbergoya.
From the S entrance to Torgfjorden, vessels proceed WNW
7.36
on a mid-channel course which will lead S of Sandoytaren
(65°23'N., 12°00'E.), a reef with a charted depth of 4.9m, situ-
ated about 1 mile ENE of Klubholmen Light.
From E of Klubholmen Light, a vessel should alter course to
7.36
pass E of Hokstaren (65°24'N., 11°58'E.), a 2.4m patch
marked by a light, 1.5 miles N of Klubholmen Light,.
On the E side of the fairway, 0.35 mile E of Hokstaren, lies a
7.36
14.9m patch; a 5.5m patch lies 0.25 mile farther NE.
Fleina, marked by a light, is situated 0.75 mile NE of Hok-
7.36
staren. Blabakflua Light lies 0.6 mile WNW of Fleina; the fair-
way passes between these two lights.
After passing between Fleina and Blabakflua, Indreleia leads
7.36
NNW to pass between Knutstaren (65°26'N., 11°55'E.), a
1.8m patch marked by a light, 2 miles NW of Blabakflua. on
the W side, and Flestaren, a 4.9m patch, 0.55 mile E, on the E
side. The white sector of Blabakflua Light, astern, leads be-
tween these two dangers. Tvertaren, a 7m shoal patch, lies on
the SW side of the fairway 0.5 mile NW of Blabakflua Light.
When the vessel is clear of Knutstaren, a NNE course may
7.36
be set, passing about 0.5 mile WNW of Uttorgflessa Light
(65°26'N., 11°57'E.) and W of the Uttorgvaer group.
This part of Indreleia crosses the E end of Vegafjorden in a
7.36
SSW to NNE direction.
7.37 After passing into Vegafjorden, vessels should steer
for the W edge of the 67m summit of Ylvingen, which lies 10.5
miles NNE of Uttorgflessa Light.
Halholmen Light (65°32'N., 12°05'E.) is located on the SE
7.37
side of Indreleia, about 7 miles NNE of Uttorgflesa. Klabben
Light is situated 2.75 miles NW of Halholmen Light.
The white sector of Ylvingen Light, about 4 miles NNE of
7.37
Halholmen Light, leads through the fairway of Vegafjorden,
passing between the dangers in the vicinity of Halholmen Light
and the dangers off the SE side of Vega.
From Halholmen Light, vessels should alter course NE and
7.37
pass S of Ylvingen (65°36'N., 12°10'E.) and N of the shoals ly-
ing about 0.5 to 1 mile N and NNE of the light.
Indreleia leads about 7 miles N through Tilremfjorden from
7.37
Bronnoysundet to a junction between Hornsneset (65°35'N.,
12°18'E.) and Ylvingen, 3.5 miles WNW, with the W route of
Indreleia through Vegafjorden.
Nordtaren (65°34'N., 12°11'E.), a 1.8m shoal patch, lies on
7.37
the W side of Tilremfjorden, 3.25 miles SW of Hornsneset.
Anchorage, in 14m, sand and clay, may be taken in a cove,
7.37
near Tilrem, 3.5 miles NNE of Bronnoysund Church.
7.38 Velfjorden (65°35'N., 12°21'E.) is entered N of Horn-
sneset, the W entrance point. The fjord penetrates the coast
Pub. 182
about 11 miles SE to Nevernes Light (65°26'N., 12°35'E.);
from the light, Langfjorden continues about 6 miles farther in
the same direction. Okfjorden, Storfjorden, Litle Borja, and
Stor Borja, all opening off the E side of Velfjorden, are deep
and clear, but are unmarked.
Sorfjorden and Heggefjorden, branching off the S side of the
7.38
fjord and the extension of Langfjorden, are neither so deep nor
so free from dangers as the fjords on the E side; the land in
their vicinity is less mountainous.
Hornstaren (65°35'N., 12°19'E.), a shoal patch with a chart-
7.38
ed depth of 1.8m, lies in the entrance of Velfjorden, 0.4 mile
ENE of Hornsneset. Jenssluin, an 8.8m patch, lies 0.25 mile
farther NE.
Manddauen Light is situated on a reef, 0.75 miles SE of
7.38
Hornsneset.
The entrance to Storfjorden is encumbered with dangers,
7.38
whose positions may best be seen on the chart.
Ice.—Sorfjorden, Heggefjorden, Stor Borja, and most of
7.38
Storfjorden are usually frozen over in winter. Ice forms first
and lasts longest in Langfjorden. Obstruction by ice is greatest
after the New Year.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents usually set into
7.38
Velfjorden with the rising tide and out with the falling tide.
Currents usually set out of the branch fjords but they are affect-
ed by the tide and wind.
From the entrance N of Hornsneset, the W extremity of
7.38
Bjornholmen (65°37'N., 12°18'E.) in range 329°, astern, with
the E extremity of Kvitjerta, an islet 1 mile NNW of Bjornhol-
men, leads NE of Jenssluin, awash, and the shoal patches E.
A white sector of Manddauen Light, astern, leads through
7.38
the fairway of Velfjorden to within about 2 miles of Nevernes
Light; a white sector of that light ahead, leads through the fair-
way from abreast Okfjorden to within a short distance of the
light.
All the branch fjords of Velfjorden afford suitable depths for
7.38
anchorage during the ice-free season.
7.39 Vevelstadsundet is entered about 3.5 miles NNE of
Hornsneset and lies between the mainland and the E side of
Hamnoya. A 5.5m rocky shoal lies about 2 miles within the en-
trance. This danger lies within the white sector of Snerthol-
men Light (65°43'N., 12°28'E.).
Forvik, located on the mainland about 0.5 mile S of Sner-
7.39
tholmen Light, has a timber quay, 36m long, with depths of 4.2
to 6.5m alongside.
Between the S end of Ylvingen (65°36'N., 12°10'E.) and Ul-
7.39
vangen, about 30 miles NNE, Indreleia is comparatively free
from dangers.
Tides—Currents.—In this section of Indreleia, the tidal
7.39
current sets N from about half rising tide to half falling tide; the
period of the S current is the reverse of this. Their strength is
variable and may be affected by the prevailing wind. The tidal
currents set out of the adjacent fjords, and when the direction
of the set coincides with that of the main tidal current the latter
may run with great strength, particularly in the narrow chan-
nels.
In position 65°36' N, 12°13' E, off the SE side of Ylvingen,
7.39
the W and E routes of Indreleia unite and continue 7.5 miles N
to Skjelva (65°43'N., 12°19'E.), then 23 miles NNE through
Tjottafjorden and Alstfjorden to Ulvangen.
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 177

7.40 Tjottafjorden consists of the waters around the junc- rent in the channel off the entrance, the resultant flow may have
tion of Indreleia and the entrance to Vefsnfjorden off the SW considerable strength.
side of the island Tjotta. Mindvaeret, the foul ground NE of The fairway of Vefsnfjorden is free of dangers other than
7.41

Skjelva, and Mindlandet, the 159m high island 2 miles NE of
Skjelva, form the SE side of Tjottafjorden.
Breigtaren (65°45'N., 12°21'E.), awash, lies 2.25 miles NNE
7.40
those shown on the chart. The head of the fjord is shallow for a
distance of 0.75 miles N of Mosjoen.
The fairway of Vefsnfjorden is about 0.4 mile wide between
7.41

of Skjelva and Nordtaren, with a charted depth of 0.9m, lies 0.3 Sornes (65°58'N., 12°52'E.), on the W side, and Nubben, on
mile farther NNE; these dangers lie off the NW side of Mind- the E side, about 11 miles NW of Mosjoen.
vaeret. Anchorage may be taken, in 17 to 20m, in the cove on the W
7.41

Foul ground extends 1.25 miles into Tjottafjorden from the S

7.40
extremity of Tjotta.
Tjotta (65°50'N., 12°26'E.), a small port, is located on the S
7.40
side of the island Tjotta. Local knowledge is required to enter
the harbor, which has depths of 3.6 to 5.1m alongside the
steamer quay.
Tjotta Church, with a square tower and a dark gray roof, is
7.40
prominent.
7.41 On the NW side of Mindlandet, a well-situated quay
is located about 2.25 miles SSE of Tjotta Church. The quay has
side of Sornes; it shelves quickly to the N.
Mosjoen (65°51'N., 13°11'E.)
World Port Index No. 22920
7.42 Mosjoen is a small natural harbor situated at the head
of Vefsnfjorden, about 26 miles from Indreleia. It consists of
the quays and the city of Mosjoen, which is situated 0.75 mile
S of the quays.
Winds—Weather.—Mosjoen is well sheltered and port car-
7.42

a length of 26m, with alongside depths of 8.3 to 13m.
Vefsnfjorden is entered from Indreleia through Tjottafjorden,
7.41
between Langholmen (65°49'N., 12°27'E.), off the SE coast of
Tjotta, and the NW coast of Mindlandet, 1 mile SE. The W arm
go handling is seldom interrupted. The port is usually ice-free,
except for some shallow bays which may freeze over in severe
winters; shipping is rarely hampered by ice.
Tides—Currents.—Mean High Water Spring tides in Mos-
7.42

of the fjord extends 14 miles NE, between the mainland and joen are 2.7m and MLWS is 0.4m; the greatest spring range ob-
Alsten; the SE arm of the fjord extends 12 miles SE to the port served was 4m.
of Mosjoen. Depths—Limitations.—The channel leading to the port is
7.42

The outer part of the fjord is sparsely vegetated and the land-
7.41
scape is dominated by De Syv Sostre, in the SE part of Alsten.
The inner part of the fjord is wooded and most of the villages
are situated there.
narrow. Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table
titled Mosjoen—Berth Information. Vessels over 10.1m draft
are berthed only at HW.
It was reported that a vessel up to 37,153 dwt, with a maxi-
7.42

Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents run into Velsnfjorden

7.41 mum length of 199.9m, a maximum beam of 30m, and a maxi-
with the rising tide and out of the fjord with the falling tide. At mum draft of 11.5m, can be accommodated in the port.
the entrance, when the ebb coincides in direction with the cur-

Mosjoen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Mosjoen Havn KF
Halsoy 45m 6.5m 142.9m — 21.5m 17,294 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
New 170m 8.0m 145.6m 8.0m 21.4m 12,264 dwt Containers, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Railway 210m 5.0m 98.7m — 16.0m 4,418 dwt Containers, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Aggregates, breakbulk, and bunkers. Not
Skjaerflesen 20m — — — — —
ISPS compliant.
Dirty products, LNG, limestone, multi-
Veidekke 16m 6.0m 134.6m — 23.0m 14,968 dwt
purpose, and bunkers.
Closed. Breakbulk and bunkers. Vessels
mostly moored alongside adjacent new
quay and take up space at the W quay ar-
Western 70m 5.5m — — — —
ea. No commercial activity in recent
years. Continuous berthing length of
144m.
Holandsvika
Holandsvika 60m 5.5m 98.7m — 16.0m 4,418 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.

Pub. 182
178 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo

Mosjoen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Alcoa Mosjoen Terminal
Chemicals, alumina, containers, prebaked
anode, coal tar pitch, aluminum products,
Alcoa 275m 12.0m 199.9m 11.5m 30.0m 37,153 dwt steel products, breakbulk, multipurpose,
and bunkers. Chemical propane deliv-
ered by tanker for Alcoa facility usage.
Equinor Holandsvika
Closed. Berth is now disused. Berthing
Bunkering 7m — — — — — length of 33m (including dolphins). Tank
facilities has been demolished (2022).

By Rune Lund (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

7.42

7.42 Mosjoen

Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered through SafeSeaNet

7.42 num works, in 40m, sand and clay.
but may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking Cen-
ter at an additional cost. Mosjoen—Contact Information
The pilot boards in position 66°15.3'N, 12°36.7E (1.5 miles
7.42

N of Donna) or position 66°17.0'N, 12°12.6'E (2.4 miles VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16
WNW of Asvaer Light). Telephone 47-75-390081
Contact Information.—See the table titled Mosjoen—
7.42

Facsimile 47-75-101871
Contact Information.
Anchorage.—Large vessels may anchor off Halsoy, 0.9
7.42

mile N of Mosjoen, in 30m, sand and clay, and off the alumi- 7.43 The track of Indreleia, N of Tjottafjorden, leads be-
tween Sondre Rosoya and Norde Rosoya, on the W side, and
Tjotta, on the E side.

Pub. 182
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 179

Juledagene Light (65°51'N., 12°23'E.) is situated near the

7.43 A channel from seaward entered off Ytreholmen joins Alst-
7.44

edge of the foul ground extending W from Tjotta, about 8 fjorden, at its SW end, from Alterfjorden.
miles N of Skjelva. A patch, with a depth of 8.5m, lies on the Vikholmen (65°57'N., 12°26'E.), a small islet, lies on the E
7.44

W side of the fairway, 0.45 mile W of Juledagene Light.
Rosoytaren (65°52'N., 12°22'E.), with a charted depth of
7.43
5.8m, lies 0.25 mile off the NE extremity of Nordre Rosoya; it
side of the fairway through Alstfjorden, 1.5 miles ENE of Al-
teren. Foul ground extends 0.7 mile NNE from the islet.
Valloya and Svinoya lie in a NNE direction from 0.3 to 0.7
7.44

may be passed on either side.
Hamnesleira, a large open anchorage, is entered between
7.43
Faksholmen, off the NW part of Tjotta and Haugsneset
mile, respectively, NNE of Valloygalten; Svartskjaer lies 0.15
mile off the NE extremity of Svinoya.
From abreast Sondre Soroyholme, vessels can steer for the
7.44

(65°53'N., 12°24'E.), 1.25 miles N. Large vessels anchor, in 25
to 30m, sand and shells, 0.75 mile ENE of Haugsneset; a rock
is charted about 0.3 mile ENE of the anchorage.
From the vicinity of Rosoytaren, Indreleia continues NNW,
7.43
passing between the SW end of Alsten and Skarvoya
(65°53'N., 12°20'E.), which lies 1.5 miles NW of Haugsneset.
A rock, awash, lies on the foul ground extending NNE from
7.43
Valoya, about 1 mile WNW of Haugsneset.
When E of Skarvoya, the fairway continues N about 1 mile, and
7.43
passes between Karholmen (65°55'N., 12°23'E.) on the E side, and
an 11m patch 0.4 mile W. Then a mid-channel course leads NNE
summit of Skorpa (66°02'N., 12°33'E.), which rises about 8
miles NNE. This course leads through the fairway of Indreleia
into Alstfjorden. When well into the fjord, a mid-channel
course will lead NE to the S entrance of Ulvangen.
7.45 Sandnessjoen (66°01'N., 12°38'E.) (World Port Index
No. 22750), protected from the S by a road embankment and
by the island of Holmen, lies on the NW side of Alsten, at the
junction of Alstfjorden and Ulvangen. The entrance to the har-
bor is from the E.
During strong W winds, an unpleasant short sea is raised off
7.45

passing E of Sondre Soroyholme, 0.45 mile NNW of Karholmen.
The NE extremity of Alteren is situated on the W side of In-
7.43
dreleia, 0.85 mile N of Sondre Soroyholme; Valloygalten
Sandnessjoen; at times strong squalls come down from the
mountains situated about 5 miles S.
Depths—Limitations.—The port can accommodate vessels
7.45

(65°57'N., 12°24'E.), with a least depth of 4.9m, lies 0.8 mile
NNE of Alteren.
7.44 Alstfjorden extends from the vicinity of Sondre So-
royholme (65°55'N., 12°22'E.) along the NW side of Alsten, to
the vicinity of Sandnessjoen 9 miles NE, where it leads into
up to 12,000 dwt with a maximum draft of 8m. The harbor au-
thority has numerous quays. Some of the berths and installa-
tions are situated in Sandnesvagen, on the SE side of town, and
in Botnfjorden, 1.5 miles SE; these are accessible from Leir-
fjorden.
See the table tittled Sandnessjoen—Berth Information.
7.45

Ulvangen.

Sandnessjoen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Remarks
Draft Size
Coastbase (Sandnessjoen Botnfjorden)
Aggregates, containers, transshipment, offshore,
Aqua Rock Quarry 130m — —
project/heavy cargo, and steel products.
Offshore vessels, project/heavy cargo, steel prod-
Service 50m — — ucts, and breakbulk. Berthing length of 100m (in-
cluding dolphins).
Sandnessjoen-Donna Ferry Terminal
North 55m — — Fast ferries.
South 73m — — Fast ferries.
Terminal Vagen
Containers, offshore vessels, fishing vessels, and
Vagen 105m — —
breakbulk.
Helgeland Logistikksenter Horvnes
Chemicals, transshipment, offshore vessels, proj-
No. 1 80m 8.0m 12,000 dwt
ect/heavy cargo, steel products, and breakbulk.
Chemicals, transshipment, offshore vessels, proj-
No. 2 80m — —
ect/heavy cargo, steel products, and breakbulk.
Transshipment, offshore vessels, project/heavy
No. 3 80m — —
cargo, steel products, and breakbulk.

Pub. 182
180 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo

Sandnessjoen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Remarks
Draft Size
Sandnessjoen Harbor(North)
Berthing length: 112m (incl. dolphins). Containers,
East (North Quay) 50m — — fishing, and breakbulk. Quay at SW end with dol-
phins structure to NE.
Minol Holmen Berthing length: 65m (incl. dolphins). Chemicals,
Multipurpose 40m — — ro/pax, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, coastal, fish-
(North Quay) ing, and breakbulk.
Passenger and Ro/pax, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, transship-
Vehicle Ro-Ro 25m — — ment, coastal, fishing, and breakbulk. Mooring
(Inner) bollards on shore 75m apart.
Passenger and
Ro/pax, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, transship-
Vehicle Ro-Ro — — —
ment, coastal, fishing, and breakbulk.
(Outer)
Ro/pax, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, smaller ro-
ro passengers/vehicles vessels, transshipment,
Ulvanger 40m — —
coastal vessels, fishing vessels, and breakbulk.
Mooring bollards on shore 120m apart.
Sandnessjoen Harbor (South)
Cruise, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, offshore,
East (South Quay) 210m — —
and fishing.
Berthing length: 36m (incl. dolphins). Transship-
Eastern Approaches 21m — —
ment, coastal, fishing, and breakbulk.
Middle 85m — — Smaller cruise/passenger vessels.
Ro/pax, ro-ro passenger/vehicles/rail, transship-
West 260m — — ment, coastal vessels, fishing vessels, and break-
bulk. Small ro-ro passenger/vehicles vessels.

Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but

7.45
Donna to Bodo
may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking Center at
an additional cost. 7.46 The high peaks of the mainland and larger islands of-
The pilot boards in position 66°15.3'N, 12°36.7E (1.5 miles
7.45 ten rise to several thousand feet and at times are visible over 50
N of Donna) or position 66°17.0'N, 12°12.6'E (2.4 miles miles.
WNW of Asvaer Light). Sanna (66°30'N., 12°03'E.), the principal island of Traena,
7.46

Local knowledge is required for vessels to take up berthing

7.45 lies 30 miles NNE of Ytterholmen; it is by far the most import-
space, as the tidal currents are strong. ant landmark on this coast. Its principal peak, Traenstaven, ris-
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
7.45 es to about 331m, and may be seen at a distance of more than
Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph 40 miles; it is unmistakable.
1.1. Kunna, a headland on the mainland 44 miles NE of Sanna,
7.46

Contact Information.—See the table titled Sandnessjo-

7.45 can be made out when in the vicinity of Traena.
en—Contact Information. Three high peaks rise on the island of Tomma, about 21
7.46

miles SE of Sanna. The peak farthest N rises to a height of

Sandnessjoen—Contact Information 916m and resembles Traenstaven.
Lovunden (66°22'N., 12°20'E.), 619m high, lies about 10
7.46

Telephone 47-75-075700 miles SE of Sanna. The island appears isolated but is easily
Facsimile 47-75-075701 identified by its nearly perpendicular W side and the gradual
slope on its E side.
E-mail post@ath-havnevesen.no
Luroy, an island lying about 11 miles ENE of Lovunden, is
7.46

689m high. It is more rounded and has less abrupt declivities

Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in 16.5 to 24m, 0.15
7.45
than other islands in the vicinity. Hestmannoy lies with its S
mile W of the S end of Holmen. end about 4 miles N of Luroy and has a pointed peak 568m

Pub. 182
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
high.
Telnestind, on the mainland, rises to a height of 967m, 0.75
7.46
mile inland, in a position 8.75 miles ENE of Hestmannoy.
Between Hestmannoy and Kunna, about 28 miles NNE, the
7.46
coast line is rather indistinct, but Kunna, which appears as an
island, is easily identified.
Fugloya (67°04'N., 13°50'E.), an island about 8 miles NE of
7.46
Kunna, is steep and rises to a height of 765m. Sandhornet, a
conspicuous mountain on the island of Sandhornoya, 5.5 miles
NE of Fugloya, is 996m high; its W face is precipitous.
From this part of the coast, Svartisen, a range of glacier-
7.46
bearing mountains, may be seen. It is one of the most remark-
able features of this part of Norway. As there is no glacier so
near the sea on any other part of the coast, it can be identified
with certainty from a considerable distance seaward.
Svartisen stands out well from dark mountains in the back-
7.46
ground. In spring and cold summers, it appears white; in warm
summers when surface snow melts, it becomes bluish-green. In
winter, when all mountains are covered with snow, Svartisen,
seen from NW and N, appears to run parallel with the horizon,
with hardly any depression between peaks; the highest part on-
ly shows some dark patches of bare rock among the snow.
Landegode (67°24'N., 14°20'E.), 803m high, lies 6 miles
7.46
NNW of Bodo; in clear weather the S part of the Lofoten Is-
lands will be visible about 55 miles to the WSW.
7.47 A bank, with a depth of 12.8m, was reported to lie
about 110 miles W of Sanna. A depth of 14.6m, the position of
which is doubtful, was reported about 85 miles WNW of San-
na. A depth of 10m was reported to lie about 0.2 mile NW of
the 14.6m patch.
By “trolvag” via Wikimedia Commons
7.47
Donna
7.47
The area for about 20 miles W of Donna (66°06'N.,
7.47
12°33'E.) is foul. Ytreholmen lies about 15 miles W of the SW
point of the island.
Lillesveet (66°06'N., 11°31'E.) and Skolton, rocky banks sit-
7.47
uated about 7 miles NW of Ytterholmen, have least depths of
27m and 26m, respectively. Between these banks and Ytrehol-
men, there are other shoals and banks which break.
Floholman (66°10'N., 11°42'E.) lies 4 miles NE of Skolton;
7.47
Floholm is the middle islet of the group. Lunboen the farthest
SW of the group, lies 1.5 miles NE of Skolton. It dries at very
181
LW and the breakers are visible from the offing for a consider-
able distance. Foul ground extends about 2 miles NW from
Floholm.
Moholmssve, an isolated bank with a depth of 29m, lies 5
7.47
miles NNE of Floholm and Samskallen, also an isolated bank
with a depth of 33m, lies 9 miles farther NNE.
Myken (66°45'N., 12°25'E.), the group of islands next N of
7.47
Traena, lies with its S end about 15 miles NE of Sanna. The
water surrounding Myken is deep almost to its outermost islets.
This can cause the sea to break over the islets with strength.
Tennholmen, marked at its SW end by a light, lies 17 miles
7.47
NE of Myken. Below-water rocks extend about 1 mile W from
the light and 5.75 miles NE. Sveboen, a rocky shoal with a
charted depth of 4.8m, lies 5.75 miles WSW of the light; a
rocky 5.8m shoal lies 2.5 miles S of Sveboen.
Gronna (67°01'N., 13°11'E.), a dangerous group of islets
7.47
and rocks, lies 2.5 miles N of Tennholmen, and is the outer-
most danger WNW of Kunna (66°57'N., 13°31'E.). In stormy
weather and with high tides, the sea breaks over the entire
Gronna group.
Asvaer to Indreleia
7.48 Asvaer (66°14'N., 12°12'E.), an island group situated
19 miles NE of Ytterholmen, consists of a group of rocks and
islets; some of them are of a moderate height.
Asvaer Light is shown from a prominent tower, 18m in
7.48
height, standing near the NE extremity of the group. A racon is
located at the light tower.
There are no dangers in the seaward approach to Asvaer,
7.48
which leads between Ovskallen (66°25'N., 11°58'E.), an 11m
depth lying about 5 miles SSW of Sanna, and the Floholman
group, about 13 miles farther SSW.
A principal channel leads in through Nordre Asvaerfjorden,
7.48
off the N side of Asvaer, through Stifjorden, 12 miles ESE of
Tomfjorden, then 11 miles E to join Indreleia off the SE or NE
side of Tomma.
The approach to Asvaer in not difficult in favorable weather.
7.48
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Nordre Asvaer-
7.48
fjorden flow NE on the flood and SW on the ebb.
Pilotage.—A pilot station is situated on Andersbakken
7.48
(66°16'N., 12°18'E.), the NE island of Asvaer. The pilots em-
bark 2.5 miles WNW of the station.
The pilot radio calling frequency is VHF channel 16; the
7.48
working frequencies are VHF channels 12 and 13.
Nordre Asvaerfjorden is not difficult to approach in daylight
7.48
with clear weather. The peaks on Tomma are especially useful
in making the entrance.
7.49 Breifind (66°15'N., 12°48'E.), 821m high, in the S
part of Tomma, bearing about 098° leads in N of Asvaer.
After passing N of the light on Andersbakken, course should
7.49
be altered to pass S of Syntholmbaen, a drying reef about 3.5
miles ESE of the light, and N of Utoybaen (66°14'N.,
12°36'E.), about 4 miles ESE of Synstholmbaen. Utoybaen lies
about 0.7 mile off the NE extremity of Donna.
Stifjorden, between the S side of Tomma and the N side of
7.49
Lokta, is free from dangers, except for a small area of foul
ground extending about 0.5 mile N from the NE end of Lokta;
it joins Indreleia off the NE coast of Lokta.
Pub. 182
182 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo

Skifjorden, leading S from Stifjorden between the E side of

7.49 N side of town. Berthing details are shown in the table titled
Donna and the W side of Lokta, is part of the W route of Indre- Nesna—Berthing Information.
leia between Ulvangen and Gjeroya. The channel passes either
side of Svensskjeret (66°06'N., 12°41'E.), an above-water rock Nesna—Berthing Information
lying 0.45 mile E of Donna. Dangers in the fairway may best
be seen on the chart. Maximum
In Skifjorden, the tidal currents nearly always set N along
7.49
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
the coast of Donna; northbound vessels should keep to the W Draft
side of the channel and southbound vessels should keep to the Nesna Terminal
E side.
West 115m 6.5m 4.7m Breakbulk.
Ulvangen to Meloyfjorden North 66m 3.9m — Breakbulk.

7.50 Between Ulvangen and Gjeroya, about 25 miles NNE Hemnesberget (66°13'N., 13°36'E.) is a small natural coast-
7.51

of Donna, there are two channels of Indreleia. The W channel al port situated on the E entrance point of Elsfjorden, about 2
leads NW of Tomma through Tomfjorden. The E channel, miles SSE of the entrance to Utskarpen. A mooring buoy is
passing E of Tomma, is the preferred route. It is less intricate moored off the quays, which are up to 60m long and have
and has a relatively wide fairway which is practically free from depths from 3.9 to 14.5m alongside.
dangers.
From the N end of Ulvangen the fairway of Indreleia leads E
7.50

Mo I Rana (66°19'N., 14°08'E.)

of Finnkona (Finkonna) (66°07'N., 12°44'E.), Lokta and Tom-
ma, passing W of Hugla and Handnesoy. World Port Index No. 22760
Rana, the approach to the port of Mo I Rana is entered from
7.50

Indreleia, on the SE side of Lokta and NE of Finnkona. Brune- 7.52 Mo I Rana, also known as Mo, is situated at the head
set (66°08'N., 12°50'E.), 2.25 miles ENE of Finnkona, is the S of Nordrana, near the mouth of Ranelv, and is approached
entrance point of Rana and Huglneset, 2.5 miles NNE of through Rana. It consists of the city, with an inner harbor with
Bruneset, is the N entrance point. berthing facilities for small vessels and an outer harbor that can
Rana extends 24 miles ENE to Stromholmen where Nordana
7.50
accommodate large vessels alongside and at anchor.
leads 11 miles farther ENE to Mo I Rana and the mouth of
Ranelva.
Port of Mo I Rana
Branch fjords include Utskarpen, Elsfjorden, and Sorfjorden.
7.50

Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off Lokta are vari-

7.50 http://www.moshipping.no/port-i-rana/
able. In Rana, they usually set out with the falling tide and into
the fjord with the rising tide. In the outer part of the fjord, the Winds—Weather.—The port is well sheltered and normal
7.52

ebb current is strongest on the S side.
During thaws, accompanied by prevailing E winds, the set in
7.50
the fjord may be continuously outward and the velocity may be
operations are seldom interfered with by weather conditions.
The harbor is ice free.
Tides—Currents.—The range of spring tides is 2.7m, a
7.52

2 to 3 knots; in the vicinity of the head of the fjord there is usu- range of 3.6m was observed during 1951-53.
ally a constant outward set. Depths—Limitations.—The port can accommodate vessels
7.52

up to 83,353 dwt, with a maximum length of 260m and a max-

7.51 Ranskjeret (66°09'N., 12°52'E.), an above-water imum beam of 32.2m. See the table titled Mo I Rana—Berth
rock, lies 1.5 miles NE of Bruneset in the entrance to Rana. Information.
From Ranskjeret, the fairway is free of dangers to Bardalsoya, Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
7.52

a distance of about 13 miles. dered through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the
Storgrunnen, a rocky 14m patch, lies 0.5 mile WSW of Bar-
7.51
Londingen Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pi-
dalsoya. Mud flats extend S from Bardalsoya to the mainland. lots are provided by the Aesvaer pilot station.
At the head of the fjord, for about 1 mile SW of Mo I Rana,
7.51
The pilot boards in position 66°17.0'N, 12°12.5'E (2 miles
7.52

the coastal reef dries and extends up to 0.2 mile offshore in WNW of Asvaer Light) or position 66°15.3'N, 12°36.7'E
places. (smaller vessels after agreement with the pilot station).
An anchorage is charted on the SE side of Bardalsoya, in
7.51
The pilot calling frequency is VHF channel 16; the pilot
7.52

25m. A 6m line is formed 183m S, W, and N of the anchorage.
Anchorage can be obtained in Utskarpen (66°15'N.,
7.51
working frequencies are VHF channels 12 and 14.
Tugs are recommended for vessels of more than 10,000 dwt
7.52

13°35'E.), 5 miles ENE of Bardalsoya, in 33m, clay, at the dis- and are available with 24 hours notice.
cretion of the pilot. Regulations.—Vessels operating within the seaplane harbor,
7.52

Nesna (66°12'N., 13°01'E.) is a small town with several light

7.51
industries. Located at the end of a peninsula extending from
the mainland, it is E of the island of Hugla and S of the island
of Handnesoya. Nesna has a concrete jetty with a NNE-SSW
orientation. Vessels with a draft of 4.7m can be accommodated.
Both the jetty and berth protect a ferry and boat harbor on the
N of the harbormaster’s office, are required to maneuver with
care and comply with the regulations governing the transit of
seaplane operating areas. A patrol boat displaying a yellow and
black flag patrols the seaplane harbor when seaplanes are oper-
ating.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Mo I Rana—
7.52

Pub. 182
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 183

7.52 Mo I Rana

Contact Information. off the SE end of Tomma, about 24 miles N of Huglneset.

Handnesholmen, an islet marked by a light, lies on the E side
7.53

Mo I Rana—Contact Information of the fairway about 2 miles NE of Mefjordsholman. Foul

ground extends about 0.3 mile NNE from the islet.
Port Authority A white sector of the light on Handnesholmen will lead
7.53

VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16 through the fairway from a position 0.3 mile W of Huglneset,
to within about 1 mile of the light.
Telephone 47-75-101870
Tomfjorden, which leads NE from the inner end of Nordre
7.53

Facsimile 47-75-101871 Asvaerfjorden, passes N of Tomma and joins Indreleia NE of

Kjerringskjeret (66°20'N., 12°53'E.), a foul area marked by a
E-mail havna@rana.kommune.no
light, situated 1.75 miles NNE of Tomma.
Harbormaster Odoyflua (66°21'N., 12°55'E.), a drying rock, lies at the SW
7.53

Telephone 47-75-134703 entrance point of Stigfjorden, 1.5 miles NNE of Kjerringsk-

jeret.
Stigfjorden, formed between Stigen on the W and Aldra on
7.53

Anchorage.—Anchorage in the harbor is to be advised by

7.52
the E, is the N continuation of Indreleia to Bonetskjeret, 9
the harbor pilot. miles N, and is free from dangers in the fairway.
Caution.—A dumping ground was established 0.7 mile
7.52

Teisten (66°22'N., 12°56'E.), a small islet on the W side of

7.53

NNE of Hauknesbukta Light. the fairway, lies 1.25 miles NNE of Odoyflua.
Aldersundet is entered E of Teisten; it is clear of dangers in
7.53

7.53 Indreleia continues N of Rana passing W of Huglne-
set (66°10'N., 12°51'E.), the SW extremity of Hugla, an island
which rises to a height of 623m, in its S part.
Mefjordsholman (66°12'N., 12°50'E.), consisting of two
7.53
the fairway. Aldra forms the W side of the passage; the E side
of the passage is formed by the mainland. Three overhead ca-
bles span Aldersundet between Aldra and the mainland.

small islets fringed by reefs, lies on the W side of the fairway,

Mo I Rana—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Beam Size
Container and Ro-Ro Terminal
Cement, ro-ro/lo-lo, containers, and
Toraneskaia 305m 8.0m 123m 16.5m 8,3354 dwt
breakbulk.
Bukterminalen
Bulk N 129m 7.3-11.0m 199.9m 32.2m 60,402 dwt Petroleum products and breakbulk.
Bulk S 105m 7.3m 90.8m 15.2m 4,550 dwt Breakbulk.

Pub. 182
184 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo

Mo I Rana—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Beam Size
Iron Ore Terminal
Iron ore. Berthing length of 272m (in-
Iron Ore — 11.4m 260m 32.2m 83,353 dwt
cluding dolphins).
Rana Industrial Terminal
Dry Cargo 410m 8.0m 143m 22.5m 17,356 dwt Scrap metal, containers, and breakbulk.

At the N end of Stigfjorden, the track of Indreleia passes W

7.53

of three small islands, Brusoya, Rundvedoya and Langvedoya;

it then leads E of Bonetskjeret (66°29'N., 12°58'E.), 1.5 miles
NW of Langvedoya.
Kvina, an inlet entered off the E side of Indreleia, ENE of
7.53

Rundvedoya, is free from dangers in the fairway.

Kvina (66°28'N., 13°10'E.), a village at the head of the inlet,
7.53

has a jetty, with a berth 18m long, at its head; there are depths
of 4.5 to 5.8m alongside.

7.54 From Bonetskjeret, Indreleia passes through Kvaroy-

fjorden, in a NNW direction; then it turns E passing N of Vi-
kingen Light (66°32'N., 12°58'E.), and S of Rangsundoya. A 7.54 Rodoy
14.9m patch lies in the SW entrance to Kvaroyfjorden, 0.35 Ronvikskjerane (66°40'N., 13°11'E.), a group of above-wa-
7.55

mile NE of Bonetskjeret. ter rocks on the E side of Indreleia, lies about 3 miles NE of
There is a 4.3m shoal patch on the E side of the fairway, 1.25
7.54
Sandverken. Klauskjeret, an above-water rock, is about 1 mile
miles ENE of Bonetskjeret. A 10m patch lies 0.2 mile NW of NNE of Ronvikskjerane, in about mid-channel of the entrance
the 4.3m depth. to Tjonsfjorden.
After passing SE of Rangsundoya, 3 miles NE of Vikingen
7.54
A mid-channel course through Rodoyfjorden leads clear of
7.55

Light, a vessel should steer N to pass between Rangsundoya the dangers.

and Gjeroya on the W and the island of Renga located about 1 Svinvaer (66°45'N., 13°10'E.) is situated on the W side of
7.55

mile E. Indreleia, 2.75 miles NNE of Rodoya. In the fairway between

Lamannskjeret (66°36'N., 13°05'E.), a reef, lies on the E
7.54
side of the fairway, about 2 miles NNW of the S extremity of
Renga. Other dangers, which may be seen on the chart, lie off
the W side of Renga.
Svinvaer and Amnoya, 2.25 miles E, are two 14m shoals locat-
ed, respectively, 0.8 mile E, and 1.25 miles E of the NE ex-
tremity of Svinvaer. A small islet lies 0.25 mile E of Svinvaer.
Meloyfjorden is entered between Svinvaer and Amnoya.
7.55

From abreast the N extremity of Renga, vessels should steer

7.54

N through Rodoyfjorden, passing between Rodoya and the Meloyfjorden to Saltfjorden

mainland.
Rodoy (66°39'N., 13°05'E.) is a small coastal harbor situated
7.54
at the SE extremity of Rodoya. It may be entered from the S
through Rodoysundet. The timber quay is 31m long and has
depths of 6.3 to 8.5m alongside; however, local knowledge is
required.
7.55 Sandverken (66°39'N., 13°06'E.) lies on the W side
7.56 Indreleia continues from the junction of Rodoy-
fjorden, Otervaerfjorden, and Skarsfjorden for 11 miles NNE
and ENE through Meloyfjorden, then turning NE through
Meloysundet. When clear of Meloysundet, Indreleia continues
7 miles NNW across Gasvaerfjorden and Stottfjorden to
Stottsundet. This route is suitable for large vessels.
An entrance from seaward through Tennholmfjorden gives
7.56

of the fairway, 0.6 mile SE of Rodoy. Sorskallen, a 0.9m isolat- access to Indreleia through Gasvaerfjorden and Stottfjorden.
ed patch, lies 0.2 mile SSW of Sandverken.

Glomfjord—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Yara Terminal
Chemicals and gases. Berthing
Ammonia 30m 10.5m 181.7m 10.5m 29.4m 38,427 dwt
length of 80m (including dolphins).

Pub. 182
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 185

Glomfjord—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Berthing length: 80m (incl. dol-
Container 25m — 134.4m — 22.5m 11,193 dwt phins). Containers, breakbulk, bun-
kers, and reefer.
Fertilizer, limestone, phosphates,
breakbulk, bunkers, and reefer. No
Main 350m 9m 200m 8m — 39,773 dwt beam restrictions. More than one
vessel can be moored alongside si-
multaneously.

Angersholmen Light (66°46'N., 13°16'E.) is situated on the

7.56 7.57 Meloysundet, the continuation of Indreleia, is formed
E side of the fairway, 0.35 mile off Amnoya. between Meloya on the W side and Skjaerpa on the E side.
Mefjordholmen, a group of islets and rocks, lies on the W
7.56 Meloyneset Light (66°50'N., 13°35'E.) is situated on the E
7.57

side of the fairway, about 1 mile WNW of Angersholmen extremity of Meloya, 0.75 mile NE of Meloysund Light.
Light. A shoal, with a depth of 8m, is situated 1.25 miles NE of An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 60m, spans
7.57

the light, on the SE side of the fairway. the S end of Meloysundet.

Hatboen (66°48'N., 13°21'E.), marked by a beacon, is about
7.56 A white sector of Meloysund Light bearing astern, leads
7.57

3 miles NE of Angersholmen Light on the N side of the fair- through the fairway of Meloysundet to the E end of Gasvaer-
way. fjorden.
A mid-channel course will lead through Meloyfjorden,
7.56 Mesoya (66°51'N., 13°40'E.), an island 318m high, lies with
7.57

passing between the N extremity of Amnoya and Hatboen.
Between Hatboen and Meloysund Light, 5 miles ENE, the
fairway is free from dangers.
Glomfjorden, the E continuation of Meloyfjorden, extends
7.56
its SW part 1 mile E of Meloya. It forms the E side of Mesoy-
fjorden; Eiet, formed on its E side leads NNE from Glom-
fjorden.
Ornes (66°52'N., 13°42'E.) is situated on the mainland about
7.57

10.5 miles E from its entrance S of the Meloysund Light; the
fairway is deep and free of dangers.
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 42m, spans
7.56
0.5 mile E of the NE end of Mesoya. It is the administrative
center for the Meloy district.
Ornes may be approached from the N by rounding the N end
7.57

Glomfjorden, about 6 miles within its entrance.
Glomfjord (66°49'N., 13°59'E.) (World Port Index No.
7.56
22540) is situated on the N shore at the head of Glomfjorden.
Depths—Limitations.—A private bulk quay will accommo-
7.56
date a vessel up to 39,773 dwt, with a maximum length of
200m, a maximum beam of 29.4m, and a maximum draft of
of Mesoya from Mesoyfjorden, or from the S through Glom-
fjorden then NNE through Eiet. The quays at the fish factories
have a total length of 152m; the main quay has a depth of 5.2m
alongside. The packet boat quay is 92m long, with depths of 4
to 9.7m alongside.
Indreleia route leads across Gasvaerfjorden, then passes
7.57

10.5m. See the table titled Glomfjord—Berth Information.
Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but
7.56
may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking Center at
an additional cost. The pilot boards, as follows:
1. North approach—2 miles N of Fleinvaer.
through Stottsundet, between the Stottvaer group of islands and
the mainland. Kunna, the conspicuous headland at the NE end
of this stretch, lies with its seaward end about 7 miles NNW of
Meloysundet.
From Kunna NE to Fugloyfjorden, a distance of about 5
7.57

2. South approach—2 miles WNW of Asvaer Light.
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
7.56
Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph
miles, Indreleia is open sea sheltered by the low-lying Gronna
(67°01'N., 13°10'E.) group of islets and rocks.
After entering Fugloyfjorden, the track continues in a gener-
7.57

1.1. al NE direction and passes SE of Fugloya; then the trend is N

Contact Information.—See the table titled Glomfjord—
7.56 past the W side of Sandhornoya Island into Saltfjorden.
Contact Information. Caution.—During N gales, a heavy sea is raised on the bank
7.57

N of Kunna. This part of Indreleia is considered to be one of

Glomfjord—Contact Information the most difficult to navigate in bad weather and under such
conditions the area should be avoided by vessels without local
Hydrom Glomfjord knowledge.
Caal sign
Glomfjord Port Radio
7.58 Gasvaer (66°53'N., 13°29'E.) is a group of islands ly-
VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16 ing 3.25 miles NW of Meloysund Light. Teksmona, an island,
Telephone 47-75-719100 lies on the E side of Indreleia, about 1 mile E of Gasvaer. The
fairway in this area is free of danger; however, a 7.6m patch
Facsimile 47-75-719400
lies about 0.3 mile W of the W extremity of Teksmona.
E-mail hydro.glomfjord@hydro.com Ostholmen (66°53'N., 13°31'E.) is the farthest E of the Gas-
7.58

vaer group. A reef, with some above-water rocks, extends

Pub. 182
186 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
about 0.3 mile SW from a point on the mainland 1.75 miles
NNE of Ostholmen.
Stott (66°55'N., 13°28'E.) is the name for the general vicini-
7.58
ty of Stottsundet and the island group Stottvaer.
Skarvskjer Light is situated close off the E side of Stott, 2.75
7.58
miles NNW of Ostholmen.
Stottsundet, formed between Stott and the mainland, is free
7.58
of dangers except for Litlegrunnen, a 10m patch 0.9 mile N of
Skarvskjer Light, and Bonetskjergrunnen, a 7m patch lying
0.35 mile farther NNW.
Tides—Currents.—Though much influenced by the wind,
7.58
the tidal currents in Stottsundet have a tendency to set N with
the rising tide and S with the falling tide. During or after fresh
S or SW winds, the tidal currents may set continuously N.
A white sector of Skarvskjer Light, astern, leads N through
7.58
the fairway of Stottsundet.
When clear of Stottsundet, vessels bound for Fugloyfjorden
7.58
can alter course E, taking care to avoid the foul ground extend-
ing about 0.4 mile N from the N face of Kunna.
On the W side of the channel, from about 0.5 mile to 1.25
7.58
miles N of Stott Light (66°57'N., 13°28'E.), is a rocky shoal
with a least depth of 7.6m. An 18.3m rocky patch lies in the
channel about 0.7 mile NE of the light; on the N side of the
fairway, about 2 miles NE of the light is Meloygrunnen, a 2.5m
shoal. A 14.6m patch lies S of Meloygrunnen, in about mid-
channel, between the shoal and Kunna.
A white sector of Digerflesa Light (66°58'N., 13°38'E.),
7.58
leads between the coastal reef N of Kunna and the S end of
Meloygrunnen, but it should be noted that the 14.6m patch lies
in this sector. A white sector of Finneset Light, located 2.5
miles E of Digerflesa Light, ahead, leads through the same
channel and S of Digerflesa.
7.59 From the vicinity of Meloygrunnen and Digerflesa,
the track leads NE through Fugloyfjorden, passing SE of Flo-
holman (67°01'N., 13°42'E.), and then passing between the E
side of Fugloya and Rossoya, 1.75 miles E.
In Fugloyfjorden, the tidal currents are usually strong, set-
7.59
ting N on the flood and S on the ebb; heavy overfalls occur
during W and NW winds.
Fuglesangen (66°59'N., 13°38'E.), lying about 0.9 mile
7.59
WNW of Digerflesa Light, consists of some above and below-
water rocks which break in bad weather.
Above-water rocks lie on the E side of the fairway, about 0.4
7.59
mile off the W side of Rossoya.
Fugloya Light (67°04'N., 13°52'E.) is situated at the E end
7.59
of Fugloya. A rock, with a depth of 5.2m, lies 1 mile N of the
light.
From NE of Fugloya Light, Indreleia passes SE of Fleina, an
7.59
island lying 1.25 miles N of Fugloya, and E of Sor-Arnoya and
Nord-Arnoya and W of Veoya and Sandhornoya to the vicinity
of Marnesskagen (67°10'N., 14°05'E.), at the junction with
Saltfjorden.
A shore reef extends about 1 mile SE from Sor-Arnoya; the
7.59
fairway narrows to about 0.4 mile in this area.
7.60 Sorfjorden, on the E side of Fugloyfjorden, is ap-
proached from its N end from Indreleia between Fugloya and
Sandhornoya, 3.5 miles ENE. The fjord extends S for 7.75
miles and is formed between Rossoya and Femris and a penin-
Pub. 182
sula of the mainland on the W and by a peninsula of the main-
land on the E. It is free of danger in the fairway, but its inner
part is icebound in the winter.
Stavsundet (67°01'N., 13°56'E.), formed between Femris
7.60
and the mainland to the S, leads into Sorfjorden; it can be used
by vessels up to 1,500 gt and 5.2m draft.
Rosoysundet, formed between Rosoya and Femris, connects
7.60
Fugloyfjorden and Sorfjorden. This narrow passage has no
known dangers in the fairway and can be used by vessels up to
11,000 gt and 7.9m draft.
Anchorage may be taken by vessels of moderate size, with
7.60
local knowledge, in 20 to 40m, on the E side of Sorfjorden, 2.5
miles SE of the N extremity of Femris. Care must be taken to
anchor close inshore as the depths increase rapidly to the W.
The W approach to Morsdalsfjorden from Indreleia is at the
7.60
N end of Sorfjorden; the fjord proper lies between the main-
land peninsula on the E side of Sorfjorden and the SW side of
Sandhornoya. It extends about 6 miles SSE to the S end of
Sandhornoya, and then Holmsundfjorden continues E and N to
the S end of Nordfjorden.
Morsdalsfjorden is free from dangers, except for two rocky
7.60
shoals, with depths of 5.5m and 8.5m, which lie 0.5 mile W
and 0.4 mile N, respectively, of Sundsodden Light (67°05'N.,
14°04'E.).
There is anchorage for moderate-size vessels, in a depth of
7.60
18.3m, on the W side of Morsdalsfjorden, about 0.4 mile SSE
of Sundsodden Light. Vessels should get close under the land,
as the depths increase rapidly offshore.
Saltfjorden, extending from Fleinvaer (67°10'N., 13°45'E.)
7.60
to Hopen, 23 miles ENE is crossed by Indreleia. The E part of
Saltfjorden is entered between Skarneset (67°12'N., 14°17'E.),
the N point of Sandhornoya, and Kvannoya, 3.25 miles NNE.
It gives access to Nordfjorden and through Saltstraumen to Sk-
jerstadfjorden and other inner fjords.
This part of Saltfjorden is deep and wide and is free of dan-
7.60
gers, though coastal reefs fringe each side; it is exposed to sea-
ward.
The tidal currents in the E part of Saltfjorden are strong; they
7.60
are usually E along the S shore and W along the N shore.
A mid-channel course in a NE direction will lead through
7.60
Saltfjorden to the entrance of Saltstraumen.
7.61 Saltstraumen, a narrow channel on the S side of the inner
end of Saltfjorden, is entered between Kvitberget (67°14'N.,
14°36'E.), the NE extremity of Straumoya, and the NW point of
Knaplundoya, 0.45 mile NE. This channel leads to the fjords E,
which are collectively known as Indre Saltfjorden.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m over a navigable
7.61
width of 80m, spans Saltstaumen.
Overhead cables span Saltstaumen; the least vertical clear-
7.61
ance is 32m.
Winds—Weather.—With W winds, the flow is irregular,
7.61
and slack water may occur up to 1 hour earlier or later than
usual.
In springtime, with E winds and with the rivers in flood, the
7.61
beginning of the N current is advanced,; that current may run
for 7 hours, and the S current for only 5 hours.
Tides—Currents.—Skjerstadfjorden and its branch fjords
7.61
are filled and emptied by semidiurnal tides through two narrow
openings. These openings so restrict the volume of water that
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 187

By Clemensfranz (Own work), via Wikimedia Commons

7.61

7.61 Very strong tidal currents under the Saltstraumen Bridge

can pass, as to cause:
1. A substantial difference between the outer and inner
levels.
2. Very strong tidal currents, especially in Saltstraumen.
Storholmen and Tuv, 0.7 mile SE; on the S shore of
Svefjorden; and beyond. They are strongest in the basin formed
by Storholmen and the cove 0.2 mile E.
In that basin, the S current sets strongly towards the S point
7.61

3. A delay of about 1 hour 45 minutes in the times of
HW and LW within.
In Saltstraumen generally, the spring rate of the tidal current
7.61
is at least 3 knots, but attains 7.5 to 8.5 knots, and considerably
of Storholmen, then ESE towards Ripnespynten 0.2 mile ESE.
During the S current, eddies do not form along the coast of
Knaplundoya, SE and E of Ripnespynten.
During the N current, eddies form between the N point of
7.61

more in extreme conditions, in the narrows abreast Storhol- Storholmen and the N entrance to Saltstraumen; the strongest
men. eddies are off Storholmen. The currents which set on to the
Tidal intervals in Saltstraumen are shown below:
7.61 projecting points of Storholmen and Knaplundoya, beneath the
bridge, cause an easily-visible ridge to form in the water, this
HW at Narvik Remarks extending 0.5 mile NNW to Kvitberget, the NW entrance point
of Saltstraumen.
-5 hours, 50 minutes LW at N entrance In Svefjorden, the incoming tidal current at the surface is the
7.61

-4 hours, 10 minutes LW at S entrance stronger, and can set up unpleasant overfalls in opposition to a
strong E wind.
-3 hours, 55 minutes Slack water
The strength of the tidal current and the powerful eddies in
7.61

-0 hour, 10 minutes HW at N entrance their wake cause Saltstaumen to be navigable only at brief peri-
+1 hour, 25 minutes HW at S entrance ods of slack water and then only with local knowledge.
Signals.—Saltstraumen Signal Stations, which inform ves-
7.61

+2 hours, 00 minutes Slack water sels when the passage of Saltstraumen may be made, are situat-
ed, as follows:
Vigorous eddies, several meters wide and with markedly
7.61
1. For inbound vessels—on the E shore, by the King Os-
deep vortices, form when the flow is strong. car II statue 0.3 mile N of the bridge.
During the S current, eddies form between the S point of
7.61
2. For outbound vessels—at Ytre Tuv, 0.7 mile SSE of

Pub. 182
188 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
the bridge, on the S shore of Svefjorden.
Signals are shown from masts (yellow and white) and consist
7.61
of red balls by day and red lights by night.
Saltstraumen Signal Stations are manned 1 hour before and
7.61
after each current change within the period 0800 to 1900. A
watch is maintained on VHF channels 14 and 16.
Information on times of transit through the Saltstraumen pas-
7.61
sage can be obtained through a 24-hour information service
contacted by telephone (08-18-77-00).
Mariners are held responsible for meeting the passage sched-
7.61
ule and any other required conditions. Local regulations state
that to avoid passing situations in the narrows, vessels with the
current running against them should wait.
Anchorage.—Vessels proceeding to Saltstraumen can ob-
7.61
tain anchorage, in depths of 20 to 29m, N of the W entrance
point of Saltstraumen, but care must be taken to avoid the reef
fringing Straumoya.
7.62 Svefjorden continues ESE from the S entrance of
Saltstraumen; it is free of dangers in mid-channel. An overhead
cable spans Svefjorden 1 mile E of its entrance.
Skjerstadfjorden is entered from Svefjorden abreast Buneset
7.62
(67°13'N., 14°42'E.) and extends to Gjelbuneset (67°11'N.,
15°24'E.) 16 miles E, on the S side of the fjord. From this point
Saltdalsfjorden extends 5 miles farther SSE.
As in Svefjorden, the incoming tidal current at the surface is
7.62
the stronger, and can set up unpleasant overfalls in opposition
to strong E winds. These conditions are particularly dangerous
in Skjerstadfjorden, which is liable to squalls. Squalls often de-
velop suddenly and are generally followed by periods of calm.
The white sector of the light on Buneset, bearing astern,
7.62
leads in the fairway towards position about 3 miles NE of the
light. The white sector of Alvnestangen Light (67°16'N.,
15°02'E.) leads E in the fairway, passing N of Oygrunnane, an
area of foul ground which extends about 1 mile N of the S
shore.
From a position about 1 mile W of Alvnestangen Light a SE
7.62
course will lead through the E part of Skjerstadfjorden to Gjel-
buneset.
Fauske (67°16'N., 15°24'E.) lies at the head of Fauskevika,
7.62
which is entered 7 miles SE of Alvnestangen Light; this is the
administrative center for the surrounding district.
The port can accommodated vessels with a maximum draft
7.62
of 6.8m. See the table tittled Fauske—Berth Information.
Fauske—Berthing Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
Draft
No. 1 39m 4.0m — —
General
125m — 6.8m Breakbulk.
Cargo
Rognan (67°06'N., 15°25'E.) lies at the head of Saltdals-
7.62
fjorden, which extends 5 miles S from its entrance abreast
Gjelbuneset; it is the administrative center for Saltdal district.
Berths are available in Rognan, at quays up to 130m long,
7.62
with depths of 3.4 to 10m alongside. Anchorage is available, in
Pub. 182
21m, clay and sand, in a position about 0.3 mile WNW of Rog-
nan Church.
Donna to Saltfjorden
7.63 Indreleia may be reached from seaward by passing S
of the S end of Traena (66°25'N., 12°00'E.), then proceeding
across the S part of Traenfjorden, into the W arm of Sjona, then
toward the S end of Stigfjorden. Traenfjorden is the fjord next
N of Nordre Asvaerfjorden.
Traenfjorden, which lies in a NNE to SSW direction, is
7.63
bound on the W by the Traena group and on the E by Mavaer
and Nesoya. The navigable channel is about 4 miles wide at its
entrance and about 3 miles wide between Selvaer (66°36'N.,
12°18'E.) and the dangers W of Nesoya.
Tides—Currents.—In Traenfjorden the tidal currents set N
7.63
and NE with the rising tide and S and SW with the falling tide.
When bound from the S end of Traenfjorden to Indreleia, a
7.63
vessel should steer ENE passing between Samskallen
(66°22'N., 11°58'E.) and Ovskallen, 2.25 miles N, and pass N
of Kvalholmen Light (66°25'N., 12°28'E.); from this position
the track leads about 0.5 mile N of Kvitingan, which lies 3.25
miles ESE of the light.
Indre Solvaerrevet (66°24'N., 12°41'E.), an isolated patch
7.63
with a charted depth of 5.8m, lies about 2 miles E of the light
on Kvitingan. Other dangers in this area may best be seen on
the chart.
From the vicinity of Kvitingan, steer toward Eggelosa, pass-
7.63
ing S of Indre Solvaerrevet. A vessel can steer from Eggelosa
SE between Onoya and Kvitaer into Sjona and then into Indre-
leia.
The dangers in Sjona and the vicinity may best be seen on
7.63
the chart.
Although there are several different ways through and across
7.63
Traenfjorden, care should be taken to avoid Stokholmen
(66°29'N., 12°21'E.), 4.75 miles NNW of Kvalholmen Light,
and the shoals which are charted within 1.75 miles.
Vessels may proceed N from a position N of Kvalholmen
7.63
Light, passing in mid-channel between Skjaerflesa Light and
Stokholmen, steering to pass W of Asbraken (66°30'N.,
12°32'E.), a foul area 3 miles E of Stokholmen.
From a mid-channel position E of Dorvaer, 4 miles NNW of
7.63
Stokholmen, a deep fairway leads N toward the W end of Lyn-
gvaerfjorden passing between the many dangers charted off
Traena and Nesoya.
7.64 Lyngvaerfjorden, N of Traenfjorden, is broad and
deep and separates Traena from Myken (66°46'N., 12°29'E.).
Valvaerfjorden lies E of Valvaer, the island group close NE
7.64
of Myken. This fjord is encumbered by a large number of
rocky shoals; navigation is dangerous without local knowl-
edge.
Tennholmfjorden, 16 miles NE of Lyngvaerfjorden, is en-
7.64
tered S of Kalsholmen Light (66°55'N., 13°06'E.). The fjord is
free from dangers but Lyjosboen, a reef with less than 1.8m lies
in the W approach 6 miles SW of Kalsholmen Light, and Sve-
boen, a reef with a least depth of 4.6m, lies 5.5 miles WSW of
the light.
Stapfjorden leads N from the inner end of Tennholmfjorden,
7.64
along the W side of the Stottvaer (66°56'N., 13°20'E.). The
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 189

fairway of this fjord is free from dangers. A line of shoals extend ENE from Store Svartoksen.
7.67

Kirkgrunnen (67°15'N., 14°14'E.), a small patch with a

7.67

7.65 Fleinvaerfjorden, leading NE into Saltenfjorden, is depth of 1.5m, lies about 0.4 mile SW of the light on Store
deep and free from dangers in the fairway. Fleinvaer, a group of Svartoksen.
low islands, lies on the NW side of Fleinvaerfjorden. Fuglo- Lille Svartoksen, a drying reef, lies on the N side of Svartok-
7.67

vaer, Fleina, Sor Arnoya, and Nord Arnoya lie on the SW and sleia, 1 mile NE of Store Svartoksen.
SE side of the fjord. In Saltfjorden, vessels should steer in the white sector of
7.67

Nupen (67°08'N., 13°43'E.) is the farthest S of the Fleinvaer

7.65
group. The most dangerous shoals in the approach to Flein-
vaerfjorden extend 4 miles W of Nupen. Other shoals lie off
Fleinvaer; their positions may be seen on the chart.
Store Svartoksen Light bearing between 036° and 062°, ahead,
to within about 1 mile of the light, when the vessel should steer
to pass W and N of the light.
When N of Store Svartoksen, steer to pass between Lille
7.67

The outer dangers in the approach are usually indicated by

7.65 Svartoksen and Langdragan, 0.45 mile ESE, then into the en-
the great number of sea birds seen in their vicinity. trance of Bodo.
A vessel approaching Fleinvaerfjorden, when in the vicinity
7.65 Care should be exercised to avoid the shoal spit extending
7.67

of Gronna (67°01'N., 13°11'E.), should steer well N of that 91m SW from the SW extremity of Nyholmen and a shoal spit
group. When clear N of Gronna, steer ENE, passing S of Nu- extending 137m E from the mole head, in the entrance to Bodo.
pen, then in mid-channel to join Saltfjorden NE of Nord Ar-
noya 7.67 Bodo (67°17'N., 14°23'E.)
The principal channel to Bodo, is the one which leads S of
7.65

Tennholmen (67°18'N., 13°30'E.), then N of Fleinvaer into
Saltfjorden in approximate position 67°12'N, 14°08'E; this is
specified for entrance into the Restricted Sea Area.
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents around Tennholmen are
7.65
rotary. At local LW, the current begins to run SW, changing
gradually through W, NW, and N as the tide rises.; at local HW,
the current begins to run NE, changing gradually through E,
SE, and S as the tide falls.
World Port Index No. 22290
7.68 Bodo, a coastal natural harbor, is formed between Ny-
holmen and the Buroya peninsula on the NW side, and the
mainland on the NE and SE side. A mole extends about 0.2
mile NNW from the mainland toward the SW extremity of Ny-
holmen. Nyholmen and Buroya are connected by a causeway
and by the Bodo Bridge.
Bodo is the administrative center for the county of Nordland.
7.68

7.66 Tennholmen lies about 20 miles W of Bodo and about

9 miles NW of Fleinvaer. Port of Bodo
Seioskallen (67°17'N., 13°31'E.), a shoal with a least charted
7.66

depth of 7m, lies about 2 miles SSE of the light on Tennhol- http://www.bodohavn.no
men. A shoal, with a depth of 15.9m, lies 0.25 mile SW of Sei-
oskallen. This is the farthest S of the dangers off Tennholmen. Winds—Weather.—The prevailing wind at Bodo is from the
7.68

For dangers E of Tennholmen and the dangers in the vicinity

7.66
of Givaer, 5 miles E of Tennholmen, refer to the chart.
From a position clear of Seioskallen, the entrance channel
7.66
passes midway between Fleinvaer and Kjaervaer, 3 miles NE,
E, except in summer, when winds are mainly from N and E or
between SW and W. Calms often occur from July to September.
Gales and strong winds blow mostly from SW and W.
The inner harbor is well sheltered from most directions, but
7.68

then into the W end of Saltfjorden.
Mesjoygrunnen (67°12'N., 13°59'E.), with a least charted
7.66
depth of 4.6m, lies about 1.0 mile SE of the light in Kjaervaer.
it is reported that bad weather from SW or W can cause occa-
sional delays in berthing or unberthing in the absence of tug as-
sistance. The harbor is always ice free.
The outer harbor consists of the water area between the town
7.68

7.67 Indreleia crosses Saltfjorden from Marnesskagen to and the SW part of Lille Hjartoy, SW of the mole; it is exposed
the vicinity of Store Svartoksen (67°16'N., 14°14'E.), 7 miles to SW and W.
NE, where the route divides. Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at MHWS is 2.8m; the
7.68

Svartoksleia, the principal channel into Bodo, leads N of

7.67 tidal rise at MLWS is 0.4m.
Store Svartoksen and S of Store Hjartoy and Lille Hjartoy.

Bodo—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Lillebrekken
Fast ferries, ro-pax, and bun-
Lillebrekken 55m 6.0-7.2m 220m — — —
kers. No beam restrictions.
Ostbrekken
Cruise vessels, ro-pax, and
Ostbrekken Quay 150m 5.8-7.8m 220m — — —
bunkers. No beam restrictions.

Pub. 182
190 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo

Bodo—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Dampskipskaia
Cruise and bunkers. No beam
Dampskipskaia 180m 5.0-7.2m 130m — — —
restrictions.
D/S Concrete North 70m 4.0m — — — — Closed. Cruise vessels.
D/S Concrete West 70m 2.0-3.8m — — — — Closed. Cruise vessels.
D/S Sheet Piling
70m 2.0-3.8m — — — — Closed. Cruise vessels.
West
Hansen Terminal
Containers, fishing vessels,
Dahl Kaia 125m 8.0m 110m — — — breakbulk, and bunkers. No
beam restrictions.
Steel products, fishing vessels,
Domsteinkaia 80m 8.0m 110m — — — breakbulk, and bunkers. No
beam restrictions.
Terminal Kai
Cruise, fast ferries, containers,
Cruise 350m 11.5m 330m — — — breakbulk, and bunkers. No
beam restrictions.
Fast ferries, ro-ro/lo-lo, break-
North 47m 9.2m — — — —
bulk, and bunkers.
Fast ferries, ro-ro/lo-lo, break-
Klossen 35m 9.8m — — — —
bulk, and bunkers.
Terminal South
Fast ferries, ro-pax, breakbulk,
New Hutigruten 180m 8.4m 230m — — — and bunkers. No beam restric-
tions.
Rapp Bomek Terminal
Coastal, fishing, breakbulk,
Bomek 1 80m 6.6m — — — —
and bunkers.
Bodo Ferry Terminal
Ferry 40m 6.2m — — — — Fast ferries and bunkers.
Railway Terminal
Fast ferry, ro-ro freight, break-
Railway 100m 6.2m — — — —
bulk, and bunkers.
Fast ferry, ro-ro freight, break-
Railway West 60m 7.3m — — — —
bulk, and bunkers.
Bodo Sildoljefabrikk AS Terminal
Fishing vessels, fish meal, fish
Bodo Sildoljefabrikk 165m 8.0-10.0m — — — — oil, breakbulk, multipurpose,
and bunkers.
Vestervika
Aviation fuel, bio fuels, clean
Shell Vestervika 60m 9.2-10.2m 180m 8.3m 26.2m 32,000 dwt products, and bunkers. Dis-
placement of 37,000t.

Pub. 182
 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 191

7.68 By Roed (Own work), via Wikimedia Commons

7.68 Bodo, Norway with the Nyholmen peninsula in the foreground

Depths—Limitations.—The port handles fishing vessels,

7.68 Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
7.68

fish oil, containers, passengers, and general cargo. The port can Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph
accommodate vessels up to 16,000 dwt, with a maximum 1.1.
length of 180m and a maximum draft of 8.3m. See the table Contact Information.—See the table titled Bodo—Contact
7.68

titled Bodo—Berth Information. Information.

Aspect.—The framework radio masts, E of the root of the
7.68

mole, are conspicuous. Bodo Church is a prominent yellow Bodo—Contact Information

building, with a separate bell tower surmounted by a spire at its
VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16
W end.
Pilotage.—Pilotage from the sea to Bodo is reported to be
7.68
Telephone 47-75-551080
compulsory. Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but Facsimile 47-75-551090
may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking Center at
an additional cost. E-mail firmapost@bodohavn.no
The pilot boards, as follows:
7.68

1. About 2 miles N of Fleinvaer in position 67°13.5'N, Caution.—Bodo Seaplane Harbor comprises the area E of
7.68

13°46.2'E. Store Hjartoy, between a line joining the N extremity of that is-
2. About 3 miles N of Landegode Light in position land and a point on the mainland about 1.0 mile ESE, and a
67°30.0'N, 14°22.5'E. line joining Hjartoydragan, off the SW coast of Store Hjartoy,
3. About 4 miles NW of Oterholmen Light in position and a point on the mainland about 1 mile SSE.
67°13.9'N, 14°07.2'E. When flying is in progress and the area is closed to water
7.68

The pilot boat and pilot office are equipped with VHF
7.68
traffic, a ball painted in yellow and black checks is hoisted at a
channel 16. signal mast on a tower near Breidvikholmen, close SW of the
Anchoring is usually advised by the sea pilot or the harbor
7.68
head of the mole.
pilot.

Pub. 182
 8.
Sector 8—Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso

Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
Pub. 182

8.0

SECTOR 8 — CHART INFORMATION

193

SECTOR 8
NORWAY—SALTFJORDEN TO TROMSO
Plan.—This sector describes the NW coast of Norway start-
8.0
ing from the area near Vestfjorden, in the vicinity of Bodo to
Tromso including Malangen. A description of the mainland,
Lofoten, Vesterlan, and the approaches to Narvik, Harstad and
Tromso is included. Indreleia and the inner fjords are also de-
scribed.
General Remarks
8.1 Tides—Currents.—The tides on the NW coast of
Norway are always semi-diurnal, with relatively little inequali-
ty between heights of the two tides. They are small to moderate
in size with a gradual increase in range toward the N. The mean
range is about 1m at Bergen and about 2.1m at Tromso.
8.1Weather conditions, both locally and in the ocean off the
coast, may considerably influence the tides.
8.1The currents on the W side of Lofoten sets constantly N re-
gardless of the tide, but this may not be the case close inshore.
8.1Along the coast of Vesteralen, the tidal currents nearly al-
ways set N with an appreciable velocity. It is strongest with the
approach of bad weather and increases in strength near the
land. Occasionally the tidal currents set S for about 1 hour, the
change occurring at the time of HW and LW.
8.1Off Senja, the tidal currents usually set N following the di-
rection of the land, and often attain a considerable velocity, es-
pecially near the time of HW.
8.1Along Kvalo, the tidal currents usually set NE with the rising
tide and SW with the falling tide, but they are likely to follow
the contour of the coast and the principal reefs. The Kvaloy tid-
al currents attain their strength at about half tide, and often run
with a velocity of about 3 knots.
8.1Along the coast of Vesteralen, the tidal currents nearly al-
ways set N with an appreciable velocity. It is strongest with the
approach of bad weather and increases in strength near the
land. Occasionally the tidal currents set S for about 1 hour, the
change occurring at the times of high or LW.
8.1Certain reports published from 1835 to 1848 indicate the
current 10 to 12 miles SW of Andersboskallen (68°46'N.,
13°33'E.) ran N, NE, and E, with a rate dependent upon the
wind, but occasionally reaching 4 knots over the shallow
banks. These reports must be considered, for where depths
change suddenly, as in the vicinity of Andersboskallen, and
about 23 and 32 miles farther NE, there may be a strong flow
and violent turbulence. In the areas referred to, the NE or E
flow is probably strongest on the rising tide with strong S to W
winds. Turbulence is probably most violent during the rising
tide with strong N to E winds.
8.1In the whole of Vestfjorden the movements of the tidal cur-
rents are substantially influenced by the winds. At times when
there is little or no current in mid-channel, there is a regular
current along the land on either side, invariably setting in con-
trary direction on the opposite sides of the fjord.
8.1The tidal currents set NE with the rising tide and SW with
the falling tide, along either the mainland or SE coast of Lofo-
195
ten, but it is uncertain as to when or on which coast the currents
will make. Vestfjorden and all major straits are free of ice.
Aspect.—Vestfjorden is a broad and deep body of water that
separates the mainland from the islands of Lofoten and Vester-
alen. Its principal outlying islands are Hadseloy, Langoya, and
Andoya. Vestfjorden is the seaward approach from Saltfjorden
and Bodo to Ofotfjorden and Narvik. Both Ofotfjorden and
Narvik lie about 100 miles NE of Saltfjorden, at the head of the
fjord.
8.1In general, the W and NW coasts of Lofoten are almost inac-
cessible and should be avoided. This is also true of the Vester-
alen group, comprised of four large islands and several small
islands, which are dangerous to approach.
8.1The coast of the mainland of Vestfjorden is broken by a num-
ber of large fjords. Generally, it rises abruptly to over 900m,
and consists of bare rock with a forested lower slopes.
8.1The mountains of Lofoten and Vesteralen are steep and lofty,
often covered with snow, and are, most often, easily identified.
They may be seen from a distance of 40 to 50 miles in clear
weather.
8.1The coast continues to the island of Senja and then to
Kvaloy. The entrance to Tromso lies between the two islands.
Malangen, the direct passage to Tromso, lies between the two
islands as well.
8.1Senja, with its granite peaks, presents a rugged and imposing
appearance from seaward. A ridge, from 610 to 914m high,
runs along the whole island in a NE and opposite direction.
Kvaloy, to the NE, is mountainous and attains an elevation of
1,045m.
8.1Pilotage.—Lodingen Pilot Center organizes and engages pi-
lots for vessels in Nordland and the Troms, from Rorvik in the
S to Kirkenes in the N. Pilots should be requested 24 hours in
advance. The ETA should be confirmed 2 hours prior to arrival
at the pilot station.
8.1See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
Ocean for further information.
8.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
8.1Trawling is prohibited off the Vesteralen archipelago be-
tween mid September and mid May in the designated Trawler-
Free Zone best seen on the chart.
8.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
8.1Ship Reporting System.—The Barents Ship Reporting Sys-
tem operates in the Barents Sea off the coasts of Norway and
the Russian Federation beginning at latitude 67°10'N off the
coast of Norway and continuing N, NE, and E to longitude
33°20'E off the coast of the Russian Federation. For further in-
formation, see Arctic Ocean—Ship Reporting System in
Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
Pub. 182
196 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
Caution.—An IMO-adopted TSS is located off the N coast
8.1
of Norway; it lies about 60 miles W of Rost (67°31'N.,
12°07'E.) and leads to about 37 miles NNE of Vardo (70°22'N.,
31°07'E.). See paragraph 9.1 for further information.
Andersboskallen (68°46'N., 13°33'E.), with a least charted
8.1
depth of 37m, lies about 18 miles W of Langoya off the Vester-
alen group. There are two other patches within 3 miles N of the
37m spot, with depths of 40m and 57m.
It would be by no means safe to pass over Andersboskallen
8.1
during a heavy W swell, as this would cause a high topping
sea, even if it did not break; rollers set in toward them from a
long distance W.
Saltfjorden to Skrova
8.2 Vestfjorden, the fjord lying between Lofoten, Vester-
alen, and the mainland, is entered from seaward between
Muken (66°45'N., 12°29'E.) and Skomvaer Light, 40 miles
NNW.
8.2Vestfjorden is deepest at Tranoy, with a depth of about
640m. At this point, it is also the narrowest, and the depth de-
creases farther S.
8.2Between Rost and Fleinvaer, the maximum depth is about
300m. The fjord is deepest along the mainland. Here the bot-
tom slopes steeply at a short distance from land so that the rel-
atively shallow parts close to land are narrow.
8.2Vessels approaching Vestfjorden from SW in clear weather
will be able to identify Rost, Vaeroy, and Moskenesoy, which
form the SW end of Lofoten. Rost, the S island, can be seen
from a distance of 30 miles. The latter two islands appear as two
steep cliffs. From a distance of 20 miles, one can see the high
and pointed small islands of Ellefsnyken, Trenyken, and
Hernyken, which are located to the S of Storfjellet. The charac-
teristic formations of these islands make it easy to identify Rost.
8.2When entering Vestfjorden in thick weather, vessels can ver-
ify their distance offshore near Lofoten by soundings. There
are depths of 100m from about 1 to 4 miles offshore from the S
end of Moskenesoy to Skrova, about 47 miles ENE. Soundings
give little warning E of Skrova; depths of 200m are found with-
in 1 mile of some of the rocks off the S coast of Hinnoya.
8.2In general, it is recommended that vessels keep close to Lo-
foten, where there are large flat sea areas with lesser depths,
rather than the mainland, which is foul offshore. When E of
Skrova, the dangers are all on the N side of the fjord and it is
necessary to keep on the mainland side.
8.3 Among the islands lying off the mainland coast are
Landegode, 791m high, about 8 miles N of the Saltfjorden en-
trance, and Engeloya, 648m high, about 45 miles NNE of the
same entrance. These islands are conspicuous because of their
size and contour.
8.3There are several conspicuous mountains, which rise to a
height of 947m, in the vicinity of Ofotfjorden.
8.3The fringing islands and dangers extend about 20 miles W
from the mainland in the vicinity of Bodo; north of Bodo the
obstructions gradually decrease in distance from the coast.
8.3Helligvaer (67°25'N., 13°55'E.) and Lyngvaer, W of Lande-
gode, comprise the next mass of islets NE of Tennholmen. This
group of islets lies with their S end about 10 miles NE of Ten-
holmen.
Pub. 182
Storboen, a drying shoal, lies on the SW side of Helligvaer
8.3
and Nordboen, a rocky shoal with a least depth of 7.9m, is situ-
ated off the N side of Helligvaer, 5 miles NE of Storboen.
Kjengbaen (67°29'N., 14°01'E.), a rock with a depth of
8.3
0.3m, lies 2.75 miles NE of Nordboen.
Husoyvaer, situated 18 miles NNE of Kjengbaen, consists of
8.3
a group of islets and rocks which extends about 11 miles W of
the mainland.
Utgrunnen (67°42'N., 14°17'E.), the outer patch of Husoy-
8.3
vaer, has a least depth of 18.2m. Utgrunnsflesa, a reef which
breaks, lies 1.25 miles ESE of Utgrunnen.
Kjolibaen (67°45'N., 14°23'E.), with a depth of 1.8m,
8.3
breaks except in calm weather. It is situated 4.25 miles NNE of
Utgrunnen, off the SW side of Maloyvaer. Dorholmskjaeran,
another danger, lies on the NW side of Maloyvaer, 2.5 miles
NNE of Kjolibaen.
Maloy Skarholmen, an islet marked by a light, lies 1 mile
8.3
NNE of Kjolibaen.
Maloy Skarholmen (67°46'N., 14°24'E.) is a light shown
8.3
from a prominent tower, 34m in height, standing on the islet. A
racon is located at the light tower.
Engelvaer (67°53'N., 14°34'E.) is a group of islands and
8.3
rocks which lie close NE of Maloyvaer, about 6 miles offshore.
Tverskallen, with a charted depth of 15m, lies 3.5 miles NE of
Dorholmskjaeran, at the SW edge of the group.
Several foul patches lie on the NW side of the group, 3 to 4
8.3
miles NE of Tverskallen.
Flatoy (67°55'N., 14°46'E.), an island, lies 2 miles NE of the
8.3
Engelvaer group. A light is situated on the SW part of the is-
land.
To the NE of Flatoyare are the islands and rocks of Valsvaer,
8.3
which extend about 3 miles W of Engeloya, a large island ris-
ing to a height of 648m.
Off the N end of Engeloya is Brunvaer, another dangerous
8.3
group. From Brunvaer NE to Ofotfjorden, the salient features
of the coast are apparently free from off-lying dangers.
8.4 The islands of Lofoten and Hinnoya form a chain ex-
tending NE to the mainland near Ofotfjorden.
8.4Rost is the farthest SW group of islands on the NW side of
Vestfjorden.
8.4Rost (67°31'N., 12°07'E.), the principal island of the group,
is a flat low-lying island surrounded by islets and rocks, none
of them visible beyond 7 or 8 miles. Masts equipped with ob-
struction lights are situated in the N part of Rost.
8.4Rostnesvagen (Rossnesvagen) is entered close to the W side
of Vaeroy Light (67°39.1'N., 12°43.5'E.). Iron perches mark
the E side of the entrance.
8.4Skomvaer Light (67°25'N., 11°52'E.) is shown from a tower
34m in height, standing near the S end of the Rost group. A
racon is located at the light tower.
8.4Storfjellet (67°28'N., 11°56'E.), 267m high; Vedoy 209m
high; and Stavoy, 148m high, lie, respectively, 3.75 miles SW,
2 miles SSW, and 1 mile SE of Rost. These three islets form
excellent landmarks.
8.4Tides—Currents.—The general flow pattern in Vestfjorden
flows inward along the W. In winds from the SW, the current is
partially turned. Most straits on the W and N sides of Vest-
fjorden have strong currents. High water and LW are occur
about simultaneous in all of Vestfjorden. The differences in
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
Skomvaer Light
8.4
Vedoy
tidewater levels are among the greatest along the entire Norwe-
gian coast. In a storm from the SW, the water level may be sig-
nificantly above the anticipated values in the Tide Table.
8.4The passage W and SW of Lofoten, the continental shelf
generally has depths of less than 200m with some shoals close
to land. The slope in the W is very steep.
8.4The coastal current, running N to NE, dominates the current
conditions. Tidal currents reinforce this effect with rising water
197
and weaken it with falling water.
8.4With waves from NE to NW, the interaction between current
and waves will create choppy waves. Refraction centers may
occur SW of Rost when the waves come from the SW. Close to
Lofoten, the waves may also be reflected due to the steep conti-
nental slope.
8.4Vaeroy (67°40'N., 12°40'E.), about 10 miles NE of Rost, is
separated from that island by Rosthavet. Mosken, a conspicu-
ous two pointed summit lies on the same shoal bank, 3 miles
NNE of Vaeroy.
8.4The S, W and N sides of Vaeroy and Mosken are unap-
proachable and a vessel wishing to enter Vestfjorden from W
must do so through Rosthavet, or through Moskenstraumen, 3
miles NNE of Mosken; Rosthavet is preferred. The shoals on
either side of these channels are best seen on the chart.
8.4Lofotodden (67°50'N., 12°51'E.), the S extremity of Moske-
nesoya, forms the N side of Moskenstraumen.
8.4Yttertuven (67°50'N., 12°52'E.), the E extremity of Lofo-
todden, is marked by a light. From this point, the coast of
Moskenesoya extends 8 miles NE to Reine. Rodliskallen, an
11.9m patch, lies 1 mile offshore, 2.75 miles NE of Yttertuven.
8.4A (67°53'N., 12°59'E.), at the mouth of the Avanndet River,
4 miles NE of Yttertuven, Tind, and Bogen, are three fishing
villages with a common entrance. They are suitable only for
small vessels and local knowledge is required.
8.4Reine (67°56'N., 13°06'E.), one of the principal fishing sta-
tions in Lofoten, is situated 3.5 miles NNE of Bogen. Local
knowledge is necessary for entering the harbor, which has a
channel dredged to 4.9m. The deepest berths are 3.9 to 5.9m.
There is secure anchorage in the harbor, in depths of 20 to
Pub. 182
198 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
8.4
24m.
Reine—Contact Information
Telephone 47-76-053100
E-mail hydro.glomfjord@hydro.com
Web site http://www.reinehavn.no
8.5 From Reine, the coast of Moskenesoya trends NNE
for 4.25 miles to Kunna (68°00'N., 13°14'E.), a narrow island,
96m high; then the S coast of Flakstadoya and the S end of
Vestvagoya trend NE 8.5 miles to Ballstad. The coast in this ar-
ea is much indented with fjords and there are numerous off-ly-
ing dangers.
8.5The entrance to Kirkefjorden, about 1 mile N of Reine, is en-
cumbered with islets and rocks. Strong winds blow out of the
fjord.
8.5A channel, spanned by a bridge 1.75 miles within its en-
trance, separates the E side of Moskenesoya from Flakstadoya.
The bridge has a vertical clearance of 15.9m.
8.5Kunna lies in the entrance to Skjelfjorden, which penetrates
the S side of Flakstadoya to a distance of about 4 miles N.
8.5Skjelfjorden is navigable by deep-draft vessels as far as St-
jerndalen (68°02'N., 13°14'E.), 1.5 miles within the entrance;
however, a shoal spot, with a depth of 0.9m, lies about 0.3 mile
ENE of the NE side of Kunna.
8.5Nusfjorden, entered about 3 miles NE of Skjelfjorden, pene-
trates Flakstadoya for about 1 mile. The entrance to the fjord is
Pub. 182
By Kent Wang, via Wikimedia Commons
8.4
Vaeroy
constricted to a width of about 183m between the light and a
danger NE.
8.5Nappstrommen (Nappstraumen), the passage between Flak-
stadoya and Vestvagoya, is entered from Vestfjorden in approx-
imate position 68°02'N, 13°25'E, and leads N to the vicinity of
Nappholmen (68°08'N., 13°28'E.).
8.5Gapet, a narrow channel about 1 mile long, gives access to
the open sea from Nappholmen. Nappstrommen and Gapet can
be navigated by large vessels.
8.5The dangers in the S entrance of Nappstrommen may best be
seen on the chart. Most of the dangers within the passage lie on
the E side of the fairway, leaving a deep and clear channel up
the W side.
8.5Gapet (68°09'N., 13°28'E.) is entered close E of Napphol-
men. The white sector of the light on Hudholmen bearing be-
tween 326° and 336°, ahead, leads through the fairway.
8.5Northbound vessels from Gapet pass E of Hudholmen.
8.5Anchorage may be taken in Haugbukten, in 25 to 30m, clay
and sand, in a position about 1 mile ENE of the light at Nap-
pholmen. It is inadvisable to anchor off the N shore of the bay
owing to heavy squalls which blow down from Offersoham-
men, 1 mile N of the center of the bay. Vessels are cautioned of
the submarine cables located in the vicinity of Napp Light.
8.5Buksnesfjorden indents Vestvagoya to a distance of about 4
miles. It is entered NE of Svinoya (68°03'N., 13°33'E.), which
is about 3 miles ENE of the entrance to Nappstrommen. A light
is situated on Svinoya.
8.5Ballstad (68°04'N., 13°42'E.) is an important fishing port,
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
8.4
protected by moles, situated on the W side of Buksnesfjorden,
1.5 miles N of Svinoya. There are depths of 7m in the approach
and 4m in the inner harbor. The deepest berths are 4.3 to 5.1m.
The harbor is suitable for small vessels.
8.6 Brandsholmen (68°05'N., 13°39'E.) is situated on the
E side of the entrance to Buksnesfjorden. The island is 100m
high and is the highest in the area. It is impossible to mistake
because of its precipitous W side.
8.6From Brandsholmen, the coast of Vestvagoya trends 3 miles
ENE; the SE side of the island extends about 14 miles NE to
the island of Gimsoya, on the W side of Austvagoya.
8.6Urberget (68°04'N., 13°43'E.), 335m high, rises in the SE
part of Vestvagoya, 1.25 miles ENE of Brandsholmen. It is eas-
ily identified by its darker appearance and though its summit is
always snow-capped, its precipitous slopes hold little snow.
Steinetind, 517m high, and pointed in shape, is situated about 3
miles NNE of Urberget. Dalstind, 461m high, and Horntind,
361m high, lie 6.5 and 8.5 miles NE, respectively, from
Steinetind. They are the most conspicuous hills on a dark ridge
of hills that extend NNE from Dalstind.
8.6Henningsvaerstraumen (Henningsvaer Strommen) is a broad
and deep opening between the SE side of Vestvagoya and the
SW end of Austvagoya. This sea area extends 10 miles to the
NNE, which in turn leads to the open sea.
8.6The area is difficult to navigate due to the many dangers,
which may be seen on the chart. The area is one of the princi-
pal fishing grounds in Lofoten.
199
By Nanosmile (Own work), via Wikimedia Commons
8.4
Reine
8.6Stamsund (68°07'N., 13°51'E.) is situated on the SE side of
Vestvagoya, close E of Steinetind. Stamsund is a large fishing
district with an advantageous location with respect to the fish-
ing fields. Good approaches to these fields are easily recog-
nized due to the many characteristic peaks which can be used
for alignment purposes.
8.6Depths—Limitations.—Stamsund is protected by breakwa-
ters. The harbor handles passengers and bulk cargo.
8.6The harbor can accommodate vessel with a draft up to 6m.
Hurtigruten Quay can accommodate vessels up to 188m in
length with a maximum draft of 6.1m draft. Cargo handled at
this quay is ro/pax, ro-ro/lo-lo, breakbulk, and bunkers.
8.6The W entrance from Rokkiva has a controlling depth of 9m.
Langsundet, the E entrance, with a controlling depth of 5m and
a power line with an overhead clearance of 23m at its N end, is
used by vessels with a maximum draft of 3.7m,
8.6Pilotage.—Local pilots are available for mooring and warp-
ing large vessels.
8.6Anchorage.—Anchorage is available in Rakvika, SW of the
harbor area, in 17-29m, good holding ground, but it is uncom-
fortable in S and SW gales and in squalls from NW.
8.7 Henningsvaer (68°09'N., 14°13'E.) is a large offshore
fishing station, situated in an island group of the same name,
off the SW end of Austvagoya. The harbor is centered on Hel-
landsoya.
8.7It was reported that the main island of the group was joined
to the small island NNE by a bridge, which in turn is joined to
Pub. 182
200 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso

The Gimsoystraumen Bridge

8.7

8.7 Henningsvaer

Engoya by a further bridge which extends to the mainland. It is From an approximate position of 68°09'N, 14°08'E, 1.75
8.7

reported that a conspicuous lattice mast stands at the S end of
Henningsvaer.
8.7The principal channels in the harbor approach have depths of
17m. A steamship quay has a length of 45m and alongside
miles W of Henningsvaer, a channel, obstructed by islets and
rocks, leads about 6 miles NNE between Vestvagoya and Aust-
vagoya to the vicinity of Gimsoya.
Gimsoystraumen (68°16'N., 14°15'E.), between Gimsoya
8.7

depths of 8 to 11.3m. There is about 1 mile of quayage which and Austvagoya, connects Henningsvaerstraumen with the
is provided with a large number of small cranes. open sea. It can be used by moderate size vessels and is easy to
8.7Local pilots are available on request to the harbor assistant. navigate.

Pub. 182
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 201

8.7Gimsoystraumen is spanned by a bridge, with a vertical
clearance of 30m and a horizontal clearance of 90m.
8.7From Henningsvaerstraumen, the coast of Austvagoya trends
about 11 miles ENE to the entrance of Ostnesfjorden (Austnes-
fjorden).
8.7Off Henningsvaer, at the W end of this coast, patches of 14.6
to 27m lie up to 5 miles offshore. Moholmen, marked by a light
situated, is located 2 miles offshore. The dangers that comprise
this group may best be seen on the chart.
8.7During onshore gales, the waters around Moholmen and the
islets 1 to 2 miles NW are noted for the strength of flow. In
such conditions, a violent race occurs in this area and passage
becomes difficult.
8.8 Skrova (68°10'N., 14°41'E.), an isolated island,
stands out because of its distinctive color and lower elevation.
The largest island of the group rises to a height of 313m; it ap-
pears as a haystack against Store Mola and Lille Mola (Litle
Molla) behind.
8.8Skrova Light (Skraven Light) is shown from a prominent
tower 24m in height. A radiobeacon is situated at the tower.
8.8Skrova Havn (68°10'N., 14°40'E.) (World Port Index No.
21910) is situated in the island group of Skrova. Some of the
islands are connected by moles.
8.8The harbor is spacious, with several good quays on both
sides of the strait. The quays, which are up to 90m long, have
depths of 1.7 to 4.9m alongside. Mooring rings are installed
around the harbor.
8.8There are several good anchorages within the harbor area.
The best anchorage is located in the roadstead N of St. Ram-
noya, where there are depths of 16 to 30m, sand bottom. Cau-
tion is required due to the reported presence of fish farms in the
harbor.
8.8Pilots may be arranged through the pilot station at Svolvaer
when a 24-hour advance notice is given.
8.8Orsvag (68°12'N., 14°25'E.), situated 2.5 miles NNE of the
light on Moholmen, is the best and roomiest anchorage in the
area for vessels of moderate draft, and is easily approached in
all weather. The anchorage is in depths of 7 to 8m, sand and
clay. Orsvag Hamn Light is a perch marking a below-water
rock.
8.9 Svolvaer (68°14'N., 14°35'E.) (World Port Index No.
21900), the largest and best protected harbor along the Lofoten
coast, lies on the SE coast of Austvagoya, 4 miles NE of
Orsvag.
8.9Svolvaer, the capital of the Lofoten Islands, is situated on a
peninsula and on several adjoining islets. Some of these islets
are connected with the peninsula and each other by jetties and
bridges.
8.9Depths—Limitations.—The port has three harbors. Vessels
up to 158m in length with a maximum draft of 9.1m draft can
be accommodated in the harbor. See the table titled Svolvaer—
Berth Information.
8.9Submarine cables are laid in many parts of the harbors, as
shown on the chart.
8.9Pilotage.—Pilotage is available. Pilots should be ordered via
SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot
Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot boards in posi-
tion 68°11.0'N, 14°33.0'E (on request) or position 68°13.0'N,
14°53.3'E (Molldora).

Svolvaer—Berth Information
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Osanpollen
Skarvik A/S Concrete Jetty 50m 3.7-5.9m —
Skarvik A/S Concrete 80m 6.5-11.5m —
Municipal Concert 80m 9.9-10.5m —
Ferry Terminal 80m — —
Concrete 36m 5-5.9m Disused tank facility.
Main Harbor
Industrial Concrete 80m 6.9-8.2m —
Wood and Concrete 95m 3-4.4m —
Bekkholmen 75m 3.3-7.8m —
District Boat 214m 4.9-10.2m —
Norde Concrete 1 30m 1.9-5m —
Norde Concrete 2 90m 0.9m —
Fish Factory 10m 3.8-4.8m —
Bergs Sonner 68m 3.9-6.2m —
Lofoten Not og Tral 102m 3.9-6.2m —
Norslid A/S 60m 3-4.5m —

Pub. 182
202 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
8.9 The Raftsundet Bridge from S
Sveleia (Sveleden) (68°11'N., 14°42'E.) is a passage be-
8.9
tween the islets lying N of Skrova and those of Lille Molla; it
connects Holen with Vestfjorden.The channels through Sveleia
are well-marked and easily navigated.
Vessels of moderate size which are unable to enter Svolvaer
8.9
may anchor in Sveleia, as indicated on the chart, in 16 to 30m,
sand.
Molldoren leads between Lille Molla (68°12'N., 14°46'E.)
8.9
and Store Molla, about 0.5 mile NNE.
Brettesnes (68°14'N., 14°51'E.), a fishery harbor in a cove at
8.9
the S end of Store Molla, is approached from Molldora (Mol-
dora) or from Vestfjorden. The harbor is exposed to mountain
squalls, and a considerable sea is raised by S gales.
8.10 Holen (Hola) (68°14'N., 14°39'E.) is formed between
Austvagoya, on the W, and Lille Molla, on the E. Skjoldvaer,
on the SE side of the passage and NW of Lille Molla, is a
group of islets and rocks lying up to 1.5 miles off Lille Molla,
N of Skrova. This group should be avoided.
Kvalbaken, a danger on the NW side of Holen, is marked by
8.10
a light and lies about 2 miles ENE of Rodholmane.
Austnesfjorden (68°17'N., 14°43'E.) extends about 6 miles
8.10
N from the inner end of Holen and is free from dangers for
about 4 miles. Farther N there are several shoals, which are
best seen on the chart. Heavy squalls are experienced in the
fjord.
Oyhellesundet, the passage NE of Holen, separates Store
8.10
Molla from Austvagoya; it is connected at its NE end with
Raftsundet.
From Skrova, the NW side of Vestfjorden trends 16 miles
8.10
ENE to Rotvaer (68°22'N., 15°56'E.), a group of islets and
Pub. 182
rocks lying about 1 mile SE of Hinnoya, and 3 miles W of the
entrance to Ofotfjorden.
Several fjords indent this coast; the entire area is fronted by
8.10
dangers which are best seen on the chart. Vessels enroute from
Skrova to Ofotfjorden should steer along the SE side of Vest-
fjorden in this area.
Flovika (68°15'N., 14°57'E.), a deep body of water clear of
8.10
dangers in the fairway, is formed between Store Molla, on the
W side, and Arstein and Hinnoya, on the E. This passage leads
from Vestfjorden to Rafsundet, about 7 miles NNW. The dan-
gers off Arstein may best be seen on the chart.
Raftsundet (68°23'N., 15°05'E.) extends about 11 miles
8.10
NNE from its junction with Oyhellesundet and Flovika, close
N of Store Molla.
Raftsundet is formed between Austvagoya and Hinnoya. It is
8.10
narrow and comparatively deep and clear. The channel, which
is used by coastal steamers and tourist vessels, is not difficult
to navigate and is well-marked by aids. The channel will ac-
commodate vessels drawing 7.3m and about 116m in length.
The Raftsundet Bridge, a fixed bridge with a vertical clear-
8.10
ance of 45m, spans Raftsundet about 0.7 mile SSW of the N
entrance to the passage.
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Raftsundet set S be-
8.10
tween half tides at fall and rise. In Trangstraumen, the narrows
between 3.5 and 5 miles S of the N entrance, the current has a
velocity of 4 to 5 knots, but with a S gale the N current may at-
tain a velocity of 6 or 7 knots. It should be noted that in Trang-
straumen, the S current sets toward the E shore and the N
current sets toward the W shore. A light stands about 0.15 mile
ESE of the bridge; a submarine cable crosses Raftsundet in the
vicinity of the bridge.
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
There is anchorage for large vessels with local knowledge, in
8.10
the SE part of Raftsundet, in 20 to 42m, about 1 mile ENE of
the N extremity of Store Molla. An overhead cable, with a ver-
tical clearance of 55m, spans Raftsundet near its N entrance.
8.11 Oksfjorden, the next fjord E of Flovika, penetrates
about 11 miles N into Hinnoya. Between its entrance and Vest-
fjorden lies an extensive area of islets and shoals, including the
islet group Risvaer (68°15'N., 15°09'E.) and Svellingen
(68°18'N., 15°18'E.). Within that area are channels and anchor-
ages suitable only for those with local knowledge.
Oksfjorden is connected to Vestfjorden by a channel from
8.11
Flovika, which passes close along the E side of Arstein, and by
Smitskjaerleien (68°20'N., 15°25'E.), which passes S of the
SE part of Hinnoya.
Oksfjorden can be navigated by large vessels for a distance
8.11
of about 8 miles to the islet of Husjordoy.
Kanstadfjorden is entered between Offersoy (68°19'N.,
8.11
15°37'E.), a small low-lying peninsula 4.5 miles E of Smitsk-
jaerleien, and Rotvaer, 7 miles NE. It indents Hinnoya for a
distance of about 10 miles.
Hokfjorden extends 2.5 miles N from the inner end of Kan-
8.11
stadfjorden; Indrefjorden is the continuation of Kanstadfjorden
on the NE side. Erikstadfjorden, suitable only for small boats,
extends NW from Kanstadfjorden NNE of its junction with
Hokfjorden.
Rinnoyvag (68°22'N., 15°46'E.), situated on the W side of
8.11
Kanstadfjorden, 4.5 miles NNE of Offersoy, has a berth at the
timber quay, 23m long, with depths of 5.5 to 7.7m alongside.
Anchorage has been taken in Kanstadfjorden, with good pro-
8.11
tection from N and W winds, in 48m, with the light on Aspe-
neset (68°25'N., 15°47'E.) bearing 345°, 1.4 miles distant.
Landegodefjorden and Vestfjorden
8.12 Because of the shallow channel in Grotoysundet, for
about 40 miles N of Bodo, Indreleia is of little use to large ves-
sels. This part of Indreleia merges into Vestfjorden through
Breisundet; Indreleia proper does not resume until the vicinity
of Lodingen, at the entrance to Tjeldsundet, is reached.
Landegodefjorden is formed between Landegode (67°25'N.,
8.12
14°20'E.) and the mainland about 4 miles SE. It is encumbered
by islets, reefs, and shoal areas, whose positions are best seen
on the chart.
Winds—Weather.—The area between Bodo and Landegode
8.12
is exposed to violent squalls, especially in winter. East winds,
with strong and frequent gusts, are liable to blow off the main-
land; NW winds are variable in strength with heavy squalls off
the high peaks of Landegode.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal current in Landegodefjorden
8.12
sets NE with the rising tide and SW with the falling tide.
Aspect.—Landegode Light (67°27'N., 14°23'E.) is shown
8.12
from a tower, 29m in height, standing on the islet of Eggeloysa,
close N of the N end of Landegode.
Tennholmen Light (67°18'N., 13°30'E.) is shown from a
8.12
low tower on a building, 14m in height, standing on the largest
islet of the group. There is a helicopter landing platform at the
light.
Vessels proceeding from Saltfjorden to Landegodefjorden
8.12
should steer to pass NW of Store Svartoksen and SE of Hau-
203
sen (67°17'N., 14°12'E.), an isolated patch with depths of less
than 5.5m, situated 1.5 miles NNW of Store Svartoksen.
The white sector of the light on Store Svartoksen, bearing
8.12
astern, leads NW of Store Hjartoy and W of Lopsholmen
(67°20'N., 14°24'E.), 2 miles NE of Store Hjartoy.
Vessels proceeding from Bodo to Landegodefjorden may
8.12
proceed through Hjartoysundet, formed between Store Hjartoy
and Lille Hjartoy, or around Hjartoydragan and proceed in the
white sector of the light on Store Svartoksen.
After the vessel has cleared Lopsholmen, they may steer in
8.12
the white sector of Bjornoy Light (67°25'N., 14°26'E.).
In heavy weather, it may be preferable to pass 0.4 mile off
8.12
Bjornoy then between Steinsgrunnen, a 20m patch 0.6 mile N
of Bjornoy, and Mistgrunnen, a 19.8m patch, 0.75 mile NE.
From the vicinity of Bjornoy, the route continues NNW to-
8.12
ward a position W of Utgrunnen (67°42'N., 14°17'E.), then N
or NNE into Vestfjorden.
The white sector of the light on Bjornoy, bearing astern,
8.12
leads W of Ytre Skallen (67°28'N., 14°25'E.), a 4.9m patch 3
miles NNW of the light, and E of Oyensve, 10.5 miles NNW,
which usually breaks.
From the vicinity of Oyensve, the summit of Lopsfellet
8.12
(67°19'N., 14°29'E.) in range with an isthmus on Landegode,
0.4 mile WNW of Bjornoy Light, bearing 167.5°, passes 0.4
mile W of Utgrunnen, and then into Vestfjorden.
Inner Fjords—Saltfjorden to Ofotfjorden
8.13 The fjords on the SE side of Vestfjorden, known as the
coast of Salten, run in all directions and are frequently connect-
ed by low-lying marshy or lake filled depressions, so that the
entire coast is a maze of intricate channels between islands and
peninsulas.
In places, steep ranges of mountains, separated by valleys,
8.13
lead away from the shores of the fjords, which are broken and
have several large, low, boggy peninsulas.
Some of the fjords penetrate so deeply they almost reach the
8.13
Swedish border.
Indreleia diverges from the main route from Bodo to Vest-
8.13
fjorden off Lopsholmen, keeping to the E side of Landegode-
fjorden and continuing NE through Karlsoyfjorden. There are
many below-water rocks and dangers which exist in Landego-
defjorden and must be avoided. Karlsoyfjorden is deep and free
from dangers in the fairway.
Mistfjorden lies E of Indreleia, about 6 miles ENE of Bjor-
8.13
noy. The fjord is surrounded by high, massive, and bare moun-
tains.
Kvanholmen (67°27'N., 14°40'E.), marked by a light, is sit-
8.13
uated on the S side of the entrance to Mistfjorden. From its en-
trance, the fjord extends about 10 miles E, terminating in
Nordfjorden.
Several shoal spots lie up to 0.5 mile W of Kvanholmen and
8.13
a rock, awash, lies on the N side of Mistfjorden, 0.75 mile E of
the island.
Vessels with local knowledge can anchor at the head of
8.13
Nordfjorden, in a depth of 29m, sand.
Karlsoyfjorden (67°31'N., 14°40'E.) is formed between
8.13
Karlsoyvaer, on the NW, and the mainland, on the SE. The fair-
way leads NE to Folla.
Indreleia leads NNE from position 67°29'N, 14°35'E, pass-
8.13
Pub. 182
204 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
ing through Karlsoyfjorden towards Helloyskjeret.
The white sector of the light on Bjornoy, bearing astern,
8.13
leads into Karlsoyfjorden NW of the islets and dangers off the
mainland; the white sector of the light on Helloyskjeret then
leads toward the N entrance of the fjord. It is advisable to keep
to the E side of this sector as the W sector passes close to Karl-
soyvaer.
Kjerringoy (67°31'N., 14°46'E.) (World Port Index No.
8.13
22270) is located on the SE shore of Karlsoyfjorden. There is a
wooden quay, 38m long, with depths of 3.2 to 5.2m, located at
the port. A light beacon is shown on Kjerringoy.
Anchorage is available 137m SE of the beacon, in depths of
8.13
5 to 10m, sand and clay bottom.
8.14 Folla, a large fjord complex, is entered in the vicinity
of Helloyskjeret, and is approached through Karlsoyfjorden or
from W by passing N of Slovaer (67°36'N., 14°39'E.).
Abreast of Hjartoya (67°39'N., 15°05'E.), about 6 miles
8.14
ENE of Helloyskjeret, Folda divides into two branches, each
having several arms; Sorfolla extends about 20 miles SE and
Nordfolla extends about 15 miles NE.
The W approach to Folda from Vestfjorden can be made by
8.14
steering in the white sector of the light on Helloyskjeret, pass-
ing S of Skarholman (67°39'N., 14°28'E.), 7.5 miles WNW of
the light, then S of Breifallet, a 7.9m patch 3 miles ESE of
Skarholman. This course will lead close N of Ytre Raholmen
1.75 miles SE of Breifallet. Then steer E into Folla to pass N of
Helloyskjeret.
Oyensve (67°35'N., 14°17'E.), which breaks, are the farthest
8.14
W of the dangers off-lying Karlsoyvaer, about 12 miles W of
Helloyskjeret.
Nordfolla (67°45'N., 15°17'E.) leads NE from Folla. Its E
8.14
continuations are known as Reinvikfjorden and Morsvik-
fjorden. Store Belgkjosen and Lille Belgkjosen have a common
entrance off the N side of the fjord, 10.5 miles NE of Hjartoy.
They are icebound in the winter. Vinkfjorden leads from the SE
side of Nordfolla 6.5 miles NE of Hjartoy; Stavfjorden extends
from its inner end.
The fjord is open toward the SW, with winds from the W and
8.14
SW. East gales are most frequent in the winter.
In Nordfolla, the tidal currents usually flow outward, but in
8.14
calm weather, if the tributary rivers are low, the current may set
into the branches with the rising tide.
Anchorage may be taken off Nordfold (67°46'N., 15°14'E.),
8.14
in depths of 14 to 18m, clay and sand. Anchorage is also avail-
able off Stavnes, 5 miles E of Nordfold, between two charted
6m patches. It is a well-used anchorage, but is exposed to SW
winds.
Lakselv—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth
LOA Draft
Lakselv Seakwalk
Concrete Wharf 20m — — 12.0m
Seawalk Pier — 15.0m 300m 12.0m 150,000 dwt
Pub. 182
Nordfolla may be entered by keeping the white sector of the
8.14
light on Helloyskjaer (67°37'N., 14°47'E.), astern, which will
lead between the dangers off Hjartoy and the NW shore. A
mid-channel course may be steered to the head of the fjord.
8.15 Sorfolla (67°32'N., 15°16'E.) extends SE from the E
end of Folla. Several smaller fjords extend SW, S, and NE from
Sorfolla.
Eidekjosen and Navelsfjorden have a common entrance off
8.15
the W side of the fjord, 4 miles within its entrance. Nordre
Oygardskjeret (67°32'N., 15°08'E.) lies in the entrance.
Sjunkfjorden extends 5.25 miles SSW from its entrance, 3.5
8.15
miles SE of Nordre Oygardskjeret.
There are anchorages in Sjunkfjorden, sand and clay, 3 miles
8.15
WSW and 4.5 miles SW from the light on the E entrance point
Leirfjorden (67°32'N., 15°37'E.) extends about 11 miles NE
8.15
from Sorfolla, 6.25 miles E of Sjunkfjorden. It appears to be
free of charted dangers in the fairway.
Storvika (67°31'N., 15°36'E.) affords good anchorage, in
8.15
clay and sand, on the S side of Leirfjorden, 2 miles within the
entrance.
Lakselv (67°22'N., 15°36'E.) (World Port Index No. 22295)
8.15
situated on the W side of Sorfolla, near its head, 8.5 miles S of
the entrance to Leirfjorden, has a smelting works. To accom-
modate cruise ships a hydro pier 3extends 300m to an offshore
anchorage for cruise ship passengers.
Sorfolla is well marked by lights. The white sectors of these
8.15
lights lead through the various channels clear of charted dan-
gers. See the table titled Lakselv—Berth Information.
Sagfjorden (67°38'N., 15°16'E.) is entered from Folla
8.15
through Refsfjorden N of the island of Prestmasoy, and from
Sorfolla through Masoysundet, E of the island.
Anchorage may be taken off the NE side of Prestmasoy, in
8.15
18 to 23m, sand, 1.5 miles SE of Mulneset, the N entrance
point to Sagfjorden. There is also anchorage 2.5 miles E of the
point, in 40m, sand.
There is an anchorage 6 miles E of Mulneset, off Sagfjorden,
8.15
in 22 to 30m, sand and shingle.
8.16 Indreleia leads from the vicinity of Helloyskjeret, 3
miles NW across the outer part of Folla, then about 10 miles N
across Brennvika and Andholmsfjorden, to the vicinity of Sild-
skjeret (67°48'N., 14°44'E.), in the SW approach to Gro-
toysundet.
Vessels may proceed from the vicinity of Helloyskjeret by
8.16
keeping the white sector of that light, which will lead SW of
Kjopmannen (67°39'N., 14°43'E.) and into the white sector of
Ola-Persoya Light (67°40'N., 14°43'E.).
Remarks
Size
— Cruise vessels.
Cruise vessels. No beam restrictions. Cruise ves-
sels tie up to two mooring buoys and passengers
disembark via an extending floating pier.
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
During W gales, breakers extend some distance W from
8.16
Kjopmannen and should be given a wide berth.
From Kjopmannen, steer in the white sector of Ola-Persoya
8.16
Light and enter Ytre Vettoysundet passing, E of the light.
When entering Ytre Vettoysundet, care is necessary to pass W
of the rocks, awash, lying from about 0.1 mile SSE to 0.2 mile
ESE of the light. Care must be used to pass E of the danger 0.3
mile N of Ola-Persoya Light.
Brennvika indents the coast about 4 miles from a position
8.16
about 2 miles NNE of Ola-Persoya Light.
Leinesfjorden, next N of Brennvika, is an E continuation of
8.16
Andholmfjorden. It terminates in two branches, Saursfjorden,
on the N, and Botnfjorden, on the S. An entrance channel off
Leines is well marked, but is suitable for use only with good lo-
cal knowledge. The many encumbrances may best be seen on
the chart.
From the vicinity of Ola-Persoya Light, the route of Indre-
8.16
leia leads across Brennvika to a position W of Skjaholmen
(67°43'N., 14°43'E.). The green sector of the light, bearing be-
tween 167° and 178°, astern, leads W of this islet.
When W of Skjaholmen, steer toward the rear range light on
8.16
Steinsholmen, 1.5 miles N of Skjalholmen, passing E of the
foul ground 0.5 mile SSW of the range light, then W of the
danger which extends 183m SSW from Steinsholmen
(67°44'N., 14°43'E.).
From Steinsholmen, the range lights in line 186°, astern, in-
8.16
dicate the fairway of Indreleia as it crosses the inner part of
Andholmfjorden. This track leads between the light marking
Leiskjer, 1.75 miles N, and foul ground marked by a perch
183m W of the light, then NNE to pass E of Sildskjeret, 2.5
miles farther N. There are many dangers in this area which are
best seen on the chart.
8.17 Grotoysundet (67°50'N., 14°46'E.) lies between Gro-
toya and the mainland E. The narrow shallow channel through
it connects the inner part of Andholmfjorden with Breisundet
3.5 miles NNW, and Vestfjorden.
Local knowledge is necessary in Grotoysundet and the use of
8.17
a local pilot is recommended for the largest vessels that can use
the channel. The channel is 30m wide, with a dredged to a
depth of 4.9m.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Grotoysundet are
8.17
strong. The tide levels at Grotoy (67°50'N., 14°46'E.) on the
NE end of Grotoya are 3m at MHWS and 0.5m at MLWS.
Depth gauges are placed at Hartvikgrunnen Light
8.17
(67°49.2'N., 14°44.2'E.), for northbound vessels and at Kat-
tlorten Light (67°50.6'N., 14°47.4'E.), for southbound vessels.
From Kattlorten Light, three channels lead NW into Breis-
8.17
undet (67°54'N., 14°43'E.). Helligholmleia, the W channel, is
the safest and deepest, but it is tortuous. Breisundet is about 3
miles distant from Kattlorten Light. Vestfjorden is entered
from this pass.
Skotsfjorden is entered about 1 mile NE of Kattlorten Light
8.17
through a rock-encumbered entrance, with a channel about
46m wide between the reefs on either side. This fjord should be
entered only by vessels with local knowledge.
Anchorage is available at the head of the fjord, in depths of 9
8.17
to 22m, and in the bay close W, in depths of 11 to 17m.
8.18 Flagsundet (67°55'N., 15°00'E.) leads S of Engeloya
205
and is entered from Indreleia or from the W through Breisun-
det. Skitenfjorden is its E continuation.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 25m and a navigable
8.18
width of 40m, spans the narrows between Alstadoya
(67°54'N., 15°11'E.) and Bogoya, 183m S.
The E end of Skitenfjorden opens into Sagfjorden.
8.18
Tides—Currents.—In Flagsundet, the tidal current flows in
8.18
the direction of the channel. Strong squalls sometimes blow
down from the mountains and are particularly severe about 5
miles within the W entrance and near Bogoya. The current is
strongest at Vikskjer. Flagsundet is limited to vessels with local
knowledge.
8.19 Skagstadsundet (67°58'N., 15°10'E.) is entered from
Vestfjorden between Foroya (68°01'N., 15°07'E.) and Orneset,
1.25 miles ESE, and leads 8 miles S and E between Engeloya
and Lundoya to the junction with Skitenfjorden, Okssundet,
and Sagfjorden.
Dangers are charted in the entrance E of Foroya and near the
8.19
center of the fairway about 5 miles within the entrance.
Okssundet (68°00'N., 15°18'E.) is entered from Vestfjorden
8.19
between Oksnesodden (68°03'N., 15°14'E.) and Dalshamaren,
a point 1.5 miles NE. It leads 7 miles SSE between Lundoya
and Hamaroy to the junction with Skagstadsundet and Sag-
fjorden.
There is usually a N flow of current on the E side of the
8.19
sound and a S flow on the W side of the sound.
Squalls from the mountains can occur during S winds.
8.19
The white sector of the light on Oksnessodden through N in-
8.19
dicates clear water in the approach from Vestfjorden.
Okssundet is deep; however, a mid-channel course will lead
8.19
clear of any coastal dangers.
By Karin Beate Nosterund/norden.org via Wikimedia Commons
8.19
Tranoy Light
8.19
8.20 Sagfjorden (67°58'N., 15°36'E.) is entered between
Bolsoygalten (67°57'N., 15°24'E.), at the S extremity of Hu-
soyvaer, and Skranstad, 2 miles SE. It extends about 13 miles E
and SE along the S side of Husoya and Finnoya. The fjord is
deep with a marine farm and submarine cables best seen on a
chart.
Anchorage at Store Lagmansvika (67°55'N., 15°53'E.), at
8.20
Pub. 182
206 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
the head of Sagfjorden on the E side, may be taken, in 15 to
17m, sand.
From Dalshamaren, the N entrance point of Okssundet, the
8.20
NW coast of Hamaroy trends 7.5 miles NNE to Selsoya
(68°09'N., 15°29'E.), then 3.75 miles ENE to Eggloya
(68°11'N., 15°38'E.), which lies close off the Tranoya peninsu-
la, the N extremity of Hamaroy.
Tranoy (68°11'N., 15°40'E.) (World Port Index No. 22160)
8.20
consists of a cove on the E side of the peninsula. The timber
quay is 74m long, with depths of 2 to 9m, and is situated in the
NW corner of the cove.
A foul bay, 0.75 miles SSE of Tranoy, provides a good an-
8.20
chorage, in 18 to 40m, sand, sheltered from W, but is open to N
and NE winds.
There is a pilot station located at Tranoy. Mariners are ad-
8.20
vised when approaching the pilot boarding place to pass well S
of the lighted buoy located at position 68°14'N, 15°36'E, which
marks a shoal area.
The pilot boarding areas are located in position 68°12.7'N,
8.20
15°35.7'E and position 68°18.4'N, 15°55.7'E. Contact should
be made on VHF channel 13 for boarding arrangements.
A channel leads W of Tannoya (68°09'N., 15°48'E.) into a
8.20
long inlet between Tranoya and the mainland 3 miles E.
Tannoysundet, W of Tannoya, leads S between Tannoya and
8.20
Hamaroy. A 10m patch lies in the fairway off the W extremity
of Tannoya. Local knowledge is required in the channel.
Presteid (68°05'N., 15°40'E.) lies on the W side of Presteid-
8.20
fjorden 3.5 miles SSW of Tannoysundet. This harbor is the calling
place for Hamaroy, the principal village on the island. There is a
timber quay, 26m long, with depths of 5.8 to 7.8m alongside. An-
chorage may be taken, in 30 to 50m, clay, NW of Presteid.
8.21 Tysfjorden (68°06'N., 16°15'E.) is the name for a
group of fjords which extends for about 30 miles SSE from a
position 10.5 miles NE of Eggloysa. The fjords are deep and
several rivers discharge into them.
The tidal currents usually set out of Tysfjorden, attaining a
8.21
maximum velocity of about 3 knots.
An extensive reef lies between Bremneset (68°17'N.,
8.21
16°09'E.), the NE entrance point to Tysfjorden, and Bavoya an
island 2.75 miles NNW. Storboen lies at the W end of this reef.
Bremnesskjaer (68°17'N., 16°08'E.), a drying shoal, lies on
8.21
the NE side of the entrance, 0.75 mile S of Bremneset.
Foul ground extends about 0.4 mile offshore off the SW en-
8.21
trance to Tysfjorden. Sandvikskallen, with a charted depth of
4.9m, lies 1.75 miles NW of the light at Korsnes.
The white sector of various lights lead from Vestfjorden to-
8.21
ward and into Tysfjorden.
Korsnes (68°15'N., 16°04'E.) (World Port Index No. 22140)
8.21
lies close within the entrance of Tysfjorden, on the SW side. It
is protected from the N but a sea is raised in it by a SE gale
which is known locally as a Tysfjorden Wind.
There is an angled timber quay, with two berths 25 and 20m
8.21
long, with depths of 3.9 to 7.6m and 2.3 to 3.9m, respectively,
alongside.
Bogvika (68°14'N., 16°05'E.) opens off the W side of Tys-
8.21
fjorden, 1.75 miles S of Korsnes. There is good anchorage, in
depths of 14 to 21m, clay, in Bogvika.
Bessfjorden is entered off the W side of Tysfjorden, 1.5
8.21
miles SSE of Bogvika, between Bessfjordneset (68°12'N.,
Pub. 182
16°07'E.) and Klubben, 0.4 mile SSW.
There is anchorage, in 12.8 to 14.6m, clay, 0.9 mile SW of
8.21
Bessfjordneset, and, in 20 to 22m, 1 mile SSW of the point, for
vessels with local knowledge.
Drag (68°03'N., 16°05'E.) (World Port Index No. 22120) is a
8.21
natural coastal harbor which opens off the W side of Tys-
fjorden, 8.25 miles S of Bessfjordneset. There is an angled tim-
ber quay in Drag, with a berth 23m long, with depths of 4.6 to
4.9m alongside. The timber quays at the feldspar quarry has
depths of up to 6.5m alongside.
There is an anchorage W of the light, with mooring rings, in
8.21
clay and sand. A slight swell sets in with N winds.
8.22 Hellemofjorden is entered from Tysfjorden and ex-
tends about 13 miles SSE from its entrance between Helland-
neset (68°02'N., 16°09'E.), 2.25 miles SE of Drag and
Hestneset 1 mile ESE. An overhead cable, with a vertical clear-
ance of 38m, spans the fjord at Hestneset.
A similar cable, with a vertical clearance of 240m, spans the
8.22
fjord 9 miles within the entrance.
The fjord is deep throughout, but on its E side, about 2 miles
8.22
within Hestneset, foul ground, with a charted depth of 1.8m,
extends 0.4 mile offshore. An islet lies about 0.3 mile off the E
shore 6 miles farther S, reducing the fairway to a width of 0.45
mile.
Skrovkjosen (68°15'N., 16°19'E.), a bay on the NE side of
8.22
Tysfjorden, is deep and free from dangers. Its N entrance point,
Solvneset, lies about 4 miles SE of the E entrance point of Tys-
fjorden. Brennsoyklubben, the S entrance point of the bay, lies
0.9 mile SSE of Solvneset.
Anchorage.—Anchorage with mooring rings, may be taken,
8.22
in 40m, clay and sand, off Ulvik (68°34'N., 16°20'E.) (World
Port Index No. 21970) in the SE part of Skrovkjosen.
Anchorage may be taken, in 20m, off Eidbukta, in the N part
8.22
of Skrovkjosen, 1.5 miles N of Ulvik. Local knowledge is re-
quired.
Haukoyfjorden opens off the E side of Tysfjorden, about 3
8.22
miles SE of Skrovkjosen. It is entered between Indre Skar-
bergneset (68°13'N., 16°12'E.) and Skjerneset, 4 miles SSE.
The fjord is deep and clear of dangers, however, Haukoygrun-
nen, with a charted depth of 2.5m, lies in the entrance 1.25
miles NNW of Skjerneset.
The inner end of the fjord divides into the N and S arms,
8.22
namely, Stefjorden and Tommerasfjorden. From the latter arm,
Fuglefjorden extends 2.25 miles SSE.
Stefjorden extends E and SE from the NE end of Haukoy-
8.22
fjorden. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway, and the
shores nearly everywhere are steep-to.
At Haukoya (68°12'N., 16°24'E.), on the S side of the en-
8.22
trance to Stefjorden, there is a berth at a stone and concrete
quay 26m long, with depths of 9.4 to 9.7m alongside.
Anchorage is available off Haukoya as shown on the chart.
8.22
8.23 Indre Tysfjorden is entered off Kjopsvik (68°06'N.,
16°21'E.), 3.5 miles SSE of Skjerneset, and extends about 8
miles E. It is deep and free from dangers to a position about 1
mile from its head. An overhead cable, with a vertical clear-
ance of 35m, spans the fjord 3 miles NE of Kjopsvik.
Depths—Limitations.—Kjopsvik has a cement berth that
8.23
can accommodate vessels 10m in length and handles cement
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
and breakbulk. The berthing length is 170m, including dol-
phins.
Hulloya, which rises to a height of 676m, lies on the S side
8.23
of the entrance to Indre Tysfjorden, 1 mile from Kjopsvik. An
overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 38m, spans the
channel from Hulloya to a point on shore close W of Kjopsvik.
Hulloysundet, off the S side of Hulloya, is deep and free
8.23
from dangers, except for the chain of rocks extending from
Hulloyneset (68°03'N., 16°11'E.), the SW point of Hulloya, to
Hulloynesgrunnen, 1 mile WNW. An overhead cable, with a
vertical clearance of 24m, spans the sound.
Grunnfjorden, entered from Hulloysundet, W of Kjerrklub-
8.23
ben (68°02'N., 16°19'E.), is free from dangers in the fairway. It
extends 8 miles SSE.
Kjerrvika (68°01'N., 16°20'E.), a cove situated on the E
8.23
side of Grunnfjorden, 1.5 miles S of Kjerrklubben, is the site of
a concrete quay 16m long, with depths of 5.5 to 8.5m along-
side. The fjord is generally free from ice.
Mannfjorden lies E of Grunnfjorden, from which it is sepa-
8.23
rated by a peninsula 2 miles wide. There are no dangers in the
fairway of the fjord which penetrates 5.5 miles SE. Three over-
head cables, with a vertical clearance of 48m, span the fjord 4
miles within the entrance.
Multind (68°00'N., 16°30'E.) is a conspicuous dome-shaped
8.23
summit, 853m high, situated on the E side of Mannfjorden 4.5
miles SE of Kjerrklubben.
There is anchorage at the head of Mannfjorden in a cove on
8.23
the N side, clear of a cable.
Ofotfjorden
8.24 Ofotfjorden Sis, entered between Baroya and Tjel-
dodden (68°23'N., 16°08'E.), 1.75 miles N. Its branches ex-
tend about 40 miles E to within 5 miles of the Swedish border.
Narvik, the most important port on the fjord, is situated 30
8.24
miles within the entrance. The prevailing winds are NE in the
winter and W in the summer.
The current in Ofotfjorden nearly always flows out, and it
8.24
may be strong during gales, especially along the land.
There is usually an outflow of current from the branch fjords
8.24
into Ofotfjorden, which can be strong and dangerous, particu-
larly at the mouths of the fjords during the melting of ice in the
spring.
A mid-channel course will lead from the vicinity of Baroya
8.24
to Hamnesholmen (68°25'N., 16°35'E.), 11.5 miles ENE. The
white sector of the light on Baroya, astern, will lead clear of the
dangers.
Efjorden is entered from Ofotfjorden by a narrow channel E
8.24
of Baroya (68°21'N., 16°07'E.) and extends 17 miles SE. The
fjord may also be entered from Vestfjorden by boat channels S
of Baroya. The entrance channels are encumbered with shoals
and are difficult to enter. No attempt to enter should be made
without good local knowledge.
8.25 Ramsundet (68°29'N., 16°31'E.) is entered through
Breivika, off the N side of Ofotfjorden, 8.25 miles ENE of
Tjeldodden. This channel leads about 6 miles N to join Indre-
leia in Tjeldsundet.
From Hamnesholmen, the fairway of Ofotfjorden trends ENE
8.25
about 6 miles to the vicinity of Lilandsgrunnen (68°27'N.,
207
16°50'E.). It then continues E for about 11 miles to Narvik.
Lilandsgrunnen, with a least charted depth of 2m, lies near
8.25
mid-channel about 1 miles off the N shore.
Skjomgrunnen (68°25'N., 17°13'E.), a rocky shoal with a
8.25
depth of 5m, lies on the S side of the fairway, 9 miles ESE of
Lilandsgrunnen. From a position 0.3 mile SE of Skjomgrun-
nen, a bank extends SE to the shore, 1 mile distant.
An ammunition dump is charted in the fjord; it is centered
8.25
about 1 mile SSE of the beacon on Lilandsgrunnen.
8.26 Kjeldebotn (68°25'N., 16°41'E.), a cove, opens off
the S side of Ofotfjorden 2 miles ESE of the light on Hamnesh-
olmen.
Anchorage, in a depth of 19m, clay and sand, may be taken
8.26
in the SE part of the cove. There is a timber quay on the E
shore with a berth, 28m long, with depths of 6.2 to 7m along-
side.
Ballangen (68°22'N., 16°55'E.), an inlet, opens off the S side
8.26
of Ofotfjorden, 6 miles ESE of Kjeldebotn. The inlet extends
4.5 miles SW. Litle Ballangen lies near its head.
Dangers lie on both sides of the entrance to Ballangen, but it
8.26
may be entered in the white sectors of the lights, and by using
the lights, in range 236°, at Litle Ballangen.
Litle Ballangen (68°20'N., 16°51'E.) (World Port Index No.
8.26
22050) has two quays, 29 and 13m long, with depths of 3.5 to
6.2m and from 4.5 to 6m alongside, respectively. Anchorage
may be taken off the quays, in about 10 to 22m, clay.
Bogen, an inlet, opens off the N side of Ofotfjorden, 3 miles
8.26
ENE of Lilandsgrunnen. Skogoya lies on the W side of Bogen;
two smaller inlets lie off its SE and S extremities. Liland lies
near the W entrance of Bogen, off the S end of Skogoya; Bo-
gen, a village, lies at the head of the inlet.
The white sector of Liland Light (68°28'N., 16°55'E.) leads
8.26
from Ofotfjorden into the entrance to Bogen. The port has a
timber quay, 100m long, with 11.6m alongside. There is a total
length of 77m of quay at the industrial works, with depths of
4.3 to 6.6m alongside.
Bogen Nato Jetty is located below Slettebakken Light
8.26
(68°31'N., 16°58'E.). The jetty also has a concrete vehicle
ramp.
Caution.—A submarine cable crosses Ballangen from a po-
8.26
sition close E of the quays.
The dangers in Bogen are numerous and may best be seen on
8.26
the chart.
8.27 Liland (68°29'N., 16°53'E.) (World Port Index No.
22010) is situated near the W entrance point of Bogen. The en-
trance leads N of Lilandsgrunnen and W of the islet lying off
the S extremity of Skogoya. Foul ground extends about 0.3
mile ESE from a position on shore S of Liland.
There is a berth at the end of a timber jetty, 30m long, with
8.27
depths of 4.6 to 6.7m on the E side and depths of 2.6 to 6.7m
on the inside.
Skjomen is entered from Ofotfjorden between Rosaneset
8.27
(68°24'N., 17°12'E.) and Einbaerneset, 1.25 miles E, about 7
miles SE of Bogen.
The fjord, about 13 miles long, is deep and surrounded by
8.27
high steep mountains. The innermost part of the fjord is mag-
nificent, with high peaks covered a good distance upward with
a lush deciduous forest.
Pub. 182
208 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso

During some winters, the ice conditions may obstruct traffic

8.27 cost. The pilots can be contacted by telephone (47-76-98-68-
severely. 10) and by e-mail (pilot.lodingen@kystverket.no).
An overhead cable and a bridge span Skjomen 1.5 miles
8.27 Pilots board in the following positions:
8.28

within the entrance. Each has a vertical clearance of 35m. The a. 68°12'42''N, 15°35'42''E (1.6 miles N of Tranoy
navigable width under the bridge is 150m. Light).
Sorskjomen (68°12'N., 17°19'E.) is situated at the head of
8.27 b. 68°18'27''N, 15°55'42''E (2.8 miles SW of Baroya).
the fjord. There is a quay at Hallarvika, close NW, 20m long, c. 68°22'54''N, 16°01'42''E (2 miles SSE of Lodingen).
with 5m alongside. Care is necessary to avoid the extensive Regulations.—Anchored and berthed vessels should main-
8.28

drying bank at the head of the fjord. tain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 14.
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
8.28

Narvik (68°26'N., 17°25'E.) Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph
1.1.
World Port Index No. 22030 Contact Information.—See the table titled Narvik—Con-
8.28

tact Information.
8.28 Narvik is situated on the E side of Narvikbukten, at
the entrance to Beisfjorden, 3.75 miles ENE of Skjomen. The
Narvik—Contact Information
harbor is a natural landlocked basin, almost completely sur-
rounded, and sheltered by high ground. Port Control
The port lies about 150 miles from the open sea. Commercial
8.28

VHF VHF channels 14 and 16

shipping traffic is heavy in winter, when the Gulf of Bothnia is
ice-bound. Swedish ore is exported through the port. 47-76-950375
Telephone
47-91-550375 (mobile)
Port of Narvik
Facsimile 47-76-950385
http://www.portofnarvik.no
E-mail hvakt@narvikhavn.no
Winds—Weather.—The “Beisfjorden Wind,” which occa-
8.28
Port Authority
sionally blows from SE, can raise a considerable sea; otherwise Telephone 47-76-950370
the wind is usually light. The harbor is always ice-free.
Tides—Currents.—Mean tides rise 3.2m at springs and
8.28
Facsimile 47-76-950384
2.4m at neaps. During May and June, there is a constant NW E-mail firmapost@narvikhavn.no
set out of Beisfjorden, which is estimated to reach 4 to 5 knots
during the ebb current. The direction of the current in the har-
bor is variable and may cause vessels at anchor to swing in dif- Anchorage.—Narvikbukten affords excellent anchorage in
8.28

ferent directions. any part of the bay, in depths of 18 to 29m. The pilot will
advise on the selection of berths. For further information, see
Depths—Limitations.—Berthing details are shown in the
8.28

the table titled Narvik—Anchorages.

accompanying table titled Narvik—Berthing Information.
Caution.—Several wrecks lie in Narvikbukten and may best
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels. Pilotage
8.28

8.28

be seen on the chart.

should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered
through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an additional

Narvik—Berthing Information
Berth Name Length Depth Remarks
LKAB Bulk Terminal
No. 3 202m 13.0m Bulk.
No. 4 202m 11.0m Bulk.
Iron ore. Can accommodate vessels up to 350,000 dwt.
No. 5 205m 26.0m
Modifications to the pier at Berth No. 5 were reported in 2019.
General Cargo Terminal
Nordkaia 84m 5.0m General cargo.
Pier No. 1 143m 6.0-8.0m Passengers.
Pier No. 2 82m 3.0-5.0m —
Ro-Ro/Railway Terminal
Fagermeskaia 237m 14.0m Ro-ro and containers.

Pub. 182
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 209

Narvik—Berthing Information
Berth Name Length Depth Remarks
Northland Terminal
Bulk Berth 280m — Iron ore. Can accommodate vessels up to 18,000 dwt.
Fish Terminal
Fish Berth 89m 4.0-6.0m —
Other Berths
Torgkaia 60m 4.0m —
Tug Pier 1 30m 6.0m Ro-ro ramp available.
Tug Pier 2 87m 5.0m —
Service Launch
30m — —
Pier
Oil Jetty 35m 7.5-8.1m Esso.
Private Quays 50m 5.0m Timber.

Narvik—Anchorages
Anchorage Depth Location
Vidrek (VICTOR) 50.0-70.0m 68°24'24.0''N, 17°09'54.0'E
Framnes North (FOXTROT) — 68°26'31.2''N, 17°21'30.0'E
Framnes South (GOLF) — 68°26'03.6''N, 17°21'36.0'E
Ytre Straumen (ALPHA) — 68°25'31.2''N, 17°23'48.6'E
Kleiva (BRAVO) — 68°25'16.2''N, 17°24'57.0'E
Herjangen One — 68°29'30.0''N, 17°25'51.0''E
Herjangen Two — 68°28'55.2''N, 17°25'41.4''E
Herjangen Three — 68°28'12.0''N, 17°25'06.0''E

A seaplane operating area lies in Narvikbukten and may best

8.28 Herjangsfjorden, on its E side, has a quay 60m long, with
be seen on the chart. depths from 7.4 to 10.6m alongside.
Anchorage is available for small boats close S of the quay,
8.29

8.29 Beisfjorden (68°24'N., 17°30'E.) is entered off Fa- clay bottom, with mooring rings.
gernes. It is spanned by a movable bridge, with a vertical clear- Rombaken (68°28'N., 17°36'E.) extends 5 miles E from its
8.29

ance of 6m and a navigable width of 11m. The bridge can only entrance S of Oydjordneset. Rombaksbotn, the inner part of the
be opened for passage at HW slack and LW slack. Passage un- fjord, extends 4.5 miles farther in an ESE direction.
der the closed bridge at other times must always be made with Halogalands Bro, a suspension bridge with a vertical clear-
8.29

the vessel stemming the current. Passage speed must be no ance of 40m, crosses the entrance to Rombaken in the vicinity
greater than steerageway. of Oyjordneset.
Signals for the bridge are, as follows:
8.29 Straumen (68°26'N., 17°42'E.), the narrows between Rom-
8.29

1. Green light—bridge open.
2. Red light—bridge closed.
A water pipeline has been laid across the approach to Beis-
8.29
fjorden. Warning signs are posted on both sides of the passage.
Ships must anchor to stay clear of the line between the two
warning signs.
Herjangsfjorden (68°30'N., 17°27'E.) is the NE continua-
8.29
tion of Ofotfjorden N of Narvik. The fjord is deep and clear of
dangers except on the SE shore, which is fringed by a reef that
extends 0.5 mile offshore in places. Skolten, a rocky patch with
a depth of 14.9m, lies in mid-channel.
Hamnvik (68°32'N., 17°34'E.), situated near the head of
8.29
baken and Rombaksbotn, is spanned by a bridge with a vertical
clearance of 40.5m. Three overhead cables, the lowest of
which has a safe vertical clearance of 32m, also span the nar-
rows. The passage is restricted to a width of 183m by a reef
which extends from its N side.
Rotvaer to Harstad
8.30 From Vestfjorden, the S approach to Harstad lead, in a
general N direction, through Tjeldsundet and Vagsfjorden,
about 33 miles distant. Sandtorgstraumen, 16 miles NE of Rot-
vaer, has a least charted depth of 7.9m in the fairway.

Pub. 182
210 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso

Narvik Harbor
8.28

8.28 Narvik—Iron Ore Terminal

The winds in Tjeldsundet, to a large degree, follow the direc-

8.30 mainland, whereas there are W winds in the entrances from the
tion of the sound, but are often unsteady and unreliable. Winds sea.
which set S in the sound, will, in the W part of Sandtorgstrau-
men, slack and back around. South winds are usually the most 8.31 Lodingen (68°25'N., 16°00'E.) (World Port Index No.
troublesome. 21950), 3 miles NNE of the light on Rotvaer, lies on the W side
In Vagsfjorden, there can be E storms in the fjord on the
8.30

Pub. 182
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 211

8.29 Tjeldsundet

of the S entrance to Tjeldsundet. c. 68°22'54''N, 16°01'42''E (2 miles SSE of Lodingen).

Lodingen Pilot Booking Center arranges all pilotage in Nor-
8.31

Lodingen Port Authority dland and Troms og Finnmar, from Norivk in the S to Kirkenes
in the N. The Booking Center can be contacted as listed in the
http://www.lodingen.kommune.no table titled Pilot Booking Center—Contact Information,

Depths—Limitations.—This is a sheltered harbor that can

8.31
Pilot Booking Center—Contact Information
handle vessels up to 3,000 dwt, with a maximum length of
120m and a maximum draft of 6m. See the table titled Loding- VHF VHF channels 13 and 16
en—BerthiInformation. Telephone 47-76-986810
Facsimile 47-76-986820
Lodingen—Berth Information
E-mail pilot.lodingen@kystverket.no
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Lodingen Ferry Terminal Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic Ser-
8.31

North 84m — Passengers. vice, see the section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph 1.1.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Lodingen Port
8.31

South 84m — Passengers. Authority—Contact Information.

Rodholmen Terminal
General cargo and con- Lodingen Port Authority—Contact Information
North 70m 10m
tainers. Telephone 47-76-986618
East 130m 8.5m Ro-ro and general cargo. Facsimile 47-76-986641
lodingen.havnevesen@lodingen.k
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or- E-mail
8.31
ommune.no
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodin-
gen Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken in the harbor, in
Vessels should provide updates on their ETA 5 hours and 2
8.31

8.31

depths of 11.9 to 14.6m, good holding ground.

hours prior to arrival at the pilot station.
Caution.—Care must be taken to anchor clear of the fairway
Pilots board in the following positions:
8.31

8.31

leading to the quay. A sea may set into the anchorage when the
a. 68°12'42''N, 15°35'42''E (1.6 miles N of Tranoy
wind is E of N.
Light).
b. 68°18'27''N, 15°55'42''E (2.8 miles SW of Baroya).

Pub. 182
212 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
8.32 Tjeldsundet (68°31'N., 16°10'E.), between Hinnoya
on the W and Tjeldoya and the mainland on the E, is the con-
tinuation of Indreleia from Vestfjorden to the N ports. It is nar-
row in several places and the channel is rendered intricate by
below-water rocks and shoals. The currents are strong and the
numerous whirls and eddies necessitate care.
8.32 The Tjeldsundet Bridge
Kongsviktind (68°35'N., 16°16'E.), a mountain, 988m high,
8.32
10 miles NNE of Lodingen, provides a good mark in the S en-
trance to the sound.
The dangers in Tjeldsundet may best be seen on the chart. A
8.32
bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m and a horizontal clear-
ance of 90m, spans the fairway near Langkvitneset (68°38'N.,
16°35'E.), 7.75 miles NE of Kongsviktind.
It is reported that in the narrows N of Tjeldoya, the channel
8.32
will only accommodate one large vessel at a time between the
buoys on either side.
Tjeldsundet is well marked by lights and other navigational
8.32
aids. The white sectors of the various lights will lead through
the fairway, but caution must be exercised to alter course to
pass the lights at a safe distance. It must be noted that some of
the white sectors will lead into shoal water.
Anchorage may be taken, in 14.6 to 22m, in the W side of
8.32
Tjeldsundet, about 1 mile NW of Nordstandskjaer (68°30'N.,
16°09'E.). Local knowledge is necessary.
Kongsvika, 1.5 miles SSW of Kongsviktind, affords anchor-
8.32
age, in 18.3m, to vessels with local knowledge.
Vessels waiting for the tide before proceeding through Sand-
8.32
torgstraumen, may anchor, as indicated on the chart, in 18.3m
or in 14.6m, 0.4 or about 0.6 mile NE, respectively, from Hol
(68°33'N., 16°24'E.).
The N entrance to Ramsundet lies S of Kalvoya (68°33'N.,
8.32
16°27'E.), which lies S of the W entrance to Sandtorgstraumen.
Vagsfjorden, the continuation N of Indreleia from the N end
of Tjeldsundet, is a large, almost landlocked basin. The W
shore of the fjord is formed by the NE side of Hinnoya and the
E side of Grytoya. The N shore of the fjord is formed by Senja;
the SE shore is formed by the islands of Rolla and Andorja, ly-
ing off the mainland.
Caution.—A firing area has been established in Vagfjorden,
extending from the SW entrance to a line between Klubben and
Engenes.
Pub. 182
Works are in progress (2022) in Vagfjorden E of Engene. A
8.32
submarine cable runs NE across the entrance to Harstad and
may best be seen on the chart.
8.33 Harstad lies on the E coast of Hinnoya, which is
fringed with islets and shoals to a distance of 2.5 miles. These
dangers must be passed to the E.
The tidal currents in Vagsfjorden usually set N with the fall-
8.33
ing tide and S with the rising tide. They may attain a velocity
of 1 knot at springs.
Langgrunnen (68°42'N., 16°38'E.), with a charted depth of
8.33
2.1m, lies on the W side of Indreleia, 2 miles N of the light on
Grashdmen. A reef, with a charted depth of 2.2m, lies 0.25
mile E of Langgrunnen.
Store Rogla (68°44'N., 16°39'E.), 95m high, lies on the W
8.33
side of the fairway, 3 miles N of Grasholmen. Lille Rogla lies
0.5 mile farther NNE.
Storholmen (68°43'N., 16°46'E.), marked by a light, lies on
8.33
the E side of Indreleia, about 1 mile off the SW extremity of
Rolla and 2.25 miles E of Store Rogla. Foul ground extends 0.5
mile E of Storholmen and just over 0.5 mile SW from Rolla.
In the S approach to Harstad, which lies 3.75 miles NW of
8.33
Lille Rogla, are Arnoya (68°46'N., 16°37'E.), 1.75 miles NW
of Lille Rogla, Laukholmen, and Tjuvholmen.
Smaholmgrunn, a rocky shoal with a depth of 5.8m, and Ly-
8.33
sbotn, with a depth of 0.3m, lie 0.6 mile and 1.0 mile NNW, re-
spectively, from Lille Rogla.
The many dangers which front Harstadhamn from Tjuvhol-
8.33
men N to Roykenesboen (68°51'N., 16°39'E.), 2.25 miles
NNE, may best be seen on the chart.
Vessels approaching Harstad from the S, after passing Lille
8.33
Rogla, should shape a course toward Stangnesodden
(68°48'N., 16°37'E.), steering in the white sector of the light on
that point to within 0.3 mile of the light. A depth of 15m is
charted in this area. The track then leads E of the light struc-
ture, where course can be steered W into Harstadhamn.
Vessels approaching Harstad from the E should steer on the
8.33
church at Trondenes bearing 265°, passing S of Magoya Light.
This track leads over a least charted depth of 10m. When the
8.33
vessel is about 0.3 mile WSW from the light, steer a course in-
to the harbor to the assigned berth.
Vessels from the N approaching Harstad, after having
8.33
cleared the dangers at the SE end of Toppsundet, should steer
in the white sector of Magoya Light to a distance of about 0.3
mile from the light; course of 212° will then lead into the har-
bor.
Harstad (68°48'N., 16°33'E.)
World Port Index No. 21610
8.34 Harstad is a coastal natural harbor situated on the NE
coast of Hinnoya. It is the second-largest town in N Norway. It
offers anchorage and piers for large vessels. The port is also a
base for oil exploration support.
Harstad Port Authority
http://www.harstadhavn.no
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 213

Winds—Weather.—The harbor is well-sheltered and is

8.34 which extends about 1 mile S from Harstad. The depths in the
generally unaffected by winds, except those from the NE, anchorage are from 5 to 40m, sand and mud. There is an an-
which give rise to considerable swell in Gangsasbotn. It is ice chorage in Samabukta, in 30m, mud and shells.
free. The prevailing wind is S. There is no darkness from May
3 to August 11 and the sun does not rise from December 2 to Harstad—Contact Information
January 11.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Harstad is from 2.2m
8.34
Harbormaster
MHWS to 0.3m MLWS. 47-77-001212
Depths—Limitations.—The harbor can handle vessels with
8.34
Telephone
47-90-126201 (mobile)
a maximum draft of 9.3m. For more berthing see tabled titled
Harstad—Berth Information. E-mail havnevakta@harstad.kommune.no
Aspect.— Trondenes Church, on the NW side of the harbor,
Port Authority
8.34

1.75 miles NNW of Stangnesodden, and the school 0.3 mile

SSW of the church, are conspicuous. The church, with a tall VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
gray spire, 0.2 mile WSW of the Harbor Office, is a useful 47-77-001210
mark for entering the harbor. Telephone
Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but
8.34
47-77-001212
may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at E-mail harstadhavn@harstad.kommune.no
an additional cost.
The pilot boards in the following positions:
8.34

a. 68°22.9'N, 16°01.7'E. (for Lodingen). 8.34 Lofoten—Northwest and North Sides

b. 69°19.5'N, 16°13.5'E. (for Andenes).
Regulations.—If the vessel is entering via Andenes, the ves-
8.34
sel’s ETA should be sent 12 hours in advance. If entering via
Lodinge, the vessel’s ETA should be sent 2 hours in advance;
VHF channel 16 is used at Lodingen and Andenes.
8.35 From Lofotodden (67°50'N., 12°50'E.), the W coast
of Moskenesoya trends about 18 miles NNE to Fuglehuk, a
conspicuous hill, 562m high.
Bergsneset (68°07'N., 13°04'E.), the NW extremity of
8.35

Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic

8.34 Moskenesoya, lies about 0.5 mile NNW of Fuglehuk.
Service, see the section titled Vessel Traffic Service in para- This stretch of coast is fringed with an almost unbroken line
8.35

graph 1.1. of precipitous cliffs. It is fronted by a sand bank, with rocks

Contact Information.—See the table titled Harstad—Con-
8.34 and shoals extending up to 4 miles offshore. Beyond this bank,
tact Information. the depths increase rapidly.
Anchorage.—There is anchorage in Gangsasbotn, an inlet
8.34

Hardstad—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Size
Stangnes Termainal
No. 1 32m 8.0-10.0m — — General cargo and fishing vessels.
No. 2 120m 10.0-12.0m — — General cargo, offshore vessels, and fishing vessels.
No. 3 60m 8.0-10.0m — — General cargo, offshore vessels, and fishing vessels.
Salijestad Terminal
Salijestad 270m 6.0m — — General cargo and fishing vessels.
Larsneset Terminal
Larsneset 215m 7.0-10.0m — — Passengers and offshore vessels.
Sentrum Terminal
No. 1 123m 5.0-11.5m — — Passengers.
No. 2 76m 2.0-8.4m — — General cargo and fishing vessels.
No. 3 51m 2.0-6.8m — — General cargo and fishing vessels.
No. 4 97m 2.0-8.4m — — General cargo and fishing vessels.
Gangsaas Terminal
Gangsaas 38m 14.2m 180m 35,000 dwt Dirty products.

Pub. 182
214 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
From Bergsneset to Eggum, about 18 miles NE, the coast is
8.35
formed by the islands of Flakstadoya and Vestvagoya. The
coast of Moskenesoya, Flakstadoya, and Vestvagoya are heavi-
ly indented by bays, fjords, and straits. This stretch is fronted
by a sand bank to a distance of 4 miles, with detached rocks
and shoals. The NW coast of Vestvagoya, from Skolneset
(68°15'N., 13°31'E.) to Eggum, 5.5 miles NE, presents a line of
precipitous cliffs. The sea breaks along the entire coast during
gales from between W and N.
Skiven (67°58'N., 12°56'E.), a mountain 850m high, is situ-
8.35
ated 0.5 mile inland, 9 miles NNE of Lofotodden. It is one of
the principal landmarks on the coast. Other prominent land-
marks are Napptind, on Flakstadoya, 8 miles ENE of Fugle-
huk; Horntind lying 2.25 miles NW of Napptind; and
Himmeltind, lying 5.25 miles NE of Horntind. Himmeltind is
easily identified from the W, appearing as two peaks; from N
three peaks are seen, with the one in the middle being the low-
est and sharpest.
Vaggen, close inland, 2 miles SW of Himmeltind, is precipi-
8.35
tous on its W side. From a position W of Eggum, the 430m
peak close S will be distinctly seen.
8.36 Langeskallen (67°57'N., 12°43'E.), an isolated depth
of 18.9m, lies 4 miles offshore, 7 miles NNW of Lofotodden.
Haraldskallen, with a charted depth of 27m, lies 3.5 miles
NNW of Bergsneset. These two dangers are the farthest sea-
ward along this coast. The coast should be avoided.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the vicinity of
8.36
Bergsneset usually set NE on the flood and SW on the ebb.
From Lofotodden to Bergsneset, there are no reported safe
8.36
harbors.
Hornneset (68°10'N., 13°20'E.), the NW extremity of Flak-
8.36
stadoya, lies 6.5 miles NE of Bergsneset. Skarvholman,
marked by a light, lies about 5 miles WNW of the point. It is
surrounded by foul ground to a distance of 0.25 mile.
An isolated rock is charted 0.5 mile N of the light. The many
8.36
shoal patches in this area are best seen on the chart.
The harbor of Ramberg lies between the NE side of Moske-
8.36
nesoya and the W side of Flakstadoya. It is the principal village
in Flakstadoya. A dredged channel, with a depth of 4m, leads
to the harbor area, which has a depth of 3.4m. The public quay
is 42m long and has depths of 2.5 to 3.5m alongside.
During onshore gales and heavy seas, breakers form N and
8.36
NW of Busholmen (68°07'N., 13°14'E.). Hornneset lies 4.25
miles NNE of Jusholmen.
Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken off the harbor of
8.36
Ramberg (68°05'N., 13°14'E.), in 10m, hard mud.
8.37 Eggum (68°19'N., 13°41'E.), the N extremity of Vest-
vagoya, lies 11.75 miles NNE of Hornneset.
The N entrance to Nappstraumen lies between Hornneset
8.37
and Skolmneset, 6.25 miles NNE. Steinfjorden indents the
coast between these two points.
Haesholman (68°14'N., 13°26'E.), a group of islets marked
8.37
by a light, lies in Steinfjorden, 4.25 miles NNE of Hornneset.
A bank with a least charted depth of 0.9m lies between the
point and the islets.
Faldet (68°12'N., 13°15'E.), an isolated patch with a charted
8.37
depth of 0.9m, lies 3 miles NW of Hornneset, in the W ap-
proach to Nappstraumen. There are other shoal patches charted
Pub. 182
in this area, which may best be seen on the chart.
Gapet (68°09'N., 13°28'E.), which leads S into Nappstrau-
8.37
men, is approached through the area of shoals and islets in
Steinfjorden.
From seaward, the white sectors of the lights on Hundhol-
8.37
men (68°10'N., 13°27'E.) and Haesholman, lead to Gapet.
In bad weather, with heavy seas, it is inadvisable for those
8.37
without local knowledge to attempt to enter Gapet.
From Eggum, the coast trends in a general ENE direction to
8.37
the NE end of Austvagoya, about 35 miles distant. The entire
coastal area is much indented by small bays and coves.
A considerable amount of foul ground lies off the N coasts of
8.37
Vestvagoya, Gimsoya, and Austvagoya. This stretch of coast is
one of the most dangerous parts of Lofoten.
From Eggum to Hoven (68°21'N., 14°06'E.), the NW ex-
8.37
tremity of Gimsoya, 8 miles ENE, there is a continuous line of
breakers during gales from between W and N.
Gimsoystraumen (68°20'N., 14°19'E.) is formed between
8.37
Gimsoya and the W side of Austvagoya. It gives access to Vest-
fjorden.
Hadselfjorden, separating the NE end of Lofoten from the S
8.37
end of Vesteralen, is important for vessels seeking anchorage.
It is practically the only place of refuge between Lofotodden
and Andenes, the N extremity of Vesteralen. The W part of the
fjord is deep, with no dangers in the fairway.
8.38 Hadselfjorden is approached between the coastal reef
N of Gimsoya and the numerous dangers extending W from
Hadseloya (68°33'N., 14°49'E.). A rocky shoal, with a depth
of 6.7m, lies near mid-channel, 6 miles NNE of Hoven. The
fairway passes S of this shoal.
Havboen (68°30'N., 14°28'E.), with a least depth of 0.6m,
8.38
lies on the N side of the fairway, 5 miles SW of the W extremi-
ty of Hadseloya.
Vessels proceeding through Hadselfjorden should keep in
8.38
mid-channel. When SE of Hadseloya, a vessel should steer NE,
passing E of Jaeva (68°32'N., 15°04'E.), a small islet, then into
the S entrance to Sortlandsundet.
Raftsundet, formed between Austvagoya and Hinnoya, is en-
8.38
tered from the SE part of Hadselfjorden, via Ingelsfjorden
(68°29'N., 15°14'E.).
Brottoya, a low island, lies in the entrance to Ingelsfjorden. It
8.38
may be passed on the S side or on its NE side by steering in the
white sectors of the appropriate lights.
Anchorage.—Secure anchorage may be taken off the E side
8.38
of Holdoya (68°27'N., 14°54'E.), an islet 2.25 miles S of the
SE extremity of Hadseloya. The anchorage is in 18.3m, mud,
and may be approached from the N by passing between the
reefs off Holdoya and off the islets to the E. There is a least
charted depth of 11m over a width of 0.15 mile. The anchorage
may also be approached from the NE. A submarine cable lies
close E of the anchorage.
8.39 Sortlandsundet (68°42'N., 15°26'E.) lies between
Langoya and Hinnoya. It is about 19 miles long from its junc-
tion with Hadselfjorden and the S end of Gavlfjorden, which
leads N into the open sea. The channel is deep and clear of dan-
gers in mid-channel. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of
30m, spans the channel in the narrows at Sortland.
Local knowledge is required in all the harbors and anchorag-
8.39
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 215

b. 68°12.5'N, 14°53.5'E (Moldora).

c. 68°35.0'N, 14°40.0'E (Dragnesodden).
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
8.40

Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph

1.1.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Sortland
8.40

Havn—Contact Information.

Sortland Havn—Contact Information

Port Authority
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Telephone 47-76-108260
Facsimile 47-76-108261
E-mail havnekontoret@sortland-kommune.no
8.39 Sortland
The fairway of Sortlandsundet continues N from Sortland,
8.40

es off Sortlandsundet. and narrows to about 0.4 mile between the shore banks about 1
There is an isolated unmarked depth of 7.6m, 5 miles NE of
8.39
mile N of the bridge.
Jaeva and a rock, awash, lies 1 mile farther NE. A light marks a reef on the E side of the fairway, 2 miles N
8.40

Vessels entering the fairway have only to keep in mid-chan-

8.39
nel when passing up the sound and should pass E of a 7.9m
patch lying near mid-channel about 3 miles SSW of Sortland.
8.40 Sortland (68°42'N., 15°25'E.) (World Port Index No.
of the bridge; a shoal, with a depth of 1.8m, lies on the W side
of the fairway, just over 1 mile NW of the light. From this
shoal, the fairway N to the junction with Gavlfjorden is free of
charted dangers.
Gavlfjorden (68°56'N., 15°22'E.), between Langoya and
8.40

21670) is the administrative center for the Sortland District. It Andoya, connects with the open sea off Anda, which lies 14.5
is situated in Langoya. miles NNW of its S entrance. The fjord is exposed N, and in
bad weather the sea breaks over the whole area of shoals N of
Gisloya (68°57'N., 15°16'E.).
Sortland Havn KF (Port Authority) The fairway of Gavlfjorden, which is clear of dangers in
8.40

http://www.sortland-havn.no mid-channel, is about 1 mile wide between the shore banks 3

miles SE of Gisloya, and 1.25 miles wide in a position 3 miles
Depths—Limitations.— The port can accommodate vessels
8.40
NNE of the same islet. The fairway is well marked.
with a draft up to 7.5m. See the table titled Sortland—Berth
Information Vesteralen
Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but
8.40

may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at 8.41 Vesteralen, the island group NE of Lofoten, comprises
an additional cost. For further information, see paragraph 8.1. Hadseloya, Langoya, Andoya, Hinnoya, and several smaller is-
Pilots board in the following positions:
8.40
lands.
a. 68°12.7'N, 15°35.8'E (Tranoy).

Sortland—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
Draft
Holmen Industrial Area
No. 1 126m 10m — Ro/pax, ro-ro/lo-lo, fishing vessels, and reefer.
Terminalkaia
T01 136m See Remarks 7.5m
T02 70m See Remarks 7.5m
Ro-ro/lo-lo, fishing vessels, reefer, and breakbulk. Continuous
T03 70m See Remarks 7.5m berthing length of 436m. Depths range from 7.5m in the S to
10.0m in the N.
T04 70m See Remarks 7.5m
T05 90m See Remarks 7.5m

Pub. 182
216 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso

The waters off the W coast of Langoya from Litloya

8.41
(68°35'N., 14°19'E.), at the entrance to Vesteralsfjorden, to
Frugga, 15.5 miles NNE, are foul and difficult, to distances up
to 4.5 miles from the shore. A shoal, with a charted depth of
1.8m lying 3 miles NW of the light on Litloya, is the farthest W
of these dangers.
in the vicinity of this coral reef.
8.42 Vesteralsfjorden (68°35'N., 14°32'E.), between Had-
seloya and the W point of Langoya, is continued NE by Eids-
fjorden and E by Langoysundet.
Eidsfjorden (68°40'N., 14°53'E.) indents Langoya to a dis-
8.42

The coast of Langoya NNE of Frugga is indented by numer-

8.41
ous fjords. The entrance to the various fjords are obstructed by
islets, rocks, and shoals, and it is dangerous to pass over them
even in moderately fine weather. Mariners are advised to avoid
this coast.
tance of 14 miles, and is mostly deep and clear in the fairway.
A depth of 3.4m lies at the W end of a shoal about 1 mile from
the head of the fjord. The innermost 2 miles of the fjord freezes
in winter and all the side fjords are frozen up.
Langoysundet (68°35'N., 14°55'E.), between Hadseloya
8.42

Andoya (69°05'N., 15°45'E.) is the farthest N of the Vester-

8.41 and Langoya, connects the inner end of Vesteralsfjorden with
alen group. From a position on shore E of Anda to Andenes, a the SW end of Sortlandsundet.
distance of 20 miles, the almost inaccessible coast of the island Langoya is connected to Hadseloya through Boroya
8.42

is fronted by a bank of white sand on which there are numerous
rocks. The various mountain formations are separated by vast
flat marsh areas; for this reason the mountain peaks will look
like islands when seen from the sea.
(68°34'N., 14°57'E.) by bridges. The vertical clearance across
the E end of Langoysundet is 30m over a navigable width of
80m.
There is anchorage in Langoysundet for vessels of moderate
8.42

The N part of Andoya is low and flat. From E and W, An-

8.41 size, in 44m, sand, SE of Dragneset, the N extremity of Hadsel-
doya Light will become visible before the rest of the landscape. oya. A 6m rocky patch lies 0.2 mile E of Dragneset.
Caution.—The Andoya Test Center conducts maritime
8.41 Boroysundet, off the W and S sides of Boroya, give access to
8.42

weapons testing. Details regarding the current firing practice Stokkmarknes.

times and danger areas are published on the center’s web site.
8.43 Stokkmarknes (68°34'N., 14°55'E.) (World Port In-
Andoya Test Center dex No. 21690), also known as Stokmarknes, is a natural coast-
al harbor situated on Hadseloya abreast the W end of Boroya.
https://www.testcenter.no The channels leading into the harbor are well marked.

Gaukvaeroy (68°37'N., 14°21'E.), an island off the S end of

8.41
Stokkmarknes Port Authority
Langoya, close N of Litloya, has sharp hills which are good
landmarks in clear weather. The hills on Langenes, at the N tip http://www.hadselhavn.no
of Langoya, stand out distinctly against Andoya.
The hills on the island nearest the coast are generally high
8.41 Depths—Limitations.—The controlling depth is 5m in the
8.43

and conical; it is difficult to distinguish them from those E until
quite near the coast.
The mountains of Andoya are easily identified as they rise
8.41
abruptly from low, marshy lands of considerable extent and
W entrance and 5.5m in the E entrance. Vessels up to 8,000
dwt with a maximum draft of 7.2m can be accommodated . See
the table titled Stokkmarknes—Berth Information.
Boroysundet, E of Stokkmarknes, is spanned by a bridge
8.43

from a distance appear as detached rocky islets. They are visi- with a vertical clearance of 15m.
ble up to 50 miles in clear weather. Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but
8.43

Caution.—An environmentally sensitive sea area, best seen

8.41 may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at
on the chart, lies offshore of Vesteralen and is centered approx- an additional cost. further information, see paragraph 8.1.
imately 7.5 miles NW of Frugga Light. Trawling is prohibited

Stokkmarknes—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Draft Size
North Terminals (Nordnesterminalen)
Cruise vessels, containers, breakbulk, and
Main 120m 8.0m 7.2m 8,000 dwt
bunkers.
Cruise vessels, containers, breakbulk, and
North 53m 8.0m 7.2m 8,000 dwt
bunkers.
South 60m — — — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Nord-Trondelag Terminal
No. 1 50m 4.5m — — Chemicals and breakbulk.
No. 2 50m 4.8m — — Breakbulk.

Pub. 182
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 217

8.43 By Ovuigner (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

8.43 Andenes

Pilots board in the following positions:

8.43 is filled with shoals and skerries.
a. 68°12.7'N, 15°35.8'E (Tranoy).
b. 68°12.5'N, 14°53.5'E (Moldora). Andenes Port Authority
c. 68°35.0'N, 14°40.0'E (Dragnesodden).
Contact
8.43 Information.—See the table titled http://www.andoy.kommune.no
Stokkmarknes—Contact Information.
Depths—Limitations.—Anenes is a large fishing station
8.45

Stokkmarknes—Contact Information that handles passengers and other general cargo.Vessels with a
maximum draft of 6m can be accommodated.There are a num-
VHF VHF channel 12 ber of berths inside the harbor, for more berthing information
47-75-719100 see table titled Andenes—Berth Information
Telephone
47-41218506 (mobile)
Andenes—Berth Information
Facsimile 47-76-164651
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
8.44 Anda (69°04'N., 15°11'E.) lies 2.5 miles N of the N Draft
end of Langoya. The islet is marked by a light equipped with a
racon. Flesan, a rocky patch with a least charted depth of 1.8m, Andenes Harbor Terminal
lies 2 miles N of Anda and Brakan, an isolated patch with a Ro/pax and
Ferry 16m 5.2m —
least charted depth of 2.7m, lies 2.25 miles NNE of the islet. ro-ro/lo-lo.
Vessels approaching Gavlfjorden from the N should steer to
Fishing and
8.44

pass E of Brakan. Industrial 275m 6.1m 6.0m

breakbulk.
Foul ground extends 2.5 miles N from the N end of Andoya,
8.44

about 26 miles NNE of Anda.

Bjerka (69°24'N., 16°08'E.), an isolated patch with a depth
8.44
Aspect.—Andenes Light is shown from a prominent tower,
8.45

of 8.5m, lies 4.25 miles NNE of Andoya. It is the farthest N of 40m in height.
the dangers lying off the island. Nordhavboan, an isolated It is reported that a church spire and a microwave tower, both
8.45

shoal patch with a depth of 5.8m, lies about 1 mile ESE of conspicuous, stand about 1 and 2 miles, respectively, SE of An-
Bjerka. There are other patches with similar depths charted in denes Light.
the area. Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but
8.45

may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at

8.45 Andenes (69°20'N., 16°08'E.) (World Port Index No. an additional cost. For further information, see paragraph 8.1.
21660), a town situated at the N extremity of Andoya, is the Pilots board in position 69°19.5'N, 16°13.5'E.
8.45

district administrative center. The harbor, which is on the NE Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic Ser-
8.45

side of the town and protected by four large mole installations, vice, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph 1.1.
Contact Information.—See that table titled Andenes—
8.45

Pub. 182
218 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
Contact Information.
Andenes—Contact Information
Port Authority
Telephone 47-76-115000
Facsimile 47-76-115030
Harbormaster
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
47-76-141113
Telephone
47-76-867933 (mobile)
Anchorage.—Moderate-size vessels may anchor about 0.15
8.45
mile ESE of the E head of the NE detached mole or in the en-
trance to the inner harbor. A prohibited anchorage area lies ad-
jacent to the coast close SE of the harbor and may best be seen
on the chart.
Bleik (69°16'N., 15°58'E.) is a small fishing harbor, protect-
8.45
ed by moles, lying about 5 miles SW of Andenes. A range
marks the entrance. It is reported that a conspicuous radio tow-
er stands about 2 miles ESE of Bleik.
8.46 Andfjorden (69°00'N., 16°03'E.), a large inlet en-
tered between the E side of Andoya and the W side of Senja,
15.5 miles E, leads in a S direction for about 22 miles to the
NW end of the island Grytoya; its continuations farther S are
known as Kvaefjorden and Gullesfjorden.
At Grytoya, Toppsundet, formed between Grytoya and Hin-
8.46
noya, leads SE into Vagsfjorden and Indreleia.
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Andfjorden are not
8.46
very strong and are usually governed by the wind, but occa-
sionally the N current sets toward the E side of the fjord and
the S sets toward the W side.
In Toppsundet, the tidal currents usually set E with the rising
8.46
tide and W with the falling tide, but with E and S winds they
often set constantly W, and with W and N winds they set con-
stantly E.
Caution.—Firing and bombing practice areas are es-
8.46
tablished in the N entrance to Andfjorden. Firing areas are also
established in Andfjorden between Leikneset and Meloyvaer,
extending seaward from Steinvaer, and between Saurabogen
and Meloyvaer, extending S to the N entrances of Risoy Sund
and Topsundet.
8.47 On the E side of the fjord are several groups of low is-
lands surrounded by rocks and shoals. Holmenvaer (69°18'N.,
16°45'E.), 14 miles ESE of Andenes, is the farthest N of these
groups. The Steinavaer group lies 8 miles SSW of Holmenvaer
and the Meloyvaer group lies 6 miles farther SSW.
Myrboen (69°12'N., 16°30'E.), an isolated rocky shoal with
8.47
a least charted depth of 6.7m, lies at the W end of Steinavaer.
Froholman (69°04'N., 16°19'E.), a group of rocks and islets,
8.47
lies 4 miles NNE of Grytoya. A rock at the S end of the group
dries.
Grotavaer, a group of islets and rocks with a depth of 4.9m at
8.47
its outer edge, lies close off the NW side of Grytoya.
Skarvhausbaen (68°57'N., 16°10'E.), a shoal patch with a
8.47
Pub. 182
depth of 4.9m, lies about 1.25 miles SSW of the 4.9m depth at
Grotavaer.
The W side of Andfjorden is relatively free of dangers out-
8.47
side the shore bank.
Myrflesan (69°06'N., 16°04'E.), marked by a light, lies 2.25
8.47
miles E of Andoya, 14 miles SSW of Andenes. It dries in plac-
es. A 4m isolated depth lies 0.4 mile E of the light.
Kinnholmen, an island marked by a light, lies 1.5 miles E of
8.47
Andoya, about 10 miles SSW of Myrflesan.
Risoysundet, formed between Andoya and Hinnoya, con-
8.47
nects Gavlfjorden with Andfjorden. The NE end of the chan-
nel, which is much narrowed by shallow banks, is entered 4
miles NNW of Kinnholmen. A bridge, with a vertical clear-
ance, of 32m spans Risoysundet.
8.48 Kvaefjorden (68°50'N., 16°00'E.), the S extension of
Andfjorden, is relatively free of dangers in the fairway.
Mefjordingen (68°55'N., 16°05'E.), an isolated 12.8m
8.48
shoal, lies in mid-channel 2.25 miles ESE of the light on Kinn-
holmen. Jabaen, with a charted depth of 8.8m, lies 2 miles ESE
of Mefjordingen.
Kasfjorden opens off the E side of Kvaefjorden. Bygdesun-
8.48
det opens E 5 miles farther SW. Godfjorden extends SSW from
Kvaefjorden; Gullesfjorden is the S continuation of the main
fjord. The inlets are free from dangers in mid-channel.
Ice will form at the heads of the branch fjords in the winter.
8.48
Mariners are cautioned that ice movement may be strong when
melting occurs in the spring.
Toppsundet (68°53'N., 16°23'E.), formed between Grytoya
8.48
and Hinnoya, is the farthest S of the channels which lead be-
tween Andfjorden and Vagsfjorden. It is easy to navigate but
heavy squalls may be expected.
Hestebaen (68°56'N., 16°16'E.), 0.35 mile N of Ytre
8.48
Elgsnes, the SW entrance point at the W end of Toppsundet, is
awash. Store Sandskjaer lies on the shore bank 0.45 mile off-
shore, 1.75 miles SSE of Hestebaen.
Vaskinnkviga (68°53'N., 16°26'E.), an above-water rock,
8.48
lies 0.25 mile off Grytoya, about 3 miles ESE of Store Sandsk-
jaer. The other dangers in Toppsundet are marked and are best
seen on the chart.
Kjeoya (68°52'N., 16°34'E.), an islet marked by a light, lies
8.48
in the SE entrance to Toppsundet. Shoals, with a depth of 7m at
their outer end, extend 0.5 mile SW from the islet.
Krakeneset, a peninsula, lies 1 mile S of Kjeoya. A shoal,
8.48
which partly dries, extends 0.2 mile N from the peninsula.
The island of Magoya, with a light at its SW end, lies close E
8.48
of Krakeneset. Roykenesbaen, a drying shoal, lies 0.75 mile
NNE of Magoya.
Vessels may transit Toppsundet by steering in the white sec-
8.48
tor of the various lights that mark the fairway.
Harstad to Malangen
8.49 Astafjorden (68°44'N., 17°00'E.), with its continua-
tions of Salangen and Loksefjorden, extends in a general NE
direction for a distance of about 25 miles. The fjord is entered
from the SE side of Vagsfjorden and is formed on the NW side
by the islands of Rolla and Andorja and by the mainland on the
SE. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway.
Several fjords branch from the SE side of Astafjorden. On
8.49
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
the NW side are Bygden and Mjosundet, which are channels
leading to Vagsfjorden. Mjosundet is narrow and there is usual-
ly a N setting, strong, tidal current, but it can be navigated by
large vessels.
A spit, with a charted depth of 1.8m, extends 0.6 mile SW
8.49
from the N side of the entrance to Astafjorden, and a reef, with
charted depths of 3m, extends 0.3 mile off the S side of the en-
trance.
Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, in about 29m, clay,
8.49
off the village of Tovik (68°41'N., 16°53'E.), 2 miles within the
S entrance point of Astafjorden.
8.50 Grovfjorden (68°42'N., 17°05'E.) lies about 5 miles
ENE of Tovik. This arm of Astafjorden is encumbered by rocks
about 2 miles within the entrance. A bridge, with a vertical
clearance of 4.9m, spans the fairway at the narrows about 3
miles within the entrance.
Gratangen (68°45'N., 17°18'E.), a winding arm which ex-
8.50
tends about 11 miles ESE from Astafjorden, is entered about 4
miles ENE of Grovfjorden. Its shores are steep and inaccessi-
ble, except at its inner end, and it is free from dangers in the
fairway. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 17m, spans the
narrows about 8 miles within the entrance. Gratangsbotn is
formed E of the bridge.
Bygden (68°50'N., 17°08'E.), formed between Rolla and
8.50
Andorja, extends NNW from Astafjorden to Vagsfjorden, a
distance of about 7 miles. The S entrance, 2.5 miles NNW of
Gratangen, is encumbered with islets and rocks, which can best
be seen on the chart.
There are several anchorages charted in Bygden, but they are
8.50
for small vessels with local knowledge.
8.51 Lavangen (68°47'N., 17°37'E.) opens off the E side
of Astafjorden, about 9 miles ENE of Bygden. The fjord ex-
tends about 9 miles SE and is free of dangers in the fairway.
The shores of the outer part of this inlet are precipitous, but
8.51
are less bold toward the inner end, where alluvial banks of con-
siderable extent have been deposited by a river, which flows in-
to the head of the inlet.
In Lavangen, drift ice is sometimes encountered towards the
8.51
head of the inlet.
Salangen (68°53'N., 17°34'E.), the continuation of As-
8.51
tafjorden is about 8 miles in length. Loksefjorden is the NE end
of Salangen.
Sagfjorden, on the SE side of Salangen near its head, extends
8.51
4 miles in a SE direction. It is entered E of Foroya (68°54'N.,
17°41'E.).
For the most part these fjords are clear and deep. The shoals,
8.51
which may be dangerous to shipping, are marked. An isolated
rock, with a depth of 5m, lies 0.6 mile SW of Foroya.
8.52 Salangsverket (68°55'N., 17°44'E.) (World Port In-
dex No. 21495) is a natural coastal harbor situated on the E
side of the N entrance point to Sagfjorden, 0.75 mile ENE of
Foroya. There is a concrete quay, 72m long, with depths of 7.7
to 9.2m alongside. Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 10m,
stones, between the quay and an islet 0.25 mile E.
In hard winters, ice can lie in Sagfjorden from Salangsverket
8.52
to Sjovegan, where the quays are blocked.
Sjovegan (68°53'N., 17°50'E.) (World Port Index No.
8.52
219
21510) is the administrative center for the Salangen district. It
is a coastal harbor protected by breakwaters, situated on the
NE shore of Sagfjorden, 2.75 miles SE of Salangsverket. There
are several quays up to 48m in length, with depths of up to 8m.
Mjosundet (68°54'N., 17°27'E.), formed between Andorja
8.52
on the SW side and the mainland on the NE side, is entered
from Astafjorden in a position about 3 miles N of the entrance
to Lavangen.
Mjosundholmen (68°53'N., 17°28'E.), an islet marked by a
8.52
light, lies in the SE entrance to the sound. The islet may be
passed on either side. A shoal, with a depth of less than 1.8m,
lies 0.3 mile ENE of the islet.
In Mjosundet, there is nearly always a strong W and N flow,
8.52
but after N winds of long duration it is weaker, and may occa-
sionally run S and E. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of
34.7m, crosses Mjopsundet.
From a position E of Harstad (68°48'N., 16°33'E.), Vags-
8.52
fjorden leads about 18 miles NE to the S entrance to Tranoy-
fjorden.
Vessels in transit of this part of Vagsfjorden should steer to
8.52
pass about 1 mile W of Engenes (68°56'N., 17°07'E.), the NW
point of Andorja, then steer for the N edge of Bergsheia
(69°03'N., 17°24'E.) situated on the island of Dyroya, about 9
miles NE of Engenes.
Tranoyfjorden (69°04'N., 17°19'E.) is entered between Ha-
8.52
geneset, the S extremity of Dyroya, and Stonglandet, a penin-
sula extending SE from Senja.
Indreleia, continued from the NE end of Vagsfjorden, has
8.52
two alternative routes leading into Solbergfjorden, known as
Tranoyfjorden and Dyroysunde. Tranoyfjorden is the principal
channel. Dyroysundet, formed between Dyroya and the main-
land, can be used by large vessels.
The Dyroy Bridge, with a vertical clearance of 17.6m, cross-
8.52
es Dyroysundet.
8.53 Tranoyfjorden, deep and free from dangers in the fair-
way, leads NNE to Solbergfjorden.
From Solbergfjorden, the fairway leads ENE to the junction
8.53
with Finnfjorden, then NW to Finnsnes, a distance of about 24
miles.
Bispeflua (69°01'N., 17°14'E.), which dries and is marked
8.53
by a light, lies at the S end of Tranoyfjorden on the W side of
the fairway, 0.75 mile off Stonglandet. Foul ground with sever-
al islets, including Leikangsoy, extends N about 2 miles from a
position 0.3 mile NE of Bispeflua. A reef fringes Hoyholmen,
an islet 2 miles N of Leikangsoy.
Solbergfjorden (69°08'N., 17°38'E.), formed between the
8.53
SE side of Senja and on the E by the mainland, is the continua-
tion of Indreleia from Tranoyfjorden. The fjord is broad and
free from dangers in the fairway.
The tidal currents in Solbergfjorden set N with the rising tide
8.53
and S with the falling tide.
During W winds, heavy squalls, which may blow from any
8.53
direction, are experienced near Klauva Light (69°11'N.,
17°58'E.). These squalls decrease as Finnsnes is approached
and it becomes nearly calm in Gisundet. If it is blowing hard
from S or SE, irregular winds may be expected, and violent
squalls may strike down from Kistefjell, a peak 5 miles NE of
Finnsnes.
From Solbergfjorden, the fairway of Indreleia leads NE be-
8.53
Pub. 182
220 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso

tween Klauva Light and Grunnreisaskjaer (69°11'N.,
18°02'E.), a rocky 4.9m shoal, about 2 miles E. From this shoal
the track turns NW toward Finnsnes, the S entrance to Finns-
nesrenna.
The approach to Finnsnesrenna, which is entered W of Finn-
8.53
narrows between Senja and the mainland, is entered abreast of
Finnsnes and leads N into Gisundet. Gisundet extends in a gen-
eral N direction for about 16 miles to its junction with Malan-
gen, off the NE extremity of Senja.
Gisundet (69°18'N., 17°58'E.) is well marked; the dangers
8.55

snes, leads between Storvikgrunn, on the W side, and Millom- and navigational aids, including a marine farm, are located
grunn on the E side of the fairway. They have least depths of 1.8m E of Finnsnes.
7.9m and 12.8m, respectively. Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set through Gisundet
8.55

The E part of the channel connecting Solbergfjorden and

8.53 with considerable strength, attaining their greatest velocity in
Finnsnesrenna is Finnfjorden, and the W part is Laksfjorden. the vicinity of Gibostad, about 8 miles N of the bridge.
At Storvik, in Finnfjordbotn, the NE part of Finnfjorden,
8.53 With the rising tide the tidal current sets N from the S en-
8.55

there is a poorly fendered quay 25m long with 6.5 to 7.5m
alongside. At Storneset, close SSW of Storvik, there is a quay
associated with the smelting works, 42m long with 13m along-
side.
Hemmingfjorden (69°12'N., 18°04'E.), about 1 mile NNE
8.53
of Grunnreisaskjaer, has a timber quay 31m long, with depths
of 4.5 to 7.5m alongside. The quay is in poor repair.
trance, losing strength toward a point 5 miles N of Finnsnes,
where it meets the S flood current from Malangen.
8.56 Gibostad (69°21'N., 18°05'E.) (World Port Index No.
21380) is situated on the W side of Gisundet. It is a natural
coastal natural with a packet boat quay, 59m long, with depths
of 5.5 to 7.5m alongside.
An area prohibited to diving, fishing, and anchoring is chart-
8.56

8.54 Finnsnes (69°14'N., 17°58'E.) (World Port Index No. ed N of Gibostad.

21490) is the administrative center for the Lenvik district. It is Gisundet extends about 8 miles N from Gibostad to Malan-
8.56

a natural coastal harbor situated at the SE entrance to Finnsnes- gen, the approach to Tromso.
renna. Sandholmen (69°25'N., 18°06'E.), an islet surrounded by
8.56

Depths—Limitations.—The main channel through Finns-

8.54
nesrenna and Gisundet has been reported (2014) to be dredged
to a depth of 10m.
8.54A secondary channel has been reported (2014) to have a
minimum dredged depth of 8m over a navigable width of
shoal water, lies on the W side of the fairway, 3.75 miles N of
Gibostad. The shoal water is marked on its E edge, about 0.3
mile off the islet. Other foul ground lies on the W side of the
fairway NNW of Sandholmen.
The white sector of the light on Slettneset (69°23'N.,
8.56

120m. 18°06'E.), 1.5 miles NNE of Gibostad, leads E of the dangers

The W channel is entered W of Finnsnesskjaer (69°14'N.,
8.54
17°58'E.), a shoal which dries, situated about 0.4 mile NNW
from the light on Finnsnes. See table titled Finnsnes—Berth
Information.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m, spans Finnsnes-
8.54
off the W side of Gisundet and into the white sector of the light
on Lille Rodbergsodden (69°27'N., 18°08'E.), 4.75 miles
NNE. A bight, about 1 mile NE of Lille Rodbergsodden, is
foul.
Prohibited Military Areas are located in the vicinity of Rod-
8.56

renna, about 1 mile N of Finnsnes. The white sector of the bergsodden and Skorliodden, and at the NW entrance point to
lights on the bridge leads through the channel. Gisundet.
Regulations.—Traffic is controlled from a signal station sit-
8.54 Aglapsbaen, a group of rocks partly awash, lies 0.5 mile off-
8.56

uated about 0.5 mile N of Finnsnes. shore 1.5 miles NE of the light.
Southbound traffic has right of passage over northbound traf-
8.54 Indreleia leads into Malangen through the broad entrance of
8.56

fic. Vessels with a draft of less than 6.1m use the E channel. Gisundet, N of Lille Rodbergsodden.
Signals.—The following signals, shown at the signal station,
8.54

indicate that passage is closed to northbound traffic: Andenes to Tromso

1. By day—Flag N of the International Code of Signals
over a black ball.
2. By night—A white light over a red light.
8.55 Finnsnesrenna (69°14'N., 17°58'E.), formed in the
8.57 From abreast of Andenes, the W side of Senja trends
about 29 miles NE to the seaward entrance to Malangen, the
passage leading to Tromso. Kvaloy is on the N side of Malan-
gen and W of Tromso.

Finnsnes—Berth Information
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Finnsnes Main Quay
Fast ferries, ro-ro/lo-lo, containers,
Coastal 169m 3.0-7.2m
breakbulk, and reefer.
North Quays
Building Materials 56m 5.7-8.0m Breakbulk.
Mack’s 67m 5.3-8.3m Breakbulk.

Pub. 182
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
Finnsnes—Berth Information
Berth Length Depth
Multi Use 78m 5.6-6.5m
South Quays
Timber Merchant 39m 3.9-4.8m
Both islands have abrupt declivities toward the sea, and are
8.57
fronted by banks, with islets and below-water rocks extending
up to 11 miles off the NW side of Kvaloy.
Two large banks, Sveinsgrunn and Malangsgrunden, with
8.57
depths of less than 183m, extend, respectively, to a distance of
25 miles W of Senja, and 35 miles W of the N part of Kvaloy.
Between the two banks, a fissure, with depths over 280m,
8.57
extends into Malangen and to a short distance from the outer
dangers extending W from Kvaloy. The approach to Malangen
is made with considerable danger in thick weather, even with
careful attention to soundings.
A vessel, having made the W coast of Senja between An-
8.57
denes and Kvaloy, with the island of Andoya bearing 180°, can
obtain a fix by means of the mountains on Senja. Vessels run-
ning the W side of Senja should not close to within a distance
of 6 miles.
Strangers will have difficulty in identifying this part of the
8.57
coast from the offing. When seen from a distance, the larger is-
lands appear to diminish those in the background, and on clos-
er view, to hide them altogether. At a distance, the islands
themselves lose their height and peculiarity of outline and ap-
pear to form a continuous mass, which is capped by so many
sharp peaks that considerable local knowledge is required to
identify with certainty any one in particular.
The most conspicuous points are Aldenes (69°20'N.,
8.57
16°0'E.), the N extremity of Andoya, and the N point of
Kvaloy, about 30 miles NE of the NW extremity of Senja. As a
rule the openings of the numerous fjords and channels will be
the most useful guides.
Aspect.—Kjerringneset (69°19'N., 16°55'E.), a point on
8.57
Senja 16.5 miles E of Andenes, is a good landmark when ap-
proaching the coast from W of Andenes. Maneset, Teistneset,
and Traelen, 3.75 miles N, 5.75 miles NNE and 8 miles NNE,
respectively, from Kjerringneset, are good marks.
At the N extremity of Senja is Kjolva (69°36'N., 17°30'E.),
8.57
416m high, which is especially prominent and can hardly be
mistaken from a position NW of Andenes.
Snefjell, a rounded snowy summit 653m high, about 13
8.57
miles S of Kjolva, and Kvennan, 967m high with pointed
peaks, about 15 miles SW of Snefjell, are also good marks
from NW of Andenes.
When nearing the coast NW of Kjolva, the opening of Oy-
8.57
fjorden, on the E side of Kjolva, will be visible. About 8 miles
SE and 7.5 miles ESE of Kjolva are Skinnkollen and Astria,
731m and 742m high, respectively, which are the most import-
ant marks for the entrance to Malangen.
In the vicinity of Kvaloy at Malangen, the island of Haja
8.57
(69°44'N., 18°05'E.), 486m high, lies about 12 miles NNE of
Astria. It can be distinguished from the neighboring islands
and hills, by its precipitous fall to seaward.
About 3 miles E of the summit of Haja is the summit of Ses-
8.57
soya, 657m high. About 8 miles NE of Sessoya are the pointed
221
Remarks
Breakbulk.
Breakbulk.
peaks of Vengsoya, up to 765m high.
From a position W of Auvaer (69°52'N., 18°00'E.), a group
8.57
of islets on the foul bank extending from the N end of Kvaloy,
the Alp-like mountains of that island will be seen behind the is-
lands in the foreground. The mountains bordering Ersfjorden,
together with Tromtind, 3 miles NE of Sessoya, and Blaman-
nen, 5.5 miles SE of Tromtind, are the most conspicuous.
Pilotage.—There is a pilot station at Andenes; 12 hours ad-
8.57
vance ETA is required. If entering by Lodingen, 2 hours notice
is required. The pilot boats guard VHF channel 16.
8.58 Malangen is entered between Hekkingen (69°36'N.,
17°50'E.) and Edoya, 1.5 miles NE. A light is situated on each
entrance point. This channel is the best approach from the SW
to Tromso.
Hekkingen Light is shown from a low tower on a wooden
8.58
house, 10m in height. A racon is located at the light tower.
Malangen extends about 13 miles in a SE direction to its
8.58
junction with Straumsfjorden. An arm of Malangen continues
SE for about 12 miles to Nordfjorden, which lies at its head.
Indreleia enters Malangen from Gisundet about 10 miles
8.58
from its W entrance.
Winds—Weather.—During N winds over Malangen, it will
8.58
often be calm, or there may be a light breeze off Greipstad
(69°31'N., 18°13'E.) about 3 miles NNE of the entrance to Gis-
undet. With a N wind out of Straumsbukta, 9 miles E of
Greipstad, and S through Malangen, it is often calm in Rystrau-
men.
During E winds out of Malangen, it is often calm in Stonnes-
8.58
botn, on the SW side of the passage, 4 miles SE of Hekkingen.
It is also often calm under these conditions from Asnes, 5 miles
ESE of Greipstad, to a position about 2 miles farther ENE.
During SE winds in Malangen, strong squalls are experi-
8.58
enced from S of Straumsbukta to a position about 3 miles SW;
these squalls are especially frequent at the SW position.
During SW winds in Malangen, irregular winds will be expe-
8.58
rienced from the NW entrance point of Gisundet, seaward.
During W winds, it is often calm in the neighborhood of the
NW entrance to Gisundet.
Tides—Currents.—During the spring season the, tidal cur-
8.58
rents set very strongly out of Malangen, independently of the
tidal currents close inshore on both sides of the fjord, where
they turn at the times of HW and LW.
During the summer and autumn months, the ebb currents
8.58
have the stronger set, whereas during the winter months the set
is more strongly into the fjord. The tidal currents set strongly
through the channel SE of Hekkingen, taking a W direction
with the falling tide.
Numerous whirlpools occur in Rystraumen when the tidal
8.58
currents are running at their maximum strength; when passing
through them great attention must be paid to the steering.
The tidal currents in Rystraumen set SW with the falling tide
8.58
Pub. 182
222 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
and NE with the rising tide, the turn occurring at the times of
HW and LW. They set strongly through the passage, attaining a
maximum velocity of 6 to 7 knots.
According to the latest observations in Tromsoysundet, the
8.58
tidal currents set S from about 1 hour 45 minutes before HW un-
til about 1 hour 45 minutes before LW, when they turn and set N
until about 1 hour before HW. At springs the velocity is up to 6
knots at the narrowest part, being strongest midway between the
turns of the currents. The average velocity is from 4 to 5 knots in
the narrowest part and from 2 to 3 knots N and S of this part.
During N gales the tidal currents set S almost continuously, the
slack lasting only for about 0.2 hour, when they continue to set S
with S winds there may be slack water for 0.25 hour, otherwise
the currents turn with no period of slack water.
Owing to the formation of the bottom, the tidal currents do
8.58
not run truly in the direction of Tromsoysundet. The N current,
for example, often sets in toward the mainland in the vicinity of
Krokelva, the mouth of which is about 3 miles NE of Stor-
steinnes Light; therefore when visibility is bad especially care-
ful navigation is necessary.
When proceeding S against the N current a vessel will al-
8.58
ways have the current on the starboard bow, and is therefore li-
able to go ashore on Tomasjordnes, about 1.25 miles NE of
Storsteinnes Light.
Caution.—Firing areas are established in Malangen from
8.58
Hekkingen to the junctions with Gisundet and Straums Fjord.
Dangers in the entrance to Malangen may best be seen on the
8.58
chart.
8.59 Kvaltyvan (69°39'N., 17°45'E.), a group of below-
water rocks with a least depth of 5.8m, lies on the SW side of
the approach to Malangen, in a position 3.25 miles NW of
Hekkingen.
On the NE side of the fairway, shoals, with a depth of 4.9m
8.59
at its outer end, extend 0.8 mile NNW from Edoya.
Within the entrance there are no dangers in the fairway, ex-
8.59
cept for a narrow coastal reef off Kvaloy.
Caution.—An ammunition dumping ground lies in Malan-
8.59
gen, with its N end situated about 2 miles SE of Hekkingen.
From Greipstad, the S extremity of Kvaloy, the continuation
8.59
of Indreleia from the E end of Malangen is known as Straums-
fjorden, with the narrows between Kvaloy and the island
Ryoya, known as Rystraumen (69°33'N., 18°43'E.), where the
channel has a least width of 0.2 mile between the shore banks.
It has been reported (2008) that tidal currents of up to 7 knots
occur at maximum flood and ebb. It is recommended that ves-
sels transit this area at slack water or at a speed of 15 knots at
other times.
Skallen, a shoal patch with a least depth of 7.9m, lies in the
8.59
Ballsfjorden—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth
LOA Draft Beam
Bergneset Harbor
East 130m 8.4m — — — —
West 70m 10.8m 177m 8.3m 26.0m
Pub. 182
W entrance to Rystraumen, 0.15 mile NW of Ryoya. A rock
NE of the light N of Ryoya is especially dangerous, as the SW
tidal current sets toward it.
The coastal reef extends about 0.3 mile SSE from Tisnes
8.59
(69°36'N., 18°50'E.), 3 miles NNE of Ryoya; a drying reef lies
E of Tisnes.
A shoal, with a least charted depth of 3.4m, lies 1.25 miles
8.59
NE of Tisnes.
The coastal reef which fringes the mainland on the SE side
8.59
of Tromsoysundet dries in places. A rock, awash, lies on the
reef 0.5 mile S of the bridge which spans the channel.
8.60 Tennskjerholmen (69°29'N., 18°19'E.) lies close off
the W side of Malangen, 3.5 miles SSE of Greipstad; from this
position Malangen continues SSE.
Foroya lies on the E side of the channel, 2.5 miles E of Tenn-
8.60
skjerholmen. A shoal, with a charted depth of 1.8m, extends
0.4 mile from the mainland, from a position about 2 miles S of
Foroya.
Tromsoya (69°40'N., 18°57'E.), 5.75 miles NNE of Ryoy, is
8.60
fringed by a coastal reef, which extends up to 0.2 mile from the
SE and SW sides.
Spilderoya (69°25'N., 18°29'E.) lies on the E side of the
8.60
fairway, 2.5 miles S of Foroya, and is surrounded by a flat
which extends 0.35 mile NNW from the N end and 0.7 mile
SSE from the S end. There is a 1.8m depth charted on the N
flat, and 4.9m charted at the extremity of the S flat.
It has been reported there is good anchorage, in 27m, 2 miles
8.60
SE of Spilderoya. It is protected from SE weather.
Malselvfjorden, entered 3.75 miles SSE of Spilderoya, ex-
8.60
tends about 8 miles S from its entrance. The S half of the fjord
is shoal.
Nordfjorden, the SE continuation of Malangen, is entered E
8.60
of Malsnes (69°21'N., 18°34'E.), which lies 4 miles SSE of
Spilderoya. Aursfjorden, which branches S from Nordfjorden,
is entered about 3 miles SSE of Malsnes. A reef extends about
0.5 mile N from the E entrance point of the fjord.
A cable, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans Nordfjorden
8.60
6.75 miles within its entrance.
8.61 Ballsfjorden (Balsfjorden) (69°32'N., 18°55'E.) is en-
tered between Balsnesodden, 1.75 miles ENE of Ryoya, and
Bergholmen, an islet 2.25 miles E. The fjord indents the main-
land about 25 miles, in a SE direction.
Winds—Weather.—It has been reported that it is dangerous
8.61
for small craft to approach Malangen from the NW during a
NW gale, as strong opposing currents may be encountered
NNE of Hekkingen.
Remarks
Size
Clean products, fishing, breakbulk, and
reefer.
24,783 dwt Clean products.
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
8.61
Ice.—During the ice season, Ballsfjorden is usually
8.61
obstructed for about 8 miles from its head; occasionally the ice
may extend N to within a few miles of the entrance.
Depths—Limitations.—Ramfjorden branches E about 3
8.61
miles within the entrance to Ballsfjorden. A pier, with a length
of 95m, is reported (2008) to be located at Ramfjorden
(Olavsvern). An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of
45m, spans the fjord close within its entrance.
Vessels up to 24,783 dwt, with a maximum length of 177m, a
8.61
maximum draft of 8.3m, and a maximum beam of 26m, can be
accommodated in the port. See the table titled Ballsfjorden—
Berth Information.
The shorn.reef fringing the W side of Ballsfjorden extends to
8.61
a distance of 0.5 mile in places; an 8.8m patch lies near mid-
channel, about 8 miles within the entrance.
A measured mile is situated on the E shore of Ballsfjorden,
8.61
with the N limit at Bergholmen. The N outer mark stands on a
skerry near Ytre Berg; the S outer mark stands near Holmeslet-
ta. The course to be made good is 162°/342° at a distance of
about 0.5 mile from the outer marks.
Caution.—Vessels approaching Malangen from W should
8.61
stand sufficiently far N to clear Kvaltyvan (69°39'N.,
17°45'E.) before altering course for the entrance to the fjord.
When the dangers NW of Edoya are abeam, alter course into
8.61
Malangen, keeping in mid-channel, and then into Indreleia.
The SW coast of Kvaloy should not be approached closer
8.61
than 0.3 mile, as many large boulders lie at some distance from
the shore.
Tromso (69°39'N., 18°57'E.)
World Port Index No. 21310
8.62 The city of Tromso is located on the islands of Trom-
soya and Kvaloya, and on the neighboring mainland. It is about
223
Tromso
30 miles from the open sea. Tromso’s municipality, which is, in
area, Norway’s largest, extends to additional islands and over a
large area of the mainland. The highest mountain in the munic-
ipality is Jiekkevarre, which is 1,833m high. Tromsdalstind,
which is visible from the town center, rises to 1,238m.
Tromso experiences 2 months of midnight sun from May 21
8.62
until July 23. The sun does not rise in Tromso from November
25 until January 21.
Tromso’s harbor has several installations:
8.62
1. Prostnesset, the old port, stands near the W end of the
Tromso Bridge.close to the center of the city, and is com-
posed of three sections:
a. Sondre Havn, located about 0.5 mile SSW of the
bridge, is protected by the S breakwater.
b. Indre Havn, which is close to and SSW of the
bridge, is protected by the N breakwater.
c. Polsehamna, the third section of the old harbor, is N
of the bridge.
2. The Grotsund Industrial Port stands on the mainland
side of Tromsoysundet, near the channel’s northern mouth,
where it meets Grotsundet.
3. The new port of Breivika stands about 1.75 miles N of
the city center and has container, ro-ro, and fishing industry
facilities.
Port of Tromso
https://www.tromso.havn.no/en
Winds—Weather.—Weather conditions seldom seriously
8.62
interfere with port working conditions. The harbor and ap-
proaches are ice-free.
Tides—Currents.—Strong and somewhat complex tidal
8.62
currents are liable to be experienced in the whole area around
Tromsoya, reaching a velocity of 4 to 5 knots in the narrowest
Pub. 182
224 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso

part of Tromsoysundet abreast the N mole. Depths—Limitations.—There are numerous berths in the
8.62

A marked, irregular countercurrent is experienced close to

8.62
the shore alongside the moles. In the vicinity of the bridge, the
current starts flowing in a S direction 1 hour 30 minutes prior
to HW and reverses direction 1 hour 30 minutes prior to LW.
port located on both sides of the Tromso channel. Vessels up to
40,000 dwt with a maximum draft of 10.4m can be accommo-
dated.
Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
8.62

The mean tidal range is 1.8m and the spring range is 2.4m.
8.62 Tromso—Berth Information.

Tromso—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Size
Breivika Area
No. 20 200m 6.5-7.5m 86.5m — — Ro-ro/lo-lo and breakbulk.
Breivika Terminal
21 103m 10.4-11.0m 98.9m — —
22 103m 10.4-11.0m 120.5m — — Cruise vessels and breakbulk. Contin-
23 103m 10.4-11.0m 236.7m — — uous berthing length of 412m.
24 103m 10.4-11.0m 293.6m — —
Cruise vessels, ro-ro/lo-lo and
25 150m 11.5m 134.4m — —
breakbulk.
Ferdigbetong Terminal
Center 27m — 116.7m — — Cement.
East 25m — 124.5m — — Cement.
West 23m — 81.3m — — Cement.
Grotsund Industrial Port
Ro-ro/lo-lo, project/heavy cargo,
Cargo 130m 22.0m — — —
bunkers, and breakbulk.
Prostnset Area
No. 1 90m 3.3-5.4m 58.7m — — —
No. 1 S 97m 2.3-4.6m 37m — — —
No. 2 50m 4.3-4.9m 58.6m — — —
No. 3 64m 3.0m 58m — — —
Cruise vessels, containers, and break-
No. 6 80m 3.1-5.7m 58.6m — —
bulk.
Cruise vessels, containers, and break-
No. 7 190m 9.9m 193.3m — —
bulk.
Cruise vessels and breakbulk. Contin-
No. 8 — 7.5-9.5m 228.3m — —
uous berthing length of 300m.
No. 9 62m 2.2-5.3m 40.6m — — —
No. 9 Brekken 25m 5.8-6.1m 81.8m — — —
No. 10 and 11 85m 3.2m — — — —
No. 12 64m 3.0-3.4m 35m — — —
Tromso
A/S Pellerin Jetty 12m 4.1-5.2m — — — —
Cruise vessels, ro-ro/lo-lo, break-
Barets Shipping 95m 7.1m 119.9m — —
bulk, and reefer.

Pub. 182
 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 225

Tromso—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Size
Mack’s Bryggeri 90m 4.6m 99.8m — — Fishing vessels and breakbulk.
Solstrand A/S 190m 5.9m 119.9m — — Fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
Troms Fryseterminal 100m 7.7-10.2m 119.9m — — Fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
Tromsdalen 65m — 123m — — Fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
Multipurpose and bunkers. Continu-
Tromso Bunkerdepot — 3.7-7.0m 150m 7.0m —
ous berthing length of 245m.
Bunker Oil AS-Tromso Tankanlegg
Nordolje (E-Side) 110m 6.8m 120m 6.5m 7,112 dwt Petroleum products and bunkers.
Shell Terminal
Aviation fuel, petroleum products,
Shell 45m 12.8m 200m 11.5m 40,641 dwt
and bunkers.

The Tromso Bridge, spanning Tromsoysundet, has a hori-

8.62 depth of 31m, from 0.5 to 1.5 miles N of the bridge.
zontal navigational width of 60m and a vertical clearance of
36m. The centerline of the channel is indicated by lights and a
racon and has a charted depth of 6.9m. Tromso—Contact Information
Pilotage.—Harbor pilotage is compulsory for all vessels
8.62 Port Control
over 300 gt. Regular route vessels with a fixed pilot on board VHF VHF channels 12, 13, 14, and 16
are not obliged to take a harbor pilot. Entry and exit pilots can
be obtained at Tromso Pilot Station. Telephone 47-77-661852
Pilot requests are required 12 hours before arrival and ves-
8.62
Facsimile 47-75-719400
sels may be berthed 24 hours.
Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but may be or-
8.62
E-mail havnevakta@tromso.havn.no
dered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an addi- Port Authority
tional cost. For further information, see paragraph 8.1.
Pilots board in the following positions:
8.62
VHF VHF channel 12
a. 0.8 mile ENE of Hekkingen Light in position Telephone 47-77-661850
69°38.5'N, 17°51.9'E.
b. On request only, in position 69°31.7'N, 18° 01.9'E. Facsimile 47-77-661856
c. 2 miles E of Fakkekjeila Light in position 70°06.0'N, E-mail adm@tromso.havn.no
20°12.9E.
d. On request only, 2 miles NE of Grotnes Light in posi- Port Captain
tion 69°52.4'N, 19°47.6E. Telephone 47-77-661856
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
Harbor Authority
8.62

Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph

1.1. VHF VHF channels 8, 12, and 16
Regulations.—Vessels navigating within the port area are
8.62

forbidden to proceed at a greater speed than required for their Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of the submarine ca-
8.62

safe maneuvering. Vessels of more than 500 tons must not ex-
ceed 5 knots between the S mole and Storsteinnes; however,
when passing under the bridge it may be necessary to use
speeds of 10 to 12 knots at times other than slack water.
Vessels arriving at Tromso and not having an allotted berth
8.62
must anchor in Polsehavn, about 0.2 mile NE of the W end of
the bridge.
bles which cross Tromsoysundet close S of the S mole.
8.63 Sandnessundet (69°41'N., 18°54'E.), between the E
side of Kvaloy and Tromsoya, is the principal channel leading
past Tromsoya. Vessels exceeding 7,000 tons displacement are
required to use it.
The narrowest part, between Langneset (69°41'N., 18°54'E.)
8.63

Contact Information.—See the table titled Tromso—Con-

8.62
and Sandneset, 1.5 miles NNE, has been dredged to a depth of
tact Information. 16.5m, with a navigable width of 100m.
Anchorage.—Polsehavn affords anchorage in 11 to 12.8m.
8.62
The Sandressundet Bridge spans the channel 0.75 mile N of
8.63

Large vessels can anchor on the W side of the fairway, in a Langneset. It has a vertical clearance of 41m over a navigable
width of 140m. The centerline is marked by lights and a racon.
Store Grindoy (69°38'N., 18°51'E.) lies on the W side of the
8.63

Pub. 182
226 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso

S entrance to Sandnessundet. A bank, with patches of 3m, ex- neset.

tends about 1 mile N and S from the island. A bank, with a 9.The dangers, which may best be seen on the chart, are
depth of 1.8m at its extremity, extends 1 mile SSW from Lang- marked by navigational aids. The white sectors of the various
lights lead through the dredged channel and to Indreleia.

Pub. 182
 Sector 9—Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden
Pub. 182

9.0 Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
SECTOR 9 — CHART INFORMATION

227

SECTOR 9
NORWAY—MALANGEN TO VARANGERFJORDEN
Plan.—This section describes the N coast of Norway from
9.0
Malangen to Varangerfjorden. It describes the outer route, and
inner route or Indreleia, and the inner fjords between Tromso
and Porsangerfjorden. The fjords and ports in the vicinity of
Varangerfjorden are also described.
General Remarks
9.1 Winds—Weather.—Weather reports for this area are
frequently broadcast. The area is often affected by travelling N
Atlantic depressions and associated fronts. It is, therefore, a
stormy area, especially during the winter months.
9.1 The climate in the landlocked places of the inner reaches of
the fjords and Indrelia is extreme and differs from the relatively
equable climate on the outlying islands. Therefore, during most
of the year, rapid decreases or increases in air temperature
when entering or leaving the fjords and Indreleia may be expe-
rienced.
9.1At Tromso, the wind is frequently from the S to SW from
October through April, and from the N to NE from June
through August. The mean force is between 2 and 3 in mid-
winter and below force 2 from July through September.
9.1At Elvebakken, near Alta, there is little seasonal variation in
wind force, and it is, most often, a force 2. From October
through March in this area, the wind is mostly from the S to
SE; during June, July, and August, it is mostly from the W to
NW. Gales (force 8) are infrequent. The highest frequency
during winter is one per month. Gale winds are practically un-
known during the summer months.
9.1At Vardo, from October through March, the wind is mostly
from the S to W; from May through August, it is usually from
the S to SE. The wind is strongest in January and February,
when the average force is between 4 and 5 and is lightest in
August, when the average is about a force 3. Gales (force 8) are
frequent in January and February. They occur during these
months on an average of about 6 days per month, and occur
during the months of May through August on an average of
less than one day per month.
9.1Fog at sea is not particularly frequent; however, visibility
may be severely reduced during periods of heavy snowfall. The
lack of daylight in winter adds to the problem of poor visibility.
9.1Pilotage.—Lodingen Pilot Center organizes and engages pi-
lots for vessels in Nordland and the Troms, from Rorvik in the
S to Kirkenes in the N. Pilots should be requested 24 hours in
advance. The ETA should be confirmed 2 hours prior to arrival
at the pilot station.
9.1See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
Ocean for further information.
9.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
9.1Several IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Schemes, best seen
on the chart, are located off the N coast of Norway. These
schemes have been established to maintain a safe sea route for
all vessels, especially for the transport of oil from the Barents
229
Sea region.
9.1The route applies to oil, gas, and chemical tankers of all siz-
es, including all cargo vessels of 5,000 gross ton and above on
international voyages.
9.1Ships on international voyages off the coast to and from Rost
(67°31'N., 12°07'E.) to Vardo (70°22'N., 31°07'E.) should
strictly follow the new routing systems; however, ships making
ports-of-call in Norway for supplies or services are recom-
mended to follow the intermediary routes to ports as portrayed
on the chart or as advised by the pilot or the VTS of the ports
concerned.
9.1Eastbound traffic should use the traffic lane on the S side of
each TSS; westbound traffic should use the traffic lane on the
N side of each TSS.
9.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
(TSS) in Norwegian waters, included the off Andenes,
Torsvag, Soroya, North Cape, Slettnes, and Vardo; see Pub.
180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
9.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
9.1Ship Reporting System.—The Barents Ship Reporting Sys-
tem operates in the Barents Sea off the coasts of Norway and
the Russian Federation beginning at latitude 67°10'N off the
coast of Norway and continuing N, NE, and E to longitude
33°20'E off the coast of the Russian Federation. For further in-
formation, see Arctic Ocean—Ship Reporting System in
Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
9.1Dangerous Wave Areas.—Dangerous waves may be en-
countered in the following areas:
1. Dangerous Wave Area No. 1.—A very exposed area
covering the NE coast of Finnmark extending from position
70°45.0'N, 30°00.0'E, off Batsfjorden, past Makkaur Light
and Vardo, to position 70°00.0'N, 30°30.0'E in the entrance
to Varangerfjorden. There is no protection from winds from
any N direction, resulting in heavy seas running close in-
shore with full energy. Currents are very variable in the ap-
proaches to Varangerfjorden and the increase in wind
strength often found around the Vardo headland adds to the
chaotic character of the sea conditions in this area.
2. Dangerous Wave Area No. 2.—In the vicinity of the
entrance to Tanafjorden, the sea bottom topography around
position 71°00.0'N, 28°50.0'E can give rise to very danger-
ous sea conditions. A deep trench extends from Tanafjorden
to seaward, with shallow waters on either side, causing un-
usually rough seas and tumbling breakers in this area. The
confused sea conditions may extend as far as 6 to 10 miles
out to sea from the entrance to the fjord.
3. Dangerous Wave Area No. 3.—A very exposed coast-
al area extends from Nordkinn (71°08.0'N, 27°39.4'E) to
Slettnes (71°05.4'N, 28°13.1'E), with relatively shallow wa-
Pub. 182
230 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden
ter with depths ranging from 27 to 70m. These conditions al-
low tumbling breakers to form and the sea is especially
rough when the wind and waves are from the NW and in op-
position to the current.
4. Dangerous Wave Area No. 4.—This area around posi-
tion 71°00.0'N, 24°25.0'E extends from Garpholmen
(71°00.3'N, 24°43.1'E) through Breisundet, then W of
Havøygavlen Light (71°01.2'N, 24°33.4'E) to Rolvsøyhamn
Light (70°56.8'N, 24°12.8'E). Depths are up to 150m but
with several shoals of 30 to 75m. In Breisundet, N to NW
winds cause rough seas. When these seas meet a W current,
tumbling breakers can be caused. Currents, mainly tidal,
may reach 1.5 to 2,0 knots. Near Rolvsøyhamn seas are es-
pecially rough with N to NE winds. In both cases, there is no
protection from wind or seas, which reach the coast with full
energy. About 2 to 3 miles NW of Havogavlen Light
(71°01.2'N, 24°33.4'E) are shoals with depths of about 30 to
50m, one of which is known as Gavlgrunnen (71°02.1'N,
24°27.6'E). Deflection of waves around the shoals and local
strong winds around headlands can cause particularly rough
seas in this area extending inshore towards Havogavlen. The
tidal range is large and sea conditions are at their roughest
during the ebb tide.
5. Dangerous Wave Area No. 5.—This area lies NW and
W of Soroya (70°38.0'N, 22°53.0'E) over an extensive shal-
low area with several smaller shoals and a steep slope into
deeper water. The current can be quite strong on the slopes
across the entire area. Several refraction centers are created
on the leeward side of the shallow areas with waves running
from NE to SW. The interaction between the waves and the
current can lead to breaking waves in the area.
6. Dangerous Wave Area No. 6.—This area N and NW
of Senja (69°20.0'N, 17°30.0'E) and Kvaloya (69°41.0'N,
18°37.0'E) consists of large shallow banks. Between the
banks the depths are greater than 400m while outside the
banks the slope is very steep. The current is dominated by
the NE coastal current and the ordinary tidal current, which
moves NE with the flood tide. Several refraction centers are
created in the area with waves from NE to SW. The interac-
tion between the waves from NE to NW and the NE current
can lead to breaking waves.
9.1Caution.—An environmentally sensitive sea area, centered
approximately 35 miles NW of Torsvag Light (71°15.0'N,
19°30.0'E), lies just inshore of the northbound TSS. Trawling
is prohibited within this area.
Outer Route—Malangen to Hammerfest
9.2 Between Malangen, the approach to Tromso, and
Hammerfest, about 100 miles NE, the outside track along the
islands leads to Soroysund. Soroysund is deep and unencum-
bered, and is the best approach to Hammerfest from seaward.
Because off-lying dangers extend well off the coast, and be-
cause during the summer months there is the likelihood of fog
and strong NW winds, it is recommended that vessels from the
S, bound for Hammerfest, or vessels that intend rounding Nor-
dkapp should navigate well offshore, and give the coast N of
Malangen a wide berth. Vessels should make landfall in the vi-
cinity of the island of Soroya (70°35'N., 22°40'E.), located
about 85 miles WSW of Nordkapp (71°10'N., 25°47'E.).
Pub. 182
9.2A chain of outlying islets and rocks, forming one of the most
distinctive features on the Norwegian coast, terminates about 5
miles N of the N extremity of the N island of Kvaloy.
9.2To the E, unmarked dangers extend as far as 20 miles N of
Vannoy, Fugloy, and Arnoy.
9.2Nordvestbanken, the area and position of which can best be
seen on chart, lies about 39 miles NW of the NW side of
Ringvassoy. Between the SW side of this bank and Malangs-
grunnen (69°58'N., 17°30'E.), the bank E of Ringvassoy, there
is a deep fissure, which has depths of over 183m at a distance
of about 0.5 to 2 miles from the outer dangers W of Ribbene-
soy and Grotoy. This section of the coast, as in the case farther
S, is extremely dangerous to approach in foggy weather, even
when giving careful attention to the soundings.
9.2There are numerous navigational aids, both on the islands
and on the coast in this region, to assist the navigator mark his
position. Openings to fjords and channels proves to be a useful
means of identification. However, mariners new to this part of
the Norwegian coast may have difficulty identifying landmarks
and visually locating separations between land masses from
offshore. When seen from a distance, a group of islands may
appear as one continuous land mass that is capped by many
sharp peaks.
9.3 Ringvassoy (69°55'N., 19°10'E.), the largest of the is-
lands fronting the mainland, lies with its W end about 25 miles
NE of Malangen. To the N of Ringvassoy are the islands of
Ribbenesoy, Grotoy, and Kvaloy. To the E of Kvaloy are Van-
noy, Fugloy, and Arnoy. Southeast of Arnoy is Kvaenangen,
which indents the coast to the SE. The large peninsula on the
NE side of Kvaenangen is a mass of mountains, with Svartfjell-
jokelen attaining a height of 1,218m.
9.3This mountain exposes flat snow-covered surfaces from
which glaciers extend down on almost every side to nearly the
level of the sea. The peninsula itself is indented by fjords on all
sides.
9.3Sandoya (70°02'N., 18°32'E.) lies about 2 miles W of Rib-
benesoy. The N end of the island makes a steep descent toward
the sea. A beacon stands on its summit.
9.3Sorfugloya lies about 3 miles NNW of Sandoya and on an E
bearing appears as an almost perfect pyramid.
9.3Ribbenesoy lies close NW of Ringvassoy and is separated
from it by Skagoys channel. The S part of Ribbenesoy is undu-
lating, and a white sandy beach about 2 miles from the N end
of the island is conspicuous. Mulen, the N extremity of the is-
land, stands out from the background because of its high,
black, and precipitous sides.
9.3Andammen, an island, lies close N of Ribbenesoy. A light is
shown from the NW extremity of Andammen.
9.4 Grotoya (70°10'N., 18°52'E.) lies about 1 mile N of
Andammen. The island has hills almost equal in elevation and
a somewhat precipitous descent on its N side. A light is shown
from its NE extremity. The island of Maasvaer lies 1 mile E of
Grotoy. A light is shown close off the SE coast of Maasvaer.
Kvaloy is about 9 miles in length with a least width of 3 miles,
and lies about 2 miles N of Ringvassoy.
9.4A conspicuous mountain stands on the N and S ends of the
islands. Helgoy, a smaller island which has a flat-topped
mountainous ridge, lies about 3 miles SE of Kvaloy. A light is
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 231

shown close off the SW coast of Helgoy.
9.4Vannoy, a large island which is flat-topped and precipitous
towards the sea, lies 3 miles E of Helgoy. Tvinaren, 759m high,
is a conspicuous peak on the N side of the island. The S part of
the island is mountainous, with heights of more than 914m. A
number of islets lie off the E and NE sides of the island.
9.4A marine farm is located in position 70°14'N, 19°56'E.
9.4Torsvag Light (70°15'N., 19°30'E.) is shown from a low
tower attached to a building, 10m in height, standing on Koja
Islet off the NW side of Vannoy. A Decca radio mast, 140m in
height, stands about 201m N of the light.
9.4Fugloya (70°16'N., 20°15'E.) lies about 4 miles NE of Van-
noy. When Fugloysveet, the channel W of Fugloy, is open, Fu-
gloya will appear quite detached and is then a very
conspicuous landmark, identifiable by its pointed summit
which is precipitous on its S and W sides. Fugloya Kalven,
which shows a light, lies close off the NW extremity of Fugloy.
9.4Caution.—A firing area lies N of Vannoy in the seaward ap-
proaches to Fugloysveet. An environmentally sensitive sea ar-
ea, best seen on the chart, where trawling is prohibited, lies just
E of Fugloya.
Arnoy (Arnoya) (70°08'N., 20°36'E.) lies with its N end 9
9.4
miles E of the summit of Fugloy. The island is very steep on its
N and W sides, and the cliffs of the N part of its W side are
dark red. A large and conspicuous radio tower is situated on a
summit in the SW part of Arnoy. Navigational aids are shown
on all sides of the island and can best be seen on the chart. Lau-
koya, an island, lies close off the E coast of Arnoy. A number
of islands and islets lie to the SE and S of Arnoy. Loppa lies
about 15 miles NE of Arnoy and on the S side of the immediate
approach to Soroysund. The island appears dark and low with a
gradual slope on its N side.
9.5Lopphavet (70°30'N., 21°00'E.), an area N of Fugloya, Ar-
noy and W of Soroya. The depths vary between 0 and 400m. N
of Fugloya to about 18 miles offshore; there are three shoal ar-
eas. East and W of the shoals, the depth is more than 300m.
9.5Northwest and W of Soroya, there is a major shoal area, with
several lesser shoals. The slope outside of these is very steep.
9.5The current may be strong at the slopes in the entire area.
9.5With the waves coming from NE to SW, several refraction
centers occur on the leeward side of the shoal area. Interaction
between waves and current may cause breakers in the area.
9.5Soroysund is entered between the SW end of Soroya and the
NW end of Stjernoy. The entrance has a width of about 8 miles.
The fairway is deep and free of dangers. Lights are shown on
both sides of Soroysund and can best be seen on the chart. The
narrowest part of Soroysund is marked by an islet which shows
a light and is known as Vatnholmen, and lies close off the SE
coast of Soroya.
9.5After passing SE of Vatnholmen, vessels should steer for Ha-
ja, 13 miles NE, giving the NW end of Seiland a fair berth. Af-
ter passing between Haja and the N end of Seiland, course may
be steered for Hammerfest harbor. The S extremity of Hjelmen,
bearing about 262° astern, and just open S of Haja, is an excel-
lent mark for making Hammerfest, which is not very easily dis-
tinguished.
9.6 Hammerfest (70°40'N., 23°40'E.) (World Port Index
No. 20920), the world’s N town, is located on the W coast of
the island of Kvaloy. The harbor is situated close NW of the
town.
Hammerfest Port Authority Home Page
http://www.hammerfesthavn.no

9.5 Silda (70°20'N., 21°45'E.) lies 5 miles E of Loppa
and shows a light from its N extremity. A light is also shown
from the S end of Silda. Maroy, an islet, lies close off the S ex-
tremity of Silda.
9.5Tides—Currents.—From abreast the S end of Ribbenesoy,
the tidal currents set NE and into the various fjords with the ris-
ing tides and SW and out of the fjords with the falling tides.
The NE current may attain a velocity of 4 knots. West of Sor
Winds—Weather.—This ice-free harbor is about 0.5 mile in
extent and is surrounded by mountains except in the SW to W
section. Winds may send heavy sea into this section.
Depth—Limitations.—The harbor is open year round and
can accommodate vessels up to 95,785 dwt, with a maximum
length of 300m, a maximum draft of 11m, and a maximum
beam of 49m.
Charted depths in the harbor are from 18.3 to 37m a short
9.6

Fugloya, the SW current is only occasionally discernible. distance offshore.

9.5At Kvaloy, the tidal currents set E with the rising tide and W Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
9.6

with the falling tide. The tidal current may attain a velocity of 1 Hammerfest—Berthing Information.
knot E of Kvaloy and about 4 knots at Flatvoer, the group of Larger vessels with deeper drafts may enter the harbor and
9.6

low islets extending about 2 miles N of Kvaloy. use the anchorage.

Hammerfest—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Sentrumshavna
Containers, cruise vessels,
No. 1 170m 8.0m 220m — 20.8m 40,000 dwt
breakbulk, and bunkers.
No. 2 75m 8.0m 119.9m — 20.8m 4,900 dwt Fast ferries and bunkers.
No. 3 50m 4.0-8.0m 32.5m — 10.6m — Fast ferries and bunkers.

Pub. 182
232 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden

Hammerfest—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
No. 4 75m 0-3.1m 35.3m — 10.6m — Fast ferries and bunkers.
Fast ferries, fishing, and bun-
No. 5 E 35m 4.0m 51.6m — 11.6m 750 dwt
kers.
Fast ferries, fishing, and bun-
No. 5 W 38m 4.0m 32.3m — 6.9m —
kers.
Fast ferries, fishing, and bun-
No. 6 50m 4.0-5.0m 40m — 11.6m —
kers.
Fuglenes
No. 8 70m 5.0-10.0m 90m — 12.8m 1,626 dwt Bunkers.
Chemicals, clean products,
cruise vessels, offshore, fish-
No. 9 145m — 220m 11.0m — 60,000 dwt
ing, multipurpose, and bun-
kers. Beam unrestrictive.
Offshore, fishing, and bun-
No. 10 130m 11.0m 50m — 12.0m 1,050 dwt
kers.
No. 11 65m 6-8m 58.6m — 11.0m 1,066 dwt Fishing.
No. 12 140m 5.0m 55m — — — Fishing and bunkers.
No. 20 40m 5.0m 55m — — — Fishing and bunkers.
No. 21 70m 5.7m 120m — 20.8m 7,102 dwt Salt, breakbulk, and bunkers.
No. 22 N 75m 5.9m 32.3m — 6.9m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
No. 22 S 30m 5.9m 32.3m — 6.9m — Bunkers.
Bulk, ro-ro, breakbulk, and
No. 23 60m 6.0m 119.9m — 20.8m 4,900 dwt
bunkers.
Polarbase
Cement, breakbulk, and bun-
No. 71 290m 10.0m 200m — 22.0m 60,000 dwt
kers.
No. 75 90m 12.0m 109.6m — 14.9m 7,569 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
No. 91 65m 4.5m 39.4m — 9.9m 400 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
Snohvit LNG Terminal (Melkoya Island)
Snohvit Condensates, LNG, and LPG.
123m 16.2m 300m — 4.09m 95,785 dwt
No. 50 Gas capacity of 140,000m3.
Stornes
Equinor — 10.0m 213m — — 33,000 dwt Closed. Bunkers.

9.6Aspect—Landmarks.—A light is shown from the head of a Vessel Traffic Service.—The Hammerfest VTS Area is a
9.6

breakwater which extends SE from the end of Fuglenes. A light
is shown on the mole on the SE side of the harbor entrance.
9.6Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered
through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodingen
sub-system of the NOR VTS Area. Participation is mandatory
for all Category 1 and Category 2 vessels carrying liquid haz-
ardous and/or polluting bulk cargo).
Category 1 and Category 2 vessels must submit a Notice of
9.6

Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
9.6The pilot boards off Akkarfjordnaeringen in position
70°47.0'N, 23°32.2'E. Due to weather conditions, vessels are
allowed to continue to pick up the pilot in position 70°40.5'N,
23°30.0'E; this is the most-used position.
9.6The harbor pilot boards at the harbor entrance.
ETA and obtain permission from NOR VTS, as follows:
1. At least 6 hours prior to entering the VTS area (24
hours for vessels which require extraordinary safety mea-
sures or planning).
2. When/if the vessel wishes to change its route in rela-
tion to what has been decided or agreed to with the VTS

Pub. 182
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 233

9.6 By Clemensfranz (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

9.6 Hammerfest

Center. This also applies to stops en route. Sailing Plan or what has been previously agreed with the
3. Before a vessel departs from a quay or anchorage. VTS center.
9.6The Notice of ETA should contain the following informa- 3. Immediately after mooring or anchoring the vessel.
tion: 4. As soon as possible if the vessel suffers an accident.
1. Vessel’s name and call sign. 5. At least 1 hour before leaving a berth or anchorage.
2. Vessel’s position at time of sending the Notice of For details on NOR VTS, see the section titled Vessel Traffic
9.6

ETA. Service in paragraph 1.1.

3. Planned route and port of destination. Contact Information.—See the table titled Hammerfest—
9.6

4. The ETA at the VTS Area and the ETA at the port, Contact Information.
mooring, or anchorage in the VTS Area.
5. The ETD from a port, mooring, or anchorage for ves- Hammerfest—Contact Information
sels already within the VTS Area.
6. Name, address, and telephone number of the vessel’s Port Authority
shipbroker or agent in Norway, if applicable. Telephone 47-78-407400
9.6The Notice of ETA should be submitted in writing, but will
Facsimile 47-78-407401
also be accepted by VHF.
9.6Category 1 and Category 2 vessels must report to NOR VTS, E-mail post@hammerfest.havn.no
via VHF, as follows:
Harbormaster
1. At least 1 hour before entering the VTS Area.
2. As soon as possible if a vessel makes a change to its VHF VHF channels 12 and 16

Pub. 182
234 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden

Hammerfest—Contact Information maximum capacity of 38,000m3.

3. Condensate vessels—up to 50,000 dwt, with a maxi-
Telephone 47-78-407402 mum length of 180m.
Facsimile 47-78-407403
Berthing Restrictions and Tug Requirements
E-mail harbour@hammerfest.havn.no
Vardo VTS Center Vessel size Maximum Maximum Number of
(up to) wind speed wave height tugs
VHF VHF channels 16 and 71 (NOR VTS)
15,000m3 35 knots 1.0m 1
Telephone 47-78-989898
Facsimile 47-78-989899 30,000m3 31 knots 1.0m 2

E-mail nor.vts@kystverket.no 60,000m3 29 knots 1.5m 3

No restric-
9.6Anchorage.—Large vessels may ride securely, in depths of 160,000m3 24 knots
tions
3
27.4 to 45.7m, off the SE side of Fuglenes, which is the best
anchorage in the harbor. Five mooring buoys for securing the Construction Jetty, at the S end of the island, is used for the
9.7

stern lines of vessels at anchor, are located in well-sheltered
positions on both sides of the harbor. Anchoring is appointed
by a state pilot or a harbor pilot.
9.6The smaller inner harbor can accommodate a number of
handling of dry cargo. It has a safe berthing depth of 10m. Ves-
sels over 120m long will not be allowed to remain alongside
the pier while LNG is being loaded at Product Jetty.
All vessels are required to have a minimum under-keel clear-
9.7

moderate-sized vessels. Although it is exposed to W winds, the ance of 1.5m.

harbor is secure. Depths of 9.1 to 31m are found in this anchor- Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
9.7

age. Vessels making a long stay should anchor off the SE side dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodin-
of Fuglenes where it is more protected and clear of harbor traf- gen Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
fic. Pilots board, as follows:
9.7

1. Vessels greater than 20,000 gross tons—about 20

9.7 Melkoya LNG Terminal (Hammerfest LNG Termi-
nal) (70°41'N., 23°35'E.) is located on Melkoya, about 1.75
miles NW of Hammerfest. Berthing facilities are on the SE
side of the island.
Depths—Limitations.—Product Jetty is 125m long, with a
9.7
miles W of Fruholmen Light in position 71°05.0'N,
23°27.0'E (by helicopter) or in position 70°38.0'N, 21°13.3'E
(Lopphavet, by helicopter).
2. Other vessels—about 1.5 miles NE of the entrance to

Akkarfjorden in position 70°47.0'N, 23°32.0'E. (by pilot ves-

least depth alongside of 16.2m. Vessel limitations are, as fol- sel).
lows: Regulations.—Vessels are required to notify the terminal of
9.7

1. LNG vessels—a maximum length of 300m, with a their ETA, via their agent, as listed in the table titled
maximum capacity of 160,000m3. Melkoya—ETA Reporting Requirements.
2. LPG vessels—a maximum length of 300m, with a

Melkoya—ETA Reporting Requirements

LNG Vessels
Not less than 8 days in advance or
upon departure from the last dis-
charge port if less than 8 days dis-
tant.
Ninety-six (96) hours prior to arriv-
al. If the ETA changes by more than
9 hours, the terminal must be ad-
vised immediately.
Forty-eight (48) hours prior to ar-
rival. If the ETA changes by more
than 6 hours, the terminal must be
advised immediately.
Twenty-four (24) hours prior to ar-
rival. If the ETA changes by more
than 3 hours, the terminal must be
advised immediately.
Five (5) hours prior to arrival.
Condensate Vessels (oil tankers)
— —
Not less than 96 hours prior to ar-
rival.
Forty-eight (48) hours prior to ar-
rival. If the ETA changes by more
than 6 hours, the terminal must be
advised immediately.
Twenty-four (24) hours prior to ar-
rival. If the ETA changes by more
than 3 hours, the terminal must be
advised immediately.
Five (5) hours prior to arrival.
LPG Vessels
Not less than 96 hours prior to ar-
rival.
Forty-eight (48) hours prior to ar-
rival. If the ETA changes by more
than 6 hours, the terminal must be
advised immediately.
Twenty-four (24) hours prior to ar-
rival. If the ETA changes by more
than 3 hours, the terminal must be
advised immediately.
Five (5) hours prior to arrival.

Pub. 182
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 235

9.7The ETA messages should contain the following informa- are required to remain at least 12 miles from the terminal.
tion: Vessels are not allowed to approach the terminal if the visi-
9.7

1. Vessel name. bility is less than 1 mile.

2. Call sign. Vessels will not be permitted to sail if the winds speeds are
9.7

3. Nationality. in excess of 29 knots.

4. Beam, gross tonnage, and loa.
5. Draft. Melkoya—Contact Information
6. Type of cargo.
7. Destination. Call sign Hammerfest LNG
8. Purpose of call. VHF VHF channel 11
9. ETA at pilot boarding position or ETD from harbor.
10. Whether one or two pilots required. 47-78-404209
Telephone
11. IMO number (if any). 47-78-404100 (switchboard)
12. Crew and passengers (including master’s name and
Web site https://www.equinor.com/en
nationality, crew size, etc.).
13. Cargo and bunker fuel (UN number, quality of haz-
ardous and polluting cargo, type, quantity of bunker fuel, Contact Information.—See the table titled Melkoya—
9.7

etc.). Contact Information.

14. Details of passage (last port-of-call, next port-of-call, Directions.—From a position about 1.25 miles NE of Haja
9.7

etc.). Light (70°39.3'N., 23°27.8”E.), the track leads 2 miles ENE to

15. Details related to pilotage requests and Pilotage Ex- the vicinity of the berths.
emption Certificate. Caution.—A safety zone, into which only authorized ves-
9.7

16. Agent or operator (Norwegian contact). sels may enter, surrounds the terminal and is bounded by lines
17. Shipping company (name and address). joining the following positions:
9.7All vessels shall request clearance from the terminal upon ar- a. 70°41'55.8''N, 23°37'22.8''E. (shore)
rival using VHF channel 11, via the Port Operator Duty Tele- b. 70°41'52.2''N, 23°35'49.8''E.
phone (47-47-659957) or via the agent. c. 70°40'53.4''N, 23°34'21.0''E.
9.7Only two large LNG/Condensate vessels can anchor simulta- d. 70°40'37.2''N, 23°35'23.4''E.
neously in the anchorage area. If there is a vessel already at the e. 70°40'51.0''N, 23°38'11.4''E. (shore)
terminal, only one vessel is permitted in the anchorage area. A precautionary area obligates traffic crossing the main
9.7

All vessels en route to the terminal in excess of these vessels route to Melkoya to navigate with care.

9.7 Altafjorden

Pub. 182
236 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden

Indreleia—Tromso to Hammerfest
9.8 From Tromso, the fairway of Indreleia continues NE
to the W approach to Soroysund, and then leads E and NE
through Soroysund to Hammerfest. Immediately N of Tromso,
the channel is sheltered by the large islands of Kvaloy and
Ringvassoy. Tromsoysund, between the island of Tromsoy and
the mainland, is shoal on both sides of the channel. However,
the fairway is free of dangers, and can be navigated by large
vessels at HW. Indreleia leads E from Tromsoysund through
Grotsund to Ullsfjorden. Grotsund is also free of dangers in
mid-channel.
9.8This route is well-covered by navigational aids, which can be
best seen on the chart. Tidal currents are weak in Grotsund, al-
though during bad weather a considerable sea may be raised.
9.8From the E end of Grotsund, the track of Indreleia leads
through the N part of Ullsfjorden. The channel is broad and
deep and extends in a general SSW direction from abreast the
SE end of Karlsoy. After rounding Lyngstuva, the N extremity
of the rugged promontory separating Ullsfjorden from Lyngs-
fjorden to the E, Indreleia passes through Kagsund, between
the SE end of Arnoy and the N end of Kagen, where smooth
water will be experienced.
9.8The main track of Indreleia leads from Kagsund NNE across
Kvaenangenfjorden and then rounds Brynilen, an islet close to
the coast, about 14 miles NE of the N extremity of Kagen is-
land. From Brynilen, the track passes SE of Loppakalven, the
small island close SW of the S end of Loppa Island, then leads
SE of Loppa into the W approach to Soroysund.
9.9Ytre Simavik and Indre Simavik lie in the central part of St-
jernsund and on its N shore. Vessels can anchor in both places,
in about 25m, clay bottom.
9.9Oksfjorden (70°12'N., 22°18'E.) lies on the S side of the W
end of Stjernsund. It trends S for about 8 miles, then ESE for 5
miles. The fjord is deep and free of dangers in the fairway.
9.9The shores are sparsely populated, except for the port of
Oksfjorden on its NE shore. The fjord is a place of refuge to
vessels during bad weather, as the fjord can be calm when a
gale wind is blowing outside.
9.9Anchorage is afforded near the village of Vassdalsbotn,
about 0.3 mile S of the port of Oksfjorden. The anchorage has a
depth of about 20m, good holding ground.
9.9Oksfjord (70°14'N., 22°21'E.) (World Port Index No.
21120) lies 1 mile S of the E entrance point to the fjord.
9.9Depths—Limitations.—There are several quays in the port.
There is also a boat harbor in the port. Coastal vessels call here
regularly. A vessel with a maximum draft of 6.1m. can be ac-
commodated.Berthing details are shown in the accompanying
table titled Oksfjord—Berthing Information
9.9A light is shown from a breakwater at the harbor entrance.
There are a number of anchorages S of the port.

Indreleia—Stiernsund to Hammerfest
9.9 An inner channel leads from the SW end of So-
roysund through Stjernsund, Vargsund, Kvalsund, and Sam-
melsund, uniting with the main track of Indreleia N of Kvaloy.
This channel is smoother, though longer than the main channel
in Soroysund, and is often used in bad weather.
9.9Vessels bound for Hammerfest can pass W of Kvaloy
through Straumen, the narrows between Kvaloy and the NE
end of Seiland. 9.9 By MeRyan (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons
9.9Stjernsund (70°14'N., 22°44'E.) is very deep and there are 9.9 Oksfjord
no known dangers more than 0.2 mile offshore on both sides.
The wind in Stjernsund is very unpredictable. Usually it blows 9.10 Ullsfjorden (69°50'N., 19°52'E.) is a deep fjord; with
either in or out of the sound. At times, violent gale winds blow its continuation, Sorfjorden, it extends for a distance of about
through Stjernsund. Vessels proceeding through the sound may 40 miles in a SSW direction from abeam the S end of Karlsoy.
expect a deflection of the magnetic compass. The fjord is open to the sea, and N and NW winds send in a
9.9Kvalsund (70°30'N., 23°59'E.) and Sammelsund are deep very heavy sea during autumn and winter. The inner part of
and free of dangers. Kvalsund is narrow but it may be used by Sorfjorden, for a distance of about 6 miles from its head, is fre-
large vessels with drafts of 6m. Several submarine cables are quently icebound during the winter months.
laid across both sounds.

Oksfjord—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
Draft
Oksfjord
North 150m — — Ro/pax, fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
South 135m — — Ro/pax, fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.

Pub. 182
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 237

Oksfjord—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
Draft
Polarfeed Sales AS
Cargo 130m 9.0m 6.1m Clean products, fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.

An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 25m, crosses

9.10 port to the control tower on VHF channel 12 when passing the
the entrance to Sorfjorden. The only shoal in the fairway of following reporting points:
Ullsfjorden is Nisegrunn, which lies 9.25 miles S of Grotsund a. 70°02'04.8''N, 23°14'52.8''E.
Light. Several dangers encumber Sorfjorden and can best be b. 69°59'50.4''N, 23°19'36.6''E.
seen on chart.
Lyngsfjorden (69°40'N., 20°25'E.) lies E of Ullsfjorden, the
9.10
Alta—Berth Information
two being separated by a high and rugged promontory.
Lyngsfjorden is steep on both sides and is very deep. The
9.10
Maximum
fjord extends about 50 miles in a SW direction; its end is Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
known as Storfjorden. There are two anchorages on the W side Draft
of Storfjorden near its end. The fjord is well marked by naviga- Alta Port Terminal
tional aids on both sides. The island of Uloy lies on the E side
General car-
of the fjord near its entrance. Kafjorden is located on the E side
of the fjord and extends 10 miles in a SE direction. Anchorage go, dry bulk,
Cargo 170m 10.0m —
can be taken on the S side of Kafjorden, 3.5 miles within the container, and
cruise.
entrance.
Marinekaia
9.11 Altafjorden (70°05'N., 23°06'E.), is a large deep
General car-
fjord which indents the mainland for about 20 miles and lies S
Cargo 60m — 9.2m go, dry bulk,
of the islands of Stjernoy and Seiland. The shores of the fjord
and fishing.
are irregular. There are several large bays and small inlets.
Langfjorden, on the W side of the fjord, is the only branch of Alta Skipsekspedisjon
any extent. Altafjorden is accessible to large vessels. Cargo 72m 5.0m — General cargo.
The weather in the fjord is usually calm. Kafjorden and
9.11

Rafsbotn lie at the head of the fjord. Aroy, a rocky island, lies Felleskaia
on the E side of Altafjorden. General cargo
Alta (69°58'N., 23°15'E.) (World Port Index No. 21130) is a Cargo 38m 5.0m —
9.11
and stone.
district, which consists of three close settlements of Bossekop,
Bukta, and Elvebakken. The depth in the harbor is 45m and Skiferterminalen
there is a turning basin 250m wide. Anchorage is determined General cargo,
on arrival but is generally in 30m of water in sand. The harbor Cargo 52m 6.0m — stone, sand,
is sheltered against N and E winds. Strong W and SW winds and asphalt.
make it unsafe.
Ferry Terminal
Alta Port Authority Ferry 70m — — Passengers.
http://www.altahavn.no
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
9.11

Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph

Depths—Limitations.—Alta can accommodate vessels
9.11

1.1.
with a maximum length of 250m and a maximum draft of 92m.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Alta—Contact
9.11

Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled Al-

Information.
ta—Berth Information.
An overhead cable, with a clearance of 7m, crosses the entrance
9.11

to Elvebakken. Alta—Contact Information

Pilotage.—Pilots are ordered through SafeSeaNet but may
9.11 Port Authority
be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
additional cost. For further information, see paragraph 9.1.
The pilot boards 2 miles E of Fakkekjeila Light in position
9.11 47-78-446910 (0800-1530)
70°06.0'N, 20°12.9'E. Telephone
47-90-634518 (mobile)
Regulations.—All vessels with a height greater than 12m
9.11

planning to enter the cautionary area near Alta Airport must re- Facsimile 47-78-436990

Pub. 182
238 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden
Alta—Contact Information
E-mail post@altahavn.no
Port Captain
Telephone 47-90-634518
Anchorage.—Bukta is the best anchorage in Alta. Vessels
9.11
lie at anchor in all weather, good holding ground. Elvebakken
affords anchorage for smaller vessels. These are only fair an-
chorages and they are not recommended.
9.12 Talvik (70°03'N., 22°58'E.) lies on the W side of Al-
tafjorden, in a sheltered bay. It affords anchorage to small ves-
sels with local knowledge, in a depth of about 18m, about 0.2
mile W of the N entrance point of the bay. Mooring rings are
available, and vessels can secure to dolphins on the N side of
the cove.
There are two quays, with depths of 4.9 to 5.8m alongside.
9.12
Coastal vessels mainly call at the port.
Rafsbotn lies on the E side of Altafjorden, near its head.
9.12
From its head for a distance of about 2 miles W, the bay is fre-
quently icebound during the winter months. This large bay af-
fords anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge, off the
NW side of Rafsholmen, in depths of 18.3 to 42m. Coastal ves-
sels call here regularly.
Langfjorden is situated on the NW coast of Altafjorden, near
9.12
the W entrance point. The fjord extends about 16 miles in a
WSW direction and is free of dangers in the fairway. Ytre
Koven, an inlet on the NW side of the fjord, affords anchorage
to small vessels with local knowledge.
Storsandnes, a village on the E side of the fjord, has a quay,
9.12
with a depth of 7.3m alongside. There is anchorage close N of
the quay; mooring rings are available.
Coastal vessels call here. Vessels with local knowledge may
9.12
anchor in Langfjordbotn, the head of Langfjorden, in depths of
12.8 to 20.1m. Langfjorden is well marked by navigational aids
on both its shores.
Vargsund (70°22'N., 23°30'E.) lies NE of the E entrance
9.12
point to Altafjorden. The sound is deep in the fairway and free
of dangers. From its entrance the sound runs NE for about 14
miles and then turns N for 9 miles where the sound narrows to
about 0.5 mile at its N entrance, 4 miles SSW of Hammerfest.
The sound affords anchorage on both sides to vessels with
9.12
local knowledge. The sound is well marked by navigational
aids.
Outer Route—Soroya to Nordkapp
9.13 From the conspicuous headland surmounted by Fu-
glen at the NW end of Soroya, the coast of this island trends in
an ENE direction and is not clearly distinguishable until a ves-
sel is N of the island. The N coast of Soroya is high and pres-
ents a broken appearance of bold and steep headlands
separated by inlets which deeply indent the coast. Close off the
NW extremity of the island, the coast is indented by Breivik-
fjorden and Markjeila, a smaller inlet.
Breivik (70°35'N., 22°08'E.) (World Port Index No. 20940)
lies on the NW side of Breivikfjorden, on the NW coast of the
island of Soroya. Vessels of moderate size can anchor off the
Pub. 182
port NW of Breivik Light, in depths of 7 to 12m, loose sand.
Vessels may obtain fairly good anchorage off the N shore of
the fjord, about 3 miles E of Breivik Light, in depths of 27.4 to
31m, sand. The port has a quay on the N side of a mole, with a
depth of 2.4m alongside.
Sorvaer (70°38'N., 21°59'E.) (World Port Index No. 20930)
9.13
is a large fishing port on the N side of the entrance to Markjei-
la. The approach from the SSW on the range lights to Sorvear
is encumbered with islets and shoals, some of which are
marked, and the position of which can best be seen on the
chart. Breakwaters built between islets extend SW, where a
light stands on the W breakwater head.
The port has a number of quays with depths of up to 4m. The
9.13
port is used mainly by coastal vessels. Small vessels may an-
chor off the port, in depths of 6 to 20m.
Rolvsoya (70°58'N., 24°00'E.) lies about 14 miles NE of So-
9.13
roya. The island is indented on all sides. Kallneringen, at the NW
end of the island, attains a height of 334m. Revsholmen and Skip-
sholmen, two islets, lie near the middle of the broad channel be-
tween Soroya and Rolvsoya. The islets are very prominent.
Ingoya (71°04'N., 24°04'E.) lies N of Rolvsoya. It is indent-
9.13
ed on all sides and quite mountainous. The harbor is reached
by passing between Avloysninga and a rock, awash, about 0.1
mile N and marked by an iron perch, off the W end of Langhol-
men.
Fruholmen Light (71°06'N., 24°00'E.) is shown from a tow-
9.13
er, 18m in height, standing off the NW coast of the island. A
racon is located at the light tower. There is an anchorage for
small vessels with local knowledge off the N side of Ingoya.
9.14 Hjelmsoya (71°04'N., 24°43'E.) is located about 9
miles E of Ingoya. The island is mountainous and conspicuous
from a considerable distance. The N coast of Hjelmsoya is very
steep. About 3 miles NE of the summit is a rocky pinnacle
which rises perpendicularly from the sea and is easily identi-
fied from the NE. Akkarfjorden lies on the NW side of the is-
land and extends about 2 miles SE. A reef extends up to 183m
from the shore of this fjord. A light is shown on the NE side of
the fjord.
Good anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 10.1m, off
9.14
Sandvik, a village on the W side of the fjord, about 1 mile
SSW of the light.
Masoya (71°01'N., 25°00'E.) is located about 4 miles SE of
9.14
Hjelmsoya. The island is indented on all sides. Kalven, an islet
which shows a light, lies about 0.5 mile NNW of the NW ex-
tremity of Masoya. Ostervag, on the SE side of the island, af-
fords anchorage to small vessels near its head, in a depth of
3.7m, good holding ground. Coastal vessels call here.
Mageroya (71°03'N., 25°40'E.) is located about 4 miles E of
9.14
the NE extremity of Masoya. The island is large and indented
on all sides. The coastline is fringed by a reef close offshore.
The NW coast of the island is penetrated for about 6 miles by
Tufjorden, which is desolate and affords no anchorage. Nord-
kapp is the highest and most prominent headland on the N
coast of Mageroya.
The cape is a bold headland which rises in sheer walls of
9.14
dark rock to a flat barren plateau. Knivskjerodden, which
shows a light, lies 2.25 miles NNW of Nordkapp and forms the
N extremity of Mageroya. The point is low and much less con-
spicuous then Nordkapp.
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 239

Kamoyfjorden (71°04'N., 26°04'E.) lies on the NE side of

9.14
Mageroy. The fjord is indented near its head by three small
fjords. Vessels of moderate size can anchor in sand, with moor-
ing rings available, between Kamoyvaer and the SW side of
Store Kamoy, in depths of 9.0 to 23.8m, about 0.2 mile ESE of
ated), Kobbhola (on the W shore of the inlet), Storbukta (at the
head of the inlet), and the outer harbor areas (including tanker
transshipment anchor berths located in Sarnesfjorden and Mag-
eroysundet).
Depths—Limitations.—The harbor can accommodate ves-
9.15

Kamoyfjorden Light. A power cable lying about 0.1 mile off-
shore parallels the coast in the vicinity of the anchorage.
9.15 Honningsvag (70°59'N., 26°00'E.) (World Port Index
No. 20800) is a large fishing station located on the SE side of
sel with a maximum draft of 12m. See the table titled Hon-
ningsvag—Berth Information.
Aspect.—A gray church and a large building close by the
church are very prominent landmarks from seaward.
The approach and entrance to the harbor are well-marked by
9.15

Mageroya. It also serves as the administrative center for the navigational aids. A number of rocks and foul ground are
Nordkapp district of Norway. The harbor extends about a mile marked by iron perches and spar buoys. The harbor is excel-
past the mole at Klubben and includes the following bays and lent, though small.
berthing areas: the inner harbor (around which the town is situ-

Honningsvag—Berth Information
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Inner Harbor (Indre Havn)
NOFI 67m 4.5-10.0m General cargo.
Berth on Breakwater 20-125m 1.5-6.5m General cargo.
Fishery and Warehouse Jetties 13-58m 0.9-4.9m General cargo.
Engineering Workshop 19m 3.8-4.3m General cargo.
Packet Boat Quay
East 53m 3.3-5.1m General cargo.
Southeast 30m 5.0-9.0m General cargo.
South 65m 5.4-10.0m General cargo.
West 117m 2.4-10.0m Dry bulk and passengers.
Bolgerbryter 140m — General cargo.
Fiskerihavn Terminal
North (New 2022) — — General cargo and passengers.
No. 1 116m 2.6-9.2m Dry bulk.
No. 2 70m 8.8-11m General cargo.
No. 3 125m 7.0-13.0m General cargo and passenger.
Mobile Tank Installation on Borveneset 45m 6.0m —
Storbukta
FI-NO-TRO Fish Factory 93m 6.0-7.0m General cargo.
SIFI Fish Factory 69m 5.6-7.1m General cargo.
Shell Bunkering Installation at Floers 88m 6.0-7.0m —
Kobbholet
NOFI Fish Oil Factory 50m 11.0-15.0m (W-E) General cargo.
Esso Bunkering 63m 11.0-18.0m —
BP Bunkering 99m 7.4-8.4m General cargo and petroleum products.
Honningsvag Outer
Honningsvag Transhipment N Area 1 — — STS and crude oil.
Honningsvag Transhipment N Area 2 — — STS.
Honningsvag Transhipment S Area — — STS and crude oil.

Pub. 182
240 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden

9.15 Courtesy of Bill Fry

9.15 Nordkapp (on Mageroya)

Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 30,000 gt

9.15

and over and is optional for vessels under 30,000 gt. Pilots
board in the following positions:
a. 70°58'00.0'N, 26°17'00.0''N (vessels of 30,000 gt and
over).
b. 70°57'30.0'N, 25°57'56.4'N.
Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but can be or-
9.15

dered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an addi-

tional coast.
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details, see the section titled
9.15

Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph 1.1.

Contact Information.—The port can be contacted on VHF
9.15

channels 12, 14, and 16.

Honningsvag—Contact Information
Port
VHF VHF channels 12, 14 and 16
9.15 By Harvey Barrison via Wikimedia Commons
Telephone 47-91-733143 Honningsvag
9.15

E-mail havna@nordkapp.kommune.no
Anchorage.—Vessels should anchor W of a straight line be-
9.15

Web site http://www.nordkapphavn.no tween Klubskjeret Light and the spar buoy on Holmegrunnen,
Harbormaster and N of a straight line extending E from Rosmaalneset, a
point about 0.5 mile NW of Klubskjeret Light, in depths of
Telephone 47-78-476450 29.3 to 49.4m.

Pub. 182
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden
9.16 Sarnesfjorden (70°58'N., 25°45'E.) lies on the S side
of Mageroya, about 4 miles W of Honningsvag. Altesula, an is-
land, lies in the entrance to the fjord. The island is fringed by a
reef, which extends about 183m N from its NW end.
A light is shown from the SE extremity of Altesula. Litle Al-
9.16
tesula, an islet, lies about 0.5 mile N from the N extremity of
Altesula. Kobbholet, an inlet on the W side of Sarnesfjorden, is
well sheltered and affords anchorage to vessels with local
knowledge, in depths of 25.6 to 42.1m, good holding ground,
about 0.2 mile W of the S entrance point of the inlet. A bridge,
with a vertical clearance of 10m, crosses the entrance of the in-
let.
Anchorage is available between Altesula and Litle Altesula,
9.16
in depths of 12.8 to 29.3m.
Helnes Light (71°04'N., 26°14'E.) is shown from a low tow-
9.16
er at the E end of Mageroy. A racon and a radiobeacon are lo-
cated at the light tower.
Caution.—The inshore TSS off Nordkapp is not IMO ap-
9.16
proved.
Indreleia—Hammerfest to Varangerfjorden
9.17 From the NE end of Soroysund to Mageroya, about 36
miles ENE, Indreleia is mostly unsheltered. The route is ex-
posed off the N ends of Kvaloy and Havoy, which lies about 22
miles NE of the N end of Kvaloy; the currents and heavy sea
may render it difficult for small vessels to weather these condi-
tions. Indreleia terminates at the N end of Porsangerfjorden,
where vessels can proceed to the open sea or Honningsvag.
From Hammerfest, a northbound vessel in Indreleia should
9.17
shape course to pass about 0.5 mile S and W of the small island
of Melkoya, on which a light is shown, and then proceed N in
mid-channel through Soroysund, which is free of dangers in
the fairway.
From the NE end of Soroysund, Indreleia passes across an
9.17
open arm of the sea for about 12 miles and then continues NE
through the exposed Rolvsoysund, between the SE side of
Rolvsoya and the small islands off the mainland. A light is
shown from the SE side of Rolvsoya.
From abeam of Havoygavlen Light, located on the NW ex-
9.17
tremity of Havoy, Indreleia leads SE through Breisund. The
sound is about 2 miles wide. The depth in the channel is be-
tween 30 and 150m. There are several shoals in the area with
depths from 30 to 70m.
In Breidsund, there are special wave directions from N to
9.17
NW which create rough sea; with W currents broken surf has
been observed in the channel. The current is due primarily to
the tidal current and is estimated to reach between 1 and 2
knots. By Rolvsoyh, the sea becomes especially rough when
the wind blows from the N to NE. In both cases the wind and
the waves drive straight in from the open sea.
Northwest of Havoygavlen there are three shoals with depths
9.17
between about 30 and 50m. It is noted that from the shoals and
in toward Havoygavlen, the sea is particularly rough, which ap-
pears to be associated with the shoals and the “corner effect” of
the headland.
There is a big difference between the flood and the ebb in the
9.17
area and it is noticed that the sea is roughest on the ebb.
After passing through Breisund, Indreleia leads into
9.17
Masoysund. Submarine cables are laid across Rolvsoysund,
241
Breisund, and Masoysund.
9.18 Masoysund (70°59'N., 25°01'E.) lies between the
mainland and the S side of Masoya. The sound is about 1 mile
wide and is free from dangers in the fairway.
The tidal currents in mid-channel set E from half rising tide
9.18
to half falling tide, the turn of the current usually occurs at the
times of HW and LW, setting E with the rising tide and W with
the falling tide. The currents may attain a velocity of from 3 to
4 knots. A light is shown on the S extremity of Masoya.
Mageroysund, the continuation of Indreleia from
9.18
Masoysund, leads SE and then E. The channel, though narrow,
is free from dangers, and it can be navigated by larger vessels.
A submarine cable crosses the sound about 2 miles from the
9.18
entrance. The tidal currents set with strength through Mage-
roysund; at HW they may attain a velocity of 5 to 6 knots. A
light is shown on the S side of the NW entrance to Mage-
roysund. A light is also shown on the E entrance point of the
sound.
9.19 Porsangen (70°30'N., 25°30'E.), a long fjord, is en-
tered between Helnes Light and Svaerholtklubben, about 10
miles ESE, and extends about 65 miles in a SSW direction. The
outer part of the fjord is fringed with precipitous and barren ta-
bleland but toward the inner end the heights are more irregular,
with some trees and pasture land.
Though not as deep as many fjords, it is fairly clear of dan-
9.19
gers except near its head, where there are scattered shoals and
numerous islands. The fjord is usually frozen over in winter as
far N as Borselvenes, a point about 16 miles from its head. Por-
sangen is well-marked by navigational aids, which can best be
seen on the chart.
Store Tamsoy, an island, is located about 25 miles from the
9.19
entrance of the fjord, and is encumbered by a rocky shoal
which extends up to 1.5 miles S of the island. Two spar buoys
mark the shoal on the E. A beacon is shown on the SE side of
the island.
Strandbukt, a bay, lies on the W side of the outer part of Por-
9.19
sangen and is entered between Homnneset (70°45'N.,
25°42'E.) and Nakken. The bay affords good anchorage to ves-
sels with local knowledge, in a depth of about 23m, good hold-
ing ground, about 2 miles WSW of Repvag Light.
Vessels with local knowledge may obtain anchorage off the
9.19
SW side of Litle Tamsoy, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, about 3
miles E of Repvag Light.
There are a number of anchorages on both sides of Porsan-
9.19
gen and also at the head of this fjord. All of these anchorages
require local knowledge and are best seen on the chart. The an-
chorages are used mainly by coastal vessels. A marine farm is
located about 2 miles N of Lite Tamsoya.
Laksefjorden lies E of Porsangen and is entered between
9.19
Svaerholtklubben and Finnkjerka, 8.5 miles to the E. The fjord
indents the coast for about 40 miles and for the most part is
from 7 to 12 miles wide. The shores of the fjord are indented
by a succession of small bays and inlets.
In Laksefjorden, the tidal current sets N with the falling tide
9.19
and S with the rising tide. The maximum velocity is attained at
the entrance to the fjord.
9.20 Kjollefjorden (70°57'N., 27°20'E.) (World Port Index
Pub. 182
242 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden

No. 20740), on the E side of the entrance to Laksefjorden, is Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in depths up to 13.7m,
9.21

entered through a width of about 3 miles and extends about 4 loose clay, about 0.4 mile SSE of Mehamn Light. There are
miles SE. The head of the fjord forms a sheltered bay, where mooring rings around the harbor.
there is a settlement. Coastal vessels call here regularly. Slettnes Light (71°05'N., 28°14'E.) is shown from a
9.21

Depths—Limitations.— The port has a number of quays.

9.20 prominent tower, 39m in height, standing on a headland about
Vessels with maximum draft of 6.2m can be accommodated in 8 miles NE of Mehamn. A racon is located at the light.
the port. A shoal bank extends seaward up to about 2 miles from the
9.21

Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain an-

9.20
chorage, in depths of 20 to 23.8m, in the middle of the harbor,
about 0.2 mile E of Kjollefjorden Light. The anchorage is not
safe during strong E winds, when violent squalls occur.
Oksefjorden is entered N of Kjollefjorden and indents the
9.20
light and breaks in places during heavy weather. Gamvik, a
fishing harbor suitable only for small vessels, lies close SE of
the light tower. The harbor mole is undergoing expansion
(2020).
Regulations.—Gamvic Harbor District enforces a maxi-
9.21

coast for a distance of about 7 miles. The fjord is deep and
clear of dangers, except for scattered shoals, which are best
seen on the chart.
Small vessels can find good anchorage, in 7.3 to 14.6m, off
9.20
the village of Oksevag at the head of the fjord. The fjord is well
marked by navigational aids. Coastal vessels call here regular-
mum speed limit of 5 knots for all vessels. This speed limit ap-
plies to all vessels except those engaged in operations for the
Norwegian armed forces or craft engaged in emergency police,
custom, fire fighting, ambulance, or search and rescue missions
along the coast of Nordkynhalvoya.
Harbor limits are positioned from close N at Nordkyn, then
9.21

ly. ESE to close N of Slettnes, then SE past Omgang to the middle

Friarfjorden (70°28'N., 26°57'E.), located at the SE end of
9.20
Laksefjorden, affords good anchorage for vessels with local
knowledge, in depths of 22 to 33m, good holding ground, on
the W side of the fjord.
A number of anchorages are located on both sides of Lak-
9.20
sefjorden, most of which require local knowledge, and can best
be seen on the chart. The anchorages are used regularly by
coastal vessels.
of Tanafjordon, and continue SW to close N at Digermulen.
9.22 Tanafjorden (70°45'N., 28°25'E.), which is entered
between Omgang and Tanahorn, about 9 miles SE, extends
SSW for about 34 miles on the W side of Varangerhalvoya.
The shores of this fjord are mountainous declivities, indented,
and made up of small inlets, especially on the W side.
The principal branches of Tanafjorden are Hopsfjorden,
9.22

Langfjorden, and Vestertana, which extend in a W and S direc-

9.21 Mehamnfjorden (71°04'N., 27°52'E.) is located on tion from the main fjord.
the mainland and lies between Laksefjorden and Tanafjorden. In the area outside the entrance to Tanafjorden, the depths
9.22

Mehamn, on the E side of the head of Mehamnfjorden, is one
of the best harbors in this area, and is accessible in almost all
conditions.
Depths—Limitations.—The E shore of Mehamn is lined
9.21
with quays and handles mainly fishing and passenger activity.
Vessel with drafts up to 6m can be accommodated. For more
information see the table titled Mehamn—Berth Informa-
decrease sharply on both sides of a deep channel, which is an
extension of the fjord. During fair weather conditions, the cur-
rent goes inward with the flood tide and out along the E side of
the fjord with the ebb. Wind and the outflow of water from
Tanaelven (Tana River) can also have a big influence on cur-
rent conditions.
Due to the situation mentioned above, it is difficult to predict
9.22

tion. wave conditions. However, with waves from the NW and an

ebb current along the E side of the fjord, there is a possibility
Mehamn—Berth Information of breaking waves. These are seen as areas of broken surf and it
is estimated that vessels must be 6 to 10 miles outside the fjord
Maximum mouth to avoid them.
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks Hopsfjorden lies on the W side of Tanafjorden. The fjord is
9.22

Draft deep and free of dangers in the fairway. Large vessels can an-
Industrial Terminal chor near the head of the fjord. Langfjorden lies S of Hops-
fjorden and also affords anchorage for large vessels near its
Fishing head. Small vessels lie best in the bay at Boksjok, where there
Industrial 65m 7.0m — vessels and
is good holding ground, in a depth of about 20m.
breakbulk.
A submarine cable crosses the fjord about 2 miles from the
9.22

Nordkyn Terminal entrance.

Gulgofjorden (70°41'N., 28°36'E.) lies on the E side of
Ro/pax,
9.22

Tanafjorden, about 5 miles ESE of the E entrance point of

fishing
Langfjorden. This small fjord indents the coast for a distance
Nordkyn 92m 7.0m 6.0m vessels,
of about 2 miles. Anchorage can be taken off the N shore of the
breakbulk,
fjord, in depths of 10 to 18.3m, sand and mud.
and reefer.
The head of Tanafjorden consist of a number of small fjords
9.22

Polar Terminal and inlets, which are marked by lights. There is anchorage in
Fishing these fjords, which can best be seen on the chart.
Polar 65m 5.0m — Between Tanahorn and Vardo, about 53 miles SE, the coast
vessels. 9.22

presents the appearance of a nearly horizontal ridge about 122

Pub. 182
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 243

to 152m high. Between these two points there are no land-

marks; neither does the aspect of any particular tract serve as a
guide. The general appearance of the countryside is barren;
hardly a trace of soil or vegetation is visible on the tablelands,
and fresh green grass is only found in the clefts of the hills fac-
ing the sea. In summer, patches of snow may often be seen on
the hills. Vessels are advised to give this part of the coast a
wide berth in bad weather.

9.23 Berlevag (70°52'N., 29°06'E.) (World Port Index No.

20710) lies about 6 miles E of Tanahorn and is one of the larg-
est fishing stations on this part of the coast. The entrance to the
harbor is protected by a mole. The port consists of an outer har-
bor and an inner harbor.
Depths—Limitations.— The port is mainly used for fishing
9.23

vessels and coastal ferries and is protected by numerous break-

waters on the inner and outer harbors. A number of quays in
the harbor and can accommodate vessels with drafts up to 5m.
Hurtigruten Terminal, which can accommodate vessels up to
118m in length with a maximum draft of 4.9m, is used for pas-
sengers, ro-ro, and cruise vessels.
Anchorage.—There is anchorage in the outer harbor, in
depths of 9.1 to 12.2m; the inner harbor anchorage has depths
Kjolnes Light
up to 4.6m.
9.23

Kjolnes Light (70°51'N., 29°14'E.) is shown from a tower,

9.23
11.9 to 14.0m, good holding ground, about 1 mile SW of Bats-
22m in height, standing 2.5 miles E of Berlevag. fjorden Light.
Kongsfjorden (70°45'N., 29°24'E.) is situated about 9 miles
9.23
There are 13 berths at Maritbukt, with lengths of 32 to 273m
9.24

SE of Berlevag. The fjord is divided into two arms by a penin- and depths of 3 to 10m alongside. A number of lights, which
sula. The fjord affords anchorage for small vessels, in depths of are best seen on the chart, are located in the fjord.
12 to 16.5m, good holding ground. Pilotage.—Pilotage is optional and should be ordered
9.24

A number of dangers lie in the fjord and can best be seen on

9.23
the chart. The harbor is protected by a mole; however, swells
comes in during NE winds. Vessels are cautioned to be well se-
through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodingen
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
The pilot boards in the following positions:
9.24

cured. a. 70°38'30.0''N, 29°47'00.0''E (about 2 miles within the

harbor entrance).
9.24 Batsfjorden (70°41'N., 29°51'E.) (World Port Index b. 70°39'26.4'''N, 29°48'51.6''E.
No. 20695) also known as Batsfjord, lies about 7 miles E of The pilot vessel can be contacted on VHF channels 12 and
9.24

Kongsfjorden. The fjord extends about 7 miles SW and is deep 16. For further information, see paragraph 9.1.
and free from dangers. 1. Vessel name.
Depths—Limitations.—The harbor in the cove can accom-
9.24
2. Call sign.
modate vessels with a maximum draft of 8.3m. For more infor- 3. Nationality.
mation see the table titled Batsfjorden—Berthing 4. Length.
Information. 5. Draft.
Maritbukt is the most spacious anchorage, with depths of
9.24
6. Gross tonnage.

Batsfjorden—Berthing Information
Berth Length Remarks
Batsfjord Terminal
General 200m General cargo.
West 180m General cargo, passengers, and refrigerated cargo.
Liquid cargo, passengers, ro-ro cargo, general, and refrigerated
East 150m
cargo. Maximum draft of 8.3m.
Tanker 60m Bunker gas oil, bunker diesel oil, and mobile lubricants.
Oil 40m Vegetable oil.

Pub. 182
244 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden

Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA, along with

9.24 posed to bad weather. With the wind mainly from the N, waves
their pilot request, 24 hours in advance, and confirmed 3 hours drive in from seaward. In Varangerfjorden, the currents are er-
in advance, along with the following information: ratic and with the “corner effect” at Vardo, the sea becomes
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details, see the section titled
9.24 more chaotic.
Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph 1.1.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Batsfjorden—
9.24
Vardo
Contact Information.
9.26 Vardo (70°22'N., 31°07'E.) (World Port Index No.
Batsfjorden—Contact Information 20700) is composed of a group of islands lying close off the E
extremity of Varangerhalvoy, about 7 miles SE of Persfjorden.
Port Authority Vardoya, the W and largest island, consists of two parts joined
VHF VHF channel 12 by a narrow isthmus.
Reinoya and Horwoya lie close to the E of Vardoya. Busse-
9.26

47-78-985510
Telephone sundet, to the W of the islands, separates them from the main-
47-95-983860 (mobile) land and can be navigated by large vessels.
Facsimile 47-78-983860
Vardo
E-mail havnevakt@batsfjord.havn.no
http://www.vardoport.no
Harbormaster
47-78-985512 Depths—Limitations.—Vardo can accommodate vessels up
9.26

Telephone to 150m in length with a maximum draft of 9m. See the table
47-78-892790 (mobile)
titled Vardo—Berth Information.
Anchorage.—A cove at the head of the fjord affords anchor-
age to small vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 18.3 to Vardo—Berth Information
23.8m, good holding ground, about 183m W of the N entrance Berth Length Depth Remarks
point of the cove.
Vardo Harbor
Caution.—A fishing marina exists.
9.24

Vardo 180m 7.0m —

9.25 Makkaur Light (70°42'N., 30°05'E.) is shown from a Svartnes Harbor
low tower on a building standing about 4 miles E of the en-
trance to Batsfjorden. Ferry service to Engels-
Svartnes 194m 9m
Syltefjorden lies 12 miles SE of Batsfjorden. It extends
9.25
vik, Vardoya.
about 8 miles SW and is free from dangers in the fairway. The Kiberg Harbor
head of the fjord is frozen over in winter. Syltefjordvaer, on the
NW side of the fjord, affords anchorage close inshore to small Mainly used by fishing
Kiberg — —
vessels, in depths of from 4.6 to 6.1m, about 3 miles NE of vessels.
Sylefjorden Light.
Small vessels can also anchor near the head of Syltefjorden,
9.25 Aspect.—Vardo church, conspicuous from the N, is white
9.26

in depths of 14.6 to 20m. Nordfjorden, lies 3 miles SW of
Syltefjordvaer, on the W side of the fjord and is protected by
two moles. A light stands on the W mole head. Small vessels
can anchor W of a spar buoy, located at the head of Nord-
with a gray roof and white spire. A radar dome stands about
183m E of the church. Two radio masts stand on the island of
Vardoya, about 0.25 mile W of the church.
Protection is afforded to the harbor by a breakwater on each
9.26

fjorden, in 19m.
Caution.—Dangerous wrecks, best seen on the chart, lie up
9.25
to 9 miles NE of Syltefjordklubben, the NW entrance point of
side of the entrance. A light is shown from the seaward end of
each breakwater.
Vardo Light is shown from a tower, 20m in height, standing
9.26

Syltefjord. Another dangerous wreck lies about 6.5 miles ESE on Hornoya.
of Hardbaken, the SE entrance point of Syltefjord. Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 100 tons
9.26

Persfjorden (70°26'N., 30°48'E.) is located about 10 miles

9.25
SE of Syltefjorden. The fjord is free from dangers in the fair-
way, and depths decrease gradually toward its head. Anchorage
can be obtained in the fjord in fine weather, but vessels cannot
remain there during winds from NW, through N, to E.
Caution.—In the stretch between Batsfjorden, from Mak-
9.25
kaur Light to Vardo and Varangerfjorden, lies an area very ex-
and more. Pilots should be ordered via SafeSeaNet but may be
ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an addi-
tional cost. The pilot boards by arrangement. Vessels at sea re-
quiring a pilot should give at least 24 hours notice, notifying
confirmation or alteration at least 2 hours before the original
time stipulated.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Vardo—Con-
9.26

Pub. 182
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden
Vardo
9.26
tact Information.
Vardo—Contact Information
VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16
47-78-987276
Telephone
47-78-987275
Facsimile 47-78-954310
E-mail vardhavn@online.no
Anchorage.—Nordvagen, the principal and best harbor at
9.26
Vardo, lies on the N side of the town. The anchorage is good
but constricted being available only to small vessels with local
knowledge. During N gales, there is considerable swell in the
bay N of the moles, and entering the harbor may be difficult.
Caution.—An Explosives Dumping Area lies close E of the
9.26
Vardo Light and may best be seen on the chart
9.27 Bussesundet (70°22'N., 31°02'E.), somewhat ex-
posed to swell from both N and S, affords good anchorage to
small vessels off the S end of Tjuvholem, in depths of 7 to
10m, about 183m N of a line of buoys marking a pipeline.
Two moles form a harbor in the S part of Bussesundet. A
9.27
light is shown from the seaward end of each mole. The en-
trance to the harbor has a least depth of 6.7m, decreasing
shoreward into drying flats. Several piers are situated in the S
part of the harbor.
There is a prohibited anchorage in the S part of Bussesundet,
9.27
best seen on the chart. Vessels arriving at the harbors without
an anchoring or mooring berth allocated must anchor well out
245
9.26 By magnethy via Wikimedia Commons
of the way until a berth is assign by the harbor authority. Under
no circumstances may vessels anchor in the channels or near
the piers, so as to impede traffic.
Vessels arriving at the harbors under quarantine flag, or
9.27
which are ordered to lay in quarantine, must anchor in Basse-
sundet, where they must remain until the health authority gives
them orders to go to another anchorage or mooring berth in or
outside the harbor.
Varangerfjorden
9.28 Varangerfjorden (70°00'N., 30°00'E.), a large and
deep fjord lies with Kibergneset, its N entrance point, about 5
miles S of Vardo. The fjord extends about 50 miles W, and is
free from dangers in mid-channel to a distance of about 7 miles
from its head. The best harbors will be found in the inlets on
the S side of the fjord, which is characterized by steep hills
with sparse growths of trees. In contrast, the N side of the fjord
slopes gently inland, with steep cliffs of irregular heights in
places.
The tidal currents in the fjord are very irregular. Their direc-
9.28
tion is largely influenced by the prevailing winds, rather than
by the tides. The more usual characteristic is a W set on the N
side of the fjord and an E set on the S side, on change in direc-
tion occurring at HW or LW. The E set will usually be stronger
than the W and may attain a velocity of about 2 knots, with
heavy overfalls occurring particularly during strong E winds.
The N shore of Varangerfjorden is formed by the SE and S
9.28
coast of Varangerhalvoy and is better protected against N gales
than the E and N coast of the peninsula. Between Kibergneset
and Vadso, 30 miles WSW, the coast is generally low and flat,
Pub. 182
246 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden

Ytre Kiberg
9.26

forming open shallow bays bounded by white sand hills. shown on the seaward end of a mole on the SW side of Store
Ytre Kiberg (70°17'N., 31°00'E.), a small harbor about 2
9.28 Ekkeroya.
miles W of Kibergneset, is available to small vessels with local
knowledge. It is exposed to E winds, during which anchorage 9.30 Vadso (70°04'N., 29°44'E.) (World Port Index No.
is not recommended, though there is good holding ground of 20690) is located on the N side of Varangerfjorden, about 15
sand and mud. A light is shown from the head of the harbor, miles NW of Kirkenes pilot station.
and range lights in line lead into the inner harbor.
Coastal vessels call at the port, which is a fishing station.
9.28

Storskjer, an above-water rock showing a light, lies about 3

miles SW of Ytre Kiberg Light. Shoal water, marked by bea-
cons and iron posts, lies from Storskjer NE to Ytre Kiberg.
Komagneset, terminating in a point about 13 miles WSW of
9.28

Kibergneset, is a high plateau with three prominent ridges be-

tween its summit and the sea; about 5 miles SW of these ridges
is Skallneset, another prominent point.
Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in good
9.28

weather off Komagneset, in depths up to 6.1m.

9.29 Litle Ekkeroya (Lille Ekkeroya) (70°05'N.,

30°14'E.), a small island fringed with reefs, lies about 4 miles
SW of Skallneset. Vessels entering Varangerfjorden in foggy
weather must be careful to identify Skallneset, as its long flat
projecting point may easily be mistaken for either Litle Ekke-
roya or Store Ekkeroy. Litle Ekkeroya shows a light on the SE 9.30 By Felix Maschek via Wikimedia Commons
point of the island. 9.30 Vadso
It has been reported (1994) that numerous shoals and wrecks
9.29

exist in close proximity, NW to SW of Litle Ekkeroya Light. Winds—Weather.—The harbor is seldom icebound; how-
9.30

Store Ekkeroya lies about 3 miles SW of Litle Ekkeroy and

9.29 ever it is not recommended to enter the harbor during strong N
is connected to the mainland by a narrow, low isthmus. Store or S winds. Navigational aids can best be seen on the chart.
Ekkeroya is higher than the mainland and when seen from a Depths—Limitations.—The channel leads along the N side
9.30

distance appears as an island. On its summit is a tall black bea- of Store Vadsoya and has a least depth of 6.2m. A bridge, with
con; a second black beacon stands on its E extremity. A light is a vertical clearance of 3m, extends N from Vadso to the main-

Pub. 182
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 247

land. of the head of Varangerfjorden, has a narrow entrance which is

It has been reported (1995) that a 475m long channel, with a
9.30
width of 180m and a dredged depth of 6.5m, leads from the
outer harbor to the inner harbor.
The main pier extends W from a point S of the town. The
9.30
pier accommodates vessels up to 70m in length with a maxi-
encumbered with dangers and has very strong tidal currents. The
N and deeper channel leading into the inlet has a least depth of
4.9m. The fjord is icebound from October to May. Range lights
to the fjord stand on the N shore, close W of the entrance.
Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage off
9.31

mum draft of 7.5m. Between this pier and the town are numer- the N shore of the fjord, 1 mile W of the rear range light, in a
ous quays and jetties. Coastal vessels call regularly at the port. depth of about 15.2m.
See the table titled Vadso—Berth Information. Karlebotn (70°07'N., 28°45'E.) lies on the S side of two in-
9.31

ner fjords of the head of Varangerfjorden. Anchorage can be

Vadso—Berth Information obtained on the NW side of Karlebotn, about 0.5 mile ENE of
Rabbedalen, in depths up to 27.4m.
Berth Length Depth Small vessels anchor off Bigganes (70°07'N., 28°36'E.), a
9.31

Lakselv Seakwalk village on the NW side of the head of Karlebotn, in a depth of

about 12.8m, about 2 miles WSW of Rabbenes Light.
Main 250m 7.5m
North 70m 6.5m Varangerfjorden—South Side
South 72m 5.5m
9.32 Veinesbotn (70°05'N., 28°47'E.) is an inlet on the S
side of Veidnes, a peninsula which separates it from Karlebotn.
Aspect.—The port is protected on its S side by the W part of A light is shown on the N entrance point of the inlet. There is a
Store Vadsoya, a low barren island lying on a coastal reef, and small, but very good harbor for small vessels off Grasbakken, a
on its W side by a two breakwaters, one extending about 0.2 village on the S side of the entrance to Veinesbotn. The anchor-
mile NNW from the W extremity of the island and the other age has depths of up to 15.2m; the holding ground is good. A
extending about 91m S from the mainland. quay at the village has a depth of 6.4m alongside. A light is
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered
9.30
shown from a rock off the village.
via SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Latnaeringen, a promontory, lies about 6 miles E of Grasbak-
9.32

Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot boards about ken. There is anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge
0.5 mile W of the harbor entrance. on the W side of the promontory, in depths of 10.1 to 15.8m.
Vessels desiring a pilot should give 24 hours notice; confir-
9.30
Vessels approaching this anchorage should be careful to avoid
mation should be made 2 hours prior to arrival at the pilot sta- the foul ground, marked by a light, on the outer end of which is
tion. Storskjaer. The anchorage is sheltered from E winds, but is not
Contact Information.—See the table titled Vadso—Con-
9.30
recommended during N and W winds.
tact Information. Bugoyfjorden (69°56'N., 29°36'E.) lies about 14 miles SE
9.32

of Latnaeringen. In winter, the fjord is icebound up to about 1

Vadso—Contact Information mile from its head, but it freezes farther out in hard winters.
VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16 The SE side of the fjord consists of steep hills and is unin-
9.32

habited; the NW side is lower and has some settlements and

Telephone 47-92-695888 harbors. On the S side of the entrance, a group of islets and
Facsimile 47-78-954310 rocks lies close offshore. At the N end of this group an above-
water rock is marked by a lighted beacon. The tidal currents in
the fjord are weak and usually set outward.
Anchorage.—Anchorage for vessels up to 400 tons is avail-
Between the W side of Bugoya and the mainland, there is a
9.30

9.32

able in the basin, in depths of 4 to 6m. Larger vessels can an-

harbor where small vessels can anchor in depths of up to 3.7m.
chor W of the mole, in depths of 16 to 21m, sand and clay.
The harbor is protected from the N by two short moles. A
9.32

Anchorage is also available in the outer harbor inside the

light is shown on the head of the W mole. The sea breaks in the
breakwater, in depths of 5 to 9m.
N entrance to the harbor if there is a swell.
Small vessels can obtain anchorage E of the town, in depths
9.30

of 4 to 5m, about 1.0 mile ENE of Vadsoya Light; it is ap-
proached E of Store Vadsoya.
9.31 Sandskjer (70°05'N., 29°33'E.), about 2 miles WNW
of Lille Vadsoya and about 0.5 mile offshore, is a skerry
fringed by a drying reef. It is marked by a black beacon tower.
9.33 Kjofjorden (69°50'N., 29°47'E.), a long fjord on the
W side of the island of Skogeroy, can be navigated by large
vessels. The shores of the fjord are high, rocky, and barren for
some distance inland, but have a less rugged character near
Neidenfjorden, which continues from Kjofjorden to the S.
In hard winters, the fjord may be icebound; however ice-
9.33

Vestre Jakobsely, about 5 miles WNW of Sandskjer, is a fish-

breakers usually keep a channel open from Kirkenes to Neiden,
ing harbor, with two short moles, at the mouth of a river. A
a town on the W side of Neidenfjorden. The tidal current runs
light is shown at the head of the W mole.
very strong between Korstjorden, a fjord on the SE side of Sk-
Mortensnes, a village, lies 6.5 miles WNW of Veste Jakob-
ogeroy and Neidenfjorden.
selv. A light is shown from a point close SE of the village.
The fairway in Korsfjorden is nearly free from dangers with-
9.33

Meskfjorden (70°10'N., 28°40'E.), an inlet lies on the N side

9.31

in the entrance, but strong squalls occur in the N part of

Pub. 182
248 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden

Kjofjorden during W winds. The fjord is well marked by navi- Depths—Limitations.— Vessels up to 63,581 dwt, with a
9.35

gational aids. Neidenfjorden extends about 4 miles SSW from maximum length of 210m, a maximum draft of 10.7m, and a
the S end of Korsfjorden; Munkefjorden continues SSW for 3 maximum beam of 48m, can berth at the harbor.
miles. Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
9.35

Anchorage.—Brashamn, a small landlocked harbor, lies

9.33 Kirkenes—Berth Information.
about 1 mile within the W side of the entrance to Korsfjorden Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 70m
9.35

and is suitable to small vessels with local knowledge. Vessels
with local knowledge can anchor on the W side of Neiden-
fjorden in a position about 1 mile SW of Skogeroypynten
Light. Vessels should not anchor in depths of less than 24m in
loa. Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but may be
ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an addi-
tional cost.
There is a coastal pilot station at Kirkenes. The lookout sta-
9.35

order to swing clear of the drying shore reef.
There are a number of other anchorages in the fjords, which
9.33
can best be seen on the chart.
tion for the pilots is off Oksebaasen (69°51'N., 30°07'E.).
Contact can be made via VHF channel 16.
Vessels at sea requiring a pilot should give at least 24 hours
9.35

notice, notifying confirmation or any alteration at least 2 hours

9.34 Bokfjorden (69°50'N., 30°07'E.) is entered between before the original time stipulated.
Bokfjorden Light and the NE point of the island of Kjelmoy, 2 Vessel Traffic Service.—For details, see Vardo in paragraph
9.35

miles to the W. The fjord extends about 9 miles S to a promon- 9.26.

tory on which stands the town of Kirkenes, where it divides in- Contact Information.—See the table titled Kirkenes—
9.35

to Elvenefjorden and Langfjorden. Contact Information.

About 4 miles within the entrance to the fjord lies Kors-
9.34

fjorden, which branches WSW for about 9 miles on the S side Kirkenes—Contact Information
of Skogeroy to a junction with Kjofjorden and Neidenfjorden.
The above fjords are well marked by navigational aids, which Port Director
can best be seen on the chart. Telephone 47-78-974744
Bokfjorden Light (69°53'N., 30°11'E.) is shown from a
9.34

Facsimile 47-78-977589
tower, 10m in height, standing on Hungerneset. A racon is lo-
cated at the light. Traffic Office
Anchorage.—Good anchorage for large vessels is obtain-
9.34

VHF VHF channels 12 and 16

able at the entrance to Langfjorden, SW of Kirkenes. Depths
up to 37m are found in this anchorage. Small vessels can an- Telephone 47-41-454992
chor in Soldaterbukt, in depths of 9.1 to 14.6m. This small bay E-mail havnevakt@svk.no
lies between the SW side of Prestoy and the mainland to the W.
Port Authority
9.35 Kirkenes (69°44'N., 30°03'E.) (World Port Index No. Telephone 47-78-977444
20650) lies at the head of a promontory separating Elvenes-
fjorden and Langfjorden. The harbor is used mainly for the E-mail havnevesenet@svk.no
loading of iron ore.

Kirkenes—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Kirkenes Port
Fishing, breakbulk, bunkers, and reef-
Jakobsnes 40m 6.5m 85.9m — 16.0m 2,979 dwt
er.
Container, project/heavy cargo, fishing
Industrikaia 120m 6.3-7.5m 7.5m 7m 26.0m 24,783 dwt vessels, breakbulk, bunkers, and reefer.
336 teu.
Aggregates, cruise vessels, containers,
offshore, project/heavy cargo, steel
Dypvannskaia 92m 11.2m 210m 10.7m 48.0m 63,581 dwt products, fishing, breakbulk, bunkers,
and reefer. The loa could increase with
harbormaster’s permission. 912 teu.
Ro/pax, fast ferries, offshore vessels,
Hutigrutekaia 104m 5.3m 150m 4.8m 23.6m 2,979 dwt fishing vessels, breakbulk, bunkers,
and reefer.

Pub. 182
 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 249

Kirkenes—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depth Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Chemicals, clean products, offshore
Inportkaia 138m 8.2m 147m — 22.0m 14,878 dwt vessels, fishing vessels, breakbulk,
multipurpose, and bunkers.

By Are G Nilsen via Wikimedia Commons

9.35

Kirkenes
9.35

Anchorage.—Vessels waiting to load ore can anchor in the
entrance to Langfjorden, about 0.5 mile W of Kirkenes
Church, in a depth of about 33m.
Range lights, in line bearing 208°, lead to this anchorage.
9.35
There is also anchorage 0.15 mile NE of a mud pipeline, in a
head of the fjord, in 29 to 37m, good holding ground. The best
anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge is in Inner-
hamn, on the SE side of the fjord, in a depth of about 20m,
good holding ground.
The fjord trends S for about 9 miles to Kjerrisneset, then
9.36

depth of 27m, close off the harbor.
Caution.—It is necessary that vessels lying in the harbor at
9.35
Kirkenes should pay attention to the breaking up of ice at the end
of the winter. Spring tides and a S wind clear ice from the harbor,
but it is considerably later before the main ice from the head of El-
venesfjorden drifts seaward. If at anchor, drifting ice may cause a
vessel to drag anchor. A vessel moored to a quay should be
WSW for 3 miles. In winter, ice usually lies from the head of
the fjord to Kjerrisneset. Jarfjorden Light is shown from a ped-
estal on the E side of the fjord, about 0.5 mile SSW of the E en-
trance point. A vessel entering Jarfjorden should keep nearer
the W side of the fjord to avoid the dangers on the E side of the
entrance.
The best anchorage in Jarfjorden is in Lanabukt, the inlet E
9.36

moored flush against the berth to prevent ice from lodging be-
tween the ship and the quay, which could carry away her hawsers.
9.36 Holmengrafjorden (69°51'N., 30°19'E.), the en-
trance of which lies about 4 miles ESE of Bokfjorden, is en-
of Hinnoy, where there are depths of 20 to 24m. The inlet is
free of ice and is a port of call for coastal steamers. Small ves-
sels with local knowledge can anchor near the head of the
fjord, off Jarfjordenbotn, in depths of up to 22m.
Sagfjorden (69°49'N., 30°32'E.) lies about 3 miles E of
9.36

tered between Jarfjordennes and Trifannes, about 1 mile NNW.
A shoal, which dries, lies about 0.2 mile N of Trifannes and is
marked by an iron perch. Holmengraholmen lies in the fairway
of the fjord about 2 miles W of Jarfjordnes.
Jarfjorden and is entered between Sagfjordenneset and Kolje-
neset. An unmarked rock, with a depth of about 1m, lies in this
narrow channel 0.5 mile WSW of the entrance.
Anchorage is available for small vessels with local knowl-
9.36

Anchorage is available in mid-channel 0.2 mile from the

9.36 edge in summer near its head, about 1 mile within the entrance,

Pub. 182
250 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden
but is seldom used.
Pasvikhamn (69°49'N., 30°35'E.) lies about 1 mile E of
9.36
Sagfjorden, and is entered between Dodesneset and Vardene-
set. The harbor is good at all times of the year for vessels with
local knowledge. Anchorage is available, in depths of up to
33m, about 1 mile within the entrance. A swell occurs within
the inlet during NW winds. There is an islet and rocks, awash,
on the SW side of the entrance. A vessel entering the inlet
should pass E of the islet and rocks. A black beacon stands on
Vardeneset.
9.37 Ytre Smastraumneset (69°48'N., 30°41'E.) lies
about 2 miles E of Pasvikhamn and affords anchorage in sum-
mer to small vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 11 to
15m, clay. There are mooring rings on both sides of Ytre Smas-
traumneset.
Kobbholmfjorden (69°47'N., 30°44'E.) lies about 2 miles
9.37
SE of Ytre Smastraumneset and is entered by passing between
Heikeneset (69°48'N., 30°44'E.), and Ytre Kobbholmen Light.
Pub. 182
A number of islets and rocks lie on the NE side of the fjord
9.37
and can best be seen on the chart.
Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in Storbukt,
9.37
on the W side of the fjord, in depths of up to 45.7m, about
183m offshore. Vessels are advised to secure to the shore due
to rapidly increasing depths.
Anchorage is also available on the SE of the fjord in Fabrik-
9.37
bukt, in depths up to 44m, about 2 miles SE of Storbukt.
Jakobselv (69°47'N., 30°50'E.), a river, the mouth of which
9.37
lies 8.5 miles E of Jarfjorden, flows from lakes and marshes 40
miles inland. Grense Jakobselv is a village on the left bank of
the river near its mouth. The alignment of two lighted beacons,
bearing 208° and situated on the W bank of the river, indicates
the seaward section of the boundary between Norway and Rus-
sia. A white stone building with a tower stands on the W side
of the mouth of the river and is conspicuous from seaward for a
considerable distance.
There is a black buoy moored about 0.2 mile N of the mouth
9.37
of Jakobselv. It also marks the frontier of Norway.
 10.
Sector 10—Jan Mayen

10.0 Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
SECTOR 10 — CHART INFORMATION
Pub. 182

251

SECTOR 10
JAN MAYEN
Plan.—This sector describes the island of Jan Mayen from
10.0
Sorkapp, the SW extremity, to Nordkapp, the island’s north-
easternmost point. The sector also describes the numerous bays
of Jan Mayen.
General Remarks
10.1 Jan Mayen lies about 250 miles E of the E coast of
Greenland and about 300 miles NE of the NE extremity of Ice-
land. The island is about 30 miles long and lies in a SW to NE
direction. Its narrowest part, which is less than 2 miles wide, is
in the central region. The island is important chiefly because of
its strategic position for weather forecasting.
The island, which apparently originated entirely by volcanic
10.1
processes, is divided into three distinct portions. The NE part is
almost entirely occupied by Beerenberg, an active volcano over
30 miles around the base. Beerenberg is one of the largest
known volcanic cones. The crater, over 1 mile in diameter, is
filled with a glacier which escapes by a break in the N wall and
cascades down to the sea. The highest peak in the crater is
2,277m high. Beerenberg is the northernmost active volcano on
10.1 Beerenberg volcano lies on the NE part of Jan Mayen
253
land in the world.
Beerenberg dominates the island from all directions and is
10.1
visible from a great distance in clear weather. In fog, the sum-
mit is sometimes suddenly revealed
The low central region consists of many lava flows and vol-
10.1
canic sand deserts, with almost no vegetation. There are a num-
ber of long beaches of dark volcanic sand, mixed with shining
olive green crystals and strewn with driftwood, probably from
the great rivers of N Siberia. In the NE part of this region are
two lagoons, or fresh water lakes, separated from the sea by
narrow sand bars.
The SW region consists of scattered peaks, which rise to an
10.1
elevation of 768m, and then, in most places, fall steeply to the
sea. In some of the valleys, there are numerous small volcanic
cones which interrupt the natural drainage from the hillsides to
form small lakes. Mist is common in this area.
The vicinity of land may be indicated by sea birds, which
10.1
swoop down in great numbers around a vessel. The cries of
these birds on land is like the distant roaring of a cascade and
may be of assistance in warning vessels of the proximity of the
cliffs they inhabit.
By Hagman (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons
10.1
Pub. 182
254 Sector 10. Jan Mayen
Winds—Weather.—The prevailing wind direction is E.
Gale winds and storms are usually from a NE to NW direction,
although NE winds are not very common. From June through
August, frequently the wind is out of the S to SW. Calm weath-
er is rare, but occurs mostly from May to August.
Fog occurs most frequently in calm weather or with E to SE
10.1
winds. Frequently, there is fog during most of the summer. The
island can be wrapped in fog for weeks. When fog hovers close
over the sea around the island in calm weather, the wind will
hold it back against the weather side of the island, while the lee
side remains clear. With N or S winds, however, the fog can be
piled over the low central part of the island, whereas the moun-
tains on Nordjan and Sorjan force it high aloft so that it drifts
in the lee as light clouds. This means that one side of the island
can have extremely poor visibility, while there is clear weather
with sunshine on the opposite side.
Precipitation occurs very frequently, although not in large
10.1
quantities. September and October are the wettest months,
whereas May and June are the driest. Precipitation mostly falls
as snow. However, it is rare for a precipitation to fall exclusive-
ly as snow during a month’s interval, even during the winter
months.
Ice.—The island is usually affected by sea ice from mid-No-
10.1
vember to mid-April. In severe seasons, the island may be af-
fected as early as late October and as late as early August, and
in a warm year, the island may be affected by ice perhaps for
only several weeks during winter months
Encountering mist is very common around Jan Mayen and
10.1
visibility is often poor. The temperature of the surface water
should be taken frequently, perhaps hourly. Extreme caution
should be taken of encountering the ice barrier, especially
when the seawater temperature falls to or below 3°C.
From mid-July to mid-August is the best time for finding an
10.1
opening in the ice around the island and for making a landing.
During this time of year, the sea around the island is often calm
or there exists a light breeze off the land. Making a landing is
extremely difficult or impossible with a swell or any waves that
break along the shore.
Tides—Currents.—Jan Mayen lies in the boundary water
10.1
between the East Greenland Current and an eddy from the Gulf
Current and the North Atlantic Current, both running in the
same direction, and causing a SW main current.
The tidal range varies between 0.5 and 1.2m and causes a N
10.1
current with rising water and a S current with falling water.
With the addition of the variable depth conditions, irregular
10.1
current conditions are thereby produced around the island.
Generally, there is a SW flow of 0.5 to 1 knot, sometimes rising
to 1.5 knots, although accurate observations have not been
made.
During spring tides, inshore along the NW coast, the flow
10.1
may become N. Because of bottom conditions, irregular flows
or eddies occur, particularly S of the island in the vicinity of
Sorkapp and Strumflakect, a small body of water close to and S
of Sorkapp.
Depths—Limitations.—Except when in the vicinity of
10.1
Sorkapp, and Losbaten, a small islet on the SE coast, a vessel,
by keeping a distance of about 1 mile offshore, will be outside
the 20m danger curve off Jan Mayen. It is recommended that
vessel navigate at least 2 miles offshore when in the vicinity of
Sorkapp or Losbaten.
Pub. 182
In the N, the great depths run right into the island from
10.1
Soraustkapp to Nordvestkapp.
Lvndquistflaket stretches NW about 15 miles from the center
10.1
of the island toward Marobanken, with a depth of 133m in the
shallowest part.
Stimen, a shoal ridge about 2 mile WNW of the W extremity
10.1
of Sorjan, runs about 4 miles in a NE to SW direction. There is
a series of shoal heads here, with a least depth of 123m.
Hoybergrenna, between the shoal ridge and land, has in-
10.1
creasing depths from 350 to 700m to the S. There are also
peaks that reach up to 200m above the surrounding bottom.
From Sorjan, Jan Mayenbanken stretches S out to sea with
10.1
increasing depths. The depth is thus about 500m at a distance
of about 40 miles S of the island.
Straumflaket stretches from about 4 miles S of Sorjan for 10
10.1
miles S. The shallowest part of the bank is Bouwensonbaen,
with a depth of 6m, which lies about 9 miles SSE of Sorkapp.
A 6m shoal, whose position is doubtful, was reported to lie
about 1 mile S of Bouwensonbaen. There are also other shoals
on this bank which reach up to depths of as little as 12m.
Sarsbanken extends about 20 miles E from Jan Mayen, with
10.1
depths of 250 to 300m. The bottom then falls away to great
depths on the N side of Sarabanken.
Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
10.1
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
10.1
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
10.1
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
Southeast Coast
10.2 For about 6 miles between Sorvestkapp and Kapp Wi-
er, there is a continuous undulating cliff about 150 to 300m
high, falling vertically down to the sea or a rather narrow
beach. Small landslides into the sea often occur along this
coast.
The W point of Sorvestkapp, 214m high, ends in a sharp bill
10.2
as a kind of portal over a remarkable 20m high hole right
through the rock.
Sjuskjera stretches about 0.5 mile W from Sorvestkapp. This
10.2
skerry lies 0.2 mile from land and is a 27m high inaccessible
rock with a profile like a goose. A couple of the other skerries
are about 3m high and are almost like large stones to look at,
while the others are rocks, awash.
10.3 Sorkapp (70°50'N., 8°59'W.) is the S extremity of the
island. It is foul within 0.3 mile from land. Due S of the point,
the 20m bank runs out to about 1 mile from land, with a 13m
depth at its extremity. Sorkappgrunnen, a 10m shoal, is located
about 0.2 to 0.3 mile outside the 20m curve, slightly more than
1 mile S of Sorkapp.
From Sorkapp, the coast continues 1 mile ENE toward Hjel-
10.3
men, 341m hugh, with the easily-recognized points and skerry
of Kjeglene lying off.
Northeast from there is Fugleodden, which forms the W lim-
10.3
 Sector 10. Jan Mayen 255

its of Hornbaekbukta. To the E, the bay is bounded by Kapp

Wien and is about 2 miles wide. Vessels find a good lee in
Hornbaekbukta against winds from the NW quarter, anchoring
in depths of 10 to 20m.
The N part of the bay has an uneven bottom, with somewhat
10.3

shallower, sharp peaks. In the E part of the bay, about 0.5 mile
S of Kapp Wien, there is Fyrtarnet, a 47m high rock that is nar-
rower at the base than on top. It is perhaps the most remarkable
natural landmark on the coast.
The conical Flykollen, 419m high, standing inside Kapp
10.3

Wien, is also easy to recognize where it runs in an even curve

down to the cape itself, which in turn is comparatively low and
divided at its end.
There is a stretch of about 3 miles, from Kapp Wien to Kapp
10.3

Traill in the NE, that is very foul to about 0.7 mile from land in
Brotvika, just on the NE side of Kapp Wien. There are also a
several high basalt rocks in the sea.
Schiertzegga, 378m high, lies just S of Kapp Traill, with a
10.3

stairway-shaped and splintered profile to the NE, and with a

hat on the highest point.
As a rule, the lower ledge will be visible beneath the fog and
10.3 10.4 By https://snl.no/Jan_Mayen (Store Norske Leksiken via Wikimedia Commons
is easily recognizable by a point which is separated from the Olonkinbyen Weather Station
10.4

rest of the land by a deep hollow.

10.4 Rekvedbukta (70°57'N., 8°34'W.) is a bay entered
between Kapp Traill and Eggoya, 217m high. Along the first 2
miles NE from Kapp Traill, the coast consists of a low, heavily
anchor throughout the bay in W to N weather. With such condi-
tions, fog usually comes rolling across the low, central part of
the island.
With W winds, vessels anchor best between Losbaten and
10.5

splintered cliff edge. In the middle of this stretch is Batvika. A
comparatively good boat harbor with a sandy beach on the N
side, which provides room for hauling up boats. A marine farm
exists E of Batvika and is the first possible landing place when
proceeding on the NE stretch from Sorkapp, and serves as the
nearest harbor for Olonkinbyen.
Olonkinbyen is the only inhabited place on Jan Mayer. It
10.4
serves as the base for the staff of the LORAN station and the
Jan Mayen radio station. A road runs from Olonkinbyen across
to Kvalrossbukta, on the opposite side of the island.
With E wind conditions, landing is difficult in Batvika. Un-
10.4
der such conditions, Kvalrossbukta is an excellent harbor.
Batvika, while with N winds the best lee is to the E of Eggoy-
bukta. Smaller vessels can lie here with the wind due NE if
they go far into the bay. With particularly strong winds, large
clouds of sand swirl up from the plain and are driven outward.
10.6 Eggoya (70°58'N., 8°24'W.), 217m high, is the re-
mains of an old crater, and is really a peninsula. The outer part
is so cut away by the sea that it forms a bay between two steep
points. From Eggoya, the coast runs 8 miles ENE to Soraust-
kapp. This stretch is fairly straight. The large, sandy plain be-
hind Eggoya opens to the 1 mile wide Jamesonbukta.
Gouwernaerbaen is a 10m shoal that is about 1 mile S of
10.6

There are masts for the radio and navigation systems erected in
the shore area NE along Rekvedbskta, with the radio station it-
self right in the S part. There is an air strip just E of the radio
station; S of this is an old, renovated hunting hut.
The shoreline along Rekvedbukta consists of a low sandy
10.4
plain. Inside the beach, there is the large Sorlaguna.
Jamesonbukta. From Jamesonbukta E, there is a 1 mile wide
belt of lava rocks. Turnbukta cuts in a little way in the N part of
this. Some projecting points, together with several skerries,
provide a considerable lee against swell, and the bay is there-
fore well-suited for hauling up boats.
To the ENE of this lava belt there is a new sand plain, Ull-
10.6

On the N side of the lagoon is Soyla, a large basalt rock,

10.4
114m high, which is a conspicuous landmark.
10.5 Losbaten (70°56'N., 8°40'W.) is a small islet lying S
ringsanden, with a lagoon beneath Kreklinghogda, red crater
wall, 61m high. The sand plain then stretches to Kapp Hap as a
narrow strip along the foot of the mountain.
Presidentsteinen, 12m high, is an easily-identifiable offshore
10.6

of the radio station. about 0.7 mile from land. islet about 1 mile WSW of Kapp Hap.
Losbatrevet is a shoal, about 3m deep, that extends 0.5 mile
10.5

ESE. East Coast

Nansenflua, a 2m shoal, lies 1 mile offshore and 4 miles NE
10.5

from Losbatrevet. Abnormal magnetic variations, to the extent
of 20°, were experienced in the area about 5 miles E of Losbat-
en. Nansenflua is an underwater rock with a small top surface
and about 20m high vertical sides.
Rekvedbukta is otherwise clear, with an evenly rising bot-
10.5
tom, except for a 13m shoal about 1 mile NE of Losbaten.
10.7 Along a stretch of about 3 miles around Soraustkapp
(71°01'N., 8°00'W.), the mountainsides plunge down into the
sea from heights of up to 200m. Soraustkapp itself appears as a
break in the cliff edge in about the middle of this area. The
coast continues as steeply N to Austbukta.
Several glacier arms push down on this stretch; two of them
10.7

When vessels keep away from the shoals described, they can have their fronts in the sea. The N front is really two parallel

Pub. 182
256 Sector 10. Jan Mayen
glaciers, Prince Haralds Bre and Frielebreen, which come to-
gether at the lower end.
On the stretch from these glacier fronts and further N to Aus-
10.7
tkapp, the coastline is new as a result of the lava masses which
burst out during a volcanic eruption. Due to the effects of the
sea and the steep sea bed, one cannot assume the shoreline is
stable.
North of this new land, there is a low cliff edge between
10.7
Austkapp and Nordkapp, which rises up to a height of about
70m midway between the capes.
The coast here forms the end of the ridge of Breerenberg to the
10.7
NE with several craters. The two most conspicuous are Sarsk-
rateret, 264m high, and Hohenlohekrateret, 121m high, nearest
the cliff.
In no place off the E coast does the 20m bank reach further
10.7
out than 0.5 mile.
Austbuka and Clandeboyebukta were formerly the only plac-
10.7
es around the island where vessels lay well in SW weather.
Volcanic eruptions, however, may have changed the bottom
conditions, which were previously steep outside the danger
line. Strong katabatic winds can occur off the coast here.
North Coast
10.8 Nordkapp (71°10'N., 7°57'W.) lies 1 mile NNW of
Austkapp and is moderately high, with a rugged background.
From Nordkapp, the flat Kokssletta extends with a width of
600 to 1200m across to Krossbutkta, about 2.5 miles W.
Kokssletta is made up of coke like lava.
With S winds, Nordbukta, W of Nordkapp, provides good
10.8
anchorage for smaller vessels, but the bottom falls off steeply
outside the danger line.
Krossbukta, a better harbor, has sandy beaches. The bottom
10.8
here rises evenly up from 50m and most often the wind is ei-
ther out of the S or E.
Kapp Muyen, on the NW coast, is 7 miles SW of Krossbuk-
10.8
ta. Kapp Muyen is not recommended as a landing area, espe-
cially in the N part, where the mountain falls almost vertically
400m. Three glacier arms emerge with fronts in the sea on this
stretch. Weyprechtbreen is the largest.
Pub. 182
West Coast
10.9 South of Kapp Muyen, the coastal plain gradually
widens. There are some steep cliffs that meet the sea. Further
down the coast, the buildings of the a former radio station stand
at Libergsletta. S of Libergsletta, there is Nordlaguna which is
separated from the sea by a low shore bank.
The coastal waters on this stretch are clear except, for a 10m
10.9
shoal 0.3 mile offshore just S of Kapp Muyen; a rock, awash,
about 183m off Fugleberget near Nordlaguna; and a 5m shoal
about 0.1 mile from land N of Danielsenkrateret.
Fugleberget forms the separation between Stasjonsbukta and
10.9
Maria Myschbukta, both of which are excellent anchorages
when the weather allows.
Southwest Coast
10.10 Brielletarnet (70°58'N., 8°42'W.) 91m high, has the
same formation as Fyrtarnet on the SE coast. It is connected to
land by Kvalrossen, 157m high; together they form the most
remarkable place on the W side of the island.
Kvalrossbukta lies on the S side of Kvalrossen and is the best
10.10
harbor on the coast during favorable weather conditions.
The bays further S were used by whalers. Apart from Tom-
10.10
merbukta, the N bay, and Guineabukta, the S bay, they are not
particularly suited as harbors. In many places, landing is inac-
cessible because of an almost continuous cliff edge, which is
formed by the distinctively gray and wide Lavastraumen in the
N. This comes from the mountains in the interior of Sorjan and
ends at the edge of the sea at Kapp Rudsen (70°56'N.,
8°53'W.).
From Kapp Rudsen, the waters SW are relatively foul, with
10.10
many skerries near land and with shoals out to about 0.1 mile
from shore. Fuglesoyla, 14m high, is a rock about 183m off the
coast, 1.75 miles SW from Kapp Rudsen, which provides a
good landmark.
Between Guineabukta and Sorbukta, there is Kraterflya, with
10.10
Richterkrateret, 108m high; Hoyberg, 68m high; and Arneth-
krateret, 111m high. The plain between the last two and Sor-
bukta has an over boiled surface, with upright figures in places.
Sorbukta is a much-used harbor, which provides excellent
10.10
shelter against winds between the NNE and E.
 257
11.
Sector 11—Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)

11.0 Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
SECTOR 11 — CHART INFORMATION

Pub. 182

SECTOR 11
SVALBARD ARCHIPELAGO (SPITSBERGEN)
Plan.—This sector describes the Svalbard Archipelago, the
11.0
name given to all territory between the parallels of 74°N and
81°N, and between the meridians of 10°E and 35°E. It com-
prises the main group of islands consisting of Spitsbergen
(Vestpitsbergen), Nordaustlandet, Barentsoya, Edgeoya, Prins
Karls Forland, and numerous smaller islets, and the outlying is-
lands of Kvitoya, Kong Karls Land, Hopen, and Bjornoya.
General Remarks
11.1 Winds—Weather.—Data on wind direction and ve-
locity show that gales tend to be somewhat less frequent from
N of latitude 70°N. Winds in Bjornoya are very variable; there
is little diurnal variation.
The ground W of Bjornoya is less foggy than Bjornoya it-
11.1
self, and in the area around the island there is a rapid increase
in fog frequency from W to E. In July, 40 per cent of observa-
tions report fog to the NE of the island.
Fog can be expected when the wind changes to E after a spell
11.1
of SW winds while pressure remains high. Fog has been known
to persist over the island for as long as 19 days.
The coasts of Svalbard are subject to squalls which develop
11.1
suddenly, even from a calm, and falling snow may rapidly
obliterate landmarks. Downslope winds from the glacier are a
common feature.
Fog is rather frequent at Edgeoya and Nordaustlandet and is
11.1
more frequent on the E coast of the island than on the W coast
of Spitsbergen.
The light conditions on Svalbard are very special, as in polar
11.1
regions in general, and are rather different from those we are
used to in lower latitudes. The further N one moves to the polar
circle, the longer the periods when the sun stays above the hori-
zon day and night in summer (midnight sun), and below the
horizon in winter (polar night)
The table shows when the “perpetual day” and “perpetual
11.1
night” begin and end for the latitudes covered by Svalbard.
These periods increase by about 6 weeks from 74° to 81°N,
corresponding to 6 days for each degree of latitude one travels
N, which again means about 2 hours, 26 minutes for every nau-
tical mile.
Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
11.1
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
Ship Reporting System.—The Svalbard Reporting System
11.1
requires vessels to report to NOR VTS when within the territo-
Midnight Sun
Latitude
From To No. of Days
74°N May 3 Aug. 9 99
259
rial waters (12 miles) of Svalbard, including all islands, islets,
and reefs between latitude 74°00'N, latitude 81°00'N, longitude
10°00'E, and longitude 5°00'E. For further information, see
Norway—Ship Reporting System in Pub. 180, Sailing Direc-
tions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
Bjornoya
11.2 Bjornoya (74°27'N., 19°04'E.), the S island of Sval-
bard, lies with its S extremity about 250 miles NNW of Nord-
kapp, the N point of Norway and about 140 miles SSE of
Vestspitsbergen. The island is triangular in shape, with the
apex pointing S; its length from N to S is about 10 miles and its
greatest width is about 8 miles.
The S and E part of the island are mountainous; the N part is
11.2
a stony and barren plateau. The coasts of the island are charac-
terized by high and almost vertical cliffs. Many of the steep
cliffs are fringed with beaches on which landing can be effect-
ed in fine weather, but few of the beaches afford access to the
interior of the island.
Bjornoya is often entirely or partly obscured by mist, but
11.2
Miseryfjellet, a mountain on the E coast, is frequently visible
when the lower parts of the island are hidden. In fine weather,
the mountain may be seen for a distance of up to 40 miles.
A Norwegian government meteorological and radio station
11.2
is situated at the N end of the island and is marked by three
high radio masts. A radiobeacon is located near the meteoro-
logical station. A consol beacon transmits about 2 miles SSE of
the radiobeacon.
Ice.—Bjornoya is usually affected by ice from late Decem-
11.2
ber to late March. In a heavy ice year, however, it may be af-
fected as early as late October and as late as early May. In a
light season, it is effected by ice for at least a few weeks in
winter. Small icebergs are sometimes found in the vicinity of
Bjornoya from May to October.
Tides—Currents.—The current runs around Bjornoya at an
11.2
unusual rate and in certain places raises a tremendous sea,
which is quite dangerous to small craft. The sea is especially
heavy around the S end of the island, between Sylen and the
entrance to Sorhamn, where the current attains a rate of about 3
knots. Tide rip around the island are experienced far out to sea.
On the rising tide, the current runs N on the E and W coasts
11.2
and W on the N coast. After the occurrence of HW, the rate of
the current decreases, and there may be slack water for as long
as 0.5 hour. On the falling tide, the current runs S on the E and
W coasts and E on the N coast.
Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
11.2
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
Polar Night
Latitude
From To No. of Days
Nov. 10 Feb. 1 84 74°N
Pub. 182
260 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)

Midnight Sun Polar Night

Latitude Latitude
From To No. of Days From To No. of Days
75°N Apr. 30 Aug. 12 105 Nov. 6 Feb. 5 92 75°N
76°N Apr. 27 Aug. 15 111 Nov. 3 Feb. 8 98 76°N
77°N Apr. 24 Aug. 18 117 Oct. 31 Feb. 11 92 77°N
78°N Apr. 21 Aug. 21 123 Oct. 28 Feb. 14 110 78°N
79°N Apr. 21 Aug. 21 123 Oct. 28 Feb. 14 110 79°N
80°N Apr. 15 Aug. 27 135 Oct. 22 Feb. 20 122 80°N
81°N Apr. 12 Aug. 30 141 Oct. 19 Feb. 23 128 81°N

11.2

11.2 Bjornoya from S

Anchorage.—There are no sheltered harbors in Bjornoya

11.2
and vessels surprised by the weather are forced to find shelter
on the lee side of the island and to anchor close in under the
cliffs, behind the points, or in the bays.
In good weather, anchorage may be obtained anywhere
11.2
around the island. Anchorage within a distance of 2 miles off-
shore may be obtained, in depths of 15 to 36m, most places be-
ing sand bottom.
Spitsbergen Bank (75°00'N., 21°00'E.), defined by the
11.2
183m curve, lies with its outer edges at least 25 miles S and W
of Bjornoya; then the bank extends N, NE, and E of the island.
Though the bank is not completely surveyed except in the vi-
cinity of the island, depths of 22m and 18m have been obtained
43 miles N of the island. Depths of less than 37m are frequent
have been reported on the bank in the vicinity of Bjornoya.
Bjornoya—East Coast
11.3 Kapp Bull (74°21'N., 19°05'E.), the S extremity of
Bjornoya, is a steep headland, 373m high, close off which lie
three islets. The coast on either side of Kapp Bull is steep-to;
however, there are no harbor or landing places and strong
squalls frequently occur close inshore. Small boats are cau-
tioned when proceeding along the coast during spring and early
summer, when ice is melting, for landslides and falling rocks
are almost continuous. Kapp Kolthoff, lies 0.75 mile ENE of
Kapp Bull and Alkeholmen, an islet, lies between them.
Sorhamna, a small bay, lies 1.5 miles NNE of Kapp Kolthoff.
11.3

around these two soundings. Abnormal magnetic variations The E side of the bay is protected by a steep and narrow islet.

Pub. 182
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
The depths in the middle of the bay are about 14.6m and great-
er, shoaling to less than 9.1m at its head. Anchorage in the bay
may be obtained as convenient, but the holding ground is not
good. At the head of the bay is a small beach where landing is
possible; however, it was reported that the height of the cliffs
prevented access to the interior.
Roedvika (74°24'N., 19°13'E.), a small open bay, lies 2
11.3
miles NNE of Sorhamna. During W winds, this bay affords the
most secure anchorage on the E side of Bjornoya. A depth of
11m is found in the middle of the bay.
Miserygrunnen, a dangerous rocky shoal which is often hard
11.3
to distinguish, lies close offshore SE of the S summit of Mis-
eryfjellet. Great care should be taken when approaching Roed-
vika from the N. Evensenbukta, a small bay, lies 3.5 miles
NNE of Roedvika. There is a landing place in the bay, but there
is no suitable anchorage due to rocks and strong tidal currents.
Austervag (74°30'N., 19°12'E.), a small cove, lies about 2
11.3
miles NNW of Evensenbukta. Two beacons stand close within
the head of the cove; when in line, bearing 218°, they indicates
the approach to Austervag. Small vessels with local knowledge
can obtain anchorage during S or W winds. Vessels are cau-
tioned, should the wind change to NW, a heavy sea soon sets in
and vessels must leave. Two radio masts stand 0.5 mile SE of
the range beacons.
Bjornoya—North Coast
11.4 The N coast of Bjornoya affords the best landing plac-
es and is comparatively free from off-lying dangers. Nord-
kapp (74°31'N., 19°07'E.) forms the N extremity of the island.
Herwighamn is an indentation in the coast and lies about 2
miles WSW of Nordkapp. A small stone pier, with a depth of
4m alongside, is located at Herwighamn. Gravodden, a prom-
ontory, lies 0.75 mile W of Herwighamn. A meteorological and
radio station stands 0.3 mile SSE of Gravodden. A number of
lighted radio and consol masts stand near the station and up to
2 miles E of the station. Herwighamn affords anchorage to
small vessels, in a depth of 10.9m.
Nordhamn (74°31'N., 18°59'E.) is an open bay entered be-
11.4
tween Gravodden and Kapp Kjellstrom, the extremity of a
small promontory 1 mile W. Emmaholmane, a chain of islets,
extends 0.3 mile N from a position close W of Kapp Kjell-
storm. The islets are very prominent and cannot be mistaken
for other islets on the N coast.
The shore at the head of Nordhamn is low and flat, with a
11.4
small projection which divides the head into two bays. Anchor-
age, during offshore winds, is obtainable off these bays accord-
ing to draft. A vessel anchored, in 15m, nearly 0.5 mile NW of
Gravodden Kobbebukta (74°31'N., 18°54'E.), an open bay,
lies between Kapp Kjellstorm and Taggodden, a point about 2
miles WSW.
Anchorage may be obtained in offshore winds 0.25 mile off
11.4
the head of the bay, in a charted depth of 9m. In the E part of
the bay, the shores slope evenly down to the sea; landing with
access to the interior is possible, but in the W part the cliffs are
unscalable.
Bjornoya—West Coast
11.5 From Taggodden, the coast curves SW and S for
261
about 2 miles to Kapp Duner (74°29'N., 18°46'E.), which is
the NW point of a forked promontory forming the W extremity
of Bjornoya. Grytvika, on the NE side of Kapp Duner, affords
anchorage to small craft with local knowledge during E or S
winds. Teltvika, close SE of Kapp Duner, is a small cove from
which landing and access to the interior are possible.
Lunekevika (74°28'N., 18°47'E.), a bay about 0.5 mile wide
11.5
at its entrance, lies on the S side of the Kapp Duner promonto-
ry; landing can be effected on a short sandy beach, which af-
fords access to the interior of the island. The bay affords
anchorage for vessels with local knowledge.
Vernevagen, a bay, lies with Kapp Elizabeth, its S entrance
11.5
point, about 2 miles SSE of Kapp Duner. The entrance to the
bay is obstructed on its N and S sides by extensive shoals.
Close N of Kapp Elizabeth is a landing place. A cairn of stones
stands about 0.3 mile ESE of Kapp Elizabeth.
Kapp Ruth projects from the coast about 3 miles SSE of
11.5
Kapp Elizabeth; midway between the two is Kapp Hanna, near
which a beacon stands. Kapp Maria lies about 1 mile SE of
Kapp Ruth; on its N side a group of islets lies close inshore.
Caution.—A depth of 2.7m was reported (1994) to lie 1.8
11.5
miles WSW of Kapp Ruth.
11.6 Landnordingsvika is a bay entered between Kapp
Kare and Kapp Harry, about 1 mile to the SE. Shelter is afford-
ed in this bay during E and NE gales, but winds from other di-
rections may raise a heavy sea. Vessels should approach with
the middle of the bay bearing about 045°, and then can anchor,
in depths greater than 9.1m, with Kapp Harry in range about
133°, and in line with the outermost large rock on Skredneset, a
point 0.3 mile farther SE.
Sylen (74°22'N., 19°02'E.), an awl-shaped pillar of rock,
11.6
80m high, lies about 2 miles SSE of Kapp Kare. Hornvika, an
indentation on the S side of Hambergfjellet, lies close SE of
Sylen. Stappen (74°20'N., 19°04'E.), lying NW of Sylen, is a
conspicuous pillar-shaped rock about 186m high.
The coast on either side of the S extremity of Bjornoya is
11.6
steep-to and there are no landing places. Small craft should ex-
ercise great care along this coast, especially during spring and
early summer, when the melting ice causes continuous land-
slides of rock. The sea raised by tidal currents is especially
heavy at the S end of the island, between Sylen and the en-
trance to Sorhamna on the E coast.
Spitsbergen
11.7 Spitsbergen, the largest island in the main group
forming Svalbard, is situated about 400 miles N of Norway. A
thick sheet of ice covers a large portion of the interior of the is-
land, through it projects numerous sharp peaks. The whole of
the W coast of the island is mountainous. The valleys opening
towards the coast, at the heads of which is a chain of moun-
tains, are in most cases filled with permanent ice.
Regulations.—Vessels may not possess or use heavy fuel
11.7
oils in the following protected areas in Svalbard:
1. Northwest Spitzbergen National Park.
2. Forlandet National Park.
3. Northeast Svalbard Nature Reserve.
4. Southeast Svalbard Nature Reserve.
Further information about protected areas in Svalbard can be
11.7
Pub. 182
262 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
11.6
11.6 Courtesy of Marek Szymocka
11.6 Polish Polar Station in NW Spitsbergen
found in the web site of the Governor of Svalbard.
When approaching the W coast of the island, considerable
11.7
reliance may be placed on soundings. Deep submarine valleys
penetrate into the fjords, while the coast between them is front-
ed by banks on which the depths in most cases increase regu-
larly close inshore from 45 to 90m.
Due to the effect of the warm West Spitsbergen Current,
11.7
most parts of the W coast are usually accessible from late May
to early November. However, in a bad ice year, this coast may
be affected from mid-October to late July. In a light year, apart
Pub. 182
11.6 Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority
Stappen from SE
from the formation of fast ice in fjords, this coast may remain
practically ice-free throughout the winter.
There are several polar research station on Spitbergen. On
11.7
the NW coast just S of Ny-Alesund is a station owned and
manned by the Nicolaus Copernicus University of Poland. The
Institute of Geophysics of the Polish Academy of Science op-
erates another station located on the SW coast in Hornsund.
Governor of Svalbard Home Page
https://www.sysselmannen.no/en/laws-and-
regulations
Sorkapp Land
11.8 Sorkapp Land (76°50'N., 16°25'E.) is a peninsula, 27
miles long in a N-S direction, at the S end of Spitsbergen. The
coast of Sorkapp Land is one of the most exposed in Spitsbergen,
and drift ice may be encountered off it at any time. Sorkappoya, a
narrow island, lies off the S coast of Sorkapp Land. Sorkapp, the S
extremity of the island, is surmounted by a beacon. A large lagoon
is entered from the W side of the island. Flakskjeret is a low islet
lying near the outer end of a chain of islets and rocks extending 3.5
miles ESE from the E extremity of Sorkappoya.
Sommerfeldbukta indents the S coast of Spitsbergen for
11.8
about 4 miles, and lies about 3 miles N of the N extremity of
Sorkappoya. Oyrlandet is a narrow and level tongue of land ex-
tending 5 miles SSW and forming the W side of Sommerfeld-
bukta. A hunter’s hut stands on each entrance point to
Sommerfeldbukta.
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
11.8 The Stanislaw Siedilecki Polish Polar Station in Hornsund
Anchorage is obtainable off the entrance to Sommerfeldbuk-
11.8
ta, in a depth of about 8m. The depths within the entrance are
less than 3m; the inner part of the bay dries.
Stormbukta (76°41'N., 16°18'E.), a small bay, lies close N of
11.8
the W coast of Oyrlandet. Open anchorage is obtainable in the
entrance to Stormbukta, but this berth is exposed to heavy E
squalls which descend from the mountains, and caution is nec-
essary owing to the dangers on the N side of the approach.
Brimingen is a dangerous rock lying 6 miles W of the head of
Stormbukta and 2.25 miles offshore. The coast between Storm-
bukta and Suffolkpynten (76°52'N., 15°34'E.) is very foul and
should not be approached within 2.5 miles.
Hornsund, lying 19 miles NW of Stormbukta and entered be-
11.8
tween Suffolkpynten and a point 7.5 miles NNW, extends 10
miles ENE, with two short branches at its head. A bank, with a
depth of 29m, has been reported to lie about 6 miles NW of
Suffolkpynten. Horsund is ice-free from July to October and
the sound is usually navigable in June and November. The
sound of Horsund is exposed to very severe E squalls which
descend from the mountains.
Vessels entering Hornsund should keep in mid-channel, tak-
11.8
ing care to avoid the dangerous shoal lying about 3 miles W of
Suffolkpynten. A rock, which does not cover, lies close E of
this shoal. Anchorage may be taken off the SW side of Gasha-
ma, a bight on the S side of Hornsund. When entering the bight
care is taken to avoid two below-water rocks in its E part.
Han’s Glacier (Hansbreen) is a large glacier which descends
11.8
to the N shore of Hornsund, close E of a small inlet. It is
bounded on the E by a sharp ridge, 889m high, extending N
from the W entrance of Burgerbukta, with a very steep fall on
its E side. Both Han’s Glacier and the ridge are prominent from
263
By Adam Nawrot (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons
11.8
off the entrance to Hornsund.
Hornsund to Bellsund
11.9 The coastal area between Hornsund and Bellsund is
backed by sharp-pointed and crevassed peaks, a feature of the
W coast of Spitsbergen N of Hornsund. Depths of less than
91m will be found from about 6 to 10 miles offshore at Torb-
jornsenfjellet as far N as 77°30'N, so that soundings will give
warning of the proximity of danger.
The coast for 2.5 miles NW of Torbjornsenfjellet consists of
11.9
a high mountain ridge. Werenskioldbreen lies N of this ridge,
and a low swampy tract of land extends for 3 miles at the foot
of its front. Tonefjellet, on the W side of Werenskioldbreen, is
easily identified from seaward.
Dunoyane (77°04'N., 15°00'E.), a group of three islets sur-
11.9
rounded by several rocks, lies on the outer part of a shallow
bank which forms the coast for 5 miles. The inner part of this
bank dries. Anchorage, in depths of 5 to 10m, may be obtained
0.3 mile NE of the NW islet. The anchorage is approached
from the N; local knowledge is necessary because of the many
dangers in the vicinity.
Olsholmen, an islet 5 miles NNW of Kapp Borthen, provides
11.9
anchorage during E winds between it and the coast, 0.75 mile
E, but local knowledge is necessary and care must be taken to
avoid several dangers in the vicinity.
From Kapp Borthen, the coast trends in a general N direction
11.9
to Kapp Lyell, a distance of about 25 miles. A mountain range
runs parallel to the coast, about 2 miles inland. The coast in this
vicinity is fringed with rocks which extend as far as 1.5 miles
offshore. A 13m patch lies 4.5 miles WSW of Kapp Borthen.
Pub. 182
264 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)

11.8 By Michael Hambrey (with permission) http://www.glaciers-online.net

Han’s Glacier
11.8

Bellsund
11.10 Bellsund (77°39'N., 14°00'E.), an important inlet, is
entered between Kapp Lyell and Kapp Martin, which shows a
light. It extends about 12 miles E of Midterhuken, the W ex-
tremity of a mountainous peninsula known as Midterhukhal-
voy. This peninsula divides the inlet into two E branches, Van
Mijenfjorden and Van Keulenfjorden. A small S branch of
Bellsund, lies on the E side of the peninsula and is known as
Recherchefjorden.
The mountains in the vicinity of Bellsund are barren and
11.10

have many crevasses, particularly the peaks farthest W. On the

N side of the sound a plain extends to the foot of Ingeborgfel-
let, a peak about 7 miles E of Kapp Martin.
Ice.—Bellsund is not navigable from December to May. In
11.10

June and November, the ice is generally navigable; from July

to October, the inlet is ice-free.
Recherchefjorden, the S branch of Bellsund, was formerly
11.10
the chief place of assembly for the whaling fleet. The fjord is
well sheltered, though NW winds may send in some sea. Rein-
odden, a flat projection on the E side of the fjord, has a danger-
ous spit, on which there are several rocks that extend 0.75
miles NNW offshore. Recherchefjorden is not usually clear of
ice until June or July and it freezes early, sometimes in Sep-
tember.
Good anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 33 to 37m,
11.10
good holding ground, in the SW corner of the fjord. Do not an-
chor anywhere near the two glaciers in the fjord, as they are
11.10 Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority
11.10 Bellsund Light
the W extremity of Midterhukhalvoy. A cove which lies close
SE of Midterkuhen affords shelter from N winds. The depths in
the cove appear to decrease regularly toward the head, from
about 33m at the entrance. Anchorage may be obtained, in a
depth of about 15m, with the S extremity of the outer islet,
which forms the W entrance point, bearing 292°, distant 0.175
mile, or in a depth of about 9m, about 183m farther inshore.
Van Keulen Fjorden lies on the SE side of Bellsund and is
11.10

fringed with large quantities of floating ice. entered between Ahlstrandodden and Forsbladodden, 2.75
Midterkuken (77°39'N., 14°46'E.) is a promontory forming
11.10
miles NNW. The fjord penetrates about 15 miles inland, and is

Pub. 182
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
surrounded by flat-topped mountains. Nathorstbreen, a glacier
at the head of the fjord, has an extensive moraine on either side
of its front. Anchorages in the fjord are found close within the
entrance and are indicated on the chart.
Van Mijenfjorden
11.11 This fjord is entered by Mariasundet and Akselsundet,
two narrow channels at either end of the island Akseloya. On
either side and at the head of the fjord are flat-topped moun-
tains, separated by broad flat valleys which are mostly ice-free.
Strong winds often blow out of the fjord.
Mariasundet (77°41'N., 14°51'E.), the S entrance to the
11.11
fjord, is about 0.25 mile wide between Maseneset and the is-
land of Mariaoya, off the S end of Akseloya. The least charted
depth in the fairway is about 11m. The tidal currents in this
passage are very strong, and several dangers, the positions of
which are best seen on the chart, lie in the W approach and in
the entrance channel close SW of Maseneset.
Akselsundet (77°45'N., 14°36'E.), the N entrance to the
11.11
fjord, is the usually used and is nearly 0.6 mile wide at its nar-
rowest part. The N side of the passage should not be ap-
proached within about 0.2 mile; the S side should not be
approached within 183m.
The depths are from 16.5 to 51m in mid-channel. Though the
11.11
tidal currents are weaker than those in Mariasundet, they may
attain a velocity of 5 to 6 knots at springs, causing considerable
eddies and rip tides. Large vessels or those with low power
11.12 Akseloya Light from NW
265
should pass through Akselsundet at or near slack water. An ae-
ro light is shown from the N extremity of Akseloya.
11.12 Fridtjovhamna (Frithjofhamn) (77°46'N., 14°39'E.),
a cove on the N side of Akseljundet, is entered W of Kapp
Schollin, from which a spit extends 0.3 mile SSW. When enter-
ing the cove, caution is necessary to avoid a bank, with depths
of less than 1.5m, which extends 0.2 mile NE and N from the
W entrance point. Anchorage is obtainable in the middle of the
cove or off its E side, in a charted depth of 16.5m. Local
knowledge is necessary when anchoring in this cove.
Between Maseneset and Blixodden, 16 miles ENE, the S
11.12
shore of Van Mijenfjorden is steep-to, with the exception of a
small bank. On this bank, there is a depth of 2m, which extends
0.5 mile offshore abreast Bromelldalen, a valley 1.5 miles W of
Blixodden. Conwentzodden, 5 miles ENE of Blixodden, is the
extremity of a large projection forming part of an old moraine.
A spit, on which the depths are less than 9m, extends nearly 1.5
miles NW from Conwentzodden.
Between Kapp Schollin and Svartodden, which shows a light
11.12
and lies 5.5 miles ENE, the N coast of Van Mijenfjorden rises
steeply to the summit of Kolfjellet. A camp lies at the foot of
this mountain. Dom Miguelodden, a cape, shows a light and
lies 10 miles ENE of Svartodden. Svensksundhamna, entered
between Dom Miguelodden and Langneset, 2 miles ENE, of-
fers anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge. Kapp
Amsterdam, which shows a light, lies 7.5 miles ENE of Lang-
neset.
11.12 Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority
Pub. 182
266 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
11.12
Sveabukta (77°52'N., 16°45'E.), an inlet at the NE corner of
11.12
the fjord, is entered between Kapp Amsterdam and Ottoneset
and extends 2.5 miles N to Barryneset. Sveagruva, a former
coal mining settlement with a jetty, is situated close NW of
Barryneset. The channel from Van Mijenfjorden to an anchor-
age close S of Sveagruva carries a least depth of 4m. The first
leg is marked by leading beacons, which in line bear about
016°. Local knowledge is required for the remainder of the
channel. The channel continues N along two more legs, which
are marked by lighted beacons. Although facilities at the settle-
ment had been improved, including the construction of an ex-
port quay and storage area at Kapp Amsterdam; no mining is
presently taking place.
Bellsund to Isfjorden
11.13 Between Kapp Martin and Kapp Linne, 21 miles N,
the coast is fronted with dangers. Lights are shown from these
inlets. Kapp Bjorset, which lies 6.5 miles N of Lagneset, and
Stabbane, 6 miles farther N, are inlets which show lights.
There are no reported harbors of refuge in this section of the
11.13
coast. From a position off the entrance to Bellsund, a mountain
range may be seen stretching N from Ingeborgfjellet until hid-
den by another range extending NNW from Ytterdalssata. The
coastal plain is widest abreast Ytterdalssata.
Kapp Linne (78°04'N., 13°37'E.), which shows a light,
11.13
forms the S entrance point of Isfjorden. A radio station, located
about 0.2 mile SE of the light, is also a Norwegian government
meteorological station. An obstruction, with 30m over it, lies 1
mile due W of Kapp Linne. Randvika, a cove on the E side of
Pub. 182
11.12 Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority
Sveagruva
Kapp Linne, has an anchorage available in depths of 12 to 13m
during S and SE winds located ENE of Kapp Linne. Two bea-
cons at the head of the cove in line bearing about 150° and
Kapp Linne Light bearing 260°. Large vessels may anchor far-
ther offshore, in a depth of about 15m, 137m E of the line of
the anchorage beacons, with Kapp Linne bearing about 233°.
Festningen, which shows a light, lies 5 miles NE of Kapp
11.13
Linne. Festningen is fringed by shoals extending 0.5 mile off-
shore; the outer edge is marked by a buoy.
Isfjorden
11.14 Isfjorden (78°18'N., 15°00'E.), the largest fjord in
Spitsbergen, is entered between Kapp Linne and Daudmann-
sodden, 12 miles NW. From its entrance, it stretches 55 miles
NE to the head of Billefjorden, and numerous bays and fjords
lead off each side. From June to November, the approach to the
fjord is ice-free, with the exception that the tidal currents may
sometimes cause the entrance to be barred by loose pack ice.
This is most likely in early June, but in bad years it may hap-
pen in July or even later.
The fjord is ice-free from July through October inclusive. In
11.14
June and November, the W part of the fjord is also ice-free, the
inner part containing ice that is generally navigable. From De-
cember through May, it is unnavigable.
Isfjorden—Southeast Side
11.15 Gronfjorden (78°03'N., 14°11'E.) is entered between
Festningen and Heerodden, which shows a light, and is marked
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 267

11.14 By Bjoertvedt (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

Barentsburg
11.14

by a buoy on its edge. There are two small glaciers at the head
of the fjord and mountains stand on both sides of the fjord.
Caution.—Anchoring, fishing, diving, and salvaging are
11.15
on either side of Finneset. There is also a possible anchorage,
in a depth of about 46m, at the head of the fjord.
Between Heerodden and Kapp Laila, 8 miles E, the low
11.16

prohibited in the N part of the fjord in two circular restricted coast is fringed by a shore bank. It has been reported that 2
areas, each with a radius of 150m, protecting historic wrecks. miles E of Heerodden the bank extends farther N than charted.
These areas are centered on the following positions: Hollendardalen, a wide ice-free valley, breaks the coast 3 miles
a. 78°04'17.4''N, 14°09'20.4''E. E of Heerodden and extends S and SE. An obstruction, with
b. 78°04'24.0''N, 14°08'40.2''E. 30m over it, lies approximately 1.7 miles off the coast between
Heerodden and Kapp Laila and may best be seen on the chart.
11.16 Barentsburg (78°04'N., 14°14'E.) (World Port Index
No. 20560) is an extensive Russian coal mine settlement locat- Barentsburg—Berth Information
ed on the E shore of Gronfjorden, about 2 miles S of Heerod-
Maximum
den. A pipeline is laid across the fjord from a position 0.5 mile
S of Barentsburg in a WSW direction. The landing place of the Berth Length Vessel Remarks
pipeline on the W side is marked by lights. Draft
Depths—Limitations.—There are two piers abreast the set-
11.16 Port of Barentsburg
tlement, and is capable of accommodating vessels up to 6.5m
Cruise 75m — Passengers and ro-ro.
draft. For more information see the table titled Barentsburg—
Berth Information. Coal 22m 6.5m Coal.
One of the piers is used exclusively for loading coal. A pipe-
11.16

line is laid across the fjord from a position 0.5 mile S of Bar-
entsburg in a WSW direction. The landing place of the pipeline
on the W side is marked by lights.
Finneset is a small projection 3.5 miles S of Heerodden, on
11.16
which are some buildings and two conspicuous radio masts. A
light is shown at the SW point of Finneset. Three range lights
are shown from a position 0.75 mile NNE of the light at Finne-
set; in line bearing 146° they lead through the middle of the en-
11.17 Colesbukta (78°08'N., 14°57'E.), is entered between
Kapp Laila and a point 2.5 miles NE. The bay extends 2.5
miles in a SE direction. Both entrance points, the SW side of
the bay, and its head are fringed with shoals. It was reported
that the shoal fringing Kapp Laila extends farther N than chart-
ed. The depths in the bay are suitable for anchorage, but it is
open to the NW.
Grumantbyen, a former coal mining settlement, lies at the
11.17

trance to Gronfjorden to a position 0.25 mile W of mouth of Grumantdalen, a valley about 4 miles NE of the en-
Barentsburg. Small vessels with local knowledge may anchor trance to Colesbukta. The valley contains one of the most im-

Pub. 182
268 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
portant coal mines in Spitsbergen. Abreast Grumantbyen, the
depths increase so rapidly offshore that vessels can only obtain
anchorage very close inshore. There is a pier for loading coal
by conveyor. Two mooring buoys are located close inshore in
the vicinity of the coal pier.
Vestpynten (78°15'N., 15°27'E.), the SW entrance point of
11.17
Adventfjorden, lies about 9 miles NE of Colesbukta. A light is
shown from the point.
Adventfjorden
11.18 Adventfjorden (78°15'N., 15°37'E.) is entered be-
tween Vestpynten and Revneset, a point 3 miles to the NE. A
shoal bank fringes Revneset for about 0.5 mile offshore, its
outer edge being marked by a buoy. About 1.75 miles within
Vestpynten, on the SW side of the fjord is Adventpynten, a sa-
lient point which is low, sandy, and inconspicuous. The point
shows a light. A low tract of land lies between the two above
points; about 2 miles farther SE is Longyearbyen.
The wide valley of Adventdalen extends SE from the head of
11.18
the fjord, with Adventelva flowing through it. The area off the
mouth of the river is gradually silting up, but the edge of the
shoal water is very steep-to and anchorage is afforded only in
great depths. Moskushamn, a former mining camp, stands 3
miles SE of Revneset. Anchorage off the pier is exposed except
during E winds.
Caution.—Anchoring, fishing, diving, and salvaging are
11.18
prohibited in the head of the fjord in a circular restricted area,
with a radius of 150m, protecting a historic wreck, in position
78°14'30.6''N, 15°41'49.2''E.
11.19 Longyearbyen (78°14'N., 15°39'E.) (World Port In-
dex No. 20570), a coal-mining settlement, lies near the head of
Adventfjorden, on its SW shore. A coast radio station, from
which a radiobeacon transmits, is located at Longyearbyen.
Depths—Limitations.—Longyearbyen is a major logistic
11.19
port for cargo to Spitsbergen and the cruise industry. There are
three berths for larger vessels with a maximum length up to
333m and a maximum draft of 7.1m. There are pontoons avail-
able for tourist boars, yachts and tenders.
Governor of Svalbard Home Page
https://www.portlongyear.no
For more information see the table titled Longyearbyen—
11.19
Berth Information.
Longyearbyen—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Vessel
LOA Draft
Cruise vessels, containers, and breakbulk. Pontoons for tenders and
Bykaia
84m 9.0m 333m — sailing boats close by the berth. Fresh water is available. The berth ar-
(Cruise)
ea is ISPS compliant.
Pub. 182
Contact Information.—See the table titled Longyear-
11.19
byen—Contact Information.
Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor 0.25 mile N of the
11.19
piers, in a depth of 47m, thick mud. The depths are consider-
able until close off the head of the larger pier.
Longyearbyen—Contact Information
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
47-91-122300
Telephone
47-79-022150
Facsimile 47-79-021315
E-mail bykaia@lokalstyre.no
Revneset to Gasodden
11.20 Between Revneset and Deltaneset, 5 miles NE, the
coast is formed by a plateau, similar to that SW of Advent-
fjorden, above which can be seen the summit of Konussen.
Hatten, a rocky mound, which resembles a hat, lies 2.5 miles
ENE of Deltaneset. An aero light is shown from the NW side
of Deltaneset.
Sassenfjorden (78°23'N., 16°30'E.) is entered between Dia-
11.20
basodden and Gasodden, 6 miles NNE, and extends 8 miles
ESE to Bjonapynten. Sassendalen, a wide ice-free valley, ex-
tends over 16 miles SE from the head of Sassenfjorden, with
numerous valleys on its SW side.
Gasoyane, a group of four islets, lies about 1 mile W of Gas-
11.20
odden. The passage between the islets and Gasodden is foul
and should not be attempted without local knowledge. A light
is shown from the NW end of the islet.
Gipsvika, an open bay 2.25 miles wide, is entered 2 miles SE
11.20
of Gasodden. Ministergrunnen, with a depth of 5m, lies 3.75
miles SE of Gasodden and Medfjordgrunnen, with a depth of
15m, lies 1 mile farther SSE. Two other patches, with depths of
13m and 16m, lie 0.8 mile NW and 0.6 mile S, respectively of
Ministergrunnen.
Templefjella (Temple Range) is flat-topped and rises precip-
11.20
itously from the sea in cliffs resembling tiers of cones arranged
one upon another, a peculiar formation which is common in
Svalbad. Templet, at the NW end, rises to an elevation of
667m. Sindballefjellet, at the NE end, 737m high, is covered
by an ice cap, which appears permanent, as there are no signs
of avalanches.
Remarks
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 269

Longyearbyen—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
LOA Draft
Coastal vessels, breakbulk, multipurpose, and bunkers. A wooden pil-
Gamlekaia
54m 4.8m 90m — lar quay for coastal vessels and bunker supplies for small to medium-
(Old Quay)
sized vessels.
Coal and containers. Also used as a lay-by quay for smaller vessels. A
Kullkaia
65m 8.2m 170m 7.1m buoy off the berth assists in mooring. Bollards onshore are up to 215m
(Coal)
apart.

11.20 (copyright) Mateusz War. / Wikimedia Commons via Wikimedia Commons

Longyearbyen
11.20

Templefjorden (78°24'N., 17°00'E.), the NE continuation of

11.20
Sassenfjorden, extends for about 8 miles from Bjonapynten. Its
shores are comparatively steep. There are no outlying dangers.
The head of the fjord is fringed by glaciers.
Bjonahamna, a cove on the NE side of Bjonapynten, affords
11.20
patch lies about 3 miles N of the Gasoyane islets. Rocks, with
depths of 5m and 7m, lie 0.6 mile NW and W, respectively, and
an isolated 11m patch lies 1.25 miles NW, of Skvalpeskjer, a
patch which lies about 4 miles NE of the Gasoyane islets.
Skansbukta, a bay close within the W entrance point of
11.21

anchorage, in about 31m, in its middle part, but the cove should
not be used when broken ice may block its entrance. Care must
be taken to avoid the shoal patches in the N part of the cove.
Billefjorden
11.21 Billefjorden (78°34'N., 16°28'E.) forms the NNE
continuation of Isfjorden and extends inland for more than 15
miles. It is entered between Gasodden and Rundodden. Lights
Billefjorden, is about 1 mile wide at its entrance and extends
about 1 mile NNW. The general depths in the bay decrease reg-
ularly, over a muddy bottom, from 42 to 18m. Small vessels
may anchor close to the head of the bay, in depths of 15 to
18m. The bay affords excellent anchorage, the best in Is-
fjorden; it may be obtained anywhere in the bay. When enter-
ing the bay, vessels are requested to keep to the middle until
depths of about 29m are reached.
Mimerbukta (78°39'N., 16°25'E.) lies about 9 miles NNE
11.21

are shown from Kapp Ekholm, on the E side of the fjord, and of Skansbukta. The bay is 1.5 miles wide at its entrance and ex-
Rudmosepynten, at the head of the fjord. The fjord is free from tends 1.5 miles W. A mud flat fills the inner part of the bay, ex-
offlying dangers on its W side, but toward the E side, a 6m tending 1 mile from the shore. A shallow spit extends 0.2 mile

Pub. 182
270 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
11.21 Pyramiden Havn
S from the NE entrance point and usually excludes ice from the
bay.
Pyramiden, a Russian coal mining settlement, lies at the had
11.21
of the bay. A small wooden jetty, close within the entrance
point, is suitable only for lighters. A depth of about 20m is re-
ported about 0.1 mile off its head. Good anchorage for small
craft is obtainable, with local knowledge, close off the settle-
ment.
Petuniabukta lies close NNE of Mimerbukta and forms part
11.21
of the head of Billefjorden. The bay is about 2 miles wide at
the entrance and extends about 3 miles to the N. Though the
depths in the bay are suitable for anchorage, conditions are de-
pendent on the movement of local ice.
Adolfbukta, a bay, is entered between Rudmosepyten, which
11.21
shows a light, and Kapp Napier. It lies close SE of Petuniabuk-
ta. The shores of the bay are steep-to and depths are deep.
Small vessels can anchor between Kapp Napier and the reef E
of it, but this position may be dangerous because of ice from
the large glacier at the head of the bay.
Caution.—Anchoring, fishing, diving, and salvaging are
11.21
prohibited in the fjord in a circular restricted area, with a radius
of 150m, protecting a historic wreck, in position 78°14'37.2''N,
13°50'52.2''E.
11.22 Nordfjorden (78°30'N., 15°00'E.) is entered between
Bohemanneset, which shows a light, and Kapp Thordsen, 6.5
miles WSW of Rundodden. It is 9.5 miles wide at its entrance
and extends 11 miles N to Kapp Waern, with general depths of
73 to over 183m. Kapp Waern is the extremity of a peninsula
separating Ekmanfjorden and Dicksonfjorden.
Pub. 182
11.21 Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority
Ekmanfjorden is entered between Kapp Waern and Sveane-
11.22
set, a point about 5 miles WSW. The fjord extends about 10
miles in a N direction. The entrance is free of dangers, except
for banks extending about 0.5 mile off the two points. Flinthol-
men, a small island, lies close off the W side of the fjord. Cora-
hulmen, another small island, lies on the E side near the head
of the fjord.
There is a good harbor for small craft on the W side of
11.22
Flintholmen. To reach this anchorage, a vessel must pass N and
W of a drying rock which lies in the N entrance near the W
side of Flintholmen. Good anchorage may be obtained, accord-
ing to draft, E of Coraholmen. Small craft may anchor in the
basin on the bank SE of the island, approaching from SW, but
caution is necessary.
Dicksonfjorden (78°42'N., 15°20'E.) is entered between
11.22
Kapp Woern (Kapp Waern) and Kapp Wyk (Kapp Wijk), 2.5
miles ENE. The fjord trends about 4 miles NE and 12 miles N,
where the head is filled by drying mud flats for about 2 miles
offshore.
The entrance to the fjord and the channel N are constricted
11.22
by shoals, the positions of which can best be seen on the chart.
Accumulations of drift ice in the narrow entrance may make it
impossible to leave the fjord for weeks at a time.
Kapp Nathorst (78°47'N., 15°25'E.) projects from the E
11.22
side of Dicksonfjorden, 4.5 miles from the head of the fjord. A
shoal spit extends nearly 1 mile W and NW from the cape,
leaving a narrow channel between its edge and the bank fring-
ing the W shore. This channel leads to a large basin in which
good anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 20 to 40m, good
holding ground. The head of the fjord is filled by drying mud
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
flats which extend about 2 miles offshore.
Isfjorden to Smeerenbergfjorden
11.23 Prins Karls Forland (78°30'N., 11°06'E.) lies off the
W coast of Spitsbergen between Daudmannsodden and Kvade-
huken, 50 miles NNW, and is separated from it by Forlandsun-
det, a strait navigable only by vessels drawing 3.5m or less.
There are no sheltered anchorages on the W coast of Prins
Karls Forland, but N of Forlandsundet anchorage is obtainable
in Kongsfjorden. Anchorages can also be found in Kross-
fjorden, Magdalenefjorden, and Smeerenburgfjorden.
Salfjellet (78°14'N., 12°03'E.), located at the S end of Prins
11.23
Karls Forland, is saddle-shaped and very distinctive. It lies at
the S end of a mountain range, which extends 3 miles NNW.
The mountains of Prins Karls Forland are frequently envel-
11.23
oped in a dense canopy of clouds, which often descend to an
elevation as low as 30m and sometimes to sea level.
Fuglehuken (78°53'N., 10°30'E.) is the N extremity of Prins
11.23
Karls Forland. A lighted beacon located on a knoll on the point
is reported difficult to see on certain bearings against the back-
ground of mountains.
Magnetic disturbances amounting to 4° have been experi-
11.23
enced in places off the W coast of Prins Karls Forland. An 8°E
disturbance was observed in a position about 12 miles W of
Kaldneset, a point near the middle of the W coast. Disturbanc-
es of greater amounts, up to 11°W in places, have been experi-
enced N of the island.
11.24 Forlandsundet (78°30'N., 12°40'E.), with a maxi-
mum width of about 10 miles, separates the W coast of Spits-
bergen from Prins Karls Forland. Vessels are advised not to use
this passage before the middle of May because of ice.
Poolepynten, a steep-to point, is marked by a beacon and lies
11.24
on the E side of Prins Karls Forland, about 12 miles N of
Salfjellet. Between Poolepynten and Dawespynten, a point
about 8 miles NW, the coast recedes to form a bight, the S part
being known as Brucebukta and the N part as Peterbukta.
Brucebukta is free of dangers and affords anchorage, in a depth
of about 8m, 2.5 miles NW of Poolepynten.
Murraypynten, a sandy tongue extending 0.5 mile E, lies 11
11.24
miles NNW of Dawespynten.
Eidembukta (78°21'N., 12°45'E.), a bight with a glacier at
11.24
its head, lies on the E side of Forlandsundet, about 9 miles
NNW of Daudmannsodden. Anchorage may be obtained in the
N part of the bight; however mariners are cautioned to avoid a
4m shoal located approximately 0.5 mile S of the anchorage.
A chain of islets, rocks, and reefs, about 2 miles offshore, W
11.24
of the NW entrance point, extends in a SW direction.
St. Jonsfjorden, a fjord with a glacier at its head, lies about
11.24
10 miles N of Eidembukta. Other glaciers enter the fjord on ei-
ther side. The shores of the fjord are steep-to and free from
dangers, but in the entrance on the N side is a dangerous de-
tached shoal. Hermansenoya, an island, lies on the N side of
the outer entrance. The passage between the island and the
mainland is free of dangers on the S side.
Sarstangen (78°44'N., 11°29'E.), two narrow banks of sand
11.24
271
enclosing a lagoon, extends 2.5 miles WSW from the general
line of the coast of Spitsbergen. A beacon stands near the ex-
tremity of Murraypynten. A light, with a racon and a radar
reflector, stands on the point of Sarstangen. Sarstangen tower
beacon stands about 183m E of the light.
Forlandsrevet, a sandy bar connecting Sarstangen and Mur-
11.24
raypynten, is about 13 miles within the N entrance to the
sound. The chart should be consulted for details regarding the
narrow and shallow channel.
Forlandsundet—North End
11.25 Forlandsundet is entered from the N between Fugle-
huken and Kvadehuken, a low and salient point about 11 miles
ENE. From Fuglehuken, which shows a light, the W coast of
Forlandsundet curves SE for about 8 miles to the point of
Heemskerckneset. For about 4 miles S of Heemskerckneset,
the coast is indented by Ferskvassbukta, a bay, which affords
anchorage, in depths of 8 to 15m.
From Kvadehuken, which shows an aero light, the steep-to E
11.25
shore of Forlandsundet trends SE for about 9 miles to the N en-
trance point of Engelsbukta, which is about 2 miles wide at its
entrance and extends about 2 miles SE to a glacier at its head.
Engelsbukta has been reported to be one of the best anchorages
on the W coast of Spitsbergen, being completely landlocked
and free from incursions of polar ice. Within the bay, in its
middle, are charted depths of about 61m.
Between the S entrance point of Engelsbukta and Sarstan-
11.25
gen, about 7 miles SW, the entire coast is fringed with a shoal
bank which, in places, extends about 3 miles offshore. Rocks.
with depths between 4 and 7m. lie near the outer edge of this
bank.
Kongsfjorden
11.26 Kongsfjorden (78°57'N., 12°00'E.) is entered be-
tween Kvadehuken and Kapp Guissez, 7 miles NNE. The fjord
extends 13 miles ESE, terminating in a large bay of which the
NW side is formed by a peninsula 6 miles SE of Kapp Guissez.
The shores of the fjord are free from off-lying dangers, and in
most places are steep-to. The fjord is usually ice-free, or almost
so, from late May to late November. Kongsbreen, one of the
largest glaciers in Svalbard, has a front 6 miles long, which
forms the head of Kongsfjorden.
Brandalpynten (78°57'N., 11°53'E.), which shows an aero
11.26
light, lies about 7 miles ESE of Kvadehuken. Kolhamna, the
shallow bay between the promontory of Ny-Alesund and Bran-
dalpynten, has depths of less than 5.5m. A rocky patch, with a
depth of 2.3m, lies 0.75 mile SSE of Brandalpynten.
Ny-Alesund (78°55'N., 11°57'E.) (World Port Index No.
11.26
20580), situated on the promontory on the SE side of Kolham-
na, serves as a fishing station.
Depths—Limitations.—The harbor can handle vessels up
11.26
to 70m in length with a 7.6m draft. There are two piers in the
harbor. A mooring buoy is situated between the heads of the
piers. For more berthing information see table titled Ny Ale-
Pub. 182
272 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)

sund—Berth Information. Krossfjorden

Ny Alesund—Berth Information 11.28 Krossfjorden (79°09'N., 11°46'E.), entered between
Kapp Guissez and Kapp Mitra, 6 miles WNW, extends 8.5
Maximum miles NNE to Cadiopynten, the S extremity of Kong Haakons
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks Halvoy, where the fjord divides into Mollerfjorden and Lillie-
Draft hookfjorden. Mountains enclose the fjord on either side and
Ny Alesund Harbor landing is difficult in most places.
Lilliehookbreen, an immense glacier at the head of Lillie-
11.28

Cruise ves-
No. 1 73m 8.3m 7.6m hookfjorden, is a remarkable feature of Krossfjorden.
sels and coal.
The large bergs which are frequently calved, many with
11.28

No. 2 42m 6.0m — Coal. heights of 12 to 15m, are the only real icebergs calved on the
W coast of Spitsbergen. None of these bergs reach the open
Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained by large vessels, sea, having such a deep draft they ground on the shore of the
in a depth of 27m, good holding ground, 0.25 mile NNW of the fjord, or on the shoals near the entrance.
E pier. Take care to avoid a rock, with a depth of 6.4m, lying Mollerfjorden, entered between Kapp Thoulet and the SE
11.28

0.15 mile NNE of this pier, at the seaward end of a bank ex-
tending NW from the shore. Small craft can anchor near the
head of Kolhamna. During N and W winds, vessels at anchor
may be bothered by drift ice, in which case anchoring in Blom-
strandhamna is preferable.
extremity of Kong Haakons Halvoy, extends 3.5 miles N,
where it divides into Kollerfjorden and Mollerhamna. Two
dangerous shoals lie close off the W shore N of the W entrance
point. With the exception of these dangers, the outer part of
Mollerfjorden is free from shoals, but obstructions lie in the
approach to Kollerfjorden and Mollerhamna, where the depths
are very irregular. Kollerfjorden has not been thoroughly exam-
ined and should be entered with caution.
Mollerhamna, entered between Regnardneset and Kong
11.28

Haakens Halvoy, to the W, is fringed on its NE side by a shore

bank which extends from about 0.2 to 0.3 mile offshore. An-
chorage is obtainable, in depths of 18 to 27m, 0.1 to 0.2 mile
off its NE shore, with good holding ground. It is reported that
the depths N of the anchorage are less than those charted. A
conspicuous boulder on the shore 0.5 mile NW of Regnard-
neset may be useful as a mark when anchoring.
A hut stands on the shore between the boulder and Regnard-
11.28

neset. Due to the background, it is not easily seen from sea.

11.29 Ebeltofhamna (79°09'N., 11°39'E.), on the NW side

By Superchilum (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons
Ny-Alesund
of Krossfjorden, is a shallow inlet about 4 miles within the en-
trance to the fjord. Anchorage may be obtained off Ebeltof-
hamna, in depths of about 15m, good holding ground, 0.25
mile ENE of Enjalbalstranda, a sand spit.
Caution is necessary as the sand spit may have altered con-
11.29

siderably in shape and extent. Anchorage is recommended for

11.27 Blomstrandhamna (78°59'N., 12°06'E.), an inlet on
the NW side of the peninsula of Blomstrandhalvoya, is entered
between Tonsneset and Hansneset, about 1 mile S. Lights are
shown from the W side of this inlet. Vessels should keep in
mid-channel when entering the inlet. On the N side of the inlet
is a small bight, in which vessels may obtain anchorage during
N and E winds, in a depth of about 33m, good holding ground.
Peirsonhamna, a small inlet at the S extremity of Blom-
11.27
strandhalvoya, is 0.15 mile wide at its entrance, from which it
extends 0.15 mile NE. At its head is London, a former settle-
ment used in the marble trade. Anchorage may be obtained 1
use in only early summer, before drift ice sets in from Lillie-
hookbreen.
Lilliehookfjorden (79°15'N., 11°40'E.) is entered between
the S end of Kong Haakons Halvoy and the shore abreast
Schottfjellet, a peak about 2 miles to the W. The fjord extends
6 miles NNW to Lilliehookbreen and is 1.5 miles wide
throughout its length. It is usually ice-free in July, but towards
the end of the summer, the ice from Lilliehookbreen may ren-
der navigation of the fjord impossible. The shores of the fjord
are steep-to and free from dangers.
Signehamna (79°16'N., 11°35'E.) is a cove entered between
11.29

mile E of Peirsonhamna, in a depth of 35m, mud, about 0.4 Nilspynten, a point about 4 miles N of Schottfjellet, and Fridt-
mile offshore, and also 0.75 mile farther NE, in a depth of 30m, jovneset, about 0.65 mile farther N. The head of the cove is di-
0.3 mile offshore. A 9m patch lies about 1.25 miles ENE of vided by Gunnarpynten, a point about 0.3 mile WNW of
Peirsonhamna. Nilspynten.

Pub. 182
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
Anchorage may be obtained midway between Gunnarpynten
11.29
and Fridtjovneset, in depths of 15 to 18m, but this anchorage
should only be used when Lilliehookbreen is not calving.
Krossfjorden to Smeerenburgfjorden
11.30 From Kapp Mitra, the N entrance point to Kross-
fjorden, the coast trends 28 miles N to Magdalenhuken, the S
entrance point of Magdalenefjorden. This part of the coast is
characterized by a series of glaciers, the deep valleys of which
are backed by high mountains. The coastline is fringed with
rocks, below-water and awash, which in places extend about 2
miles offshore; it should therefore be given a berth of at least 3
miles where the depths are 28m or greater.
Kvedfjordbukta (79°25'N., 10°55'E.) and Rekvedbukta are
11.30
small indentations in the coast lying, respectively, about 19 and
23.5 miles N of Kapp Mitra. Nothing further is recorded of
them and in the approaches below-water rocks make caution
necessary.
Hamburgerbukta, a cove about 2 miles S of Magdalenehu-
11.30
ken (79°34'N., 10°44'E.), extends about 0.5 mile E to the gla-
cier at its head. The entrance is obstructed by a bar, over which
the depths vary from 1.8 to 5.5m. The middle of the cove has
general depths of 7.3 to 18.3m.
Magdalenefjorden (79°34'N., 10°54'E.) entrance lies be-
11.30
tween Magdalenehuken and Knattodden, about 3 miles NE.
The fjord extends about 5 miles E to Waggonwaybreen, the ex-
tensive glacier at its head. Surrounding the fjord are high, rug-
ged mountains which rise precipitously, the valleys between
the ranges being filled either with snow or glaciers. Calvings
are frequent during the summer months. Tidal currents at times
attain a rate of 1.5 knots along the S shore of the fjord.
Magdaleneboen, a 6m rocky patch, lies 2.5 miles WSW of
11.30
Knattodden, in the W approach to Magdalenefjorden. The N
extremity of Gravneset, bearing 101° and in line with the mid-
dle of Waggonwaybreen, leads into deep water S of Magdalen-
eboen.
Gravneset, a small peninsula, is fringed on its N side by a
11.30
group of islets and rocks extending 0.2 mile offshore. Trinity-
hamna, on the E side of Gravneset, affords anchorage when
clear of ice. A stone cairn stands near the head of Trinityham-
na.
Anchorage can be obtained, in depths of about 20 to 27m,
11.30
about 0.5 mile from the S shore in a position off Adambreen.
Adambreen lies more than 2 miles W of Gravneset and is the
outermost of the three glaciers on that side of the fjord.
Shannonboen (79°34'N., 10°56'E.), a rock with a depth of
11.30
less than 2.0m, lies about 2 miles SE of Knattodden. Fuglehol-
men, about 2m high, lies about 0.2 mile N of Shannonboen, on
a shoal with depths of less than 5.5m, on which lie several dan-
gerous rocks. Another dangerous patch lies 0.4 mile E of Shan-
nonboen, having a rock, awash, close off its SE end, and a
rock, with a depth of less than 2m, off its NE end.
Smeerenburgfjorden
11.31 Smeerenburgfjorden (79°43'N., 11°06'E.) is an ex-
tensive fjord lying between the NW corner of the mainland of
Spitsbergen on the E and two large islands, Danskoya and Am-
273
sterdamoya, on the W. It may be entered by Sorgattet, the
sound between Danskoya and the mainland; or by Danskegat-
tet, the strait between Danskoya and Amsterdamoya; or by
Nordgattet, the N entrance between Amsterdamoya and the
mainland. Anchorage is afforded on the E side of the fjord,
about 3 miles from the entrance. This anchorage is best seen on
the chart.
Danskoya (79°41'N., 10°55'E.) lies with Kapp Gurnerd, its
11.31
SW extremity, about 3 miles N of Knattodden. The above cape
and the coast N of it are fronted by many islets and rocks; the
outermost danger is two rocks, awash, about 2 miles WNW of
the cape. With the exception of Kobbefjorden, this stretch of
coast has not been completely surveyed and should be given a
wide berth.
Kobbefjorden lies about 3 miles N of Kapp Gurnerd; it is
11.31
about 1 mile wide at its entrance and recedes E for about 2
miles. An islet lies off the S shore of the fjord, close within the
entrance.
Anchorage.—Anchorage is afforded N of the islet, in depths
11.31
of 6.5 to 9.1m, outside the sand bar off the islet. Small vessels
able to cross the bar may anchor at the head of the fjord.
11.32 Amsterdamoya (79°46'N., 10°49'E.) lies 1 mile N of
Danskoya and is separated from it by Danskegattet. Most of the
island is mountainous and two high peaks form the summit.
Ytterholmane consists of one large and several smaller islets
lying between 0.75 mile and 1.5 miles NW of Bikuben, the W
extremity of Amsterdamoya. There is a passage between these
islets and the coast of Amsterdamoya. Hakluytodden, the NW
extremity of Amsterdamoya, is a bold granite headland.
Danskegattet is entered from the W between Kapp de Geer
11.32
and Bikuben, which is prominent from seaward. A conspicu-
ous tower-shaped hill rises close SE of Kapp de Geer. This W
entrance, which is partly blocked by shoal spits, has depths of
10 to 11m in its middle part. In the E entrance channel, about
0.1 mile wide, the depths are only about 6.9m. Virgohamna, a
small bay on the SE side of Danskegattet, affords anchorage, in
depths of 22m and 11m, about 0.15 mile E and SE of Ek-
holmpynten.
11.33 Nordgattet (79°45'N., 11°05'E.), the N end of
Smeerenburgfjorden, forms the principal approach to the inner
part of the fjord. The passage is bound on the W by the NE side
of Amsterdamoya and on the E by the coast of the mainland
between Fuglepynten and the front of Frambreen, a glacier
about 3 miles S. About 1.25 miles S of Fuglepynten, a bay
known as Kennedybukta recedes to the front of a glacier which
lies between mountain peaks and Frambreen glacier.
Sorgattet (79°39'N., 11°00'E.), the S approach to Smeeren-
11.33
burgfjorden is entered between Knattodden and Kapp Gurnerd,
3 miles N, and extends for 3.5 miles NE; with a least width of
about 1 mile; it is much encumbered with islets and shoals.
Mesteinane, two islets, lie 1 mile N of Knattodden, in the en-
trance of Sorgattet. They are steep-to on their S and E sides. A
beacon marks the E islet. The tidal currents run with great
strength through the narrow part of Sorgattet.
Anchorage may be obtained 0.5 mile NE of Moseoya, 0.2
11.33
mile offshore, in a depth of about 18m. Anchorage is also ob-
tainable 0.75 mile WSW of Danskeneset.
Pub. 182
274 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
Smeerenburgfjorden—Inner Part
11.34 From abreast Smeerenburgodden, the fjord extends
about 8 miles SSE to Smeerenburgbreen, a glacier at the E side
of its head. South of Danskegattet, the middle approach to the
fjord from seaward, foul ground lies off the W shore to a dis-
tance of about 0.6 mile. The islet of Albertoya is about 0.4 mile
SE of Kapp Pike, the S point at the E end of Danskegattet.
Slaadbukta (79°42'N., 11°15'E.), an indentation on the E
11.34
shore about 1 mile S of Frambreen, recedes to the front of a
glacier. About 2 miles SSE of Slaadbukta is a small bay named
Marbukta. Anchorage may be obtained 0.4 mile SSE of
Smeerenburgodden, in depths of 24 to 33m.
Spitsbergen—North Coast
11.35 Fuglefjorden (79°47'N., 11°28'E.) is entered between
Fuglepynten and Drottenneset, 3.25 miles ENE, and extends 3
miles SSE to two glaciers at its head. Fugloya, an island, lies
about midway between the entrance points. The depths in
Fuglefjorden are very irregular in places and it should be en-
tered with caution.
11.35 By Lkarsten (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons
11.35 Fugloya as seen from Novika
Fair Haven (79°49'N., 11°29'E.) a sound lying N of
11.35
Fuglefjorden, is partly sheltered by cliff islets and shoals. The
depths in the sound are irregular and include a number of shoal
patches. Cummingoya lies in the E part of the sound, on a de-
tached shoal with depths of less than 5.5m up to 183m off-
shore. Steggholmen, 0.5 mile SSE of Cummingoya, lies close
within the S edge of an extensive bank, having depth of less
than 5.5m, and with several rocky patches. Holmiabukta, an in-
let, is entered from the SE corner of Fair Haven, 1 mile E of
Drottenneset.
Suitable anchorage is reported in the channel between Fugle-
11.35
sangen and Klovingen, close N of Fair Haven. The depths are
from 16.5 to 46m, mud, free from hidden dangers, except for a
7m shoal spot that lies about 0.3 mile SW of Klovingen. Drift
ice and bergs may be carried in from the N by the wind or the
tidal current.
Pub. 182
Raudfjorden
11.36 Raudfjorden (79°50'N., 12°00'E.) is entered between
Flathukenand Jermaktangen, 4 miles E. The fjord extends 10.5
miles to the S and divides into two branches near its head. The
fjord has deep water for the most part and the general depths
off the entrance are 15.3m and greater. A shoal spot, with a
depth of 3.4m, and a rock, with a depth of 4m, lies about 1 mile
WNW and 1.25 miles NNW, respectively, of Jermaktangen. A
rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies approximately 1.5
miles W of Jermaktangen.
Between Jermaktangen and Velkomstpynten, the W entrance
11.36
point of Woodfjorden, a bend on the coast forms a wide bay
known as Breibogen, which recedes about 5 miles to its head at
the W end. The NE shore of the bay is covered by deep-red
limestone. Patches, with depths of 13.8m and 16m, lie within 2
miles seaward of the N extremity of Velkomstpynten. A shoal
patch, with a depth of 5.8m, lies about 3 miles NNW of Vel-
komstpynten.
Moffen (80°02'N., 14°30'E.), an island, lies 12 miles NE of
11.36
Velkomstpynten. It has an extensive bank, with depths from
17m to 102m, which extends more than 20 miles N. Two outly-
ing shoals, with depths of 7m and 9m, lie, respectively, 15
miles NW and 12 miles N of Moffen; however, their exact po-
sitions are not known. A beacon stands at the S extremity of the
island. The tidal currents off the island set NW and SE at a rate
of about 1 knot. Anchorage may be taken about 0.5 mile SW of
the beacon.
Woodfjorden and Liefdefjorden
11.37 Woodfjorden (79°40'N., 13°58'E.) is entered be-
tween Velkomstpynten and Grahuken, a point about 8 miles
ESE. The fjord indents the coast for about 34 miles to the S.
Grahuken, the E entrance point of Woodfjorden, is the N ex-
tremity of a mountainous promontory between Woodfjorden
and Wijdefjorden. A beacon stands on a rock close N of Gra-
huken. From Velkomstpynten the W side of Woodfjorden
trends about 11 miles S to a small peninsula which forms the N
entrance point of Liefdefjorden.
Liefdfjorden is entered between Stasjonsoyane and Roosene-
11.37
set, 6.5 miles SSW, and extends 13 miles WSW to Monaco-
breen at its head. The fjord contains numerous groups of islets
and rocks, which can best be seen on the chart. Bockfjorden,
entered between Roosneset and Kapp Kjeldsen, 6 miles S, ex-
tends 3 miles S of the latter point. A shoal, with a depth of 7m,
lies 4 miles S; a dangerous shoal, with a depth of 1m, lies 6
miles SSE of Roosneset.
Wijdefjorden
11.38 Wijdefjorden (79°22'N., 15°37'E.) is entered be-
tween Grahuken and Bangenhuk, 14 miles ENE and extends 58
miles SSE to a glacier at its head. The depths in the fjord are
deep; however a shoal, the exact position of which is not
known, with a depth of 3m, lies about 17 miles SSE of Gra-
huken. The W side of the fjord is backed by mountain ranges
separated by valleys running in a WSW direction. Some of
these valleys are long and flat, others short and steep, but most
have glaciers at their sides or heads and all are desolate.
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
11.38 Waldenoya from S
Vestfjorden, about 6 miles long, branches SSW from the W
11.38
shore of Wijdefjorden, about 35 miles within the entrance. It is,
in reality, a side valley which is depressed below sea level and
appears to be silting up rapidly. The depths in the fjord are
somewhat shallow and its head dries for 2 miles offshore.
Anchorage in Wijdefjorden can be obtained on either side of
11.38
Bratthuken, a small sandy projection on the E side of the fjord,
about 11 miles S of Bangenhuk, in depths of 9.1m on the N
side of the point and 7.3m on the S side. Anchorage is also re-
ported on the W side of the fjord close N of Krosspynten, and
also 14 miles SSE of Kapp Petermann.
Mosselbukta (79°53'N., 15°55'E.) is entered between Ban-
11.38
genhuk and the coast 3.5 miles NNE, and extends 3 miles SE.
The bay apparently was used as an anchorage during former
whaling times, but vessels experienced severe difficulties when
they were beset by ice in the bay.
Verlegenhuken, about 13 miles NNE of Bangenhuk, forms
11.38
the N extremity of Mosselhalvoya, the latter being the seaward
end of the great peninsula Ny Friesland which terminates
Spitsbergen to the NE and separates Wijdefjorden from Hinlo-
penstretet. A beacon stands on Verlegenhuken; a dangerous 5m
patch lies about 3 miles ENE of the beacon.
Nordaustlandet—North Coast
11.39 Nordaustlandet (79°50'N., 23°00'E.), the largest is-
land NE of Spitsbergen, is separated from the latter by Hinlo-
penstretet. The very irregular N coast of the island is broken by
interspersed fjords, bays, and rugged peninsulas. Some of the
275
11.38 Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority
latter being large and salient and in places the offing is encum-
bered by islands and dangers.
Langgrunnodden (80°09'N., 17°46'E.), the NW extremity
11.39
of Nordaustlandet and the NE entrance point of Hinlopen-
stretet, lies at the NW end of Storsteinhalvoya. From Lang-
grunnodden to Marmorpynten, 11 miles ENE, the coast
consists almost entirely of narrow strips of beach within which
are extensive lagoons, most of the water near them being
brackish. Lagoya, meaning low island, is separated from the N
coast of Storsteinhalvoya by Franklinsundet, known to be foul
and having a 10m patch in mid-channel, 3.5 miles WNW of
Marmorpynten. Franklinsundet’s narrowest width is 3 miles;
however, it should be entered with great caution.
Lady Franklinfjorden (80°09'N., 19°11'E.) is entered be-
11.39
tween Marmorpynten and the coast of Botniahalvoya, which
projects 13 miles NNW to form the E side of the fjord. From its
entrance, the fjord penetrates about 9 miles SSE to a glacier at
its head. There appear to be several shoals in the fjord and sev-
eral above-water rocks are visible. At times, the fjord is unap-
proachable due to ice.
Brennevinsfjorden is entered between Kapp Hansteen and
11.39
Depotodden, 5 miles ENE, and extends 11 miles SSE. Two
shoal patches, with depths of 3m and 7m, lie about 5 miles
NNW of Kapp Hansteen. Mariners approaching Brennevins-
fjorden are advised to proceed with extreme caution.
Close within Depotodden are steep cliffs, on top of which is
11.39
an almost snow-free plateau, from which rises Snotoppen, a
mountain with a small ice cap on its summit.
The best anchorage in the fjord is reported to be in an inlet at
11.39
Pub. 182
276 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
the E corner of the head, which is said to be one of the best
sheltered harbors in Nordaustlandet. In normal years, the fjord
is reported to be ice-free between the end of July and early Oc-
tober.
11.40 Laponiahalvoya (80°25'N., 19°50'E.) is a large pen-
insula which projects about 18 miles N and separates Breenev-
insfjorden from the large body of water to the E, known as
Nordenskioldbukta. Kapp Rubin, the N extremity of the penin-
sula, lies about 12 miles NNE of Kapp Hansteen. The NW part
of the peninsula is composed of gray granite.
Chermsideoya, a relatively large island, lies off the N end of
11.40
Laponiahalvoya. The passage between the island and the main-
land is narrow and its depths are moderate. About 1 mile E of
Chermsideoya are the smaller islands of Castrenoya. In the
channel between Chermsideoya and Castrenoya, the depths are
greater than 146m, but a vessel has anchored, in about 9.1m,
between the E and SE points of Chermsideoya, in a position
about 0.5 mile offshore. A 3m shoal patch, the position of
which is doubtful, was reported (1989) to lie 1.5 miles SE of
South Castrenoya Island.
Beverlysundet (80°29'N., 19°52'E.) is entered between
11.40
Kapp Rubin and a point on the NW side of Chermsideoya, 2
miles ENE. The sound extends 3 miles SSE, then 1.5 miles NE,
with a least width of 0.4 mile. A small point, projecting 0.1
mile S from the middle of the S side of Chermsideoya, is
fringed with foul ground, which extends nearly 183m offshore.
A shoal, located 0.4 mile ESE of this point, with a depth of
1.8m, has passages on either side. Anchorage may be obtained
0.15 mile WNW of the above point.
11.41 Waldenoya (80°37'N., 19°46'E.), an island, lies 5.5
miles NNW of Nordkapp, the N extremity of Chermsideoya.
The island consists of coarse-grain granite, most of which is
flesh color, giving the rock a red hue. The depths around the is-
land are considerable. Heclaskjeret, a dangerous rock, lies 1.5
miles S of the summit of Waldenoya. The rock at times is
awash when a heavy sea is running.
Sjuoyane consists of three large islands and four smaller is-
11.41
lands, which lie NE of Nordkapp. Rossoya, one of the smaller
islands, is the northernmost island in Svalbard.
Nordenskioldbukta (80°25'N., 21°10'E.) is entered between
11.41
Nordkapp and Kapp Platen, 28 miles E. The bay consists of nu-
merous inlets, some of which may be entered without danger
and are suitable only for temporary anchorage. They are open
to the N and may be filled with heavy ice without warning.
Comparatively few soundings have been taken in the bay, but
several shoals are known to exist. Fowl ground with many
rocks, both below-water and awash, lies S of Scoresbyoya, an
island about 15 miles SW of Kapp Platen.
Rijpfjorden, the longest inlet on the N coast of Nordaustlan-
11.41
det, is entered between Kapp Loven and Kapp Wrede, 10.5
miles NE, and extends 25 miles S from the latter point. Vind-
bukta, on the E shore of the fjord, lies 7 miles S of Kapp Wre-
de. Wordiebukta, entered N of a small projection 20 miles S of
Kapp Wrede, is considered to be the safest harbor in Rijp-
fjorden. No soundings are available.
11.42 Zorgdragerfjorden (80°23'N., 22°40'E.), on the NW
side of Prins Oscars Land, is entered between Kapp Wrede and
Pub. 182
Kapp Platen, and extends 12 miles S from the latter point. The
head of the fjord is shoal and submerged rocks are reported to
lie in the entrance. The fjord should not be used as a refuge and
great caution is necessary in entering it. The entrance can be
blocked very quickly by ice; the fjord frequently remains full
of ice long after the surrounding waters are open.
Duvefjorden (80°17'N., 23°30'E.) is entered between the
11.42
coast under Goodenoughtjellet, 6 miles SE of Kapp Platen, and
the N extremity of Glenhalvoya, a peninsula 11 miles farther
SE, and extends 18 miles S from its entrance. The W side of
the fjord consists of steep headlands which form the E side of
Prins Oscars Land. The E shore is lower and more undulating
then the W.
A rock, with a depth of 8m, is reported to lie in position
11.42
80°21.3'N, 23°14.0'E.
Adlersparrefjorden, on the E side of Duvefjorden, extends
11.42
about 4 miles SE and has three inlets at its head. The N inlet af-
fords refuge to small vessels, but if blocked by ice, the inlet
may remain closed for a year. Conwayfjellet, a mountain, rises
steeply between the middle and S inlets. Close SW of Adler-
sparrefjorden is an unnamed bight, about 2 miles wide at the
entrance; the E side of Duvefjorden trends about 10 miles S to
the head of the fjord. Near the outer end of the E and longer of
two promontories which project from the head is the dark and
prominent Louise Richardfjellet, with a cairn on its flat sum-
mit. Duvebreen, a glacier, enters the fjord about 4 miles E of
Louise Richardfjellet.
11.43 Finn Malmgrenfjorden (80°17'N., 24°31'E.) is en-
tered between Glenhalvoya and Bergstromodden, the N ex-
tremity of a narrow whale-backed peninsula 6 miles in length.
The fjord, 4 miles wide at the entrance, extends 7 miles SW.
No soundings have been taken in the fjord or in its approaches
and great care is necessary when entering. Sealing vessels re-
port that a safe channel passes W of Alpinioya, the islet close
NW of Bergstromodden. An islet, whose position is doubtful,
lies about 2 miles W of Alpinioya.
Karl XII Oyane (80°39'N., 25°03'E.) lies 18 miles N of
11.43
Bergstromodden. The island has steep sides and a truncated
top. In clear weather, the island appears as a large black sail of
a boat. Norde Repoya, an island, lies 7 miles N of Glenhalvoya
and is 3 miles long in an E-W direction. Sore Repoya lies 2
miles S of Norde Repoya and is about 4 miles long in a N-S di-
rection. No attempt should be made to pass between the latter
island and the mainland, as both channels are foul.
Brochoya (80°27'N., 26°03'E.), which with Foynoya and
11.43
Schubeleroya forms a triangular group, lies 14 miles ENE of
Bergstromodden and is about 150m high. Foynoya lies about 2
miles E of Brochoya; Schubeleroya lies 1.5 miles S of Bro-
choya.
Albertinibukta (80°16'N., 25°00'E.), a bay, is entered be-
11.43
tween Bergstromodden and Kapp Bruun, the extremity of a
small projection 6.5 miles SE, and extends 6 miles S to a gla-
cier at its head. Between Kapp Bruun and the W end of Leigh-
breen are a large number of islets lying between 0.5 and 2
miles offshore. Shoals and submerged rocks surround these is-
lets and a berth of at least 3 miles should be given to the coast
in their vicinity.
The ice cliffs of Leighbreen extend 10 miles to Kapp Leigh
11.43
Smith, and then 4 miles S to Kapp Laura, an outcrop of bare rock
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
extending 2 miles E and 3 miles S, forming the E extremity of
Nordaustlandet. Storoya, an island, lies 5 miles ENE of Kapp Lau-
ra. Foul ground with submerged rocks is charted extending 2 miles
S from the E extremity of the island. The tidal currents between
Kapp Laura and Storoya are reported to attain a velocity of about 4
knots; this is probably a very conservative estimate.
Hinlopenstretet
11.44 Hinlopenstretet (79°30'N., 19°20'E.) is entered from
the N between Verlegenhuken, and Langgrunnodden
(80°09'N., 17°46'E.). Lagunepynten, 3 miles ESE of Verlegen-
huken, is a low point from which the coast extends 6.5 miles
SSE to Eolusneset. The strait extends about 95 miles SE to Ko-
ristkabreen and Kapp Mohn. The narrowest part of the strait
lies from 15 to 25 miles within the N entrance where the shores
are only 5 miles apart. The strait in many places is encumbered
by islands and islets, especially in its S entrance. In October,
the whole strait is covered with ice. In July and August, the
strait is navigable by most type vessels during normal years.
The N part of the strait is affected by strong winds from adja-
cent ice-covered highlands in summer.
Sorgfjorden (79°54'N., 16°50'E.) is entered between Eolus-
11.44
neset and a small projection 1.5 miles ESE. The fjord extends 5
miles S to a glacier at its head. The fjord has not been com-
pletely sounded, but in most places both shores may apparently
be approached in safety to within 183m.
Heclahamma, a landlocked cove, lies on the S side of Cro-
11.44
zierpyten, a narrow promontory on the E shore about 1 mile
within the entrance of Sorgfjorden. Anchorage may be ob-
tained in Heclahamna, in depths of 5.5 to 13m, good holding
ground. Anchorage is also obtainable under Eolusneset, in
depths of 5.5 to 9m.
Lomfjorden (79°36'N., 17°54'E.) lies on the W side of Hin-
11.44
lopenstretet and is entered between Isrundingen and Kapp Fan-
shawe, 6 miles SSE. The fjord extends 17 miles SSW to a
glacier at its head. It has been reported anchorage may be taken
in a depth of 14m, clay, off the W shore, close S of Valhallfon-
na.
11.45 Tommelpynten (79°33'N., 18°42'E.) lies 7 miles SE
of Kapp Fanshawe. Tommeloyane, a group of islets, lies be-
tween 1 and 2.5 miles offshore abreast of Tommelpynten. A
detached islet is charted 3.5 miles N of Tommelpynten; a dan-
gerous rock lies 5 miles E of the point.
Vaigattbogen, a wide open bay, lies between Tommelpynten
11.45
and Kapp Freeden, which projects 2.5 miles NE from the coast
27 miles SSE of Tommelpynten. Numerous glaciers, some of
them separated by mountains, form the coast for 19 miles S of
Tommelpynten. Between Kapp Freeden and Kapp Weyprecht,
26 miles SE, many glaciers discharge into the strait; there are
numerous off-lying islands and islets.
Wilhelmoya (79°03'N., 20°24'E.), a large island, lies 3.5
11.45
miles SE of Kapp Freeden. The island is high with a round
snow top. The island is separated from the mainland by
Bjornsundet. Bastianoyane and Ronnbeckoyane, two groups of
islets SW of Wilhelmoya, obstruct the S approach to Bjornsun-
det. Koristkabreen, 5 miles S of Kapp Weyprecht forms the SW
entrance point of Hinlopenstretet, and the E extremity of Spits-
bergen.
277
Hinlopenstretet—East Side
11.46 Murchisonfjorden (80°00'N., 18°20'E.), an indenta-
tion on the E side of the strait, is entered between Tvillingneset
and Sparreneset, 8 miles S, and extends 8 miles E. It is encum-
bered with islets and its shores are considerably indented. A
detached shoal, with a depth of 9m, lies 3 miles WSW of Tvil-
lingneset. When the inner part of the bay is icebound, vessels
can anchor, in 9m, sand, close within the middle islet of the
three outermost ones at the entrance. Otherwise anchorage is
afforded close W of Kvalrosshalvoya, a peninsula at the inner
end of the S side, or in a cove at the NE end of the bay.
Wahlenbergfjorden (79°40'N., 20°00'E.) is the largest fjord
11.46
in Hinlopenstretet, lying about 35 miles within the N entrance,
and extends about 25 miles ENE from the E side of the strait. A
shoal, with a depth of 4.5m, was reported (1988) to lie 2.5
miles ESE of the SE extremity of Wahlenbergfjorden. Further
shoal patches have been reported (1989) up to 4 miles N of this
position. The fjord has a width of about 6 miles at the entrance,
with the least width being about 5 miles. Gyldenoyane, an is-
land with an islet close SW, lies in the middle of the entrance.
Palanderbukta indents the S shore of Wahlengberfjorden, 9
11.46
miles within its entrance. The inlet is about 5 miles wide at its
entrance and extends about 11 miles SE to its head. Anchorage
is available at the head of the inlet, close off the NE shore, in a
depth of about 13m.
11.47 Vaigattoyane (79°20'N., 20°00'E.) is an extensive
group of islands and islets which encumber the middle of Hin-
lopenstretet for a distance of about 15 miles, from 9 miles S of
Selanderneset to 4 miles N of Kapp Freeden. Wahlbergoya, the
largest island of the group, is 7 miles long, with its NW ex-
tremity 13 miles S of Selanderneset. Von Otteroya, the next
largest island, lies about 2 miles S of Wahlbergoya.
Ulvebukta, an open bay, lies on the S side of Nordaustlandet,
11.47
13 miles E of Wahlbergoya. The bay is entered between Torell-
neset and Giaeverneset, 11 miles E. Anchorage may be ob-
tained close S of Torellnesfjellet, in a depth of 11m, or in the
same depth, close off Giaeverneset.
Kapp Mohn, a glacier point which forms the SE entrance
11.47
point of Hinlopenstretet, lies 36 miles E of Giaeverneset. The
point is subject to change due to the movement of the ice cliffs.
Spitsbergen—East Coast
11.48 Kikutodden (76°35'N., 17°00'E.), the SE extremity
of Sorkapp Land, is a projection on the coast and lies 6 miles
ENE of Sommerfeldbukta. Bettybukta is a slight indentation
with low land at its head. It lies 4 miles NNE of Kikutodden.
Isbukta, a bay, lies 7 miles NNW of Bettybukta.
Hedgehogfjellet, a steep mountain, rises close to the coast
11.48
about 10 miles NNE of Isbukta. From abreast this mountain,
the E coast of Spitsbergen, trends about 32 miles N to Kval-
vagen. A number of glaciers discharge into the sea between
Hedgehogfjellet and Kvalvagen. It has been reported Kval-
vagen affords good anchorage, but is unreachable at times be-
cause of drift ice.
Storfjorden (78°00'N., 20°00'E.), entered between Kvalho-
11.48
vden and Kvalpynten, 35 miles E, extends 63 miles N to the
entrance of Ginevrabotnen at its head. The whole of
Pub. 182
278 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
Negerpynten from SE
11.48
Storfjorden is filled with ice from January to May inclusive, in
an average year, but in exceptional years there may be large
openings in May. Vessels can usually navigate from July to
September. Strong winds and currents may cause rapid chang-
es in the ice in this region.
From Kvalhovden, the coast trends N for nearly 30 miles to
11.48
Kapp Dufferin; this stretch is broken by the fronts of three gla-
ciers between the coastal peaks. The glaciers are separated by
coastal mountains. Agardhbukta, is entered between Kapp
Dufferin and Revnosa, 6 miles NE, and extends 4.5 miles NW.
This bay has the reputation of being very foul, though the
11.48
latest surveys indicate that its middle part is unencumbered. It
has been stated that the bay is exposed to drift ice because of
violent currents in the vicinity.
The coast continues N for about 25 miles from Revnosa;
11.48
then for about 8 miles E it is formed by the S side of Ne-
gribreen Glacier. Kapp Antinori, the SE extremity of the gla-
cier, is the W entrance point of Ginevrabotnen, which lies at
the head of Storfjorden. Anchorage has been reported in Du-
nerbukta and Mohnbukta, two coves on the coast between Rev-
nosa and Negribreen.
Storfjorden—East Side
11.49 North of Kvalpynten, the E coast of Storfjorden has
been described as a continuous rocky wall, rising almost direct-
ly from the sea to a high plateau. Kapp Lee, the NW point of
Edgeoya and the S entrance point of Freemansundet, lies about
40 miles N of Kvalpynten. Between the two points the coast is
Pub. 182
11.48 Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority
indented by Diskobukta, a wide bay with a valley at its head.
Barkhamodden (78°14'N., 20°41'E.), the SW point of Bar-
11.49
entsoya, lies 7 miles NNW of Kapp Lee, with the entrance of
Freemansundet being between them. The mountainous coast of
Barentsoya continues in a N direction for about 16 miles to
Mistakodden, the NW point of the island. Anchorage is avail-
able close N of Mistakodden in the position indicated on the
chart. A dangerous rock lies about 2 miles WNW of Mistakod-
den. Anderssonbukta indents the coast between Barkhamodden
and Duckwitzbreen, a glacier about 5 miles to the N. Vosse-
bukta, a slight indentation in the coast, lies 5 miles SE of Mis-
takodden. A rock lies 3 miles SW of Anderssonoyane. Another
dangerous rock has been reported to exist in position
(77°25.9'N., 20°48.5'E.) Mariners are advised to navigate with
caution in this area.
A small unnamed islet and Sylen, a 3.5m patch, lie 3 miles
11.49
and 5 miles NW, respectively, of Hassensteinbukta. Storflosk-
jeret, a rock which covers and uncovers, lies 12 miles WNW of
this cove. Sletvoldgrunnen, a 5m patch, lies about 9 miles
WSW of Kapp Lee, but its exact position is doubtful. Other
dangers in Storfjorden are best seen on the charts.
Ginevrabotnen (78°37'N., 20°20'E.), at the head of
11.49
Storfjorden, is entered between Mistakodden and Kapp An-
tinori. The bay extends about 15 miles NE to Heleysundet, the
narrow passage connecting it with Olgastretet, and is encum-
bered by several off-lying islets. The ice in Ginevrabotnen re-
mains throughout almost the entire year. At times it is clear of
ice by the end of August, but new ice begins to form almost at
once and the bay is quickly blocked again.
 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
Edgeoya and Barentsoya—East Coasts
11.50 Edgeoya (77°45'N., 22°30'E.), the third largest island
in Svalbard, lies E of the S part of Spitsbergen. The E coast of
the island forms the W side of Olgastrete. The island is about
60 miles long between Negerpynten, the SW extremity of the
island, and Kapp Heuglin, its N extremity. The approach to the
SW coast of Edgeoya is one of the most dangerous parts of
Svalbard, as the outermost known dangers lie a long way off-
shore, the tidal currents in this vicinity are very strong, and a
number of uncharted dangers are reported to lie off the coast.
Tunsenoyane consists of several groups of islets some dis-
11.50
tance apart and as yet not accurately charted covering a large
area S of the SW coast of Edgeoya. The outermost known dan-
gers are the isolated drying rocks Brotskjer and Rumpetrollet,
lying approximately 32 miles SW of Negerpynten. Breakers
have been reported in this area. A 10m depth has been reported
to lie about 12 miles W of this danger. Other dangerous sub-
merged rocks lie between 10 and 12 miles WNW of the islet of
Haoya.
Kong Luovigoyane and Menkeoyane are the principal
11.50
groups of islets in the N part of Tusenoyane. The former, the
farthest NW, lies 13 miles W of Negerpynten and has danger-
ous reefs rising out of deep water close S; the latter, the farthest
NE, is situated 5 miles SSE of that point and is surrounded by
rocky patches.
A below-water reef extends 1 mile S of Menkeoyane and a
11.50
rock, with a depth of less than 2m, lies 2.5 miles SW of the
group. A channel leads NW between these dangers towards
Buolscheoya, a detached islet midway between Menkeoyane
and Kong Ludvigoyane.
About 6 miles S of Kong Ludvigoyane lies Utsira, a low-lying
11.50
rocky islet; the same distance S of Buolscheoya stands Meinicke-
oyane, a pair of islands steep-to except on their W side.
Halvmaneoya (77°16'N., 23°10'E.), an island, lies with its W
11.50
extremity about 8 miles E of Negerpynten. The S point of the is-
land is foul to a distance of about 2 miles offshore. Dianahamna,
an indentation on the N side of the island, affords anchorage.
Ryk Yseoyane (77°47'N., 25°12'E.), a group of islets, lie
11.50
about 10 miles E of the E extremity of Edgeoya. Seen from a
position 10 miles to the E, the group has the appearance of one
long low island, with the S extremity sloping gradually into the
sea and the N end finishing in an abrupt cliff.
Blafjorden, a large open bay, lies between Kapp Metchers
11.50
and Kapp Pechuel Losche, 20 miles NW, and extends 7 miles
SW of a line joining the entrance points. The NW part of the
bay is shallow, with depths of 9m being found about 4 miles
offshore. Submerged rocks, the exact position of which are
doubtful, are reported to exist between 1 mile and 2 miles E of
Kapp Pechuel Losche.
11.51 Freemansundet (78°14'N., 21°37'E.), 22 miles in
length, has an E to SW direction and a least width of 2.5 miles. It
separates Edgeoyn from Barentsoya. The sound was surveyed in
1987; depths of 15m were found in the center but is reported to be
too shallow and rocky to admit passage of anything but small
craft. The sound is entered from the E between Kapp Heuglin and
Kapp Waldburg, 9.5 miles W.
Two islets lie in the middle of the E entrance, 4 miles WNW
11.51
of Kapp Heuglin. Foul ground extends 2.5 miles N and NW
279
from Kapp Heuglin and it has been reported that the area
around Kapp Waldburg is foul.
Barentsoya (78°26'N., 21°20'E.) lies close N of Edgeoya and is
11.51
separated from it by Freemansundet. Heleysundet, another narrow
passage, leads between Barentsoya and the mainland to the N. The
island is about 25 miles in extent and has glaciers which empty in-
to the sea from each of its four sides.
Off-lying Islands
11.52 Hopen (76°35'N., 25°10'E.), an isolated island, is nar-
row and 17 miles long in a NNE-SSW direction; it lies about
54 miles SE of Negerpynten, the S extremity of Edgeoya. The
island has been described as a tableland, the sides of which are
cut up with gullies and which attain an elevation of 365m at
Kapp Thor, the S point. Landing is at all times difficult because
of the steep coasts and the shallow water close-in. There is usu-
ally a heavy swell on all sides of the island.
Hopen Radio station is located 5 miles NNE of Kapp Thor.
11.52
In an average year, Hopen is clear of ice from July to Octo-
11.52
ber. In a severe season, the island may be ice-free only from
mid-August to mid-September. The current sets SW past
Hopen at about 2 knots.
Anchorage.—The island has no sheltered bays which can
11.52
serve as harbors. It is so shallow inshore around the entire is-
land, that even at 200m from the shore, very little sea is re-
quired to form breakers, thus making landing difficult for a
boat. On the E side of the island, in places, the shallow area can
extend up to 0.7 mile or more out from land.
Today, both sides of the island are used as anchorages to
11.52
avoid storms, or for reloading from fishing vessels to mother
ships of up to 20,000 gt.
For those wishing to land, a boat channel should be found in-
11.52
to the shore where it appears to be deepest and calmest without
breakers over a long period. From experience, it appears to be
best to go ashore is on the E side of the island, when vessels go
in carefully and anchor, in 10 to 15m.
Vessels have anchored, in a depth of 11m, at a distance of 0.5
11.52
mile from land off the radio station.
11.53 Kong Karls Land (78°50'N., 28°10'E.) consists of a
group of three main islands, Svenskoya, Kongsoya, and Abe-
loya, together with a number of islets. Olgastretet, a channel
about 50 miles in width, separates the group from Edgeoya and
Barentsoya. Erik Eriksenstretet, a channel entered from the
NE, is 35 miles wide and separates the group from Nordaust-
landet.
Svenskoya, the W island of Kong Karls Land, lies 50 miles
11.53
ENE of Barentsoya. In August and September, the coast may,
for the most part, be approached by most vessels through navi-
gable ice. Kapp Hammerfest forms the S extremity of the is-
land and is a tapering basalt ridge. The island is moderately
free from snow, but N of Kukenthafjaellet, between it and the
ridge, there exist a permanent cap of snow and ice. Patches of
snow cling constantly to the upper edges of the plateau and the
higher slopes of the hills. The lowlands of the island consist
mainly of sand and clay washed down by melting snow.
A high flat-topped cliff extends NE from Kapp Hammerfest
11.53
and is connected by a yellow sandy beach to Kapp Weissenfels,
the E extremity of Svenskoya. This point, projecting about 1
Pub. 182
280 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
mile ENE, consists of a mass of columnar basalt, with sand
dunes in its vicinity. Anchorage has been obtained in a bight on
the S side of Kapp Weissenfels, in a depth of 14m, poor hold-
ing ground, with some shelter from N winds.
11.54 Kongsoya (78°54'N., 28°13'E.), about 21 miles long
in an E-W direction, is the middle island of Kong Karls Land.
The island is separated from Svenskoya by Rivalensundet. The
island is comparatively narrow, its greatest width being about 5
miles, and consists of three main parts. The three parts are the
W plateau, the high land near the E end, and the low land con-
necting the two. From the offing SE, it appears as three sepa-
rate islands; at a greater distance it resembles a group of four
islands, because of the dip in the W plateau.
Kapp Altmann is the extremity of a narrow tongue of land
11.54
which projects about 2 miles S from the S coast of Kongsoya,
in a position about 3 miles E of Kapp Andreassen, the W ex-
tremity of the island. A dangerous reef extends about 1 mile S
from the cape; about 1 mile farther in the same direction is a
rock, awash. A shoal, with a depth of 2.7m, has been reported
about 5 miles SE of the cape. It has been reported that anchor-
age may be obtained close inshore on the E side of Kapp Alt-
mann, in a depth of 12m, fine sand.
Some shelter from N and W winds was obtained, but the
11.54
holding ground is poor. At times, squalls from the N swept
down from the hills with great violence.
Pub. 182
11.55 Antarcticbukta (78°49'N., 28°03'E.) lies between
Kapp Altmann and Kapp Andreassen, 4 miles W. Anchorage is
obtainable here, in a depth of 11m, sand, but holding ground is
poor. Anchorage has been reported in Andreebukta, the bight
between Tommerneset and Nordaustpynten. The depth close
inshore in the SW part of the bight is 61m, clay.
Abeloya (79°00'N., 30°10'E.) is the smallest and farthest E
11.55
island of the Kong Karls Land group. The island is reported to
be barren and of basaltic formation and is located 6 miles ENE
of Kongsoya. The island is 3 miles long by 2.5 miles wide.
11.56 Kvitoya (80°09'N., 32°38'E.) is about 23 miles long
in an E-W direction. The island is located at the E extremity of
Nordaustlandet; about 45 miles E of Kapp Laura. Kvitoya is al-
most completely covered by ice; the only ice-free areas are An-
dreeneset, its SW point, and Kraemerpynten, near the NE end
of the island.
The ice cap covering the island is divided into three domes
11.56
which reflect the topography of the underlying rocks. The is-
land has been described as being glittering white from its sum-
mit down to the water’s edge, from which it rises in a steep icy
wall.
A rock, awash, lies 6 miles SSE of Andreeneset. Another
11.56
rock, awash, lies 1.5 miles WSW of Andreeneset. A shoal spit
extends 2 miles S from a point on the S coast, 9 miles E of An-
dreeneset.
 Glossaries
Glossaries
Norwegian
NORWEGIAN English
A drikkevand...........................................................fresh water
a ..................................................................... rivulet, stream
aker ................................................................................ field
aksel, aksla ............................shoulder of a hill or mountain
alltid synlig........................................................ above water
ankerplass .............................................................anchorage
as ...........................................................................hill, ridge
atte ................................................................................ eight
aust ................................................................................. east
austre .........................................................................eastern
avfallsplass ....................................................... spoil ground
avlopsledning ..........................................outfall pipe, sewer
B etterretninger for sjofarende................... notices to mariners
babord.........................................................port (side, hand)
bae i vannflaten .............................rock, awash at low water
bae ............................................... rock (usually submerged)
bak ...............................................................................astern
bake ...........................................................................beacon
bakke ...............................................................................hill
ballast plass ...................................................... spoil ground
banke ............................................................................ bank
basseng .........................................................................basin
bathavn ...............................................................boat harbor
beholderskap ........................................................... pedestal
bekk ................................................................... stream beck
berg, bierg, bjerg .................................................mount, hill
betong ......................................................................concrete
bla .................................................................................. blue
bo...................................................................................farm
boe ............................................... rock (usually submerged)
borg...............................................................castle, mansion
botn................................................................head (of fjord)
boye .............................................................................. buoy
boyestake...............................................................spar buoy
brat......................................rock, (usually a group of rocks)
bratt ....................................................... steep, cliffy, abrupt
bre.............................................................................. glacier
bred............................................................................... wide
brott ........................................rock (usually group of rocks)
bru, bro ....................................................................... bridge
brudd ..........................................................................quarry
brukar ............................................................................. pier
brygga, brygge...........wharf, (boat landing, dock, jetty, pier
bukt, bukta ................................................. bay, bight (cove)
bunn...........................................................................bottom
bunnkjetting..............................................bottom chain, trot
by..................................................................... town, village
bygd............................................................... district, parish
bygning......................................framework structure, pylon
D fyrlampe ................................................... light (unwatched)
dag .................................................................................. day
dal ................................................................................valley
dalfore ......................................................... extended valley
djup................................................................................deep
dor, dora.................................................. door, gate, passage
281
NORWEGIAN English
dumpefelt ................................................... dumping ground
dyb, dyp......................................................................... deep
dybde............................................................................depth
dykdalb..................................................................... dolphin
E
ebbe ..........................................................................ebb tide
egg................................ edge (of a bank or mountain range)
eid............................................................................. isthmus
elv, elva ......................................................................... river
elvmunning ........................................................river mouth
en.....................................................................................one
F
fabrikk ....................................................................... factory
fall ..................................................... fall (of a rock of cliff)
famn .......................................................................... fathom
farled, farlei................................................channel, fairway
fartoy, fartyg................................................................vessel
farvann ..................................................waters, sea, fairway
fastland ...................................................................mainland
favn............................................................................ fathom
fem ................................................................................. five
ferje ...............................................................................ferry
festning..............................................................fort, fortress
fire ..................................................................................four
fiskevaer .........................................................fishing station
fjaere ........................................................................ebb tide
fjell ..........................................hill, mountain, rocky bottom
fjellplata .................................................................... plateau
fjellrygg........................................................ mountain ridge
fjellvegg .........................................................mountain wall
fjord....................................................... firth, arm of the sea
flae, flak, flat ...................................................... flat or bank
flesa ........................................ rock (generally above-water)
flo .......................................................................... flood tide
flu, flua..................................................... rock (submerged)
flyplasser ....................................................................airport
flytedokk ......................................................... floating dock
foran, forud ................................................................. ahead
forberg................................................................promontory
forbudt.................................................................. prohibited
forbudt sjoomrade ....................................restricted sea area
fortoyningsboye ............................................. mooring buoy
foss ...........................................................cascade, waterfall
fot .......................................................................... foot, base
fylke ......................................................................... country
fyr.................................................................................. light
fyrhus, fyrtarn .................................. lighthouse, light-tower
G
gamle, gammel ................................................................ old
gap, gat ............................................... mouth, channel, deep
gard ....................................................... farm, village, estate
gjennom.................................................................... through
Pub. 182
282
NORWEGIAN English
godt synlig ........................................................ conspicuous
gra.................................................................................. gray
grend.......................................................................... hamlet
grense ...........................................................limit, boundary
gron, gront, grun.......................................................... green
grube.................................................................mine, quarry
grunn ............................................................. shoal, shallow
grunnen......................................................................ground
gul.............................................................................. yellow
H klokkeboye ............................................................ bell-buoy
hake ...............................................strip or hook of low lang
hals ................................................................. isthmus, neck
halvoy ....................................................................peninsula
hamn ................................................................harbor, haven
haug ........................................................................... hillock
haus ........................................................................headland
hav ................................................................................... sea
havn .................................................................harbor, haven
havnedistrikt ...................................... (civil) harbour district
havnekontor ......................................................harbor office
hei, heia ..........................................hill or height, hummock
heim, hejm........................................................... homestead
heller.................................................................... rocky cave
hode ...............................................................................head
hol..........................................................................deep hole
hole .............................................................................cavern
holm, holme....................................................................islet
hop....................................................................... small cove
horn ....................................................................... hill, peak
hovde, hoved ................................................... head (height)
hoy, hogd ........................................hill or height, hummock
hoyere ......................................................................... higher
hoyvann ............................................................... high water
huk.................................................strip or hook of low land
hule .............................................................................cavern
hump..................................................................... hummock
hundre...................................................................... hundred
hus ...............................................................................house
hvit, hvitt ..................................................................... white
hytte................................................................................. hut
I loskontor ............................................................. pilot office
i land...........................................................................ashore
indre, inre, inste............................................................ inner
innlop, innseiling.....................................................entrance
innpa .........................................................................close to
innsjo ..............................................................................lake
is .......................................................................................ice
isbre ............................................................ glacier, ice-field
J mindre .......................................................................smaller
jern..................................................................................iron
jernbane .................................................................... railway
jokel............................................................ glacier, ice-field
jord ...................................................................... earth, land
K mur, murverk..............................................brick, brickwork
kabel ........................................................... submarine cable
kai ................................................................................. quay
kalv ..................... calf (small rock or islet near a larger one)
kanal .............................................................. canal, channel
Pub. 182
Glossaries
NORWEGIAN English
kapell.......................................................................... chapel
kapp............................................................................... cape
kil ........................................................................creek, inlet
kirke ...........................................................................church
kjegle, kjegleformede...................................... cone; conical
klar ................................................................................clear
klett ...................................................................... bluff, cliff
klippe...............................................................reef, pinnacle
kloakkledning.......................................... outfall pipe, sewer
klova, kloft .................................................................... cleft
klubb ...................................................................... headland
klump ......................................................................... clump
knaus .................................................................... crag, rock
knop............................................................................... knot
koll ................................................... knoll, rounded summit
kort ............................................................................... short
kraftstasjon......................................................power station
kran ..............................................................................crane
kreppa, kreppen........................................................narrows
krigshavn...........................................................naval harbor
kulp ....................................................................... deep hole
kyst ............................................................................... coast
L
ladested ........................................................... loading place
lagerhus ............................................................... warehouse
land...................................................................... land, shore
lang................................................................................ long
langgrunn ....................................................shelving bottom
lanterne...........................................................................post
lav, lave, lavt....................................................................low
lavvann ..................................................................low water
led, leia................................................... channel, lead track
leir (-bunn) .................................................... clay (-bottom)
li ..................................................................... mountain side
lille, lite, litla, litle......................................................... little
livbat......................................................................... lifeboat
lodret .........................................................................vertical
lop ..............................................................channel, passage
los.................................................................................. pilot
lufspann, luftspenn....................................... overhead cable
lykt, lys.......................................................................... light
lysboye .................................................................light-buoy
M
mellom .................................................................... between
merke............................................................................ mark
midt ........................................................................... middle
molle .............................................................................. mill
molo ..........................................................mole, breakwater
mork ..................................................... obscured (of a light)
munn, munning .......................................................... mouth
myr ..............................................................................marsh
N
nakke ............................................................................. neck
natt................................................................................ night
 Glossaries
NORWEGIAN English
naust ............................................................. hut, fishing hut
navn ..............................................................................name
nearing................................... high entrance point of a fjord
mederst .....................................................................beneath
nedre ...................................................................lower, front
nes ................................................................................. ness
ni.................................................................................... nine
nip........................................................................ neap (tide)
nodhavn ......................................... distress or refuge harbor
nord ..............................................................................north
nordenom..............................................................northward
nordre, nordotre.......................................................northern
norske los, den...................norway pilot (sailing directions)
nut.......................................................... mountain top, peak
ny; nytt............................................................................new
O sjoflyhavn.................................................... seaplane harbor
o...................................................................................island
odde .............................................................................. point
odre................................................................................. rear
olje.............................................................................fuel oil
opphalings rampe ...........................................slipway, ramp
oppmudret ............................................................... dredged
orgelboye ......................................................... whistle-buoy
orlogshavn .............................................. (naval) harbor area
os ....river mouth, basin or area of between islands or fjords
ovenfor ............................................................above, higher
overettlinjen....................................................... leading-line
oversvommet .......................................................submerged
ost ................................................................................... east
ostenom .................................................................. eastward
ostre ...........................................................................eastern
ovyvelsefelt, ovelsesomrade...........exercise or practice area
overst ...........................................................................above
ovre.................................................................... upper (rear)
oy, oya .........................................................................island
oygard, oygruppe................................................archipelago
oyr, oyra, ora ............................................... delta, sandbank
P slua ............................................................................... rock
pa ................................................................................. at, on
pa grunn................................................................... aground
pakhus ................................................................ storehouse
peiling...................................................................... bearing
pele ................................................................................ post
pelebukk .................................................................. dolphin
peleverk ..........................................................piling, groyne
pir .................................................................................. pier
platta ......................................................................... plateau
poll............................................................. cove, inlet, basin
pynt.............................................................................. point
R spiss...................................................................... point, spit
rabbe ..................................................... rocky or stony ridge
radiofyr ............................................................. radiobeacon
ras ............................................................................ landslip
rasa .................................................................................race
red......................................................................... roadstead
redning....................................................................... rescue
renna, renne ............................................................. channel
283
NORWEGIAN English
rev.................................................................................. reef
rod, rodt........................................................................... red
rorledning................................................................ pipeline
ros, roys........................................ stone heap, rocky ground
rund ............................................................................ round
rygg .....................................................................back, ridge
S
sadel .......................................................................... saddle
sagbruk.................................................................... sawmill
sand (-bunn) ..................................................sand (-bottom)
sata, sate ..................................................... haycock, hillock
seater .......................................................................hill farm
seks.................................................................................. six
singel (-bunn) ............................................shingle (-bottom)
sjo................................................................................... sea
sjohus ................................................................. warehouse
sjomerke .....................................................beacon, seamark
sju................................................................................ seven
skalle ......................................................................head, hill
skar, skar .......................... crevice, rocky outcrop, gap, glen
skip................................................................................ ship
skipsverft................................................................ shipyard
skjaer, skjer ...................................above-water rock, skerry
skjaergard ............................................ archipelago, skerries
skjell (-bunn) .................................................shell (-bottom)
skog ...................................................................wood, forest
skolt.............................................. headland; head (of shoal)
skorstein ................................................................. chimney
skra......................................................................... diagonal
skvalpeskjaer..................................................... rock, awash
slaggrunn........................................................ see langgrunn
slam (-bunn) .................................................. mud (-bottom)
slepebat .......................................................................... tug
slette ...................................................................... flat, plain
slik................................................................................ ooze
slipp...................................................................... patent slip
slott............................................................................. castle
slukket ............................................................. extinguished
slus, sluse ........................................................... lock, sluice
sma .............................................................................. small
smal .......................................................................... narrow
sole (-bunn) ................................................... mud (-bottom)
sondre..................................................................... southern
sonnenom ............................................................ southward
sor, sore ....................................................................... south
sorte............................................................................. black
sorvest ................................................................. southwest
soyle .............................................................. column, pillar
stad ........................................................................city, town
stake ............................................................. pole, spar buoy
stakk ....................................................................heap, stack
stang ...................................................... perch, post, column
stativ ................................................................ pile structure
staur.................................................................pinnacle rock
stein, sten............................................................. rock, stone
Pub. 182
284 Glossaries
NORWEGIAN English
sund, sundet............................... channel, inlet, sound, strait
sva.....................................................................ridge of rock
svart ............................................................................. black
syd ............................................................................... south
sykchus .................................................................... hospital
T utstikker................................................ projecting pier, jetty
tang .....................................................................tongue, spit
tare..........submerged rock (usually large and flat); seaweed
takesignal.............................................................. fog signal
tarn.............................................................................. tower
ti...................................................................................... ten
tind...................................................................summit, peak
to.................................................................................... two
toll-bod, -bu-stasjon, -kammer, -sted ............. custom house
office, etc.
tonne ......................................................... buoy, cask, barrel
topp.......................................................................... summit
torr .................................................................................. dry
torrdokk .................................................................. dry dock
torrfall, torrflu............................... drying bank, drying rock
trafikkregulertomrade................... traffic separation scheme
trang, trange.............................................................. narrow
tre................................................................................. three
tre............................................................................. wooden
trebeining.................................................. framework tower
trekant...................................................................... triangle
tue, tuva ............................................ hillrock, knoll, mound
tung................................................................ tongue of land
tusen ...................................................................... thousand
tvers ........................................................................... abeam
tydelig.............................................................. conspicuous
Pub. 182
NORWEGIAN English
U
uklar .............................................................................. foul
undervanns ......................................................... submerged
ur .............................................rock-strewn slope; rock-falls
utlop ................................................................ mouth, outlet
V
vaer......................................... place, village; fishing station
vag......................................................bay, cove, creek, inlet
vaker.......................................................beacon; buoy; vane
val.................................................. coast, very shallow cove
vandret................................................................. horizontal
vann, vatn ............................................................ water, lake
vannfall.....................................................cascade, waterfall
varde...............................................beacon-tower, cairn, hill
vassdrag...................................................river, water-course
vat................................................................................... wet
ved..................................................................................near
vegg....................................................................... wall, cliff
vei...................................................................road (on land)
verft ........................................................ dockyard, shipyard
vest ............................................................................... west
vestenom .............................................................. westward
vestre ....................................................................... western
vik, vika, viki .....................................bay, cove, creek, inlet
vindmolle .............................................................. windmill
vogn......................................................................... slipway
voll ........................... mound; dike; grassy plain; cove, inlet
vrak ............................................................................ wreck
Y
ytre, ytste, yttre ........................................................... outer
 285

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed
alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign
languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.
Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States
Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.
To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the
Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.
To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best
scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above.

Index—Gazetteer

Position Sec. Position Sec.

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para

A ARNOYFJORDEN 64 46 N 11 15 E 7.19
AROYA 63 11 N 8 36 E 6.49
A 67 53 N 12 59 E 8.4 ARSFLESA 65 01 N 10 41 E 7.26
AADNESET 60 38 N 4 50 E 4.15 ARSGRUNN 59 08 N 5 26 E 2.9
ABELOYA 79 00 N 30 10 E 11.55 ARSUNDBAEN 63 07 N 8 02 E 6.45
ABELVAER LIGHT 64 43 N 11 10 E 7.17 ARSUNDOYA 63 06 N 7 59 E 6.40
ADLANDSFJORDEN 60 15 N 5 38 E 3.58 ARVIKSUNDET 59 16 N 5 33 E 2.22
ADVENTFJORDEN 78 15 N 15 37 E 11.18 ASBRAKEN 66 30 N 12 32 E 7.63
AERSTEINEN LIGHT 62 48 N 6 36 E 6.15 ASKROVA LIGHT 61 31 N 5 00 E 5.41
AGDENESET 63 39 N 9 46 E 6.67 ASNESET 61 56 N 5 28 E 5.47
AGNHOLMEN 58 16 N 6 50 E 1.25 ASPA 62 28 N 6 09 E 5.61
AGOTNES 60 24 N 5 01 E 4.27 ASPENESET 68 25 N 15 47 E 8.11
AKREHAMN 59 16 N 5 11 E 3.6 ASTAFJORDEN 68 44 N 17 00 E 8.49
AKSELSUNDET 77 45 N 14 36 E 11.11 ASVAER 66 14 N 12 12 E 7.48
AKSNESET 62 57 N 8 20 E 6.46 AUSTBAEN 59 08 N 5 17 E 2.9
AKTIVNESET 62 30 N 3 36 E 6.1 AUSTDJUPET 59 16 N 5 24 E 2.21
ALBERTINIBUKTA 80 16 N 25 00 E 11.43 AUSTEROY 59 17 N 5 27 E 2.21
ALDEN 61 19 N 4 48 E 5.17 AUSTERVAG, 74 30 N 19 12 E 11.3
ALESUND 62 28 N 6 10 E 5.31 AUSTKLAKKANE 63 23 N 8 24 E 6.65
ALESUND HAVN 62 28 N 6 09 E 5.61 AUSTNESFJORDEN 68 17 N 14 43 E 8.10
ALESUNDAKSLA 62 28 N 6 11 E 6.4 AUSTRE FUGLOYGRUNNEN 63 06 N 7 47 E 6.35
ALFARTANGEN 63 19 N 8 34 E 6.63 AUSTRE REIFLUA 63 27 N 8 13 E 6.56
ALLMENNINGSFLUENE 61 54 N 5 16 E 5.47 AUSTRE VAGHOLMFLUA 59 13 N 5 31 E 2.22
ALMENINGSKOLLEN 64 11 N 10 01 E 6.59 AUVAER 69 52 N 18 00 E 8.57
ALNES LIGHT 62 29 N 5 58 E 6.4 AVEROYA 63 00 N 7 30 E 6.38
ALSTADOYA 67 54 N 15 11 E 8.18
ALTA 69 58 N 23 15 E 9.11
ALTAFJORDEN 70 05 N 23 06 E 9.11 B
ALTFJORDEN 65 56 N 12 19 E 7.30
ALVERSTRAUMEN 60 34 N 5 14 E 4.30 BAANE 61 29 N 4 59 E 5.40
ALVNESTANGEN LIGHT 67 16 N 15 02 E 7.62 BAEFLUA 63 14 N 7 52 E 6.62
ALVOYVAG 60 21 N 5 11 E 4.19 BALLANGEN 68 22 N 16 55 E 8.26
ALVUNFJORDEN 62 54 N 8 22 E 6.47 BALLSFJORDEN 69 32 N 18 55 E 8.61
ALWYN NORTH OIL FIELD 60 48 N 1 44 E 5.2 BALLSTAD 68 04 N 13 42 E 8.5
AMBORNES LIGHT 63 34 N 10 26 E 6.73 BANGSUND LIGHT 64 25 N 11 21 E 7.13
AMSTERDAMOYA 79 46 N 10 49 E 11.32 BARENTSBURG 78 04 N 14 14 E 11.16
ANASIRA 58 17 N 6 26 E 1.33 BARENTSOYA 78 26 N 21 20 E 11.51
ANDA 61 51 N 6 05 E 5.48 BARKHAMODDEN 78 14 N 20 41 E 11.49
ANDA 69 04 N 15 11 E 8.44 BAROYA 68 21 N 16 07 E 8.24
ANDALSNES 62 34 N 7 41 E 6.19 BASUNDSKJERA 61 56 N 5 00 E 5.20
ANDENES 69 20 N 16 08 E 8.45 BATALDFLUENE 61 54 N 4 48 E 5.19
ANDERSBAKKEN 66 16 N 12 18 E 7.48 BATNFJORDEN 62 56 N 7 45 E 6.42
ANDERSBOSKALLEN 68 46 N 13 33 E 8.1 BATSFJORDEN 70 41 N 29 51 E 9.24
ANDFJORDEN 69 00 N 16 03 E 8.46 BEISFJORDEN 68 24 N 17 30 E 8.29
ANDOYA 69 05 N 15 45 E 8.41 BELLSUND 77 39 N 14 00 E 11.10
ANGERSHOLMEN LIGHT 66 46 N 13 16 E 7.56 BEREFJORDEN 58 16 N 6 28 E 1.33
ANGVIK 62 53 N 8 06 E 6.43 BERG 65 22 N 12 12 E 7.33
ANNOYSKJERET LIGHT 61 36 N 4 56 E 5.15 BERGEN 60 24 N 5 19 E 4.31
ANSNESET 64 28 N 11 24 E 7.11 BERGSHEIA 69 03 N 17 24 E 8.52
ANTARCTICBUKTA 78 49 N 28 03 E 11.55 BERGSNESET 68 07 N 13 04 E 8.35
ARALDEN 61 41 N 4 46 E 5.21 BERGSOYA 62 20 N 6 38 E 5.28
ARAMSUND LIGHT 62 12 N 5 29 E 5.51 BERGSOYHOLMEN 62 58 N 7 53 E 6.42
ARASVIKFJORDEN 63 09 N 8 25 E 6.49 BERLEVAG 70 52 N 29 06 E 9.23
ARDAL 61 14 N 7 43 E 5.34 BERYL OIL FIELD 59 33 N 1 32 E 3.3
AREBROTSNESET LIGHT 61 38 N 5 00 E 5.23 BESSFJORDNESET 68 12 N 16 07 E 8.21
ARHOLMEN 63 06 N 7 53 E 6.36 BEVERLYSUNDET 80 29 N 19 52 E 11.40
ARNESKLUBBEN LIGHT 62 40 N 6 41 E 6.16 BIGGANES 70 07 N 28 36 E 9.31
ARNOY 70 08 N 20 36 E 9.4 BILLEFJORDEN 78 34 N 16 28 E 11.21
ARNOYA 68 46 N 16 37 E 8.33 BISPEFLUA 69 01 N 17 14 E 8.53

Pub. 182
286 Index—Gazetteer
Position Sec. Position Sec.
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
BJERKA 69 24 N 16 08 E 8.44 C
BJOGNA 63 03 N 7 17 E 6.26
BJORNAFJORDEN 60 06 N 5 25 E 3.53 COLESBUKTA 78 08 N 14 57 E 11.17
BJORNHOLMEN 65 37 N 12 18 E 7.38 CRAWFORD OIL FIELD 59 07 N 1 30 E 2.2
BJORNOY LIGHT 67 25 N 14 26 E 8.12
BJORNOYA 74 27 N 19 04 E 11.2
BJORNOYNI 60 29 N 4 56 E 4.11 D
BJORNSUND 62 54 N 6 50 E 6.20
BJORNSUND LIGHT 62 54 N 6 49 E 6.23 DANSKOYA 79 41 N 10 55 E 11.31
BJOROYVAER 64 36 N 10 48 E 7.8 DICKSONFJORDEN 78 42 N 15 20 E 11.22
BJUGNSKJAER LIGHT 63 46 N 9 33 E 7.5 DIGERFLESA LIGHT 66 58 N 13 38 E 7.58
BLEIK 69 16 N 15 58 E 8.45 DIGERMULEN 64 47 N 11 43 E 7.17
BLEIKJE 59 15 N 5 27 E 2.20 DINGENES 61 02 N 5 02 E 5.10
BLOMSTRANDHAMNA 78 59 N 12 06 E 11.27 DJONNO 60 28 N 6 45 E 3.47
BODO 67 17 N 14 23 E 7.68 DJUPTARSKJERET 64 58 N 11 22 E 7.28
BOFJORDEN 61 07 N 5 20 E 5.33 DOLMSUND LIGHT 65 00 N 11 39 E 7.31
BOGAVIK 60 16 N 5 35 E 3.59 DOLMSUNDET 65 00 N 11 37 E 7.31
BOGVIKA 68 14 N 16 05 E 8.21 DONNA 66 06 N 12 33 E 7.47
BOKFJORDEN 69 50 N 30 07 E 9.34 DRAG 68 03 N 16 05 E 8.21
BOKFJORDEN LIGHT 69 53 N 30 11 E 9.34 DRAGJASKJAERFLU LIGHT 61 39 N 4 59 E 5.23
BOKNAFJORDEN 59 12 N 5 38 E 2.19 DRIVSUND 59 10 N 5 25 E 2.9
BOKNAFLAEET 59 16 N 5 26 E 2.21 DRONENHOLMEN LIGHT 62 38 N 6 31 E 6.16
BOKNASUNDET 59 14 N 5 27 E 2.19 DUNOYANE 77 04 N 15 00 E 11.9
BOLGSVAET 63 06 N 7 44 E 6.34 DUSAVIK 59 00 N 5 40 E 2.11
BOLGVAGEN 63 05 N 7 47 E 6.35 DUVEFJORDEN 80 17 N 23 30 E 11.42
BOLSOYGALTEN 67 57 N 15 24 E 8.20 DYRNESET 59 37 N 5 10 E 3.13
BOMLAFJORDEN 59 34 N 5 14 E 3.11 DYROY 58 28 N 5 52 E 1.47
BOMLO 59 40 N 5 12 E 3.13 DYROY 59 45 N 5 11 E 3.16
BONETSKJERET 66 29 N 12 58 E 7.53 DYSJALANDSVAG 59 05 N 5 40 E 2.10
BOROYA 64 16 N 10 17 E 7.3
BOROYA 68 34 N 14 57 E 8.42
BOROYFJORDEN 59 40 N 5 17 E 3.20 E
BOVIKI 59 22 N 5 18 E 3.31
BRANDAL 62 24 N 6 01 E 5.54 EBELTOFHAMNA 79 09 N 11 39 E 11.29
BRANDALPYNTEN 78 57 N 11 53 E 11.26 EDGEOYA 77 45 N 22 30 E 11.50
BRANDSHOLMEN 68 05 N 13 39 E 8.6 EGDEHOLMEN 58 17 N 6 23 E 1.34
BRASETHAMMEREN 63 50 N 11 04 E 6.76 EGERSUND 58 27 N 6 00 E 1.44
BRATTHOLMEN 60 21 N 5 10 E 4.20 EGGLOYA 68 11 N 15 38 E 8.20
BREIDLIA 58 13 N 6 34 E 1.31 EGGOYA 70 58 N 8 24 W 10.6
BREIDVIK 59 13 N 6 03 E 2.27 EGGUM 68 19 N 13 41 E 8.37
BREIFIND 66 15 N 12 48 E 7.49 EIDEMBUKTA 78 21 N 12 45 E 11.24
BREIGTAREN 65 45 N 12 21 E 7.40 EIDFJORD 60 28 N 7 04 E 3.48
BREILIEN 58 13 N 6 34 E 1.31 EIDFJORDEN 60 25 N 6 43 E 3.47
BREISUNDET 62 27 N 5 59 E 5.50 EIDSFJORDEN 60 43 N 5 47 E 4.33
BREISUNDET 62 27 N 6 00 E 5.30 EIDSFJORDEN 68 40 N 14 53 E 8.42
BREISUNDET 67 54 N 14 43 E 8.17 EIGEROY 58 27 N 5 58 E 1.41
BREIVIK 70 35 N 22 08 E 9.13 EIGEROY LIGHT 58 26 N 5 52 E 1.46
BREKKE 59 17 N 5 16 E 3.7 EINARSNESET 58 03 N 6 47 E 1.12
BREKNEHOLME 58 06 N 6 35 E 1.22 EITLANDSKJAERA 58 03 N 6 59 E 1.9
BREKNEHOLMEN LIGHT 58 05 N 6 36 E 1.24 EKREMSHOLMANE 63 00 N 8 02 E 6.42
BREMNESET 68 17 N 16 09 E 8.21 ELDOYANE 59 45 N 5 30 E 3.18
BREMNESSKJAER 68 17 N 16 08 E 8.21 ELTRANESET 62 26 N 6 03 E 5.54
BREMSNESFJORDEN 63 06 N 7 41 E 6.32 ENGELVAER 67 53 N 14 34 E 8.3
BRENT OIL FIELD 61 05 N 1 43 E 5.2 ENGENES 68 56 N 17 07 E 8.52
BRETTESNES 68 14 N 14 51 E 8.9 ENGESUNDSLEID 59 52 N 5 17 E 3.20
BRIELLETARNET 70 58 N 8 42 W 10.10 ERKNA LIGHT 62 33 N 5 56 E 6.6
BROCHOYA 80 27 N 26 03 E 11.43 ERSFJORDEN 59 19 N 6 08 E 2.37
BRONNOYSUND 65 28 N 12 12 E 7.35 ESPE 60 12 N 6 36 E 3.51
BRONNOYSUNDET 65 27 N 12 10 E 7.34 ESPENES LIGHT 63 21 N 8 43 E 6.64
BROSVIKSATA 61 02 N 5 10 E 5.9 ESPEVAER 59 35 N 5 09 E 3.13
BRUKJEOY 59 02 N 5 40 E 2.10
BRUNESET 66 08 N 12 50 E 7.50
BRUNFLESAN LIGHT 65 03 N 11 17 E 7.28 F
BRUNTVEIT 60 02 N 5 26 E 3.54
BRUSEN 63 00 N 7 52 E 6.41 FAIR HAVEN, 79 49 N 11 29 E 11.35
BUD 62 54 N 6 55 E 6.21 FALDET 68 12 N 13 15 E 8.37
BUEFJORDEN 61 15 N 4 40 E 5.11 FALKEIDFLAEET 59 14 N 5 31 E 2.33
BUGOYFJORDEN 69 56 N 29 36 E 9.32 FALSKENESET 64 50 N 11 39 E 7.18
BUHOLMEN 64 25 N 10 26 E 7.7 FAUSKANE 62 34 N 5 45 E 6.5
BUHOLMEN LIGHT 62 10 N 5 05 E 5.26 FAUSKE 67 16 N 15 24 E 7.62
BUHOLMRASA LIGHT 64 24 N 10 27 E 7.4 FEDJE 60 46 N 4 43 E 5.3
BUKKEGRUNNANE 58 04 N 6 51 E 1.15 FEDJEFJORDEN 60 45 N 4 47 E 4.23
BUKKEGRUNNANE 58 06 N 6 49 E 1.16 FEDJEOSEN 60 44 N 4 44 E 4.22
BUKKETJUVANE 62 11 N 5 04 E 5.26 FEISTEIN 58 50 N 5 30 E 2.4
BUNESET 67 13 N 14 42 E 7.62 FEOY 59 23 N 5 10 E 3.8
BUSHOLMEN 68 07 N 13 14 E 8.36 FERKINGSTADOYANE 59 14 N 5 04 E 3.4
BUSSESUNDET 70 22 N 31 02 E 9.27 FERKINGSTADVAG 59 14 N 5 11 E 3.5
BUVIKA 63 18 N 10 11 E 6.69 FIBORGTANGEN 63 43 N 11 09 E 6.74
BYGDEN 68 50 N 17 08 E 8.50 FINKONNA 66 07 N 12 44 E 7.50
FINN MALMGRENFJORDEN 80 17 N 24 31 E 11.43
FINNKONA 66 07 N 12 44 E 7.50
FINNOYFJORDEN 59 10 N 5 54 E 2.26

Pub. 182
 Index—Gazetteer 287

Position Sec. Position Sec.

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
FINNSNES 69 14 N 17 58 E 8.54 GARSUNDFJORDEN 59 13 N 6 00 E 2.27
FINNSNESRENNA 69 14 N 17 58 E 8.55 GARTEN 63 39 N 9 32 E 6.66
FINNSNESSKJAER 69 14 N 17 58 E 8.54 GASAHOLME 59 15 N 5 32 E 2.33
FINNVAER LIGHT 64 04 N 9 07 E 6.53 GASHOLMEN 61 55 N 5 06 E 5.46
FINSKJERSLUA 64 46 N 11 00 E 7.20 GASVAER 66 53 N 13 29 E 7.58
FISKANESET 58 54 N 5 45 E 2.14 GAUKVAEROY 68 37 N 14 21 E 8.41
FISKHOLMEN 61 46 N 4 56 E 5.23 GAUPHOLMEN 60 22 N 5 42 E 3.60
FISTERFJORDEN 59 09 N 6 00 E 2.28 GAUSNESET 62 28 N 6 46 E 5.55
FJELLSPOLLEN 60 18 N 5 03 E 4.8 GAVLFJORDEN 68 56 N 15 22 E 8.40
FJORD BASE 61 37 N 5 05 E 5.16 GEIRANGER 62 06 N 7 12 E 5.57
FJORDAFLU 60 01 N 5 07 E 3.24 GEITUNGANE 59 08 N 5 15 E 2.8
FJORDGRUNNSKJERET 63 48 N 11 19 E 6.75 GEITUNGEN 59 08 N 5 15 E 2.22
FLAGSUNDET 67 55 N 15 00 E 8.18 GIBOSTAD 69 21 N 18 05 E 8.56
FLAMA 58 04 N 6 50 E 1.18 GILDRENESET LIGHT 62 30 N 6 11 E 6.9
FLATEGRUNNANE 61 35 N 4 50 E 5.15 GIMSOYSTRAUMEN 68 16 N 14 15 E 8.7
FLATFLESA LIGHT 62 50 N 6 41 E 6.15 GIMSOYSTRAUMEN 68 20 N 14 19 E 8.37
FLATHOLME 58 55 N 5 34 E 2.3 GINEVRABOTNEN 78 37 N 20 20 E 11.49
FLATHOLMEN 59 56 N 5 51 E 3.37 GIPLINGOYA 63 54 N 11 01 E 6.76
FLATOY 67 55 N 14 46 E 8.3 GISKE 62 30 N 6 03 E 6.6
FLATOYFLU 61 19 N 5 03 E 5.38 GISKESUNDET 62 30 N 6 01 E 6.4
FLATSTADBUKTA 58 05 N 7 07 E 1.6 GISLOYA 68 57 N 15 16 E 8.40
FLAVAER LIGHT 62 19 N 5 35 E 5.59 GISUNDET 69 18 N 17 58 E 8.55
FLEINVAER 67 10 N 13 45 E 7.60 GJELBUNESET 67 11 N 15 24 E 7.62
FLEKKEFJORDEN 58 18 N 6 40 E 1.29 GJEMNESSUNDET 62 58 N 7 48 E 6.41
FLESA 62 52 N 8 35 E 6.47 GJERDINGGALTEN 64 56 N 11 28 E 7.22
FLESA LIGHT 63 39 N 9 14 E 6.61 GJERMUNDSHAMN 60 04 N 5 55 E 3.40
FLESENE 62 17 N 5 27 E 5.60 GJESLINGENE LIGHT 64 44 N 10 51 E 7.20
FLESSA 64 06 N 9 54 E 6.59 GJESLINGSKJER LIGHT 63 15 N 7 48 E 6.31
FLOHOLMAN 66 10 N 11 42 E 7.47 GLOMFJORD 66 49 N 13 59 E 7.56
FLOHOLMAN 67 01 N 13 42 E 7.59 GLOMSTADHOLMEN LIGHT 63 19 N 8 38 E 6.64
FLORO 61 36 N 5 02 E 5.16 GOLDNES LIGHT 62 22 N 5 34 E 5.28
FLORO LIGHT 61 36 N 5 01 E 5.43 GOLTASTEINEN 60 13 N 4 58 E 4.7
FLOTTRA 64 40 N 11 04 E 7.17 GOTEBERGHAMAREN 61 57 N 5 08 E 5.24
FLOVIKA 68 15 N 14 57 E 8.10 GRANDEVIKA 63 41 N 9 29 E 7.2
FLUSTEIN 59 08 N 5 39 E 2.25 GRANEBAEN 61 23 N 5 01 E 5.38
FOGNAFJORDEN 59 07 N 5 56 E 2.28 GRANVINFJORDEN 60 28 N 6 37 E 3.46
FOLDOY 59 20 N 5 58 E 2.24 GRASOYANE LIGHT 62 26 N 5 46 E 5.29
FOLLAFOSS 63 59 N 11 07 E 6.77 GRATANGEN 68 45 N 17 18 E 8.50
FOLVAGFLUENE 61 25 N 4 58 E 5.41 GRAVODDEN KOBBEBUKTA 74 31 N 18 54 E 11.4
FORDESFJORDEN 59 20 N 5 23 E 2.32 GREIPSTAD 69 31 N 18 13 E 8.58
FORDESPOLLEN 59 39 N 5 25 E 3.19 GRIMESKJARET LIGHT 60 51 N 4 45 E 5.4
FORHJELMO 60 40 N 4 48 E 4.15 GRIMO 60 23 N 6 39 E 3.51
FORLANDSUNDET 78 30 N 12 40 E 11.24 GRIMSTADFJORDEN 60 19 N 5 14 E 4.18
FOROYA 68 01 N 15 07 E 8.19 GRIP LIGHT 63 14 N 7 37 E 6.30
FOROYA 68 54 N 17 41 E 8.51 GRIPNESVAG 60 04 N 5 40 E 3.53
FOSNAHOLMEN 59 18 N 5 23 E 2.32 GRONESTADVAG 59 12 N 5 23 E 3.28
FOSSE 60 16 N 6 02 E 3.42 GRONFJORDEN 78 03 N 14 11 E 11.15
FOYNFJORDEN 59 21 N 5 11 E 3.8 GRONHOLMEN 61 02 N 4 53 E 5.9
FREEMANSUNDET 78 14 N 21 37 E 11.51 GRONHOLMEN LIGHT 63 41 N 9 09 E 6.61
FREIFJORDEN 63 03 N 7 55 E 6.39 GRONNA 67 01 N 13 10 E 7.57
FREIKOLLEN 63 03 N 7 46 E 6.25 GRONNA 67 01 N 13 11 E 7.47
FREINES LIGHT 63 01 N 7 49 E 6.39 GRONSFJORDEN 58 02 N 7 02 E 1.5
FRIARFJORDEN 70 28 N 26 57 E 9.20 GRONSTABBEN 65 16 N 11 56 E 7.32
FRIDTJOVHAMNA 77 46 N 14 39 E 11.12 GROTHOLM 58 02 N 6 58 E 1.8
FRIGG GAS FIELD 59 53 N 2 04 E 3.3 GROTOY 67 50 N 14 46 E 8.17
FRITHJOFHAMN 77 46 N 14 39 E 11.12 GROTOYA 70 10 N 18 52 E 9.4
FROHOLMAN 69 04 N 16 19 E 8.47 GROTOYSUNDET 67 50 N 14 46 E 8.17
FROM ARSUNDFJORDEN 63 07 N 8 00 E 6.45 GROVFJORDEN 68 42 N 17 05 E 8.50
FROSKJERET 63 25 N 10 07 E 6.68 GRUNNREISASKJAER 69 11 N 18 02 E 8.53
FROYA BANK 63 47 N 7 21 E 6.51 GRUTLEFJORDEN 59 38 N 5 10 E 3.14
FROYFJORDEN 63 40 N 8 40 E 6.57 GRUTLEFJORDEN 59 40 N 5 10 E 3.15
FRUHOLMEN LIGHT 71 06 N 24 00 E 9.13 GULGOFJORDEN 70 41 N 28 36 E 9.22
FUGLEFJORDEN 79 47 N 11 28 E 11.35 GULLFAKS OIL FIELD 61 12 N 2 12 E 5.2
FUGLEHUKEN 78 53 N 10 30 E 11.23 GUNNARSKJAERSHALET 59 33 N 5 08 E 3.11
FUGLEN 63 03 N 7 09 E 6.26 GUNNARSKJERSHOLET 59 33 N 5 08 E 3.11
FUGLESANGEN 66 59 N 13 38 E 7.59 GURSKOYA 62 15 N 5 40 E 5.28
FUGLOYA 67 04 N 13 50 E 7.46 GUTVIKFJELLET 65 08 N 11 56 E 7.29
FUGLOYA 70 16 N 20 15 E 9.4 GYLTEFJORDEN 64 39 N 11 22 E 7.16
FUGLOYA LIGHT 67 04 N 13 52 E 7.59
FUGLOYHAMN 60 10 N 5 01 E 4.5
FURUHOLMEN 58 16 N 6 28 E 1.33 H
FUSAFJORDEN 60 10 N 5 32 E 3.57
FYKSESUNDET 60 25 N 6 15 E 3.45 HAAKONSVERN 60 20 N 5 14 E 4.18
HADSELOYA 68 33 N 14 49 E 8.38
HADYRET 58 20 N 6 10 E 1.39
G HAESHOLMAN 68 14 N 13 26 E 8.37
HAJA 69 44 N 18 05 E 8.57
GALTAHOLMEN 59 09 N 5 37 E 2.25 HALHOLMEN LIGHT 65 32 N 12 05 E 7.37
GALTTAREN 65 09 N 10 41 E 7.25 HALSEFJORDEN 63 04 N 8 12 E 6.46
GANDSFJORDEN 58 55 N 5 46 E 2.14 HALSFJELL 64 19 N 10 37 E 7.7
GAPAFJORDEN 59 15 N 5 55 E 2.30 HALSNE 59 11 N 5 57 E 2.26
GAPET 68 09 N 13 28 E 8.5 HALTEN LIGHT 64 10 N 9 25 E 6.53

Pub. 182
288 Index—Gazetteer
Position Sec. Position Sec.
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
HALVMANEOYA 77 16 N 23 10 E 11.50 HJORINGNES LIGHT 62 21 N 6 07 E 5.54
HAMARHAUGFLU 60 00 N 5 44 E 3.36 HJORUNGNESET LIGHT 62 21 N 6 07 E 5.54
HAMMERFEST 70 40 N 23 40 E 9.6 HODDOYA 64 28 N 11 14 E 7.11
HAMMERFEST 70 41 N 23 35 E 9.7 HOGBRAKEN 65 24 N 11 02 E 7.25
HAMMERSNES 60 33 N 5 20 E 4.32 HOGGSTEINEN LIGHT 62 28 N 6 02 E 5.62
HAMNESHOLMEN 68 25 N 16 35 E 8.24 HOGSFJORDEN 58 56 N 6 00 E 2.16
HAMNVIK 68 32 N 17 34 E 8.29 HOGSNES LIGHT 62 50 N 6 58 E 6.20
HANASKJAER 59 44 N 5 10 E 3.16 HOKSTAREN 65 24 N 11 58 E 7.36
HANSNESET 61 07 N 5 06 E 5.10 HOL 68 33 N 16 24 E 8.32
HAREID 62 22 N 6 02 E 5.54 HOLA 68 14 N 14 39 E 8.10
HAROYSUND 62 54 N 6 58 E 6.21 HOLDOYA 68 27 N 14 54 E 8.38
HARSTAD 68 48 N 16 33 E 8.34 HOLEN 68 14 N 14 39 E 8.10
HARTVIKGRUNNEN LIGHT 67 49 N 14 44 E 8.17 HOLLENDARANE 61 41 N 4 56 E 5.23
HASKALLEN 61 18 N 4 57 E 5.37 HOLMEFJORDEN 60 17 N 5 40 E 3.59
HASTEIN 58 57 N 5 26 E 2.3 HOLMEFLU 59 57 N 5 58 E 3.37
HASTEINFJORDEN 59 00 N 5 30 E 2.3 HOLMENGRA 60 51 N 4 39 E 5.4
HATBOEN 66 48 N 13 21 E 7.56 HOLMENGRAFJORDEN 69 51 N 30 19 E 9.36
HAUGBERGET 63 26 N 10 41 E 6.71 HOLMENVAER 69 18 N 16 45 E 8.47
HAUGESUND 59 25 N 5 16 E 3.10 HOLSOYANE 59 39 N 5 07 E 3.14
HAUGNESET 62 37 N 6 20 E 6.10 HOLVIKTAREN 64 36 N 11 18 E 7.15
HAUGNESET LIGHT 62 37 N 6 20 E 6.10 HOMENGRA 60 51 N 4 37 E 5.50
HAUGSNESET 65 53 N 12 24 E 7.43 HOMMELVIK 63 25 N 10 48 E 6.71
HAUKEDALSHOLMEN LIGHT 61 52 N 5 16 E 5.23 HOMNNESET 70 45 N 25 42 E 9.19
HAUKOMKIN LIGHT 63 09 N 8 16 E 6.48 HONNINGSVAG 70 59 N 26 00 E 9.15
HAUKOYA 68 12 N 16 24 E 8.22 HOOYA 63 54 N 11 05 E 6.77
HAUSEN 67 17 N 14 12 E 8.12 HOPEN 76 35 N 25 10 E 11.52
HAUSVIGODDEN 58 03 N 6 59 E 1.7 HORGEFJORDEN 59 01 N 5 50 E 2.16
HAVBOEN 68 30 N 14 28 E 8.38 HORGEFJORDEN 60 06 N 5 05 E 3.26
HAVEROY 60 24 N 4 56 E 4.8 HORNBAEN 64 59 N 11 35 E 7.24
HAVFRUSKALLEN 62 03 N 4 51 E 5.20 HORNELEN 61 51 N 5 14 E 5.18
HAVIK 58 04 N 6 44 E 1.21 HORNELSFLUA 61 52 N 5 16 E 5.49
HAVOGAVLEN 71 1N 24 33 E 4. HORNNESET 68 10 N 13 20 E 8.36
HAVSTEINEN LIGHT 62 29 N 6 04 E 5.62 HORNSNESET 65 35 N 12 18 E 7.37
HEGGNESET 62 43 N 6 56 E 6.20 HORNSTAREN 65 35 N 12 19 E 7.38
HEIKENESET 69 48 N 30 44 E 9.37 HORR FARM 58 33 N 5 40 E 1.51
HEIMDAL GAS FIELD 59 35 N 2 15 E 3.3 HORTAFJORDEN 65 10 N 11 30 E 7.29
HEISSAFJORDEN 62 27 N 6 08 E 5.61 HOVDEBUKTA 58 04 N 7 06 E 1.6
HEKKINGEN 69 36 N 17 50 E 8.58 HOVDENES LIGHT 62 33 N 7 31 E 6.18
HELBERGOTAREN 65 20 N 12 03 E 7.32 HOVDENESET LIGHT 61 56 N 5 01 E 5.44
HELGELANDSFLESA 65 13 N 11 54 E 7.31 HOVEDEHAMMAREN LIGHT 63 12 N 8 51 E 6.50
HELGELANDSFLESA LIGHT 65 13 N 11 53 E 7.29 HOVEN 68 21 N 14 06 E 8.37
HELGESTONES LIGHT 62 36 N 7 22 E 6.18 HOYANGER 61 13 N 6 04 E 5.33
HELKLAKKEN 63 09 N 7 38 E 6.29 HOYLANDSNESET 59 07 N 5 59 E 2.29
HELLA 62 41 N 5 59 E 6.10 HUGLNESET 66 10 N 12 51 E 7.53
HELLANDNESET 68 02 N 16 09 E 8.22 HULDRA GAS FIELD 60 50 N 2 40 E 4.2
HELLESYLT 62 05 N 6 53 E 5.57 HULLOYNESET 68 03 N 16 11 E 8.23
HELLEVIK 62 38 N 6 10 E 6.10 HUMULRASA 64 57 N 11 23 E 7.23
HELLIGVAER 67 25 N 13 55 E 8.3 HUMULRASA LIGHT 64 55 N 11 22 E 7.22
HELLISOY LIGHT 60 45 N 4 43 E 4.22 HUNDERAVAG 59 20 N 5 49 E 2.23
HELLOYSKJERET 67 37 N 14 47 E 8.14, HUNDHOLMEN 68 10 N 13 27 E 8.37
8.15 HUNDVAKOSEN 60 07 N 5 12 E 3.25
HELMOYA 65 12 N 11 00 E 7.27 HUSAVAGEN 60 00 N 5 48 E 3.38
HELNES LIGHT 71 04 N 26 14 E 9.16 HUSEVIKFLUA 62 46 N 6 32 E 6.15
HEMMINGFJORDEN 69 12 N 18 04 E 8.53 HUSNES 59 52 N 5 46 E 3.34
HEMNESBERGET 66 13 N 13 36 E 7.51 HUSVAERFJORDEN 65 58 N 12 05 E 7.30
HENGSOY 58 53 N 5 26 E 2.4 HUSVAERSUNDET 65 56 N 12 12 E 7.30
HENNINGSVAER 68 09 N 14 13 E 8.7 HYENESE 61 51 N 5 59 E 5.48
HERAND 60 20 N 6 23 E 3.43 HYLSFJORDEN 59 31 N 6 16 E 2.37
HERDLEFJORDEN 60 32 N 5 05 E 4.28
HERDLESUND 60 4N 4 58 E 4.26
HERJANGSFJORDEN 68 30 N 17 27 E 8.29 I
HEROYSUND 59 55 N 5 47 E 3.35
HERREHOLMEN 58 02 N 6 58 E 1.7 IDSEFJORDEN 59 01 N 5 58 E 2.17
HESTEBAEN 68 56 N 16 16 E 8.48 IMARSUNDET 63 12 N 8 18 E 6.49
HESTOYFLUA 63 43 N 11 04 E 6.74 INDRE FOLDFJORDEN 64 53 N 11 44 E 7.18
HESTSKJER LIGHT 63 05 N 7 30 E 6.25 INDRE HAROY LIGHT 62 53 N 6 56 E 6.20
HETSKJER LIGHT 63 05 N 7 30 E 6.28 INDRE HAUGOYTAREN 64 56 N 11 22 E 7.23
HEVNSKJELOVA 63 29 N 9 08 E 6.66 INDRE SKARBERGNESET 68 13 N 16 12 E 8.22
HIDLEFJORDEN 59 04 N 5 49 E 2.17 INDRE SOLVAERREVET 66 24 N 12 41 E 7.63
HIDSNESET LIGHT 62 17 N 5 33 E 5.60 INDROY 60 09 N 5 25 E 3.54
HILBAANE 63 12 N 7 44 E 6.30 INGELSFJORDEN 68 29 N 15 14 E 8.38
HILBAREN 63 12 N 7 44 E 6.30 INGOYA 71 04 N 24 04 E 9.13
HILLE KJEOY 59 02 N 5 48 E 2.11 INNHOLMEN LIGHT 62 38 N 6 07 E 6.9
HILLEROEN 64 46 N 10 25 E 7.7 INNVIK 61 51 N 6 37 E 5.48
HINLOPENSTRETET 79 30 N 19 20 E 11.44 ISFJORDEN 78 18 N 15 00 E 11.15
HISSFJORDEN 60 12 N 6 03 E 3.42
HJARTOYA 67 39 N 15 05 E 8.14
HJELMEHOLSEN 60 25 N 4 56 E 4.10 J
HJELMSOYA 71 04 N 24 43 E 9.14
HJELTEFFJORDEN 60 35 N 4 55 E 4.23 JAERENS REV 58 45 N 5 30 E 1.51
HJELTEFJORDEN 60 35 N 4 55 E 4.23 JAEVA 68 32 N 15 04 E 8.38
HJELTENESET 61 51 N 5 47 E 5.48 JAKOBSELV 69 47 N 30 50 E 9.37

Pub. 182
 Index—Gazetteer 289

Position Sec. Position Sec.

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
JARSTEINEN 59 09 N 5 11 E 2.8 KOLTREPYNTEN 59 19 N 5 20 E 3.31
JASUNDET 58 04 N 7 09 E 1.5 KONG KARLS LAND 78 50 N 28 10 E 11.53
JELSAFJORDEN 59 19 N 6 02 E 2.35 KONGSFJORDEN 70 45 N 29 24 E 9.23
JELSAVAG 59 20 N 6 02 E 2.35 KONGSFJORDEN 78 57 N 12 00 E 11.26
JENDEMSFJELLET 62 48 N 7 03 E 6.8 KONGSMOEN 64 53 N 12 26 E 7.19
JERVIKA LIGHT 64 38 N 11 09 E 7.15 KONGSOYA 78 54 N 28 13 E 11.54
JONDAL 60 16 N 6 15 E 3.42 KONGSVIKTIND 68 35 N 16 16 E 8.32
JORPELAND 59 01 N 6 02 E 2.17 KOPERVIK 59 17 N 5 19 E 3.29
JOSENFJORDEN 59 15 N 6 10 E 2.36 KORNSTADFJORDEN 62 57 N 7 25 E 6.38
JOSSINGFJORDEN 58 19 N 6 20 E 1.35 KORSNES 68 15 N 16 04 E 8.21
JUKLEBAEN 62 22 N 5 24 E 5.28 KORSNESODDEN LIGHT 63 35 N 10 50 E 6.72
JULEDAGENE LIGHT 65 51 N 12 23 E 7.43 KRAAKENES 62 02 N 4 59 E 5.17
JULHOLMEN LIGHT 62 44 N 6 58 E 6.20 KRABBEN LIGHT 62 52 N 6 43 E 6.23
KRAKA 59 09 N 5 25 E 2.9
KRAKA LIGHT 63 01 N 7 18 E 6.27
K KRAKENES 62 02 N 4 59 E 5.17
KRAKHOLMEN LIGHT 62 59 N 7 47 E 6.41
KALSHOLMEN LIGHT 66 55 N 13 06 E 7.64 KRAKVAGFJORDEN 63 40 N 9 15 E 6.60
KALSOYANE 60 19 N 4 56 E 4.9 KRIGSBORNTAREN 64 54 N 11 20 E 7.22
KALVOYA 68 33 N 16 27 E 8.32 KRISTIANSUND 63 07 N 7 44 E 6.37
KAMOYFJORDEN 71 04 N 26 04 E 9.14 KRISTIANSUNDSLEIA 63 09 N 7 42 E 6.24
KAPP BULL 74 21 N 19 05 E 11.3 KROKSHAVN 62 41 N 8 32 E 6.44
KAPP DUNER 74 29 N 18 46 E 11.5 KROKVIK 64 31 N 11 04 E 7.10
KAPP LINNE 78 04 N 13 37 E 11.13 KROPPEN 63 03 N 6 59 E 6.26
KAPP NATHORST 78 47 N 15 25 E 11.22 KROSSFJORDEN 79 09 N 11 46 E 11.28
KAPP RUDSEN 70 56 N 8 53 W 10.10 KROSSHAVNSUND 60 09 N 5 12 E 3.25
KARHOLMEN 65 55 N 12 23 E 7.43 KULESEIDVAG 59 44 N 5 14 E 3.16
KARISKJER LIGHT 61 55 N 5 07 E 5.50 KUNNA 66 57 N 13 31 E 7.47
KARL XII OYANE, 80 39 N 25 03 E 11.43 KUNNA 68 00 N 13 14 E 8.5
KARLEBOTN 70 07 N 28 45 E 9.31 KVAEFJORDEN 68 50 N 16 00 E 8.48
KARLSOYFJORDEN 67 31 N 14 40 E 8.13 KVAEREKNAPP 60 59 N 4 42 E 5.9
KARSTO GAS TERMINAL 59 16 N 5 30 E 2.22 KVALBAKSKJER LIGHT 64 52 N 11 41 E 7.19
KARTVEIT 60 23 N 5 00 E 4.9 KVALHOLMEN LIGHT 66 25 N 12 28 E 7.63
KATTLORTEN LIGHT 67 51 N 14 47 E 8.17 KVALOSEN 60 34 N 4 50 E 4.13
KAURA 64 14 N 10 08 E 7.3 KVALTYVAN 69 39 N 17 45 E 8.59
KIKUTODDEN 76 35 N 17 00 E 11.48 KVALVAGHOLMEN 62 59 N 8 00 E 6.42
KINN 61 34 N 4 46 E 5.17 KVALVAGHOLMEN LIGHT 62 59 N 8 00 E 6.42
KINSARVIKBUKTA 60 23 N 6 43 E 3.51 KVANFLESSVEET 65 58 N 12 03 E 7.30
KIRKEHAMN 58 14 N 6 32 E 1.32 KVANHOLMEN 67 27 N 14 40 E 8.13
KIRKENES 69 44 N 30 03 E 9.35 KVANHOVDEN LIGHT 61 42 N 4 50 E 5.17
KIRKGRUNNEN 67 15 N 14 14 E 7.67 KVEDFJORDBUKTA 79 25 N 10 55 E 11.30
KIRKNESTANGEN LIGHT 63 55 N 11 12 E 6.77 KVELDSUND 58 04 N 6 54 E 1.19
KJEFALLET 63 16 N 7 40 E 6.30 KVERNESFJORDEN 62 57 N 7 37 E 6.38
KJEHOLMEN LIGHT 62 42 N 6 15 E 6.11 KVERVEN 63 07 N 7 40 E 6.32
KJELDEBOTN 68 25 N 16 41 E 8.26 KVINA 66 28 N 13 10 E 7.53
KJENGBAEN 67 29 N 14 01 E 8.3 KVISVIKHOLMANE 63 03 N 7 57 E 6.40
KJEOY LIGHT 64 48 N 11 35 E 7.18 KVITBERGET 67 14 N 14 36 E 7.61
KJEOYA 68 52 N 16 34 E 8.48 KVITHOLM 59 23 N 6 03 E 2.34
KJEPSOY 58 01 N 7 00 E 1.7 KVITHOLMEN LIGHT 63 01 N 7 14 E 6.25
KJERGRONESET 62 58 N 8 28 E 6.48 KVITNES LIGHT 63 08 N 7 48 E 6.36
KJERRINGA 62 11 N 5 08 E 5.18 KVITOYA 80 09 N 32 38 E 11.56
KJERRINGHOLMEN 61 24 N 4 58 E 5.40 KVITSOYA 59 04 N 5 25 E 2.7
KJERRINGNESET 69 19 N 16 55 E 8.57 KVITSOYA BDOADCAST STATION 59 04 N 5 24 E 2.7
KJERRINGOY 67 31 N 14 46 E 8.13 KYA 63 46 N 8 19 E 6.58
KJERRINGSKJERET 66 20 N 12 53 E 7.53 KYA 64 28 N 10 13 E 7.7
KJERRKLUBBEN 68 02 N 16 19 E 8.23 KYSNES 60 12 N 6 07 E 3.42
KJERRVIKA 68 01 N 16 20 E 8.23
KJOFJORDEN 69 50 N 29 47 E 9.33
KJOLIBAEN 67 45 N 14 23 E 8.3 L
KJOLLEFJORDEN 70 57 N 27 20 E 9.20
KJOLNES LIGHT 70 51 N 29 14 E 9.23 LADY FRANKLINFJORDEN 80 09 N 19 11 E 11.39
KJOLVA 69 36 N 17 30 E 8.57 LAEDERSHOLME 58 29 N 5 50 E 1.48
KJOPMANNEN 67 39 N 14 43 E 8.16 LAKSELV 67 22 N 15 36 E 8.15
KJOPSVIK 68 06 N 16 21 E 8.23 LAKSSHOLMBAEN 58 56 N 5 34 E 2.5
KLAKKEN 62 57 N 6 43 E 6.22 LAMANNSKJERET 66 36 N 13 05 E 7.54
KLAKKEN 64 40 N 10 27 E 7.8 LAMHOLME 59 20 N 5 12 E 3.7
KLAKKSBROREN LIGHT 63 21 N 8 25 E 6.65 LAMHOLME 59 20 N 5 45 E 2.23
KLAUVA LIGHT 61 07 N 5 02 E 5.35 LANDEGODE 67 24 N 14 20 E 7.46
KLAUVA LIGHT 69 11 N 17 58 E 8.53 LANDEGODE 67 25 N 14 20 E 8.12
KLEVEBOEN 62 16 N 5 30 E 5.58 LANDEGODE LIGHT 67 27 N 14 23 E 8.12
KLOKKARVIK 60 13 N 5 10 E 4.17 LANGENESET 59 31 N 5 14 E 3.9
KLOVNINGEN 61 56 N 4 57 E 5.23 LANGESKALLEN 67 57 N 12 43 E 8.36
KLUBBEN LIGHT 62 19 N 5 37 E 5.60 LANGESKJERET 62 32 N 5 52 E 6.5
KNAPHOLMENE 64 36 N 11 02 E 7.9, LANGESTRAUMEN 59 41 N 5 15 E 3.20
7.12 LANGGRUNNEN 68 42 N 16 38 E 8.33
KNAPPEN 62 38 N 6 02 E 6.7 LANGGRUNNODDEN 80 09 N 17 46 E 11.39
KNARRHOLME 59 13 N 5 28 E 2.19 LANGHOLM 58 02 N 6 58 E 1.7
KNUTSTAREN 65 26 N 11 55 E 7.36 LANGHOLMEN 65 49 N 12 27 E 7.41
KOBBALEIDA 60 19 N 5 09 E 4.19 LANGKVITNESET 68 38 N 16 35 E 8.32
KOBBHOLMFJORDEN 69 47 N 30 44 E 9.37 LANGNESET 69 41 N 18 54 E 8.63
KOKODDEN 58 14 N 6 39 E 1.26 LANGODBAEN 65 58 N 12 07 E 7.30
KOLBEINSFLU 62 58 N 6 53 E 6.26 LANGOY 58 04 N 6 52 E 1.12

Pub. 182
290 Index—Gazetteer
Position Sec. Position Sec.
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
LANGOYSUND 60 37 N 4 48 E 4.15 M
LANGOYSUNDET 68 35 N 14 55 E 8.42
LANGRO LIGHT 64 29 N 10 30 E 7.4 MADSOYGALTEN 65 02 N 11 41 E 7.29
LANGSTEIN 63 33 N 10 54 E 6.72 MADSOYGALTEN LIGHT 65 03 N 11 41 E 7.31
LANGSUNDET 65 14 N 11 58 E 7.31 MAGDALENEFJORDEN 79 34 N 10 54 E 11.30
LAPONIAHALVOYA 80 25 N 19 50 E 11.40 MAGDALENEHUKEN 79 34 N 10 44 E 11.30
LATREVIKKLUBBEN 60 04 N 5 59 E 3.39 MAGEROYA 71 03 N 25 40 E 9.14
LAUKHAMARSUND 59 52 N 5 36 E 3.33 MAGNILLEN 63 06 N 8 05 E 6.25
LAUVOY 63 56 N 9 56 E 7.5 MAGNILLEN 63 08 N 8 05 E 6.27
LAUVOYFJORDEN 63 00 N 7 20 E 6.38 MAGNUS OIL FIELD 61 37 N 1 20 E 5.2
LAUVOYFJORDEN 64 35 N 11 20 E 7.15 MAHOLMEN 65 00 N 10 58 E 7.26
LAUVOYTAREN 64 33 N 11 20 E 7.15 MAHOLMRASA 65 00 N 10 55 E 7.26
LAVANGEN 68 47 N 17 37 E 8.51 MAKKAUR LIGHT 70 42 N 30 05 E 9.25
LEIRFJORDEN 67 32 N 15 37 E 8.15 MALANGSGRUNNEN 69 58 N 17 30 E 9.2
LEIRVIK 59 47 N 5 31 E 3.19 MALM 64 04 N 11 14 E 6.77
LEITNES LIGHT 63 02 N 7 41 E 6.39 MALOY 61 56 N 5 07 E 5.24
LEKAFJORDEN 65 05 N 11 47 E 7.31 MALOY SKARHOLMEN 67 46 N 14 24 E 8.3
LEPSOYA 62 37 N 6 11 E 6.7 MALSNES 69 21 N 18 34 E 8.60
LEPSOYKLOVNINGEN 62 38 N 6 03 E 6.7 MANGERSFJORDEN 60 37 N 5 00 E 4.25
LEPSOYREVET 62 36 N 6 15 E 6.10 MARFLESA LIGHT 64 10 N 10 08 E 7.3
LEROYOSEN 60 14 N 5 10 E 4.17 MARIASUNDET 77 41 N 14 51 E 11.11
LEVANGER 63 45 N 11 18 E 6.74 MARKUSSUNDET 63 06 N 7 45 E 6.35
LEVRA LIGHT 64 32 N 11 28 E 7.14 MARNESSKAGEN 67 10 N 14 05 E 7.59
LI 58 55 N 5 48 E 2.15 MARSTEINSBAEN 60 08 N 4 59 E 3.22
LILAND 68 29 N 16 53 E 8.27 MASOYA 71 01 N 25 00 E 9.14
LILAND LIGHT 68 28 N 16 55 E 8.26 MASOYSUND 70 59 N 25 01 E 9.18
LILANDSGRUNNEN 68 27 N 16 50 E 8.25 MASTRAFJORDEN 59 06 N 5 39 E 2.18
LILLE EKKEROYA 70 05 N 30 14 E 9.29 MAURANGERFJORDEN 60 06 N 6 10 E 3.41
LILLE LAUGAROY 60 09 N 5 15 E 3.27 MEBAEN 60 54 N 4 42 E 5.9
LILLE MOLLA 68 12 N 14 46 E 8.9 MEFALDTAREN 64 37 N 11 00 E 7.10
LILLEOYA LIGHT 63 20 N 8 44 E 6.64 MEFALLSTAREN 64 46 N 11 29 E 7.17
LILLESVEET 66 06 N 11 31 E 7.47 MEFJORDBAEN 65 08 N 11 12 E 7.28
LILLETAREN 65 10 N 11 50 E 7.29 MEFJORDINGEN 68 55 N 16 05 E 8.48
LILLIEHOOKFJORDEN 79 15 N 11 40 E 11.29 MEFJORDSHOLMAN 66 12 N 12 50 E 7.53
LINDESNES 57 59 N 7 03 E 1.4 MEHAMNFJORDEN 71 04 N 27 52 E 9.21
LINDHOLMEN 58 03 N 6 52 E 1.14 MEKGRUNNA 62 43 N 7 06 E 6.16
LINDOY 59 17 N 5 42 E 2.23 MELINGSVAG 59 47 N 5 07 E 3.17
LINESFJELL 64 01 N 9 54 E 6.52 MELOY 66 04 N 11 37 E 7.25
LINESOYA 64 01 N 9 54 E 7.6 MELOY LIGHT 62 48 N 8 18 E 6.44
LINFLUA 63 06 N 7 44 E 6.34 MELOYNESET LIGHT 66 50 N 13 35 E 7.57
LISTA 58 07 N 6 34 E 1.22 MELSTEINEN 63 58 N 9 35 E 6.60
LISTAFJORDEN 58 11 N 6 37 E 1.24 MELSTEINEN 65 11 N 11 51 E 7.31
LITLE BALLANGEN 68 20 N 16 51 E 8.26 MESJOYGRUNNEN 67 12 N 13 59 E 7.66
LITLE EKKEROYA 70 05 N 30 14 E 9.29 MESKFJORDEN 70 10 N 28 40 E 9.31
LITLE SKJELBREIDA 63 10 N 7 10 E 6.29 MESOYA 66 51 N 13 40 E 7.57
LITLEGRUNNEN 63 28 N 10 46 E 6.71 MIA 62 40 N 6 38 E 6.8
LITLOYA 68 35 N 14 19 E 8.41 MIDFJORDEN 62 38 N 6 40 E 6.16
LODINGEN 68 25 N 16 00 E 8.31 MIDFJORDENSKJAER 58 02 N 6 54 E 1.10
LOFOTODDEN 67 50 N 12 50 E 8.35 MIDFJORDFLU 61 19 N 4 49 E 5.39
LOFOTODDEN 67 50 N 12 51 E 8.4 MIDTERKUKEN 77 39 N 14 46 E 11.10
LOKKAREN 64 30 N 11 26 E 7.14 MIDTFJORDSKJER 61 16 N 4 54 E 5.36
LOKKSUNDET 60 03 N 5 43 E 3.36 MIMERBUKTA 78 39 N 16 25 E 11.21
LOMFJORDEN 79 36 N 17 54 E 11.44 MJOSUNDET 68 54 N 17 27 E 8.52
LONEVAGEN 60 33 N 5 27 E 4.34 MJOSUNDHOLMEN 68 53 N 17 28 E 8.52
LONGYEARBYEN 78 14 N 15 39 E 11.19 MOFFEN 80 02 N 14 30 E 11.36
LONTARANE 63 11 N 7 31 E 6.29 MOKALASSET 60 18 N 4 56 E 4.8
LOPPHAVET 70 30 N 21 00 E 9.5 MOKALASSET 61 18 N 5 01 E 5.37
LOPSFELLET 67 19 N 14 29 E 8.12 MOKSTER 60 04 N 5 06 E 3.24
LOPSHOLMEN 67 20 N 14 24 E 8.12 MOKSTRA GRONINGEN 60 03 N 5 07 E 3.25
LOSBATEN 70 56 N 8 40 W 10.5 MOLDE 62 44 N 7 10 E 6.17
LOVOFJORDEN 63 00 N 7 20 E 6.38 MOLDTU 62 18 N 5 38 E 5.60
LOVUNDEN 66 22 N 12 20 E 7.46 MOLDTUSTRANDA 62 18 N 5 39 E 5.60
LUNDANES 62 07 N 6 58 E 5.57 MONGSTAD 60 49 N 5 02 E 5.7
LUNDENES 63 00 N 7 44 E 6.39 MORKEDALSTUA 63 30 N 8 31 E 6.52
LUNDEVIKEN 58 26 N 5 55 E 1.45 MOSJOEN 65 51 N 13 11 E 7.42
LUNDSNESET 63 20 N 10 02 E 6.69 MOSSELBUKTA 79 53 N 15 55 E 11.38
LUNEKEVIKA 74 28 N 18 47 E 11.5 MOSTERHAMN 59 42 N 5 24 E 3.18
LUREF JORDEN 60 42 N 5 07 E 4.30 MOSTEROY 59 05 N 5 38 E 2.9
LYGREPOLLEN 60 04 N 5 46 E 3.56 MUKEN 66 45 N 12 29 E 8.2
LYKLINGFJORDEN 59 42 N 5 11 E 3.15 MULTIND 68 00 N 16 30 E 8.23
LYNGHOLMEN 64 35 N 11 24 E 7.15 MUNKHOLMEN LIGHT 63 27 N 10 23 E 6.69
LYNGSFJORDEN 69 40 N 20 25 E 9.10 MURCHISONFJORDEN 80 00 N 18 20 E 11.46
LYNGVAER 65 16 N 11 58 E 7.32 MURUVIK 63 26 N 10 51 E 6.72
LYNGVAERFJORDEN 65 15 N 12 05 E 7.33 MYKEN 66 45 N 12 25 E 7.47
LYNGVAERGALTEN LIGHT 65 16 N 12 03 E 7.33 MYKEN 66 46 N 12 29 E 7.64
LYRODDANE 60 10 N 4 59 E 4.5 MYRBOEN 69 12 N 16 30 E 8.47
LYSEFJORDEN 58 54 N 6 05 E 2.30 MYRFLESAN 69 06 N 16 04 E 8.47
LYSEFJORDEN 60 12 N 5 19 E 4.16

N
NAEROYSUNDET 64 50 N 11 11 E 7.20

Pub. 182
 Index—Gazetteer 291

Position Sec. Position Sec.

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
NALAUVIKEN 58 23 N 6 04 E 1.40 OS 60 11 N 5 28 E 3.57
NAMSOS 64 28 N 11 30 E 7.12 OSAFJORDEN 60 30 N 6 55 E 3.49
NAPPHOLMEN 68 08 N 13 28 E 8.5 OSNESGAVLEN 59 25 N 5 14 E 3.9
NARVIK 68 26 N 17 25 E 8.28 OSPA 61 13 N 4 45 E 5.12
NEDSTRANDSFJORDEN 59 15 N 5 44 E 2.23 OSTHOLMEN 66 53 N 13 31 E 7.58
NEDSTRANDSVAG 59 20 N 5 52 E 2.24 OSTMARKTANGEN 63 27 N 10 27 E 6.71
NEKKOYOSEN LIGHT 61 35 N 4 57 E 5.42 OSTRE STOLEN 58 13 N 6 43 E 1.25
NERLANDSOY 62 21 N 5 33 E 5.28 OSUNDER 60 33 N 4 51 E 4.13
NESNA 66 12 N 13 01 E 7.51 OTEREN 64 58 N 11 31 E 7.23
NEVERNES LIGHT 65 26 N 12 35 E 7.38 OTNESET 63 08 N 8 31 E 6.49
NINIAN OIL FIELD 60 51 N 1 28 E 5.2 OTTOY 59 24 N 6 06 E 2.34
NOGVAFJORDEN 62 41 N 6 20 E 6.11 OVSKALLEN 66 25 N 11 58 E 7.48
NORDAUSTLANDET 79 50 N 23 00 E 11.39 OYENSVE 67 35 N 14 17 E 8.14
NORDENSKIOLDBUKTA 80 25 N 21 10 E 11.41 OYNAFJORDEN 60 06 N 5 55 E 3.40
NORDFJORDEID 61 54 N 5 59 E 5.48 OYSTESEVAGEN 60 23 N 6 12 E 3.44
NORDFJORDEN 58 20 N 6 15 E 1.38
NORDFJORDEN 78 30 N 15 00 E 11.22
NORDFOLD 67 46 N 15 14 E 8.14 P
NORDFOLLA 67 45 N 15 17 E 8.14
NORDGATTET 79 45 N 11 05 E 11.33 PASVIKHAMN 69 49 N 30 35 E 9.36
NORDHAMN 74 31 N 18 59 E 11.4 PENNINGFLU 62 19 N 5 33 E 5.60
NORDKAPP 71 10 N 25 47 E 9.2 PERSFJORDEN 70 26 N 30 48 E 9.25
NORDKAPP 71 10 N 7 57 W 10.8 POLLATIND 61 06 N 4 52 E 5.5
NORDKAPP 74 31 N 19 07 E 11.4 PORSANGEN 70 30 N 25 30 E 9.19
NORDOERNE LIGHT 64 48 N 10 33 E 7.1 PRESTEID 68 05 N 15 40 E 8.20
NORDOY 60 43 N 4 44 E 4.15 PRINS KARLS FORLAND 78 30 N 11 06 E 11.23
NORDOYANE 59 36 N 5 07 E 3.14
NORDRE BRATTHOLME 60 24 N 5 06 E 4.26
NORDRE FAUSKEN 63 14 N 7 33 E 6.30 R
NORDRE NEKKOYA 61 35 N 4 56 E 5.42
NORDRE OYGARDSKJERET 67 32 N 15 08 E 8.15 RABBAROSEN 60 18 N 4 57 E 4.8
NORDRE TJORNOY 60 22 N 4 55 E 4.9 RADOYFJORDEN 60 35 N 5 11 E 4.29
NORDRE VAGAHOLME 59 13 N 5 31 E 2.33 RAEVOYSUND 58 02 N 7 00 E 1.6
NORDREGAPET 58 27 N 5 52 E 1.46 RAFTSUNDET 68 23 N 15 05 E 8.10
NORDSTANDSKJAER 68 30 N 16 09 E 8.32 RAMBERG 68 05 N 13 14 E 8.36
NORDTAREN 65 34 N 12 11 E 7.37 RAMBERGHOLMEN 64 02 N 11 14 E 6.77
NORESKALLEN 62 03 N 4 52 E 5.20 RAMSNES 59 38 N 6 20 E 2.38
NORHEIMSUND 60 22 N 6 09 E 3.43 RAMSOY 60 26 N 5 03 E 4.26
NORTH CORMORANT OIL FIELD 61 15 N 1 09 E 5.2 RAMSUNDET 68 29 N 16 31 E 8.25
NUPEN 67 08 N 13 43 E 7.65 RANDABERGVIGA 59 02 N 5 37 E 2.10
NY-ALESUND 78 55 N 11 57 E 11.26 RANDOY 59 12 N 6 02 E 2.27
NYHAMNA 62 51 N 6 57 E 6.13 RANSKJERET 66 09 N 12 52 E 7.51
NYLANDSKJERET 64 41 N 10 33 E 7.7 RASVAGEN 58 14 N 6 34 E 1.30
RASVAGHOLMANE 58 13 N 6 35 E 1.31
RAUDFJORDEN 79 50 N 12 00 E 11.36
O RAUDHOLMANE 60 10 N 5 28 E 3.57
RAUDHOLMANE 62 38 N 6 24 E 6.15
OBRESTADBREKRA 58 40 N 5 33 E 1.51 RAUDHOLMENE 59 33 N 5 09 E 3.11
ODDA 60 05 N 6 33 E 3.52 RAUDOY 61 18 N 4 55 E 5.40
ODDANE 61 33 N 5 00 E 5.41 RAUDOY LIGHT 62 14 N 5 59 E 5.53
ODDANE 62 54 N 6 53 E 6.20 RAUDSANDNES LIGHT 63 04 N 7 41 E 6.32
ODDEN 60 26 N 4 56 E 4.9 RAUNA 58 04 N 6 40 E 1.21
ODOYFLUA 66 21 N 12 55 E 7.53 RAUNEFJORDEN 60 16 N 5 10 E 4.17
OEN 58 06 N 6 47 E 1.20 REIMANE 63 31 N 7 50 E 6.53
OFFERSOY 68 19 N 15 37 E 8.11 REINE 67 56 N 13 06 E 8.4
OGNABUKTI 58 31 N 5 45 E 1.49 REINSFJELLET 62 56 N 7 56 E 6.25
OKSBASHEIA 64 25 N 10 31 E 7.7 REKEFJORDEN 58 20 N 6 16 E 1.37
OKSEBAASEN 69 51 N 30 07 E 9.35 REKVEDBUKTA 70 57 N 8 34 W 10.4
OKSEBASEN LIGHT 62 31 N 6 09 E 6.9 REMMINGSKJER LIGHT 63 22 N 8 17 E 6.65
OKSENDAL 62 43 N 8 26 E 6.44 REVINGEN 59 00 N 5 49 E 2.11
OKSFJORD 70 14 N 22 21 E 9.9 REVOY 58 03 N 6 48 E 1.13
OKSFJORDEN 70 12 N 22 18 E 9.9 REVSHOLMEN 63 01 N 7 47 E 6.40
OKSNESODDEN 68 03 N 15 14 E 8.19 RIBBA 61 54 N 5 00 E 5.45
OKSREVLTAREN 65 01 N 10 51 E 7.26 RINGOY 60 27 N 6 47 E 3.48
OKSSUNDET 68 00 N 15 18 E 8.19 RINGVASSOY 69 55 N 19 10 E 9.3
OKSTRAFJORDEN 59 20 N 6 06 E 2.36 RINNOYVAG 68 22 N 15 46 E 8.11
OLA-PERSOYA LIGHT 67 40 N 14 43 E 8.16 RISAVIKI 58 56 N 5 35 E 2.5
OLASKJAER LIGHT 61 44 N 4 57 E 5.23 RISHOLMEN LIGHT 63 09 N 8 32 E 6.49
OLDEN 61 50 N 6 49 E 5.48 RISHOLMFLUA 61 38 N 4 53 E 5.22
OLSFLUA 62 30 N 5 51 E 6.4 RISHOLMSUNDET 58 14 N 6 40 E 1.26
OMBOFJORDEN 59 17 N 6 07 E 2.30 RISKAFJORDEN 58 56 N 5 49 E 2.15
ONA LIGHT 62 52 N 6 33 E 6.22 RISVAER 64 55 N 11 32 E 7.22
ONARHEIM 59 57 N 5 38 E 3.35 RISVAER 68 15 N 15 09 E 8.11
ONARHEIMSFJORDEN 59 57 N 5 41 E 3.33 RISVAERSUNDET 64 58 N 11 31 E 7.23
ONGLESUNDET 60 43 N 4 52 E 4.22 ROBBEGANSTANGEN 60 41 N 4 48 E 4.15
OPPLOYFJORDEN 64 48 N 11 45 E 7.17 RODBERG 63 29 N 10 00 E 6.68
ORKANGER 63 19 N 9 53 E 6.69 RODBERGSODDEN 69 27 N 18 08 E 8.56
ORMOYA 65 26 N 12 09 E 7.34 RODOY 66 39 N 13 05 E 7.54
ORNES 66 52 N 13 42 E 7.57 RODSUNDA 64 38 N 11 10 E 7.15
ORSTA 62 12 N 6 08 E 5.53 ROEDVIKA 74 24 N 19 13 E 11.3
ORSTAFJORDEN 62 14 N 6 00 E 5.53 ROGNAN 67 06 N 15 25 E 7.62
ORSVAG 68 12 N 14 25 E 8.8 ROGNAN LIGHT 63 34 N 9 17 E 6.61

Pub. 182
292 Index—Gazetteer
Position Sec. Position Sec.
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
ROGNANNES LIGHT 63 23 N 8 39 E 6.64 SAUDEFJORDEN 59 33 N 6 17 E 2.38
ROHOLME 58 02 N 6 52 E 1.10 SAUDEHOLMEN LIGHT 62 11 N 5 36 E 5.51
ROKKEM LIGHT 62 53 N 8 30 E 6.47 SAUEHORNET 62 14 N 6 09 E 5.27
ROLVSOYA 70 58 N 24 00 E 9.13 SAWGRUNNEN 65 09 N 10 56 E 7.27
ROMBAKEN 68 28 N 17 36 E 8.29 SEIOSKALLEN 67 17 N 13 31 E 7.66
RONELDEN 61 55 N 5 01 E 5.44 SEIRSTADFJORDEN 64 37 N 11 22 E 7.16
RONGEVAER 60 49 N 4 47 E 5.5 SELSOYA 68 09 N 15 29 E 8.20
RONGEVAERSKALLEN 60 50 N 4 46 E 5.5 SELVAER 66 36 N 12 18 E 7.63
RONGOYNI 60 30 N 4 55 E 4.11 SELVBUKTA 63 37 N 9 43 E 6.68
RONGSUND 60 30 N 4 56 E 4.26 SENDINGANE 61 39 N 4 34 E 5.18
RONVIKSKJERANE 66 40 N 13 11 E 7.55 SHANNONBOEN 79 34 N 10 56 E 11.30
RORSUND 60 31 N 4 53 E 4.13 SHEMSHESTEN 62 58 N 7 11 E 6.24
RORVIK 64 52 N 11 14 E 7.21 SIGGJA 59 45 N 5 18 E 3.12
ROSANESET 68 24 N 17 12 E 8.27 SIGNEHAMNA 79 16 N 11 35 E 11.29
ROSENDAL 59 59 N 6 00 E 3.37 SILDA 70 20 N 21 45 E 9.5
ROSOK HAVFLUA 62 49 N 6 13 E 6.22 SILDSKJERET 67 48 N 14 44 E 8.16
ROSOYTAREN 65 52 N 12 22 E 7.43 SIMADALSFJORDEN 60 30 N 7 05 E 3.49
ROSSHOLMEN 62 36 N 6 03 E 6.7 SIRAGRUNNEN 58 15 N 6 20 E 1.33
ROSSOY 60 59 N 4 48 E 5.10 SIREVAG 58 30 N 5 48 E 1.49
ROST 67 31 N 12 07 E 8.4 SJOVEGAN 68 53 N 17 50 E 8.52
ROTVAER 68 22 N 15 56 E 8.10 SKAFTENES LIGHT 64 57 N 12 01 E 7.19
ROVDESKJERET LIGHT 62 11 N 5 45 E 5.52 SKAGSTADSUNDET 67 58 N 15 10 E 8.19
ROYKENESBOEN 68 51 N 16 39 E 8.33 SKALEVIK 60 24 N 5 14 E 4.21
ROYTINGKALVEN 60 52 N 4 47 E 5.8 SKALLEFLUENE 61 35 N 4 46 E 5.15
RUMPENNESET 63 11 N 8 35 E 6.50 SKARDHOLMEN 60 24 N 5 13 E 4.20
RUNDE 62 25 N 5 35 E 5.27 SKAREKINNA 61 42 N 4 51 E 5.22
RUNDOY LIGHT 62 25 N 5 36 E 5.29 SKARHOLMAN 67 39 N 14 28 E 8.14
RUTLETANGEN 61 05 N 5 10 E 5.32 SKARNESET 67 12 N 14 17 E 7.60
RUTLETANGEN LIGHT 61 05 N 5 10 E 5.10 SKARVBERGNES LIGHT 63 05 N 7 58 E 6.40
RYK YSEOYANE 77 47 N 25 12 E 11.50 SKARVHAUSBAEN 68 57 N 16 10 E 8.47
RYSSLANDSVIK 59 52 N 5 44 E 3.33 SKARVOY 60 30 N 4 50 E 4.12
RYSTRAUMEN 69 33 N 18 43 E 8.59 SKARVOYA 65 53 N 12 20 E 7.43
RYVARDEN 59 32 N 5 14 E 3.11 SKARVOYSUND 60 27 N 4 56 E 4.10
SKATEN LIGHT 61 52 N 5 13 E 5.45
SKIVEN 67 58 N 12 56 E 8.35
S SKJAHOLMEN 67 43 N 14 43 E 8.16
SKJEGGENE 62 16 N 5 20 E 5.28
SAEBOSUNDET 59 10 N 5 56 E 2.18 SKJELHOLMEN 63 54 N 9 51 E 7.5
SAEBUOY 63 30 N 8 15 E 6.56 SKJELJANGER LIGHT 60 37 N 4 57 E 4.25
SAEVAREID 60 11 N 5 45 E 3.55 SKJELJAVAG 60 22 N 5 40 E 3.59
SAGFJORDEN 67 38 N 15 16 E 8.15 SKJELVA 65 43 N 12 19 E 7.39
SAGFJORDEN 67 58 N 15 36 E 8.20 SKJERVHEIM 59 28 N 5 45 E 2.40
SAGFJORDEN 69 49 N 30 32 E 9.36 SKJOMGRUNNEN 68 25 N 17 13 E 8.25
SAGVAG 59 46 N 5 23 E 3.21 SKJORAFJORDEN 64 06 N 10 10 E 7.6
SAKRISSKJER 61 14 N 4 57 E 5.36 SKLINNA 65 12 N 11 00 E 7.25
SAKSA LIGHT 64 24 N 10 26 E 7.4 SKLINNA BANKEN 65 16 N 10 10 E 7.25
SAKSNES LIGHT 63 02 N 8 14 E 6.46 SKLINNA LIGHT 65 12 N 11 00 E 7.27
SALANGEN 68 53 N 17 34 E 8.51 SKLINNAFLESAN 65 08 N 10 59 E 7.27
SALANGSVERKET 68 55 N 17 44 E 8.52 SKOLMNESET 68 15 N 13 31 E 8.35
SALFJELLET 78 14 N 12 03 E 11.23 SKOLTAFJORDEN 60 02 N 5 00 E 3.23
SALHUSSTRAUMMEN 59 22 N 5 18 E 3.30 SKOLTEN 62 16 N 6 00 E 5.53
SALSBRUKET 64 48 N 11 52 E 7.18 SKOMVAER LIGHT 67 25 N 11 52 E 8.4
SALTOYA 63 33 N 10 54 E 6.72 SKONGSNES LIGHT 62 02 N 5 08 E 5.25
SALTRAK 58 03 N 6 49 E 1.18 SKORNESET T59 21 N6 58 E 2.35
SALTVIKHAMN LIGHT 63 47 N 11 00 E 6.75 SKORPA 62 20 N 5 30 E 5.28
SAMSKALLEN 66 22 N 11 58 E 7.63 SKORPA 66 02 N 12 33 E 7.44
SAND 59 29 N 6 15 E 2.35 SKORPEFLUENE 61 55 N 4 46 E 5.23
SANDHOLMEN 69 25 N 18 06 E 8.56 SKORPEGAVLEN 59 56 N 5 48 E 3.37
SANDNES 58 51 N 5 45 E 2.13 SKORPERAUVA 61 46 N 4 40 E 5.23
SANDNESSJOEN 66 01 N 12 38 E 7.45 SKORPESUND 59 55 N 5 38 E 3.33
SANDNESSUNDET 69 41 N 18 54 E 8.63 SKOTAMEDGRUNN 58 48 N 5 26 E 1.52
SANDOY LIGHT 61 18 N 4 36 E 5.13 SKRAEDDEREN 58 28 N 5 51 E 1.48
SANDOYA 70 02 N 18 32 E 9.3 SKROVA 68 10 N 14 41 E 8.8
SANDOYA LIGHT 61 33 N 4 46 E 5.34 SKROVA HAVN 68 10 N 14 40 E 8.8
SANDOYNI 60 27 N 4 53 E 4.9 SKROVKJOSEN 68 15 N 16 19 E 8.22
SANDOYTAREN 65 23 N 12 00 E 7.36 SKUDENESFJORDEN 59 00 N 5 15 E 2.6
SANDSFJORDEN 59 21 N 6 00 E 2.34 SKUDENESHAVN 59 09 N 5 16 E 2.8
SANDSFJORDEN 62 15 N 5 31 E 5.58 SKULEN 62 41 N 6 19 E 6.11
SANDSHAMN LIGHT 62 15 N 5 30 E 5.58 SLAADBUKTA 79 42 N 11 15 E 11.34
SANDSKJER 70 05 N 29 33 E 9.31 SLEIPNER GAS FIELD 58 21 N 1 45 E 1.2
SANDSORA LIGHT 63 45 N 11 03 E 6.74 SLETRINGEN LIGHT 63 40 N 8 16 E 6.53
SANDSOY 62 15 N 5 26 E 5.28 SLETTEBAKKEN LIGHT 68 31 N 16 58 E 8.26
SANDVAER 65 21 N 11 58 E 7.36 SLETTNES LIGHT 71 05 N 28 14 E 9.21
SANDVAERODTAREN 65 22 N 12 03 E 7.32 SLETTNESET 69 23 N 18 06 E 8.56
SANDVEHAMN 59 11 N 5 11 E 3.5 SLOVAER 67 36 N 14 39 E 8.14
SANDVERKEN 66 39 N 13 06 E 7.55 SMASKJAER 59 17 N 5 57 E 2.24
SANNA 66 30 N 12 03 E 7.46 SMEERENBURGFJORDEN 79 43 N 11 06 E 11.31
SARNESFJORDEN 70 58 N 25 45 E 9.16 SMITSKJAERLEIEN 68 20 N 15 25 E 8.11
SARSTANGEN 78 44 N 11 29 E 11.24 SMORSUNDNES 59 30 N 5 14 E 3.9
SASSENFJORDEN 78 23 N 16 30 E 11.20 SNERTHOLMEN LIGHT 65 43 N 12 28 E 7.39
SAUDA 59 39 N 6 21 E 2.39 SOGNDALSSTRANDA 58 19 N 6 18 E 1.36
SAUDAFJORDEN 59 33 N 6 17 E 2.38 SOGNEUKSEN 60 57 N 4 46 E 5.8

Pub. 182
 Index—Gazetteer 293

Position Sec. Position Sec.

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
SOLAVIKI 58 53 N 5 34 E 2.4 STORE ROGLA 68 44 N 16 39 E 8.33
SOLBERGFJORDEN 59 15 N 5 55 E 2.30 STORE SORTNA 63 05 N 7 24 E 6.28
SOLBERGFJORDEN 69 08 N 17 38 E 8.53 STORE SOTRA 60 20 N 5 05 E 4.6
SOLBJORG 60 18 N 5 37 E 3.59 STORE STEINEN 66 00 N 12 01 E 7.30
SOLEMSUNDET 63 12 N 8 11 E 6.49 STORE SVARTOKSEN 67 16 N 14 14 E 7.67
SOLOYET 62 57 N 8 26 E 6.47 STORE VERNOY 60 05 N 5 26 E 3.53
SONDRE SOROYHOLME 65 55 N 12 22 E 7.44 STOREGRUNNEN 63 30 N 10 26 E 6.71
SONDREGAPET 58 26 N 6 00 E 1.42 STORENESET 63 30 N 5 20 E 6.51
SONOYOSEN 59 35 N 5 07 E 3.14 STORENESET 63 45 N 5 20 E 6.51
SORAGAPET 58 26 N 6 00 E 1.42 STORFJELLET 67 28 N 11 56 E 8.4
SORAUSTKAPP 71 01 N 8 00 W 10.7 STORFJORDEN 78 00 N 20 00 E 11.48
SORE GUTVIK LIGHT 65 05 N 11 49 E 7.31 STORGRUNDEN 65 09 N 11 07 E 7.28
SORE RAMNEN 63 08 N 7 24 E 6.28 STORHOLMANE 62 39 N 5 56 E 6.6
SOREIDSVIK 60 03 N 5 28 E 3.54 STORHOLMEN 61 01 N 4 47 E 5.9
SORFJORDEN 60 24 N 6 42 E 3.50 STORHOLMEN 62 39 N 5 56 E 6.6
SORFJORDEN 60 31 N 5 22 E 4.32 STORHOLMEN 68 43 N 16 46 E 8.33
SORFJORDSKALLEN 60 32 N 5 19 E 4.32 STORHOLMEN LIGHT 62 39 N 5 56 E 6.22
SORFOLLA 67 32 N 15 16 E 8.15 STORMBUKTA 76 41 N 16 18 E 11.8
SORGATTET 79 39 N 11 00 E 11.33 STORNESORA LIGHT 63 59 N 11 18 E 6.77
SORGFJORDEN 79 54 N 16 50 E 11.44 STORSUNDET 59 57 N 5 53 E 3.37
SORGRUNNEN 63 33 N 8 00 E 6.56 STORTAREN 65 08 N 11 01 E 7.28
SORHAUGOY 59 25 N 5 14 E 3.9 STORTAREN 65 09 N 11 50 E 7.29
SORHUNDEN 64 39 N 10 53 E 7.20 STORVIKA 67 31 N 15 36 E 8.15
SORKAPP 70 50 N 8 59 W 10.3 STOTT 66 55 N 13 28 E 7.58
SORKAPP LAND 76 50 N 16 25 E 11.8 STOTT LIGHT 66 57 N 13 28 E 7.58
SORNES 65 58 N 12 52 E 7.41 STOTTVAER 66 56 N 13 20 E 7.64
SORSKJOMEN 68 12 N 17 19 E 8.27 STOVHOLME 60 03 N 5 06 E 3.24
SORSUNDET 63 06 N 7 44 E 6.33 STOVIKA 58 15 N 6 31 E 1.32
SORTLAND 68 42 N 15 25 E 8.40 STRANDA 62 18 N 6 57 E 5.56
SORTLANDSUNDET 68 42 N 15 26 E 8.39 STRANDANES LIGHT 62 59 N 7 42 E 6.40
SORVAER 70 38 N 21 59 E 9.13 STRANDSFJORDEN 58 13 N 6 39 E 1.26
SPANNHOLMANE 59 17 N 4 51 E 3.4 STRANDVIK 60 10 N 5 41 E 3.55
SPILDEROYA 69 25 N 18 29 E 8.60 STRAUMEN 68 26 N 17 42 E 8.29
SPINDSFJORDEN 58 05 N 6 56 E 1.10 STRAUMSUNDI 60 35 N 4 51 E 4.14
SPITSBERGEN BANK 75 00 N 21 00 E 11.2 STROMOYA 64 52 N 11 16 E 7.22
SPRANGBUKT 58 27 N 5 56 E 1.45 STUSVIK 58 00 N 7 02 E 1.6
SPRINGEN LIGHT 65 55 N 12 13 E 7.30 SUFFOLKPYNTEN 76 52 N 15 34 E 11.8
STABBEN 63 08 N 7 16 E 6.28 SULA LIGHT 63 51 N 8 27 E 6.58
STABBEN LIGHT 61 36 N 4 57 E 5.42 SULA LIGHT 63 51 N 8 28 E 6.53
STABSAET 58 24 N 5 59 E 1.43 SUNDSODDEN LIGHT 67 05 N 14 04 E 7.60
STAFLUA 62 54 N 6 51 E 6.23 SUNNDALSORA 62 41 N 8 33 E 6.44
STAKNES LIGHT 63 01 N 8 21 E 6.46 SURVIKSUNDET 64 33 N 11 24 E 7.14
STALLEN 60 17 N 4 57 E 4.6 SVAHOLMANE 58 23 N 6 03 E 1.41
STAMSUND 68 07 N 13 51 E 8.6 SVANEFLU 58 03 N 6 45 E 1.21
STANGHOLMGALTEN 64 56 N 11 28 E 7.24 SVARTESKJAER 62 11 N 5 21 E 5.50
STANGNESODDEN 68 48 N 16 37 E 8.33 SVARTSKJERET 63 18 N 8 18 E 6.63
STATFJORDEN OIL FIELD 61 15 N 1 51 E 5.2 SVEABUKTA 77 52 N 16 45 E 11.12
STATPIPE PLATFORM NO. 1 58 11 N 2 28 E 1.2 SVEFJORDEN 64 23 N 10 30 E 7.6
STATTHAVET 62 12 N 5 06 E 5.27 SVEHOLMEN LIGHT 63 17 N 8 29 E 6.50
STATTLANDET 62 12 N 5 08 E 5.27 SVEIO BROADCASTING STATION 59 37 N 5 19 E 3.11
STAVANGER 58 59 N 5 45 E 2.12 SVELEDEN 68 11 N 14 42 E 8.9
STAVENES LIGHT 61 25 N 4 59 E 5.40 SVELEIA 68 11 N 14 42 E 8.9
STAVENES LIGHT 63 07 N 7 40 E 6.29 SVELLINGEN 68 18 N 15 18 E 8.11
STAVSUNDET 67 01 N 13 56 E 7.60 SVENSSKJERET 66 06 N 12 41 E 7.49
STEET 63 00 N 7 48 E 6.40 SVERTINGANE 58 15 N 6 30 E 1.32
STEGLEHOLME 60 09 N 5 41 E 3.54 SVESKALLEN 64 33 N 10 15 E 7.8
STEINAN 65 36 N 11 17 E 7.25 SVINEFLU 61 20 N 4 33 E 5.14
STEINHOLMEN LIGHT 63 17 N 8 20 E 6.63 SVINOY 62 20 N 5 16 E 5.28
STEINKJER 64 01 N 11 30 E 6.79 SVINOYA 68 03 N 13 33 E 8.5
STEINODDEN 58 07 N 6 33 E 1.23 SVINVAER 66 45 N 13 10 E 7.55
STEINSFLESA 65 09 N 11 31 E 7.29 SVOLVAER 68 14 N 14 35 E 8.9
STEINSHOLMEN 67 44 N 14 43 E 8.16 SYKKYLVFJORDEN 62 24 N 6 33 E 5.56
STJERNDALEN 68 02 N 13 14 E 8.5 SYLEN 74 22 N 19 02 E 11.6
STJERNSUND 70 14 N 22 44 E 9.9 SYNESFJELLET 62 33 N 6 02 E 6.6
STOKHOLMEN 66 29 N 12 21 E 7.63
STOKKGRUNNEN 64 39 N 11 00 E 7.17
STOKKMARKNES 68 34 N 14 55 E 8.43 T
STOKKSUND 59 45 N 5 23 E 3.20
STOLSFJORDEN 58 14 N 6 41 E 1.27 TA 59 14 N 5 27 E 2.19
STONGI 60 22 N 5 10 E 4.19 TAFJORDEN 62 14 N 7 25 E 5.58
STORANESET 59 45 N 5 08 E 3.16 TAKNESET 63 09 N 8 20 E 6.49
STORDALSVIKA 62 23 N 6 58 E 5.56 TALGJEFJORDEN 59 08 N 5 49 E 2.25
STORE BERGSHOLME 58 56 N 6 07 E 2.31 TALSGRUNNANE 63 10 N 7 46 E 6.36
STORE GRINDOY 69 38 N 18 51 E 8.63 TALVIK 70 03 N 22 58 E 9.12
STORE HISKJO 59 44 N 5 09 E 3.15 TAMBAR OIL FIELD 56 58 N 2 57 E 1.2
STORE KLAKKSOY 59 50 N 5 16 E 3.20 TANAFJORDEN 70 45 N 28 25 E 9.22
STORE KOPPEREN 63 48 N 8 44 E 6.52 TANGEFLU 59 56 N 5 44 E 3.35
STORE KVITHOLME 65 01 N 11 36 E 7.29 TANNOYA 68 09 N 15 48 E 8.20
STORE LAGMANSVIKA 67 55 N 15 53 E 8.20 TARMEVIKODDEN 58 13 N 6 41 E 1.24
STORE MARSTEIN 60 08 N 5 01 E 4.3 TARVFJORDEN 63 46 N 9 25 E 7.5
STORE OIL TERMINAL 60 37 N 4 52 E 4.24 TAU 59 04 N 5 55 E 2.17
STORE OTERHOLMEN 64 58 N 11 32 E 7.24 TAUTRA LIGHT 63 35 N 10 37 E 6.73

Pub. 182
294 Index—Gazetteer
Position Sec. Position Sec.
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
TAUTREFLUA 62 41 N 6 56 E 6.16 VAEROY 61 18 N 4 44 E 5.13
TEINEGRUNNEN 61 24 N 4 29 E 5.14 VAEROY 67 40 N 12 40 E 8.4
TEISTEN 66 22 N 12 56 E 7.53 VAGEN 58 58 N 5 44 E 2.12
TEKSLO 60 09 N 5 01 E 4.4 VAGEN 62 13 N 5 39 E 5.58
TELAVAG 60 15 N 4 59 E 4.7 VAGENE 58 20 N 6 13 E 1.39
TEMPLEFJORDEN 78 24 N 17 00 E 11.20 VAIGATTOYANE 79 20 N 20 00 E 11.47
TENNHOLME 59 17 N 5 52 E 2.30 VAKSDAL 60 29 N 5 44 E 4.32
TENNHOLMEN 67 18 N 13 30 E 7.65 VALLABAANE 62 28 N 5 41 E 5.59
TENNHOLMEN LIGHT 67 18 N 13 30 E 8.12 VALLOYGALTEN 65 57 N 12 24 E 7.43
TENNSKJERHOLMEN 69 29 N 18 19 E 8.60 VALSHOLMSKJAER LIGHT 63 49 N 9 36 E 7.5
TERNEHAUG 61 35 N 4 41 E 5.15 VALSOYA 63 52 N 9 44 E 7.2
TERNEHOLMEN 58 14 N 6 41 E 1.27 VARANGERFJORDEN 70 00 N 30 00 E 9.28
TERNESKJERFLU LIGHT 62 11 N 5 24 E 5.50 VARDHOLMEN 60 46 N 4 52 E 4.22
TERNHOLMEN LIGHT 65 00 N 11 07 E 7.26 VARDO 70 22 N 31 07 E 9.26
TERNINGEN LIGHT 63 30 N 9 03 E 6.65 VARGSUND 70 22 N 23 30 E 9.12
TERNINGEN LIGHT 64 13 N 10 15 E 7.3 VARNES 58 11 N 6 38 E 1.23
TERNNESET 60 14 N 4 59 E 4.6 VASKINNKVIGA 68 53 N 16 26 E 8.48
TEROY 58 03 N 6 56 E 1.8 VATLESTRAUMEN 60 19 N 5 12 E 4.18
THAMSHAMN 63 19 N 9 53 E 6.69 VATNEMOHOLMENE 58 29 N 5 49 E 1.49
TINGVOLLVAGEN 62 54 N 8 11 E 6.43 VEANESET 60 03 N 5 29 E 3.53
TISNES 69 36 N 18 50 E 8.59 VEAVAGEN 59 18 N 5 13 E 3.7
TJELDODDEN 68 23 N 16 08 E 8.24 VEINESBOTN 70 05 N 28 47 E 9.32
TJELDSUNDET 68 31 N 16 10 E 8.32 VELFJORDEN 65 35 N 12 21 E 7.38
TJOTTA 65 50 N 12 26 E 7.40 VEMMELSVIKHOLMEN 61 54 N 5 10 E 5.50
TJUVAHOLMEN 60 22 N 6 16 E 3.44 VENNESODDEN LIGHT 63 53 N 11 03 E 6.76
TJUVHOLMEN 63 04 N 7 42 E 6.39 VERDAL HAVN 63 47 N 11 27 E 6.75
TODALSFJORDEN LIGHT 62 50 N 8 38 E 6.47 VESTERALSFJORDEN 68 35 N 14 32 E 8.42
TOFTEVAG 60 29 N 4 56 E 4.12 VESTERHOLMEN 63 43 N 11 00 E 6.73
TOMMELPYNTEN 79 33 N 18 42 E 11.45 VESTKLEPPEN 63 18 N 7 21 E 6.30
TOPPSUNDET 68 53 N 16 23 E 8.48 VESTPYNTEN 78 15 N 15 27 E 11.17
TORSFLU 62 04 N 4 57 E 5.26 VESTRE BRADSTEINEN 58 02 N 6 52 E 1.10
TORSKJAER LIGHT 63 46 N 9 28 E 7.5 VETEGJOGRASKJAER LIGHT 60 49 N 4 45 E 5.8
TORSVAG LIGHT 70 15 N 19 30 E 9.4 VETEN 60 01 N 5 15 E 3.22
TORVIKNESET 62 57 N 8 26 E 6.48 VETRUNGANE 61 56 N 4 49 E 5.23
TOVIK 68 41 N 16 53 E 8.49 VEVLAN 65 01 N 11 19 E 7.29
TOVIKHOLMEN LIGHT 62 59 N 7 21 E 6.38 VIKAFJORDEN 59 38 N 5 11 E 3.14
TRAENA 66 25 N 12 00 E 7.63 VIKAHOLMEN LIGHT 63 06 N 7 46 E 6.35
TRAETHOLMEN 65 56 N 12 12 E 7.30 VIKANESET 63 12 N 8 36 E 6.50
TRANOY 68 11 N 15 40 E 8.20 VIKANESFLU LIGHT 62 28 N 6 07 E 5.61
TRANOYFJORDEN 69 04 N 17 19 E 8.52 VIKEVAG 59 06 N 5 42 E 2.18
TROLL GAS FIELD 60 44 N 3 33 E 4.2 VIKHOLMEN 65 57 N 12 26 E 7.44
TROMSO 69 39 N 18 57 E 8.62 VIKINGEN LIGHT 66 32 N 12 58 E 7.54
TROMSOYA 69 40 N 18 57 E 8.60 VIKINGNESET 60 51 N 4 56 E 5.8
TRONDEN 62 19 N 5 38 E 5.60 VIKNA 64 55 N 11 00 E 7.26
TRONDHEIM 63 26 N 10 24 E 6.70 VIKSOY 60 10 N 5 03 E 4.4
TROSNAVAG 59 13 N 5 23 E 3.28 VIKUM 61 10 N 5 43 E 5.33
TROYTAROSEN 59 44 N 5 13 E 3.16 VIKVAGEN 65 18 N 12 07 E 7.33
TUNGENES 59 02 N 5 35 E 2.3 VILNESFJORDEN LIGHT 61 18 N 5 04 E 5.37
TUNSOY 58 59 N 5 49 E 2.11 VINDAFJORDEN 59 20 N 5 56 E 2.40
TUROY 60 27 N 4 55 E 4.10 VINDNESKARVEN 60 27 N 5 00 E 4.6
TUSSEN 61 23 N 4 50 E 5.39 VINGLEIA LIGHT 63 55 N 8 41 E 6.53
TYRHAUG LIGHT 63 19 N 8 14 E 6.62 VOLDSFJORDEN 62 12 N 5 56 E 5.53
TYSFJORDEN 68 06 N 16 15 E 8.21 VOLONGOYA 63 08 N 8 09 E 6.45
TYSNESVIK 60 03 N 5 32 E 3.53 VORDNESHOLMEN 59 45 N 5 13 E 3.16
TYSSEDAL 60 07 N 6 34 E 3.51 VOTLOY 60 28 N 5 28 E 4.32
TYSSEFJORDEN 59 21 N 6 14 E 2.37

W
U
WAHLENBERGFJORDEN 79 40 N 20 00 E 11.46
ULA GAS FIELD 57 06 N 2 51 E 1.2 WALDENOYA 80 37 N 19 46 E 11.41
ULLENSVANG 60 19 N 6 39 E 3.51 WIJDEFJORDEN 79 22 N 15 37 E 11.38
ULLEROYSUND 58 03 N 6 55 E 1.11 WILHELMOYA 79 03 N 20 24 E 11.45
ULLSFJORDEN 69 50 N 19 52 E 9.10 WOODFJORDEN 79 40 N 13 58 E 11.37
ULVEN LIGHT 61 58 N 5 09 E 5.25
URBERGET 68 04 N 13 43 E 8.6
URTER 59 22 N 5 02 E 3.4 Y
USKEDAL 59 56 N 5 52 E 3.37
UTGRUNNEN 67 42 N 14 17 E 8.3 YLVINGEN 65 36 N 12 10 E 7.37
UTNE 60 26 N 6 37 E 3.46 YSTESTEINEN 58 01 N 6 53 E 1.10
UTNEFJORDEN 60 26 N 6 38 E 3.46 YTRE ALVIK 60 25 N 6 23 E 3.45
UTOYBAEN 66 14 N 12 36 E 7.49 YTRE ASAROY 59 25 N 6 08 E 2.34
UTSIRA 59 18 N 4 53 E 3.4 YTRE KIBERG 70 17 N 31 00 E 9.28
UTSKARPEN 66 15 N 13 35 E 7.51 YTRE LANGHOLMEN LIGHT 63 11 N 7 52 E 6.31
UTTORGFLESSA LIGHT 65 26 N 11 57 E 7.36 YTRE LANGOYFLUI 60 47 N 4 49 E 5.8
UTVAER LIGHT 61 02 N 4 31 E 5.11 YTRE LOGRUNNEN 64 01 N 11 24 E 6.78
YTRE POLLEN 58 11 N 6 42 E 1.25
YTRE SAMLAFJORDEN 60 21 N 6 18 E 3.43
V YTRE SKALLEN 67 28 N 14 25 E 8.12
YTRE SMASTRAUMNESET 69 48 N 30 41 E 9.37
VABERGET 63 31 N 10 46 E 6.72 YTREHOLMEN 66 01 N 11 42 E 7.25
VADSO 70 04 N 29 44 E 9.30 YTREHOLMEN LIGHT 66 01 N 11 42 E 7.1

Pub. 182
 Index—Gazetteer 295

Position Sec. Position Sec.

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
YTSTE TAREN 61 17 N 4 55 E 5.36 YTTERTUVEN 67 50 N 12 52 E 8.4
YTSTEBOEN 62 09 N 5 04 E 5.26
YTSTEFLU 62 12 N 5 27 E 5.51
YTTERHOLMEN 66 01 N 11 42 E 7.25 Z
YTTEROYANE 61 35 N 4 41 E 5.15
YTTEROYANE LIGHT 61 35 N 4 41 E 5.17 ZORGDRAGERFJORDEN 80 23 N 22 40 E 11.42

Pub. 182